AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Khuddakanikāye

Khuddakanikāya

Vimānavatthu-aṭṭhakathā

Vimānavatthu-aṭṭhakathā

Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Talk

nāthaṃ,ñeyyasāgarapāraguṃ;

The Protector, who has crossed to the further shore of the ocean of knowledge; I venerate Him, whose teaching is profound, deep, varied, and wise.

Vijjācaraṇasampannā, yena niyyanti lokato;

By whom, endowed with knowledge and conduct, beings are led out of the world; the Dhamma, perfectly revered by the truly enlightened Buddha.

Sīlādiguṇasampanno, ṭhito maggaphalesu yo;

Who is endowed with virtues beginning with morality, established in the paths and fruits; the noble Saṅgha, that unsurpassed field of merit.

Vandanājanitaṃ puññaṃ, iti yaṃ ratanattaye;

By the merit generated from veneration, thus in the Triple Gem;
May I, having overcome obstacles everywhere, by its power.

Devatāhi kataṃ puññaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ purimajātisu;

The merit done by deities, whatever it may be in previous lives;
By the difference in the attainment of the fruits such as their abodes.

Pucchāvasena yā tāsaṃ, vissajjanavasena ca;

The teaching that proceeds by way of questions from them, and by way of answers;
Manifesting the results of actions.

Vimānavatthuicceva, nāmena vasino pure;

Vimānavatthu indeed, by this name, in the past by the wise ones;
In the Khuddaka Nikāya, was compiled by the great sages.

Tassāhamavalambitvā, porāṇaṭṭhakathānayaṃ;

Relying on that, the method of the ancient commentary;
There, there, revealing the causes, especially.

Suvisuddhaṃ asaṃkiṇṇaṃ, nipuṇatthavinicchayaṃ;

Very pure, unmixed, precise decision of meaning;
Not violating the tradition of those residing at the Mahāvihāra.

Yathābalaṃ karissāmi, atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ subhaṃ;

According to my ability, I will make a beautiful explanation of the meaning;
Listen carefully to that which I speak respectfully, O virtuous ones.

vimānānīti visiṭṭhamānāni devatānaṃ kīḷānivāsaṭṭhānāni. Tāni hi tāsaṃ sucaritakammānubhāvanibbattāni yojanikadviyojanikādipamāṇavisesayuttatāya, nānāratanasamujjalāni vicittavaṇṇasaṇṭhānāni sobhātisayayogena visesato mānanīyatāya ca ‘‘vimānānī’’ti vuccanti. Vimānānaṃ vatthu kāraṇaṃ etissātivimānavatthu,‘‘pīṭhaṃ te sovaṇṇamaya’’ntiādinayappavattā desanā. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ tāsaṃ devatānaṃ rūpabhogaparivārādisampattiyo taṃnibbattakakammañca nissāya imissā desanāya pavattattā. Vipākamukhena vā kammantaramānassa kāraṇabhāvatovimānavatthūti veditabbaṃ.

Vimānāni means distinguished dwellings, places of play and residence for the deities. These, born from the power of their virtuous deeds, are called "vimānāni" because they are endowed with specific dimensions, such as one or two yojanas, shine with various jewels, have diverse colors and shapes, and are especially esteemed due to their exceeding beauty. Vimānavatthu means the cause, the basis of the vimānas, the teaching that proceeds in the manner of, "Your seat is made of gold," etc. This is just an example, because this teaching proceeds based on the wealth of form, enjoyment, retinue, etc., of those deities, and the actions that produced them. Or, Vimānavatthu should be understood as the cause, because of the aspect of kammantaramāna (previous action) through the door of result.

Tayidaṃ kena bhāsitaṃ, kattha bhāsitaṃ, kadā bhāsitaṃ, kasmā ca bhāsitanti? Vuccate – idañhi vimānavatthu duvidhena pavattaṃ – pucchāvasena vissajjanavasena ca. Tattha vissajjanagāthā tāhi tāhi devatāhi bhāsitā, pucchāgāthā pana kāci bhagavatā bhāsitā, kāci sakkādīhi, kāci sāvakehi therehi. Tatthāpi yebhuyyena yo so kappānaṃ satasahassādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ buddhassa bhagavato aggasāvakabhāvāya puññañāṇasambhāre sambharanto anukkamena sāvakapāramiyo pūretvā, chaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidādiguṇavisesaparivārassa, sakalassa sāvakapāramiñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto dutiye aggasāvakaṭṭhāne ṭhito iddhimantesu ca bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapito āyasmā mahāmoggallāno, tena bhāsitā.

Now, by whom was this spoken, where was it spoken, when was it spoken, and why was it spoken? It is said – this Vimānavatthu proceeds in two ways – by way of questioning and by way of answering. Among them, the verses of answering were spoken by those various deities, but some of the verses of questioning were spoken by the Blessed One, some by Sakka and others, some by the disciples, the elders. Among those too, mostly by the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, who, for more than a hundred thousand aeons, accumulating the requisites of merit and wisdom for the state of chief disciple of the Buddha, gradually completing the pāramīs of a disciple, endowed with special qualities such as the six abhiññās and the four paṭisambhidās, having reached the pinnacle of all knowledge of a disciple's pāramīs, stood in the position of the second chief disciple, and was placed by the Blessed One at the foremost among those with psychic power, was this spoken.

Bhāsantena ca paṭhamaṃ tāva lokahitāya devacārikaṃ carantena devaloke devatānaṃ pucchāvasena puna tato manussalokaṃ āgantvā manussānaṃ puññaphalassa paccakkhakaraṇatthaṃ pucchaṃ vissajjanañca ekajjhaṃ katvā bhagavato pavedetvā bhikkhūnaṃ bhāsitā, sakkena pucchāvasena, devatāhi tassa vissajjanavasena bhāsitāpi mahāmoggallānattherassa bhāsitā eva. Evaṃ bhagavatā therehi ca devatāhi ca pucchāvasena, devatāhi tassā vissajjanavasena ca tattha tattha bhāsitā pacchā dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyantehi dhammasaṅgāhakehi ekato katvā ‘‘vimānavatthu’’icceva saṅgahaṃ āropitā. Ayaṃ tāvettha ‘‘kena bhāsita’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ saṅkhepato sādhāraṇato ca vissajjanā.

And while speaking, first, wandering for the welfare of the world, asking the deities in the deva-world, and then coming back to the human world, having put together the question and answer in order to make the result of merit manifest to humans, and having reported it to the Blessed One, it was spoken to the monks; by Sakka by way of questioning, by the deities by way of answering, it was indeed spoken by the Elder Mahāmoggallāna. Thus, spoken there and there by the Blessed One, by the elders, and by the deities by way of questioning, and by the deities by way of answering, afterwards, those who compiled the Dhamma, compiling the Dhamma and the Vinaya, having put it together, established the collection as "Vimānavatthu." This, in brief, is the general answer to the words "by whom was it spoken," etc.

Vitthārato pana ‘‘kena bhāsita’’nti padassa anomadassissa bhagavato pādamūle katapaṇidhānato paṭṭhāya mahātherassa āgamanīyapaṭipadā kathetabbā, sā pana āgamaṭṭhakathāsu tattha tattha vitthāritāti tattha āgatanayeneva veditabbā. Asādhāraṇato ‘‘kattha bhāsita’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vissajjanā tassa tassa vimānassa atthavaṇṇanānayeneva āgamissati.

But in detail, for the word "by whom was it spoken," the practice leading to the coming of the great elder, starting from making the vow at the feet of the Blessed One Anomadassi, should be told; but that is detailed there and there in the Agama commentaries, and should be understood according to the method that has come there. The answers to the words "where was it spoken," etc., in particular, will come in the manner of the explanation of the meaning of that particular vimāna.

Apare pana bhaṇanti – ekadivasaṃ āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘etarahi kho manussā asatipi vatthusampattiyā khettasampattiyā attano ca cittapasādasampattiyā tāni tāni puññāni katvā devaloke nibbattā uḷārasampattiṃ paccanubhonti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ devacārikaṃ caranto tā devatā kāyasakkhiṃ katvā tāhi yathūpacitaṃ puññaṃ yathādhigatañca puññaphalaṃ kathāpetvā tamatthaṃ bhagavato āroceyyaṃ. Evaṃ me satthā gaganatale puṇṇacandaṃ uṭṭhāpento viya manussānaṃ kammaphalaṃ paccakkhato dassento appakānampi kārānaṃ āyatanagatāya saddhāya vasena uḷāraphalataṃ vibhāvento taṃ taṃ vimānavatthuṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā mahatiṃ dhammadesanaṃ pavattessati, sā hoti bahujanassa atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussāna’’nti. So āsanā vuṭṭhahitvā rattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā aparaṃ rattadupaṭṭaṃ ekaṃsaṃ katvā samantato jātihiṅgulikadhārā vijjulatā viya sañjhāpabhānurañjito viya ca jaṅgamo añjanagirisikharo, bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisinno attano adhippāyaṃ ārocetvā bhagavatā anuññāto uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā, tato vuṭṭhāya iddhibalena taṅkhaṇaññeva tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gantvā tattha tattha tāhi tāhi devatāhi yathūpacitaṃ puññakammaṃ pucchi, tassa tā kathesuṃ. Tato manussalokaṃ āgantvā taṃ sabbaṃ tattha pavattitaniyāmeneva bhagavato ārocesi, taṃ samanuñño satthā ahosi. Iccetaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesīti.

But others say – one day, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, being alone in seclusion, this thought arose in his mind, "Now, although humans do not have wealth of objects, or wealth of fields, or wealth of their own mental serenity, having done those various meritorious deeds, they are reborn in the deva-world, experiencing great fortune, I wonder if I, wandering on a deva-pilgrimage, having made those deities witnesses, having them tell about the merit they have accumulated and the fruit of merit they have attained, and having reported that matter to the Blessed One, in this way, my teacher, like raising the full moon in the sky, showing the fruit of action manifestly to humans, revealing the greatness of the fruit because of faith that has entered the bases even for small actions, will cause a great Dhamma talk to proceed, making that particular Vimānavatthu the origin, which will be for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of many, gods and humans." He, rising from his seat, having put on a red upper robe, having placed another red upper robe over one shoulder, like a stream of vermillion of spontaneous origin on all sides, like lightning streaks, and like a moving peak of anjana mountain, tinged with the light of dusk, approached the Blessed One, and having paid homage, sat down on one side, having announced his intention, and being permitted by the Blessed One, having risen from his seat, having paid homage to the Blessed One, having circumambulated him, having attained the fourth jhāna, the basis of the superknowledges, and rising from that, by the power of iddhi, at that very moment, having gone to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, there, asked those various deities about the meritorious deeds they had accumulated, they told him. Then, having come to the human world, he reported all that to the Blessed One in the same order as it had occurred there, the Teacher approved of it. Having made this the origin, he taught the Dhamma in detail to the assembled audience.

Taṃ panetaṃ vimānavatthu vinayapiṭakaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakanti tīsu piṭakesu suttantapiṭakapariyāpannaṃ, dīghanikāyo majjhimanikāyo saṃyuttanikāyo aṅguttaranikāyo khuddakanikāyoti pañcasu nikāyesu khuddakanikāyapariyāpannaṃ, suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ jātakaṃ abbhutadhammaṃ vedallanti navasu sāsanaṅgesu gāthāsaṅgahaṃ.

Now, this Vimānavatthu, in the three Piṭakas, the Vinaya Piṭaka, the Suttanta Piṭaka, the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, is included in the Suttanta Piṭaka; in the five Nikāyas, the Dīgha Nikāya, the Majjhima Nikāya, the Saṃyutta Nikāya, the Aṅguttara Nikāya, the Khuddaka Nikāya, it is included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; in the nine limbs of the teaching, sutta, geyya, veyyākaraṇa, gāthā, udāna, itivuttaka, jātaka, abbhutadhamma, vedalla, it is a collection of gāthās.

‘‘Dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto;

"I received eighty-two thousand from the Buddha, two thousand from the bhikkhus;
Eighty-four thousand are the teachings that I propagate," (theragā. 1027) –

‘‘pīṭhaṃ te sovaṇṇamaya’’nti gāthā ādi.

The gāthā "Your seat is made of gold" etc. [is the beginning].

1. Itthivimānaṃ

1. Itthivimāna

1. Pīṭhavaggo

1. Pīṭhavagga

1. Paṭhamapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā

Tattha paṭhamavatthussa ayaṃ aṭṭhuppatti – bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ viharante jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme raññā pasenadinā kosalena buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa sattāhaṃ asadisadāne pavattite tadanurūpena anāthapiṇḍikena mahāseṭṭhinā tayo divase, tathā visākhāya mahāupāsikāya mahādāne dinne asadisadānassa pavatti sakalajambudīpe pākaṭā ahosi. Atha mahājano tattha tattha kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi ‘‘kiṃ nu kho evaṃ uḷāravibhavapariccāgeneva dānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ bhavissati, udāhu attano vibhavānurūpapariccāgenāpī’’ti. Bhikkhū taṃ kathaṃ sutvā bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, deyyadhammasampattiyāva dānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ bhavissati, atha kho cittapasādasampattiyā ca khettasampattiyā ca, tasmā kuṇḍakamuṭṭhimattampi pilotikāmattampi tiṇapaṇṇasanthāramattampi pūtimuttaharītakamattampi vippasannena cetasā dakkhiṇeyyapuggale patiṭṭhāpitaṃ, tampi mahapphalataraṃ bhavissati mahājutikaṃ mahāvipphāra’’nti āha. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sakkena devānamindena –

Herein, this is the origin story of the first vatthu: While the Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, in the Jeta Grove, in Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery, when King Pasenadi of Kosala had a peerless offering (asadisadāna) going on for a week to the Saṅgha of monks with the Buddha at its head, and similarly, when the great merchant Anāthapiṇḍika had a great offering going on for three days, and when Visākhā, the great female lay follower, had a great offering going on, the occurrence of the peerless offering became known throughout Jambudīpa. Then the great multitude started a discussion here and there, "Will giving with such an extravagant expenditure of wealth be more fruitful, or even giving with an expenditure in accordance with one's wealth?" The monks, having heard that discussion, reported it to the Blessed One. The Blessed One said, "No, monks, giving will not be more fruitful just because of the wealth of the gift, but rather because of the wealth of mental serenity and the wealth of the field, therefore, even a handful of husks, or the amount of rags, or the amount of a support of grass and leaves, or the amount of stale mustard greens, when established in a worthy individual with a serene mind, that too will be more fruitful, of great radiance, of great expansion." Thus, it was said by Sakka, the lord of the devas –

‘‘Natthi citte pasannamhi, appikā nāma dakkhiṇā;

"There is no small gift, when the mind is serene;
To the Tathāgata, or the fully enlightened Buddha, or to his disciple." (vi. va. 804);

Sā panesā kathā sakalajambudīpe vitthārikā ahosi. Manussā samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṃ yathāvibhavaṃ dānāni denti, gehaṅgaṇe pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, dvārakoṭṭhakesu āsanāni ṭhapenti. Tena ca samayena aññataro piṇḍapātacāriko thero pāsādikena abhikkantena paṭikkantena ālokitena vilokitena samiñjitena pasāritena okkhittacakkhu iriyāpathasampanno piṇḍāya caranto upakaṭṭhe kāle aññataraṃ gehaṃ sampāpuṇi. Tatthekā kuladhītā saddhā pasannā theraṃ passitvā sañjātagāravabahumānā uḷārapītisomanassaṃ uppādetvā gehaṃ pavesetvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā attano pīṭhaṃ paññāpetvā tassa upari pītakaṃ maṭṭhavatthaṃ attharitvā adāsi. Atha there tattha nisinne ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ uttamaṃ puññakkhettaṃ upaṭṭhita’’nti pasannacittā yathāvibhavaṃ āhārena parivisi, bījaniñca gahetvā bīji. So thero katabhattakicco āsanadānabhojanadānādipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathetvā pakkāmi. Sā itthī taṃ attano dānaṃ tañca dhammakathaṃ paccavekkhantī pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭṭhasarīrā hutvā taṃ pīṭhampi therassa adāsi.

That story was spread throughout Jambudīpa. Humans give gifts according to their means to ascetics, brahmins, the poor, beggars, vendors, and supplicants, they set up water for drinking in the courtyards of their houses, they place seats at the doorframes. At that time, a certain elder who was a wanderer for alms, with pleasing approaching and departing, looking and gazing, contracting and extending, with downcast eyes, endowed with proper conduct, while wandering for alms, in due course, reached a certain house. There, a certain daughter of a good family, faithful and serene, having seen the elder, having generated respect and reverence, having produced great joy and happiness, having invited the elder into the house, having paid homage with the five-point prostration, having prepared her own seat, having spread a yellow soft cloth upon it, gave it. Then, when the elder was seated there, thinking, "This is my excellent field of merit that has come to me," with a serene mind, she served him with food according to her means, and took a fan and fanned him. That elder, having finished his meal, having spoken Dhamma connected with the gift of a seat, the gift of food, etc., departed. That woman, contemplating her own gift and that Dhamma talk, her body constantly pervaded with joy, gave even that seat to the elder.

Tato aparena samayena aññatarena rogena phuṭṭhā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Accharāsahassaṃ cassā parivāro ahosi, pīṭhadānānubhāvena cassā yojaniko kanakapallaṅko nibbatti ākāsacārī sīghajavo upari kūṭāgārasaṇṭhāno, tena taṃ ‘‘pīṭhavimāna’’nti vuccati. Tañhi suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ vatthaṃ attharitvā dinnattā kammasarikkhataṃ vibhāventaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ ahosi, pītivegassa balavabhāvena sīghajavaṃ, dakkhiṇeyyassa cittarucivasena dinnattā yathārucigāmī, pasādasampattiyā uḷāratāya sabbasova pāsādikaṃ sobhātisayayuttañca ahosi.

Then, at another time, afflicted by a certain disease, having passed away, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, in a golden vimāna twelve yojanas in extent. She had a thousand nymphs as her retinue, and by the power of the gift of the seat, a golden couch of one yojana in extent was reborn for her, moving through the sky, swift, shaped like a pavilion above, therefore, it is called "pīṭhavimāna." That, because a cloth of golden color was spread and given, displaying the likeness of the action, was made of gold; because of the strength of the force of joy, it was swift; because it was given to the worthy one according to the inclination of the mind, it went as one liked; because of the greatness of the wealth of serenity, it was entirely pleasing and endowed with exceeding beauty.

Athekasmiṃ ussavadivase devatāsu yathāsakaṃ dibbānubhāvena uyyānakīḷanatthaṃ nandanavanaṃ gacchantīsu sā devatā dibbavatthanivatthā dibbābharaṇavibhūsitā accharāsahassaparivārā sakabhavanā nikkhamitvā taṃ pīṭhavimānaṃ abhiruyha mahatiyā deviddhiyā mahantena sirisobhaggena samantato cando viya sūriyo viya ca obhāsentī uyyānaṃ gacchati. Tena ca samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ upagato tassā devatāya avidūre attānaṃ dassesi. Atha sā devatā taṃ disvā samuppannabalavapasādagāravā sahasā pallaṅkato oruyha theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha namassamānā aṭṭhāsi. Thero kiñcāpi tāya aññehi ca sattehi yathūpacitaṃ kusalākusalaṃ attano yathākammūpagañāṇānubhāvena hatthatale ṭhapitaāmalakaṃ viya paññābalabhedena paccakkhato passati, tathāpi yasmā devatānaṃ upapattisamanantarameva ‘‘kuto nu kho ahaṃ cavitvā idhūpapannā, kiṃ nu kho kusalakammaṃ katvā imaṃ sampattiṃ paṭilabhāmī’’ti atītabhavaṃ yathūpacitañca kammaṃ uddissa yebhuyyena dhammatāsiddhā upadhāraṇā, tassā ca yāthāvato ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tāya devatāya katakammaṃ kathāpetvā sadevakassa lokassa kammaphalaṃ paccakkhaṃ kātukāmo –

Then, on a certain festival day, when the deities were going to the Nandana Grove for garden sports according to their own divine power, that deity, dressed in divine garments, adorned with divine ornaments, with a retinue of a thousand nymphs, having come out of her own abode, having ascended that pīṭhavimāna, with great divine power, with great beauty and splendor, shining all around like the moon or the sun, was going to the garden. At that time, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a deva-pilgrimage in the same way as described above, having approached the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, showed himself not far from that deity. Then that deity, having seen him, with strong serenity and reverence arisen, suddenly descended from the couch, approached the elder, having paid homage with the five-point prostration, having raised her joined palms, shining with the tips of her fingernails, stood venerating. Although the elder sees directly with the difference of the power of wisdom, like an amalaka fruit placed in the palm of his hand, the good and bad deeds accumulated by her and by other beings, according to his knowledge of how actions lead to their results, nevertheless, since immediately after the arising of deities, the understanding established by the nature of Dhamma mostly arises with regard to the past life and the accumulated action, thinking "From where did I pass away to be reborn here, having done what meritorious deed did I obtain this fortune?", therefore, desiring to make the fruit of action manifest to the world with the devas, having the deity speak about the action she had done –

1.

1.

‘‘Pīṭhaṃ te sovaṇṇamayaṃ uḷāraṃ, manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāmaṃ;

"Your seat is golden, magnificent, swift as thought, going wherever you wish;
Adorned, wearing garlands, beautifully dressed, you shine like lightning on a cloud peak.

2.

2.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is your complexion so, by what does this succeed for you here?
And do the enjoyments arise for you, whatever are dear to the mind?

3.

3.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve,

"I ask you, goddess of great power,
What merit did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant in power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?" he said –

4.

4.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, delighted, asked by Moggallāna;
Questioned, she explained, by which action this is the fruit."

5.

5.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, abbhāgatānāsanakaṃ adāsiṃ;

"I, being a human among humans, gave food to those who had arrived;
I paid homage and made the añjali, and gave according to my means.

6.

6.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"Because of that, I have such beauty; because of that, I prosper here;
And possessions arise for me, whatever are dear to my mind.

7.

7.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I will tell you, bhikkhu of great power, the meritorious deed I did when I was a human;
Because of that, I am thus of radiant power, and my beauty shines in all directions."

1.Tatthapīṭhanti yaṃkiñci tādisaṃ dārukkhandhampi āpaṇampi balikaraṇapīṭhampi vettāsanampi masārakādivisesanāmaṃ dārumayādiāsanampi vuccati. Tathā hi ‘‘pādapīṭhaṃ pādakathalika’’nti (mahāva. 209; cūḷava. 75) ettha pādaṭhapanayoggaṃ pīṭhādikaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ vuccati, ‘‘pīṭhasappī’’ti (mi. pa. 5.3.1) ettha hatthena gahaṇayoggaṃ. ‘‘Pīṭhikā’’ti pana ekaccesu janapadesu desavohārena āpaṇaṃ. ‘‘Bhūtapīṭhikā devakulapīṭhikā’’ti ettha devatānaṃ balikaraṇaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pīṭhaṃ. ‘‘Bhaddapīṭha’’nti ettha vettalatādīhi upari vītaṃ āsanaṃ, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘bhaddapīṭhaṃ upānayī’’ti. ‘‘Supaññattaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ. Mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā kārayamānenā’’ti (pāci. 522) ca ādīsu masārakādibhedaṃ dārumayādiāsanaṃ. Idha pana pallaṅkākārasaṇṭhitaṃ devatāya puññānubhāvābhinibbattaṃ yojanikaṃ kanakavimānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

1. Here, pīṭha means any such thing, even a log of wood, a shop, an offering platform, a wicker seat, or an āsana made of wood etc., with specific names like masāraka. For example, "pādapīṭhaṃ pādakathalikaṃ" (mahāva. 209; cūḷava. 75) here means a log of wood suitable for placing the feet on; "pīṭhasappī" (mi. pa. 5.3.1) here means something suitable to be held by the hand. "Pīṭhikā" in some regions is a local term for a shop. "Bhūtapīṭhikā devakulapīṭhikā" here refers to a platform used for making offerings to deities. "Bhaddapīṭha" here means a seat woven with cane, reeds, etc., referring to "bhaddapīṭhaṃ upānayī". And "Supaññattaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ. Mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā kārayamānenā" (pāci. 522) etc., refer to āsanas made of wood etc., of various types such as masāraka. Here, however, it should be understood as a golden vimāna of one yojana in size, manifested by the power of merit of the deity, shaped like a couch (pallaṅka).

Teti te-saddo ‘‘na te sukhaṃ pajānanti, ye na passanti nandana’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.11, 226) ta-saddassa vasena paccattabahuvacane āgato. ‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama (dī. ni. 3.278; su. ni. 549). Namo te buddha vīratthū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.90) ca ādīsu tumha-saddassa vasena sampadāne, tuyhanti attho. ‘‘Kiṃ te diṭṭhaṃ kinti te sutaṃ. Upadhī te samatikkantā, āsavā te padālitā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 551) ca ādīsu karaṇe. ‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariya’’ntiādīsu (vi. va. 1251; jā. 1.10.92) sāmiatthe. Idhāpi sāmiatthe daṭṭhabbo. Tavāti hi attho.

Te—here, the word te appears in the plural accusative in the sense of ta in "na te sukhaṃ pajānanti, ye na passanti nandana" (saṃ. ni. 1.11, 226). And in "Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama (dī. ni. 3.278; su. ni. 549). Namo te buddha vīratthū" (saṃ. ni. 1.90) etc., it is in the dative in the sense of tumha, meaning to you. In "Kiṃ te diṭṭhaṃ kinti te sutaṃ. Upadhī te samatikkantā, āsavā te padālitā" (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 551) etc., it is in the instrumental case. In "Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariya" (vi. va. 1251; jā. 1.10.92) etc., it is in the possessive sense. Here too, it should be understood in the possessive sense, meaning tava (yours).

Sovaṇṇamayanti ettha suvaṇṇa-saddo ‘‘suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate’’ti (ma. ni. 1.148) ca ‘‘suvaṇṇatā susaratā’’ti (khu. pā. 8.11) ca evamādīsu chavisampattiyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Kākaṃ suvaṇṇā parivārayantī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.77) garuḷe. ‘‘Suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.200) jātarūpe. Idhāpi jātarūpe eva daṭṭhabbo. Tañhi buddhānaṃ samānavaṇṇatāya sobhano vaṇṇo etassāti suvaṇṇanti vuccati. Suvaṇṇameva sovaṇṇaṃ yathā ‘‘vekataṃ vesama’’nti ca. Maya-saddo ca ‘‘anuññātapaṭiññātā, tevijjā mayamasmubho’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 599; ma. ni. 2.455) asmadatthe āgato. ‘‘Mayaṃ nissāya hemāya, jātamaṇḍo darī subhā’’ti ettha paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṃpabhā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.39; 3.38) nibbattiatthe, bāhirena paccayena vinā manasāva nibbattāti manomayāti vuttā. ‘‘Yaṃnūnāhaṃ sāmaṃ cikkhallaṃ madditvā sabbamattikāmayaṃ kuṭikaṃ kareyya’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 84) vikāratthe. ‘‘Dānamayaṃ sīlamaya’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.305) padapūraṇamatte. Idhāpi vikāratthe, padapūraṇamatte vā daṭṭhabbo. Yadā hi suvaṇṇena nibbattaṃ sovaṇṇamayanti ayamattho, tadā suvaṇṇassa vikāro sovaṇṇamayanti vikāratthe maya-saddo daṭṭhabbo, ‘‘nibbattiatthe’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Yadā pana suvaṇṇena nibbattaṃ sovaṇṇanti ayamattho, tadā sovaṇṇameva sovaṇṇamayanti padapūraṇamatte maya-saddo daṭṭhabbo.

Sovaṇṇamaya—here, the word suvaṇṇa appears in "suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate" (ma. ni. 1.148) and "suvaṇṇatā susaratā" (khu. pā. 8.11) etc., in the sense of the excellence of complexion. In "Kākaṃ suvaṇṇā parivārayantī" (jā. 1.1.77) etc., it refers to garuḷa. In "Suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco" (dī. ni. 3.200) etc., it refers to jātarūpa (gold). Here too, it should be understood as jātarūpa (gold). That is called suvaṇṇa because its color is beautiful, being of similar color to the Buddhas. Suvaṇṇameva sovaṇṇaṃ just as vekataṃ vesama. The word maya appears in "anuññātapaṭiññātā, tevijjā mayamasmubho" (su. ni. 599; ma. ni. 2.455) etc., in the sense of asmad. In "Mayaṃ nissāya hemāya, jātamaṇḍo darī subhā" it is in the sense of designation. In "Manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṃpabhā" (dī. ni. 1.39; 3.38) etc., it is in the sense of being created by mind, manomaya is said to be created by the mind without external causes. In "Yaṃnūnāhaṃ sāmaṃ cikkhallaṃ madditvā sabbamattikāmayaṃ kuṭikaṃ kareyya" (pārā. 84) etc., it is in the sense of transformation. In "Dānamayaṃ sīlamayaṃ" (dī. ni. 3.305) etc., it is merely for filling the meter. Here too, it should be understood in the sense of transformation or merely for filling the meter. When it means made of gold, then the meaning is a transformation of gold, thus the word maya should be understood in the sense of transformation; it can also be said to be in the sense of "being created." But when it means made of gold, then sovaṇṇameva sovaṇṇamayanti, the word maya should be understood as merely filling the meter.

Uḷāranti paṇītampi seṭṭhampi mahantampi. Uḷāra-saddo hi ‘‘pubbenāparaṃ uḷāraṃ visesaṃ adhigacchatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.376) paṇīte āgato. ‘‘Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsāya pasaṃsatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.288) seṭṭhe. ‘‘Uḷārabhogā uḷārayasā oḷārika’’nti ca ādīsu (dha. sa. 894, 896; ma. ni. 1.244) mahante. Tampi ca vimānaṃ manuññabhāvena upabhuñjantānaṃ atittikaraṇatthena paṇītaṃ, samantapāsādikatādinā pasaṃsitatāya seṭṭhaṃ, pamāṇamahantatāya ca mahagghatāya ca mahantaṃ, tīhipi atthehi uḷāramevāti vuttaṃ uḷāranti.

Uḷāra—exquisite, excellent, or great. The word uḷāra appears in "pubbenāparaṃ uḷāraṃ visesaṃ adhigacchatī" (saṃ. ni. 5.376) etc., as exquisite. In "Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsāya pasaṃsatī" (ma. ni. 1.288) etc., as excellent. And in "Uḷārabhogā uḷārayasā oḷārika" etc. (dha. sa. 894, 896; ma. ni. 1.244), as great. And that vimāna is exquisite because it does not satiate those enjoying its pleasing nature, it is excellent because it is praised for being pleasing in every way, and it is great because of its large size and high value. Thus, uḷāra is said with these three meanings.

Manojavanti etthamanoti cittaṃ. Yadipi mano-saddo sabbesampi kusalākusalābyākatacittānaṃ sādhāraṇavācī, ‘‘manojava’’nti pana vuttattā yattha katthaci ārammaṇe pavattanakassa kiriyamayacittassa vasena veditabbaṃ. Tasmā manaso viya javo etassāti manojavaṃ yathā oṭṭhamukhoti, ativiya sīghagamananti attho. Mano hi lahuparivattitāya atidūrepi visaye khaṇeneva nipatati, tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48) ‘‘dūraṅgamaṃ ekacara’’nti (dha. pa. 37) ca.Gacchatīti tassā devatāya vasanavimānato uyyānaṃ uddissa ākāsena gacchati.

Manojava—here, mano means mind. Although the word mano is commonly used for all types of citta, whether kusala, akusala, or abyākata, it should be understood here in the sense of the kiriyamaya citta that occurs in any object whatsoever, since it is said to be "manojava". Therefore, manojavaṃ means having speed like the mind, just as oṭṭhamukha; that is, moving very quickly. The mind, being quick to change, falls on objects very far away in an instant. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "I do not, bhikkhus, see even one other thing that changes so quickly as this citta" (a. ni. 1.48) and "dūraṅgamaṃ ekacaraṃ" (dha. pa. 37). Gacchatī—that deity goes through the sky from her residence vimāna towards the park.

Yenakāmanti ettha kāma-saddo ‘‘kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti citta’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 50; theragā. 787) manāpiye rūpādivisaye āgato. ‘‘Chando kāmo rāgo kāmo’’tiādīsu (vibha. 564; mahāni. 1; cūḷani. 8 ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa) chandarāge. ‘‘Kilesakāmo kāmupādāna’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 1219; mahāni. 2) sabbasmiṃ lobhe. ‘‘Attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 291) gāmadhamme. ‘‘Santettha tayo kulaputtā attakāmarūpā viharantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.325; mahāva. 466) hitacchande. ‘‘Attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṃgamo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.221; ma. ni. 1.426) seribhāve. Idhāpi seribhāve eva daṭṭhabbo, tasmāyenakāmanti yathāruci, devatāya icchānurūpanti attho.

Yenakāma—here, the word kāma appears in "Kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti citta" (su. ni. 50; theragā. 787) etc., in the sense of pleasing objects such as visible forms. In "Chando kāmo rāgo kāmo" (vibha. 564; mahāni. 1; cūḷani. 8 ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa) etc., in the sense of desire and passion. In "Kilesakāmo kāmupādāna" (dha. sa. 1219; mahāni. 2) etc., in the sense of all lobha. In "Attakāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyā" (pārā. 291) etc., in the sense of vulgar practices. In "Santettha tayo kulaputtā attakāmarūpā viharantī" (ma. ni. 1.325; mahāva. 466) etc., in the sense of the desire for benefit. In "Attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṃgamo" (dī. ni. 1.221; ma. ni. 1.426) etc., in the sense of freedom. Here too, it should be understood in the sense of freedom, therefore, yenakāma means according to one's wish, according to the deity's desire.

Alaṅkateti alaṅkatagatte, nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalavividharatanavijjotitehi hatthūpagapādūpagādibhedehi saṭṭhisakaṭabhāraparimāṇehi dibbālaṅkārehi vibhūsitasarīreti attho. Sambodhane cetaṃ ekavacanaṃ.Malyadhareti kapparukkhapāricchattakasantānakalatādisambhavehi, suvisuddhacāmīkaravividharatanamayapattakiñjakkhakesarehi, samantato vijjotamānavipphurantakiraṇanikararucirehi dibbakusumehi sumaṇḍitakesahatthāditāya mālābhārinī.Suvattheti kappalatānibbattānaṃ, nānāvirāgavaṇṇavisesānaṃ suparisuddhabhāsurappabhānaṃ nivāsanuttariyapaṭicchadādīnaṃ dibbavatthānaṃ vasena sundaravatthe.Obhāsasīti vijjotasi.Vijjurivāti vijjulatā viya.Abbhakūṭanti valāhakasikhare. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Obhāsasīti vā antogadhahetuatthavacanaṃ, obhāsesīti attho. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘abbhakūṭa’’nti upayogatthe eva upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Alaṅkate—having an adorned body, with a body adorned with various kinds of divine ornaments of sixty cartloads, glittering with various radiant jewels, such as hand ornaments and foot ornaments. This is a vocative singular. Malyadhare—bearing garlands made of divine flowers arisen from wish-fulfilling trees, pāricchattaka, santānakalatā, etc., with filaments and stamens made of pure gold and various jewels, beautiful with clusters of rays radiating and glittering on all sides, adorning her hair, hands, etc. Suvatthe—with beautiful clothes in the form of divine garments such as lower garments, upper garments, and cloaks made from wish-fulfilling creepers, of various pure and radiant colors. Obhāsasī—you shine forth. Vijjurivā—like a lightning flash. Abbhakūṭa—on a cloud peak. This is a locative used in the sense of the instrumental. Obhāsasī can also be taken as a locative in the sense of the cause residing within, meaning you shine forth. In this case, abbhakūṭa should be understood as a locative used in the sense of the instrumental.

Ayañhettha attho – yathā nāma sañjhāpabhānurañjitaṃ rattavalāhakasikharaṃ pakatiyāpi obhāsamānaṃ samantato vijjotamānā vijjulatā niccharantī visesato obhāseti, evamevaṃ suparisuddhatapanīyamayaṃ nānāratanasamujjalaṃ pakatipabhassaraṃ imaṃ vimānaṃ tvaṃ sabbālaṅkārehi vibhūsitā sabbaso vijjotayantīhi attano sarīrappabhāhi vatthābharaṇobhāsehi ca visesato obhāsesīti.

The meaning here is: Just as a peak of reddish clouds colored by the evening glow, naturally shining, is made to shine especially by a lightning flash emitting light and glittering on all sides, even so, you, adorned with all ornaments, are shining forth especially this vimāna made of pure gold, glittering with various jewels, and naturally radiant, with the radiance of your body and with the light of your clothes and ornaments.

Ettha hi ‘‘pīṭha’’nti nidassetabbavacanametaṃ, ‘‘abbhakūṭa’’nti nidassanavacanaṃ. Tathā ‘‘te’’ti nidassetabbavacanaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘pīṭha’’nti idaṃ apekkhitvā sāmivacanena vuttampi ‘‘alaṅkate malyadhare suvatthe obhāsasī’’ti imāni padāni apekkhitvā paccattavasena pariṇamati, tasmā ‘‘tva’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vijjurivā’’ti nidassanavacanaṃ. ‘‘Obhāsasī’’ti idaṃ dvinnampi upameyyupamānānaṃ sambandhadassanaṃ. ‘‘Obhāsasī’’ti hi idaṃ ‘‘tva’’nti padaṃ apekkhitvā majjhimapurisavasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘pīṭha’’nti idaṃ apekkhitvā paṭhamapurisavasena pariṇamati. Ca-saddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Gacchati yenakāmaṃ obhāsasī’’ti ca ‘‘vijjulatobhāsitaṃ abbhakūṭaṃ viyā’’ti paccattavasena cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ pariṇamati. Tathā ‘‘pīṭha’’nti visesitabbavacanametaṃ, ‘‘te sovaṇṇamayaṃ uḷāra’’ntiādi tassa visesanaṃ.

Here, "pīṭha" is the term to be shown, and "abbhakūṭa" is the example. Similarly, "te" is the term to be shown. Although this is said with the possessive case depending on "pīṭha", it becomes accusative depending on these words "alaṅkate malyadhare suvatthe obhāsasī", therefore "tva" is said. "Vijjurivā" is the example. "Obhāsasī" shows the connection between the two, the object of comparison and the standard of comparison. "Obhāsasī" is said in the second person depending on "tva", and it becomes third person depending on "pīṭha". The ca-sound should be understood as omitted here. "Gacchati yenakāmaṃ obhāsasī" and "vijjulatobhāsitaṃ abbhakūṭaṃ viyā" become instrumental in their own right. Similarly, "pīṭha" is the term to be qualified, and "te sovaṇṇamayaṃ uḷāra" etc. are its qualifications.

Nanu ca ‘‘sovaṇṇamaya’’nti vatvā suvaṇṇassa aggalohatāya seṭṭhabhāvato dibbassa ca idhādhippetattā ‘‘uḷāra’’nti na vattabbanti? Na, kiñci visesasabbhāvato. Yatheva hi manussaparibhogasuvaṇṇavikatito rasaviddhaṃ seṭṭhaṃ suvisuddhaṃ, tato ākaruppannaṃ, tato yaṃkiñci dibbaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, evaṃ dibbasuvaṇṇepi cāmīkaraṃ, cāmīkarato sātakumbhaṃ, sātakumbhato jambunadaṃ, jambunadato siṅgīsuvaṇṇaṃ. Tañhi sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Tenāha sakko devānamindo –

But why is "uḷāra" not said after saying "sovaṇṇamaya", since gold is the most excellent of metals and it is divine here? No, because there is some specialty. Just as rasaviddha gold is better and purer than gold worked by humans, then gold from the mines, then any divine gold, similarly, even in divine gold, there is cāmīkara, sātakumbha is better than cāmīkara, jambunada is better than sātakumbha, and siṅgīsuvaṇṇa is better than jambunada. That is the best of all. Therefore, Sakka, the king of the gods, said –

‘‘Mutto muttehi saha purāṇajaṭilehi, vippamutto vippamuttehi;

"Released with those released, freed with those freed,
With matted hair of old; with gold like siṅgīnikkha,
The Blessed One entered Rājagaha." (mahāva. 58);

Tasmā ‘‘sovaṇṇamaya’’nti vatvāpi ‘‘uḷāra’’nti vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘uḷāra’’nti idaṃ na tassa seṭṭhapaṇītabhāvameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho mahantabhāvampīti vuttovāyamattho. Ettha ca ‘‘pīṭha’’ntiādi phalassa kammasarikkhatādassanaṃ. Tatthāpi ‘‘sovaṇṇamaya’’nti iminā tassa vimānassa vatthusampadaṃ dasseti, ‘‘uḷāra’’nti iminā sobhātisayasampadaṃ, ‘‘manojava’’nti iminā gamanasampadaṃ. ‘‘Gacchati yenakāma’’nti iminā sīghajavatāya pīṭhasampattibhāvasampadaṃ dasseti.

Therefore, "uḷāra" is said even after saying "sovaṇṇamaya". Or, "uḷāra" is not said only in reference to its excellence and exquisiteness, but also in reference to its greatness, thus this meaning is said. And here, "pīṭha" etc. shows the similarity of the result to the action. Even there, "sovaṇṇamaya" shows the wealth of substance of that vimāna, "uḷāra" shows the wealth of exceeding beauty, and "manojava" shows the wealth of movement. "Gacchati yenakāma" shows the wealth of attainment of the pīṭha due to its swiftness.

Atha vā ‘‘sovaṇṇamaya’’nti iminā tassa paṇītabhāvaṃ dasseti, ‘‘uḷāra’’nti iminā vepullamahattaṃ. ‘‘Manojava’’nti iminā ānubhāvamahattaṃ. ‘‘Gacchati yenakāma’’nti iminā vihārasukhattaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Sovaṇṇamaya’’nti vā iminā tassa abhirūpataṃ vaṇṇapokkharatañca dasseti, ‘‘uḷāra’’nti iminā dassanīyataṃ pāsādikatañca dasseti, ‘‘manojava’’nti iminā sīghasampadaṃ, ‘‘gacchati yenakāma’’nti iminā katthaci appaṭihatacārataṃ dasseti.

Or, "sovaṇṇamaya" shows its exquisiteness, "uḷāra" shows its magnitude and greatness. "Manojava" shows the greatness of its power. "Gacchati yenakāma" shows the happiness of dwelling. Or, "sovaṇṇamaya" shows its beauty and splendor, "uḷāra" shows its attractiveness and pleasingness, "manojava" shows its swiftness, and "gacchati yenakāma" shows its unimpeded movement anywhere.

Atha vā taṃ vimānaṃ yassa puññakammassa nissandaphalaṃ, tassa alobhanissandatāya sovaṇṇamayaṃ, adosanissandatāya uḷāraṃ, amohanissandatāya manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāmaṃ. Tathā tassa kammassa saddhānissandabhāvena sovaṇṇamayaṃ, paññānissandabhāvena uḷāraṃ, vīriyanissandabhāvena manojavaṃ, samādhinissandabhāvena gacchati yenakāmaṃ. Saddhāsamādhinissandabhāvena vā sovaṇṇamayaṃ, samādhipaññānissandabhāvena uḷāraṃ, samādhivīriyanissandabhāvena manojavaṃ, samādhisatinissandabhāvena gacchati yenakāmanti veditabbaṃ.

Or, that vimāna, which is the resultant fruit of meritorious action, is sovaṇṇamaya due to the absence of lobha, uḷāra due to the absence of dosa, and manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāmaṃ due to the absence of moha. Similarly, that kamma is sovaṇṇamaya due to the absence of saddhā, uḷāra due to the absence of paññā, manojava due to the absence of vīriya, and gacchati yenakāmaṃ due to the absence of samādhi. Or, it should be understood that it is sovaṇṇamaya due to the absence of saddhā and samādhi, uḷāra due to the absence of samādhi and paññā, manojava due to the absence of samādhi and vīriya, and gacchati yenakāmaṃ due to the absence of samādhi and sati.

Tattha yathā ‘‘pīṭha’’ntiādi vimānasampattidassanavasena tassā devatāya puññaphalavibhavasampattikittanaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘alaṅkate’’tiādi attabhāvasampattidassanavasena puññaphalavibhavasampattikittanaṃ. Yathā hi susikkhitasippācariyaviracitopi rattasuvaṇṇālaṅkāro vividharaṃsijālasamujjalamaṇiratanakhacito eva sobhati, na kevalo, evaṃ sabbaṅgasampanno caturassasobhanopi attabhāvo sumaṇḍitapasādhitova sobhati, na kevalo. Tenassā ‘‘alaṅkate’’tiādinā āharimaṃ sobhāvisesaṃ dasseti, ‘‘obhāsasī’’ti iminā anāharimaṃ. Tathā purimena vattamānapaccayanimittaṃ sobhātisayaṃ dasseti, pacchimena atītapaccayanimittaṃ. Purimena vā tassā upabhogavatthusampadaṃ dasseti, pacchimena upabhuñjanakavatthusampadaṃ.

Here, just as "pīṭha," etc., describes the splendor of the celestial mansion, thus praising the power of merit and glory of that deity by showing her attainment of a celestial abode, so too, "alaṅkate," etc., praises the power of merit and glory by showing her attainment of physical beauty. Just as a golden ornament adorned with various shimmering jewels, crafted by a highly skilled artisan, is exceedingly beautiful, and not so when plain, similarly, a body complete in all its parts and beautifully proportioned is beautiful only when well-adorned and embellished, and not so when plain. Therefore, with "alaṅkate," etc., she shows the acquired exceptional beauty, and with "obhāsasī" she shows the inherent one. Thus, the former shows the abundance of beauty caused by the present participle, and the latter shows that caused by the past participle. Or, the former shows the abundance of things to be enjoyed by her, and the latter shows the abundance of things suitable for the act of enjoying.

Etthāha ‘‘kiṃ pana taṃ vimānaṃ yuttavāhaṃ, udāhu ayuttavāha’’nti? Yadipi devaloke rathavimānāni yuttavāhānipi honti ‘‘sahassayuttaṃ ājaññaratha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.264) ādivacanato, te pana devaputtā eva kiccakaraṇakāle vāharūpena attānaṃ dassenti yathā erāvaṇo devaputto kīḷanakāle hatthirūpena. Idaṃ pana aññañca edisaṃ ayuttavāhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Here one might ask, "Is that celestial mansion drawn by harnessed steeds or unharnessed?" Although in the deva-world there are chariot-mansions drawn by harnessed steeds, as in the saying, "a chariot of thoroughbreds yoked by the thousands" (SN 1.264) and so on, those deva-puttās themselves appear in the form of a vehicle when there is a need to perform some task, just as the deva-putta Erāvaṇa appears in the form of an elephant during playtime. But this and other such instances should be seen as being drawn by unharnessed power.

Yadi evaṃ kiṃ tassa vimānassa abbhantarā vāyodhātu gamane visesapaccayo, udāhu bāhirāti? Abbhantarāti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā hi candavimānasūriyavimānādīnaṃ desantaragamane tadupajīvīnaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇakammanibbattaṃ ativiya sīghajavaṃ mahantaṃ vāyumaṇḍalaṃ tāni pelentaṃ pavatteti, na evaṃ taṃ peletvā pavattentī bāhirā vāyodhātu atthi. Yathā ca pana cakkaratanaṃ antosamuṭṭhitāya vāyodhātuyā vasena pavattati. Na hi tassa candavimānādīnaṃ viya bāhirā vāyodhātu peletvā pavattikā atthi rañño cakkavattissa cittavasena ‘‘pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’’ntiādivacanasamananantarameva pavattanato, evaṃ tassā devatāya cittavasena attasannissitāya vāyodhātuyā gacchatīti veditabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāma’’nti.

If so, is the element of wind inside that celestial mansion a special cause for its movement, or is it the external wind? It should be understood as the internal one. Just as, when the moon-mansion, sun-mansion, and others move to another location, a very swift and great wind-sphere produced by the shared karma of the beings dependent on them propels and moves them, there is no external wind element that propels and moves them in that way. And just as the wheel-gem moves due to the internal wind element, there is no external wind element that propels its movement like that of the moon-mansion, etc., because it moves immediately upon the utterance of the words, "Let the wheel-gem proceed, your majesty," according to the will of the universal monarch, so too, it should be understood that the deity moves by means of the wind element inherent within herself according to her will. Therefore, it is said, "goes at will with the speed of thought."

2.Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya tassā devatāya puññaphalasampattiṃ kittetvā idāni tassā kāraṇabhūtaṃ puññasampadaṃ vibhāvetuṃ‘‘kena tetādiso vaṇṇo’’tiādi gāthādvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatthakenāti kiṃ-saddo ‘‘kiṃ rājā yo lokaṃ na rakkhati, kiṃ nu kho nāma tumhe maṃ vattabbaṃ maññathā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 424) garahaṇe āgato. ‘‘Yaṃkiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.244; saṃ. ni. 3.59) aniyame. ‘‘Kiṃ sūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 183; saṃ. ni. 1.73) pucchāyaṃ. Idhāpi pucchāyameva daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Kenā’’ti ca hetuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, kena hetunāti attho.Teti tava.Etādisoti ediso, etarahi yathādissamānoti attho.Vaṇṇoti vaṇṇa-saddo ‘‘kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) guṇe āgato. ‘‘Anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.4) thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhathenoti vuccatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234; jā. 1.6.116) kāraṇe. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇe. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.115; ma. ni. 2.379-380) jātiyaṃ. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā, susukkadāṭhosi vīriyavā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 553) chavivaṇṇe. Idhāpi chavivaṇṇe eva daṭṭhabbo. Ayañhettha attho – kena kīdisena puññavisesena hetubhūtena devate, tava etādiso evaṃvidho dvādasayojanāni pharaṇakappabho sarīravaṇṇo jātoti?

2.Having thus praised the fruition of merit of that deity in the first verse, now, in order to explain the abundance of merit that is the cause of that, the two verses beginning with "kena te tādiso vaṇṇo" are stated. There, kena—the word "kiṃ" appears in the sense of reproach in "What kind of king is he who does not protect the world? What do you think you should say to me?" (Para. 424). It appears in the sense of indefiniteness in "Whatever form, past, future, or present" (MN 1.244; SN 3.59). It appears in the sense of inquiry in "What truly is wealth for a person?" (SN 1.73, Sn. 183). Here too, it should be understood as being in the sense of inquiry. And "kena" is an instrumental case in the sense of cause; the meaning is, "by what cause?" Te—of you. Etādiso—of this kind, meaning just as it appears now. Vaṇṇo—the word "vaṇṇa" appears in the sense of quality in "When, householder, did these praises of Gotama the ascetic become known to you?" (MN 2.77). In the sense of praise in "He speaks of the Buddha's qualities in many ways, he speaks of the Dhamma's qualities, he speaks of the Sangha's qualities" (DN 1.4). In the sense of cause in "By what quality is it called fragrance and odor?" (SN 1.234, Ja. 1.6.116). In the sense of measurement in "The three colors of the bowl" (Para. 602). In the sense of kind in "These four castes, Master Gotama" (DN 3.115; MN 2.379-380). In the sense of shape in "Having created a great elephant king form." In the sense of skin color in "The Blessed One is of golden skin color, with very white tusks and full of vigor" (MN 2.399; Sn. 553). Here too, it should be understood as skin color itself. The meaning here is this: By what kind of special merit, as a cause, O deity, is such a complexion of body born to you, a complexion of such a kind, a radiance capable of spreading twelve yojanas?

Kena te idha mijjhatīti kena puññātisayena te idha imasmiṃ ṭhāne idāni tayi labbhamānaṃ uḷāraṃ sucaritaphalaṃ ijjhati nipphajjati.Uppajjantīti nibbattanti, avicchedavasena uparūpari vattantīti attho.Bhogāti paribhuñjitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘bhogā’’ti laddhanāmā vatthābharaṇādivittūpakaraṇavisesā.Yeti sāmaññena aniyamaniddeso,kecīti pakārabhedaṃ āmasitvā aniyamaniddeso, ubhayenāpi paṇītapaṇītatarādibhede tattha labbhamāne tādise bhoge anavasesato byāpetvā saṅgaṇhāti. Anavasesabyāpako hi ayaṃ niddeso yathā ‘‘ye keci saṅkhārā’’ti.Manaso piyāti manasā piyāyitabbā, manāpiyāti attho.

Kena te idha mijjhatī—by what surpassing merit does this excellent fruit of good conduct, obtainable by you in this place, here, now, succeed, accomplish? Uppajjantī—arising, meaning continually occurring one after another without interruption. Bhogā—by way of being something to be enjoyed, "bhogā" is the name given to particular items of wealth and equipment such as clothes, ornaments, etc. Ye—a general, indefinite designation; kecī—touching upon the variety, an indefinite designation; by both, it encompasses without exception such riches obtainable there, in their variety as exquisite, more exquisite, and so on. For this designation encompasses everything, just as "whatever conditions." Manaso piyā—to be loved by the mind, meaning delightful to the mind.

Ettha ca ‘‘etādiso vaṇṇo’’ti iminā heṭṭhā vuttavisesā tassā devatāya attabhāvapariyāpannā vaṇṇasampadā dassitā. ‘‘Bhogā’’ti iminā upabhogaparibhogavatthubhūtā dibbarūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbabhedā kāmaguṇasampadā. ‘‘Manaso piyā’’ti iminā tesaṃ rūpādīnaṃ iṭṭhakantamanāpatā. ‘‘Idha mijjhatī’’ti iminā pana dibbaāyuvaṇṇayasasukhaādhipateyyasampadā dassitā. ‘‘Ye keci manaso piyā’’ti iminā yāni ‘‘so aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhiggaṇhāti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena dibbena sukhena dibbena yasena dibbena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi dibbehi saddehi dibbehi gandhehi dibbehi rasehi dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) sutte āgatāni dasa ṭhānāni. Tesaṃ idha anavasesato saṅgaho dassitoti veditabbo.

And here, by "etādiso vaṇṇo," the beauty of complexion pertaining to the embodiment of that deity, which was described earlier, is shown. By "bhogā," the wealth of sense pleasures, which are objects of enjoyment and consumption, such as divine forms, sounds, smells, tastes, and tactile objects. By "manaso piyā," the loveliness, desirability, and agreeableness of those forms, etc. By "idha mijjhatī," the attainment of divine lifespan, beauty, glory, happiness, and sovereignty is shown. By "ye keci manaso piyā," those ten things that come in the sutta "he surpasses other devas in ten respects: with divine lifespan, divine beauty, divine happiness, divine glory, divine sovereignty, divine forms, divine sounds, divine smells, divine tastes, and divine tactile objects" (SN 4.341). It should be understood that here, a complete collection of those is shown.

3.Pucchāmīti pañhaṃ karomi, ñātumicchāmīti attho. Kāmañcetaṃ ‘‘kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati. Kimakāsi puññaṃ, kenāsi evaṃ jalitānubhāvā’’ti ca kiṃ-saddaggahaṇeneva atthantarassa asambhavato pucchāvasena gāthāttayaṃ vuttanti viññāyati. Pucchāvisesabhāvañāpanatthaṃ pana ‘‘pucchāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayañhi pucchā adiṭṭhajotanā tāva na hoti edisassa atthassa mahātherassa adiṭṭhabhāvābhāvato, vimaticchedanāpi na hoti sabbaso samugghātitasaṃsayattā, anumatipucchāpi na hoti ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi rājaññā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.413) viya anumatigahaṇākārena appavattattā, kathetukamyatāpucchāpi na hoti tassā devatāya kathetukamyatāvasena therena apucchitattā. Visesena pana diṭṭhasaṃsandanāti veditabbā. Svāyamattho heṭṭhā aṭṭhuppattikathāyaṃ ‘‘thero kiñcāpī’’tiādinā vibhāvito eva.Tanti tvaṃ. Tayidaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ, pubbāpekkhatāya upayogekavacanaṃ, parāpekkhatāya pana paccattekavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

3.Pucchāmī—I ask a question, meaning I wish to know. Although it is evident that the triad of verses, "kena te tādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati. Kimakāsi puññaṃ, kenāsi evaṃ jalitānubhāvā," is stated in the form of questions because of the use of the word "kiṃ" itself, since there is no possibility of another meaning, "pucchāmī" is stated to make known the specific nature of the question. For this question is not to reveal something unseen, since it is impossible for the Great Thera to not have seen such a thing, nor is it to dispel doubt, since all doubt has been completely uprooted, nor is it a question seeking approval, since there is no indication of seeking approval as in "What do you think, O king?" (DN 2.413), nor is it a question of wanting to be told, since the Thera did not ask based on the deity's willingness to tell. But it should be understood as especially for comparing what has been seen. This meaning has already been explained below in the origin story by "thero kiñcāpīti." Taṃ—you. This should be seen as dependent on both what precedes and what follows; as dependent on what precedes, it is a singular form for application, but as dependent on what follows, it is a singular form for each item.

Devīti ettha deva-saddo ‘‘imāni te deva caturāsīti nagarasahassāni kusavatīrājadhānipamukhāni, ettha, deva, chandaṃ karohi jīvite apekkha’’nti ca ādīsu (dī. ni. 2.266) sammutidevavasena āgato, ‘‘tassa devātidevassa, sāsanaṃ sabbadassino’’tiādīsu visuddhidevavasena. Visuddhidevānañhi bhagavato atidevabhāve vutte itaresaṃ vutto eva hotīti. ‘‘Cātumahārājikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.337) upapattidevavasena. Idhāpi upapattidevavaseneva veditabbo. Padatthato pana – dibbati attano puññiddhiyā kīḷati laḷati pañcahi kāmaguṇehi ramati, atha vā heṭṭhā vuttanayena jotati obhāsati, ākāsena vimānena ca gacchatīti devī. ‘‘Tvaṃ devī’’ti sambodhane cetaṃ ekavacanaṃ.Mahānubhāveti uḷārappabhāve, so panassānubhāvo heṭṭhā dvīhi gāthāhi dassitoyeva.

Devī—here, the word deva appears in the sense of conventional deity in "These eighty-four thousand cities, headed by Kusavatī, are yours, O deva. Here, O deva, do as you please; do not be concerned about your life" (DN 2.266), and in the sense of deity by purity in "of that God of Gods, the teaching of the All-Seeing One." For when the state of being the God of Gods is stated for the Buddhas, the others are already included. And in the sense of deity by rebirth in "The devas of the Four Great Kings are long-lived, beautiful, and abound in happiness" (DN 3.337). Here too, it should be understood only in the sense of deity by rebirth. But in terms of the meaning of the word, devī means "she plays, rejoices, delights with the five sense pleasures by her own power of merit, or she shines, illuminates in the manner stated below, and goes through the sky in a celestial mansion." This is a singular form in the vocative case, "O deity." Mahānubhāve—of great power, and that power of hers has already been shown below in the two verses.

Manussabhūtāti ettha manassa ussannatāya manussā, satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasā ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittā. Ke pana te? Jambudīpavāsino sattavisesā. Tenāha bhagavā –

Manussabhūtā—here, manussā are those with elevated minds, those with minds that have accumulated due to qualities such as mindfulness, bravery, suitability for the holy life, and so on, those with excellent mental qualities. And who are they? Particular beings dwelling in Jambudīpa. Therefore, the Blessed One said:

‘‘Tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpakā manussā uttarakuruke manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā, satimanto, idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21).

"Monks, in three ways the humans of Jambudīpa surpass the humans of Uttarakuru and the devas of Tāvatiṃsa. Which three? They are brave, mindful, and the holy life is lived here" (AN 9.21).

Tathā hi buddhā bhagavanto paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā cakkavattino aññe ca mahānubhāvā sattā ettheva uppajjanti. Tehi samānarūpāditāya pana saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi ‘‘manussā’’tveva paññāyiṃsūti eke.

For Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, chief disciples, great disciples, universal monarchs, and other beings of great power arise only here. Because of similarity in form, etc., to them, other inhabitants of the great islands are also known as "manussā"—so say some.

Apare pana bhaṇanti – lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā. Ye hi sattā manussajātikā, tesu visesato lobhādayo alobhādayo ca ussannā, te lobhādiussannatāya apāyamaggaṃ, alobhādiussannatāya sugatimaggaṃ nibbānagāmimaggañca pūrenti, tasmā lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya parittadīpavāsīhi saddhiṃ catumahādīpavāsino sattavisesā ‘‘manussā’’ti vuccantīti.

Others say: "Manussā are those with elevated minds, together with greed, etc., and non-greed, etc. For in those beings who are of the human species, greed and the like, and non-greed and the like, are especially elevated; they fill the path to misery by the elevation of greed, etc., and the path to happiness and the path leading to nibbāna by the elevation of non-greed, etc. Therefore, particular beings dwelling in the four great islands, together with the inhabitants of the smaller islands, are called 'manussā' because of the elevation of the mind together with greed, etc., and non-greed, etc."

Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Manu nāma paṭhamakappiko lokamariyādāya ādibhūto hitāhitavidhāyako sattānaṃ pituṭṭhāniyo, yo sāsane ‘‘mahāsammato’’ti vuccati. Paccakkhato paramparāya ca tassa ovādānusāsaniyaṃ ṭhitā sattā puttasadisatāya ‘‘manussā’’ti vuccanti. Tato eva hi te māṇavā ‘‘manujā’’ti ca voharīyanti. Manussesu bhūtā jātā, manussabhāvaṃ vā pattāti manussabhūtā.

But worldly people say: "Manussā are the descendants of Manu." Manu is the first being of the eon, the originator of worldly custom, the ordainer of what is beneficial and unbeneficial, like a father to beings, who is called "Mahāsammata" in the Sāsana. Beings who stand by his advice and instruction, either directly or through tradition, are called "manussā" because of their similarity to sons. Therefore, these young men are also referred to as "manujā." Manussabhūtā means "born among humans" or "having attained the state of being human."

Kimakāsi puññanti kiṃ dānasīlādippabhedesu kīdisaṃ pujjabhāvaphalanibbattanato, yattha sayaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃ santānaṃ punāti visodhetīti ca ‘‘puñña’’nti laddhanāmaṃ sucaritaṃ kusalakammaṃ akāsi, upacini nibbattesīti attho.Jalitānubhāvāti sabbaso vijjotamānapuññiddhikā.

Kimakāsi puññaṃ—what kind of good deed did you do among the various types of giving, morality, etc., that is called "puñña" because it produces the fruit of being worthy of worship, and because it purifies and cleanses the lineage in which it is born, meaning what kind of good conduct, meritorious action did you accumulate and accomplish? Jalitānubhāvā—having a fully blazing power of merit.

Kasmā panettha ‘‘manussabhūtā kimakāsi puñña’’nti vuttaṃ, kiṃ aññāsu gatīsu puññakiriyā natthīti? No natthi. Yasmā nirayepi nāma kāmāvacarakusalacittapavatti kadāci labbhateva, kimaṅgaṃ panaññattha, nanu avocumhā ‘‘diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā’’ti. Tasmā mahāthero manussattabhāve ṭhatvā puññakammaṃ katvā uppannaṃ taṃ disvā bhūtatthavasena pucchanto ‘‘manussabhūtā kimakāsi puñña’’nti avoca.

And why is it said here, "manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ"—is there no performance of meritorious deeds in other destinies? It is not that there isn't. Since even in hell, the occurrence of kusala cittas pertaining to the sense-sphere is sometimes obtained, what need to mention elsewhere? But have we not said, "a question for comparing what has been seen?" Therefore, the Great Thera, having seen that she was born as a result of performing meritorious deeds while existing in the human state, asked according to the truth of the matter, "manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ."

Atha vā aññāsu gatīsu ekantasukhatāya ekantadukkhatāya dukkhabahulatāya ca puññakiriyāya okāso na sulabharūpo sappurisūpanissayādipaccayasamavāyassa sudullabhabhāvato. Kadāci uppajjamānopi yathāvuttakāraṇena uḷāro vipulo na ca hoti, manussagatiyaṃ pana sukhabahulatāya puññakiriyāya okāso sulabharūpo sappurisūpanissayādipaccayasamavāyassa yebhuyyena sulabhabhāvato. Yañca tattha dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tampi visesato puññakiriyāya upanissayo hoti. Dukkhūpanissayā hi saddhāti. Yathā hi ayoghanena satthake nipphādiyamāne tassa ekantato na aggimhi tāpanaṃ udakena vā temanaṃ chedanakiriyāsamatthatāya visesapaccayo, tāpetvā pana pamāṇayogato udakatemanaṃ tassā visesapaccayo, evameva sattasantānassa ekantadukkhasamaṅgitā dukkhabahulatā ekantasukhasamaṅgitā ca puññakiriyāya na visesapaccayo hoti. Sati pana dukkhasantāpane pamāṇayogato sukhūpabrūhane ca laddhūpanissayā puññakiriyā uppajjati, uppajjamānā ca mahājutikā mahāvipphārā paṭipakkhachedanasamatthā ca hoti, tasmā manussabhāvo puññakiriyāya visesapaccayo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘manussabhūtā kimakāsi puñña’’nti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

Or rather, in other destinies, an opportunity for performing meritorious deeds is not easily available because of the extreme happiness, extreme suffering, and abundance of suffering, and because the coming together of conditions such as reliance on good people is very rare. Even when it does arise sometimes, it is not excellent and abundant because of the aforementioned reason, but in the human destiny, an opportunity for performing meritorious deeds is readily available because the coming together of conditions such as reliance on good people is generally easily obtained due to the abundance of happiness. And even the suffering that arises there is especially a support for performing meritorious deeds. For saddhā has suffering as its support. Just as when a knife is being produced by a blacksmith's hammer, heating it in the fire or quenching it with water is not in itself a condition for being capable of cutting, but quenching it with water in proportion to the heating is a condition for that, so too, extreme suffering or an abundance of suffering, or extreme happiness, in a being's mind-stream is not in itself a condition for performing meritorious deeds. But when suffering is present and there is a proportionate increase of happiness, meritorious deeds arise having found support, and when they arise, they are of great brilliance, great expansion, and capable of cutting off opposing factors. Therefore, the human state is a special condition for performing meritorious deeds. Therefore, it is said, "manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ." The rest is easily understood.

4.Evaṃ pana therena pucchitā sā devatā pañhaṃ vissajjesi. Tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sā devatā attamanā’’ti gāthā vuttā. Kena panāyaṃ gāthā vuttā? Dhammasaṅgāhakehi. Tatthati yā pubbe ‘‘pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve’’ti vuttā, sā.Devatāti devaputtopi brahmāpi devadhītāpi vuccati. ‘‘Atha kho aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.1; khu. pā. 5.1) hi devaputto ‘‘devatā’’ti vutto devoyeva devatāti katvā. Tathā ‘‘tā devatā sattasatā uḷārā, brahmavimānā abhinikkhamitvā’’tiādīsu brahmāno.

4.Thus, that deity, being questioned by the Thera, explained the question. To show that meaning, the verse "sā devatā attamanā" was stated. By whom was this verse stated? By the compilers of the Dhamma. There, —that one who was previously mentioned as "pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve." Devatā—deva-putta, Brahmā, and deva-dhītā are all called devatā. For in "Then a certain devatā, in the far reaches of the night, of surpassing beauty" (SN 1.1; Khp. 5.1), the deva-putta is called "devatā," having regarded a deva as a devatā. Likewise, Brahmās in "Those seven hundred exalted devatās, having come forth from the Brahma-world."

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"By your surpassing beauty, you stand, O devatā;
Illuminating all directions, like a star among medicinal herbs" (Vv. 75).

Attamanāti tuṭṭhamanā pītisomanassehi gahitamanā. Pītisomanassasahagatañhi cittaṃ domanassassa anokāsato tehi taṃ sakaṃ katvā gahitaṃ viya hoti.Attamanāti vā sakamanā. Anavajjapītisomanassasampayuttañhi cittaṃ sampati āyatiñca taṃsamaṅgino hitasukhāvahato ‘‘saka’’nti vattabbataṃ labhati, na itaraṃ.

Attamanā—glad of mind, with mind seized by joy and gladness. For a mind accompanied by joy and gladness is as if seized by them, having made them its own because there is no opportunity for sadness. Or, attamanā—having its own mind. For a mind conjoined with blameless joy and gladness obtains the state of being able to be called "its own" because it brings benefit and happiness to one conjoined with it in the present and future, but not otherwise.

Moggallānenāti moggallānagottassa brāhmaṇamahāsālassa puttabhāvato so mahāthero gottavasena ‘‘moggallāno’’ti paññāto, tena moggallānena.Pucchitāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanavasena pucchitā, attamanā sā devatā pañhaṃ byākāsīti yojanā. Attamanatā cassā ‘‘tampi nāma parittakampi kammaṃ evaṃ mahatiyā dibbasampattiyā kāraṇaṃ ahosī’’ti pubbepi sā attano puññaphalaṃ paṭicca antarantarā somanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, idāni pana ‘‘aññatarassa therassa katopi nāma kāro evaṃ uḷāraphalo, ayaṃ pana buddhānaṃ aggasāvako uḷāraguṇo mahānubhāvo, imampi passituṃ nipaccakārañca kātuṃ labhāmi, mama puññaphalapaṭisaṃyuttameva ca pucchaṃ karotī’’ti dvīhi kāraṇehi uppannā. Evaṃ sañjātabalavapītisomanassā sā therassa vacanaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchitvā pañhaṃ puṭṭhā byākāsi.

Moggallānenā: Because the great elder was the son of a brahmin mahāsāla of the Moggallāna gotta, he was known by the name "Moggallāna"; by that Moggallāna. Pucchitā: Asked in accordance with what she had seen, the deity being delighted, explained the question, is the meaning. Her delight was because "even such a small deed was the cause of such great divine fortune"; even before, she intermittently experienced joy reflecting on the fruit of her merit. But now, it arose for two reasons: "Even a deed done to some elder is so greatly fruitful, but this is the chief disciple of the Buddhas, of great qualities and great power, and I am able to see and pay respect to him, and he asks about the fruit of my merit." Having thus generated strong joy and gladness, she received the elder's words with her head and, being asked the question, explained it.

Pañhanti ñātuṃ icchitaṃ taṃ atthaṃviyākāsikathesi vissajjesi. Kathaṃ pana byākāsi?Puṭṭhāti puṭṭhākārato, pucchitākārenevāti attho. Ettha hi ‘‘pucchitā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘puṭṭhā’’ti vacanaṃ visesatthaniyamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Siddhe hi sati ārambho visesatthañāpakova hoti. Ko paneso visesattho? Byākaraṇassa pucchānurūpatā. Yañhi kammaphalaṃ dassetvā tassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ kammaṃ pucchitaṃ, tadubhayassa aññamaññānurūpabhāvavibhāvanā. Yena ca ākārena pucchā pavattā atthato ca byañjanato ca, tadākārassa byākaraṇassa pucchānurūpatā, tathā ceva vissajjanaṃ pavattaṃ. Iti imassa visesassa ñāpanatthaṃ ‘‘pucchitā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘puṭṭhā’’ti vuttaṃ.

Pañhaṃ: That matter that was wished to be known; viyākāsi: spoke, explained, answered. But how did she explain? Puṭṭhā: From the manner of the question, in the very manner asked, is the meaning. Here, having said "pucchitā," the repeated statement "puṭṭhā" should be seen as determining a specific meaning. Indeed, an undertaking, when there is accomplishment, reveals a specific meaning. What is that specific meaning? The answer's conformity to the question. For indeed, the deed that was asked about, after showing the fruit of the deed, is the manifestation of the mutual conformity of both. And the manner in which the question arose, both in meaning and in expression, the answer's conformity to the question was such that the explanation occurred in that very way. Thus, to make known this distinction, having said "pucchitā," "puṭṭhā" was said again.

Yassa kammassidaṃ phalanti idaṃ ‘‘pañha’’nti vuttassa atthassa sarūpadassanaṃ. Ayaṃ cettha attho – idaṃ pucchantassa pucchiyamānāya ca paccakkhabhūtaṃ anantaraṃ vuttappakāraṃ puññaphalaṃ, yassa kammassa taṃ ñātuṃ icchitattā pañhanti vuttaṃ puññakammaṃ byākāsīti.

Yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ: This is the showing of the nature of the matter that was said as "pañha." Here, the meaning is this: this immediately preceding type of meritorious result, which is directly apparent to both the one asking and the one being asked, is the meritorious deed regarding which she explained the meritorious deed, which was said as "pañha" because it was wished to be known.

5.Ahaṃ manussesūtiādi pañhassa byākaraṇākāro. Tatthaahanti devatā attānaṃ niddisati. ‘‘Manussesū’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘manussabhūtā’’ti vacanaṃ tadā attani manussaguṇānaṃ vijjamānatādassanatthaṃ. Yo hi manussajātikova samāno pāṇātipātādiṃ akattabbaṃ katvā daṇḍāraho tattha tattha rājādito hatthacchedādikammakāraṇaṃ pāpuṇanto mahādukkhaṃ anubhavati, ayaṃmanussanerayikonāma. Aparo manussajātikova samāno pubbekatakammunā ghāsacchādanampi na labhati, khuppipāsābhibhūto dukkhabahulo katthaci patiṭṭhaṃ alabhamāno vicarati, ayaṃmanussapetonāma. Aparo manussajātikova samāno parādhīnavutti paresaṃ bhāraṃ vahanto bhinnamariyādo vā anācāraṃ ācaritvā parehi santajjito maraṇabhayabhīto gahananissito dukkhabahulo vicarati hitāhitaṃ ajānanto niddājighacchādukkhavinodanādiparo, ayaṃmanussatiracchānonāma. Yo pana attano hitāhitaṃ jānanto kammaphalaṃ saddahanto hirottappasampanno dayāpanno sabbasattesu saṃvegabahulo akusalakammapathe parivajjento kusalakammapathe samācaranto puññakiriyavatthūni paripūreti, ayaṃ manussadhamme patiṭṭhitoparamatthato manussonāma. Ayampi tādisā ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘manussesu manussabhūtā’’ti. Manusse sattanikāye manussabhāvaṃ pattā manussadhammañca appahāya ṭhitāti attho.

5. Ahaṃ manussesū: etc., is the way of answering the question. There, ahaṃ: the deity indicates herself. Having said "manussesū," the repeated statement "manussabhūtā" is to show the existence of human qualities in herself at that time. For someone who, being of human birth, does what should not be done, such as killing living beings, and deserving punishment, incurs great suffering when he is subjected to hand-chopping and other actions from kings etc. This is called manussanerayiko. Another, being of human birth, does not obtain food and clothing due to past deeds, is overcome by hunger and thirst, and wanders in much suffering, not finding a place to stand. This is called manussapeto. Another, being of human birth, lives dependent on others, carrying the burden of others, or behaves improperly by transgressing boundaries, is threatened by others, is fearful of the danger of death, takes refuge in the forest, wanders in much suffering, not knowing what is beneficial or unbeneficial, intent only on dispelling suffering from sleep, hunger, and thirst. This is called manussatiracchāno. But someone who, knowing what is beneficial and unbeneficial to himself, believes in the result of deeds, is endowed with shame and fear of wrongdoing, is compassionate, is full of urgency towards all beings, avoids unwholesome courses of action, practices wholesome courses of action, and fulfills the bases for meritorious action—this person, established in human qualities, is paramatthato manusso. She, too, was such a person. Therefore, it was said, "manussesu manussabhūtā." In the assembly of seven beings, having attained the state of being human, and without abandoning human qualities, she stood, is the meaning.

Abbhāgatānanti abhiāgatānaṃ, sampattaāgantukānanti attho. Duvidhā hi āgantukā atithi abbhāgatoti. Tesu kataparicayo āgantuko atithi, akataparicayo abbhāgato. Kataparicayo akataparicayopi vā puretaraṃ āgato atithi, bhojanavelāyaṃ upaṭṭhito sampati āgato abbhāgato. Nimantito vā bhattena atithi, animantito abbhāgato. Ayaṃ pana akataparicayo animantito sampati āgato ca, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abbhāgatāna’’nti, garukārena panettha bahuvacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Āsati nisīdati etthāti āsanaṃ. Yaṃkiñci nisīdanayoggaṃ, idha pana pīṭhaṃ adhippetaṃ, tassa ca appakattā anuḷārattā ca‘‘āsanaka’’nti āha.Adāsinti ‘‘idamassa therassa dinnaṃ mayhaṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissati mahānisaṃsa’’nti sañjātasomanassā kammaṃ kammaphalañca saddahitvā tassa therassa paribhogatthāya adāsiṃ, nirapekkhapariccāgavasena pariccajinti attho.

Abbhāgatānaṃ: To those who have come near, to the arrived guests, is the meaning. For guests are of two kinds: atithi and abbhāgata. Among them, a guest with whom acquaintance has been made is atithi, one with whom acquaintance has not been made is abbhāgata. Or, a guest, whether acquaintance has been made or not, who has arrived previously is atithi; one who has arrived at mealtime, having come recently, is abbhāgata. Or, one invited to a meal is atithi, one not invited is abbhāgata. But this one was unacquainted, uninvited, and had come recently, referring to that, she said, "abbhāgatānaṃ," the plural is used here out of respect. Āsanaṃ: a seat, one sits here. Anything suitable for sitting, but here a stool is intended, and because it was small and not grand, she said ‘‘āsanaka’’. Adāsiṃ: Thinking "this given to this elder will be of great fruit and great benefit to me," having faith in deeds and the result of deeds, with joy arisen, I gave it for the elder's use, I gave it away in a manner of disinterested relinquishment, is the meaning.

Abhivādayinti abhivādanamakāsiṃ, pañcapatiṭṭhitena dakkhiṇeyyapuggale vandinti anto. Vandamānā hi taṃ tāyeva vandanakiriyāya vandiyamānaṃ ‘‘sukhinī hohi, arogā hohī’’tiādinā āsivādaṃ atthato vadāpesi nāma.Añjalikaṃ akāsinti dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇavisiṭṭhānaṃ apacāyanaṃ akāsinti attho.Yathānubhāvanti yathābalaṃ, tadā mama vijjamānavibhavānurūpanti attho.Adāsi dānanti annapānādideyyadhammapariccāgena dakkhiṇeyyaṃ bhojentī dānamayaṃ puññaṃ pasaviṃ.

Abhivādayiṃ: I made a salutation, respectfully worshiped the person worthy of offerings with the five-point prostration, is the meaning. For while she was worshiping him, by that very act of worship, she caused the one being worshiped to speak a blessing in meaning, such as, "May you be happy, may you be free from disease." Añjalikaṃ akāsiṃ: Holding the radiant añjali, the joined ten fingernails, on her head, she made a gesture of respect to those distinguished by qualities, is the meaning. Yathānubhāvaṃ: According to ability, according to my existing wealth at that time, is the meaning. Adāsiṃ dānaṃ: By relinquishing gifts such as food and drink, nourishing the one worthy of offerings, I generated meritorious deeds consisting of giving.

Ettha ca ‘‘aha’’nti idaṃ kammassa phalassa ca ekasantatipatitatādassanena sambandhabhāvadassanaṃ, ‘‘manussesu manussabhūtā’’ti idaṃ tassā puññakiriyāya adhiṭṭhānabhūtasantānavisesadassanaṃ, ‘‘abbhāgatāna’’nti idaṃ cittasampattidassanañceva khettasampattidassanañca dānassa viya paṭiggahaṇassa ca kiñci anapekkhitvā pavattitabhāvadīpanato. ‘‘Āsanakaṃ adāsiṃ yathānubhāvañca adāsi dāna’’nti idaṃ bhogasāradānadassanaṃ, ‘‘abhivādayiṃ añjalikaṃ akāsi’’nti idaṃ kāyasāradānadassanaṃ.

Here, "ahaṃ" shows the connection by indicating that the deed and the result belong to the same continuum, "manussesu manussabhūtā" shows the particular continuum that is the basis of her meritorious action, "abbhāgatānaṃ" shows the accomplishment of mind and the accomplishment of the field of merit, as well as the fact that the giving occurred without any expectation from the receiver. "Āsanakaṃ adāsiṃ yathānubhāvañca adāsiṃ dānaṃ" shows the giving of the essence of possessions, "abhivādayiṃ añjalikaṃ akāsiṃ" shows the giving of the essence of bodily action.

6.Tenāti tena yathāvuttena puññena hetubhūtena.Meti ayaṃ me-saddo ‘‘kicchena me adhigataṃ, halaṃ dāni pakāsitu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.65; ma. ni. 1.281; saṃ. ni. 1.172) karaṇe āgato, mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.182; a. ni. 4.257) sampadāne, mayhanti attho. ‘‘Pubbeva me, bhikkhave, sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.206; saṃ. ni. 4.14; a. ni. 3.104) sāmiatthe āgato, idhāpi sāmiatthe eva, mamāti attho. Svāyaṃ me-saddo tena me puññenāti ca me etādisoti ca ubhayattha sambandhitabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

6. Tenā: By that stated meritorious deed as the cause. Me: This word "me" occurs in the sense of instrument in places like "kicchena me adhigataṃ, halaṃ dāni pakāsituṃ" (it was obtained by me with difficulty, enough now to reveal it), meaning "by me". In the sense of dative in "sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū" (it is good for me, bhante, if the Blessed One would teach the Dhamma in brief), meaning "to me." In the sense of possessive in "pubbeva me, bhikkhave, sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato" (before my enlightenment, bhikkhus, while I was still an unenlightened Bodhisatta), meaning "mine." Here too it is in the possessive sense, meaning "mine." So this word "me" should be connected in both ways: "tena me puññena" and "me etādiso". The rest is as previously stated.

Evaṃ tāya devatāya pañhe byākate āyasmā mahāmoggallāno vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā saparivārāya tassā devatāya sātthikā ahosi. Thero tato manussalokaṃ āgantvā sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Gāthā eva pana saṅgahaṃ āruḷhāti.

Thus, when the question was explained by that deity, venerable Mahāmoggallāna taught the Dhamma in detail. That teaching was fruitful for that deity together with her retinue. The elder then came to the human world and reported all that occurrence to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that the occasion for a talk and taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. However, only the verses were included in the compilation.

Paṭhamapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the First-Seat Vimāna is finished.

2. Dutiyapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā
2. The Description of the Second-Seat Vimāna

Pīṭhaṃte veḷuriyamayanti dutiyapīṭhavimānaṃ. Tassa aṭṭhuppatti ca atthavaṇṇanā ca paṭhame vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sāvatthivāsinī kira ekā itthī attano gehaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ ekaṃ theraṃ passitvā pasannacittā tassa āsanaṃ dentī attano pīṭhaṃ upari nīlavatthena attharitvā adāsi. Tena tassā devaloke nibbattāya veḷuriyamayaṃ pallaṅkavimānaṃ nibbattaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –

Pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamayaṃ: The second-seat vimāna. Its occasion for a talk and its meaning should be understood in the way stated in the first one. But this is the difference: it is said that a certain woman living in Sāvatthī, seeing an elder entering her house for alms, with a gladdened mind, offered him a seat, spreading a blue cloth over her stool and giving it. By that, when she was reborn in the deva-world, a couch-vimāna made of beryl arose. Therefore, it was said:

8.

8.

‘‘Pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamayaṃ uḷāraṃ, manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāmaṃ;

"Your seat is made of beryl, grand, going at the speed of thought wherever you wish;
Adorned, wearing garlands, in fine clothes, you shine like lightning on a cloud peak.

9.

9.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such beauty yours? By what do you prosper here?
And do the enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind?

10.

10.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O greatly powerful goddess, what meritorious deed did you do as a human?
By what are you so ablaze with majesty, and does your beauty shine in all directions?"

11.

11.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That deity, delighted, asked by Moggallāna;
Being asked the question, she explained, 'This is the fruit of what deed?'"

12.

12.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, abbhāgatānāsanakaṃ adāsiṃ;

"As a human among humans, I gave a seat to the newcomers;
I bowed, I made the añjali, and gave a gift according to my ability.

13.

13.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that is such beauty mine, by that do I prosper here;
And do the enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to the mind.

14.

14.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I tell you, O bhikkhu of great power, what meritorious deed I did as a human;
By that am I so ablaze with majesty, and does my beauty shine in all directions."

8.Tatthaveḷuriyamayanti veḷuriyamaṇimayaṃ. Veḷuriyamaṇi nāma viḷūrapabbatassa viḷūragāmassa ca avidūre uppajjanakamaṇi. Tassa kira viḷūragāmaṭṭhāne ākaro, viḷūrassa pana avidūre bhavattā veḷuriyanteva paññāyittha. Taṃsadisavaṇṇanibhatāya devalokepissa tatheva nāmaṃ jātaṃ yathā taṃ manussaloke laddhanāmavaseneva devaloke devaputtānaṃ. Taṃ pana mayūragīvavaṇṇaṃ vā hoti, vāyasapattavaṇṇaṃ vā, siniddhaveṇupattavaṇṇaṃ vā. Idha pana mayūragīvavaṇṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ paṭhamapīṭhavimāne vuttasadisamevāti.

8. There, veḷuriyamayaṃ: Made of beryl gem. Veḷuriyamaṇi is the name of a gem that originates not far from Viḷūra mountain and Viḷūra village. It is said that its mine is in the Viḷūra village area, but because it is not far from Viḷūra, it was known as veḷuriya. Because of the similarity in color and appearance to that, the same name arose even in the deva-world, just as in the human world the devaputtas in the deva-world had names acquired in the human world. That is the color of a peacock's neck, or the color of a crow's wing, or the color of a smooth bamboo leaf. Here, it should be understood as the color of a peacock's neck. All the rest is similar to what was said in the first-seat vimāna.

Dutiyapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Second-Seat Vimāna is finished.

3. Tatiyapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā
3. The Description of the Third-Seat Vimāna

Pīṭhaṃ te sovaṇṇamayanti tatiyapīṭhavimānaṃ. Tassa vatthu rājagahe samuṭṭhitaṃ. Aññataro kira khīṇāsavatthero rājagahe piṇḍāya caritvā bhattaṃ gahetvā upakaṭṭhe kāle bhattakiccaṃ kātukāmo ekaṃ vivaṭadvāragehaṃ upasaṅkami. Tasmiṃ pana gehe gehasāminī itthī saddhā pasannā therassa ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘etha, bhante, idha nisīditvā bhattakiccaṃ karothā’’ti attano bhaddapīṭhaṃ paññāpetvā upari pītavatthaṃ attharitvā nirapekkhapariccāgavasena adāsi, ‘‘idaṃ me puññaṃ āyatiṃ sovaṇṇapīṭhapaṭilābhāya hotū’’ti patthanañca paṭṭhapesi. Atha there tattha nisīditvā bhattakiccaṃ katvā pattaṃ dhovitvā uṭṭhāya gacchante ‘‘bhante, idamāsanaṃ tumhākaṃyeva pariccattaṃ, mayhaṃ anuggahatthaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Thero tassā anukampāya taṃ pīṭhaṃ sampaṭicchitvā saṅghassa dāpesi. Sā aparena samayena aññatarena rogena phuṭṭhā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattītiādi sabbaṃ paṭhamavimānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –

Pīṭhaṃ te sovaṇṇamayaṃ: The third-seat vimāna. Its story arose in Rājagaha. It is said that a certain arahant elder, after wandering for alms in Rājagaha, having taken his meal, wishing to do his meal duties at a suitable time nearby, approached a house with an open door. In that house, the female householder, faithful and pleased, noticing the elder's manner, invited him, "Come, venerable sir, sit here and do your meal duties," and preparing her good seat, spread a yellow cloth over it, and gave it in a manner of disinterested relinquishment, and made the aspiration, "May this merit of mine lead to the attainment of a golden seat in the future." Then, as the elder, having sat there, done his meal duties, washed his bowl, and rising, was about to leave, she said, "Venerable sir, this seat is given to you, please use it to favor me." The elder, out of compassion for her, accepted the seat and gave it to the Saṅgha. After some time, afflicted by a certain disease, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven—all of that should be understood in the same way as stated in the description of the first vimāna. Therefore, it was said:

15.

15.

‘‘Pīṭhaṃ te sovaṇṇamayaṃ uḷāraṃ, manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāmaṃ;

"Your seat is made of gold, grand, going at the speed of thought wherever you wish;
Adorned, wearing garlands, in fine clothes, you shine like lightning on a cloud peak.

16.

16.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such beauty yours? By what do you prosper here?
And do the enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind?

17.

17.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O greatly powerful goddess, what meritorious deed did you do as a human?
By what are you so ablaze with majesty, and does your beauty shine in all directions?"

18.

18.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That deity, delighted, asked by Moggallāna;
Being asked the question, she explained, 'This is the fruit of what deed?'"

19.

19.

‘‘Appassa kammassa phalaṃ mamedaṃ, yenamhi evaṃ jalitānubhāvā;

"This is the fruit of a small deed of mine, by which I am so ablaze with majesty;
As a human among humans, in a previous birth in the human world.

20.

20.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

"I saw a bhikkhu without stain, very serene, without turbidity;
I gave him a seat, pleased with my own hands.

21.

21.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that is such beauty mine, by that do I prosper here;
And do the enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to the mind.

22.

22.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I tell you, O bhikkhu of great power, what meritorious deed I did as a human;
By that am I so ablaze with majesty, and does my beauty shine in all directions."

19.Yañca pana pañcamagāthāyaṃpurimāya jātiyā manussaloketiādi, ettha jāti-saddo attheva saṅkhatalakkhaṇe ‘‘jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’tiādīsu (dhātu. 71). Atthi nikāye ‘‘nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.71). Atthi paṭisandhiyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ, paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, tadupādāya sāvassa jātī’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 124). Atthi kule ‘‘akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.303). Atthi pasutiyaṃ ‘‘sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207). Atthi bhave ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.244; ma. ni. 1.53). Idhāpi bhave eva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā purimāya jātiyā purimasmiṃ bhave anantarātīte purime attabhāveti attho. Bhummatthe hidaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.Manussaloketi manussalokabhave, rājagahaṃ sandhāya vadati. Okāsaloko hi idha adhippeto, sattaloko pana ‘‘manussesū’’ti iminā vuttoyeva.

19. Moreover, in the fifth verse, the phrase "purimāya jātiyā manussaloke (in the previous existence, in the human world)" and so on, here the word "jāti (birth)" is used in the sense of conditioned characteristics, as in "jāti is included in two khandhas (aggregates)," etc. (dhātu. 71). It occurs in the Nikāyas as in "Niganthas are a kind of ascetic (samaṇajātī)," etc. (a. ni. 3.71). It occurs in relation to rebirth (paṭisandhi) as in "the first thought that arises in the mother's womb, the first consciousness that appears, from that arises their birth (jāti)," etc. (mahāva. 124). It occurs in relation to family (kula) as in "not reviled or reproached with regards to birth (jātivādenā)," etc. (dī. ni. 1.303). It occurs in relation to offspring (pasuti) as in "the Bodhisatta is born (sampatijāto), Ānanda," etc. (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207). It occurs in relation to existence (bhava) as in "even one existence, two existences," etc. (dī. ni. 1.244; ma. ni. 1.53). Here too, it should be understood as existence (bhava). Therefore, "purimāya jātiyā" means in the previous existence (purimasmiṃ bhave), in the immediately past, in the previous life (purime attabhāve). Here, the instrumental case (karaṇavacanaṃ) is in the locative sense (bhummatthe). "Manussaloke" means in the human world existence, referring to Rājagaha. Here, the world of space (okāsaloko) is intended, while the world of beings (sattaloko) is already mentioned by "manussesū (among humans)."

20.Addasanti addakkhiṃ.Virajanti vigatarāgādirajattā virajaṃ.Bhikkhunti bhinnakilesattā bhikkhuṃ, sabbaso kilesakālussiyābhāvena vippasannacittatāyavippasannaṃ,anāvilasaṅkappatāyaanāvilaṃ. Purimaṃ purimañcettha padaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, vigatarāgādirajattā bhinnakilesatāya bhikkhuṃ, bhinnakilesattā kilesakālussiyābhāvena vippasannaṃ, vippasannamanattā anāvilanti. Pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ vā padaṃ purimassa purimassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, virajaṃ bhikkhuguṇayogato. Bhinnakileso hi bhikkhu. Bhikkhuṃ vippasannabhāvato. Kilesakālussiyābhāvena vippasannamānaso hi bhikkhu. Vippasannaṃ anāvilasaṅkappabhāvatoti. Rāgarajābhāvena vā ‘‘viraja’’nti vuttaṃ, dosakālussiyābhāvena ‘‘vippasanna’’nti, mohabyākulābhāvena ‘‘anāvila’’nti. Evaṃbhūto paramatthato bhikkhu nāma hotīti ‘‘bhikkhu’’nti vuttaṃ.Adāsahanti adāsiṃ ahaṃ.Pīṭhanti tadā mama santike vijjamānaṃ bhaddapīṭhaṃ.Pasannāti kammaphalasaddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya ca pasannacittā.Sehi pāṇibhīti aññaṃ anāṇāpetvā attano hatthehi upanīya pīṭhaṃ paññāpetvā adāsinti attho.

20. "Addasaṃ" means I saw (addakkhiṃ). "Virajaṃ" means without dust (vigatarāgādirajattā), without the dust of rāga (passion), etc. "Bhikkhuṃ" means a bhikkhu because of broken kilesas (defilements) (bhinnakilesattā); "vippasannaṃ" because of the complete absence of defilement stain (kilesakālussiyābhāvena) and having a clear mind; "anāvilaṃ" because of unwavering intentions (anāvilasaṅkappatāya). Here, each preceding word is the reason (kāraṇavacanaṃ) for each succeeding word: because of being without the dust of rāga (passion), etc., a bhikkhu because of broken defilements; because of broken defilements, clear because of the absence of defilement stain; clear minded, therefore unwavering. Or, each succeeding word is the reason for each preceding word: viraja because of the qualities of a bhikkhu. A bhikkhu is one with broken defilements. Bhikkhuṃ vippasannabhāvato: a bhikkhu because of a clear state. Vippasannaṃ anāvilasaṅkappabhāvato: A bhikkhu with a clear mind because of unwavering intentions. Or, "viraja" is said because of the absence of the dust of rāga (passion), "vippasanna" because of the absence of the stain of dosa (aversion), and "anāvila" because of the absence of confusion from moha (delusion). One who is like this is truly called a bhikkhu in the ultimate sense (paramatthato), thus "bhikkhuṃ" is said. "Adāsahaṃ" means I gave (adāsiṃ ahaṃ). "Pīṭhaṃ" means the good seat (baddapīṭhaṃ) that was present with me at that time. "Pasannā" means with a mind pleased (pasannacittā) with faith in the results of kamma (action) and faith in the Triple Gem (ratanattayasaddhāya). "Sehi pāṇibhī" means without ordering another, having brought the seat near and prepared it with my own hands, I gave it.

Ettha ca ‘‘virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ vippasannamanāvila’’nti iminā khettasampattiṃ dasseti, ‘‘pasannā’’ti iminā cittasampattiṃ, ‘‘sehi pāṇibhī’’ti iminā payogasampattiṃ. Tathā ‘‘pasannā’’ti iminā sakkaccadānaṃ anupahaccadānanti ca ime dve dānaguṇā dassitā, ‘‘sehi pāṇibhī’’ti iminā sahatthena dānaṃ anupaviddhadānanti ime dve dānaguṇā dassitā, pītavatthassa attharaṇena nisīdanakālaññutāya cittiṃ katvā dānaṃ kālena dānanti ime dve dānaguṇā dassitāti veditabbā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

And here, with "virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ vippasannamanāvilaṃ" he shows the accomplishment of the field (khettasampattiṃ), with "pasannā" he shows the accomplishment of mind (cittasampattiṃ), and with "sehi pāṇibhī" he shows the accomplishment of effort (payogasampattiṃ). Similarly, with "pasannā" these two qualities of giving are shown: giving respectfully (sakkaccadānaṃ) and giving without disparaging (anupahaccadānaṃ); with "sehi pāṇibhī" these two qualities of giving are shown: giving with one's own hand (sahatthena dānaṃ) and giving without throwing away (anupaviddhadānaṃ); with spreading the seat with colored cloth, knowing the time for sitting, having made an impression, these two qualities of giving are shown: giving at the right time (kālena dānaṃ). The rest is as said below.

Tatiyapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Third Seat-Vimāna is complete.

4. Catutthapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā
4. The Description of the Fourth Seat-Vimāna

Pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamayanti catutthapīṭhavimānaṃ. Imassāpi vatthu rājagahe samuṭṭhitaṃ, taṃ dutiyavimāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Nīlavatthena hi attharitvā pīṭhassa dinnattā imissāpi vimānaṃ veḷuriyamayaṃ nibbattaṃ. Sesaṃ paṭhamavimāne vuttasadisaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –

Pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamayaṃ means the fourth seat-vimāna. The story of this also arose in Rājagaha and should be understood in the same way as described in the second vimāna. Because the seat was offered having been spread with a blue cloth, this vimāna was also born of veḷuriya. The rest is similar to that said in the first vimāna. Therefore, it was said:

23.

23.

‘‘Pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamayaṃ uḷāraṃ, manojavaṃ gacchati yenakāmaṃ;

"Your seat is made of veḷuriya, magnificent, it travels at the speed of thought wherever one wishes;
Adorned, bearing garlands, well-clothed, you shine like lightning on a mountain peak.

24.

24.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such radiance yours? By what do you prosper here?
And do those enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind?

25.

25.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, goddess of great power, what merit did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant, and does your complexion shine in all directions?"

26.

26.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna;
Replied to the question, (explaining) the result of which kamma this is."

27.

27.

‘‘Appassa kammassa phalaṃ mamedaṃ, yenamhi evaṃ jalitānubhāvā;

"This is the result of a small kamma for me, by which I am so radiantly powerful;
As a human being among humans, in a previous existence, in the human world,

28.

28.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

"I saw a bhikkhu without dust, clear, unwavering;
To him I gave a seat, pleased, with my own hands.

29.

29.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that is such radiance mine, by that do I prosper here;
And do those enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to the mind.

30.

30.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I tell you, bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did as a human being;
By that I am so radiantly powerful, and my complexion shines in all directions."

Etthāpi hi nīlavatthena attharitvā pīṭhassa dinnattā imissāpi vimānaṃ veḷuriyamayaṃ nibbattaṃ. Tenevettha ‘‘pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamaya’’nti ādito āgataṃ. Sesaṃ tatiyasadisamevāti tattha vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.

Here also, because the seat was offered having been spread with a blue cloth, this vimāna was also born of veḷuriya. Therefore, here "pīṭhaṃ te veḷuriyamayaṃ" appears from the beginning. The rest is similar to the third, and the meaning should be understood in the same way as said there.

Catutthapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Fourth Seat-Vimāna is complete.

5. Kuñjaravimānavaṇṇanā
5. The Description of the Kuñjara-Vimāna

Kuñjaro te varārohoti kuñjaravimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Athekadivasaṃ rājagahanagare nakkhattaṃ ghositaṃ. Nāgarā vīthiyo sodhetvā vālukaṃ okiritvā lājapañcamakāni pupphāni vippakiriṃsu, gehadvāre gehadvāre kadaliyo ca puṇṇaghaṭe ca ṭhapesuṃ, yathāvibhavaṃ nānāvirāgavaṇṇavicittā dhajapaṭākādayo ussāpesuṃ, sabbo jano attano attano vibhavānurūpaṃ sumaṇḍitapasādhito nakkhattakīḷaṃ kīḷi, sakalanagaraṃ devanagaraṃ viya alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ ahosi. Atha bimbisāramahārājā pubbacārittavasena mahājanassa cittānurakkhaṇatthañca attano rājabhavanato nikkhamitvā mahantena parivārena mahatā rājānubhāvena uḷārena sirisobhaggena nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karoti.

Kuñjaro te varāroho means the Kuñjara-Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was staying in Rājagaha, in the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Sanctuary. Then, one day, a festival was announced in the city of Rājagaha. The townspeople cleaned the streets, scattered sand, and sprinkled parched grain and five kinds of flowers, and placed banana trees and full pots at the door of each house, and raised various colorful flags and banners according to their means; all the people, adorned and decorated according to their wealth, played festival games; the entire city was decorated and prepared like a city of the gods. Then King Bimbisāra, according to his usual practice, to protect the minds of the people, came out of his royal palace with a large retinue, with great royal power, with magnificent splendor and beauty, circumambulating the city.

Tena ca samayena rājagahavāsinī ekā kuladhītā rañño taṃ vibhavasampattiṃ sirisobhaggaṃ rājānubhāvañca passitvā acchariyabbhutacittajātā ‘‘ayaṃ deviddhisadisā vibhavasampatti kīdisena nu kho kammunā labbhatī’’ti paṇḍitasammate pucchi. Te tassā kathesuṃ ‘‘bhadde, puññakammaṃ nāma cintāmaṇisadisaṃ kapparukkhasadisaṃ, khettasampattiyā cittasampattiyā ca sati yaṃ yaṃ patthetvā karoti, taṃ taṃ nipphādetiyeva. Apica āsanadānena uccākulīnatā hoti, annadānena balasampattipaṭilābho, vatthadānena vaṇṇasampattipaṭilābho, yānadānena sukhavisesapaṭilābho, dīpadānena cakkhusampattipaṭilābho, āvāsadānena sabbasampattipaṭilābho hotī’’ti. Sā taṃ sutvā ‘‘devasampatti ito uḷārā hoti maññe’’ti tattha cittaṃ ṭhapetvā puññakiriyāya ativiya ussāhajātā ahosi.

At that time, a young woman from a good family living in Rājagaha, seeing the king's wealth, splendor, beauty, and royal power, was filled with wonder and astonishment, thinking, "By what kamma is such wealth, like the power of the gods, obtained?" She asked those considered wise. They told her, "Good lady, merit (puññakammaṃ) is like a wish-fulfilling gem, like a wish-fulfilling tree; with the accomplishment of the field (khettasampattiyā) and the accomplishment of mind (cittasampattiyā), whatever one desires and does, that is surely accomplished. Moreover, by giving a seat, one gains high birth; by giving food, one gains strength; by giving clothes, one gains beauty; by giving vehicles, one gains special happiness; by giving lamps, one gains good eyesight; by giving dwellings, one gains all accomplishments." Hearing that, she placed her mind on the thought that "divine wealth is more magnificent than this," and became exceedingly enthusiastic about performing meritorious deeds.

Mātāpitaro cassā ahataṃ vatthayugaṃ navapīṭhaṃ ekaṃ padumakalāpaṃ sappimadhusakkharā taṇḍulakhīrāni ca paribhogatthāya pesesuṃ. Sā tāni disvā ‘‘ahañca dānaṃ dātukāmā, ayañca me deyyadhammo laddho’’ti tuṭṭhamānasā dutiyadivase dānaṃ sajjentī appodakamadhupāyāsaṃ sampādetvā, tassa parivārabhāvena aññampi bahuṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādetvā dānagge gandhaparibhaṇḍaṃ katvā vikasitapadumapattakiñjakkhakesaropasobhitesu padumesu āsanaṃ paññāpetvā, ahatena setavatthena attharitvā āsanassa catunnaṃ pādānaṃ upari cattāri padumāni mālāguḷañca ṭhapetvā, āsanassa upari vitānaṃ bandhitvā mālādāmaolambakadāmāni olambitvā, āsanassa samantato bhūmiṃ sakesarehi padumapattehi sabbasantharaṃ santharitvā ‘‘dakkhiṇeyye āgate pūjessāmī’’ti pupphapūritaṃ caṅkoṭakaṃ ekamante ṭhapesi.

Her parents sent her a new pair of cloths, a new seat, a lotus bud, and ghee, honey, sugar, rice, and milk for her use. Seeing these, and thinking, "I wish to give a gift, and this is the gift I have received," with a joyful mind, on the second day, preparing the gift, she prepared a thin rice-gruel with honey, and preparing many other edible foods as part of the offering, she made the offering place fragrant, arranged seats on lotuses adorned with blooming lotus petals, filaments, and stamens, spread them with new white cloth, placed four lotuses and garlands on top of the four legs of the seat, hung a canopy over the seat, and hung garlands and strings of flowers, and spread the ground all around the seat with all kinds of lotus petals with stamens, and placed a flower-filled basket on one side, thinking, "When worthy recipients come, I will honor them."

Athevaṃ katadānūpakaraṇasaṃvidhānā sīsaṃnhātā suddhavatthanivatthā suddhuttarāsaṅgā velaṃ sallakkhetvā ekaṃ dāsiṃ āṇāpesi ‘‘gaccha je, amhākaṃ tādisaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesāhī’’ti. Tena ca samayena āyasmā sāriputto sahassathavikaṃ nikkhipanto viya rājagahe piṇḍāya caranto antaravīthiṃ paṭipanno hoti. Atha sā dāsī theraṃ vanditvā āha ‘‘bhante, tumhākaṃ pattaṃ me dethā’’ti. ‘‘Ekissā upāsikāya anuggahatthaṃ ito ethā’’ti ca āha. Thero tassā pattaṃ adāsi. Sā theraṃ gehaṃ pavesesi. Atha sā itthī therassa paccuggamanaṃ katvā āsanaṃ dassetvā ‘‘nisīdatha, bhante, idamāsanaṃ paññatta’’nti vatvā there tattha nisinne sakesarehi padumapattehi theraṃ pūjayamānā āsanassa samantato okiritvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā sappimadhusakkharāsammissena appodakamadhupāyāsena parivisi. Parivisantī ca ‘‘imassa me puññassānubhāvena dibbagajakūṭāgārapallaṅkasobhitā dibbasampattiyo hontu, sabbāsu pavattīsu padumā nāma mā vigatā hontū’’ti patthanaṃ akāsi. Puna there katabhattakicce pattaṃ dhovitvā sappimadhusakkharāhi pūretvā pallaṅke atthataṃ sāṭakaṃ cumbaṭakaṃ katvā therassa hatthe ṭhapetvā there ca anumodanaṃ katvā pakkamante dve purise āṇāpesi ‘‘therassa hatthe pattaṃ imañca pallaṅkaṃ vihāraṃ netvā therassa niyyātetvā āgacchathā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu.

Having thus made the preparations for giving, having bathed her head, wearing clean clothes and a clean upper robe, watching for the time, she ordered a maid, "Go, dear, seek out a worthy recipient for us." At that time, Venerable Sāriputta, as if depositing a thousand coins, was walking for alms in Rājagaha, proceeding along the inner street. Then that maid, having bowed to the thera, said, "Venerable, give me your bowl." She also said, "Come here to give support to a female devotee." The thera gave her the bowl. She led the thera into the house. Then that woman, having greeted the thera, showed him the seat, saying, "Be seated, Venerable, this seat has been prepared," and when the thera was seated there, she honored the thera by scattering lotus petals with stamens all around the seat, bowed with five-point prostration, and served him with thin rice-gruel mixed with ghee, honey, and sugar. While serving, she made a wish, "By the power of this merit, may I have divine wealth adorned with divine elephant mansions, peaked houses, and couches; may lotuses never be absent from all my existences." Then, when the thera had finished his meal, she washed the bowl, filled it with ghee, honey, and sugar, folded the robe spread on the couch into a bundle, placed it in the thera's hand, and after the thera had given thanks, as he was leaving, she ordered two men, "Take the bowl and this couch in the thera's hand to the monastery, give them to the thera, and then return." They did so.

Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane yojanasatubbedhe kanakavimāne nibbatti accharāsahassaparivārā. Patthanāvasena cassā pañcayojanubbedho padumamālālaṅkato samantato padumapattakiñjakkhakesaropasobhito manuññadassano sukhasamphasso vividharatanaraṃsijālasamujjalahemābharaṇavibhūsito gajavaro nibbatti. Tassūpari yathāvuttasobhātisayayutto yojaniko kanakapallaṅko nibbatti. Sā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantī antarantarā taṃ kuñjaravimānassa upari ratanavicittaṃ pallaṅkaṃ abhiruyha mahatā devatānubhāvena nandanavanaṃ gacchati. Athekasmiṃ ussavadivase devatāsu yathāsakaṃ dibbānubhāvena uyyānakīḷanatthaṃ nandanavanaṃ gacchantīsūtiādinā sabbaṃ paṭhamapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanāyaṃ āgatasadisaṃ, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idha pana thero –

In the latter part of the day, having passed away, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, in a golden vimāna one hundred yojanas in extent, surrounded by a thousand nymphs. According to her wish, an elephant adorned with a lotus garland five yojanas in extent, adorned all around with lotus petals, filaments, and stamens, pleasing to see, pleasant to the touch, adorned with various jewel-ray nets and decorated with golden ornaments, was born. Above it, a golden couch one yojana in extent, with the aforementioned surpassing beauty, was born. Enjoying that divine wealth, from time to time she ascends that jewel-decorated couch on top of the Kuñjara-Vimāna and goes to the Nandana Grove with great divine power. Then, on a certain festival day, as the gods were going to the Nandana Grove for garden sports with their respective divine powers, everything is similar to what is mentioned in the description of the first Seat-Vimāna, therefore it should be understood in the same way as said there. Here, however, the thera said:

31.

31.

‘‘Kuñjaro te varāroho, nānāratanakappano;

"Your excellent mount is a kuñjara, adorned with various jewels;
Beautiful, powerful, endowed with speed, it soars in the sky.

32.

32.

‘‘Padumi padmapattakkhi, padmuppalajutindharo;

"Lotus-like, with lotus-petal eyes, bearing lotus and uppala garlands;
Its body is scattered with lotus powder, wearing golden lotus garlands.

33.

33.

‘‘Padumānusaṭaṃ maggaṃ, padmapattavibhūsitaṃ;

"Following a lotus-strewn path, adorned with lotus petals;
Standing, speaking sweetly, not aggressive, the elephant goes moderately.

34.

34.

‘‘Tassa pakkamamānassa, soṇṇakaṃsā ratissarā;

"As it proceeds, golden cymbals sound sweetly;
The sound of those is heard, like a five-piece orchestra.

35.

35.

‘‘Tassa nāgassa khandhamhi, sucivatthā alaṅkatā;

"On the nāga's shoulder, adorned with pure cloths;
You outshine the great host of nymphs with your beauty.

36.

36.

‘‘Dānassa te idaṃ phalaṃ, atho sīlassa vā pana;

"Is this the result of your generosity, or perhaps of your virtue?
Or of the añjali-kamma (act of reverential salutation)? Tell me, asked thus."

31.Tatthakuñjaro te varārohoti kuñje giritaṭe ramati abhiramati, tattha vā ravati koñcanādaṃ nadanto vicarati. Kuṃ vā pathaviṃ tadabhighātena jarayatīti kuñjaro, giricarādibhedo manussaloke hatthī, ayaṃ pana kīḷanakāle kuñjarasadisatāya evaṃ vutto. Āruyhatīti āroho, ārohanīyoti attho. Varo aggo seṭṭho ārohoti varāroho, uttamayānanti vuttaṃ hoti.Nānāratanakappanoti nānāvidhāni ratanāni etesanti nānāratanā, kumbhālaṅkārādihatthālaṅkārā. Tehi vihito kappanno sannāho yassa so nānāratanakappano. Ruciṃ abhiratiṃ detītiruciro,manuññoti attho.Thāmavāti thiro, balavāti attho.Javasampannoti sampannajavo, sīghajavoti vuttaṃ hoti.Ākāsamhi samīhatīti ākāse antalikkhe sammā īhati, āruḷhānaṃ khobhaṃ akaronto carati gacchatīti attho.

31. There, "kuñjaro te varāroho" means it delights and rejoices in the mountain cave (kuñje giritaṭe ramati abhiramati), or it roams there uttering a roaring sound (koñcanādaṃ nadanto vicarati). Or, because it wears down the earth (kuṃ) with that striking (tadabhighātena jarayati), it is a kuñjara; a type of mountain-dwelling elephant in the human world, but this one is so-called because of its similarity to a kuñjara during playtime. That which is mounted is a mount (āroho), that which is fit to be mounted is the meaning. The best (varo), foremost, most excellent mount is a varāroho, it means the most excellent vehicle. "Nānāratanakappano" means various kinds of jewels are on it, therefore nānāratanā, ornaments for the trunk and other elephant ornaments. With those, the trappings (kappanno) that are made, it is nānāratanakappano. That which gives pleasure (ruciṃ detīti) is ruciro, it means pleasing. "Thāmavā" means strong, it means powerful. "Javasampanno" means endowed with speed (sampannajavo), it means quick speed. "Ākāsamhi samīhati" means in the sky (ākāse antalikkhe) it moves properly (sammā īhati), it means it moves without disturbing those who are riding.

32.Padumīti padumasamānavaṇṇatāya ‘‘paduma’’nti laddhanāmena kumbhavaṇṇena samannāgatattā padumī.Padmapattakkhīti kamaladalasadisanayane, ālapanametaṃ tassā devatāya.Padmuppalajutindharoti dibbapadumuppalamālālaṅkatasarīratāya tahaṃ tahaṃ vipphurantaṃ vijjotamānaṃ padumuppalajutiṃ dhāretīti padumuppalajutindharo.Padmacuṇṇābhikiṇṇaṅgoti padumapattakiñjakkhakesarehi samantato okiṇṇagatto.Soṇṇapokkharamāladhāti hemamayakamalamālābhārī.

32.Padumī: She is called "Padumī" because she has a complexion like a lotus and a well-formed (kumbha) form, having acquired the name "Paduma." Padmapattakkhī: (She has) eyes like lotus petals; this is an address to that goddess. Padmuppalajutindharo: Because her body is adorned with a garland of divine lotuses and blue lotuses, she bears the splendor of lotuses and blue lotuses, which gleam and shimmer in various ways. Padmacuṇṇābhikiṇṇaṅgo: Her body is covered all over with the pollen of lotus petals and filaments. Soṇṇapokkharamāladhā: She wears a garland made of golden lotus petals.

33.Padumānusaṭaṃ maggaṃ padmapattavibhūsitanti hatthino padanikkhepe padanikkhepe tassa pādaṃ sandhārentehi mahantehi padumehi anusaṭaṃ vippakiṇṇaṃ, nānāvirāgavaṇṇehi tesaṃyeva ca pattehi ito cito ca paribbhamantehi visesato maṇḍitatāya vibhūsitaṃ maggaṃ gacchatīti yojanā.Ṭhitanti idaṃ maggavisesanaṃ, padumapattavibhūsitaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ magganti attho.Vaggūti cāru, kiriyāvisesanañcetaṃ, ma-kāro padasandhikaro.Anugghātīti na ugghāti, attano upari nisinnānaṃ īsakampi khobhaṃ akarontoti attho.Mitanti nimmitaṃ, nikkhepapadaṃ vītikkamanti attho. Ayañhettha attho ‘‘vaggu cāru padanikkhepaṃ katvā gacchatī’’ti.Mitanti vā parimitaṃ pamāṇayuttaṃ, nātisīghaṃ, nātisaṇikanti vuttaṃ hoti.Vāraṇoti hatthī. So hi paccatthikavāraṇato gamanaparikkilesavāraṇato ca ‘‘vāraṇo’’ti vuccati.

33.Padumānusaṭaṃ maggaṃ padmapattavibhūsitaṃ: The path is strewn and covered with large lotuses placed in the footprint of the elephant at each step, and it is especially adorned and embellished with the petals of those very lotuses of various colors, scattered here and there; this is the connection. Ṭhitaṃ: This qualifies the path; the meaning is, the path stands adorned with lotus petals. Vaggū: Beautiful; this is an adverb; the letter "ma" is a euphonic addition. Anugghātī: Not overturning; meaning, not causing even the slightest disturbance to those sitting on top of it. Mitaṃ: Measured; exceeding the placement of the feet is avoided, is the meaning. The meaning here is: "Having made a beautiful and pleasing foot placement, it goes." Mitaṃ: Or measured, proportionate; it means not too fast, not too slow. Vāraṇo: Elephant. He is called "vāraṇo" because he wards off adversaries and wards off the fatigue of travel.

34.Tassapakkamamānassa, soṇṇasaṃkā ratissarāti tassa yathāvuttassa kuñjarassa gacchantassa soṇṇakaṃsā suvaṇṇamayā ghaṇṭā ratissarā ramaṇīyasaddā manuññanigghosā olambantīti adhippāyo. Tassa hi kuñjarassa ubhosu passesu mahākolambappamāṇā maṇimuttādikhacitā hemamayā anekasatā mahantiyo ghaṇṭā tahaṃ tahaṃ olambamānā pacalanti, yato chekena gandhabbakena payuttavāditato ativiya manoharasaddo niccharati. Tenāha‘‘tesaṃ suyyati nigghoso, tūriye pañcaṅgike yathā’’ti. Tassattho – yathā nāma ātataṃ vitataṃ ātatavitataṃ ghanaṃ susiranti evaṃ pañcaṅgike tūriye kusalehi vādiyamāne ṭhānuppattiyā mandatāravibhāgaṃ dassentena gāyantena samīrito vāditasaro vaggu rajanīyo nigghoso suyyati, evaṃ tesaṃ sovaṇṇakaṃsānaṃ tapanīyaghaṇṭānaṃ nigghoso suyyatīti.

34.Tassa pakkamamānassa, soṇṇasaṃkā ratissarā: As that elephant, described above, goes, golden cymbals, golden bells, with delightful sounds and pleasing tones, hang down; this is the idea. For on both sides of that elephant, hundreds of large golden bells, adorned with jewels, pearls, etc., the size of large baskets, hang and sway; from them, a sound arises that is exceedingly delightful, as if played by a skilled musician. Therefore, it is said, ‘‘tesaṃ suyyati nigghoso, tūriye pañcaṅgike yathā’’ The meaning of that is: Just as when a five-part orchestra (ātataṃ, vitataṃ, ātatavitataṃ, ghanaṃ, susiraṃ) is skillfully played, a beautiful and lovely sound is heard, modulated and controlled by a singer who demonstrates the variations of tempo and rhythm appropriate to the occasion, so is the sound heard from those golden cymbals, those golden bells.

35.Nāgassāti hatthināgassa.Mahantanti sampattimahattenāpi saṅkhyāmahattenāpi mahantaṃ.Accharāsaṅghanti devakaññāsamūhaṃ.Vaṇṇenāti rūpena.

35.Nāgassa: Of the elephant. Mahantaṃ: Great in terms of the greatness of its achievement and in terms of numerical greatness. Accharāsaṅghaṃ: A multitude of divine nymphs. Vaṇṇena: By beauty.

36.Dānassāti dānamayapuññassa.Sīlassāti kāyikasaṃvarādisaṃvarasīlassa. Vā-saddo avuttavikappanattho. Tena abhivādanādiṃ avuttaṃ cārittasīlaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.

36.Dānassa: Of meritorious giving. Sīlassa: Of virtue, such as restraint of bodily action. The word "vā" implies alternatives not mentioned. Therefore, it includes unmentioned customary virtues such as paying respects.

Evaṃ therena pucchitā sā devatā pañhaṃ vissajjesi, tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ –

Thus, that deity, questioned by the Thera, explained the question; to show that meaning:

37.

37.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;
Pañhaṃ puṭṭhā viyākāsi, yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti. –

Ayaṃ gāthā dhammasaṅgāhakehi vuttā, tassā attho heṭṭhā vutto eva.

This verse was spoken by the compilers of the Dhamma; its meaning has already been stated below.

38.

38.

‘‘Disvāna guṇasampannaṃ, jhāyiṃ jhānarataṃ sataṃ;

‘‘Disvāna guṇasampannaṃ, jhāyiṃ jhānarataṃ sataṃ;
Adāsiṃ pupphābhikiṇṇaṃ, āsanaṃ dussasanthataṃ.

39.

39.

‘‘Upaḍḍhaṃ padmamālāhaṃ, āsanassa samantato;

‘‘Upaḍḍhaṃ padmamālāhaṃ, āsanassa samantato;
Abbhokirissaṃ pattehi, pasannā sehi pāṇibhi.

40.

40.

‘‘Tassa kammakusalassa, idaṃ me īdisaṃ phalaṃ;

‘‘Tassa kammakusalassa, idaṃ me īdisaṃ phalaṃ;
Sakkāro garukāro ca, devānaṃ apacitā ahaṃ.

41.

41.

‘‘Yo ve sammāvimuttānaṃ, santānaṃ brahmacārinaṃ;

‘‘Yo ve sammāvimuttānaṃ, santānaṃ brahmacārinaṃ;
Pasanno āsanaṃ dajjā, evaṃ nande yathā ahaṃ.

42.

42.

‘‘Tasmā hi attakāmena, mahattamabhikaṅkhatā;

‘‘Tasmā hi attakāmena, mahattamabhikaṅkhatā;
Āsanaṃ dātabbaṃ hoti, sarīrantimadhārina’’nti. – devatāya vuttagāthā;

38.Tatthaguṇasampannanti sabbehi sāvakaguṇehi samannāgataṃ, tehi vā paripuṇṇaṃ. Etena sāvakapāramiñāṇassa matthakappattiṃ dasseti.Jhāyinti ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti duvidhenāpi jhānena jhāyanasīlaṃ, tena vā jhāpetabbaṃ sabbasaṃkilesapakkhaṃ jhāpetvā ṭhitaṃ. Tato eva jhāne ratantijhānarataṃ. Satanti samānaṃ, santaṃ vā, sappurisanti attho.Pupphābhikiṇṇanti pupphehi abhikiṇṇaṃ, kamaladalehi abhippakiṇṇanti attho.Dussasanthatanti vatthena upari atthataṃ.

38.There, guṇasampannaṃ: Endowed with all the qualities of a disciple or complete with them. This shows the attainment of the peak of the pāramī-knowledge of a disciple. Jhāyiṃ: Accustomed to meditating with the two types of meditation, ārammaṇūpanijjhāna and lakkhaṇūpanijjhāna, or having burnt away (jhāpetvā) the entire category of defilements and remaining thus, and therefore, jhānarataṃ: delighting in jhāna. Sataṃ: Peaceful or calm, a good person is the meaning. Pupphābhikiṇṇaṃ: Strewn with flowers, scattered with lotus petals is the meaning. Dussasanthataṃ: Spread over with a cloth.

39.Upaḍḍhaṃ padmamālāhanti upaḍḍhaṃ padumapupphaṃ ahaṃ.Āsanassa samantatoti therena nisinnassa āsanassa samantā bhūmiyaṃ.Abbhokirissanti abhiokiriṃ abhippakiriṃ. Kathaṃ?Pattehīti, tassa upaḍḍhapadumassa visuṃ visuṃ katehi pattehi pupphavassābhivassanakaniyāmena okirinti attho.

39.Upaḍḍhaṃ padmamālāhaṃ: Half a lotus garland I. Āsanassa samantato: All around the seat on which the Thera was sitting. Abbhokirissaṃ: I scattered, I sprinkled. How? Pattehi: With petals, having made separate petals of that half lotus, I scattered them according to the manner of showering a rain of flowers is the meaning.

40.Idaṃ me īdisaṃ phalanti iminā ‘‘kuñjaro te varāroho’’tiādinā therena gahitaṃ aggahitañca āyuyasasukharūpādibhedaṃ attano dibbasampattiṃ ekato dassetvā punapi therena aggahitameva attano ānubhāvasampattiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sakkāro garukāro’’tiādimāha. Tena ‘‘na kevalaṃ bhante tumhehi yathāvuttameva idha mayhaṃ puññaphalaṃ, apica kho idaṃ dibbaṃ ādhipateyyampī’’ti dasseti. Tatthasakkāroti ādarakiriyā, devehi attano sakkātabbatāti attho. Tathāgarukāroti garukātabbatā.Devānanti devehi.Apacitāti pūjitā.

40.Idaṃ me īdisaṃ phalaṃ: This such fruit of mine; having shown in one place her divine prosperity, which includes what was mentioned by the Thera such as "your excellent elephant ride," and also what was not mentioned, such as the distinctions of life, fame, happiness, and beauty, again to show her attainment of power, which was not mentioned by the Thera, she said ‘‘sakkāro garukāro’’ etc. Thus, she shows "not only, venerable sir, is this the fruit of my merit as you have said, but also this divine sovereignty." There, sakkāro: Act of respect, meaning the state of being respected by the gods. Likewise, garukāro: the state of being honored. Devānaṃ: By the gods. Apacitā: Worshipped.

41.Sammāvimuttānanti suṭṭhu vimuttānaṃ sabbasaṃkilesappahāyīnaṃ.Santānanti santakāyavacīmanokammānaṃ sādhūnaṃ. Maggabrahmacariyassa ca sāsanabrahmacariyassa ca ciṇṇattābrahmacārinaṃ. Pasanno āsanaṃ dajjāti kammaphalasaddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya ca pasannamānaso hutvā yadi āsanamattampi dadeyya.Evaṃ nande yathā ahanti yathā ahaṃ tena āsanadānena etarahi nandāmi modāmi, evameva aññopi nandeyya modeyya.

41.Sammāvimuttānaṃ: Of those well-liberated, who have abandoned all defilements. Santānaṃ: Of the good ones who have calmed their bodily, verbal, and mental actions. Because they have practiced the Noble Eightfold Path and the teachings, brahmacārinaṃ: leading a pure life. Pasanno āsanaṃ dajjā: If, with a mind pleased by faith in the Law of Karma and faith in the Triple Gem, one were to give even just a seat. Evaṃ nande yathā ahaṃ: Just as I now rejoice and am glad because of that giving of a seat, so too may another rejoice and be glad.

42.Tasmāti tena kāraṇena.Hi-saddo nipātamattaṃ.Attakāmenāti attano hitakāmena. Yo hi attano hitāvahaṃ kammaṃ karoti, na ahitāvahaṃ, so attakāmo.Mahattanti vipākamahattaṃ.Sarīrantimadhārinanti antimaṃ dehaṃ dhārentānaṃ, khīṇāsavānanti attho. Ayañhettha attho – yasmā arahataṃ āsanadānena ahaṃ evaṃ dibbasampattiyā modāmi, tasmā aññenāpi attano abhivuddhiṃ patthayamānena antimasamussaye ṭhitānaṃ āsanaṃ dātabbaṃ, natthi tādisaṃ puññanti dasseti. Tesaṃ vuttasadisamevāti.

42.Tasmā: Therefore. Hi: A mere particle. Attakāmena: By one who desires his own good. For one who does a deed that brings about his own good, and not a deed that brings about harm, is one who desires his own good. Mahattaṃ: Greatness of result. Sarīrantimadhārinaṃ: To those who bear their last body, meaning the arahants. The meaning here is: Since I rejoice thus in divine prosperity by giving a seat to arahants, therefore, another too, desiring his own advancement, should give a seat to those who abide in their final existence; there is no such merit, it shows. The rest is similar to what has been said.

Kuñjaravimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Kuñjara-Vimāna is finished.

6. Paṭhamanāvāvimānavaṇṇanā
6. Description of the First-Boat-Vimāna

Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃnāvanti nāvāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ viharante soḷasamattā bhikkhū aññatarasmiṃ gāmakāvāse vasitvā vutthavassā ‘‘bhagavantaṃ passissāma, dhammañca suṇissāmā’’ti sāvatthiṃ uddissa gimhasamaye addhānamaggaṃ paṭipannā, antarāmagge ca nirudako kantāro, te ca tattha ghammābhitattā kilantā tasitā pānīyaṃ alabhamānā aññatarassa gāmassa avidūrena gacchanti. Tattha aññatarā itthī udakabhājanaṃ gahetvā udakatthāya udapānābhimukhī gacchati. Atha te bhikkhū taṃ disvā ‘‘yatthāyaṃ itthī gacchati, tattha gate pānīyaṃ laddhuṃ sakkā’’ti pipāsāparetā taṃdisābhimukhā gantvā udapānaṃ disvā tassā avidūre aṭṭhaṃsu. Sā itthī tato udakaṃ gahetvā nivattitukāmā te bhikkhū disvā ‘‘ime ayyā udakena atthikā pipāsitā’’ti ñatvā garucittīkāraṃ upaṭṭhapetvā udakena nimantesi. Te pattathavikato parissāvanaṃ nīharitvā parissāvetvā yāvadatthaṃ pānīyaṃ pivitvā hatthapāde sītale katvā tassā itthiyā pānīyadāne anumodanaṃ vatvā agamaṃsu.

Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ: A boat-vimāna. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, about sixteen monks, having lived during the rains in a certain village residence, intending to see the Blessed One and hear the Dhamma, set out on a long journey to Sāvatthi in the summer. In the middle of the road, there was a waterless wilderness, and they, scorched by the heat, tired, and thirsty, unable to find water, were going near a certain village. There, a certain woman, having taken a water pot, was going towards a well to get water. Then those monks, seeing her, thinking "if we go where this woman is going, it will be possible to get water," overcome with thirst, went in that direction and, seeing the well, stood not far from her. That woman, having taken water from there, wishing to return, seeing those monks, knowing that "these venerable ones need water and are thirsty," having established a respectful attitude, invited them with water. They, having taken out a filter from their bag, having filtered (the water), and having drunk water to their satisfaction, having cooled their hands and feet, having spoken words of appreciation for the woman’s giving of water, departed.

Sā taṃ puññaṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā antarantarā anussarantī aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Tassā puññānubhāvena kapparukkhopasobhitaṃ mahantaṃ vimānaṃ uppajji. Taṃ vimānaṃ parikkhipitvā muttajālarajatavibhūsitā viya sikatāvakiṇṇapaṇḍarapulinataṭā maṇikkhandhanimmalasalilavāhinī saritā. Tassā ubhosu tīresu uyyānavimānadvāre ca mahatī pokkharaṇī pañcavaṇṇapadumasaṇḍamaṇḍitā saha suvaṇṇanāvāya nibbatti. Sā tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantī nāvāya kīḷantī laḷantī vicarati. Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ devadhītaraṃ nāvāya kīḷantiṃ disvā tāya katapuññakammaṃ pucchanto –

She, having kept that merit in her heart, remembering it from time to time, later died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. By the power of her merit, a great vimāna arose, adorned with wish-fulfilling trees. Surrounding that vimāna, like a sandy plain strewn with sand, adorned with pearl nets and silver, was a river flowing with water as clear as a crystal pillar. On both banks of that river, at the garden and at the vimāna’s entrance, a large pond arose, adorned with a grove of five-colored lotuses, together with a golden boat. Enjoying divine prosperity there, she wandered about, playing and sporting in the boat. Then one day, Venerable Mahā Moggallāna, while wandering on a divine tour, seeing that goddess playing in the boat, asking about the meritorious deed she had done, said:

43.

43.

‘‘Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ, nāri āruyha tiṭṭhasi;

‘‘Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ, nāri āruyha tiṭṭhasi;
Ogāhasi pokkharaṇiṃ, padmaṃ chindasi pāṇinā.

44.

44.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;
Uppajjanti ca te bhogā, ye keci manaso piyā.

45.

45.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve,

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve,
Manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;
Kenāsi evaṃ jalitānubhāvā,
Vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. – āha;

Tato therena puṭṭhāya devatāya vissajjitākāraṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārehi –

Then, to show the manner in which the deity, questioned by the Thera, explained, the reciters said:

46.

46.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;
Pañhaṃ puṭṭhā viyākāsi, yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti. –

Ayaṃ gāthā vuttā.

This verse was spoken.

47.

47.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;
Disvāna bhikkhū tasite kilante, uṭṭhāya pātuṃ udakaṃ adāsiṃ.

48.

48.

‘‘Yo ve kilantāna pipāsitānaṃ, uṭṭhāya pātuṃ udakaṃ dadāti;

‘‘Yo ve kilantāna pipāsitānaṃ, uṭṭhāya pātuṃ udakaṃ dadāti;
Sītodakā tassa bhavanti najjo, pahūtamalyā bahupuṇḍarīkā.

49.

49.

‘‘Taṃ āpagā anupariyanti sabbadā, sītodakā vālukasanthatā nadī;

‘‘Taṃ āpagā anupariyanti sabbadā, sītodakā vālukasanthatā nadī;
Ambā ca sālā tilakā ca jambuyo, uddālakā pāṭaliyo ca phullā.

50.

50.

‘‘Taṃbhūmibhāgehi upetarūpaṃ, vimānaseṭṭhaṃ bhusa sobhamānaṃ;

‘‘Taṃbhūmibhāgehi upetarūpaṃ, vimānaseṭṭhaṃ bhusa sobhamānaṃ;
Tassīdha kammassa ayaṃ vipāko, etādisaṃ puññakatā labhanti.

51.

51.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;
Uppajjanti ca me bhogā, ye keci manaso piyā.

52.

52.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;
Tenamhi evaṃ jalitānubhāvā, vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

Ayaṃ devatāya vissajjitākāro.

This is the manner in which the deity explained.

43.Tatthasuvaṇṇacchadananti vicittabhittiviracanehi rattasuvaṇṇamayehi ubhohi passehi paṭicchāditabbhantaratāya ceva nānāratanasamujjalitena kanakamayālaṅkārena upari chāditatāya ca suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ.Nāvanti potaṃ. So hi orato pāraṃ pavati gacchatīti poto, satte netīti nāvāti ca vuccati.Nārīti tassā devadhītāya ālapanaṃ. Narati netīti naro, puriso. Yathā hi paṭhamapakatibhūto satto itarāya pakatiyā seṭṭhatthena puri setīti ‘‘puriso’’ti vuccati, evaṃ nayanaṭṭhena ‘‘naro’’ti. Puttabhātubhūtopi hi puggalo mātujeṭṭhabhaginīnaṃ pituṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, pageva bhattubhūto. Narassa esāti nārī, ayañca samaññā manussitthīsu pavattā ruḷhivasena itarāsupi tathā vuccati.Ogāhasi pokkharaṇinti satipi rattuppalanīluppalādike bahuvidhe ratanamaye jalajakusume pokkharasaṅkhātānaṃ dibbapadumānaṃ tattha yebhuyyena atthitāya ‘‘pokkharaṇī’’ti laddhanāmaṃ dibbasaraṃ jalavihāraratiyā anupavisasi.Padmaṃ chindasi pāṇināti rajatamayanāḷaṃ padumarāgaratanamayapattasaṅghātaṃ kanakamayakaṇṇikākiñjakkhakesaraṃ dibbakamalaṃ līlāravindaṃ kattukāmatāya tava hatthena bhañjasi.

43. Here, suvaṇṇacchadana means that it is a golden covering because the interior is covered on both sides with exquisite wall decorations made of red gold and because it is covered above with a golden decoration adorned with various jewels. Nāva means a boat. It is called a pota because it crosses from this shore to the other, and it is called a nāva because it leads beings (neti). Nārī is an address to that divine maiden. Nara means one who leads (neti), a person. Just as a being who is primarily of one nature is called "purisa" due to excelling (puri seti) over other natures, similarly, "nara" is used in the sense of leading (nayana). Even a person who is a son or brother stands in the place of the father to his mother and elder sisters, all the more so when he is a husband. Nārī means belonging to a nara, and this designation, prevalent among human women, is also used for others in a conventional sense. Ogāhasi pokkharaṇi means you enter a divine pond, named "pokkharaṇī" because of the abundance there of divine lotuses, despite the presence of various jewel-made aquatic flowers such as red and blue lotuses, for the pleasure of water sports. Padmaṃ chindasi pāṇinā means you break with your hand a divine lotus, a playful lotus (līlāravinda), which has a silver stalk, clusters of petals made of padmarāga jewels, and a golden pericarp and filaments, desiring to make it.

47.Tasiteti pipāsite.Kilanteti tāya pipāsāya addhānaparissamena ca kilantakāye.Uṭṭhāyāti uṭṭhānavīriyaṃ katvā, ālasiyaṃ anāpajjitvāti attho.

47. Tasite means thirsty. Kilante means with a body weary from that thirst and the fatigue of the journey. Uṭṭhāyā means having made an effort to rise, without succumbing to laziness, is the meaning.

48.Yo vetiādinā yathā ahaṃ, evaṃ aññepi āyatanagatena udakadānapuññena etādisaṃ phalaṃ paṭilabhantīti diṭṭhena adiṭṭhassa anumānavidhiṃ dassentī therena puṭṭhamatthaṃ sādhāraṇato vissajjeti. Tatthatassātitanti ca yathāvuttapuññakārinaṃ paccāmasati.

48. Beginning with Yo ve, the Elder, showing the method of inferring the unseen from the seen, declares the matter that was asked in a general way, stating that just as he did, others also obtain such a result by the merit of offering water with attentive mind. Here, tassā and ta refer back to the one who performed the aforementioned meritorious deed.

49.Anupariyantīti anurūpavasena parikkhipanti. Tassa vasanaṭṭhānaparikkhipanena sopi parikkhitto nāma hoti.Tilakāti bandhujīvakapupphasadisapupphā ekā rukkhajāti.Uddālakāti vātaghātakā, ye ‘‘rājarukkhā’’tipi vuccanti.

49. Anupariyantī means they surround in a suitable manner. By surrounding his dwelling place, he too is considered surrounded. Tilakā are a type of tree with flowers similar to bandhujīvaka flowers. Uddālakā are those that dispel the wind, also called "rājarukkhā".

50.Taṃbhūmibhāgehīti tādisehi bhūmibhāgehi, yathāvuttapokkharaṇīnadīuyyānavantehi bhūmipadesehīti attho.Upetarūpanti pāsaṃsiyabhāvena upetaṃ, tesaṃ pokkharaṇīādīnaṃ vasena ramaṇīyasannivesanti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhusa sobhamānanti bhusaṃ ativiya virocamānaṃ vimānaseṭṭhaṃ labhantīti yojanā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.

50. Taṃbhūmibhāgehī means with such parts of the land, with those places of land abounding in ponds, rivers, and parks as mentioned before, is the meaning. Upetarūpa means endowed with praiseworthy beauty, that is to say, a delightful arrangement in terms of those ponds, etc. Bhusa sobhamāna means obtaining an excellent mansion that shines exceedingly, is the connection. The rest is as previously stated.

Paṭhamanāvāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the first Nāva-vimāna is finished.

7. Dutiyanāvāvimānavaṇṇanā
7. Description of the second Nāva-vimāna

Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃnāvanti dutiyanāvāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ viharante aññataro khīṇāsavatthero upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya gāmakāvāse vassaṃ upagantukāmo sāvatthito taṃ gāmaṃ uddissa pacchābhattaṃ addhānamaggapaṭipanno, maggaparissamena kilanto tasito antarāmagge aññataraṃ gāmaṃ sampatto, bahigāme tādisaṃ chāyūdakasampannaṭṭhānaṃ apassanto parissamena ca abhibhuyyamāno cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ pavisitvā dhuragehasseva dvāre aṭṭhāsi. Tattha aññatarā itthī theraṃ passitvā ‘‘kuto, bhante, āgatatthā’’ti pucchitvā maggaparissamaṃ pipāsitabhāvañca ñatvā ‘‘etha, bhante’’ti gehaṃ pavesetvā ‘‘idha nisīdathā’’ti āsanaṃ paññāpetvā adāsi. Tattha nisinne pādodakaṃ pādabbhañjanatelañca datvā tālavaṇṭaṃ gahetvā bīji. Pariḷāhe vūpasante madhuraṃ sītalaṃ sugandhaṃ pānakaṃ yojetvā adāsi. Thero taṃ pivitvā paṭippassaddhakilamatho anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattīti sabbaṃ anantaravimānasadisanti veditabbaṃ. Gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi. Tena vuttaṃ –

Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāva means the second Nāva-vimāna. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthī, a certain arahant Elder, wishing to spend the rainy season in a village settlement near the approaching vassūpanāyika, set out on the road after his meal from Sāvatthī towards that village. Weary and thirsty from the journey, he arrived at a certain village along the way. Not finding a suitable place with shade and water outside the village and overcome by fatigue, he put on his robe, entered the village, and stood at the door of a householder. There, a certain woman, seeing the Elder, asked, "Where have you come from, Venerable Sir?" and, learning of his weariness from the journey and his thirst, said, "Come in, Venerable Sir," led him into the house, and provided a seat, saying, "Please sit here." After he was seated, she gave him water for his feet and oil for massaging his feet, and then fanned him with a palm leaf fan. When the heat had subsided, she prepared a sweet, cool, and fragrant drink and gave it to him. The Elder, having drunk it and his weariness having subsided, gave thanks and departed. Later, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Everything should be understood as similar to the preceding vimāna. There is nothing new in the verses either. Therefore, it was said:

53.

53.

‘‘Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ, nāri āruyha tiṭṭhasi;

"A golden-covered boat, maiden, you ascend and stand upon,
You plunge into the pond, you break the lotus with your hand.

54.

54.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such your complexion, by what do you prosper here?
And do possessions arise for you, whatever delights the mind?

55.

55.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, goddess of great power, what merit did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant in glory, and your complexion shines in every direction?"

56.

56.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, delighted in mind, questioned by Moggallāna,
Replied to the question asked, the fruit of which deed this is."

57.

57.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;

"I, a human among humans, in a previous birth in the human world,
Having seen a bhikkhu thirsty and weary, rising up, I gave water to drink.

58.

58.

‘‘Yo ve kilantassa pipāsitassa, ṭṭhāya pātuṃ udakaṃ dadāti;

"Whoever to a weary and thirsty one, rising up, gives water to drink,
Cool-watered rivers are his, abundant with garlands and many white lotuses.

59.

59.

‘‘Taṃ āpagā anupariyanti sabbadā, sītodakā vālukasanthatā nadī;

"Those rivers always flow around him, cool-watered rivers spread with sand,
Mangoes, sal trees, and tilakā and jambu trees, uddālakā and pāṭali trees in bloom.

60.

60.

‘‘Taṃbhūmibhāgehi upetarūpaṃ, vimānaseṭṭhaṃ bhusa sobhamānaṃ;

"Endowed with such parts of the land, an excellent mansion, exceedingly shining,
This is the result of that deed; those who do merit obtain such things.

61.

61.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such is my complexion; by that, I prosper here;
And do possessions arise for me, whatever delights the mind.

62.

62.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I tell you, bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did as a human being;
By that, I am so radiant in glory, and my complexion shines in every direction."

Atthavaṇṇanāsupi idha ekova theroti apubbaṃ natthi.

In the commentaries on the meaning as well, there is only one Elder here, so there is nothing new.

Dutiyanāvāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the second Nāva-vimāna is finished.

8. Tatiyanāvāvimānavaṇṇanā
8. Description of the third Nāva-vimāna

Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃnāvanti tatiyanāvāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā janapadacārikaṃ caranto mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ kosalajanapade yena thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. Assosuṃ kho thūṇeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā ‘‘samaṇo kira gotamo amhākaṃ gāmakhettaṃ anuppatto’’ti. Atha thūṇeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā appasannā micchādiṭṭhikā maccherapakatā ‘‘sace samaṇo gotamo imaṃ gāmaṃ pavisitvā dvīhatīhaṃ vaseyya, sabbaṃ imaṃ janaṃ attano vacane patiṭṭhapeyya, tato brāhmaṇadhammo patiṭṭhaṃ na labheyyā’’ti tattha bhagavato avāsāya parisakkantā nadītitthesu ṭhapitanāvāyo apanesuṃ, setusaṅkamanāni ca avalañje akaṃsu, tathā papāmaṇḍapādīni, ekaṃ udapānaṃ ṭhapetvā itarāni udapānāni tiṇādīhi pūretvā pidahiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ udāne (udā. 69) ‘‘atha kho thūṇeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā udapānaṃ tiṇassa ca bhusassa ca yāva mukhato pūresuṃ ‘mā te muṇḍakā samaṇakā pānīyaṃ apaṃsū’’’ti.

Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāva means the third Nāva-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One, wandering in the countryside, arrived with a large Saṅgha of bhikkhus in the Kosala country at a certain brahmin village named Thūṇaṃ. The brahmin householders of Thūṇaṃ heard, "It seems that the samaṇa Gotama has arrived in our village area." Then, the brahmin householders of Thūṇaṃ, displeased, of wrong view, and stingy, thinking, "If the samaṇa Gotama enters this village and stays here for two or three nights, he will establish all these people in his doctrine, and then the brahminical dharma will not gain a foothold," busied themselves preventing the Blessed One from staying there. They removed the boats placed at the river crossings, destroyed the bridges and walkways, and also the water pavilions, etc. Leaving one well, they filled the other wells with grass, etc., and covered them up. Therefore, it was said in the Udāna (Udā. 69): "Then the brahmin householders of Thūṇaṃ filled the well to the brim with grass and chaff, thinking, 'Let not these shaven-headed samaṇas drink water.'"

Bhagavā tesaṃ taṃ vippakāraṃ ñatvā te anukampanto saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena ākāsena nadiṃ atikkamitvā gantvā anukkamena thūṇaṃ brāhmaṇagāmaṃ patvā maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle paññatte āsane nisīdi. Tena ca samayena sambahulā udakahāriniyo bhagavato avidūrena atikkamanti. Tasmiñca gāme ‘‘sace samaṇo gotamo idhāgamissati, na tassa paccuggamanādikaṃ kātabbaṃ, gehaṃ āgatassa cassa sāvakānañca bhikkhāpi na dātabbā’’ti katikā katā hoti.

The Blessed One, knowing their opposition and feeling compassion for them, crossed the river through the air with the Saṅgha of bhikkhus and, gradually approaching the brahmin village of Thūṇaṃ, left the road and sat down on a seat prepared at the foot of a certain tree. At that time, many women carrying water were passing not far from the Blessed One. In that village, an agreement had been made: "If the samaṇa Gotama comes here, no welcome or the like should be done for him, and no alms should be given to him or his disciples who come to the house."

Tattha aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa dāsī ghaṭena pānīyaṃ gahetvā gacchantī bhagavantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaparivutaṃ nisinnaṃ disvā bhikkhū ca maggaparissamena kilante tasite ñatvā pasannacittā pānīyaṃ dātukāmā hutvā ‘‘yadipi me gāmavāsino ‘samaṇassa gotamassa na kiñci dātabbaṃ, sāmīcikammampi na kātabba’nti katikaṃ katvā ṭhitā, evaṃ santepi yadi ahaṃ īdise puññakkhette dakkhiṇeyye labhitvā pānīyadānamattenāpi attano patiṭṭhaṃ na kareyyaṃ, kadāhaṃ ito dukkhajīvitato muccissāmi, kāmaṃ me ayyako sabbepime gāmavāsino maṃ hanantu vā bandhantu vā, īdise puññakkhette pānīyadānaṃ dassāmi evā’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā aññāhi udakahārinīhi vāriyamānāpi jīvite nirapekkhā sīsato pānīyaghaṭaṃ otāretvā ubhohi hatthehi pariggahetvā ekamante ṭhapetvā sañjātapītisomanassā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā pānīyena nimantesi. Bhagavā tassā cittappasādaṃ oloketvā taṃ anuggaṇhanto pānīyaṃ parissāvetvā hatthapāde dhovitvā pānīyaṃ pivi, ghaṭe udakaṃ parikkhayaṃ na gacchati. Sā taṃ disvā puna pasannacittā ekassa bhikkhussa adāsi, tathā aparassa aparassāti sabbesampi adāsi, udakaṃ na khīyateva. Sā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā yathāpuṇṇena ghaṭena gehābhimukhī agamāsi. Tassā sāmiko brāhmaṇo pānīyassa dinnabhāvaṃ sutvā ‘‘imāya gāmavattaṃ bhinnaṃ, ahañca gārayho kato’’ti kodhena pajjalanto taṭataṭāyamāno taṃ bhūmiyaṃ pātetvā hatthehi ca pādehi ca pahari. Sā tena upakkamena jīvitakkhayaṃ patvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbati, vimānaṃ cassā paṭhamanāvāvimāne vuttasadisaṃ uppajji.

There, a certain brahmin's slave woman, carrying water in a pot, saw the Blessed One seated surrounded by the Saṅgha of bhikkhus and, knowing that the bhikkhus were weary and thirsty from the journey, with a clear mind, desiring to give water, thought, "Even though my fellow villagers have made an agreement that 'nothing should be given to the samaṇa Gotama, and no respectful act should be done,' even so, if I, having obtained such a field of merit, a worthy recipient, do not establish myself by even just offering water, when will I be freed from this miserable life? Let my master and all these villagers kill or bind me; I will certainly give water to such a field of merit." Having made this resolution, despite being prevented by the other water carriers, disregarding her own life, she lowered the water pot from her head, took it with both hands, placed it to one side, and with joy and gladness having arisen, approached the Blessed One, paid homage with the five-point prostration, and invited him to take water. The Blessed One, observing her purity of mind and accepting her offering, strained the water, washed his hands and feet, and drank the water; the water in the pot did not diminish. Seeing that, with a clear mind again, she gave it to one bhikkhu, and likewise to another and another, and to all of them, the water did not run out. Rejoicing and delighted, she went towards her home with the pot as full as before. Her master, the brahmin, hearing that the water had been given, thinking, "By this, the village custom has been broken, and I have been made contemptible," blazing with anger, scolding her, knocked her to the ground and struck her with his hands and feet. She, meeting her end through that assault, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and her vimāna arose similar to that described in the first Nāva-vimāna.

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi ‘‘iṅgha me tvaṃ, ānanda, udapānato pānīyaṃ āharā’’ti. Thero ‘‘idāni, bhante, udapāno thūṇeyyakehi dūsito, na sakkā pānīyaṃ āharitu’’nti āha. Bhagavā dutiyampi tatiyampi āṇāpesi. Tatiyavāre thero bhagavato pattaṃ ādāya udapānābhimukho agamāsi. Gacchante there udapāne udakaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hutvā uttaritvā samantato sandati, sabbaṃ tiṇabhusaṃ upalavitvā sayameva apagacchati. Tena sandamānena salilena uparūpari vaḍḍhantena aññe jalāsaye pūretvā taṃ gāmaṃ parikkhipantena gāmappadeso ajjhottharīyati. Taṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā brāhmaṇā acchariyabbhutacittajātā bhagavantaṃ khamāpesuṃ, taṅkhaṇaññeva udakogho antaradhāyi. Te bhagavato ca bhikkhusaṅghassa ca nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ saṃvidhāya svātanāya nimantetvā dutiyadivase mahādānaṃ sajjetvā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena parivisitvā sabbe thūṇeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā bhagavantaṃ bhuttāviṃ onītapattapāṇiṃ payirupāsantā nisīdiṃsu.

Then the Blessed One addressed the Venerable Ānanda, "Come now, Ānanda, bring me water from the well." The Elder said, "Now, Venerable Sir, the well has been defiled by the Thūṇeyyakas; it is not possible to bring water." The Blessed One commanded him a second and third time. The third time, the Elder, taking the Blessed One's bowl, went towards the well. As the Elder went, the water in the well became full, overflowed, and flowed out all around, all the grass and chaff floated away, and the water receded by itself. With that flowing water, increasing more and more, filling the other reservoirs and surrounding the village, the village area was flooded. Seeing that miracle, the brahmins, with minds filled with wonder and amazement, asked forgiveness from the Blessed One. At that very moment, the flood of water disappeared. They prepared a dwelling place for the Blessed One and the Saṅgha of bhikkhus and, inviting them for the next day, prepared a great almsgiving on the second day, served the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, with the Buddha at its head, with excellent foods and edibles, and all the brahmin householders of Thūṇaṃ sat down, attending on the Blessed One, who had finished his meal and withdrawn his hand from the bowl.

Tena ca samayena sā devatā attano sampattiṃ paccavekkhitvā tassā kāraṇaṃ upadhārentī taṃ ‘‘pānīyadāna’’nti ñatvā pītisomanassajātā ‘‘handāhaṃ idāneva bhagavantaṃ vandissāmi, sammāpaṭipannesu katānaṃ appakānampi kārānaṃ uḷāraphalatañca manussaloke pākaṭaṃ karissāmī’’ti ussāhajātā accharāsahassaparivārā uyyānādisahitena vimānena saddhiṃyeva mahatiyā deviddhiyā mahantena devānubhāvena mahājanakāyassa passantasseva āgantvā vimānato oruyha bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā abhivādetvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ bhagavā tassā parisāya kammaphalaṃ paccakkhato vibhāvetukāmo –

At that time, that goddess, reflecting on her own attainment and considering its cause, knowing that it was "the giving of water," filled with joy and gladness, thinking, "Now I will go and pay homage to the Blessed One and make known in the human world the great fruitfulness of even small deeds done to those who are practicing well," filled with enthusiasm, surrounded by a thousand nymphs, together with her vimāna, including gardens and the like, with great divine power and great divine majesty, while the great multitude was watching, she came down from the vimāna, approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and stood with her hands clasped in añjali. Then the Blessed One, wishing to reveal directly to that assembly the fruit of her deed—

63.

63.

‘‘Suvaṇṇacchadanaṃ nāvaṃ, nāri āruyha tiṭṭhasi;

"A golden-covered boat, maiden, you ascend and stand upon,
You plunge into the pond, you break the lotus with your hand.

64.

64.

‘‘Kūṭāgārā nivesā te, vibhattā bhāgaso mitā;

"Your dwellings are peaked houses, divided, measured into portions,
Shining, they illuminate on all four sides.

65.

65.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such your complexion, by what do you prosper here?
And do possessions arise for you, whatever delights the mind?

66.

66.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ,

"I ask you, goddess of great power, what merit did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant in glory, and your complexion shines in every direction?"—

Catūhi gāthāhi pucchi.

He asked with four verses.

67.

67.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, sambuddheneva pucchitā;

"That deity, delighted, questioned by the Buddha himself; when asked a question, she explained the fruit of which action this is." –

Saṅgītikārā āhaṃsu.

So said the compilers.

68.

68.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;

"I, being a human among humans, in a former birth in the human world; having seen monks thirsty and weary, having risen, gave water to drink.

69.

69.

‘‘Yo ve kilantāna pipāsitānaṃ, uṭṭhāya pātuṃ udakaṃ dadāti;

"Whoever, indeed, to the weary and thirsty, having risen, gives water to drink; for them rivers of cool water arise, abundant with lotuses and many puṇḍarīka lotuses.

70.

70.

‘‘Taṃ āpagā anupariyanti sabbadā, sītodakā vālukasanthatā nadī;

"Those rivers always flow around him, cool-watered rivers spread with sand; mangoes and sāla trees, tilaka and jambu trees, uddālaka and pāṭali trees, all in bloom.

71.

71.

‘‘Taṃbhūmibhāgehi upetarūpaṃ, vimānaseṭṭhaṃ bhusa sobhamānaṃ;

"Endowed with such beautiful landscapes, an excellent, greatly shining celestial mansion; this is the result of that action, such merit-makers obtain.

72.

72.

‘‘Kūṭāgārā nivesā me, vibhattā bhāgaso mitā;

"Loft houses and dwellings are mine, divided into portions, measured; flashing, they shine, on all four sides.

73.

73.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such beauty is mine; by that, I prosper here; and those enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to my mind.

74.

74.

‘‘Akkhāmi te buddha mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I declare to you, Buddha, great in power, the merit I did when I was a human; by that, I am of such radiant power, and my beauty shines in all directions; this is the fruit of that action for me; the Buddha gave water for my benefit." –

Vissajjanagāthāyo.

These are verses of explanation.

63.Tattha kiñcāpi sā devatā yadā bhagavā pucchi, tadā taṃ nāvaṃ āruyha na ṭhitā, na pokkharaṇiṃ ogāhati, nāpi padumaṃ chindati, kammānubhāvacoditā pana abhiṇhaṃ jalavihārapasutā tathā karotīti taṃ kiriyāvicchedaṃ dassanavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañca attho na kevalamidheva, atha kho heṭṭhimesupi evameva daṭṭhabbo.

63. There, although that deity, when the Blessed One asked, did not stand having boarded that boat, nor plunge into the pond, nor pluck a lotus, yet, urged by the power of her karma, being constantly given to water-sports, she does so; this is said only from the viewpoint of showing the unbroken activity. And this meaning is to be understood not only here, but also in the subsequent instances.

72.Kūṭāgārāti suvaṇṇamayakaṇṇikābaddhagehavanto.Nivesāti nivesanāni, kaccharānīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vibhattā bhāgaso mitā’’ti. Tāni hi catusālabhūtāni aññamaññassa paṭibimbabhūtāni viya paṭivibhattarūpāni samappamāṇatāya bhāgaso mitāni viya honti.Daddallamānāti ativiya vijjotamānā.Ābhantīti maṇiratanakanakaraṃsijālehi obhāsenti.

72. Kūṭāgārā: houses adorned with golden pinnacles. Nivesā: dwelling places, meaning courtyards. Therefore, he said, "divided into portions, measured." For those four-sided structures, being like reflections of each other, are of distinct form and appear measured in portions due to their uniform dimensions. Daddallamānā: exceedingly radiant. Ābhantī: they illuminate with networks of rays of jewels, gems, and gold.

74.Mamāti idaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ, mama kammassa mama atthāyāti ayañhettha yojanā.Udakaṃ apāyīti yadetaṃ udakadānaṃ vuttaṃ, etassa puññakammassa idaṃ phalaṃ yāyaṃ dibbasampatti, yasmā mamatthāya sadevake loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo buddho bhagavā mayā dinnaṃ udakaṃ apāyīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

74. Mamā: this is with reference to what precedes and follows, the connection here is, "for my action, for my benefit." Udakaṃ apāyī: this fruit, which is divine prosperity, is the result of that meritorious act, the giving of water that was mentioned, because the Buddha, the foremost recipient of offerings in the world with its deities, drank the water given by me for my benefit. The rest is as previously stated.

Evaṃ pasannamānasāya devatāya bhagavā sāmukkaṃsikaṃ dhammadesanaṃ karonto saccāni pakāsesi. Sā desanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi, sampattaparisāyapi dhammadesanā sātthikā ahosi.

To the deity with such a pleased mind, the Blessed One, making a supreme Dhamma talk, revealed the Truths. At the end of that talk, she was established in the fruit of stream-entry, and the Dhamma talk was fruitful also for the assembled company.

Tatiyanāvāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Third Account of the Boat-Mansion is Finished.

9. Dīpavimānavaṇṇanā
9. Account of the Lamp-Mansion

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti dīpavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ viharante uposathadivase sambahulā upāsakā uposathikā hutvā purebhattaṃ yathāvibhavaṃ dānaṃ datvā kālasseva bhuñjitvā suddhavatthanivatthā suddhuttarāsaṅgā gandhamālādihatthā pacchābhattaṃ vihāraṃ gantvā manobhāvanīye bhikkhū payirupāsitvā sāyanhe dhammaṃ suṇanti. Vihāreyeva vasitukāmānaṃ tesaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantānaṃyeva sūriyo atthaṅgato, andhakāro jāto. Tatthekā aññatarā itthī ‘‘idāni dīpālokaṃ kātuṃ yutta’’nti cintetvā attano gehato padīpeyyaṃ āharāpetvā padīpaṃ ujjāletvā dhammāsanassa purato ṭhapetvā dhammaṃ suṇi. Sā tena padīpadānena attamanā pītisomanassajātā hutvā vanditvā attano gehaṃ gatā. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane jotirasavimāne nibbatti. Sarīrasobhā panassā ativiya pabhassarā aññe deve abhibhavitvā dasa disā obhāsayamānā tiṭṭhati. Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ carantoti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idha pana –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇena: (This is the) Lamp-Mansion. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī, on a Uposatha day, many lay followers, observing the uposatha, having given alms according to their means before the meal, and having eaten early, clad in white garments and with white upper robes, with perfumes and garlands in their hands, went to the monastery after the meal, attended upon the monks who were pleasing to the mind, and listened to the Dhamma in the evening. For those who wished to stay in the monastery, while they were listening to the Dhamma, the sun set and darkness arose. There, a certain woman thought, "Now it is fitting to make a lamp offering," and having had a lamp brought from her house, lit the lamp and placed it in front of the Dhamma seat and listened to the Dhamma. She, delighted by that lamp offering, filled with joy and gladness, having paid homage, went to her house. In the latter part (of her life), having passed away, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven in a radiant, shining mansion. Her bodily splendor was exceedingly bright, surpassing the other deities and standing illuminating the ten directions. Then, one day, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a divine tour—all should be understood as in the manner that has come down from the beginning. Here, however –

75.

75.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity; illuminating all directions, like a medicinal herb, a star.

76.

76.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such beauty yours? By what do you prosper here? And do enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind?

77.

77.

‘‘Kena tvaṃ vimalobhāsā, atirocasi devatā;

"By what are you of spotless radiance, outshining the deities? By what do all directions shine with all your limbs?

78.

78.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O deity of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human? By what are you of such radiant power, and does your beauty shine in all directions?" –

Catūhi gāthāhi pucchi.

He asked with four verses.

79.

79.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That deity, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna; when asked a question, she explained the fruit of which action this is."

80.

80.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;

"I, being a human among humans, in a former birth in the human world; in that darkness, in the gloom, at the time for lamps, gave a lamp.

81.

81.

‘‘Yo andhakāramhi timīsikāyaṃ, padīpakālamhi dadāti dīpaṃ;

"Whoever, in darkness, in the gloom, at the time for lamps, gives a lamp; a radiant, shining mansion arises, abundant with lotuses and many puṇḍarīka lotuses.

82.

82.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such beauty is mine; by that, I prosper here; and do enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to the mind.

83.

83.

‘‘Tenāhaṃ vimalobhāsā, atirocāmi devatā;

"By that, I am of spotless radiance, outshining the deities; by that, all directions shine with all my limbs.

84.

84.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I declare to you, O monk of great power, the merit I did when I was a human; by that, I am of such radiant power, and does my beauty shine in all directions." –

Vissajjesi.

She explained.

75.Tatthaabhikkantena vaṇṇenāti ettha abhikkanta-saddo ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.20; udā. 45; cūḷava. 383) khaye āgato. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bhante, abhikkantaṃ, bhante’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. ‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’tiādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. Idhāpi abhirūpe eva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmāabhikkantenāti atikantena atimanāpena, abhirūpenāti attho.Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena.Obhāsentī disā sabbāti sabbāpi dasa disā jotentī ekālokaṃ karontī. Kiṃ viyāti āha‘‘osadhī viya tārakā’’ti. Ussannā pabhā etāya dhīyati, osadhīnaṃ vā anubalappadāyikāti katvā ‘‘osadhī’’ti laddhanāmā tārakā yathā samantato ālokaṃ kurumānā tiṭṭhati, evameva tvaṃ sabbā disā obhāsayantī tiṭṭhasīti.

75. There, in abhikkantena vaṇṇena, the word abhikkanta occurs in the sense of "decline" in "The night has passed, venerable sir, the first watch has ended," (A.N. 8.20; Ud. 45; Cūḷava. 383); in the sense of "beautiful" in "This one is more surpassing and excellent than these four individuals," (A.N. 4.100); in the sense of "approval" in "Excellent, venerable sir, excellent, venerable sir," (D.N. 1.250; Pārā. 15); in the sense of "lovely" in "With surpassing beauty, illuminating all directions," (V.V. 857). Here too, it should be understood as "lovely." Therefore, abhikkantena means "exceeding," "very pleasing," meaning "lovely." Vaṇṇena: with beauty of complexion. Obhāsentī disā sabbā: illuminating all the ten directions, making a single light. What is it like? He said, ‘‘osadhī viya tārakā’’: just as a star, named "medicinal herb" because the light is discerned by it, or because it gives strength to medicinal herbs, stands making light from all sides, even so you stand illuminating all directions.

77.Sabbagattehīti sabbehi sarīrāvayavehi, sakalehi aṅgapaccaṅgehi obhāsatīti adhippāyo, hetumhi cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.Sabbā obhāsate disāti sabbāpi dasadisā vijjotati. ‘‘Obhāsare’’tipi paṭhanti, tesaṃ sabbā disāti bahuvacanameva daṭṭhabbaṃ.

77. Sabbagattehi: with all the bodily parts, the intention is that it shines with all the limbs; this instrumental case is in the sense of the reason. Sabbā obhāsate disā: all the ten directions shine forth. Some read "obhāsare"; for them, "sabbā disā" should be understood as plural.

81.Padīpakālamhīti padīpakaraṇakāle, padīpujjalanayogge andhakāreti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yo andhakāramhi timīsikāya’’nti, bahale mahandhakāreti attho.Dadāti dīpanti padīpaṃ ujjālento vā anujjālento vā padīpadānaṃ dadāti, padīpopakaraṇāni dakkhiṇeyye uddissa pariccajati.Upapajjati jotirasaṃ vimānanti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena jotirasaṃ vimānaṃ upagacchatīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

81. Padīpakālamhi: at the time for making a lamp, meaning in darkness suitable for lighting a lamp. Therefore he said, "yo andhakāramhi timīsikāyaṃ," meaning in thick, great darkness. Dadāti dīpaṃ: either lighting or not lighting a lamp, he gives a lamp offering, he dedicates the lamp accessories intending (them) for worthy recipients. Upapajjati jotirasaṃ vimānaṃ: he approaches a radiant, shining mansion, in the sense of taking rebirth. The rest is as previously stated.

Atha yathāpucchite atthe devatāya kathite thero tameva kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā dānādikathāya tassā kallacittādibhāvaṃ ñatvā saccāni pakāsesi, saccapariyosāne saparivārā sā devatā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Thero tato āgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi, bhagavā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā jātā, mahājano visesato dīpadāne sakkaccakārī ahosīti.

Then, after the deity had spoken about the matter as asked, the Elder, having known her state of having a pure mind, etc., from the story of the origin and from the talk about giving, revealed the Truths; at the end of the Truths, that deity together with her retinue was established in the fruit of stream-entry. The Elder, having come from there, announced that occurrence to the Blessed One; the Blessed One, concerning that matter, extensively taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. That teaching became fruitful for the great multitude; the great multitude became especially diligent in giving lamps.

Dīpavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Account of the Lamp-Mansion is Finished.

10. Tiladakkhiṇavimānavaṇṇanā
10. Account of the Sesame-Seed-Gift Mansion

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti tiladakkhiṇavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena ca samayena rājagahe aññatarā itthī gabbhinī tile dhovitvā ātape sukkhāpeti telaṃ kātukāmā. Sā ca parikkhīṇāyukā taṃ divasameva cavanadhammā, nirayasaṃvattanikaṃ cassā kammaṃ okāsaṃ katvā ṭhitaṃ. Atha naṃ bhagavā paccūsavelāyaṃ lokaṃ volokento dibbacakkhunā disvā cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ itthī ajja kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbattissati, yaṃnūnāhaṃ tilabhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇena taṃ saggūpagaṃ kareyya’’nti. So sāvatthito taṅkhaṇeneva rājagahaṃ gantvā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahe piṇḍāya caranto anupubbena tassā gehadvāraṃ pāpuṇi. Sā itthī bhagavantaṃ passitvā sañjātapītisomanassā sahasā uṭṭhahitvā katañjalī aññaṃ dātabbayuttakaṃ apassantī hatthapāde dhovitvā tile rāsiṃ katvā ubhohi hatthehi pariggahetvā añjalipūraṃ tilaṃ bhagavato patte ākiritvā bhagavantaṃ vandi. Taṃ bhagavā anukampamāno ‘‘sukhinī hohī’’ti vatvā pakkāmi. Sā tassā rattiyā paccūsasamaye kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne suttapabuddhā viya nibbatti.

Abhikkantena vaṇṇena: (This is the) Sesame-Seed-Gift Mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jetavana, in Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery. And at that time, in Rājagaha, a certain pregnant woman, having washed sesame seeds, was drying them in the sun, wishing to make oil. And she was of diminished lifespan, destined to die that very day; and an action of hers leading to hell was standing having made an opportunity. Then the Blessed One, surveying the world at dawn with his divine eye, saw her and thought, "This woman, having died today, will be reborn in hell; what if I were to make her go to heaven by accepting alms of sesame seeds?" He, from Sāvatthī, having gone to Rājagaha at that very moment, having dressed in the morning time, taking his bowl and robe, wandering for alms in Rājagaha, gradually reached the door of her house. That woman, having seen the Blessed One, with joy and gladness arisen, suddenly stood up and, with hands clasped, not seeing anything else fit to be given, having washed her hands and feet, having made a heap of sesame seeds, taking a handful of sesame seeds with both hands, poured (them) into the Blessed One's bowl and paid homage to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having compassion for her, said "May you be happy" and departed. She, at dawn of that night, having passed away, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven in a golden mansion twelve yojanas in extent, as if awakened from sleep.

Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ accharāsahassaparivutaṃ mahatiyā deviddhiyā virocamānamupagantvā –

Then the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a divine tour, having approached her, shining with great divine power, surrounded by a thousand nymphs –

85.

85.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity; illuminating all directions, like a medicinal herb, a star.

86.

86.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such beauty yours? By what do you prosper here? And do enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind?

87.

87.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve,

"I ask you, O deity of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human? By what are you of such radiant power, and does your beauty shine in all directions?" – he asked.

88.

88.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That deity, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna; when asked a question, she explained the fruit of which action this is."

89.

89.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke.

"I, being a human among humans, in a former birth in the human world.

90.

90.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ buddhaṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

"I saw the Buddha, stainless, serene, unperturbed; having approached, I gave a gift, a sesame-seed-gift given unintentionally; with pleased hands to the Buddha, the worthy recipient of offerings.

91.

91.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such beauty is mine; by that, I prosper here; and do enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to my mind.

92.

92.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I declare to you, O monk of great power, the merit I did when I was a human; by that, I am of such radiant power, and does my beauty shine in all directions." –

Sā vissajjesi.

She explained.

90.Tatthaāsajjāti ayaṃ āsajja-saddo ‘‘āsajja naṃ tathāgata’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 350) ghaṭṭena āgato. ‘‘Āsajja dānaṃ detī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.336; a. ni. 8.31) samāgame. Idhāpi samāgameyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tasmāāsajjāti samāgantvā, samavāyena sampatvāti attho. Tenāha‘‘akāmā’’ti. Sā hi deyyadhammasaṃvidhānapubbakaṃ purimasiddhaṃ dānasaṅkappaṃ vinā sahasā sampatte bhagavati pavattitaṃ tiladānaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘āsajja dānaṃ adāsiṃ, akāmā tiladakkhiṇa’’nti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

90. There, āsajja: this word āsajja occurs in the sense of "contact" in "having touched the Tathāgata," (Cūḷava. 350); in the sense of "encounter" in "having encountered, he gives a gift," (D.N. 3.336; A.N. 8.31). Here too, it should be understood as "encounter." Therefore, āsajja means "having encountered," meaning "having come together by chance." Therefore, she said, ‘‘akāmā’’: indeed, without a previously planned intention for giving, thinking only of the sesame-seed-gift that occurred when the Blessed One suddenly arrived, she said "āsajja dānaṃ adāsiṃ, akāmā tiladakkhiṇaṃ." The rest is as previously stated.

Tiladakkhiṇavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Account of the Sesame-Seed-Gift Mansion is Finished.

11. Paṭhamapatibbatāvimānavaṇṇanā
11. Paṭhamapatibbatāvimānavaṇṇanā (The First Discourse on the Mansion of a Devoted Wife)

Koñcā mayūrā diviyā ca haṃsāti patibbatāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tattha aññatarā itthī patibbatā ahosi bhattu anukūlavattinī khamā padakkhiṇaggāhinī, na kuddhāpi paṭippharati, apharusavācā saccavādinī saddhā pasannā yathāvibhavaṃ dānāni ca adāsi. Sā kenacideva rogena phuṭṭhā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno purimanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ devadhītaraṃ mahatiṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantiṃ disvā tassā samīpamupagato. Sā accharāsahassaparivutā saṭṭhisakaṭabhārālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitattabhāvā therassa pādesu sirasā vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Theropi tāya katapuññakammaṃ pucchanto –

Koñcā mayūrā diviyā ca haṃsā refers to the Mansion of a Devoted Wife. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jeta's Grove, in Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery. There, a certain woman was a devoted wife, behaving in accordance with her husband's wishes, patient, respectful, not replying even when angry, speaking gently, truthful, faithful, and with a serene mind, she gave alms according to her means. Afflicted by some disease, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Then, venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a tour of the deities in the same manner as before, saw that goddess experiencing great splendor and approached her. Surrounded by a thousand nymphs, adorned in a form decorated with sixty cartloads, she bowed at the feet of the Elder with her head and stood to one side. The Elder, asking about the meritorious deed she had done, spoke thus:

93.

93.

‘‘Koñcā mayūrā diviyā ca haṃsā, vaggussarā kokilā sampatanti;

"Curlews, peacocks, and divine swans, cuckoos with melodious voices flock together;
This delightful mansion is covered with flowers, adorned with diverse patterns, frequented by men and women.

94.

94.

‘‘Tatthacchasi devi mahānubhāve, iddhī vikubbanti anekarūpā;

"There you dwell, O goddess of great power, manifesting various kinds of iddhi powers;
And these nymphs all around you dance, sing, and rejoice.

95.

95.

‘‘Deviddhipattāsi mahānubhāve,

"You have attained divine iddhi powers, O goddess of great power,
What merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what have you such radiant power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?"

96.

96.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, pleased in mind, questioned by Moggallāna;
Being asked a question, explained the fruit of which deed this is."

97.

97.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, patibbatānaññamanā ahosiṃ;

"When I was a human among humans, I was intent on being a devoted wife;
Like a mother protecting her son, even when angry, I did not speak harshly here.

98.

98.

‘‘Sacce ṭhitā mosavajjaṃ pahāya, dāne ratā saṅgahitattabhāvā;

"Established in truth, abandoning the fault of lying, delighting in giving, with a mind inclined to generosity;
With a serene mind, I respectfully gave abundant alms of food and drink.

99.

99.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such is my complexion; by that, I prosper here;
And there arise for me enjoyments, whatever is dear to my mind.

100.

100.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I will tell you, O bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did when I was a human;
By that, I have such radiant power, and my complexion shines in all directions."

Sā devatā vissajjesi.

That goddess explained.

93.Tatthakoñcāti koñcasakuṇā, ye ‘‘sārasā’’tipi vuccanti.Mayūrāti morā.Diviyāti dibbānubhāvā. Idañhi padaṃ ‘‘diviyā koñcā, diviyā mayūrā’’tiādinā catūhipi padehi yojetabbaṃ.Haṃsāti suvaṇṇahaṃsādihaṃsā.Vaggussarāti madhurassarā.Kokilāti kāḷakokilā ceva sukkakokilā ca.Sampatantīti devatāya abhiramaṇatthaṃ kīḷantā laḷantā samantato patanti vicaranti. Koñcādirūpena hi devatāya ratijananatthaṃ parivārabhūtā devatā kīḷantā laḷantā ‘‘koñcā’’tiādinā vuttā.Pupphābhikiṇṇanti ganthitāganthitehi nānāvidharatanakusumehi okiṇṇaṃ.Rammanti ramaṇīyaṃ, manoramanti attho.Anekacittanti anekehi uyyānakapparukkhapokkharaṇiādīhi vimānesu ca anekehi bhittivisesādīhi cittaṃ.Naranārisevitanti parivārabhūtehi devaputtehi devadhītāhi ca upasevitaṃ.

93. There, koñcā means curlew birds, which are also called "sārasā". Mayūrā means peacocks. Diviyā means of divine power. This word should be connected with all four words, such as "divine curlews, divine peacocks," and so on. Haṃsā means swans, such as golden swans and other swans. Vaggussarā means having a sweet voice. Kokilā means both black and white cuckoos. Sampatanti means playing and frolicking all around, flying about for the deity's enjoyment. The deities who are the retinue, playing and frolicking for the purpose of generating delight for the deity in the form of curlews, etc., are referred to as "koñcā," and so on. Pupphābhikiṇṇa means strewn with various kinds of jeweled flowers, both arranged and unarranged. Ramma means delightful, pleasing to the mind is the meaning. Anekacitta means diverse, with various parks, wishing trees, ponds, and various wall decorations in the mansions. Naranārisevita means frequented by the retinue of male and female deities.

94.Iddhī vikubbanti anekarūpāti nānārūpānaṃ vidaṃsanena anekarūpā kammānubhāvasiddhā iddhī vikubbantī vikubbaniddhiyo valañjentī acchasīti yojanā.

94. Iddhī vikubbanti anekarūpā means manifesting various kinds of iddhi powers, displaying various forms, conjuring up the accomplishment of iddhi powers by the force of kamma.

97.Anaññamanāti patibbatā, patito aññasmiṃ mano etissāti aññamanā, na aññamanāti anaññamanā, mayhaṃ sāmikato aññasmiṃ purise pāpakaṃ cittaṃ na uppādesinti attho.Mātāva puttaṃ anurakkhamānāti yathā mātā puttaṃ, evaṃ mayhaṃ sāmikaṃ, sabbepi vā satte hitesitāya ahitāpanayanakāmatāya ca anuddayamānā.Kuddhāpihaṃ nappharusaṃ avocanti parena kataṃ aphāsukaṃ paṭicca kuddhāpi samānā ahaṃ pharusavacanaṃ na kathesiṃ, aññadatthu piyavacanameva abhāsinti adhippāyo.

97. Anaññamanā means devoted wife. Aññamanā means having the mind on another; na aññamanā means not having the mind on another. The meaning is: I did not generate an evil thought towards any man other than my husband. Mātāva puttaṃ anurakkhamānā means like a mother protecting her son, so too, I was compassionate towards my husband, and indeed towards all beings, desiring their welfare and wishing to remove harm. Kuddhāpihaṃ nappharusaṃ avocaṃ means even when angry in response to something unpleasant done by another, I did not speak harsh words; rather, my intention was only to speak pleasant words.

98.Sacce ṭhitāti sacce patiṭṭhitā. Yasmā musāvādā veramaṇiyā sacce patiṭṭhitā nāma hoti, na kadāci saccavacanamattenāti āha –mosavajjaṃ pahāyāti musāvādaṃ pahāya.Dāne ratāti dāne abhiratā, yuttappayuttāti attho.Saṅgahitattabhāvāti saṅgahavatthūhi attānaṃ viya sabhāveneva paresaṃ saṅgaṇhanasīlā annañca pānañca kammaphalasaddhāya pasannacittā sakkaccaṃ cittīkārena adāsiṃ, aññañca vatthādidānaṃ vipulaṃ uḷāraṃ adāsinti yojanā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

98. Sacce ṭhitā means established in truth. Because one is said to be established in truth by abstaining from false speech, not just by speaking the truth at times, therefore he said - mosavajjaṃ pahāya meaning having abandoned false speech. Dāne ratā means delighting in giving, being constantly engaged in it. Saṅgahitattabhāvā means naturally inclined to be generous to others, as if to oneself, through the objects of generosity. With a serene mind, and with faith in the result of kamma, I respectfully gave food and drink with care, and I gave abundant and excellent gifts of clothing and other items.

Patibbatāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Discourse on the Mansion of a Devoted Wife is finished.

12. Dutiyapatibbatāvimānavaṇṇanā
12. Dutiyapatibbatāvimānavaṇṇanā (The Second Discourse on the Mansion of a Devoted Wife)

Veḷuriyathambhanti dutiyapatibbatāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Sāvatthiyaṃ kira aññatarā upāsikā patibbatā hutvā saddhā pasannā pañca sīlāni suvisuddhāni katvā rakkhi, yathāvibhavañca dānāni adāsi, sā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane uppajji. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

Veḷuriyathambha means the second Mansion of a Devoted Wife. What is its origin? It is said that in Sāvatthī, a certain female lay follower, being a devoted wife, faithful and serene, kept the five precepts very purely and gave alms according to her means. She died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The rest is the same as described below.

101.

101.

‘‘Veḷuriyathambhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ, vimānamāruyha anekacittaṃ;

"Having ascended a mansion with a pillar of beryl, beautiful and radiant, adorned with diverse patterns;
There you dwell, O goddess of great power, manifesting various iddhi powers, high and low;
And these nymphs all around you dance, sing, and rejoice.

102.

102.

‘‘Deviddhipattāsi mahānubhāve,

"You have attained divine iddhi powers, O goddess of great power,
What merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what have you such radiant power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?" – he asked.

103.

103.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, pleased in mind, questioned by Moggallāna;
Being asked a question, explained the fruit of which deed this is."

104.

104.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, upāsikā cakkhumato ahosiṃ;

"When I was a human among humans, I was a female lay follower of the one with vision;
I abstained from killing living beings; I avoided taking what was not given in the world.

105.

105.

‘‘Amajjapā no ca musā abhāṇiṃ, sakena sāminā ahosiṃ tuṭṭhā;

"I did not drink intoxicants, nor did I speak falsely; I was content with my own husband;
With a serene mind, I respectfully gave abundant alms of food and drink.

106.

106.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such is my complexion; by that, I prosper here;
And there arise for me enjoyments, whatever is dear to my mind.

107.

107.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva,

"I will tell you, O bhikkhu of great power,
What merit I did when I was a human;
By that, I have such radiant power,
And my complexion shines in all directions." – she explained.

101.Tatthaveḷuriyathambhanti veḷuriyamaṇimayathambhaṃ.Ruciranti ramaṇīyaṃ.Pabhassaranti ativiya bhāsuraṃ.Uccāvacāti uccā ca avacā ca, vividhāti attho.

101. There, veḷuriyathambha means a pillar made of beryl gem. Rucira means beautiful. Pabhassara means exceedingly radiant. Uccāvacā means high and low, diverse is the meaning.

104-5.Upāsikāti saraṇagamanena upāsikālakkhaṇe ṭhitā. Vuttañhi –

104-5. Upāsikā means established in the characteristics of a female lay follower by taking refuge. For it was said:

‘‘Yato kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, ariyasāvako upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).

"From the time, Mahānāma, when a noble disciple has gone for refuge to the Buddha, has gone for refuge to the Dhamma, has gone for refuge to the Sangha, to that extent, Mahānāma, a noble disciple is a lay follower" (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).

Cakkhumatoti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumato buddhassa bhagavato. Evaṃ upāsikābhāvakittanena āsayasuddhiṃ dassetvā payogasuddhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pāṇātipātā viratā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasakena sāminā ahosiṃ tuṭṭhāti micchācārāveramaṇimāha. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttasadisameva.

Cakkhumato means of the Buddha, the Blessed One, who has the five eyes. Thus, having shown purity of intention by declaring the state of being a female lay follower, to show purity of action, ‘‘pāṇātipātā viratā’’ and so on was said. There, sakena sāminā ahosiṃ tuṭṭhā refers to abstaining from misconduct. The rest is similar to what was said below.

Dutiyapatibbatāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Second Discourse on the Mansion of a Devoted Wife is finished.

13. Paṭhamasuṇisāvimānavaṇṇanā
13. Paṭhamasuṇisāvimānavaṇṇanā (The First Discourse on the Mansion of a Daughter-in-Law)

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti suṇisāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Sāvatthiyaṃ aññatarasmiṃ gehe ekā kulasuṇhā gehaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ khīṇāsavattheraṃ disvā sañjātapītisomanassā ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ uttamaṃ puññakkhettaṃ upaṭṭhita’’nti attanā laddhaṃ pūvabhāgaṃ ādāya ādarena therassa upanesi, thero taṃ paṭiggahetvā anumodanaṃ katvā gato. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane uppajji. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttasadisameva. Tena vuttaṃ –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā means the Mansion of a Daughter-in-Law. What is its origin? In Sāvatthī, in a certain house, a daughter-in-law, seeing an arahant Elder who had destroyed the āsavas entering the house for alms, with joy and gladness arising, thinking, "This is an excellent field of merit that has appeared for me," took a portion of cake that she had obtained herself and respectfully offered it to the Elder. The Elder accepted it, gave thanks, and departed. Later, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. All the rest is similar to what was said below. Therefore, it was said:

108.

108.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing complexion, O deity who stands there;
Illuminating all directions, like a star among herbs.

109.

109.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what do you have such complexion? By what do you prosper here?
And there arise for you enjoyments, whatever is dear to your mind.

110.

110.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O goddess of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what have you such radiant power, and your complexion shines in all directions?"

111.

111.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, pleased in mind, questioned by Moggallāna;
Being asked a question, explained the fruit of which deed this is."

112.

112.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, suṇisā ahosiṃ sasurassa gehe.

"When I was a human among humans, I was a daughter-in-law in the house of my father-in-law.

113.

113.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

"I saw a bhikkhu without defilement, with a very serene and clear mind;
I gave him a cake with my own hands, with a serene mind;
Having given half a portion, I rejoice in the Nandana Grove.

114.

114.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such is my complexion; by that, I prosper here;
And there arise for me enjoyments, whatever is dear to my mind.

115.

115.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I will tell you, O bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did when I was a human;
By that, I have such radiant power, and my complexion shines in all directions."

112.Tatthasuṇisāti puttassa bhariyā. Itthiyā hi sāmikassa pitā ‘‘sasuro’’ti vuccati, tassa ca sā ‘‘suṇisā’’ti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘suṇisā ahosiṃ sasurassa gehe’’ti.

112. There, suṇisā means the wife of a son. For the father of a woman's husband is called "sasuro," and she is called "suṇisā" to him. With that in mind, "suṇisā ahosiṃ sasurassa gehe" (I was a daughter-in-law in the house of my father-in-law) [was said].

113.Bhāgaḍḍhabhāganti attanā laddhapaṭivīsato upaḍḍhabhāgaṃ.Modāmi nandane vaneti therena nandanavane diṭṭhatāya āha. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

113. Bhāgaḍḍhabhāga means half a portion from the alms I had received. Modāmi nandane vane (I rejoice in the Nandana Grove) was said because she was seen by the Elder in the Nandana Grove. The rest is as previously stated.

Suṇisāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Discourse on the Mansion of a Daughter-in-Law is finished.

14. Dutiyasuṇisāvimānavaṇṇanā
14. Dutiyasuṇisāvimānavaṇṇanā (The Second Discourse on the Mansion of a Daughter-in-Law)

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti dutiyasuṇisāvimānaṃ. Ettha pana apubbaṃ natthi, aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ kummāsadānameva viseso. Tena vuttaṃ –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā means the Second Mansion of a Daughter-in-Law. Here, there is nothing new; in the account of the origin, the only difference is the giving of kummāsa (porridge). Therefore, it was said:

116.

116.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing complexion, O deity who stands there;
Illuminating all directions, like a star among herbs.

117.

117.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what do you have such complexion? By what do you prosper here?
And there arise for you enjoyments, whatever is dear to your mind.

118.

118.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, O goddess of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what have you such radiant power, and your complexion shines in all directions?"

119.

119.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, pleased in mind, questioned by Moggallāna;
Being asked a question, explained the fruit of which deed this is."

120.

120.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, suṇisā ahosiṃ sasurassa gehe.

"When I was a human among humans, I was a daughter-in-law in the house of my father-in-law.

121.

121.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

"I saw a bhikkhu without defilement, with a very serene and clear mind;
I gave him a portion with my own hands, with a serene mind;
Having given a lump of porridge, I rejoice in the Nandana Grove.

122.

122.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such is my complexion; by that, I prosper here;
And there arise for me enjoyments, whatever is dear to my mind.

123.

123.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I will tell you, O bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did when I was a human;
By that, I have such radiant power, and my complexion shines in all directions."

121.Tatthabhāganti kummāsakoṭṭhāsaṃ. Tenāha‘‘kummāsapiṇḍaṃ datvānā’’ti. Kummāsoti ca yavakummāso vutto. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

121. There, bhāga means a share of porridge. Therefore, he said, ‘‘kummāsapiṇḍaṃ datvānā’’ (having given a lump of porridge). Kummāsa refers to porridge made from barley. The rest is as previously stated.

Dutiyasuṇisāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Second Discourse on the Mansion of a Daughter-in-Law is finished.

15. Uttarāvimānavaṇṇanā
15. Uttarāvimānavaṇṇanā

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti uttarāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena ca samayena puṇṇo nāma duggatapuriso rājagahaseṭṭhiṃ upanissāya jīvati, tassa bhariyā uttarā, uttarā ca nāma dhītāti dve eva gehamānusakā. Athekadivasaṃ rājagahe ‘‘mahājanena sattāhaṃ nakkhattaṃ kīḷitabba’’nti ghosanaṃ kariṃsu. Taṃ sutvā seṭṭhi pātova āgataṃ puṇṇaṃ ‘‘tāta, amhākaṃ parijano nakkhattaṃ kīḷitukāmo, tvaṃ kiṃ nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi, udāhu bhatiṃ karissasī’’ti āha. ‘‘Sāmi, nakkhattaṃ nāma sadhanānaṃ hoti, mama pana gehe svātanāya yāgutaṇḍulānipi natthi, kiṃ me nakkhattena? Goṇe labhanto kasituṃ gamissāmī’ti. ‘‘Tena hi goṇe gaṇhassū’’ti. So balavagoṇe ca bhaddanaṅgalañca gahetvā ‘‘bhadde, nāgarā nakkhattaṃ kīḷanti, ahaṃ daliddatāya bhatiṃ kātuṃ gamissāmi, mayhampi tāva ajja diguṇaṃ nivāpaṃ pacitvā bhattaṃ āhareyyāsī’’ti bhariyaṃ vatvā khettaṃ agamāsi.

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti, the Uttarā vimāna. What was its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Rājagaha, in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding place. At that time, a poor man named Puṇṇa was living dependent on the Rājagaha treasurer; he had a wife named Uttarā, and also a daughter named Uttarā – these were the only people in his household. Then one day, in Rājagaha, they made an announcement, "The great populace should play for a week-long festival." Hearing that, the treasurer said to Puṇṇa, who had come early in the morning, "Good man, our servants want to enjoy the festival; will you enjoy the festival, or will you work for wages?" "Sir, a festival is for the wealthy; but in my house, there aren't even rice grains for tomorrow's gruel. What is a festival to me? I will go to plough, getting oxen." "Then take the oxen." He took strong oxen and a good plough and said to his wife, "The townsfolk are enjoying the festival, but because of poverty, I will go to work for wages; you too, prepare double the usual amount of food and bring me lunch today," and he went to the field.

Sāriputtattheropi sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpanno tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘kassa nu kho ajja mayā saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti olokento puṇṇaṃ attano ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭhaṃ disvā ‘‘saddho nu kho esa, sakkhissati vā me saṅgahaṃ kātu’’nti olokento tassa saddhabhāvañca saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ samatthabhāvañca tappaccayā ca tassa mahāsampattipaṭilābhaṃ ñatvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya tassa kasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā āvāṭatīre ekaṃ gumbaṃ olokento aṭṭhāsi. Puṇṇo theraṃ disvāva kasiṃ ṭhapetvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena theraṃ vanditvā ‘‘dantakaṭṭhena attho bhavissatī’’ti dantakaṭṭhaṃ kappiyaṃ katvā adāsi. Athassa thero pattañca parissāvanañca nīharitvā adāsi. So ‘‘pānīyena attho bhavissatī’’ti taṃ ādāya pānīyaṃ parissāvetvā adāsi.

Sāriputta Thera, having been in cessation for a week, arose from it and, looking around, thinking, "Who should I help today?" saw Puṇṇa entering into his net of knowledge. Considering, "Is he faithful? Will he be able to help me?" he knew of his faith, his ability to help, and the attainment of great wealth as a result. Taking his bowl and robe, he went to his plowing place and stood looking at a bush on the riverbank. Puṇṇa, seeing the Thera, stopped plowing and, bowing to the Thera with the five-point prostration, offered him a toothpick, having prepared it. Then the Thera took out and gave him his bowl and water strainer. He took it, thinking, "There will be need for water," strained the water, and gave it.

Thero cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ paresaṃ pacchimagehe vasati, sacassa gehadvāraṃ gamissāmi, imassa bhariyā maṃ daṭṭhuṃ na sakkhissati, yāvassa bhariyā bhattaṃ ādāya maggaṃ paṭipajjati, tāva idheva bhavissāmī’’ti. So tattheva thokaṃ vītināmetvā tassā maggāruḷhabhāvaṃ ñatvā antonagarābhimukho pāyāsi. Sā antarāmagge theraṃ disvā cintesi ‘‘appekadāhaṃ deyyadhamme sati ayyaṃ na passāmi, appekadā me ayyaṃ passantiyā deyyadhammo na hoti, ajja pana me ayyo ca diṭṭho, deyyadhammo cāyaṃ atthi, karissati nu kho me saṅgaha’’nti. Sā bhattabhājanaṃ otāretvā theraṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā ‘‘bhante, idaṃ lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vāti acintetvā dāsassa vo saṅgahaṃ karothā’’ti āha. Atha thero pattaṃ upanāmetvā tāya ekena hatthena bhājanaṃ dhāretvā ekena hatthena tato bhattaṃ dadamānāya upaḍḍhabhatte dinne ‘‘ala’’nti hatthena pattaṃ pidahi. Sā ‘‘bhante, ekova paṭivīso, na sakkā dvidhā kātuṃ, tumhākaṃ dāsassa idhalokasaṅgahaṃ akatvā paralokasaṅgahaṃ karotha, niravasesameva dātukāmāmhī’’ti vatvā sabbamevassa patte patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘tumhehi diṭṭhadhammassa bhāginī assa’’nti patthanaṃ akāsi. Thero ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti vatvā ṭhitakova anumodanaṃ katvā ekasmiṃ udakaphāsukaṭṭhāne nisīditvā bhattakiccaṃ akāsi. Sāpi paṭinivattitvā taṇḍule pariyesitvā bhattaṃ paci.

The Thera thought, "This man lives in another's outhouse. If I go to his house door, his wife will not be able to see me. Until his wife sets out on the road with the food, I will stay right here." He waited there a little while, and knowing that she had set out on the road, he proceeded towards the city. Seeing the Thera on the road, she thought, "Sometimes, when there is something to give, I do not see the Venerable One; sometimes, when I see the Venerable One, there is nothing to give. But today, I have seen the Venerable One, and there is something to give; will he accept me?" She put down the food container, bowed to the Thera with the five-point prostration, and said, "Venerable Sir, without thinking whether this is coarse or fine, please accept this from your servant." Then the Thera extended his bowl, and as she held the container with one hand and was giving the food with the other, when half the food was given, he covered the bowl with his hand, saying, "Enough." She said, "Venerable Sir, there is only one portion, it cannot be divided. Without doing a good deed for your servant in this world, do a good deed for the next world. I want to give everything without remainder," and having said this, she placed all of it in his bowl and made the wish, "May you be a partaker of the Dhamma you have seen." The Thera said, "So be it," gave his approval while still standing, and having sat down at a pleasant spot near the water, he attended to his meal. She also returned, sought rice grains, and cooked the meal.

Puṇṇopi aḍḍhakarīsamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ kasitvā jighacchaṃ sahituṃ asakkonto goṇe vissajjetvā ekaṃ rukkhachāyaṃ pavisitvā maggaṃ olokento nisīdi. Athassa bhariyā bhattamādāya gacchamānā taṃ disvāva ‘‘esa jighacchāpīḷito maṃ olokento nisinno, sace maṃ ‘ativiya cirāyī’ti tajjetvā patodalaṭṭhiyā paharissati, mayā katakammaṃ niratthakaṃ bhavissati, paṭikaccevassa ārocessāmī’’ti cintetvā evamāha ‘‘sāmi, ajjekadivasaṃ cittaṃ pasādehi, mā mayā katakammaṃ niratthakaṃ kari, ahaṃ pātova te bhattaṃ āharantī antarāmagge dhammasenāpatiṃ disvā tava bhattaṃ tassa datvā puna gehaṃ gantvā bhattaṃ pacitvā āgatā, pasādehi, sāmi, citta’’nti. So ‘‘kiṃ vadesi, bhadde’’ti pucchitvā puna tamatthaṃ sutvā ‘‘bhadde, sādhu vata te kataṃ mama bhattaṃ ayyassa dadamānāya, mayāpissa ajja pātova dantakaṭṭhañca mukhodakañca dinna’’nti pasannamānaso taṃ vacanaṃ abhinanditvā ussūre laddhabhattatāya kilantakāyo tassā aṅke sīsaṃ katvā niddaṃ okkami.

Puṇṇa, having plowed a field about half a karisa in size, unable to bear the hunger, released the oxen and sat down in the shade of a tree, watching the road. Then his wife, coming with the food, seeing him, thought, "He is sitting, afflicted by hunger, looking at me. If he scolds me, saying 'You are very late,' and strikes me with the goad stick, my deed will be in vain. I will announce it to him beforehand," and she said this: "Husband, please be of a clear mind for just one day, do not make my deed in vain. This morning, as I was bringing your food, I saw the General of the Dhamma on the road and gave your food to him, and having gone home again, cooked food and come. Husband, please clear your mind." He asked, "What are you saying, my dear?" and having heard that matter again, said, "My dear, it is good indeed that you gave my food to the Venerable One; I too gave him a toothpick and water for the mouth this morning," and with a pleased mind, he rejoiced at her words, and his body exhausted from the hurried getting of food, he laid his head in her lap and fell asleep.

Athassa pātova kasitaṭṭhānaṃ paṃsucuṇṇaṃ upādāya sabbaṃ rattasuvaṇṇaṃ hutvā kaṇikārapuppharāsi viya sobhamānaṃ aṭṭhāsi. So pabuddho oloketvā bhariyaṃ āha ‘‘bhadde, etaṃ mayā kasitaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaṃ mama suvaṇṇaṃ hutvā paññāyati, kiṃ nu kho me atiussūre laddhabhattatāya akkhīni bhamantī’’ti. ‘‘Sāmi, mayhampi evameva paññāyatī’’ti. So uṭṭhāya tattha gantvā ekaṃ piṇḍaṃ gahetvā naṅgalasīse paharitvā suvaṇṇabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘aho ayyassa dhammasenāpatissa dinnadāne ajjeva vipāko dassito, na kho pana sakkā ettakaṃ dhanaṃ paṭicchādetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti bhariyāya ābhataṃ bhattapātiṃ suvaṇṇassa pūretvā rājakulaṃ gantvā raññā katokāso pavisitvā rājānaṃ abhivādetvā ‘‘kiṃ tātā’’ti vutte ‘‘deva, ajja mayā kasitaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaṃ suvaṇṇarāsimeva hutvā ṭhitaṃ, suvaṇṇaṃ āharāpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. ‘‘Kosi tva’’nti? ‘‘Puṇṇo nāmāha’’nti. ‘‘Kiṃ pana te ajja kata’’nti? ‘‘Dhammasenāpatissa me pātova dantakaṭṭhañca mukhodakañca dinnaṃ, bhariyāyapi me mayhaṃ āhaṭabhattaṃ tasseva dinna’’nti.

Then in the morning, the plowed field, taking on the color of dust, all became gold, standing like a pile of kaṇikāra flowers. He awoke, looked around, and said to his wife, "My dear, this whole field that I plowed appears to me to be gold; is it that my eyes are spinning from getting food too quickly?" "Husband, it appears the same to me." He got up, went there, took a lump, and struck it against the ploughshare, and knowing its golden nature, he thought, "Oh, the result of the gift given to the General of the Dhamma has been shown today! It is not possible to hide and use so much wealth," and filling the food bowl brought by his wife with gold, he went to the royal palace, entered, having been given an opportunity by the king, and after greeting the king, when asked "What is it, sir?", he said, "Your Majesty, today the field I plowed has become a pile of gold; it is fitting to have the gold brought here." "Who are you?" "I am called Puṇṇa." "What did you do today?" "This morning I gave a toothpick and water for the mouth to the General of the Dhamma; my wife also gave the food she brought for me to him."

Taṃ sutvā rājā ‘‘ajjeva kira bho dhammasenāpatissa dinnadāne vipāko dassito’’ti vatvā ‘‘tāta, kiṃ karomī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Bahūni sakaṭasahassāni pahiṇitvā suvaṇṇaṃ āharāpethā’’ti. Rājā sakaṭāni pahiṇi. Rājapurisesu ‘‘rañño santaka’’nti gaṇhantesu gahitaṃ gahitaṃ mattikāva hoti. Tehi gantvā rañño ārocite ‘‘tātā, tumhehi kinti vatvā gahita’’nti puṭṭhā ‘‘tumhākaṃ santaka’’nti āhaṃsu. Tena hi, tātā, puna gacchatha, ‘‘puṇṇassa santaka’’nti vatvā gaṇhathāti. Te tathā kariṃsu gahitaṃ gahitaṃ suvaṇṇameva ahosi. Taṃ sabbaṃ āharitvā rājaṅgaṇe rāsiṃ akaṃsu, asītihatthubbedho rāsi ahosi. Rājā nāgare sannipātāpetvā āha ‘‘imasmiṃ nagare atthi kassaci ettakaṃ suvaṇṇa’’nti? ‘‘Natthi, devā’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ panassa dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti? ‘‘Seṭṭhicchattaṃ, devā’’ti. Rājā ‘‘bahudhanaseṭṭhi nāma hotū’’ti mahantena bhogena saddhiṃ tassa seṭṭhicchattaṃ adāsi.

Hearing that, the king said, "Indeed, today the result of the gift given to the General of the Dhamma has been shown!" and asked, "Good man, what shall I do?" "Send many thousands of carts and have the gold brought." The king sent the carts. When the king's men took it, thinking, "It belongs to the king," whatever was taken became only dirt. When they went and reported it to the king, he asked, "Good men, what did you say when you took it?" They said, "We said it belongs to you." "Then, good men, go again, and take it saying, 'It belongs to Puṇṇa.'" They did so, and whatever was taken became gold. Having brought all of it, they made a pile in the royal courtyard; the pile was eighty cubits high. The king gathered the townspeople and said, "Is there anyone in this city who has so much gold?" "No, Your Majesty." "Then what should be given to him?" "The title of treasurer, Your Majesty." The king, saying, "Let him be called Bahudhana Treasurer," gave him the title of treasurer along with great wealth.

Atha naṃ so āha ‘‘mayaṃ, deva, ettakaṃ kālaṃ parakule vasimhā, vasanaṭṭhānaṃ no dethā’’ti. Tena hi passa, esa gumbo paññāyati, etaṃ harāpetvā gehaṃ kārehīti purāṇaseṭṭhissa gehaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhi. So tasmiṃ ṭhāne katipāheneva gehaṃ kārāpetvā gehapavesanamaṅgalañca chattamaṅgalañca ekatova karonto sattāhaṃ buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ adāsi. Athassa satthā dānānumodanaṃ karonto anupubbiṃ kathaṃ kathesi. Dhammakathāvasāne puṇṇaseṭṭhi ca bhariyā cassa dhītā ca uttarāti tayopi janā sotāpannā ahesuṃ.

Then he said to him, "Your Majesty, we have lived in another's family for so long; give us a place to live." "Then look, there is a grove; have it cleared and build a house," he indicated the site of the old treasurer's house. Having built a house in that place in a few days, doing both the house-entry ceremony and the title-ceremony together, he gave alms to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha for a week. Then the Teacher, while giving the thanksgiving for the gift, gave a graduated talk. At the end of the Dhamma talk, Puṇṇa treasurer, his wife, and his daughter Uttarā, all three became Stream-enterers.

Aparabhāge rājagahaseṭṭhi puṇṇaseṭṭhino dhītaraṃ attano puttassa vāresi. So ‘‘nāhaṃ dassāmī’’ti vutto ‘‘mā evaṃ karotu, ettakaṃ kālaṃ amhe nissāya vasanteneva te sampatti laddhā, detu me puttassa te dhītara’’nti āha. So ‘‘micchādiṭṭhikā tumhe, mama dhītā tīhi ratanehi vinā vasituṃ na sakkoti, nevassa dhītaraṃ dassāmī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ bahū seṭṭhigahapatikādayo kulaputtā ‘‘mā tena saddhiṃ vissāsaṃ bhindi, dehissa dhītara’’nti yāciṃsu. So tesaṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā āsāḷhipuṇṇamāya dhītaraṃ adāsi. Sā patikulaṃ gatakālato paṭṭhāya bhikkhuṃ vā bhikkhuniṃ vā upasaṅkamituṃ dānaṃ vā dātuṃ dhammaṃ vā sotuṃ nālattha, evaṃ aḍḍhatiyesu māsesu vītivattesu attano santike ṭhite paricārike pucchi ‘‘idāni kittakaṃ antovassaṃ avasiṭṭha’’nti? ‘‘Aḍḍhamāso, ayye’’ti. Sā mātāpitūnaṃ sāsanaṃ pahiṇi ‘‘kasmā maṃ evarūpe bandhanāgāre pakkhipiṃsu, varaṃ tumhehi maṃ lakkhaṇāhataṃ katvā paresaṃ dāsiṃ sāvetuṃ, na evarūpassa micchādiṭṭhikassa kulassa dātuṃ, āgatakālato paṭṭhāya bhikkhudassanādīsu ekampi puññaṃ kātuṃ na labhāmī’’ti. Athassā pitā ‘‘dukkhitā vata me dhītā’’ti anattamanataṃ pavedetvā pañcadasa kahāpaṇasahassāni pesesi, ‘‘imasmiṃ nagare sirimā nāma gaṇikā atthi, devasikaṃ sahassaṃ gaṇhāti, imehi kahāpaṇehi taṃ ānetvā sāmikassa niyyādetvā sayaṃ yathāruci puññāni karotū’’ti sāsanañca pahiṇi. Uttarā tathā katvā sāmikena sirimaṃ disvā ‘‘kimida’’nti vutte ‘‘sāmi, imaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ mama sahāyikā tumhe paricaratu, ahaṃ pana imaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ dānañceva dātukāmā dhammañca sotukāmā’’ti āha. So taṃ abhirūpaṃ itthiṃ disvā uppannasineho ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchi.

Later, the Rājagaha treasurer asked for the daughter of Puṇṇa treasurer for his son. When he was told, "I will not give her," he said, "Do not do this; you have obtained wealth only by living dependent on us for so long. Give your daughter to my son." He said, "You are of wrong view; my daughter cannot live without the three jewels. I will not give my daughter to him." Then many treasurers, householders, and other sons of good families begged him, "Do not break faith with him; give him your daughter." He accepted their words and gave his daughter on the Āsāḷhi full-moon day. From the time she went to her husband's family, she was not able to approach a monk or nun, or give alms, or hear the Dhamma. When about two and a half months had passed in this way, she asked a servant standing near her, "How much of the rains-residence remains now?" "Half a month, my lady." She sent a message to her parents, "Why did you put me in such a prison? It would have been better for you to have me branded with marks and sold as a slave to others than to give me to such a family of wrong view. From the time I arrived, I have not been able to do a single merit, such as seeing monks." Then her father, expressing his displeasure, saying, "My daughter is suffering," sent fifteen thousand kahāpaṇas, and also sent a message, "In this city there is a courtesan named Sirimā, who takes a thousand per day; bring her with these kahāpaṇas, give her to your husband, and yourself do meritorious deeds as you please." Uttarā did so, and when her husband saw Sirimā, when asked, "What is this?", she said, "Husband, let this friend of mine attend to you for this half month; but I want to give alms and hear the Dhamma for this half month." He, seeing that beautiful woman, his affection arose and agreed "Good".

Uttarāpi kho buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nimantetvā ‘‘bhante, imaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ aññattha agantvā idheva bhikkhā gahetabbā’’ti satthu paṭiññaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ito dāni paṭṭhāya yāva mahāpavāraṇā, tāva satthāraṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ dhammañca sotuṃ labhissāmī’’ti tuṭṭhamānasā ‘‘evaṃ yāguṃ pacatha, evaṃ bhattaṃ pacatha, evaṃ pūvaṃ pacathā’’ti mahānase sabbakiccāni saṃvidahantī vicarati. Athassā sāmiko ‘‘sve mahāpavāraṇā bhavissatī’’ti mahānasābhimukho vātapāne ṭhatvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho karontī sā andhabālā vicaratī’’ti oloketvā taṃ sedakilinnaṃ chārikāya okiṇṇaṃ aṅgāramasimakkhitaṃ tathā saṃvidahitvā vicaramānaṃ disvā ‘‘aho andhabālā evarūpe ṭhāne imaṃ sirisampattiṃ nānubhavati, ‘‘muṇḍakasamaṇe upaṭṭhahissāmī’ti tuṭṭhacittā vicaratī’’ti hasitvā apagañchi.

Uttarā also invited the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha, and having obtained a promise from the Teacher, "Venerable Sirs, alms should be taken here for this half month without going elsewhere," thinking with a delighted mind, "From now until the great Pavāraṇā, I will be able to attend to the Teacher and hear the Dhamma," she went about managing all the duties in the kitchen, saying, "Cook the gruel this way, cook the rice this way, cook the cakes this way." Then her husband, standing at the window facing the kitchen, thinking, "What is that blind fool doing as she goes about?" saw her, covered in sweat, sprinkled with ashes, smeared with soot, managing things in that way, and laughing, he went away, saying, "Oh, the blind fool does not enjoy this glory in such a place, but goes about with a pleased mind, thinking, 'I will attend to the shaven-headed ascetic.'"

Tasmiṃ apagate tassa santike ṭhitā sirimā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho oloketvā esa hasatī’’ti teneva vātapānena olokentī uttaraṃ disvā ‘‘imaṃ oloketvā iminā hasitaṃ, addhā imassa etāya saddhiṃ santhavo atthī’’ti cintesi. Sā kira aḍḍhamāsaṃ tasmiṃ gehe bāhirakaitthī hutvā vasamānāpi taṃ sampattiṃ anubhavamānā attano bāhirakaitthibhāvaṃ ajānitvā ‘‘ahaṃ gharasāminī’’ti saññamakāsi. Sā uttarāya āghātaṃ bandhitvā ‘‘dukkhamassā uppādessāmī’’ti pāsādā oruyha mahānasaṃ pavisitvā pūvapacanaṭṭhāne pakkuthitaṃ sappiṃ kaṭacchunā ādāya uttarābhimukhaṃ pāyāsi. Uttarā taṃ āgacchantiṃ disvā ‘‘mama sahāyikāya mayhaṃ upakāro kato, cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ, brahmaloko atinīcako, mama pana sahāyikāya guṇova mahanto, ahampi etaṃ nissāya dānañca dātuṃ dhammañca sotuṃ labhiṃ, sace mama etissāya upari kodho atthi, idaṃ sappi maṃ dahatu, sace natthi, mā maṃ dahatū’’ti taṃ mettāya phari. Tāya tassā matthake āsiñcitampi pakkuthitasappi sītodakaṃ viya ahosi. Atha naṃ ‘‘idaṃ sītalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti puna kaṭacchukaṃ pūretvā ādāya āgacchantiṃ uttarāya dāsiyo disvā ‘‘are dubbinīte na tvaṃ amhākaṃ ayyāya upari pakkasappiṃ āsiñcituṃ anucchavikā’’ti santajjentiyo ito cito ca uṭṭhāya hatthehi ca pādehi ca pothetvā bhūmiyaṃ pātesuṃ, uttarā vārentīpi vāretuṃ nāsakkhi. Atha sā upari ṭhatvā sabbā dāsiyo paṭibāhitvā ‘‘kissa te evarūpaṃ bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ kata’’nti sirimaṃ ovaditvā uṇhodakena nhāpetvā satapākatelena abbhañji.

When he had left, Sirima, standing near him, thinking, "Why did he laugh after looking at something?" looked through the same window and, seeing Uttara, thought, "He laughed after looking at her; surely, he has a connection with her." Although she had been living in that house as a kept woman for half a month, enjoying that prosperity, she, not knowing her status as a kept woman, imagined, "I am the mistress of the house." Harboring resentment towards Uttara, she thought, "I will inflict suffering on her." Descending from the palace, she entered the kitchen, took hot ghee thickened by cooking from the cooking place with a ladle, and proceeded towards Uttara. Seeing her coming, Uttara thought, "My friend has done me a favor; the universe is too crowded, the Brahma world is too low, but my friend's virtue is great. Because of her, I am able to give alms and hear the Dhamma. If I have anger towards her, may this ghee burn me; if not, may it not burn me," and she suffused her with loving-kindness. The thickened ghee, even when poured on her head, felt like cool water. Then, as she was about to fill the ladle again, thinking, "This will be cool," Uttara’s maids saw her and, scolding her, "O wicked one, you are not fit to pour hot ghee on our mistress," they rose from here and there, beat her with their hands and feet, and threw her to the ground. Uttara could not stop them, even though she tried. Then, standing over her, after stopping all the maids, she advised Sirima, "Why have you done such a terrible deed?" and had her bathed with warm water and anointed with oil boiled a hundred times.

Tasmiṃ khaṇe sā attano bāhirakitthibhāvaṃ ñatvā cintesi ‘‘mayā bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ sāmikassa hasitamattakāraṇā imissā upari pakkasappiṃ āsiñcantiyā, ayaṃ ‘gaṇhatha na’nti dāsiyo na āṇāpetvā maṃ viheṭhanakālepi sabbā dāsiyo paṭibāhitvā mayhaṃ kattabbameva akāsi. Sacāhaṃ imaṃ na khamāpessāmi, muddhā me sattadhā phaleyyā’’ti tassā pādamūle nipajjitvā ‘‘ayye, khamāhi me dosa’’nti āha. ‘‘Ahaṃ sappitikā dhītā, pitari me khamāpite khamissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Hotu, ayye, pitarampi te puṇṇaseṭṭhiṃ khamāpessāmī’’ti. ‘‘Puṇṇo mama vaṭṭe janakapitā, vivaṭṭe janakapitari khamāpite pana ahaṃ khamissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Ko pana te vivaṭṭe janakapitā’’ti? ‘‘Sammāsambuddho’’ti. ‘‘Mayhaṃ tena saddhiṃ vissāso natthi, ahaṃ kiṃ karissāmī’’ti? ‘‘Satthā sve bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ādāya idhāgamissati, tvaṃ yathāladdhaṃ sakkāraṃ gahetvā idheva āgantvā taṃ khamāpehī’’ti. Sā ‘‘sādhu, ayye’’ti uṭṭhāya attano gehaṃ gantvā pañcasataparicārikitthiyo āṇāpetvā nānāvidhāni khādanīyabhojanīyāni ceva sūpeyyāni ca sampādetvā punadivase taṃ sakkāraṃ ādāya uttarāya gehaṃ āgantvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa patte patiṭṭhāpetuṃ avisahantī aṭṭhāsi, taṃ sabbaṃ gahetvā uttarāva saṃvidahi.

At that moment, realizing her status as a kept woman, she thought, "I have done a terrible deed by pouring hot ghee on her just because the master laughed. Even when I was being harmed, she stopped all the maids, without ordering them to 'seize her,' and did what should be done for me. If I do not ask her forgiveness, my head would split into seven pieces." She fell at her feet and said, "Mistress, forgive my offense." Uttara replied, "I am a daughter who takes sides with her father; I will forgive you when my father has been appeased." "Very well, mistress, I will appease your father, Punna, too." "Punna is my father in the round of rebirths (vaṭṭe janaka pitā), but I will forgive you only when my father in the open (vivaṭṭe janaka pitā) has been appeased." "Who is your father in the open?" "The Sammāsambuddho (Perfectly Self-Awakened One)." "I have no faith in him; what shall I do?" "The Teacher will come here tomorrow with the Sangha of monks. Taking the offerings you can afford, come here and ask for his forgiveness." She agreed, "Very well, mistress," and rising, went to her house, ordered five hundred female attendants to prepare various kinds of food, both hard and soft, and soups, and the next day, taking those offerings, came to Uttara's house and stood there, unable to place the food into the bowls of the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha; Uttara herself took all of it and arranged it.

Sirimāpi satthu bhattakiccāvasāne saddhiṃ parivārena satthu pādamūle nipajji. Atha naṃ satthā pucchi ‘‘ko te aparādho’’ti. ‘‘Bhante mayā hiyyo idaṃ nāma kataṃ, atha me sahāyikā maṃ viheṭhayamānā dāsiyo nivāretvā mayhaṃ upakārameva akāsi. Sāhaṃ imissā guṇaṃ jānitvā imaṃ khamāpesiṃ, atha maṃ esā ‘tumhesu khamāpitesu khamissāmī’ti āhā’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ kira uttare’’ti. ‘‘Āma, bhante, sīse me sahāyikāya pakkasappi āsitta’’nti. ‘‘Atha tayā kiṃ cintita’’nti? ‘‘Cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ, brahmaloko atinīcako, mama sahāyikāya guṇova mahanto, ahañhi etaṃ nissāya dānañca dātuṃ dhammañca sotuṃ alatthaṃ, sace me imissā upari kodho atthi, idaṃ maṃ dahatu, no ce, mā dahatū’’ti evaṃ cintetvā imaṃ mettāya phariṃ, bhanteti. Satthā ‘‘sādhu sādhu, uttare, evaṃ kodhaṃ jinituṃ vaṭṭati. Kodhano hi nāma akkodhena, akkosako anakkosantena, paribhāsako aparibhāsantena, thaddhamaccharī attano santakassa dānena, musāvādī saccavacanena jinitabbo’’ti imamatthaṃ dassento –

Sirima, after the meal of the Teacher, along with her retinue, prostrated at the Teacher's feet. Then the Teacher asked her, "What is your offense?" "Venerable sir, I did such and such yesterday, and then my friend, stopping the maids who were harming me, did me a favor. Recognizing her virtue, I asked her forgiveness, and she said to me, 'I will forgive you when you have appeased those whom I appease.'" "Is that so, Uttara?" "Yes, venerable sir, my friend poured hot ghee on my head." "And what did you think?" "The universe is too crowded, the Brahma world is too low, but my friend's virtue is great. Because of her, I was able to give alms and hear the Dhamma. If I have anger towards her, may this burn me; if not, may it not burn me." Thinking thus, I suffused her with loving-kindness, venerable sir. The Teacher said, "Good, good, Uttara, it is proper to conquer anger in this way. For the angry one should be conquered by non-anger, the wicked by goodness, the miserly by generosity, and the liar by truthfulness," showing this meaning, he spoke this verse:

‘‘Akkodhena jine kodhaṃ, asādhuṃ sādhunā jine;

"Conquer anger by non-anger, conquer evil by good;
Conquer the miser by generosity, and the liar by truth." (Dhp. 223)

Imaṃ gāthaṃ vatvā gāthāpariyosāne catusaccakathaṃ abhāsi. Saccapariyosāne uttarā sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhahi, sāmiko ca sasuro ca sassu ca sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchikariṃsu, sirimāpi pañcasataparivārā sotāpannā ahosi. Aparabhāge uttarā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane uppajji. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto uttaraṃ devadhītaraṃ disvā –

Having spoken this verse, at the end of the verse, he delivered a discourse on the Four Noble Truths. At the conclusion of the Truths, Uttara was established in the fruit of once-returning (sakadāgāmiphala), and her husband, father-in-law, and mother-in-law realized the fruit of stream-entry (sotāpattiphala), and Sirima, along with her five hundred attendants, became stream-enterers (sotāpannā). Later, Uttara, having died, was reborn in the Tavatimsa heaven. Then, the venerable Mahamoggallana, while wandering on a divine tour in the same manner as described below, saw Uttara, the daughter of a deva:

124.

124.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O goddess;
Illuminating all directions, like a medicinal herb, a star.

125.

125.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"What deed did you do to have such beauty?
What deed did you do to find fulfillment here?

126.

And to have such enjoyments arise, whatever pleases the mind?

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve,

126.

127.

"I ask you, O goddess of great power,
What merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what have you such radiant power,
And why does your beauty light up all directions?" – he inquired;

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

127.

128.

"That goddess, delighted,
Asked by Moggallana,
Replied to the question,
The fruit of which action this is."

‘‘Issā ca maccheramatho paḷāso, nāhosi mayhaṃ gharamāvasantiyā;

128.

129.

"Jealousy, miserliness, and spite,
Did not exist in me while living at home;
Not easily angered, compliant to my husband,
Ever mindful on the Uposatha day.

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;

129.

130.

"On the fourteenth and fifteenth,
And the eighth of the half-month,
And the special observance day,
Endowed well with eight factors.

‘‘Uposathaṃ upavasissaṃ, sadā sīlesu saṃvutā;

130.

131.

"I observed the Uposatha,
Always restrained in the precepts;
With self-control and sharing,
I inhabit this mansion.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viratā, musāvādā ca saññatā;

131.

132.

"Abstaining from killing living beings,
Restrained from false speech;
From theft and misconduct,
And abstaining from intoxicants.

‘‘Pañcasikkhāpade ratā, ariyasaccāna kovidā;

132.

133.

"Delighting in the five precepts,
Skilled in the Noble Truths;
A female lay follower of the Buddha with the eye,
Of Gotama, the glorious one.

‘‘Sāhaṃ sakena sīlena, yasasā ca yasassinī;

133.

134.

"By my own virtue,
And glorious with glory,
I experience my own merit,
Happy and free from illness.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

134.

135.

"By that, I have such beauty,
By that, I find fulfillment here;
And to have such enjoyments arise,
Whatever pleases the mind.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamahaṃ akāsiṃ;

135.

Devatāpissa vissajjesi.

"I tell you, O monk of great power,
The merit that I did when I was a human being;
By that, I have such radiant power,
And why my beauty lights up all directions." –

126.Mama ca, bhante, vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandeyyāsi ‘‘uttarā nāma bhante, upāsikā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’’ti. Anacchariyaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhante, yaṃ maṃ bhagavā aññatarasmiṃ sāmaññaphale byākareyya, taṃ bhagavā sakadāgāmiphale byākāsīti.

126.And, venerable sir, with my words, you should bow with your head at the feet of the Blessed One, saying, "Venerable sir, a female lay follower named Uttara bows with her head at the feet of the Blessed One." It is not a wonder, venerable sir, that the Blessed One would declare me in some ordinary fruit of recluseship (sāmaññaphale), but the Blessed One declared me in the fruit of once-returning (sakadāgāmiphala).

128.Tatthaissā ca maccheramatho paḷāso, nāhosi mayhaṃ gharamāvasantiyāti yā ca agāramajjhe vasantīnaṃ aññāsaṃ itthīnaṃ sampattiādivisayā parasampattiusūyanalakkhaṇā issā, yañca tāvakālikādivasenāpi kiñci yācantānaṃ adātukāmatāya attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ macchariyaṃ, yo ca kulapadesādinā parehi yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso uppajjati, so tividhopi pāpadhammo gehe ṭhitāya mayhaṃ satipi paccayasamavāye nāhosi na uppajji.Akkodhanāti khantimettānuddayasampannatāya akujjhanasabhāvā.Bhattu vasānuvattinīti pubbuṭṭhānapacchānipātanādinā sāmikassa anukūlabhāvena vase vattanasīlā, manāpacārinīti attho.Uposathe niccahamappamattāti ahaṃ uposathasīlarakkhaṇe niccaṃ appamattā appamādavihārinī.

128.Therein, "Jealousy, miserliness, and spite, did not exist in me while living at home": the jealousy, which is the characteristic of envying the wealth and other attainments of other women living in the household, the miserliness, which is the characteristic of concealing one's own wealth by being unwilling to give even temporarily to those who ask for something, and the spite, which is the characteristic of finding fault with others due to family lineage and so on, all three of these evil qualities did not arise in me, even when the conditions were present, while staying at home. "Not easily angered": being of a nature not to get angry due to being endowed with patience, loving-kindness, and compassion. "Compliant to my husband": being accustomed to conduct oneself in accordance with the husband's wishes, such as rising before and retiring after him, meaning behaving agreeably. "Ever mindful on the Uposatha day": I am ever mindful in protecting the Uposatha precepts, living in mindfulness.

129.Tameva uposathe appamādaṃ dassentī yesu divasesu taṃ rakkhitabbaṃ, yādisaṃ yathā ca rakkhitabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘cātuddasi’’ntiādimāha. Tatthacātuddasiṃ pañcadasinti pakkhassāti sambandho, accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamīti etthati vacanaseso.Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti paṭiharaṇakapakkhañca, cātuddasīpañcadasīaṭṭhamīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ ādito antato cāti pavesananikkhamanavasena uposathasīlassa paṭiharitabbaṃ pakkhañca, terasī pāṭipadā sattamī navamī cāti attho.Aṭṭhaṅgasusamāgatanti pāṇātipātāveramaṇīādīhi aṭṭhahaṅgehi eva suṭṭhu samāgataṃ samannāgataṃ.

129.Showing mindfulness on that same Uposatha, in order to show on which days it should be protected, what kind, and how it should be protected, he said, "On the fourteenth" and so on. Therein, "On the fourteenth and fifteenth": the connection is "of the half-month"; this is the locative case in the sense of absolute connection. "And the eighth of the half-month": here, there is an implication of the word "and". "And the special observance day": and the day on which the Uposatha precepts are observed, either from the beginning or from the end, such as the thirteenth, the first day after the new moon, the seventh, and the ninth. "Endowed well with eight factors": indeed well-endowed, well-possessed, with eight factors such as abstinence from killing living beings.

130.Upavasissanti upavasiṃ. Atītatthe hi idaṃ anāgatavacanaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘upavasiṃ’’icceva paṭhanti.Sadāti sappaṭihārikesu sabbesu uposathadivasesu.Sīlesūti uposathasīlesu sādhetabbesu. Nipphādetabbe hi idaṃ bhummaṃ.Saṃvutāti kāyavācācittehi saṃvutā.Sadāti vā sabbakālaṃ.Sīlesūti niccasīlesu.Saṃvutāti kāyavācāhi saṃvutā.

130."I observed": I observed. This future tense is used in the sense of the past. But some recite it as "I observed." "Always": on all the Uposatha days on which observances are made. "In the precepts": in the Uposatha precepts that are to be accomplished. This locative case is used in the sense of accomplishment. "Restrained": restrained in body, speech, and mind. "Always": or at all times. "In the precepts": in the constant precepts. "Restrained": restrained in body and speech.

131.Idāni taṃ niccasīlaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pāṇātipātā viratā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthapāṇoti vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Pāṇassa atipāto pāṇavadho pāṇaghāto pāṇātipāto, atthato pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārapavattā vadhakacetanā. Tatopāṇātipātā. Viratāti oratā, nivattāti attho.

131.Now, in order to show that constant precept, "Abstaining from killing living beings" and so on was said. Therein, "Living being": in conventional usage, it means a being; in the ultimate sense, it means the life faculty (jīvitindriya). The destruction of life, killing of a living being, slaughter of a living being, is the meaning of abstaining from killing living beings. In essence, it is the volition (cetana) to kill, arising from the effort to cut off the life faculty of a being who perceives it as a living being, originating through one of the doors of body or speech. Therefore, abstaining from killing living beings: abstained, desisted, is the meaning.

Musāvādātimusānāma visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjanako vacīpayogo vā kāyapayogo vā, visaṃvādanādhippāyena parassa visaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Atha vāmusāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu,vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpetukāmassa tathā viññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Tatomusāvādā saññatāoratā, viratāti attho. Ca-saddo sampiṇḍanattho.

"From false speech": "False" means a verbal or bodily expression that breaks the meaning with the intention of deceiving, or the volition that arises from the deceitful bodily and verbal expression that deceives another person with the intention of deceiving. Or, "false" means something untrue, unreal; "speech" means the volition that arises from making it known as true and real to one who wishes to make it known thus. Therefore, "from false speech, restrained": abstained, desisted, is the meaning. The word "and" is used in the sense of collecting together.

Theyyāti theyyaṃ vuccati thenabhāvo, corikāya parassaharaṇanti attho. Atthato parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā theyyaṃ. Tatotheyyāsaññatā, ārakāti vā sambandho.

"From theft": theft is called the state of thieving, meaning taking what belongs to another by stealing. In essence, theft is the volition to steal that arises from the effort to take what is possessed by another, who perceives it as possessed by another. Therefore, "from theft," restrained, or the connection is "abstaining from."

Aticārāti aticca cāro aticāro, lokamariyādaṃ atikkamitvā agamanīyaṭṭhāne kāmavasena cāro micchācāroti attho. Agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma – purisānaṃ māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sārakkhā saparidaṇḍāti dasa, dhanakkītā chandavāsinī bhogavāsinī paṭavāsinī odapattakinī obhaṭacumbaṭā dāsī ca bhariyā kammakārī ca bhariyā dhajāhaṭā muhuttikāti dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ aññapurisā agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ, idameva idha adhippetaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārapavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā aticāro. Tasmāaticārā.

"Misconduct": misconduct means acting in an improper manner by transgressing worldly boundaries and engaging in sexual activity in an unapproachable place. An unapproachable place is defined as – for men, ten types of women: those protected by their mothers, protected by their fathers, protected by their mother and father, protected by their brothers, protected by their sisters, protected by their relatives, protected by their lineage, protected by Dhamma, protected by punishment, and those with a husband. And ten types of women: those bought with wealth, those who live by choice, those who live for material gain, those who live by wearing a cloth, those who are temporarily given for wealth, those who are slaves, wives, those who are employed as laborers, those who are brought by a flag, those who are temporarily taken. For women, non-approachable persons are other men other than their husband, who is under protection and punishment and the twelve for the aforementioned ten types of women starting with those bought by wealth. In essence, misconduct is the volition that arises through the body door, with the intention of breaking ethical conduct, with the intention of engaging in activities in an unapproachable place. Therefore, "from misconduct."

Majjapānāti majjaṃ vuccatimadanīyaṭṭhena surā ca merayañca, pivanti tenāti pānaṃ, majjassa pānaṃ majjapānaṃ. Yāya dussīlyacetanāya majjasaṅkhātaṃ piṭṭhasurā, pūvasurā, odaniyasurā, kiṇṇapakkhittā, sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañcabhedaṃ suraṃ vā, pupphāsavo, phalāsavo, madhvāsavo, guḷāsavo, sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañcabhedaṃ merayaṃ vā bījato paṭṭhāya kusaggenāpi pivati, sā cetanā majjapānaṃ. Tasmāmajjapānā ārakāviratā.

"From intoxicants": intoxicant means both liquor and spirits in the sense of causing intoxication. The act of drinking is called pānaṃ. Majjapānaṃ means the drinking of intoxicants. The volition by which one drinks liquor, which has five kinds: flour liquor, rice liquor, cooked-rice liquor, liquor mixed with yeast, and liquor mixed with ingredients; or spirits, which has five kinds: flower spirits, fruit spirits, honey spirits, molasses spirits, and spirits mixed with ingredients, even with a blade of kusa grass from the seed onward, that volition is called majjapānaṃ. Therefore, "from intoxicants, abstaining": desisting.

132.Evaṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātā viratā’’tiādinā pahātabbadhammavasena vibhajitvā dassitaṃ niccasīlaṃ puna samādātabbatāvasena ekato katvā dassentī‘‘pañcasikkhāpade ratā’’ti āha. Tatthasikkhāpadanti sikkhitabbapadaṃ, sikkhākoṭṭhāseti attho. Atha vā jhānādayo sabbepi kusalā dhammā sikkhitabbato sikkhā, pañcasu pana sīlaṅgesu yaṃkiñci aṅgaṃ tāsaṃ sikkhānaṃ patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena padanti sikkhānaṃ padattā sikkhāpadaṃ, pañca sīlaṅgāni. Tasmiṃ pañcavidhe sikkhāpade ratā abhiratātipañcasikkhāpade ratā. Ariyasaccāna kovidāti pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasena dukkhasamudayanirodhamaggasaṅkhātesu catūsu ariyasaccesu kusalā nipuṇā, paṭividdhacatusaccāti attho.Gotamassāti bhagavantaṃ gottena kitteti.Yasassinoti kittimato, parivāravato vā.

132. Thus, having shown the constant precepts by distinguishing them according to the qualities to be abandoned, beginning with "abstaining from taking life," it is now shown by combining them as qualities to be undertaken, as "delighting in the five training precepts." Here, sikkhāpada means a precept to be trained in, that is, a training compartment. Or, all wholesome qualities, such as jhāna, are trainings (sikkhā) because they are to be trained in; but any element among the five precepts is called a 'pada' (foundation) because it is the foundation for those trainings, hence, sikkhāpada means the foundation of trainings, the five precepts. Rata in the five training precepts means delighting, greatly pleased, in that fivefold training precept. Kovidā of the Noble Truths means skilled, adept, in the four Noble Truths, namely suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path, through comprehension by way of full understanding, abandonment, realization, and cultivation; that is, having penetrated the four truths. Of Gotama praises the Blessed One by his clan name. Yasassino means the glorious one, or the one with a retinue.

133.Sāhanti sā yathāvuttaguṇā ahaṃ.Sakena sīlenāti anussukitādinā attano sabhāvasīlena ca uposathasīlādisamādānasīlena ca kāraṇabhūtena. Tañhi sattānaṃ kammassakatāya hitasukhāvahatāya ca visesato ‘‘saka’’nti vuccati. Tenevāha –

133. Sāha means "I," possessing the aforementioned qualities. Sakena sīlenā means by one's own natural virtue, such as being without envy, and by the virtue of undertaking the uposatha precepts, etc., which serves as the cause. For that (virtue) is specifically called "saka" (one's own) because it belongs to beings as their own kamma and brings about benefit and happiness. Therefore, he said:

‘‘Tañhi tassa sakaṃ hoti, tañca ādāya gacchati;

"For that is one's own, that one takes along;
That follows one, like a shadow that never departs." (saṃ. ni. 1.115);

Yasasā ca yasassinīti ‘‘uttarā upāsikā sīlācārasampannā anussukī amaccharī akkodhanā’’tiādinā ‘‘āgataphalā viññātasāsanā’’tiādinā ca yathābhūtaguṇādhigatena jalatale telena viya samantato patthaṭena kittisaddena yasassinī kittimatī, tena vā sīlaguṇena idha adhigatena yasaparivārena yasassinī sampannaparivārā.Anubhomi sakaṃ puññanti yathūpacitaṃ attano puññaṃ paccanubhomi. Yassa hi puññaphalaṃ anubhūyati, phalūpacārena taṃ puññampi anubhūyatīti vuccati. Atha vā puthujjanabhāvato sucaritaphalampi ‘‘puñña’’nti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti.Sukhitā camhināmayāti dibbasukhena ca phalasukhena ca sukhitā camhi bhavāmi, kāyikacetasikadukkhābhāvato anāmayā arogā.

Yasasā ca yasassinī means "Uttara the female lay follower is accomplished in virtue and conduct, un-envious, un-miserly, un-angered," and by the fame that has spread all around like oil on the surface of water, due to the actual attainment of virtues such as "having attained the fruit, with the teaching understood," she is glorious, famed, or she is yasassinī, possessing a complete retinue, by the retinue of fame acquired here through that virtuous quality. Anubhomi sakaṃ puñña means I experience my own merit (puñña) as it has been accumulated. For when the fruit of merit is experienced, that merit itself is said to be experienced by way of treating the fruit (as the merit). Or, even the fruit of good conduct in the state of an ordinary person is called "puñña." As he said, "Bhikkhus, in this way, merit increases due to undertaking wholesome qualities." Sukhitā camhināmayā means I am happy with divine bliss and the bliss of fruition, and anāmayā, free from illness, because of the absence of physical and mental suffering.

136.Mama cāti ca-saddo samuccayattho. Tena ‘‘mama vacanena ca vandeyyāsi, na tava sabhāvenevā’’ti vandanaṃ samuccinoti.Anacchariyantiādinā attano ariyasāvikābhāvassa pākaṭabhāvaṃ dasseti.Taṃ bhagavātiādi saṅgītikāravacanaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.

136. Mama cā the word "ca" is used in the sense of aggregation. Therefore, it aggregates the salutation, saying, "You should salute with my words, not just out of your own nature." The passage beginning with Anacchariya shows the manifested state of her being a noble female disciple. Taṃ bhagavā etc. is the word of the compilers (of the canon). The rest is as previously stated.

Uttarāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Uttara Vimaana is finished.

16. Sirimāvimānavaṇṇanā
16. Commentary on the Sirimaa Vimaana

Yuttā ca te paramaalaṅkatā hayāti sirimāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena ca samayena heṭṭhā anantaravatthumhi vuttā sirimā gaṇikā sotāpattiphalassa adhigatattā vissajjitakiliṭṭhakammantā hutvā saṅghassa aṭṭha salākabhattāni paṭṭhapesi. Ādito paṭṭhāya nibaddhaṃ aṭṭha bhikkhū gehaṃ āgacchanti. Sā ‘‘sappiṃ gaṇhatha khīraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādīni vatvā tesaṃ patte pūreti, ekena laddhaṃ tiṇṇampi catunnampi pahoti, devasikaṃ soḷasakahāpaṇaparibbayena piṇḍapāto dīyati. Athekadivasaṃ eko bhikkhu tassā gehe aṭṭhakabhattaṃ bhuñjitvā tiyojanamatthake ekaṃ vihāraṃ agamāsi. Atha naṃ sāyaṃ therupaṭṭhāne nisinnaṃ pucchiṃsu, ‘‘āvuso, kahaṃ bhikkhaṃ gahetvā idhāgatosī’’ti? ‘‘Sirimāya aṭṭhakabhattaṃ me bhutta’’nti. ‘‘Taṃ manāpaṃ katvā deti, āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Na sakkā tassā bhattaṃ vaṇṇetuṃ, atipaṇītaṃ katvā deti, ekena laddhaṃ tiṇṇampi catunnampi pahoti, tassā pana deyyadhammatopi dassanameva uttaritaraṃ’’. Sā hi itthī evarūpā ca evarūpā cāti tassā guṇe kathesi.

Yuttā ca te paramaalaṅkatā hayā refers to the Sirimā Vimaana. What was its origin? The Blessed One was staying near Raajagaha, in the Bamboo Grove, at the Squirrels' Feeding Place. At that time, Sirimaa, the courtesan mentioned in the immediately preceding story, having attained the fruit of stream-entry, having relinquished defiled actions, established eight alms-meals for the Sangha. From the beginning, eight bhikkhus would regularly come to her house. She would say, "Take ghee, take milk," and fill their bowls; what one received was enough for three or four. Sixteen kahapanas were spent daily for alms food. Then one day, a bhikkhu, after eating an alms-meal at her house, went to a monastery about three yojanas away. There, while sitting in the elder's service in the evening, they asked him, "Aavuso, where did you get alms and come here?" "I ate an alms-meal at Sirimaa's." "Does she give it making it delightful, Aavuso?" "It is not possible to praise her meal; she prepares it very exquisitely; what one receives is enough for three or four; however, the mere sight of her is even more excellent than her gift." He told of her qualities, saying, "That woman is such and such."

Atheko bhikkhu tassā guṇakathaṃ sutvā adisvāpi savaneneva sinehaṃ uppādetvā ‘‘mayā tattha gantvā taṃ daṭṭhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti attano vassaggaṃ kathetvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ ṭhitikaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘sve, āvuso, tasmiṃ gehe tvaṃ saṅghatthero hutvā aṭṭhakabhattaṃ labhissasī’’ti sutvā taṅkhaṇaññeva pattacīvaramādāya pakkanto pātova aruṇe uggacchante salākaggaṃ pavisitvā ṭhito saṅghatthero hutvā tassā gehe aṭṭhakabhattaṃ labhi. Yo pana so bhikkhu hiyyo bhuñjitvā pakkāmi, tassa gatavelāyamevassā sarīre rogo uppajji. Tasmā ābharaṇāni omuñcitvā nipajji. Athassā dāsiyo aṭṭhakabhattaṃ labhituṃ āgate bhikkhū disvā ārocesuṃ. Sā gantvā sahatthā patte gahetuṃ vā nisīdāpetuṃ vā asakkontī dāsiyo āṇāpesi ‘‘ammā patte gahetvā ayye nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ pāyetvā khajjakaṃ datvā bhattavelāya patte pūretvā dethā’’ti. Tā ‘‘sādhu, ayye’’ti bhikkhū pavesetvā yāguṃ pāyetvā khajjakaṃ datvā bhattavelāya bhattassa patte pūretvā tassā ārocayiṃsu. Sā ‘‘maṃ pariggahetvā netha, ayye vandissāmī’’ti vatvā tāhi pariggahetvā bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ nītā vedhamānena sarīrena bhikkhū vandi. So bhikkhu taṃ oloketvā cintesi ‘‘gilānāya tāva ayaṃ etissā rūpasobhā, arogakāle pana sabbābharaṇapaṭimaṇḍitāya imissā kīdisī rūpasampattī’’ti. Athassa anekavassakoṭisannicito kileso samudācari. So aññāṇī hutvā bhattaṃ bhuñjituṃ asakkonto pattaṃ ādāya vihāraṃ gantvā pattaṃ pidhāya ekamante ṭhapetvā cīvarakaṇṇaṃ pattharitvā nipajji. Atha naṃ eko sahāyako bhikkhu yācantopi bhojetuṃ nāsakkhi, so chinnabhatto ahosi.

Then a bhikkhu, having heard the account of her virtues, even without seeing her, developed affection just by hearing and thought, "It is fitting for me to go there and see her." He announced his rainy season residence and asked that bhikkhu about her location, and having heard, "Tomorrow, Aavuso, you will receive the alms-meal at her house as the Sangha-elder," he immediately took his bowl and robes and departed. In the morning, at sunrise, he entered the selection for the Sangha-elder and stood there, and received the alms-meal at her house as the Sangha-elder. But the bhikkhu who had eaten and left the previous day, at the time of his departure, a disease arose in her body. Therefore, she removed her ornaments and lay down. Then her maids, seeing the bhikkhus who had come to receive the alms-meal, informed her. Unable to go and take the bowls with her own hands or to seat them, she ordered the maids, "Mothers, take the bowls, seat the respected ones, give them gruel to drink, give them hard food, and at mealtime, fill the bowls and give them." They, saying "Good, revered one," led the bhikkhus in, gave them gruel to drink, gave them hard food, and at mealtime, filled the bowls with food and informed her. She, saying, "Take me along, I will salute the revered ones," was taken by them into the presence of the bhikkhus with a trembling body, and she saluted the bhikkhus. That bhikkhu, looking at her, thought, "Even sick, this is the beauty of her form; what must be the beauty of this woman when she is adorned with all her ornaments in good health?" Then the defilement that had accumulated for countless years arose in him. Unable to eat the meal, being ignorant, he took the bowl, went to the monastery, covered the bowl, placed it aside, spread out the edge of his robe, and lay down. Then, although his companion bhikkhu begged him, he was unable to eat; he remained with the meal uncut (uneaten).

Taṃ divasameva sāyanhasamaye sirimā kālamakāsi. Rājā satthu sāsanaṃ pesesi ‘‘bhante, jīvakassa kaniṭṭhabhaginī sirimā kālamakāsī’’ti. Satthā taṃ sutvā rañño sāsanaṃ pahiṇi ‘‘sirimāya sarīrajhāpanakiccaṃ natthi, āmakasusāne taṃ yathā kākādayo na khādanti, tathā nipajjāpetvā rakkhāpethā’’ti. Rājā tathā akāsi. Paṭipāṭiyā tayo divasā atikkantā, catutthe divase sarīraṃ uddhumāyi, navahi vaṇamukhehi puḷavakā pagghariṃsu, sakalasarīraṃ bhinnasālibhattacāṭi viya ahosi. Rājā nagare bheriṃ carāpesi ‘‘ṭhapetvā geharakkhaṇakadārake sirimāya dassanatthaṃ anāgacchantānaṃ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā daṇḍo’’ti. Satthu santikañca pesesi ‘‘buddhappamukho kira saṅgho sirimāya dassanatthaṃ āgacchatū’’ti. Satthā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocāpesi ‘‘sirimāya dassanatthaṃ gamissāmā’’ti.

On that very day, in the evening, Sirimaa passed away. The king sent a message to the Teacher, "Bhante, Sirimaa, the younger sister of Jivaka, has passed away." The Teacher, having heard that, sent a message to the king, "There is no need for cremation rites for Sirimaa's body; have it laid down in the charnel ground so that crows and other creatures do not eat it, and have it guarded." The king did so. In due course, three days passed; on the fourth day, the body became bloated, pus flowed from nine wound-openings, the entire body became like a broken rice bowl. The king had a proclamation made in the city, "Those who do not come to see Sirimaa, except for children kept to guard the houses, shall pay a fine of eight kahapanas." And he sent to the Teacher, "May the Sangha, with the Buddha at its head, come to see Sirimaa." The Teacher had it announced to the bhikkhus, "We will go to see Sirimaa."

Sopi daharabhikkhu cattāro divase kassaci vacanaṃ aggahetvā chinnabhattova nipajji. Patte bhattaṃ pūtikaṃ jātaṃ, patte malampi uṭṭhahi. Atha so sahāyakabhikkhunā upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘āvuso satthā sirimāya dassanatthaṃ gacchatī’’ti vuccamāno tathā chātajjhattopi ‘‘sirimā’’ti vuttapadeyeva sahasā uṭṭhahitvā ‘‘satthā sirimaṃ daṭṭhuṃ gacchati, tvampi gamissasī’’ti? ‘‘Āma gamissāmī’’ti bhattaṃ chaḍḍetvā pattaṃ dhovitvā thavikāya pakkhipitvā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ agamāsi. Satthā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto ekapasse aṭṭhāsi, bhikkhunisaṅghopi rājaparisāpi upāsakaparisāpi upāsikāparisāpi ekekapasse aṭṭhaṃsu.

That young bhikkhu also, without heeding anyone's words for four days, lay down with his meal uncut. The food in the bowl became putrid, and mold grew in the bowl. Then, when his companion bhikkhu approached him, saying, "Aavuso, the Teacher is going to see Sirimaa," even though he was afflicted with hunger, at the mere mention of the word "Sirimaa," he suddenly got up and asked, "The Teacher is going to see Sirimaa; will you also go?" "Yes, I will go." Abandoning the food, washing the bowl, putting it in his bag, he went with the community of bhikkhus. The Teacher stood on one side surrounded by the community of bhikkhus, and the community of bhikkhunis, the royal assembly, the community of laymen, and the community of laywomen stood on each side.

Satthā rājānaṃ pucchi ‘‘kā esā, mahārājā’’ti? ‘‘Bhante, jīvakassa kaniṭṭhabhaginī sirimā nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Sirimā esā’’ti? ‘‘Āma, bhante’’ti. Tena hi nagare bheriṃ carāpehi ‘‘sahassaṃ datvā sirimaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti. Rājā tathā kāresi, ekopi ‘‘ha’’nti vā ‘‘hu’’nti vā vadanto nāma nāhosi. Rājā satthu ārocesi ‘‘na gaṇhanti bhante’’ti, tena hi mahārāja agghaṃ ohāpehīti. Rājā ‘‘pañcasatāni datvā gaṇhantū’’ti bheriṃ carāpetvā kañci gaṇhanakaṃ adisvā ‘‘aḍḍhateyyasatāni, dvesatāni, sataṃ, paññāsaṃ, pañcavīsati, vīsati kahāpaṇe, dasa kahāpaṇe, pañca kahāpaṇe, ekaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ, aḍḍhaṃ, pādaṃ, māsakaṃ, kākaṇikaṃ datvā sirimaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti bheriṃ carāpetvā ‘‘mudhāpi gaṇhantū’’ti bheriṃ carāpesi, tathāpi ‘‘ha’’nti vā ‘‘hu’’nti vā vadanto nāma nāhosi. Rājā ‘‘mudhāpi, bhante, gaṇhanto natthī’’ti āha. Satthā ‘‘passatha, bhikkhave, mahājanassa piyamātugāmaṃ, imasmiṃyeva nagare sahassaṃ datvā pubbe ekadivasaṃ labhiṃsu, idāni mudhāpi gaṇhanto natthi evarūpaṃ nāma rūpaṃ khayavayappattaṃ āharimehi alaṅkārehi vicittakataṃ navannaṃ vaṇṇamukhānaṃ vasena arubhūtaṃ tīhi aṭṭhisatehi samussitaṃ niccāturaṃ kevalaṃ bālamahājanena bahudhā saṅkappitatāya bahusaṅkappaṃ addhuvaṃ attabhāva’’nti dassento –

The Teacher asked the king, "Who is this, Mahaaraja?" "Bhante, she is Sirimaa, the younger sister of Jivaka." "Is this Sirimaa?" "Yes, Bhante." "Then have a proclamation made in the city, 'Let anyone who wishes take Sirimaa for a thousand (kahapanas).'" The king had it done so, but no one said "yes" or "no." The king informed the Teacher, "They do not take her, Bhante." "Then, Mahaaraja, lower the price." The king had a proclamation made, "Let anyone who wishes take her for five hundred," but not seeing anyone taking her, he proclaimed, "Two hundred and fifty, two hundred, one hundred, fifty, twenty-five, twenty kahapanas, ten kahapanas, five kahapanas, one kahapana, half, a quarter, a masaka, a kakaniika; let anyone who wishes take Sirimaa for (that price)." He had proclaimed "Let anyone take her even for free," but still no one said "yes" or "no." The king said, "Even for free, Bhante, there is no one taking her." The Teacher said, "See, bhikkhus, the beloved female sex of the multitude; formerly, in this very city, they obtained her for one day for a thousand (kahapanas), now there is no one to take her even for free; such is this form, subject to decay and decline, adorned with various ornaments, having become disgusting by way of nine ever-flowing wound openings, built up with three hundred bones, constantly diseased, wholly imagined in various ways by the foolish multitude, having many conceptions, impermanent, and selfless." Showing this, he recited the verse:

‘‘Passa cittakataṃ bimbaṃ, arukāyaṃ samussitaṃ;

"Behold this painted image,
A body built up of sores,
Diseased, full of imaginings,
Where there is no lasting stability." (theragā. 1160)

Gāthamāha. Desanāpariyosāne sirimāya paṭibaddhacitto bhikkhu vigatachandarāgo hutvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi, caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi.

At the end of the discourse, the bhikkhu whose mind was attached to Sirimaa, becoming free from desire and lust, developed insight and attained arahantship, and eighty-four thousand beings attained the Dhamma.

Tena ca samayena sirimā devakaññā attano vibhavasamiddhiṃ oloketvā āgataṭṭhānaṃ olokentī purimattabhāve attano sarīrasamīpe bhikkhusaṅghaparivutaṃ bhagavantaṃ ṭhitaṃ mahājanakāyañca sannipatitaṃ disvā pañcahi devakaññāsatehi parivutā pañcahi rathasatehi dissamānakāyā āgantvā rathato otaritvā saparivārā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā katañjalī aṭṭhāsi. Tena ca samayena āyasmā vaṅgīso bhagavato avidūre ṭhito hoti. So bhagavantaṃ etadavoca ‘‘paṭibhāti maṃ bhagavā ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitu’’nti. ‘‘Paṭibhātu taṃ vaṅgīsā’’ti bhagavā avoca. Āyasmā vaṅgīso taṃ sirimaṃ devadhītaraṃ –

At that time, Sirimaa, the divine maiden, surveying the prosperity of her own glory, and looking back at where she had come from, seeing the Blessed One standing near her body surrounded by the community of bhikkhus and a great crowd gathered, surrounded by five hundred divine maidens, with her body visible through five hundred chariots, came down from the chariot and, with her retinue, saluted the Blessed One and stood with joined palms. At that time, Venerable Vangiisa was standing not far from the Blessed One. He said this to the Blessed One, "It occurs to me, Blessed One, to ask a question." "Let it occur to you, Vangiisa," the Blessed One said. Venerable Vangiisa asked that Sirimaa, the daughter of a deva—

137.

137.

‘‘Yuttā ca te paramaalaṅkatā hayā, adhomukhā aghasigamā balī javā;

"Your horses are yoked and exceedingly adorned, heads lowered, swift as wind, strong and fast;
And five hundred chariots created by magic, follow you, horses urged on by charioteers.

138.

138.

‘‘Sā tiṭṭhasi rathavare alaṅkatā,

"You stand on an excellent chariot, adorned,
Illuminating like a flame of fire;
I ask you, fair-skinned one, of unparalleled sight,
From what body have you come to this excellent state?"

137.Tatthayuttā ca te paramaalaṅkatā hayāti paramaṃ ativiya visesato alaṅkatā, paramehi vā uttamehi dibbehi assālaṅkārehi alaṅkatā, paramā vā aggā seṭṭhā ājānīyā sabbālaṅkārehi alaṅkatā hayā assā te tava rathe yojitā, yuttā vā te rathassa ca anucchavikā, aññamaññaṃ vā sadisatāya yuttā saṃsaṭṭhāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘paramaalaṅkatā’’ti purimasmiṃ pakkhe sandhiṃ akatvā dutiyasmiṃ pakkhe avibhattikaniddeso daṭṭhabbo.Adhomukhāti heṭṭhāmukhā. Yadipi te tadā pakatiyāva ṭhitā, devalokato orohaṇavasena ‘‘adhomukhā’’ti vuttā.Aghasigamāti vehāsaṃgamā.Balīti balavanto.Javāti javanakā, balavanto ceva vegavanto cāti attho.Abhinimmitāti tava puññakammena nimmitā nibbattā. Sayaṃ nimmitameva vā sandhāya ‘‘abhinimmitā’’ti vuttaṃ nimmānaratibhāvato sirimāya devadhītāya.Pañcarathāsatāti gāthāsukhatthaṃ thakārassa dīghaṃ liṅgavipallāsañca katvā vuttaṃ, vibhattialopo vā daṭṭhabbo, pañca rathasatānīti attho.Anventi taṃ sārathicoditā hayāti sārathīhi coditā viya rathesu yuttā ime hayā bhadde, devate, taṃ anugacchanti. ‘‘Sārathiacoditā’’ti keci paṭhanti, sārathīhi acoditā eva anugacchantīti attho. ‘‘Sārathicoditā hayā’’ti ekaṃyeva vā padaṃ gāthāsukhatthaṃ dīghaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, sārathicoditahayā pañca rathasatāti yojanā.

137. There, yuttā ca te paramaalaṅkatā hayā means the horses yoked to your chariot are exceedingly, very specially adorned, or adorned with excellent, superior, divine horse ornaments; or the best, most excellent, thoroughbred horses adorned with all ornaments are yoked to your chariot; or your chariot and its horses are compatible and well-matched, or they are well-suited and connected to each other due to their similarity. Here, in "paramaalaṅkatā," in the first interpretation, the sandhi is not made; in the second interpretation, the case ending is not expressed, it should be understood. Adhomukhā means with heads lowered. Although they were standing naturally at that time, they are said to be "adhomukhā" because of descending from the deva world. Aghasigamā means going through the sky. Balī means strong. Javā means swift, that is, they are both strong and fast. Abhinimmitā means created, produced, by your meritorious action. Or, it is said "abhinimmitā" referring to what was self-created, because Sirimaa, the deva daughter, had the nature of delighting in creation. Pañcarathāsatā this is said making the vowel "a" long and changing the gender of the word "thakaara" for the sake of metrical ease, or the elision of the case ending should be understood; it means five hundred chariots. Anventi taṃ sārathicoditā hayā means these horses, yoked to the chariots, follow you, fair lady, goddess, as if urged on by charioteers. Some read "sārathiacoditā," meaning they follow without even being urged by charioteers. Or, "Sārathicoditā hayā" is a single word, said by lengthening the vowel for the sake of metrical ease; the meaning is five hundred chariots with horses urged on by charioteers.

138.Sā tiṭṭhasīti sā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi.Rathavareti rathuttame.Alaṅkatāti saṭṭhisakaṭabhārehi dibbālaṅkārehi alaṅkatasarīrā.Obhāsayaṃ jalamiva joti pāvakoti obhāsentī jotiriva jalantī pāvako viya ca tiṭṭhasi, samantato obhāsentī jalantī tiṭṭhasīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Jotī’’ti ca candimasūriyanakkhattatārakarūpānaṃ sādhāraṇanāmaṃ.Varatanūti uttamarūpadhare sabbaṅgasobhane. Tato evaanomadassanealāmakadassane, dassanīye pāsādiketi attho.Kasmā nu kāyā anadhivaraṃ upāgamīti kuto nāma devakāyato anuttaraṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ payirupāsanāya upagañchi upagatāsi.

138. Sā tiṭṭhasīti means, "You, you are standing." Rathavare means, "in an excellent chariot." Alaṅkatā means, "with a body adorned with divine ornaments to the extent of sixty cartloads." Obhāsayaṃ jalamiva joti pāvako means, "shining, blazing like a flame, and standing like a fire; it means you are standing shining and blazing all around." And "Joti" is a common name for the moon, sun, stars, and constellations. Varatanū means, "possessing an excellent form, beautiful in every limb." Therefore, anomadassane, meaning of flawless appearance, of remarkable appearance; that is, pleasing and delightful to see. Kasmā nu kāyā anadhivaraṃ upāgamī means, "from which deva-body did you come to attend upon the unsurpassed Fully Enlightened One?"

Evaṃ therena pucchitā sā devatā attānaṃ āvikarontī –

Thus questioned by the Elder, that deity, revealing herself, spoke this verse:

139.

139.

‘‘Kāmaggapattānaṃ yamāhunuttaraṃ, nimmāya nimmāya ramanti devatā;

"The deities who rejoice, creating and creating, in that which they call the highest attainment of sensual pleasures;
From that body, O Apsara, fond of sensual delights, I have come here to pay homage to the unsurpassed One."

Gāthamāha.

Thus, she spoke the verse.

139.Tatthakāmaggapattānaṃ yamāhunuttaranti kāmūpabhogehi aggabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ devānaṃ yaṃ devakāyaṃ yasena bhogādivasena ca anuttaranti vadanti, tato kāyā.Nimmāya nimmāya ramanti devatāti nimmānaratidevatā attanā yathārucite kāme sayaṃ nimminitvā nimminitvā ramanti kīḷanti laḷantā abhiramanti.Tasmā kāyāti tasmā nimmānaratidevanikāyā.Kāmavaṇṇinīti kāmarūpadharā yathicchitarūpadhārinī.Idhāgatāti idha imasmiṃ manussaloke, imaṃ vā manussalokaṃ āgatā.

139. There, kāmaggapattānaṃ yamāhunuttaraṃ means, "that deva-body of the Paranimmita-vasavattī devas, who have attained the highest state with the enjoyment of sensual pleasures, which they say is unsurpassed in glory and enjoyment etc., from that body." Nimmāya nimmāya ramanti devatā means, "the Nimmānaratī devas, creating and creating desired objects according to their wish, rejoice, sport, and delight." Tasmā kāyā means, "from that group of Nimmānaratī devas." Kāmavaṇṇinī means, "possessing forms of sensual desire, assuming forms according to their wish." Idhāgatā means, "here in this human world, or having come to this human world."

Evaṃ devatāya attano nimmānaratidevatābhāve kathite puna thero tassā purimabhavaṃ tattha katapuññakammaṃ laddhiñca kathāpetukāmo –

Having thus heard that she was a Nimmānaratī deva, the Elder, wishing to inquire about her former existence, the meritorious deeds she had done, and her attainment, spoke thus:

140.

140.

‘‘Kiṃ tvaṃ pure sucaritamācarīdha, kenacchasi tvaṃ amitayasā sukhedhitā;

"What meritorious deed did you perform in the past, by which you possess such great glory and are filled with happiness?
And your power is unsurpassed and far-reaching; and your radiance illuminates the ten directions.

141.

141.

‘‘Devehi tvaṃ parivutā sakkatā casi,

"Surrounded by devas, you are honored.
Having departed from where, have you attained a state of bliss, O deity?
Whose word and instruction do you follow?
Tell me, if you are a disciple of the Buddha." Thus, he spoke two verses;

140.Tatthaācarīti dīghaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, upacinīti attho.Idhāti nipātamattaṃ, idha vā imasmiṃ devattabhāve.Kenacchasīti kena puññakammena assatthā acchasi. ‘‘Kenāsi tva’’nti keci paṭhanti.Amitayasāti na mitayasā anappakaparivārā.Sukhedhitāti sukhena vaḍḍhitā, suparibrūhitadibbasukhāti attho.Iddhīti dibbānubhāvo.Anadhivarāti adhikā visiṭṭhā aññā etissā natthīti anadhivarā, atiuttamāti attho.Vihaṅgamāti vehāsagāminī.Dasa disāti dasapi disā.Virocatīti obhāseti.

140. There, ācarī is said by lengthening the vowel, meaning "accumulated." Idhā is merely a particle, or it means "here, in this state of divinity." Kenacchasī means, "by what meritorious deed do you possess (this state)?" Some recite it as "kenāsi tvaṃ." Amitayasā means, "with immeasurable glory, having a great retinue." Sukhedhitā means, "nourished with happiness, possessing exceedingly excellent divine happiness." Iddhī means, "divine power." Anadhivarā means, "unsurpassed, excellent; there is none other superior to her, hence unsurpassed, exceedingly excellent." Vihaṅgamā means, "moving in the sky." Dasa disā means, "the ten directions." Virocatī means, "illuminates."

141.Parivutāsakkatā casīti samantato parivāritā sambhāvitā ca asi.Kuto cutā sugatigatāsīti pañcasu gatīsu kataragatito cutā hutvā sugatiṃ imaṃ devagatiṃ paṭisandhivasena upagatā asi.Kassa vā tvaṃ vacanakarānusāsaninti kassa nu vā satthu sāsane pāvacane ovādānusāsanisampaṭicchanena tvaṃ vacanakarā asīti yojanā. Kassa vā tvaṃ satthu vacanakarā anusāsakassa anusiṭṭhiyaṃ patiṭṭhānenāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ anuddesikavasena tassā laddhiṃ pucchitvā puna uddesikavasena‘‘ācikkha me tvaṃ yadi buddhasāvikā’’ti pucchati. Tatthabuddhasāvikāti sabbampi ñeyyadhammaṃ sayambhuñāṇena hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya paccakkhato buddhattā buddhassa bhagavato dhammassavanante jātāti buddhasāvikā.

141. Parivutā sakkatā casī means, "you are surrounded on all sides and also honored." Kuto cutā sugatigatāsī means, "having passed away from which of the five destinies, have you attained this happy destiny, this deva-state, by way of rebirth?" Kassa vā tvaṃ vacanakarānusāsaniṃ means, "whose teaching, whose dispensation, by accepting the advice and instruction of which teacher, are you obedient?" This is the meaning. Or, here, the meaning should be seen as, "Whose teaching are you obedient to, by being established in the instruction of which instructor?" Thus, having inquired about her attainment in an unspecified way, he then asks in a specific way, ‘‘ācikkha me tvaṃ yadi buddhasāvikā’’, "tell me, if you are a disciple of the Buddha." There, buddhasāvikā means, "a disciple of the Buddha because she was born into the Dispensation of the Buddha, the Blessed One, since Buddhahood is the direct realization of all knowable phenomena through self-acquired knowledge, like an Amalaka fruit in the palm of the hand."

Evaṃ therena pucchitamatthaṃ kathentī devatā imā gāthā abhāsi –

The deity, explaining the matter questioned by the Elder, spoke these verses:

142.

142.

‘‘Nagantare nagaravare sumāpite, paricārikā rājavarassa sirimato;

"In the midst of mountains, in an excellent city, well-constructed,
I was an attendant of a glorious king;
I was exceedingly well-trained in dancing and singing,
They knew me as Sirimā in Rājagaha.

143.

143.

‘‘Buddho ca me isinisabho vināyako, adesayī samudayadukkhaniccataṃ;

"And the Buddha, the chief of sages, the Guide,
Taught me the impermanence of the arising and of suffering;
The unconditioned, the cessation of suffering, the eternal,
This path, uncrooked, direct, and secure.

144.

144.

‘‘Sutvānahaṃ amatapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, tathāgatassanadhivarassa sāsanaṃ;

"Having heard the deathless state, the unconditioned,
The Teaching of the unsurpassed Tathāgata;
I was exceedingly well-restrained in moral conduct,
Established in the Dhamma, taught by the Buddha, the best of men.

145.

145.

‘‘Ñatvānahaṃ virajapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, tathāgatenanadhivarena desitaṃ;

"Having known the stainless state, the unconditioned,
Taught by the unsurpassed Tathāgata;
There itself I attained concentration of tranquility,
That itself was my supreme regulation.

146.

146.

‘‘Laddhānahaṃ amatavaraṃ visesanaṃ, ekaṃsikā abhisamaye visesiya;

"Having attained the excellent, deathless state,
Undoubting in the realization of the unique;
Free from doubt, I am honored by many people,
And experience slight playful delight.

147.

147.

‘‘Evaṃ ahaṃ amatadasamhi devatā, tathāgatassanadhivarassa sāvikā;

"Thus, in the state of seeing the Deathless, I am a deity,
A female disciple of the unsurpassed Tathāgata;
A seer of the Dhamma, established in the first fruit,
A Sotāpanna, and there is no possibility of falling into the states of misery for me.

148.

148.

‘‘Sā vandituṃ anadhivaraṃ upāgamiṃ, pāsādike kusalarate ca bhikkhavo;

"I have come to pay homage to the unsurpassed One,
Delighting the pleasing and virtuous monks;
To pay homage to the peaceful assembly of ascetics,
With respect to the glorious King of the Dhamma.

149.

149.

‘‘Disvā muniṃ muditamanamhi pīṇitā, tathāgataṃ naravaradammasārathiṃ;

"Having seen the Sage, I am glad and delighted in mind,
The Tathāgata, the best of men, the Charioteer of the Dhamma;
The cutter of craving, delighting in virtue, the Guide,
I worship the supreme compassionate One."

142.Tatthanagantareti isigilivepullavebhārapaṇḍavagijjhakūṭasaṅkhātānaṃ pañcannaṃ pabbatānaṃ antare vemajjhe, yato taṃ nagaraṃ ‘‘giribbaja’’nti vuccati.Nagaravareti uttamanagare, rājagahaṃ sandhāyāha.Sumāpiteti mahāgovindapaṇḍitena vatthuvijjāvidhinā sammadeva nivesite.Paricārikāti saṃgītaparicariyāya upaṭṭhāyikā.Rājavarassāti bimbisāramahārājassa.Sirimatoti ettha ‘‘sirīti buddhipuññānaṃ adhivacana’’nti vadanti. Atha vā puññanibbattā sarīrasobhaggādisampatti katapuññaṃ nissayati, katapuññehi vā nissīyatīti ‘‘sirī’’ti vuccati, sā etassa atthīti sirimā, tassa sirimato.Paramasusikkhitāti ativiya sammadeva ca sikkhitā.Ahunti ahosiṃ.Avediṃsūti aññāsuṃ.

142. There, nagantare means, "in the middle of the five mountains named Isigili, Vepulla, Vebhāra, Paṇḍava, and Gijjhakūṭa, that is why that city is called 'Giribbaja'." Nagaravare means, "in an excellent city," referring to Rājagaha. Sumāpite means, "well-constructed, properly established by the wise Mahāgovinda according to the rules of Vatthuvijjā." Paricārikā means, "an attendant who waits upon (the king) with singing." Rājavarassā means, "of King Bimbisāra." Sirimato here, some say "Sirī is a term for wisdom and merit." Or else, the abundance of bodily beauty etc., resulting from merit, depends on meritorious deeds, or it depends on those who have done meritorious deeds, therefore it is called "Sirī"; she has that, therefore Sirimā, of that glorious one. Paramasusikkhitā means, "exceedingly well-trained." Ahuṃ means, "I was." Avediṃsū means, "they knew."

143.Isinisabhoti gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asampakampiyo nisabho. Rathā so attano nisabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā kenaci parissayena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ bhagavā dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, tasmā nisabho viyāti nisabho. Sīlādīnaṃ dhammakkhandhānaṃ esanaṭṭhena ‘‘isī’’ti laddhavohāresu sekkhāsekkhaisīsu nisabho, isīnaṃ vā nisabho, isi ca so nisabho cāti vā isinisabho. Veneyyasatte vinetītivināyako,nāyakavirahitoti vāvināyako,sayambhūti attho.

143. Isinisabho means, "an Usabha is the foremost of a hundred cows, a Vasabha is the foremost of a thousand cows, or an Usabha is the foremost of a hundred bulls, a Vasabha is the foremost of a thousand bulls, the best of all cows, enduring all difficulties, white, pleasing, bearing a great burden, unshaken even by the sound of a hundred thunderbolts, is a Nisabha. Just as that Usabha, endowed with his strength, stands with unshaken, unmoving steadfastness, pressing down the earth with its four feet by any difficulty, similarly, the Blessed One, endowed with the ten Tathāgata powers, pressing down the earth of the eight assemblies with the four grounds of confidence, stands with unshaken, unmoving steadfastness by any adversary or enemy in the world with its devas; therefore, like a Nisabha, He is a Nisabha. Because of the meaning of seeking the aggregates of qualities such as morality etc., He is the foremost among the trainees and non-trainees who have the designation 'Isī', or He is the Nisabha of the Isīs, or both, He is an Isī and a Nisabha, hence Isinisabha. Vināyako means, "He trains the trainable beings," or vināyako means, "without a leader," that is, "self-born."

Adesayī samudayadukkhaniccatanti samudayasaccassa ca dukkhasaccassa ca aniccataṃ vayadhammataṃ abhāsi. Tena ‘‘yaṃkiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti attano abhisamayañāṇassa pavattiākāraṃ dasseti.Samudayadukkhaniccatanti vā samudayasaccañca dukkhasaccañca aniccatañca. Tattha samudayasaccadukkhasaccaggahaṇena vipassanāya bhūmiṃ dasseti, aniccatāgahaṇena tassā pavattiākāraṃ dasseti. Saṅkhārānañhi aniccākāre vibhāvite dukkhākāro anattākāropi vibhāvitoyeva hoti taṃnibandhanattā tesaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15).Asaṅkhataṃ dukkhanirodhasassatanti kenaci paccayena na saṅkhatanti asaṅkhataṃ, sabbakālaṃ tathabhāvena sassataṃ, sakalavaṭṭadukkhanirodhabhāvato dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccañca me adesayīti yojanā.Maggañcimaṃ akuṭilamañjasaṃ sivanti antadvayaparivajjanena kuṭilabhāvakarānaṃ māyādīnaṃ kāyavaṅkādīnañca pahānena akuṭilaṃ, tato eva añjasaṃ, asivabhāvakarānaṃ kāmarāgādīnaṃ samucchindanena sivaṃ nibbānaṃ.Magganti nibbānatthikehi maggīyati, kilese vā mārento gacchatīti ‘‘maggo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ idaṃ tumhākañca mamañca paccakkhabhūtaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāsaṅkhātaṃ ariyasaccañca me adesayīti yojanā.

Adesayī samudayadukkhaniccataṃ means, "He spoke of the impermanence, the nature of decay, of the arising and of the suffering that is the truth of arising and the truth of suffering." By that, He shows the manner of occurrence of His own knowledge of realization, "Whatever is of the nature of arising, all that is of the nature of cessation." Or, samudayadukkhaniccata means, "the truth of arising, the truth of suffering, and impermanence." There, by grasping the truth of arising and the truth of suffering, He shows the basis of insight; by grasping impermanence, He shows the manner of its occurrence. For, when the characteristic of impermanence of conditioned things is distinguished, the characteristic of suffering and the characteristic of non-self are also distinguished, because they are dependent on it. Therefore, it is said, "What is impermanent is suffering, what is suffering is non-self" (saṃ. ni. 3.15). Asaṅkhataṃ dukkhanirodhasassataṃ means, "the unconditioned, not conditioned by any cause, eternal in its suchness at all times, the cessation of suffering because of the nature of the cessation of all round of suffering, and also the Noble Truth, dukkhanirodhaṃ, He taught to me." This is the connection. Maggañcimaṃ akuṭilamañjasaṃ sivaṃ means, "uncrooked by avoiding the two extremes, by the abandonment of crooked-making Māyā etc., and bodily crookedness etc.; therefore, direct, secure by cutting off Kāmarāga etc., which cause the state of non-auspiciousness, Nibbāna." Magga is a name given because it is sought by those who desire Nibbāna, or because it goes killing the defilements; this Noble Truth, known as the practice leading to the cessation of suffering, which is directly experienced by you and me, He also taught to me. This is the connection.

144.Sutvānahaṃ amatapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, tathāgatassanadhivarassa sāsananti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – tathā āgamanādiatthenatathāgatassa,sadevake loke aggabhāvatoanadhivarassa,sammāsambuddhassa amatapadaṃasaṅkhataṃnibbānaṃ uddissa desitattā, amatassa vā nibbānassa paṭipajjanupāyattā kenacipi asaṅkharaṇīyattā ca amatapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃsāsanaṃsaddhammaṃahaṃ sutvānāti.Sīlesvahanti sīlesu nipphādetabbesu ahaṃ.Paramasusaṃvutāti ativiya sammadeva saṃvutā.Ahunti ahosiṃ.Dhamme ṭhitāti paṭipattidhamme patiṭṭhitā.

144. Sutvānahaṃ amatapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, tathāgatassanadhivarassa sāsanaṃ here, this is the condensed meaning—"Because it was taught aiming at the deathless state, asaṅkhataṃ, Nibbāna, of the Tathāgata, because of the meaning of thusness in coming etc., of the anadhivarassa, the unsurpassed One, because of being the foremost in the world with its devas, or because of being the means of practicing the deathless, and because it cannot be conditioned by anyone, the asaṅkhataṃ sāsanaṃ, the undying doctrine, I have heard." Sīlesvahaṃ means, "I, in the moralities to be accomplished." Paramasusaṃvutā means, "exceedingly well restrained." Ahuṃ means, "I was." Dhamme ṭhitā means, "established in the Dhamma of practice."

145.Ñatvānāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena jānitvā.Tatthevāti tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, tasmiṃyeva vā attabhāve.Samathasamādhimāphusinti paccanīkadhammānaṃ samucchedavasena samanato vūpasamanato paramatthasamathabhūtaṃ lokuttarasamādhiṃ āphusiṃ adhigacchiṃ. Yadipi yasmiṃ khaṇe nirodhassa sacchikiriyābhisamayo, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe maggassa bhāvanābhisamayo, ārammaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pana bhāvanāpaṭivedhasseva purimasiddhikāraṇaṃ viya katvā dassetuṃ –

145. Ñatvānā means, "having known by way of realization and direct experience." Tatthevā means, "in that very moment, or in that very existence." Samathasamādhimāphusiṃ means, "I attained the supramundane concentration, which is the ultimate tranquility because of calming down by way of the destruction of opposing factors." Although in the moment of realization of cessation, there is also the cultivation of the path in that very moment, to show that the penetration of the object is the prior cause for the attainment of cultivation—

‘‘Ñatvānahaṃ virajapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, tathāgatenanadhivarena desitaṃ’’.

‘‘Ñatvānahaṃ virajapadaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, tathāgatenanadhivarena desitaṃ’’.

Ñatvānāti vā samānakālavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ yathā ‘‘nihantvāna tamaṃ sabbaṃ, ādicco nabhamuggato’’ti.Sāyevāti yā lokuttarasamādhiphusanā laddhā, sāyeva.Paramaniyāmatāti paramā uttamā magganiyāmatā.

Ñatvānā or, it should be understood as being said with regard to simultaneous time, just as "having destroyed all darkness, the sun has risen in the sky." Sāyevā means, "that very attainment of supramundane concentration which was attained." Paramaniyāmatā means, "the supreme, excellent regulation of the path."

146.Visesananti puthujjanehi visesakaṃ visiṭṭhabhāvasādhakaṃ.Ekaṃsikāti ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti ekaṃsagāhavatī ratanattaye nibbicikicchā.Abhisamaye visesiyāti saccapaṭivedhavasena visesaṃ patvā. ‘‘Visesinī’’tipi paṭhanti, abhisamayahetu visesavatīti attho.Asaṃsayāti soḷasavatthukāya aṭṭhavatthukāya ca vicikicchāya pahīnattā apagatasaṃsayā. ‘‘Asaṃsiyā’’ti keci paṭhanti.Bahujanapūjitāti sugatīhi parehi patthanīyaguṇāti attho.Khiḍḍāratinti khiḍḍābhūtaṃ ratiṃ, atha vā khiḍḍañca ratiñca khiḍḍāvihārañca ratisukhañca.

146. Visesanaṃ means, "distinct from ordinary people, causing a distinctive state." Ekaṃsikā means, "having unwavering certainty in the Triple Gem, with a single-minded conviction that 'the Sammāsambuddho is the Blessed One, the Dhamma is well-proclaimed, the Saṅgha is of good conduct'." Abhisamaye visesiyā means, "having attained distinction by way of penetration of the truths." Some read "visesini," meaning, "possessing distinction because of the cause of realization." Asaṃsayā means, "free from doubt because of the abandonment of the sixteen-fold or eight-fold doubt. Some read "Asaṃsiyā." Bahujanapūjitā means, "possessing qualities desirable to others in happy states." Khiḍḍāratiṃ means, "playful delight, or play and delight, playful enjoyment and delightful pleasure."

147.Amatadasamhīti amatadasā nibbānadassāvinī amhi.Dhammaddasāti catusaccadhammaṃ diṭṭhavatī.Sotāpannāti ariyamaggasotaṃ ādito pattā.Na ca pana matthi duggatīti na ca pana me atthi duggati avinipātadhammattā.

147. Amatadasamhī means, "I am a seer of the deathless state, Nibbāna." Dhammaddasā means, "one who has seen the four noble truths." Sotāpannā means, "one who has attained the stream of the Noble Path from the beginning." Na ca pana matthi duggatī means, "and there is no possibility of falling into the states of misery for me because of my being not subject to downfall."

148.Pāsādiketi pasādāvahe.Kusalarateti kusale anavajjadhamme nibbāne rate.Bhikkhavoti bhikkhū namassituṃ upāgaminti yojanā.Samaṇasamāgamaṃ sivanti samaṇānaṃ samitapāpānaṃ buddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ sivañca dhammaṃ khemaṃ samāgamaṃ saṅgamaṃ payirupāsituṃ upāgaminti sambandho.Sirimato dhammarājinoti bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Sirimati dhammarājinīti attho. Evameva ca keci paṭhanti.

148. Pāsādike means, "pleasing." Kusalarate means, "delighting in virtuous and blameless states, Nibbāna." Bhikkhavo means, "the monks came to pay homage." This is the connection. Samaṇasamāgamaṃ sivaṃ means, "to attend upon the peaceful assembly of Samaṇas, of Buddhas and disciples of the Buddha whose sins are stilled, and the secure Dhamma." This is the connection. Sirimato dhammarājino is a possessive word in the sense of excellence. It means, "in the glorious King of the Dhamma." And some read it just like that.

149.Muditamanamhīti moditamanā amhi.Pīṇitāti tuṭṭhā, pītirasavasena vā tittā.Naravaradammasārathinti naravaro ca so aggapuggalattā, dammānaṃ dametabbānaṃ veneyyānaṃ nibbānābhimukhaṃ sāraṇato dammasārathi cāti naravaradammasārathi, taṃ.Paramahitānukampakanti paramena uttamena hitena sabbasattānaṃ anukampakaṃ.

149. Muditamanamhī means, "I am of joyful mind." Pīṇitā means, "satisfied, or replete with the taste of joy." Naravaradammasārathiṃ means, "that Naravara, because he is the foremost individual, and also the Dammasārathi, because he leads the tamable, the trainable, towards Nibbāna; therefore, Naravaradammasārathi." Paramahitānukampakaṃ means, "compassionate to all beings with the supreme, excellent welfare."

Evaṃ sirimā devadhītā attano laddhipavedanamukhena ratanattaye pasādaṃ pavedetvā bhagavantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghañca vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā devalokameva gatā. Bhagavā tameva otiṇṇavatthuṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā dhammaṃ desesi, desanāpariyosāne ukkaṇṭhitabhikkhu arahattaṃ pāpuṇi, sampattaparisāyapi sā dhammadesanā sātthikā jātāti.

Thus, Sirimā, the divine maiden, having expressed her faith in the Triple Gem through declaring her attainment, and having paid homage to the Blessed One and the Sangha of monks, circumambulated them and went to the heavenly realm. The Blessed One made that very incident the basis and the cause of the story, and preached the Dhamma. At the end of the discourse, monks who were filled with longing attained arahantship, and that Dhamma talk was beneficial even to the assembled crowd.

Sirimāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Sirimā Mansion is Concluded.

17. Kesakārīvimānavaṇṇanā
17. Kesakārīvimānavaṇṇanā

Idaṃ vimānaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaranti kesakārīvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṃ viharati isipatane migadāye. Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya bārāṇasiṃ piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu. Te aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa gehadvārasamīpena gacchanti. Tasmiñca gehe brāhmaṇassa dhītā kesakārī nāma gehadvārasamīpe mātu sīsato ūkā gaṇhantī te bhikkhū gacchante disvā mātaraṃ āha ‘‘amma, ime pabbajitā paṭhamena yobbanena samannāgatā abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā sukhumālā kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūtā maññe, kasmā nu kho ime imasmiṃyeva vaye pabbajantī’’ti? Taṃ mātā āha ‘‘atthi, amma, sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito buddho loke uppanno, so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti, tassa ime dhammaṃ sutvā pabbajantī’’ti.

"This mansion is beautiful, radiant," is the Kesakārī Mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was staying in Bārāṇasī, at Isipatana, the Deer Park. At that time, many monks, having dressed in the morning, took their bowls and robes and entered Bārāṇasī for alms. They were passing near the gate of a certain Brahmin's house. At that house, the Brahmin's daughter, named Kesakārī, was picking lice from her mother’s head near the gate. Seeing those monks passing by, she said to her mother, "Mother, these renunciates are endowed with youthful prime, beautiful, pleasing to the eye, serene, and delicate, seemingly unconquered by any hardship. Why do they renounce the world at this very age?" Her mother said, "My dear, there is a Sakyan son, gone forth from the Sakya clan, a Buddha arisen in the world. He teaches the Dhamma, which is beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle, and beautiful in the end, with meaning and eloquence, perfectly complete, and pure. He reveals the holy life. Having heard his Dhamma, these ones are renouncing."

Tena ca samayena āgataphalo viññātasāsano aññataro upāsako tāya vīthiyā gacchanto taṃ kathaṃ sutvā tāsaṃ santikaṃ upasaṅkami. Atha naṃ brāhmaṇī āha ‘‘etarahi kho upāsaka bahū kulaputtā mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya sakyasamaye pabbajanti, te kiṃ nu kho atthavasaṃ sampassantā pabbajantī’’ti? Taṃ sutvā upāsako ‘‘kāmesu ādīnavaṃ, nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsaṃ sampassantā’’ti vatvā attano ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ tamatthaṃ vitthārato kathesi, tiṇṇañca ratanānaṃ guṇe pakāsesi, pañcannaṃ sīlānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ samparāyikañca guṇānisaṃsaṃ pavedesi. Atha brāhmaṇadhītā taṃ ‘‘kiṃ amhehipi saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāya tayā vutte guṇānisaṃse adhigantuṃ sakkā’’ti pucchi. So ‘‘sabbasādhāraṇā ime dhammā bhagavatā bhāsitā, kasmā na sakkā’’ti vatvā tassā saraṇāni ca sīlāni ca adāsi. Sā gahitasaraṇā samādinnasīlā ca hutvā puna āha ‘‘kiṃ ito uttari aññampi karaṇīyaṃ atthī’’ti. So tassā viññubhāvaṃ sallakkhento ‘‘upanissayasampannā bhavissatī’’ti ñatvā sarīrasabhāvaṃ vibhāvento dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā kāye virāgaṃ uppādetvā upari aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya saṃvejetvā vipassanāmaggaṃ ācikkhitvā gato. Sā tena vuttanayaṃ sabbaṃ manasi katvā paṭikūlamanasikāre samāhitacittā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā upanissayasampattiyā na cirasseva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Athāparena samayena kālaṃ katvā sakkassa devarañño paricārikā hutvā nibbatti, satasahassañcassā accharāparivāro ahosi. Taṃ sakko devarājā disvā acchariyabbhutacittajāto pamuditahadayo –

At that time, a lay follower who had attained the fruit and understood the Teaching was passing by that street, heard that conversation, and approached them. Then the Brahmin woman said to him, "Now, lay follower, many sons of good families, abandoning a great mass of wealth and a large circle of relatives, are renouncing in the Sakyan dispensation. Seeing what benefit do they renounce?" Having heard that, the lay follower said, "Seeing the danger in sensual pleasures and the benefit in renunciation," and according to his intellectual ability, he explained that matter in detail, and he proclaimed the virtues of the Triple Gem, and he announced the visible and future benefits and advantages of the five precepts. Then the Brahmin's daughter asked him, "Is it possible for us also, established in the refuges and the precepts, to attain the benefits and advantages spoken by you?" He, saying, "These things are commonly available, spoken by the Blessed One, why is it not possible?" gave her the refuges and the precepts. She, having taken the refuges and undertaken the precepts, said again, "Is there anything else to be done beyond this?" He, considering her intelligence, knowing that "she will be endowed with supporting conditions," explaining the nature of the body, described the thirty-two parts of the body meditation, and having aroused dispassion towards the body, and further having inspired her with a Dhamma talk connected with impermanence and so on, and having shown her the path of insight, he departed. She, having kept all that was said in mind, with her mind concentrated on the contemplation of repulsiveness, establishing insight, with the attainment of supporting conditions, not long after was established in the fruit of stream-entry. Then at another time, having passed away, she was reborn as a handmaiden of Sakka, the King of Gods, and she had a retinue of one hundred thousand nymphs. Sakka, the King of Gods, seeing her, his mind filled with wonder and astonishment, his heart delighted:

150.

150.

‘‘Idaṃ vimānaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ, veḷuriyathambhaṃ satataṃ sunimmitaṃ;

"This mansion is beautiful, radiant, with pillars of beryl, constantly well-constructed;
Covered all around with golden trees, a place of mine, born of the result of karma.

151.

151.

‘‘Tatrūpapannā purimaccharā imā, sataṃ sahassāni sakena kammunā;

"Here are these former nymphs, one hundred thousand due to their own karma;
You have arrived, O glorious one, standing illuminating like a former deity.

152.

152.

‘‘Sasī adhiggayha yathā virocati, nakkhattarājāriva tārakāgaṇaṃ;

"Just as the moon, having attained, shines forth, like the king of stars among the multitude of stars;
Likewise, you, illuminating with glory, shine forth, among this multitude of nymphs.

153.

153.

‘‘Kuto nu āgamma anomadassane, upapannā tvaṃ bhavanaṃ mamaṃ idaṃ;

"From where now having come, O you of extraordinary sight, have you arisen in this, my abode?
Like Brahmā, the gods of the Tavatimsa, along with Indra, all are not satisfied by seeing you."

Catūhi gāthāhi tāya katakammaṃ pucchi.

With four verses he asked about the karma she had done.

150.Tatthaidaṃ vimānanti yasmiṃ vimāne sā devatā uppannā, taṃ attano vimānaṃ sandhāyāha.Satatanti sabbakālaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaranti yojanā.Satatanti vā sammātataṃ, ativiya vitthiṇṇanti attho.Samantamotthatanti samantato avatthataṃ chāditaṃ.Ṭhānanti vimānameva sandhāya vadati. Tañhi tiṭṭhanti ettha katapuññāti ṭhānanti vuccati.Kammavipākasambhavanti kammavipākabhāvena sambhūtaṃ, kammavipākena vā saha sambhūtaṃ.Mamanti idaṃ mama ṭhānaṃ mama kammavipākasambhavanti dvīhipi padehi yojetabbaṃ.

150.Therein, idaṃ vimānaṃ: this mansion, means the mansion in which that goddess was born, referring to her own mansion. Satataṃ: always, the connection is beautiful, radiant. Or, satataṃ: constantly, exceedingly extensive, is the meaning. Samantamotthataṃ: covered all around, enveloped. Ṭhānaṃ: refers to the mansion itself. For indeed, because meritorious deeds are performed here, it is called a place (ṭhāna). Kammavipākasambhavaṃ: born of the result of karma, or born together with the result of karma. Mama: this is my place, my karmavipākasambhavaṃ, should be connected with both terms.

151.Tatrūpapannāti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho –tatratasmiṃ yathāvutte vimāneupapannāti nibbattā pageva uppannattā pubbadevatāimā purimā accharāyoparimāṇato sataṃ sahassāni.Tuvaṃsīti tvaṃ asi sakena kammunā ajjhupagatā upapannā.Yasassinīti parivārasampannā, teneva sakena kammunā kammānubhāvena obhāsayantī virocamānā tiṭṭhasīti.

151.In the verse Tatrūpapannā, this is the concise meaning: tatra: in that, as stated, mansion; upapannā: reborn, formerly born, former deities; imā purimā accharāyo: these former nymphs; parimāṇato sataṃ sahassāni: in quantity, one hundred thousand. Tuvaṃsī: you are, by your own karma, ajjhupagatā, upapannā, arisen. Yasassinī: endowed with glory, endowed with a retinue, by that very own karma, by the influence of karma, shining forth, standing resplendent.

152.Idāni tameva obhāsanaṃ upamāya vibhāvento‘‘sasī’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho –yathāsasalañchanayogena‘‘sasī’’ti, nakkhattehi adhikaguṇatāya ‘‘nakkhattarājā’’ti ca laddhanāmo cando sabbaṃtārakāgaṇaṃ adhiggayhaabhibhavitvāvirocativirājati,tatheva tvaṃ imaṃ accharānaṃdevakaññānaṃgaṇaṃsamūhaṃ attanoyasasā daddallamānāativiya vijjotamānāvirocasīti. Ettha ca ‘‘imā’’ti ‘‘ima’’nti ca nipātamattaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘nakkhattarājāriva tārāgaṇaṃ tatheva tva’’nti paṭhanti.

152.Now, explaining that very illumination by way of simile, he said the verse ‘‘sasī’’. Its meaning: yathā: just as, by connection with the mark of a hare, ‘‘sasī’’, the moon, having obtained the name "king of stars" due to being of superior quality to the stars, having overcome all the tārakāgaṇaṃ: multitude of stars, virocati: shines forth, tatheva tvaṃ imaṃ accharānaṃ devakaññānaṃ gaṇaṃ samūhaṃ: likewise, you, shining with your own glory, daddallamānā: exceedingly radiant, virocasī: shine. Here, "imā" and "imaṃ" are merely expletives. Some, however, read "nakkhattarājāriva tārāgaṇaṃ tatheva tvaṃ".

153.Idāni tassā devatāya purimabhavaṃ tattha katapuññañca pucchanto‘‘kuto nu āgammā’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthakuto nu āgammāti kuto nu bhavato kuto nu puññakammato kāraṇabhūtato idaṃ mama bhavanaṃ āgamma bhaddeanomadassanesabbaṅgasobhanetvaṃ upapannāuppattigahaṇavasena upagatā. ‘‘Anomadassane’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ upamāya pakāsento‘‘brahmaṃva devā tidasā sahindakā, sabbe na tappāmase dassanena ta’’nti āha. Tattha yathā brahmānaṃ sahampatiṃ sanaṅkumāraṃ vā upagataṃ saha indenāti sahindakā tāvatiṃsā devā passantā dassanena na tappanti, evaṃ tava dassanena mayaṃ sabbe devā na tappāmaseti attho.

153.Now, asking about the former existence of that goddess and the meritorious deeds done there, he said the verse ‘‘kuto nu āgammā’’. Therein, kuto nu āgammā: from where, from which existence, from which meritorious deed, the causal condition, having come to this, my abode, O blessed one, anomadassane: of extraordinary beauty, adorned with all features, tvaṃ upapannā: you have arisen, in the sense of taking birth, have attained. Explaining the meaning expressed in "Anomadassane" by way of simile, he said ‘‘brahmaṃva devā tidasā sahindakā, sabbe na tappāmase dassanena ta’’. Therein, just as the Tavatimsa gods, along with Indra, seeing Brahmā, Sahampati or Sanankumara, who has approached, are not satisfied with the sight, likewise, we, all the gods, are not satisfied with seeing you, is the meaning.

Evaṃ pana sakkena devānamindena pucchitā sā devatā tamatthaṃ pakāsentī –

Thus, being asked by Sakka, the King of Gods, that goddess, revealing that matter:

154.

154.

‘‘Yametaṃ sakka anupucchase mamaṃ, kuto cutā tvaṃ idha āgatāti;

"That which you ask me, O Sakka, from where having died, have you come here?
Bārāṇasī is a city in the east of the Kasi country, there I was formerly a hairdresser."

155.

155.

‘‘Buddhe ca dhamme ca pasannamānasā, saṅghe ca ekantagatā asaṃsayā;

"With mind pleased in the Buddha and the Dhamma, and with unwavering faith in the Sangha;
With unbroken precepts, having attained the fruit, certain in the Dhamma of Enlightenment, without ailment,"

Gāthadvayamāha.

She spoke two verses.

154-5.Tatthayametanti yaṃ etaṃ pañhanti attho.Anupucchaseti anukūlabhāvena pucchasi.Mamanti maṃ.Puratthīti puraṃ atthi.Kāsinanti kāsiraṭṭhassa.Kesakārikāti purimattabhāve attano nāmaṃ vadati.Buddheca dhamme cātiādinā attano puññaṃ vibhāveti.

154-5.Therein, yametaṃ: that which, the meaning is a question. Anupucchase: you ask in an agreeable manner. Mama: me. Puratthī: there is a city. Kāsinaṃ: of the Kasi country. Kesakārikā: she speaks her name in the former existence. Buddhe ca dhamme cā: with this and so on, she explains her merit.

Puna sakko tassā taṃ puññasampattiñca dibbasampattiñca anumodamāno –

Again, Sakka, rejoicing in her attainment of merit and divine accomplishment:

156.

156.

‘‘Tantyābhinandāmase svāgatañca te,

"We rejoice in you, welcome to you,
And by Dhamma you shine with glory;
With mind pleased in the Buddha and the Dhamma,
And with unwavering faith in the Sangha;
With unbroken precepts, having attained the fruit,
Certain in the Dhamma of Enlightenment, without ailment," he said.

156.Tatthatantyābhinandāmaseti taṃ te duvidhampi sampattiṃ abhinandāma anumodāma.Svāgatañcateti tuyhañca idhāgamanaṃ svāgataṃ, amhākaṃ pītisomanassasaṃvaddhanameva. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.

156.Therein, tantyābhinandāmase: we rejoice, approve, of that, both of your accomplishments. Svāgatañca te: and your coming here is welcome, indeed it increases our joy and happiness. The rest is as stated above.

Taṃ pana pavattiṃ sakko devarājā āyasmato mahāmoggallānattherassa kathesi, thero bhagavato nivedesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā sadevakassa lokassa sātthikā jātāti.

Sakka, the King of Gods, told that account to the venerable Mahāmoggallāna Thera, and the Thera reported it to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that matter the basis and the cause of the story and preached the Dhamma to the assembled crowd. That teaching was beneficial to the world with its gods.

Kesakārīvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Kesakārī Mansion is Concluded.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Paramatthadīpanī, the Khuddaka Commentary, in the Vimanavatthu,

Sattarasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa paṭhamassa pīṭhavaggassa

The explanation of meaning of the first division, adorned with seventeen topics,

Atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Is concluded.

2. Cittalatāvaggo

2. Cittalatā Division

1. Dāsivimānavaṇṇanā
1. Dāsivimānavaṇṇanā

api sakkova devindoti dāsivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati jetavane viharante sāvatthivāsī aññataro upāsako sambahulehi upāsakehi saddhiṃ sāyanhasamayaṃ vihāraṃ gantvā dhammaṃ sutvā parisāya vuṭṭhitāya bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya ahaṃ, bhante, saṅghassa cattāri niccabhattāni dassāmī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ bhagavā tadanucchavikaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathetvā vissajjesi. So ‘‘mayā, bhante, saṅghassa cattāri niccabhattāni paññattāni. Sve paṭṭhāya ayyā mama gehaṃ āgacchantū’’ti bhattuddesakassa ārocetvā attano gehaṃ gantvā dāsiyā tamatthaṃ ācikkhitvā ‘‘tattha tayā niccakālaṃ appamattāya bhavitabba’’nti āha. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchi. Pakatiyāva sā saddhāsampannā puññakāmā sīlavatī, tasmā divase divase kālasseva uṭṭhāya paṇītaṃ annapānaṃ paṭiyādetvā bhikkhūnaṃ nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ susammaṭṭhaṃ suparibhaṇḍakaṃ katvā āsanāni paññāpetvā bhikkhū upagate tattha nisīdāpetvā vanditvā gandhapupphadhūpadīpehi pūjetvā sakkaccaṃ parivisati.

"Indeed, is this Sakka, the King of Gods?" is the Slave Girl's Mansion. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling at Jetavana, a certain lay follower living in Sāvatthī, together with many lay followers, went to the monastery in the evening, and having heard the Dhamma, when the assembly had risen, approached the Blessed One and said, "From today onwards, venerable sir, I will give four regular meals to the Sangha." Then the Blessed One, having given him a Dhamma talk appropriate to that occasion, dismissed him. He, having announced to the distributor of food, "Venerable sir, four regular meals have been arranged by me for the Sangha. From tomorrow onwards, may the venerable ones come to my house," went to his own house and, having told that matter to a slave girl, said, "There, you must be constantly diligent." She agreed, saying, "Very well." By nature, she was endowed with faith, desiring merit, virtuous, therefore, day by day, rising early in the morning, having prepared excellent food and drink, having made the seating place for the monks well-swept and well-prepared, having arranged the seats, when the monks had arrived, having seated them there, having paid homage, having honored them with incense, flowers, and lamps, she respectfully served them.

Athekadivasaṃ bhikkhū katabhattakicce upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā evamāha ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho, bhante, ito jātiādidukkhato parimutti hotī’’ti. Bhikkhū tassā saraṇāni ca pañca sīlāni ca datvā kāyasabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā paṭikūlamanasikāre niyojesuṃ, apare aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathesuṃ. Sā soḷasa vassāni sīlaṃ rakkhantī antarantarā yoniso manasikarontī ekadivasaṃ dhammassavanasappāyaṃ labhitvā ñāṇassa ca paripakkattā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchākāsi. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā sakkassa devarañño vallabhā paricārikā hutvā nibbatti. Sā saṭṭhitūriyasahassehi paricariyamānā accharāsatasahassaparivutā mahantaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantī pamudā modamānā saparivārā uyyānādīsu vicarati. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva disvā –

Then one day, when the monks had finished their meal, having approached, paid homage, and said, "How, venerable sirs, is there liberation from suffering such as birth and so on?" The monks, having given her the refuges and the five precepts, having explained the nature of the body, instructed her in the contemplation of repulsiveness, others gave a Dhamma talk connected with impermanence. She, protecting the precepts for sixteen years, reflecting on them from time to time, having obtained a conducive opportunity for hearing the Dhamma one day, and with the maturation of her knowledge, developing insight, realized the fruit of stream-entry. She, at another time, having passed away, was reborn as a beloved handmaiden of Sakka, the King of Gods. She, being attended by sixty thousand musical instruments, surrounded by one hundred thousand nymphs, experiencing great divine prosperity, delighted, rejoicing, wandered in gardens and so on with her retinue. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna, having seen her in the manner stated above:

157.

157.

‘‘Api sakkova devindo, ramme cittalatāvane;

"Indeed, is this Sakka, the King of Gods, in the delightful Cittalatā Grove?
You wander all around, preceded by a host of women;
Illuminating all directions, like the morning star."

158.

158.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what do you have such beauty, by what do you prosper here?
And do those enjoyments arise for you, whatever is pleasing to the mind?

159.

159.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve,

"I ask you, goddess of great power,
What meritorious deed did you do when you were a human being?
By what are you so radiant with power,
And your beauty illuminates all directions?" he asked.

160.

160.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, delighted, being asked by Moggallāna;
Being questioned, she explained, the fruit of which karma this is."

161.

161.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, dāsī ahosiṃ parapessiyā kule.

"I, among humans, being a human,
Was a slave girl, a servant in another's family.

162.

162.

‘‘Upāsikā cakkhumato, gotamassa yasassino;

"A female lay follower of the one with vision, Gotama, the glorious one;
I had faith in the Teaching of that Noble One.

163.

163.

‘‘Kāmaṃ bhijjatuyaṃ kāyo, neva atthettha saṇṭhanaṃ;

"Though this body may break, there is no stability here;
The path of the five precepts is auspicious and safe.

164.

164.

‘‘Akaṇṭako agahano, uju sabbhi pavedito;

"Unobstructed, not dense, direct, declared by the virtuous;
See the fruit of faith, how I have attained this state.

165.

165.

‘‘Āmantanikā raññomhi, sakkassa vasavattino;

‘‘I am the one to be addressed by the king, Sakka, the Vasavatti;
Sixty thousand musical instruments awaken me.

166.

166.

‘‘Ālambo gaggaro bhīmo, sādhuvādī ca saṃsayo;

‘‘Ālambo, the fearful Gaggaro, Sādhuvādī, and Saṃsayo;
Pokkharo and Suphasso, and women skilled in the vīṇā.

167.

167.

‘‘Nandā ceva sunandā ca, soṇadinnā sucimhitā;

‘‘Nandā and Sunandā, Soṇadinnā and Sucimhitā;
Alambusā and Missakesī, and Puṇḍarīkā, the fierce one.

168.

168.

‘‘Eṇīphassā suphassā ca, subhaddā muduvādinī;

‘‘Eṇīphassā and Suphassā, Subhaddā, the gentle-spoken;
These and other superior ones are the awakeners of the Apsarās.

169.

169.

‘‘Tā maṃ kālenupāgantvā, abhibhāsanti devatā;

‘‘They come to me in due time, those goddesses address me;
Come, let us dance and sing, come, let us delight you.

170.

170.

‘‘Nayidaṃ akatapuññānaṃ, katapuññānamevidaṃ;

‘‘This is not for those who have not done merit, this is for those who have done merit;
Asoka, Nandana, the delightful, the great forest of the Tidasas.

171.

171.

‘‘Sukhaṃ akatapuññānaṃ, idha natthi parattha ca;

‘‘Happiness for those who have not done merit is not here, nor hereafter;
Happiness for those who have done merit is both here and hereafter.

172.

172.

‘‘Tesaṃ sahabyakāmānaṃ, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ;

‘‘For those who desire their fellowship, much merit should be done;
For those who have done merit rejoice, endowed with pleasures in heaven,’’ – the goddess declared;

157.Tatthaapi sakkova devindoti apisaddo sambhāvanāyaṃ, ivasaddo ikāralopaṃ katvā vutto upamāyaṃ, tasmā yathā nāma sakko devānamindoti attho. Sakkasamabhāvo tissā devatāya parivārasampattidassanatthaṃ vutto. Keci ‘‘apīti nipātamatta’’nti vadanti.Cittalatāvaneti cittāya nāma devadhītāya puññānubhāvena nibbatte, cittānaṃ vā vicittapupphaphalādivisesayuttānaṃ santānakavalliādīnaṃ tattha yebhuyyatāya cittalatāvananti laddhanāme devuyyāne.

157. There, even Sakka, the lord of gods, the word api is in the sense of possibility, the word iva is said after dropping the i-sound, in the sense of simile; therefore, the meaning is just as Sakka is the lord of gods. The comparison to Sakka is stated to show Tissā's attainment of retinue. Some say, “api is merely a particle.” In Cittalatāvana, in the divine garden named Cittalatāvana, produced by the power of merit of a goddess named Cittā, or because of the abundance of variegated flowering creepers and the like, endowed with various flowers and fruits, it obtained the name Cittalatāvana.

161.Parapessiyāti paresaṃ kule tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kicce pesaniyā, paresaṃ veyyāvaccakārīti attho.

161. Parapessiyā: meaning one who can be sent to others' families for this or that task, meaning one who does service for others.

162.Tassā me nikkamo āsi, sāsane tassa tādinoti tassā dāsiyāpi samānāya pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumato buddhassa bhagavato upāsikā hutvā soḷasa vassāni sīlaṃ rakkhantiyā kammaṭṭhānañca manasi karontiyā manasikārānubhāvena me mayhaṃ uppajjamāne sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammasaṅkhāte iṭṭhādīsu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino satthu sāsane tappariyāpannoyeva saṃkilesapakkhato nikkamanena ‘‘nikkamo’’ti laddhanāmo sammāvāyāmo āsi ahosi uppajji.

162. Tassā me nikkamo āsi, sāsane tassa tādino: Even for that female servant, being an upāsikā of the Buddha, the Blessed One, who had vision through the five eyes, protecting the precepts for sixteen years, attending to kammaṭṭhāna, through the power of attention, there arose for me, pertaining to the Teaching of the Buddha, the Teacher, the Tādi, endowed with such characteristics as desirable, among the seventy-seven factors of enlightenment, a nikkama named Right Effort, by way of departure from the side of defilements, within that very state.

163-4.Tassa pana nikkamassa pubbabhāgassa pavattākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘kāmaṃ bhijjatuyaṃ kāyo, neva atthettha saṇṭhananti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yadipi meayaṃ kāyo bhijjatuvinassatu, tattha kiñcimattampi apekkhaṃ akarontīetthaetasmiṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyogeneva atthi,me vīriyassasaṇṭhanaṃsithilīkaraṇanti vīriyaṃ samuttejentī vipassanaṃ ussukkāpesinti.

163-4. Now, to show the manner of occurrence of the preceding part of that nikkama, "kāmaṃ bhijjatuyaṃ kāyo, neva atthettha saṇṭhana" is said. Its meaning is – even if this body of mine should break up, perish, not making any expectation even to the slightest extent, here, in this application to kammaṭṭhāna, there is no relaxation of my effort, encouraging effort, urging on insight.

Idāni tathā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ dassentī –

Now, showing the quality regained by urging on insight in that way –

‘‘Sikkhāpadānaṃ pañcannaṃ, maggo sovatthiko sivo;

"Sikkhāpadānaṃ pañcannaṃ, maggo sovatthiko sivo;
Akaṇṭako agahano, uju sabbhi pavedito;
Nikkamassa phalaṃ passa, yathidaṃ pāpuṇitthikā"ti. – āha;

sikkhāpadānaṃ pañcannaṃsambandhībhūto, yasmiṃ santāne uppanno, tassa sabbākārena sotthibhāvasampādanato sundaratthabhāvato casovatthikosotthiko, saṃkilesadhammehi anupaddutattā khemappattihetutāya casivo,rāgakaṇṭakādīnaṃ abhāvenaakaṇṭako,kilesadiṭṭhiduccaritagahanasamucchedanatoagahano,sabbajimhavaṅkakuṭilabhāvāpagamahetutāyauju,buddhādīhi sappurisehi pakāsitattāsabbhi paveditoariyamaggo, taṃyathāyena upāyabhūtenaitthikādvaṅgulabahalabuddhikāpi samānāpāpuṇiṃ,tassanikkamassayathāvuttavīriyassa idaṃphalaṃ passāti sakkaṃ ālapati.

sikkhāpadānaṃ pañcannaṃ: connected with the five training precepts, being produced in which lineage, because of entirely accomplishing the state of well-being and because of having a beautiful meaning, it is sovatthiko, auspicious; because of being undisturbed by defiled states and because of being the cause of attaining safety, it is sivo, secure; because of the absence of the thorn of craving and the like, it is akaṇṭako, thornless; because of the destruction of the thicket of defilements, wrong views, and misconduct, it is agahano, not dense; because of being the cause of the removal of all crookedness and deceit, it is uju, upright; because of being proclaimed by the Buddhas and other good people, it is sabbhi pavedito, made known by the good; that yathā, by which means itthikā, even being of intelligence as thick as two fingers, pāpuṇiṃ, attained, passā, see this phalaṃ fruit of that nikkamassa, of the aforesaid effort," – she addresses Sakka.

165.Āmantanikā raññomhi, sakkassa vasavattinoti sayaṃvasībhāvena vattanato, dvīsu devalokesu attano vasaṃ issariyaṃ vattetīti vā vasavattī, tassa vasavattino sakkassa devarañño āmantanikā ālāpasallāpayoggā, kīḷanakāle vā tena āmantetabbā amhi, nikkamassa vīriyassa phalaṃ passāti yojanā. Ātatavitatādibhedena pañca tūriyaṅgāni dvādasahi pāṇibhāgehi ekato pavajjamānāni saṭṭhi honti, tāni pana sahassamattāni payirupāsanavasena upaṭṭhitāni sandhāyāha‘‘saṭṭhi tūriyasahassāni, paṭibodhaṃ karonti me’’ti. Tatthapaṭibodhanti pītisomanassānaṃ pabodhanaṃ.

165. Āmantanikā raññomhi, sakkassa vasavattino: Because of behaving with self-mastery, or because he exercises his lordship in the two deva-worlds, he is Vasavatti, I am one to be addressed, worthy of conversation and greetings, by that Vasavatti, Sakka, king of the gods, or to be addressed by him during play; see the fruit of the effort of nikkama is the connection. The five musical instruments of ātata, vitata, etc., played together with twelve hand-parts, amount to sixty; but she says ‘‘saṭṭhi tūriyasahassāni, paṭibodhaṃ karonti me’’ intending that they are attended to by way of attendance by about a thousand. There, paṭibodhaṃ means the awakening of joy and gladness.

166-8.Ālambotiādi tūriyavādakānaṃ devaputtānaṃ ekadesato nāmaggahaṇanti vadanti, tūriyānaṃ panetaṃ nāmaggahaṇaṃ.Vīṇāmokkhādikā devadhītā.Sucimhitāti suddhamihitā, nāmameva vā etaṃ.Muduvādinīti mudunāva vadatīti muduvādinī, mudukaṃ ativiya vādanasīlā, nāmameva vā.Seyyāseti seyyatarā.Accharānanti accharāsu saṅgīte pāsaṃsatarā.Pabodhikāti pabodhanakarā.

166-8. Ālambo etc., is the mentioning of the names of some of the sons of gods who play musical instruments, they say, but this is the mentioning of the names of the musical instruments. Vīṇāmokkhā etc., are daughters of gods. Sucimhitā: of pure smiles, or this is just the name. Muduvādinī: because she speaks gently, she is muduvādinī, accustomed to speaking very softly, or it is just the name. Seyyāse: better. Accharānaṃ: among the Apsarās, most praiseworthy in song. Pabodhikā: causing awakening.

169.Kālenāti yuttappattakālena.Abhibhāsantīti abhimukhā, abhiratā vā hutvā bhāsanti. Yathā ca bhāsanti, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘handa naccāma gāyāma, handa taṃ ramayāmase’’ti vuttaṃ.

169. Kālena: at the appropriate time. Abhibhāsanti: facing, or having become delighted, they speak. And to show how they speak, ‘‘handa naccāma gāyāma, handa taṃ ramayāmase’’ is said.

170.Idanti idaṃ mayā laddhaṭṭhānaṃ.Asokanti iṭṭhakantapiyamanāpānaṃyeva rūpādīnaṃ sambhavato visokaṃ. Tato eva sabbakālaṃ pamodasaṃvaddhanatonandanaṃ. Tidasānaṃ mahāvananti tāvatiṃsadevānaṃ mahantaṃ mahanīyañca uyyānaṃ.

170. Idaṃ: this place attained by me. Asokaṃ: without sorrow, because only forms, etc., that are desirable, pleasing, and agreeable are possible. From that very fact, because of constantly increasing delight, nandanaṃ. Tidasānaṃ mahāvanaṃ: the great and magnificent garden of the Tāvatiṃsa gods.

171.Evarūpā dibbasampatti nāma puññakammavasenevāti odissakanayena vatvā panu anodissakanayena dassentī‘‘sukhaṃ akatapuññāna’’nti gāthamāha.

171. After speaking in a general way that such divine prosperity is only by the power of meritorious deeds, now showing it in a specific way, she says the verse ‘‘sukhaṃ akatapuññāna’’.

172.Puna attanā laddhassa dibbaṭṭhānassa parehi sādhāraṇakāmatāvasena dhammaṃ kathentī‘‘tesaṃ sahabyakāmāna’’nti osānagāthamāha.Tesanti tāvatiṃsadevānaṃ.Sahabyakāmānanti sahabhāvaṃ icchantehi, kattuatthe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Saha vāti pavattatīti sahavo, tassa bhāvo sahabyaṃ yathā vīrassa bhāvo vīriyanti.

172. Again, speaking the Dhamma because of the desire of others to share in the divine state attained by herself, she says the concluding verse ‘‘tesaṃ sahabyakāmāna’’. Tesaṃ: of those Tāvatiṃsa gods. Sahabyakāmāna: by those desiring companionship, this is a sāmivacana in the sense of the agent. That which exists together is sahavya, its state is sahabya, just as the state of a hero is vīriya.

Evaṃ thero devatāya attano puññakamme āvikate tassā saparivārāya dhammaṃ desetvā devalokato āgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā sadevakassa lokassa sātthikā ahosīti.

In this way, after the Elder revealed his own meritorious deeds to the goddess, he taught the Dhamma to her and her retinue, and having come from the deva-world, he announced that occurrence to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that matter the basis of a talk and taught the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. That teaching was fruitful for the world with its devas.

Dāsivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Dāsī Vimāna is finished.

2. Lakhumāvimānavaṇṇanā
2. Lakhumā Vimāna Vannanā

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti lakhumāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati bārāṇasiyaṃ viharante kevaṭṭadvāraṃ nāma bārāṇasinagarassa ekaṃ dvāraṃ, tassa avidūre niviṭṭhagāmopi ‘‘kevaṭṭadvāra’’ntveva paññāyittha. Tattha lakhumā nāma ekā itthī saddhā pasannā buddhisampannā tena dvārena pavisante bhikkhū disvā vanditvā attano gehaṃ netvā kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ datvā teneva paricayena saddhāya vaḍḍhamānāya āsanasālaṃ kāretvā tattha paviṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āsanaṃ upaneti, pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhapeti. Yañca odanakummāsaḍākādi attano gehe vijjati, taṃ bhikkhūnaṃ deti. Sā bhikkhūnaṃ santike dhammaṃ sutvā saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāya samāhitā hutvā vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpentī upanissayasampannatāya na cirasseva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane mahati vimāne nibbatti, accharāsahassañcassā parivāro ahosi. Sā tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantī pamodamānā vicarati. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto‘‘abhikkantena vaṇṇenā’’tiādigāthāhi pucchīti sabbaṃ vuttanayameva. Tena vuttaṃ –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā: the Lakhumā Vimāna. What was its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in Bārāṇasī, Kevattadvāra was the name of one gate of the city of Bārāṇasī; not far from that, the village that was established was also known as "Kevattadvāra." There, a certain woman named Lakhumā, faithful, confident, and wise, seeing the monks entering through that gate, having paid homage, taking them to her house, giving alms with a ladle, and through that familiarity, with faith increasing, having a hall built for seats, offers seats to the monks who enter there, provides drinking water and refreshments. And whatever boiled rice, gruel, and ḍāka exist in her house, she gives to the monks. Hearing the Dhamma in the presence of the monks, being established in the refuges and the precepts, being concentrated, taking up a meditation subject, urging on insight, because of having the fulfillment of supporting conditions, she soon became established in the fruit of stream-entry. She, after passing away in the latter part of her life, was reborn in a great mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven; a thousand Apsarās were her retinue. There, experiencing divine prosperity, she wanders about rejoicing. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a divine tour, questioned her with the verses beginning "abhikkantena vaṇṇenā" everything is in the manner already stated. Therefore, it was said –

173.

173.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

‘‘With surpassing beauty, you stand, O goddess;
Illuminating all directions, like a medicinal herb, a star.

174.

174.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

‘‘By what do you have such beauty, by what does this succeed for you here;
And do those enjoyments arise for you, whatever are dear to the mind?

175.

175.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

‘‘I ask you, O goddess of great power, what merit did you do as a human being?
By what are you so radiant in power, and does your beauty illuminate all directions?’’

176.

176.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

‘‘That goddess, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna;
Asked a question, explained, the fruit of which action is this.’’

177.

177.

‘‘Kevaṭṭadvārā nikkhamma, ahu mayhaṃ nivesanaṃ;

‘‘Having come out of Kevattadvāra, my dwelling was;
To the disciples of the great sage, wandering there.

178.

178.

‘‘Odanaṃ kummāsaṃ ḍākaṃ, loṇasovīrakañcahaṃ;

‘‘Boiled rice, gruel, ḍāka, salt and sovīraka, I;
Gave to those who were upright, with a very clear mind.

179.

179.

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;

‘‘On the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the eighth of the fortnight;
And on the special observance days, possessing the eight factors well.

180.

180.

‘‘Uposathaṃ upavasissaṃ, sadā sīlesu saṃvutā;

‘‘I observed the uposatha, ever restrained in the precepts;
Controlled, sharing, I dwell in the mansion.

181.

181.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viratā, musāvādā ca saññatā;

‘‘Abstaining from taking life, restrained from false speech;
Theft, transgression, and intoxicants are avoided.

182.

182.

‘‘Pañcasikkhāpade ratā, ariyasaccāna kovidā;

‘‘Delighting in the five precepts, skilled in the Noble Truths;
An upāsikā of the Buddha, the Blessed One, Gotama of glory.

183.

183.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

‘‘By that I have such beauty…pe… and my beauty illuminates all directions.’’

Mama ca, bhante, vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandeyyāsi ‘‘lakhumā nāma, bhante, upāsikā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’’ti. Anacchariyaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhante, yaṃ maṃ bhagavā aññatarasmiṃ sāmaññaphale byākareyya. Taṃ bhagavā sakadāgāmiphale byākāsīti.

And, Bhante, with my words, you should bow with your head at the feet of the Blessed One, "Bhante, an upāsikā named Lakhumā bows with her head at the feet of the Blessed One." It is not surprising, Bhante, that the Blessed One would declare me in some fruit of recluseship. The Blessed One declared her in the fruit of once-returning.

177.Tatthakevaṭṭadvārā nikkhammāti kevaṭṭadvārato nikkhamanaṭṭhāne.

177. There, kevaṭṭadvārā nikkhammā: at the place of coming out from Kevattadvāra.

178.Ḍākanti taṇḍuleyyakādisākabyañjanaṃ.Loṇasovīrakanti dhaññarasādīhi bahūhi sambhārehi sampādetabbaṃ ekaṃ pānakaṃ. ‘‘Ācāmakañjikaloṇūdaka’’ntipi vadanti.

178. Ḍāka: vegetables and curry made from rice-gruel and the like. Loṇasovīraka: a type of drink to be prepared with many ingredients such as grain juice and the like. Some also say "Ācāmakañjikaloṇūdaka."

Pucchāvissajjanāvasāne sā therassa dhammadesanāya sakadāgāmiphalaṃ pāpuṇi. Sesaṃ uttarāvidhāne vuttanayānusārena eva veditabbaṃ.

At the end of the question and answer, she attained the fruit of once-returning through the Elder's Dhamma talk. The rest should be understood in accordance with the manner stated in the Uttarā Vimāna.

Lakhumāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Lakhumā Vimāna is finished.

3. Ācāmadāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā
3. Ācāmadāyikā Vimāna Vannanā

Piṇḍāyate carantassāti ācāmadāyikāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena kho pana samayena rājagahe aññataraṃ kulaṃ ahivātarogena upaddutaṃ ahosi. Tattha sabbe janā matā ṭhapetvā ekaṃ itthiṃ. Sā gehaṃ gehagatañca sabbaṃ dhanadhaññaṃ chaḍḍetvā maraṇabhayabhītā bhittichiddena palātā anāthā hutvā paragehaṃ gantvā tassa piṭṭhipasse vasati. Tasmiṃ gehe manussā karuṇāyantā ukkhaliādīsu avasiṭṭhaṃ yāgubhattaācāmādiṃ tassā denti. Sā taṃ bhuñjitvā jīvikaṃ kappeti.

Piṇḍāya te carantassā: the Ācāmadāyikā Vimāna. What was its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Rājagaha, in the Veḷuvana, the Kalandakanivāpa. At that time, a certain family in Rājagaha was afflicted by a plague. There, all the people died except for one woman. She, abandoning the house and all the wealth and grain inside the house, fleeing out of fear of death, becoming destitute, went to another house and lived behind that house. In that house, the people, being compassionate, gave her leftover gruel, rice, and ācāma from the pots and pans. She maintained her livelihood by eating that.

Tena ca samayena āyasmā mahākassapo sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhito ‘‘kaṃ nu kho ahaṃ ajja āhārapaṭiggahaṇena anuggahessāmi, duggatito ca dukkhato ca mocessāmī’’ti cintento taṃ itthiṃ āsannamaraṇaṃ nirayasaṃvattanikañcassā kammaṃ katokāsaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayi gate attanā laddhaṃ ācāmaṃ dassati, teneva nimmānaratidevaloke uppajjissati, evaṃ nirayūpapattito mocetvā handāhaṃ imissā saggasampattiṃ nipphādessāmī’’ti pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya tassā nivesanaṭṭhānābhimukho gacchati. Atha sakko devānamindo aññātakavesena anekarasaṃ anekasūpabyañjanaṃ dibbāhāraṃ upanesi. Taṃ ñatvā thero ‘‘kosiya, tvaṃ katakusalo, kasmā evaṃ karosi, mā duggatānaṃ kapaṇānaṃ sampattiṃ vilumpī’’ti paṭikkhipitvā tassā itthiyā purato aṭṭhāsi.

At that time, venerable Mahākassapa, having attained Nirodha-samāpatti for a week, arose from it and, thinking, "Whom shall I favor today with the acceptance of alms, and liberate from misfortune and suffering?" saw that woman nearing death, whose deed leading to hell had found its opportunity. (He thought,) "If she gives me the rice-gruel she has obtained herself, she will be reborn in the Nimmānarati deva-world. Thus, having freed her from the fate of hell, I will create heavenly bliss for her." So, in the forenoon, having dressed, and taking his bowl and robe, he went towards her dwelling place. Then Sakka, the king of the gods, in an unrecognizable disguise, offered divine food of various flavors and curries. Knowing this, the Elder refused (saying), "Kosiya, you are doing a good deed, but why do you do this? Do not plunder the wealth of the wretched and miserable!" and stood in front of that woman.

Sā theraṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mahānubhāvo thero, imassa dātabbayuttakaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā idha natthi, idañca kiliṭṭhabhājanagataṃ tiṇacuṇṇarajānukiṇṇaṃ aloṇaṃ sītalaṃ apparasaṃ ācāmakañjiyamattaṃ edisassa dātuṃ na ussahāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘aticchathā’’ti āha. Thero ekapadanikkhepamattaṃ apasakkitvā aṭṭhāsi. Gehavāsino manussā bhikkhaṃ upanesuṃ, thero na sampaṭicchati. Sā duggatitthī ‘‘mameva anuggahatthāya idhāgato, mama santakameva paṭiggahetukāmo’’ti ñatvā pasannamānasā ādarajātā taṃ ācāmaṃ therassa patte ākiri. Thero tassā pasādasaṃvaddhanatthaṃ bhuñjanākāraṃ dassesi, manussā āsanaṃ paññāpesuṃ. Thero tattha nisīditvā taṃ ācāmaṃ bhuñjitvā pivitvā onītapattapāṇī anumodanaṃ katvā taṃ duggatitthiṃ ‘‘tvaṃ ito tatiye attabhāve mama mātā ahosī’’ti vatvā gato. Sā tena there atipasādañca uppādetvā tassā rattiyā paṭhamayāme kālaṃ katvā nimmānaratīnaṃ devānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajji. Atha sakko devarājā tassā kālakatabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘kattha nu kho uppannā’’ti āvajjento tāvatiṃsesu adisvā rattiyā majjhimayāme āyasmantaṃ mahākassapaṃ upasaṅkamitvā tassā nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ pucchanto –

Seeing the Elder, she thought, "This Elder is of great power, but there is no suitable food or edible thing to give to him here. And this sour gruel, contained in a soiled vessel, covered with dust and grit, unsalted, cold, and tasteless, is but a small amount. I dare not give such a thing to him." But she said, "Please accept it." The Elder stood without retreating even the space of placing one foot. Householders offered alms, but the Elder did not accept them. That unfortunate woman, knowing that he had come there for the sake of favoring her, desiring to accept only what belonged to her, with a gladdened heart and showing respect, poured that sour gruel into the Elder's bowl. The Elder, to increase her faith, showed the manner of eating. People prepared a seat. The Elder sat there, ate and drank that sour gruel, and, withdrawing his hand from the bowl, gave thanks, and said to that unfortunate woman, "In the third existence from this, you were my mother," and departed. She, having produced exceeding faith in the Elder, at the first watch of that night, died and was reborn into the company of the Nimmānarati gods. Then Sakka, the king of gods, knowing of her death, considering, "Where was she reborn?" and not seeing her in the Tāvatiṃsa world, approached venerable Mahākassapa in the middle watch of the night, asking about her place of rebirth –

185.

185.

‘‘Piṇḍāya te carantassa, tuṇhībhūtassa tiṭṭhato;

"As you were wandering for alms, silent and standing still,
A poor and wretched woman, not having her own house,

186.

186.

‘‘Yā te adāsi ācāmaṃ, pasannā sehi pāṇibhi;

"Who gave you sour gruel, with faith from her own hands,
Having abandoned the human body, to which direction has she gone?" –

Dve gāthā abhāsi.

He spoke these two verses.

185.Tatthapiṇḍāyāti piṇḍapātatthāya.Tuṇhībhūtassa tiṭṭhatoti idaṃ piṇḍāya caraṇākāradassanaṃ, uddissa tiṭṭhatoti attho.Daliddāti duggatā.Kapaṇāti varākī. ‘‘Daliddā’’ti iminā tassā bhogapārijuññaṃ dasseti, ‘‘kapaṇā’’ti iminā ñātipārijuññaṃ.Parāgāraṃ apassitāti paragehaṃ nissitā, paresaṃ ghare bahipiṭṭhichadanaṃ nissāya vasantī.

185. There, piṇḍāya means for the purpose of alms-food. Tuṇhībhūtassa tiṭṭhato this shows the manner of wandering for alms, meaning standing still intending (to receive something). Daliddā means poor. Kapaṇā means wretched. With "Daliddā" he shows her lack of wealth; with "kapaṇā" he shows her lack of relatives. Parāgāraṃ apassitā means relying on another's house, living relying on the outer covering of others' houses.

186.Kaṃnu sā disataṃ gatāti chasu kāmadevalokesu uppajjanavasena kaṃ nāma disaṃ gatā. Iti sakko ‘‘therena tathā katānuggahā uḷārāya dibbasampattiyā bhāginī, na ca dissatī’’ti heṭṭhā dvīsu devalokesu apassanto saṃsayāpanno pucchati.

186. Kaṃ nu sā disataṃ gatā means, in dependence on being born in which of the six sensual deva-worlds has she gone to which direction. Thus, Sakka, not seeing her in the two lower deva-worlds, wondering (if) "having been favored in that way by the Elder, she is a sharer in great divine wealth, and yet is not seen," asks, being in doubt.

Athassa thero –

Then the Elder (said) to him –

187.

187.

‘‘Piṇḍāya me carantassa, tuṇhībhūtassa tiṭṭhato;

"As I was wandering for alms, silent and standing still,
A poor and wretched woman, not having her own house,

188.

188.

‘‘Yā me adāsi ācāmaṃ, pasannā sehi pāṇibhi;

"Who gave me sour gruel, with faith from her own hands,
Having abandoned the human body, freed from here, passed away.

189.

189.

‘‘Nimmānaratino nāma, santi devā mahiddhikā;

"Those called Nimmānarati, are devas of great power;
There that happy woman, giver of sour gruel, rejoices." –

Pucchitaniyāmeneva paṭivacanaṃ dento tassā nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi.

Answering in the very manner of the question, he told of her place of rebirth.

188.Tatthavippamuttāti tato manussadobhaggiyato paramakāruññavuttito vippamuttā apagatā.

188. There, vippamuttā means freed, gone away, from that wretchedness of the human state, from the practice of supreme compassion.

189.Modatācāmadāyikāti ācāmamattadāyikā, sāpi nāma pañcame kāmasagge dibbasampattiyā modati, passa tāva khettasampattiphalanti dasseti.

189. Modatācāmadāyikā means the giver of mere sour gruel, even she rejoices with divine wealth in the fifth sensual heaven. See, indeed, the field-property (khetta) bears fruit, he shows.

Puna sakko tassā dānassa mahapphalataṃ mahānisaṃsatañca sutvā taṃ thomento –

Again, Sakka, hearing of the great fruitfulness and great benefit of that gift, praising him –

190.

190.

‘‘Aho dānaṃ varākiyā, kassape suppatiṭṭhitaṃ;

"Oh, a gift by a wretched one, well-established in Kassapa;
By a gift of what was brought from another, indeed, the offering was successful.

191.

191.

‘‘Yā mahesittaṃ kāreyya, cakkavattissa rājino;

"If a woman, beautiful in all her limbs, were to cause great dominion,
Of a wheel-turning king, and were pleasing to her husband;
A sixteenth part of that sour-gruel-gift, she is not worth.

192.

192.

‘‘Sutaṃ nikkhā sataṃ assā, sataṃ assatarīrathā;

"A hundred thoroughbred horses, a hundred horse-drawn chariots;
A hundred thousand maidens, adorned with loosened jeweled earrings;
A sixteenth part of that sour-gruel-gift, they are not worth.

193.

193.

‘‘Sataṃ hemavatā nāgā, īsādantā urūḷhavā;

"A hundred elephants born in Himavat, with tusks like plough-shafts, strong;
With golden trappings, adorned bodies, wearing golden ornamental cloths;
A sixteenth part of that sour-gruel-gift, they are not worth.

194.

194.

‘‘Catunnamapi dīpānaṃ, issaraṃ yodha kāraye;

"Even if one were to cause sovereignty over the four continents;
A sixteenth part of that sour-gruel-gift, it is not worth" – he said;

190.Tatthaahoti acchariyatthe nipāto.Varākiyāti kapaṇiyā.Parābhatenāti parato ānītena, paresaṃ gharato ucchācariyāya laddhenāti attho.Dānenāti dātabbena ācāmamattena deyyadhammena.Ijjhittha vata dakkhiṇāti dakkhiṇā dānaṃ aho nipphajjittha, aho mahapphalā mahājutikā mahāvipphārā ahuvatthāti attho.

190. There, aho is a particle in the sense of wonder. Varākiyā means by a wretched one. Parābhatena means brought from another, meaning obtained from another's house by gleaning. Dānena means by the gift, the offerable thing, of mere sour gruel. Ijjhittha vata dakkhiṇā means the offering, the gift, oh, it was successful, oh, it was very fruitful, very radiant, very extensive, is the meaning.

191.Idāni ‘‘itthiratanādīnipi tassa dānassa satabhāgampi sahassabhāgampi na upentī’’ti dassetuṃ‘‘yā mahesittaṃ kāreyyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasabbaṅgakalyāṇīti ‘‘nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷī nāccodātā atikkantā mānusavaṇṇaṃ appattā dibbavaṇṇa’’nti evaṃ vuttehi sabbehi aṅgehi kāraṇehi, sabbehi vā aṅgapaccaṅgehi kalyāṇī sobhanā sundarā.Bhattu cānomadassikāti sāmikassa alāmakadassanā sātisayaṃ dassanīyā pāsādikā.Etassācāmadānassa, kalaṃ nāgghati soḷasinti etassa etāya dinnassa ācāmadānassa phalaṃ soḷasabhāgaṃ katvā tato ekaṃ bhāgaṃ puna soḷasabhāgaṃ katvā gahitabhāgasaṅkhātaṃ soḷasiṃ kalaṃ cakkavattirañño itthiratanabhāvopi nāgghati nānubhoti na pāpuṇāti. ‘‘Suvaṇṇassa pañcadasadharaṇaṃ nikkha’’nti vadanti, ‘‘satadharaṇa’’nti apare.

191. Now, to show that "even the woman-jewel etc. do not approach even a hundredth part or a thousandth part of that gift," the (words) "yā mahesittaṃ kāreyya" etc. were said. There, sabbaṅgakalyāṇī means beautiful, lovely, fair, in all limbs or causes, with all major and minor limbs, spoken of as "not too tall, not too short, not too thin, not too fat, not too dark, not too fair, surpassing human color, attaining divine color." Bhattu cānomadassikā means of pleasing appearance, exceedingly beautiful, lovely, to her husband. Etassācāmadānassa, kalaṃ nāgghati soḷasi means, making sixteen parts of the fruit of this gift of sour gruel, given by her, even a sixteenth part, reckoned as a sixteenth part after again making sixteen parts of one part, is not worth, does not experience, does not obtain, the state of being a woman-jewel of a wheel-turning king. "A nikkha is fifteen dharanas of gold," they say; "a hundred dharanas," others (say).

193.Hemavatāti himavati jātā, hemavatajātikā vā. Te hi mahantā thāmajavasampannā ca honti.Īsādantāti rathīsāsadisadantā, thokaṃyeva avanatadantāti attho. Tena visālakadāṭhībhāvaṃ nivāreti.Urūḷhavāti thāmajavaparakkamehi brūhanto, mahantaṃ yuddhakiccaṃ vahituṃ samatthāti attho.Suvaṇṇakacchāti hemamayagīveyyakapaṭimukkā. Kacchasīsena hi sabbaṃ hatthiyoggaṃ vadati.Hemakappanavāsasāti suvaṇṇakhacitagajattharaṇakaṅkanādihatthālaṅkārasampannā.

193. Hemavatā means born in Himavat, or of Himavat origin. For they are large, endowed with strength and vigor. Īsādantā means having teeth like a chariot-pole, teeth slightly bent downward, is the meaning. By that, he prevents the state of having large canines. Urūḷhavā means growing with strength, vigor, and prowess, able to bear a great burden of warfare, is the meaning. Suvaṇṇakacchā means having a golden neck-covering. With "kaccha" he speaks of everything suitable for an elephant. Hemakappanavāsasā means endowed with elephant-trappings and arm-ornaments etc. inlaid with gold.

194.Catunnamapi dīpānaṃ issaranti dvisahassaparittadīpaparivārānaṃ jambudīpādīnaṃ catunnaṃ mahādīpānaṃ issariyaṃ. Tena sattaratanasamujjalaṃ sakalaṃ cakkavattisiriṃ vadati. Yaṃ panettha, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

194. Catunnamapi dīpānaṃ issaraṃ means sovereignty over the four great continents, Jambudīpa etc., surrounded by two thousand minor islands. By that, he speaks of the entire glory of a wheel-turning king, radiant with the seven jewels. What (is said) here is just as in the way said below.

Idha sakkena devarājena attanā ca vuttaṃ sabbaṃ āyasmā mahākassapatthero bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Here, venerable Mahākassapa, the Elder, announced to the Blessed One all that was said by Sakka, the king of gods, himself. The Blessed One, making that the starting point, extensively taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. That teaching was fruitful for the great multitude.

Ācāmadāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Ācāmadāyikā Vimāna is finished.

4. Caṇḍālivimānavaṇṇanā
4. The Caṇḍāli Vimāna Description

Caṇḍālivanda pādānīti caṇḍālivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharanto paccūsavelāyaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā uṭṭhāya lokaṃ olokento addasa tasmiṃyeva nagare caṇḍālāvasathe vasantiṃ ekaṃ mahallikaṃ caṇḍāliṃ khīṇāyukaṃ, nirayasaṃvattanikañcassā kammaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ. So mahākaruṇāya samussāhitamānaso ‘‘saggasaṃvattanikaṃ kammaṃ kāretvā tenassā nirayūpapattiṃ nisedhetvā sagge patiṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti cintetvā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Tena ca samayena sā caṇḍālī daṇḍaṃ olubbha nagarato nikkhamantī bhagavantaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā abhimukhī hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavāpi tassā gamanaṃ nivārento viya purato aṭṭhāsi. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno satthu cittaṃ ñatvā tassā ca āyuparikkhayaṃ bhagavato vandanāya taṃ niyojento –

Caṇḍāli vanda pādānī means the Caṇḍāli Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One, dwelling in Rājagaha, at dawn, having attained the Great Compassion Attainment, customary for Buddhas, and rising up, looking out at the world, saw a certain old caṇḍāli, dwelling in the caṇḍāla settlement in that very city, with dwindling life, whose deed leading to hell was presenting itself. He, with his mind roused by great compassion, thinking, "Having caused her to do a deed leading to heaven, having prevented her going to hell by that, I will establish her in heaven," entered Rājagaha for alms with a great Saṅgha of bhikkhus. At that time, that caṇḍāli, leaning on a staff, going out from the city, saw the Blessed One coming and stood facing him. The Blessed One also stood in front, as if preventing her going. Then, venerable Mahāmoggallāna, knowing the mind of the Teacher, and also the wasting away of her life, directing her to venerate the Blessed One –

195.

195.

‘‘Caṇḍāli vanda pādāni, gotamassa yasassino;

"Caṇḍāli, venerate the feet of Gotama, the famous one;
Indeed, out of compassion for her, the seventh seer stood.

196.

196.

‘‘Abhippasādehi manaṃ, arahantamhi tādini;

"Make your mind very serene, towards the Arahant, the such one;
Quickly, with hands together, venerate, your life is short" – he spoke these two verses;

195.Tatthacaṇḍālīti jātiāgatena nāmena taṃ ālapati.Vandāti abhivādaya.Pādānīti sadevakassa lokassa saraṇāni caraṇāni.Tameva anukampāyāti tameva anuggaṇhanatthaṃ, apāyūpapattito nisedhetvā sagge nibbattāpanatthanti adhippāyo.Aṭṭhāsīti nagarampi apavisitvā ṭhito.Isisattamoti lokiyasekkhāsekkhapaccekabuddhaisīhi uttamo ukkaṭṭhatamo, atha vā buddhaisīnaṃ vipassiādīnaṃ sattamoti isisattamo.

195. There, caṇḍāli he addresses her with the name derived from her caste. Vandā means venerate. Pādānī means the feet, the refuges of the world with its devas. Tameva anukampāyā means just for the sake of favoring her, with the intention of preventing her going to the states of woe and causing her to be reborn in heaven. Aṭṭhāsī means having not even entered the city, he stood. Isisattamo means the best, the most excellent, of the world's trainee-seers, perfected-seers, and Paccekabuddha-seers, or (it means) the seventh of the Buddha-seers, Vipassī etc., is isisattamo.

196.Abhippasādehi mananti ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’ti tava cittaṃ pasādehi.Arahantamhi tādinīti ārakattā kilesānaṃ, tesaṃyeva arīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ hatattā, paccayānaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā ca arahante, iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvappattiyā tādimhi.Khippaṃ pañjalikā vandāti sīghaṃyeva paggahitaañjalikā hutvā vandassu. Kasmāti ce?Parittaṃ tava jīvitanti, idāneva bhijjanasabhāvattā parittaṃ atiittaraṃ.

196. Abhippasādehi manaṃ means, "the Blessed One is a Fully Enlightened One," make your mind serene. Arahantamhi tādinī means in the Arahant, the such, because of being far from defilements, because of the killing of those very enemies, because of the destruction of the spokes of the wheel of Saṃsāra, because of being worthy of offerings, and because of the absence of secrecy in doing evil, (he is) an Arahant, the such because of attaining suchness in regards to what is desired etc. Khippaṃ pañjalikā vandā means quickly, with hands raised together, venerate. Why? Parittaṃ tava jīvitaṃ, because of being of a nature to break up even now, your life is short, very little.

Iti thero gāthādvayena bhagavato guṇe pakittento attano ānubhāve ṭhatvā tassā ca khīṇāyukatāvibhāvanena saṃvejento satthu vandanāya niyojesi. Sā ca taṃ sutvā saṃvegajātā satthari pasannamānasāva hutvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā añjaliṃ katvā namassamānā buddhagatāya pītiyā ekaggacittā hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā ‘‘alamettakametissā saggūpapattiyā’’ti nagaraṃ pāvisi saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena. Atha naṃ ekā bhantā gāvī taruṇavacchā tato eva abhidhāvantī siṅgena paharitvā jīvitā voropesi. Taṃ sabbaṃ dassetuṃ saṅgītikārā –

Thus, the Elder, extolling the qualities of the Blessed One with two verses, standing in his own power, and also arousing her by the exposition of her dwindling life, directed her to venerate the Teacher. And she, having heard that, with agitation arisen, just with a serene mind towards the Teacher, having venerated with the five-point prostration, having done the añjali and bowing down, stood with a one-pointed mind, with joy gone towards the Buddha. The Blessed One, (thinking) "this much is enough for her going to heaven," entered the city with the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. Then a furious cow, running from there at a young calf, struck her with its horn and deprived her of life. To show all that, the compilers –

197.

197.

‘‘Coditā bhāvitattena, sarīrantimadhārinā;

"Urged on by him who has developed (compassion), the one bearing his final body;
The caṇḍāli venerated the feet of Gotama, the famous one.

198.

198.

‘‘Tamenaṃ avadhī gāvī, caṇḍāliṃ pañjaliṃ ṭhitaṃ;

"Then a cow killed her, the caṇḍāli standing with hands together;
Bowing down to the perfectly enlightened one, the light-maker in the darkness" – spoke these two verses;

198.Tatthapañjaliṃ ṭhitaṃ namassamānaṃ sambuddhanti gatepi bhagavati buddhārammaṇāya pītiyā samāhitā hutvā sammukhā viya añjaliṃ paggayha namassamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ.Andhakāreti avijjandhakārena sakalena kilesandhakārena ca andhakāre loke.Pabhaṅkaranti ñāṇobhāsakaraṃ.

198. There, pañjaliṃ ṭhitaṃ namassamānaṃ sambuddhaṃ means even after the Blessed One had gone, being concentrated with joy having the Buddha as its object, standing bowing down, raising her hands together as if in his presence. Andhakāre means in the world darkened by the darkness of ignorance and by all the darkness of defilements. Pabhaṅkaraṃ means the maker of the light of knowledge.

Sā ca tato cutā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti, accharānaṃ satasahassaṃ cassā parivāro ahosi. Tadaheva ca sā saha vimānena āgantvā vimānato otaritvā āyasmantaṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vandi. Tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ –

Having passed away from there, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and a hundred thousand nymphs became her retinue. On that very day, she came with her celestial mansion, descended from it, approached the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, and paid homage. To illustrate this:

199.

199.

‘‘Khīṇāsavaṃ vigatarajaṃ anejaṃ, ekaṃ araññamhi raho nisinnaṃ;

"Arahant with taints destroyed, free from passion, unshakeable,
Alone, seated in seclusion in the forest;
Having attained divine power, I approach and pay homage to you,
O hero, great in glory."

Devatā āha. Taṃ thero pucchi –

Thus spoke the deity. The Elder asked her:

200.

200.

‘‘Suvaṇṇavaṇṇā jalitā mahāyasā, vimānamoruyha anekacittā;

"Golden-hued, radiant, of great splendor,
Having descended from a celestial mansion of varied designs;
Surrounded by a throng of nymphs,
Who are you, fair deity, that pays homage to me?"

200.Tatthajalitāti attano sarīrappabhāya vatthābharaṇādīnaṃ obhāsena ca jalantī jotentī.Mahāyasāti mahāparivārā.Vimānamoruyhāti vimānato oruyha.Anekacittāti anekavidhacittatāyuttā.Subheti subhaguṇe.Mamanti maṃ.

200. Here, jalitā means blazing, shining with the radiance of her own body and the brilliance of her garments and ornaments. Mahāyasā means having a great retinue. Vimānamoruyhā means having descended from the celestial mansion. Anekacittā means endowed with diverse thoughts. Subhe means possessing fair qualities. Mama means to me.

Evaṃ therena pucchitā puna sā –

Thus questioned by the Elder, she replied again:

201.

201.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhaddante caṇḍālī, tayā vīrena pesitā;

"Venerable sir, I am Caṇḍālī,
Sent by you, the hero;
I paid homage to the feet of the Arahant,
Of Gotama, the glorious one.

202.

202.

‘‘Sāhaṃ vanditvā pādāni, cutā caṇḍālayoniyā;

"Having paid homage to his feet,
I passed away from the Caṇḍāla birth;
I have arisen in a celestial mansion, beautiful in every way,
In Nandana.

203.

203.

‘‘Accharānaṃ satasahassaṃ, purakkhatvāna tiṭṭhati;

"A hundred thousand nymphs,
Stand attending upon me;
Among them, I am the most excellent, the best,
In beauty and glory.

204.

204.

‘‘Pahūtakatakalyāṇā, sampajānā paṭissatā;

"Having performed abundant meritorious deeds,
Mindful and recollecting;
I have come to pay homage, venerable sir, to the compassionate Muni in the world."

Catasso gāthāyo āha.

She spoke these four verses.

201-4.Tatthapesitāti ‘‘caṇḍāli, vanda pādānī’’tiādinā vandanāya uyyojitā. Yadipi taṃ vandanāmayaṃ puññaṃ pavattikkhaṇavasena parittaṃ, khettamahantatāya pana phalamahantatāya ca ativiya mahantamevāti āha‘‘pahūtakatakalyāṇā’’ti. Tathā buddhārammaṇāya pītiyā pavattikkhaṇe paññāya satiyā ca visadabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha‘‘sampajānā paṭissatā’’ti. Puna –

201-4. Here, pesitā means urged to pay homage by saying, "Caṇḍāli, pay homage to the feet," etc. Although that meritorious act of homage was limited in terms of the moment of its occurrence, it was exceedingly great due to the greatness of the field and the greatness of the fruit. Therefore, she says, ‘‘pahūtakatakalyāṇā’’ meaning "having performed abundant meritorious deeds". Similarly, referring to the clarity of wisdom and mindfulness at the moment of the arising of joy with the Buddha as the object, she says, ‘‘sampajānā paṭissatā’’ meaning "mindful and recollecting." Again –

205.

205.

‘‘Idaṃ vatvāna caṇḍālī, kataññū katavedinī;

"Having said this, Caṇḍālī,
Grateful and thankful;
Having paid homage to the feet of the Arahant,
She vanished right there."

Gāthā saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā.

This verse was placed by the compilers.

205.Tatthacaṇḍālīti caṇḍālībhūtapubbāti katvā vuttaṃ, devaloke ca idamāciṇṇaṃ, yaṃ manussaloke niruḷhasamaññāya vohāro. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

205. Here, caṇḍālī is said considering that she was formerly a Caṇḍālī, and this is customary in the deva-world, where usage follows established conventions in the human world. The rest is as previously stated.

Āyasmā pana mahāmoggallāno imaṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

The venerable Mahāmoggallāna then reported this occurrence to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that event the basis and taught the Dhamma to the assembled company, and that teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Caṇḍālivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Caṇḍālī Celestial Mansion is Concluded.

5. Bhadditthivimānavaṇṇanā
5. The Explanation of the Bhadditthī Celestial Mansion

Nīlā pītā ca kāḷā cāti bhadditthivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena ca samayena kimilanagare rohako nāma gahapatiputto ahosi saddho pasanno sīlācārasampanno. Tasmiṃyeva ca nagare tena samānamahābhoge kule ekā dārikā ahosi saddhā pasannā pakatiyāpi bhaddatāya bhaddāti nāmena. Atha rohakassa mātāpitaro taṃ kumāriṃ vāretvā tādise kāle taṃ ānetvā āvāhavivāhaṃ akaṃsu. Te ubhopi samaggavāsaṃ vasanti. Sā attano ācārasampattiyā ‘‘bhadditthī’’ti tasmiṃ nagare pākaṭā paññātā ahosi.

Nīlā pītā ca kāḷā cā refers to the Bhadditthī celestial mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi in Jeta's Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery. At that time, in the city of Kimilā, there was a householder's son named Rohaka, faithful, devoted, and accomplished in virtue and conduct. In that same city, in a family of similar great wealth, there was a girl who was faithful, devoted, and naturally beautiful, hence her name Bhaddā. Rohaka's parents arranged for that girl and brought her in marriage at an auspicious time. Both of them lived harmoniously. Due to her perfection in conduct, she was known and famous in that city as "Bhadditthī" (Auspicious Woman).

Tena ca samayena dve aggasāvakā pañcasatapañcasatabhikkhuparivārā janapadacārikaṃ carantā kimilanagaraṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Rohako tesaṃ tattha gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā somanassajāto there upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā svātanāya nimantetvā dutiyadivase paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena saparivāre te santappetvā saputtadāro tehi desitaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā tesaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhahanto saraṇāni gaṇhi, pañca sīlāni samādiyi. Bhariyā panassa aṭṭhamīcātuddasīpannarasīpāṭihāriyapakkhesu uposathaṃ upavasi, visesato sīlācārasampannā ahosi devatāhi ca anukampitā. Tāya eva ca devatānukampāya attano upari patitaṃ micchāpavādaṃ niraṃkatvā suvisuddhasīlācāratāya ativiya loke patthaṭayasā ahosi.

At that time, the two chief disciples, each with a retinue of five hundred bhikkhus, were traveling through the country and arrived at Kimilā. Rohaka, knowing of their arrival there, became joyful and approached the Elders, paid homage, invited them for the next day, and on the following day, satisfied them and their retinue with delicious food, both hard and soft. After hearing the Dhamma taught by them, together with his wife and children, he took refuge in the Triple Gem, adhering to their advice, and undertook the five precepts. His wife, however, observed the Uposatha on the eighth, fourteenth, and fifteenth days of the fortnight, and especially on the days of the Pāṭihāriya-pakka (Special Observance Fortnight), and she was particularly accomplished in virtue and conduct, and was favored by the deities. By that very favor of the deities, she refuted the false accusation that had fallen upon her and became exceedingly famous in the world for her perfectly pure virtue and conduct.

Sā hi sayaṃ kimilanagare ṭhitā attano sāmikassa vaṇijjāvasena takkasilāyaṃ vasantassa, ussavadivase sahāyehi ussāhitassa nakkhattakīḷācitte uppanne gharadevatāya attano dibbānubhāvena taṃ tattha netvā sāmikena saha yojitā teneva samāgamena patiṭṭhitagabbhā hutvā devatāya kimilanagaraṃ paṭinītā, anukkamena gabbhinibhāve pākaṭe jāte sassuādīhi ‘‘aticārinī’’ti āsaṅkitā, tāya eva devatāya attano ānubhāvena gaṅgāmahoghe kimilanagaraṃ ottharante viya upaṭṭhāpite attano patibbatābhāvasaṃsūcakena saccādhiṭṭhānapubbakena sapathena vātavegasamuṭṭhitavīcijālaṃ gaṅgāmahoghaṃ attano upari āpatitaṃ āyassañca nivattetvā, sāmikena samāgatāpi tena pubbe sassuādīhi viya āsaṅkitā takkasilāyaṃ tena dinnaṃ nāmamudditaṃ saññāṇañca appentī, taṃ āsaṅkaṃ niraṃkatvā bhattuno ñātijanassa ca mahājanassa ca sambhāvanīyā jātā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘suvisuddhasīlācāratāya ativiya loke patthaṭayasā ahosī’’ti.

While she was residing in Kimilā, her husband, who was living in Takkasilā for the sake of trade, was persuaded by his friends to indulge in a festival celebration when he felt festive during the holiday. The household deity, by her divine power, brought her there and united her with her husband. By that union, she became pregnant, and the deity returned her to Kimilā. Gradually, her pregnancy became apparent, and she was suspected of adultery by her mother-in-law and others. That same deity, by her power, as if inundating Kimilā with a great flood of the Ganges, caused a wave to rise and, with a declaration of truth preceded by a firm resolve indicative of her chastity, turned back the swiftly rising wave of the Ganges that was rushing upon her, thus also averting danger. Although she had reunited with her husband, she was still suspected by him, just as before by her mother-in-law and others in Takkasilā. By presenting the signet ring with the name inscribed, which he had given her, she dispelled that suspicion and became respected by her husband's relatives and the general public. Therefore, it was said, "She became exceedingly famous in the world for her perfectly pure virtue and conduct."

Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane uppannā. Atha bhagavati sāvatthito tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gantvā pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ nisinne, devaparisāya ca bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinnāya bhadditthīpi upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Atha bhagavā dasasahassilokadhātūsu sannipatitāya devabrahmaparisāya majjhe tāya devatāya katapuññakammaṃ pucchanto –

Later, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. When the Blessed One went from Sāvatthi to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven and sat on the paṇḍukambala stone at the foot of the Pāricchatta tree, and the assembly of devas approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and sat down to one side, Bhadditthī also approached, paid homage, and stood to one side. Then, the Blessed One, in the midst of the assembly of devas and brahmas gathered from the ten thousand world-systems, asking about the meritorious deed done by that devi, spoke the following verses:

206.

206.

‘‘Nīlā pītā ca kāḷā ca, mañjiṭṭhā atha lohitā;

"Blue, yellow, and black,
Madder, and also red;
Of various hues,
Surrounded by filaments.

207.

207.

‘‘Mandāravānaṃ pupphānaṃ, mālaṃ dhāresi muddhani;

"A garland of mandārava flowers,
You wear upon your head;
These trees do not exist in other realms,
O wise one.

208.

208.

‘‘Kena kāyaṃ upapannā, tāvatiṃsaṃ yasassinī;

"By what have you attained this body,
Resplendent in Tāvatiṃsa?
Deity, when asked, declare,
What is the fruit of which deed?" – He said.

206-7.Tatthanīlā pītā ca kāḷā ca, mañjiṭṭhā atha lohitāti ettha ca-saddo vuttatthasamuccayo, so nīlā ca pītā cātiādinā paccekaṃ yojetabbo.Athāti aññatthe nipāto. Tena odātādike avuttavaṇṇe saṅgaṇhāti.Iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho veditabbo.Ca-saddo vā avuttatthasamuccayo.Athāti iti-saddatthe nipāto.Uccāvacānaṃ vaṇṇānanti etthauccāvacānanti vibhattiyā alopo daṭṭhabbo, uccāvacavaṇṇānaṃ nānāvidhavaṇṇānanti attho.Vaṇṇānanti vā vaṇṇavantānaṃ.Kiñjakkhaparivāritāti kiñjakkhehi parivāritānaṃ. Sāmiatthe hi etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – nīlā ca pītā ca kāḷā ca mañjiṭṭhā ca lohitā ca atha aññe odātādayo cāti imesaṃ vasena uccāvacavaṇṇānaṃ tathābhūtehiyeva kiñjakkhehi kesarehi parivāritānaṃ vicittasaṇṭhānāditāya vā uccāvacānaṃ yathāvuttavaṇṇavantānaṃ mandāravarukkhasambhūtatāya mandāravānaṃ pupphānaṃ mālaṃ tehi kataṃ mālāguṇaṃ tvaṃ devate attano sīse dhāresi piḷandhasīti.

206-7. Here, in nīlā pītā ca kāḷā ca, mañjiṭṭhā atha lohitā, the word ca is a collection of meanings already stated, and it should be connected individually with each phrase, such as nīlā ca pītā ca. Atha is a particle in the sense of añña (other), thus including the unmentioned colors such as white. The word iti should be understood as implied and unstated. The word ca can also be a collection of meanings not yet stated. Atha is a particle in the sense of the word iti. In uccāvacānaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ, the elision of the विभक्ति (inflection) should be noted in uccāvacānaṃ, meaning of various colors, of different kinds. Or vaṇṇānaṃ can mean of those possessing color. Kiñjakkhaparivāritā means surrounded by filaments. This is a possessive singular form. This is what is said: "Blue, yellow, black, madder, and red, and also other colors such as white—you, O devi, wear on your head a garland of mandārava flowers, made of them, surrounded by filaments of such various colors, of such varied shapes, or those possessing color as stated above, being produced from mandārava trees."

‘‘nayime aññesu kāyesu, rukkhā santi sumedhase’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthaimeti yathāvuttavaṇṇasaṇṭhānādiyuttā pupphavanto rukkhā na santīti yojanā.Kāyesūti devanikāyesu.Sumedhaseti sundarapaññe.

‘‘nayime aññesu kāyesu, rukkhā santi sumedhase’’ was said. There, ime is construed as "These trees with flowers, endowed with the qualities of color, shape, etc., as described, do not exist." Kāyesū means in the deva realms. Sumedhase means O you of beautiful wisdom.

nīlāti indanīlamahānīlādimaṇiratanānaṃ vasena nīlobhāsā.Pītāti puppharāgakakketanapulakādimaṇiratanānañceva siṅgīsuvaṇṇassa ca vasena pītobhāsā.Kāḷāti asmakaupalakādimaṇiratanānaṃ vasena kaṇhobhāsā.Mañjiṭṭhāti jotirasagomuttakagomedakādimaṇiratanānaṃ vasena mañjiṭṭhobhāsā.Lohitāti padumarāgalohitaṅkapavāḷaratanādīnaṃ vasena lohitobhāsā. Keci pana nīlādipadāni ‘‘rukkhā’’ti iminā ‘‘nīlā rukkhā’’tiādinā yojetvā vadanti. Rukkhāpi hi nīlādivaṇṇehi pupphehi sañchannattā nīlādiyogato nīlādivohāraṃ labhantīti tehi ‘‘nīlā…pe… lohitā…pe… nayime aññesu kāyesu rukkhā santi sumedhaseti, yato tvaṃ uccāvacānaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ kiñjakkhaparivāritānaṃ mandāravānaṃ pupphānaṃ mālaṃ dhāresī’’ti yojanā kātabbā. Tattha yathādiṭṭhe vaṇṇavisesayutte pupphe kittetvā tesaṃ asādhāraṇabhāvadassanena rukkhānaṃ āvenikabhāvadassanaṃ paṭhamanayo, rukkhānaṃ asādhāraṇabhāvadassanena pupphānaṃ āvenikabhāvadassanaṃ dutiyanayo. Paṭhamanaye vaṇṇādayo sarūpena gahitā, dutiyanaye nissayamukhenāti ayametesaṃ viseso.

nīlā means blue-hued by virtue of indanīla, mahānīla, and other jewel-gems. Pītā means yellow-hued by virtue of puppharāga, kakketana, pulaka, and other jewel-gems, as well as the color of siṅgī gold. Kāḷā means black-hued by virtue of asmakaupala and other jewel-gems. Mañjiṭṭhā means madder-hued by virtue of jotirasa, gomuttaka, gomedaka, and other jewel-gems. Lohitā means red-hued by virtue of padumarāga, lohitaṅka, coral, and other gems. Some, however, connect the words nīlā etc. with "trees" (rukkhā), saying "nīlā rukkhā" etc. For trees, being covered with flowers of blue and other colors, acquire the usage of blue, etc., due to association with blue, etc. Therefore, by them, the construction should be made thus: "nīlā…pe… lohitā…pe… nayime aññesu kāyesu rukkhā santi sumedhase, yato tvaṃ uccāvacānaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ kiñjakkhaparivāritānaṃ mandāravānaṃ pupphānaṃ mālaṃ dhāresīti." There, the first method is the indication of the unique nature of the trees by praising the flowers endowed with specific characteristics of color, etc., as seen, and the second method is the indication of the unique nature of the flowers by indicating the non-unique nature of the trees. In the first method, the colors, etc., are taken in their own form; in the second method, they are taken through dependence—this is the distinction between them.

208.Kenāti kena puññakammena, kāyaṃ tāvatiṃsanti yojanā.Pucchitācikkhāti pucchitā tvaṃ ācikkha kathehi.

208. Kenā means by what meritorious deed? The construction is, kāyaṃ tāvatiṃsaṃ (by what meritorious deed [did you attain] the Tāvatiṃsa body?). Pucchitācikkhā means being asked, you should declare, you should tell.

Evaṃ bhagavatā pucchitā sā devatā imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Being thus asked by the Blessed One, that deity explained with these verses:

209.

209.

‘‘Bhadditthikāti maṃ aññaṃsu, kimilāyaṃ upāsikā;

"As Bhadditthī they knew me,
A female lay-follower in Kimilā;
Endowed with faith and virtue,
Always delighting in sharing.

210.

210.

‘‘Acchādanañca bhattañca, senāsanaṃ padīpiyaṃ;

"Clothing and food,
Shelter and lighting;
I gave to the upright,
With a clear mind.

211.

211.

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;

"On the fourteenth, fifteenth,
And the eighth day of the fortnight;
And the Special Observance Fortnight,
Fully endowed with eight factors.

212.

212.

‘‘Uposathaṃ upavasissaṃ, sadā sīlesu saṃvutā;

"I observed the Uposatha,
Always restrained in virtue;
By restraint and sharing,
I attained this celestial mansion.

213.

213.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viratā, musāvādā ca saññatā;

"Abstaining from killing living beings,
Restrained from false speech;
Theft and adultery,
And alcoholic drinks are far from me.

214.

214.

‘‘Pañcasikkhāpade ratā, ariyasaccāna kovidā;

"Delighting in the five precepts,
Skilled in the Noble Truths;
A female lay-follower of the Seeing One,
Living diligently;
Having made merit, having done good, having passed away from there,
I wander in Nandana, self-luminous.

215.

215.

‘‘Bhikkhū cāhaṃ paramahitānukampake, abhojayiṃ tapassiyugaṃ mahāmuniṃ;

"I gave food to bhikkhus,
Compassionate and wishing the greatest good,
A pair of ascetics, great sages;
Having made merit, having done good, having passed away from there,
I wander in Nandana, self-luminous.

216.

216.

‘‘Aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ aparimitaṃ sukhāvahaṃ, uposathaṃ satatamupāvasiṃ ahaṃ;

"The eight-factored, immeasurable, bringing happiness,
Uposatha I constantly observed;
Having made merit, having done good, having passed away from there,
I wander in Nandana, self-luminous."

209-214.Tatthabhadditthikāti maṃ aññaṃsu, kimilāyaṃ upāsikāti ācārasampattiyā saccakiriyāya ubbattamānamahoghanivattanena akhaṇḍasīlāti sañjātanicchayā bhaddā sundarā ayaṃ itthī, tasmā ‘‘bhadditthikā upāsikā’’ti ca maṃ kimilanagaravāsino jāniṃsu.Saddhā sīlena sampannātiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.

209-214. There, bhadditthikāti maṃ aññaṃsu, kimilāyaṃ upāsikā means "Because of her perfection in conduct, her averting of the great flood of pride through the act of truth, and her unbroken virtue, the residents of Kimilā knew me as 'Bhadditthikā Upāsikā,' for this woman is auspicious and beautiful." Saddhā sīlena sampannātiādi, being of the same meaning as stated below, is self-explanatory.

katāvāsāti nipphāditasucaritāvāsā. Sucaritakammañhi tadatte āyatiñca sukhāvāsahetutāya ‘‘sukhavihārassa āvāso’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘katakusalā’’ti.

katāvāsā means "having established a dwelling of good conduct." For good conduct is called "a dwelling of happiness" because it is the cause of a happy dwelling for oneself and in the future. Therefore, she says katakusalā meaning "having done good."

215.Pubbe anāmasitakhettavisesaṃ attano dānamayaṃ puññaṃ vatvā idāni tassa āyatanagatataṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bhikkhū cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthabhikkhūti anavasesabhinnakilesatāya bhikkhū.Paramahitānukampaketi paramaṃ ativiya diṭṭhadhammikādinā hitena anuggāhake.Abhojayinti paṇītena bhojanena bhojesiṃ.Tapassiyuganti uttamena tapasā sabbakilesamalaṃ tāpetvā samucchinditvā ṭhitattā tapassibhūtaṃ yugaṃ.Mahāmuninti tato eva mahāisibhūtaṃ, mahato vā attano visayassa mahanteneva ñāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahāmuniṃ. Sabbametaṃ dve aggasāvake sandhāya vadati.

215. Having spoken of her meritorious donation in a place not previously touched, now, to show its connection to a good rebirth, the passage beginning with "bhikkhū cā" is stated. There, bhikkhū means bhikkhus, due to the absence of any remaining defilements. Paramahitānukampake means one who favors and helps with the ultimate benefit, such as the benefit visible in this life. Abhojayi means she fed them with excellent food. Tapassiyuga means a pair who are tapassi, because they have utterly destroyed all defilements by scorching them with the supreme tapas. Mahāmuni means, for that very reason, they are great sages, or because a great sage (muni) is one who precisely delimits his vast domain with great knowledge. All this he says in reference to the two chief disciples.

216.Aparimitaṃ sukhāvahanti anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, na sukaraṃ akkhānena pāpuṇituṃ yāva sukhā saggā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.255) vacanato bhagavatopi vacanapathātītaparimāṇarahitasukhanibbattakaṃ attano vā ānubhāvena aparimitasukhāvahaṃ sukhassa āvahanakaṃ.Satatanti sabbakālaṃ. Taṃ taṃ uposatharakkhaṇadivasaṃ ahāpetvā, taṃ taṃ vā uposatharakkhaṇadivasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā paripuṇṇaṃ katvā satataṃ vā sabbakālaṃ sukhāvahanti yojanā. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

216.Aparimitaṃ sukhāvaha means, without eliding the nasal consonant. Because it is said, "Indeed, monks, it is not easy to attain by description how far the heavens extend in happiness" (M. iii, 255), therefore, by its own power, it brings about immeasurable happiness, beyond even the words of the Blessed One; it brings about happiness. Satata means always. Without letting that particular Uposatha observance day pass, or by making that particular Uposatha observance day complete and unbroken, it is always bringing happiness. The rest is as stated below.

Atha bhagavā mātudevaputtappamukhānaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuvāsīnaṃ devabrahmasaṅghānaṃ tayo māse abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desetvā manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhadditthivimānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ desesi. Sā desanā sampattaparisāya sātthikā ahosīti.

Then the Blessed One, having taught the Abhidhamma Piṭaka for three months to the assemblies of devas and brahmas residing in the ten thousand world-systems, headed by Mātudeva-putta, came to the human world and described the Bhadditthivimāna to the bhikkhus. That teaching was beneficial to the assembled company.

Bhadditthivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Bhadditthivimāna is concluded.

6. Soṇadinnāvimānavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Soṇadinnāvimāna

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti soṇadinnāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena nāḷandāyaṃ soṇadinnā nāma ekā upāsikā saddhā pasannā bhikkhūnaṃ catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahantī suvisuddhaniccasīlā aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ uposathampi upavasati. Sā dhammasavanasappāyaṃ paṭilabhitvā upanissayasampannatāya catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ paribrūhantī sotāpannā ahosi. Atha aññatarena rogena phuṭṭhā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā refers to the Soṇadinnāvimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi in Jeta's Grove. At that time, in Nāḷandā, there was a female lay follower named Soṇadinnā, faithful and devoted, who respectfully attended to the bhikkhus with the four requisites, and who observed the eight-precept Uposatha, maintaining perfectly pure and constant morality. Having obtained an opportunity for hearing the Dhamma, and being endowed with supporting conditions, she strengthened the practice of the four truths and became a sotāpanna. Then, struck by a certain disease, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna—

217.

217.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity,
Illuminating all directions, like the stars or a medicinal herb.

218.

218.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"What makes you so beautiful? What makes you prosper here?
And are there pleasures arising for you, whatever delights the mind?

219.

219.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, deity of great power, what merit did you do as a human being?
By what have you such radiant glory, and your beauty shines in every direction?"—

Imāhi tīhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi.

Asked with these three verses.

220.

220.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That deity, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna,
Replied to the question, (revealing) of what action this is the fruit."

221-226.

221-226.

‘‘Soṇadinnāti maṃ aññaṃsu…pe… gotamassa yasassino.

"They knew me as Soṇadinnā…pe… of Gotama the glorious.

227.

227.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"By that I have such beauty…pe… and my beauty shines in every direction."—

Devatā byākāsi. Taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

The deity explained. All that is as stated below.

Soṇadinnāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Soṇadinnāvimāna is concluded.

7.Uposathāvimānavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Uposathāvimāna

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti uposathāvimānaṃ. Idha aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ sākete uposathā nāma ekā upāsikāti ayameva viseso, sesaṃ anantaravimānasadisaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā refers to the Uposathāvimāna. Here, in the origin story, the only difference is that there was a female lay follower named Uposathā in Sāketa; the rest is similar to the previous vimāna. Therefore it was said—

229-231.

229-231.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe…

"With surpassing beauty…pe…
And your beauty shines in every direction."

232.

232.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deity, delighted…pe… of what action this is the fruit."

233-238.

233-238.

‘‘Uposathāti maṃ aññaṃsu, sāketāyaṃ upāsikā…pe…

"They knew me as Uposathā, a female lay follower in Sāketa…pe…
A female lay follower of the Seeing One, Gotama the glorious.

239.

239.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that I have such beauty…pe…
And my beauty shines in every direction."—

Devatā byākāsi. Puna attano ekaṃ dosaṃ dassentī –

The deity explained. Then, showing one of her faults—

241.

241.

‘‘Abhikkhaṇaṃ nandanaṃ sutvā, chando me udapajjatha;

"Hearing often of Nandana, desire arose in me;
Fixing my mind there, I was reborn in Nandana.

242.

242.

‘‘Nākāsiṃ satthu vacanaṃ, buddhassādiccabandhuno;

"I did not heed the Teacher's word, the kinsman of the sun, the Buddha;
Fixing my mind on what is inferior, I am afterwards remorseful."— She spoke these two verses;

233.Tatthauposathāti maṃ aññaṃsūti ‘‘uposathā’’ti iminā nāmena maṃ manussā jāniṃsu.Sāketāyanti sāketanagare.

233. There, uposathāti maṃ aññaṃsū means "people knew me by this name, 'Uposathā'." Sāketāyaṃ means in the city of Sāketa.

241.Abhikkhaṇanti abhiṇhaṃ.Nandanaṃ sutvāti ‘‘tāvatiṃsabhavane nandanavanaṃ nāma edisañca edisañcā’’ti tattha nānāvidhaṃ dibbasampattiṃ sutvā.Chandoti tannibbattakapuññakammassa kāraṇabhūto kusalacchando, tatrūpapattiyā patthanābhūto taṇhāchando vā.Udapajjathāti uppajjittha.Tatthāti tāvatiṃsabhavane, nandanāpadesenapi hi taṃ devalokaṃ vadati.Upapannāmhīti uppannā nibbattā amhi.

241. Abhikkhaṇa means frequently. Nandanaṃ sutvā means having heard of the various kinds of heavenly wealth in Nandana Grove in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, saying, "It is like this and like that." Chando means either the wholesome desire that is the cause of meritorious action that produces that, or the desire of craving that is the aspiration for rebirth there. Udapajjathā means arose. Tatthā means in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven; for it speaks of that deva-world even with the designation "Nandana." Upapannāmhī means I was reborn, generated.

242.Nākāsiṃsatthu vacananti ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, appamattakampi bhavaṃ vaṇṇemī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 1.320-321) satthārā vuttavacanaṃ na kariṃ, bhavesu chandarāgaṃ na pajahinti attho. Ādicco gotamagotto, bhagavāpi gotamagottoti sagottatāya vuttaṃ‘‘buddhassādiccabandhuno’’ti. Atha vā ādiccassa bandhu ādiccabandhu, bhagavā. Taṃ paṭicca tassa ariyāya jātiyā jātattā ādicco vā bandhu etassa orasaputtabhāvatoti ādiccabandhu, bhagavā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –

242. Nākāsiṃ satthu vacana means "I did not do the word of the Teacher," meaning I did not abandon desire and lust for existence, as in "Monks, I do not praise even a little bit of existence" (A. i, 320-321). Because the Gotama clan is the same as the clan of the sun, and the Blessed One is also of the Gotama clan, it is said, ‘‘buddhassādiccabandhuno’’, "kinsman of the sun, the Buddha," due to being of the same clan. Or, the friend of the sun is ādiccabandhu, the Blessed One. Because, in dependence on that, he was born of that noble lineage, or the sun is a friend, a direct son of his, therefore ādiccabandhu is the Blessed One. Thus it was said—

‘‘Yo andhakāre tamasī pabhaṅkaro, verocano maṇḍalī uggatejo;

"He who dispels the darkness and gloom,
Shining, radiant, with rising energy;
May Rāhu not swallow (me) wandering in the sky,
Free me, O sun, from Rāhu’s power." (S. i, 51);

Hīneti lāmake. Attano bhavābhiratiṃ sandhāya vadati.Sāmhīti sā amhi.

Hīne means inferior. She speaks in reference to her delight in existence. Sāmhī means "I am."

Evaṃ tāya devatāya bhavābhiratinimitte uppannavippaṭisāre pavedite thero bhavassa paricchinnāyubhāvavibhāvanamukhena āyatiṃ manussattabhāve ṭhatvā vaṭṭadukkhassa samatikkamo kātuṃ sukaro, sabbaso khīṇāsavabhāvo nāma mahānisaṃsoti ca samassāsetuṃ –

Thus, when that deity declared the remorse that arose concerning her delight in existence, the Elder, by way of explaining that the duration of existence is limited, and that it is easier to cross over the suffering of the cycle of rebirths by remaining in the state of being a human being, and that the state of being one of extinguished āsavas is of great benefit, consoled her, saying—

243.

243.

‘‘Kīva ciraṃ vimānamhi, idha vacchasuposathe;

"How long, Uposathā, do you stay in this vimāna?
Tell me, deity, if you know the extent of your life-span."—

Gāthamāha. Puna sā –

He spoke this verse. Then she—

244.

244.

‘‘Saṭṭhi vassasahassāni, tisso ca vassakoṭiyo;

"Sixty-thousand years, and three hundred million years;
Having stayed here, great sage, when I fall from here, I will go to
Association with humans."— Said;

Puna thero –

Then the Elder—

245.

245.

‘‘Mā tvaṃ uposathe bhāyi, sambuddhenāsi byākatā;

"Do not fear, Uposathā, you have been declared by the Fully Awakened One;
You have attained the state of sotāpanna, your bad destinies are destroyed."—

Imāya gāthāya samuttejesi.

He encouraged her with this verse.

243-4.Tatthakīva ciranti kittakaṃ addhānaṃ.Idhāti imasmiṃ devaloke, idha vā vimānasmiṃ.Āyu noti āyu,noti nipātamattaṃ. Āyuno vā cirācirabhāvaṃ, atha vā yadi jānāsi āyunoti attho.Mahāmunīti theraṃ ālapati.

243-4. There, kīva ciranti means how much time. Idhā means in this deva-world, or here in this vimāna. Āyu no means life-span, no is merely a particle. Or, the long or short duration of life-span; alternatively, it means if you know the extent of life-span. Mahāmunī addresses the Elder.

245.Mā tvaṃ uposathe bhāyīti bhadde uposathe tvaṃ mā bhāyi. Kasmā? Yasmāsambuddhenāsi byākatā. Kinti?Sotāpannā visesayīti. Maggaphalasaññitaṃ visesaṃ yātā adhigatā, tasmāpahīnā tavasabbāpiduggatīti imampi visesaṃ yātāti visesayi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

245. Mā tvaṃ uposathe bhāyī means, "O good Uposathā, do not fear." Why? Because sambuddhenāsi byākatā, "you have been declared by the Fully Awakened One." As what? Sotāpannā visesayī meaning "you have attained the state of sotāpanna." Having attained and realized the distinction known as the path and its fruition, therefore pahīnā tava "destroyed are all your duggatī," bad destinies. Having also attained this distinction, therefore visesayi. The rest is as stated above.

Uposathāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Uposathāvimāna is concluded.

8-9. Niddā-suniddāvimānavaṇṇanā
8-9. Commentary on the Niddā-Suniddāvimāna

Aṭṭhamanavamavimānāni rājagahanidānāni. Aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ yathākkamaṃ ‘‘niddā nāma upāsikā…pe… gotamassa yasassino. Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… suniddā nāma upāsikā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi. Tathā hi ekaccesu potthakesu pāḷi peyyālavasena ṭhapitāti. Tena vuttaṃ –

The eighth and ninth vimānas have their origin in Rājagaha. In the origin story, one should say, in accordance with the order, "There was a female lay follower named Niddā…pe… of Gotama the glorious. By that I have such beauty…pe… there was a female lay follower named Suniddā." The rest is as stated above. In the verses also, there is nothing new. Thus, in some books, the Pali is set in the style of peyyāla. Therefore it was said—

246.

246.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe…

"With surpassing beauty…pe…
And your beauty shines in every direction."

247.

247.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deity, delighted…pe… of what action this is the fruit."

248.

248.

‘‘Niddāti mamaṃ aññaṃsu, rājagahasmiṃ upāsikā…pe…

"They knew me as Niddā, a female lay follower in Rājagaha…pe…
Of Gotama the glorious.

256.

256.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"By that I have such beauty…pe… and my beauty shines in every direction."

258.

258.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe… sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"With surpassing beauty…pe… shines in every direction."

261.

261.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe….

"That deity, delighted…pe….

262.

262.

‘‘Suniddāti maṃ aññaṃsu, rājagahasmiṃ upāsikā…pe…

"They knew me as Suniddā, a female lay follower in Rājagaha…pe…
Of Gotama the glorious.

268.

268.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that I have such beauty…pe…
And my beauty shines in every direction."

Niddā-suniddāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Niddā-Suniddāvimāna is concluded.

10. Paṭhamabhikkhādāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Paṭhamabhikkhādāyikāvimāna

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti bhikkhādāyikāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena uttaramadhurāyaṃ aññatarā itthī khīṇāyukā hoti apāye uppajjanārahā. Bhagavā paccūsavelāyaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya lokaṃ volokento taṃ itthiṃ apāye uppajjanārahaṃ disvā mahākaruṇāya sañcoditamānaso taṃ sugatiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetukāmo eko adutiyo madhuraṃ agamāsi. Gantvā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya bahinagaraṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Tena samayena sā itthī gehe āhāraṃ sampādetvā ekamante paṭisāmetvā ghaṭaṃ gahetvā udakatitthaṃ gantvā nhāyitvā ghaṭena udakaṃ gahetvā attano gehaṃ gacchantī antarāmagge bhagavantaṃ passitvā ‘‘api, bhante, piṇḍo laddho’’ti vatvā ‘‘labhissāmī’’ti ca bhagavatā vutte aladdhabhāvaṃ ñatvā ghaṭaṃ ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, piṇḍapātaṃ dassāmi, adhivāsethā’’ti āha. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena. Sā bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā paṭhamataraṃ gantvā sittasammaṭṭhe padese āsanaṃ paññāpetvā bhagavato pavesanaṃ udikkhamānā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā gehaṃ pavisitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha sā bhagavantaṃ bhojesi. Bhagavā katabhattakicco onītapattapāṇī tassā anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sā anumodanaṃ sutvā anappakaṃ pītisomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedentī yāva cakkhupathasamatikkamā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ avijahantī namassamānā aṭṭhāsi. Sā katipayadivasātikkameneva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti, accharāsahassañcassā parivāro ahosi. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā refers to the Bhikkhādāyikāvimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi in Jeta's Grove. At that time, in Uttaramadhurā, there was a certain woman who was near the end of her life, likely to be reborn in a woeful state. The Blessed One, arising at dawn from the Great Compassion meditation, surveying the world, saw that woman likely to be reborn in a woeful state. His mind stirred by great compassion, desiring to establish her in a good destiny, he, alone and without a second, went to Madhurā. Having gone there, in the forenoon, having dressed, taking his bowl and robe, he entered the city for alms. At that time, that woman, having prepared food in her house, setting it aside in one place, taking a pot, went to the bathing place for water, and having bathed, taking water with the pot, was going to her house. Seeing the Blessed One on the road, she said, "Venerable sir, have you received alms?" When the Blessed One said, "I will receive," knowing he had not yet received, she put down the pot, approached the Blessed One, and paying homage, said, "Venerable sir, I will give alms, please accept." The Blessed One accepted by remaining silent. Knowing the Blessed One's acceptance, she went ahead and spread out a seat in a prepared, swept space, waiting for the Blessed One to enter. The Blessed One, entering the house, sat on the prepared seat. Then she fed the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having finished his meal, withdrawing his hand from the bowl, gave her a teaching of rejoicing and departed. Having heard the rejoicing, experiencing no small joy and happiness, not abandoning the joy focused on the Buddha until he was out of sight, she stood paying homage. After only a few days had passed, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and a thousand nymphs were her attendants. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna—

270.

270.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe… osadhī viya tārakā.

"With surpassing beauty…pe… like the stars or a medicinal herb.

271.

271.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"What makes you so beautiful…pe…
And your beauty shines in every direction?"— Asked with these verses;

273.

273.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deity, delighted…pe… of what action this is the fruit."

274.

274.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā,

"I, among humans, a human being,
In a former birth, in the human world.

275.

275.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ buddhaṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

"I saw the Buddha, stainless, serene, and untroubled;
To him I gave alms, devoted, with my own hands.

276.

276.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that I have such beauty…pe…
And my beauty shines in every direction."—

Devatā byākāsi. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.

The deity explained. The rest is easy to understand, as the meaning is the same as previously stated.

Paṭhamabhikkhādāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the First Almsgiver's Mansion is complete.

11. Dutiyabhikkhādāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā
11. Description of the Second Almsgiver's Mansion

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti dutiyabhikkhādāyikāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati. Tattha aññatarā itthī saddhā pasannā aññataraṃ khīṇāsavattheraṃ piṇḍāya carantaṃ disvā attano gehaṃ pavesetvā bhojanaṃ adāsi. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Sesaṃ anantaravimānasadisameva.

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā means the Second Almsgiver's Mansion. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying in Rajagaha. There, a certain woman, faithful and serene, saw a certain khīṇāsava Elder going for alms and, inviting him into her house, gave him food. Later, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The rest is similar to the previous mansion.

278.

278.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe… sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

“With surpassing beauty…pe… she illuminates all directions.”

281.

281.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

“That deity, delighted…pe… by what action is this the fruit?”

282.

282.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā…pe…

“I, among humans, a human being…pe…
And my complexion illuminates all directions.”

Dutiyabhikkhādāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Second Almsgiver's Mansion is complete.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Paramatthadīpanī, the commentary on the Khuddaka Nikāya, in the Vimānavatthu,

Ekādasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa dutiyassa cittalatāvaggassa

the meaning of the second Cittalata Vagga, adorned with eleven stories,

Atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

is complete.

3. Pāricchattakavaggo

3. Pāricchattaka Vagga

1. Uḷāravimānavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the Magnificent Mansion

uḷāro te yaso vaṇṇoti uḷāravimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena samayena rājagahe āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa upaṭṭhākakule ekā dārikā dānajjhāsayā dānasaṃvibhāgaratā ahosi. Sā yaṃ tasmiṃ gehe purebhattaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ uppajjati, tattha attanā laddhapaṭivīsato upaḍḍhaṃ deti, upaḍḍhaṃ attanā paribhuñjati, adatvā pana na bhuñjati, dakkhiṇeyye apassantīpi ṭhapetvā diṭṭhakāle deti, yācakānampi detiyeva. Athassā mātā ‘‘mama dhītā dānajjhāsayā dānasaṃvibhāgaratā’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā tassā diguṇaṃ bhāgaṃ deti. Dentī ca ekasmiṃ bhāge tāya saṃvibhāge kate puna aparaṃ deti, sā tatopi saṃvibhāgaṃ karotiyeva.

uḷāro te yaso vaṇṇo means the Magnificent Mansion. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying in Rajagaha, in the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Sanctuary. At that time, in Rajagaha, in the family who were attendants of Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, there was a girl who was inclined to generosity and delighted in sharing alms. Whatever food, hard or soft, arose in that house before the meal, she would give half of what she received as her share, and she would consume half herself; she would not eat without giving. Even if she did not see anyone worthy of a gift, she would set it aside and give it when she saw someone, and she would certainly give to beggars. Then her mother, delighted and pleased that "my daughter is inclined to generosity and delighted in sharing alms," would give her twice as much. And when she made a distribution from one portion, she would give her another, and she would make a distribution from that as well.

Evaṃ gacchante kāle taṃ vayappattaṃ mātāpitaro tasmiṃyeva nagare aññatarasmiṃ kule kumārassa adaṃsu. Taṃ pana kulaṃ micchādiṭṭhikaṃ hoti assaddhaṃ appasannaṃ. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno rājagahe sapadānaṃ piṇḍāya caramāno tassā dārikāya sasurassa gehadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā sā dārikā pasannacittā ‘‘pavisatha bhante’’ti pavesetvā vanditvā sassuyā ṭhapitaṃ pūvaṃ taṃ apassantī ‘‘tassā kathetvā anumodāpessāmī’’ti vissāsena gahetvā therassa adāsi, thero anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Dārikā ‘‘tumhehi ṭhapitaṃ pūvaṃ mahāmoggallānattherassa adāsi’’nti sassuyā kathesi. Sā taṃ sutvā ‘‘kinnāmidaṃ pāgabbhiyaṃ, ayaṃ mama santakaṃ anāpucchitvāva samaṇassa adāsī’’ti taṃ kaṭataṭāyamānā kodhābhibhūtā yuttāyuttaṃ acintentī purato ṭhitaṃ musalakhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā aṃsakūṭe pahari. Sā sukhumālatāya parikkhīṇāyukatāya ca teneva pahārena balavadukkhābhibhūtā hutvā katipāheneva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. Tassā satipi aññasmiṃ sucaritakamme therassa katadānameva sātisayaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāsi. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva gantvā –

As time passed in this way, when she came of age, her parents gave her to a young man in another family in that same city. But that family was of wrong view, faithless, and unappeased. Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering for alms in Rajagaha in regular sequence, stood at the door of the daughter’s in-laws’ house. Seeing him, the girl, with a serene mind, invited him in, saying, "Enter, Bhante." After paying homage, not seeing the cake that her mother-in-law had placed there, she confidently took it, thinking, "I will tell her and get her approval," and gave it to the Elder. The Elder, having given thanks, departed. The girl told her mother-in-law, "I gave the cake that you placed there to the Elder Mahāmoggallāna." Hearing that, she, seething with anger and not considering what was appropriate or inappropriate, grabbed a piece of firewood that was in front of her and struck her on the shoulder. She, weakened by her delicate nature and the exhaustion of her lifespan, was overcome by severe pain from that blow and, after only a few days, died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Even though she had other meritorious deeds, the alms she gave to the Elder especially came to her aid. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, going there in the same way as described before –

286.

286.

‘‘Uḷāro te yaso vaṇṇo, sabbā obhāsate disā;

“Magnificent is your glory, your beauty illuminates all directions;
Nymphs dance and sing, divine sons are adorned.

287.

287.

‘‘Modenti parivārenti, tava pūjāya devate;

“They rejoice and attend upon you, deity, in your honor;
Golden are these mansions, these lovely ones of yours.

288.

288.

‘‘Tuvaṃsi issarā tesaṃ, sabbakāmasamiddhinī;

“You are their sovereign, fulfilling all desires;
Of noble birth and great, you rejoice in the divine realm;
Deity, questioned, declare, by what action is this the fruit?”

Tīhi gāthāhi pucchi.

He questioned with these three verses.

286.Tatthayasoti parivāro.Vaṇṇoti vaṇṇanibhā sarīrobhāso. ‘‘Uḷāro’’ti pana visesetvā vuttattā tassā devatāya parivārasampatti ca vaṇṇasampatti ca vuttā hoti. Tāsu ‘‘uḷāro te vaṇṇo’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vaṇṇasampattiṃ visayavasena vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbā obhāsate disā’’ti vatvā ‘‘uḷāro te yaso’’ti vuttaṃ parivārasampattiṃ vatthuvasena vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘nāriyo naccantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasabbā obhāsate disāti sabbāsu disāsu vijjotate, sabbā vā disā obhāsayate, vijjotayatīti attho. ‘‘Obhāsate’’ti padassa ‘‘obhāsante’’ti keci vacanavipallāsena atthaṃ vadanti, tehi ‘‘vaṇṇenā’’ti vibhatti vipariṇāmetabbā. Vaṇṇenāti ca hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, vaṇṇena hetubhūtenāti attho. ‘‘Sabbā disā’’ti ca jātivasena disāsāmaññe apekkhite vacanavipallāsenapi payojanaṃ natthi.Nāriyoti etthāpi ‘‘alaṅkatā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.Devaputtāti ettha ca-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho. Tena nāriyo devaputtā cāti samuccayo veditabbo.

286. There, yaso means retinue. Vaṇṇo means the body's radiance, the glow of beauty. Since "uḷāro" (magnificent) is said specifically, it means that the deity's retinue-wealth and beauty-wealth are stated. Among those, after stating the beauty-wealth succinctly with "uḷāro te vaṇṇo," to show it extensively in terms of the object, he said "sabbā obhāsate disā," and after stating the retinue-wealth succinctly with "uḷāro te yaso," to show it extensively in terms of the substance, he said "nāriyo naccantī," etc. There, sabbā obhāsate disā means it shines in all directions, or it illuminates all directions, it brightens, is the meaning. Some explain the meaning of the word "obhāsate" as "obhāsante," by changing the word, but with that, the case ending of "vaṇṇenā" should be changed. "Vaṇṇena" is an instrumental case in the sense of a cause; the meaning is, by beauty as a cause. And when "sabbā disā" is used in the general sense of directions by way of kind, there is no purpose even by changing the word when the directions are expected. Here also, the word "alaṅkatā" should be brought in and connected. And in "devaputtā," the word "ca" (and) is understood by ellipsis. Therefore, the combination of nymphs and divine sons should be understood.

287.Modentīti pamodayanti.Pūjāyāti pūjanatthaṃ pūjānimittaṃ vā, naccanti gāyantīti yojanā.Tavimānīti tava imāni.

287.Modentī means they delight. Pūjāyā means for the purpose of honoring, or as a cause of honoring; the connection is, they dance and sing. Tavimānī means these are yours.

288.Sabbakāmasamiddhinīti sabbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi, sabbehi vā tayā kāmitehi icchitehi vatthūhi samiddhā.Abhijātāti sujātā.Mahantāsīti mahatī mahānubhāvā asi.Devakāye pamodasīti imasmiṃ devanikāye dibbasampattihetukena paramena pamodanena pamodasi.

288.Sabbakāmasamiddhinī means enriched with all five strands of sense pleasure, or with all the things desired and wished for by you. Abhijātā means well-born. Mahantāsī means you are great, of great power. Devakāye pamodasī means in this divine realm, you rejoice with supreme joy, caused by divine fortune.

Evaṃ therena pucchitā sā devatā tamatthaṃ vissajjesi –

Having been asked thus by the Elder, that deity explained that matter –

289.

289.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;

“I, among humans, a human being, in a former birth in the human world;
I was a daughter-in-law in an immoral family, among the faithless and stingy.

290.

290.

‘‘Saddhā sīlena sampannā, saṃvibhāgaratā sadā;

“Endowed with faith and virtue, always delighting in sharing;
To one wandering for alms, I gave a cake.

291.

291.

‘‘Tadāhaṃ sassuyācikkhiṃ, ‘samaṇo āgato idha;

“Then I told my mother-in-law, ‘A samaṇa has come here;
I gave him a cake, gladly, with my own hands.’

292.

292.

‘‘Itissā sassu paribhāsi, avinītāsi tvaṃ vadhu;

“At this, my mother-in-law reproached me, ‘You are undisciplined, you wretch;
You did not wish to consult me, “May I give to the samaṇa?”’

293.

293.

‘‘Tato me sassu kupitā, pahāsi musalena maṃ;

“Then my mother-in-law, angered, struck me with a pestle;
She struck my shoulder and killed me; I could not live long.

294.

294.

‘‘Ahaṃ kāyassa bhedā, vippamuttā tato cutā;

“I, at the breaking up of the body, freed from that, having passed away;
Have arisen into companionship with the Tāvatiṃsa gods.

295.

295.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

“By that, I have such beauty…pe…
And my complexion illuminates all directions.”

289.Tatthaassaddhesūti ratanattayasaddhāya kammaphalasaddhāya ca abhāvena assaddhesu, thaddhamacchariyatāyakadariyesusassuādīsu ahaṃ saddhā sīlena sampannā ahosinti yojanā.

289. There, assaddhesu means among those lacking faith in the Triple Gem and faith in the results of actions, who are faithless, and among the kadariyesu (stingy), due to their stubborn miserliness, such as the mother-in-law, etc., I was endowed with faith and virtue, is the connection.

290-1.Apūvanti kapallapūvaṃ.Teti nipātamattaṃ.Sassuyā ācikkhiṃgahitabhāvañāpanatthañca anumodanatthañcāti adhippāyo.

290-1.Apūvanti means a cake baked in a pot shard. Te is merely an expletive. Sassuyā ācikkhiṃ means the intention was both to inform her of the taking and for the sake of approval.

292.Itissāti etthaassāti nipātamattaṃ.Samaṇassa dadāmahanti ahaṃ samaṇassa apūvaṃ dadāmīti. Yasmā na maṃ sampucchituṃ icchi, tasmā tvaṃ vadhu avinītāsīti sassu paribhāsīti yojanā.

292.Itissā means here, assā is merely an expletive. Samaṇassa dadāmahanti means, I will give a cake to the samaṇa. Because you did not wish to consult me, therefore you are undisciplined, wretch, is how the mother-in-law reproached her, is the connection.

293.Pahāsīti pahari.Kūṭaṅgacchi avadhi manti etthakūṭanti aṃsakūṭaṃ vuttaṃ purimapadalopena, kūṭameva aṅganti kūṭaṅgaṃ, taṃ chindatīti kūṭaṅgacchi. Evaṃ kodhābhibhūtā hutvā maṃ avadhi, mama aṃsakūṭaṃ chindi, teneva upakkamena matattā maṃ māresīti attho. Tenāha‘‘nāsakkhiṃ jīvituṃ cira’’nti.

293.Pahāsīti means she struck. Kūṭaṅgacchi avadhi manti means here, kūṭanti means the shoulder, by the elision of the prior word; kūṭameva aṅganti kūṭaṅgaṃ, that which cuts the shoulder. Thus, having become overcome with anger, she killed me, she cut my shoulder; because of dying by that very assault, she killed me, is the meaning. Therefore, he said ‘‘nāsakkhiṃ jīvituṃ cira’’nti.

294.Vippamuttāti tato dukkhato suṭṭhu muttā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

294.Vippamuttāti means well freed from that suffering. The rest is the same as previously stated.

Uḷāravimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Magnificent Mansion is complete.

2. Ucchudāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā
2. Description of the Sugarcane-Giver's Mansion

Obhāsayitvāpathaviṃ sadevakanti ucchudāyikāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharatītiādi sabbaṃ anantaravimāne vuttasadisaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – idha ucchu dinnā, sassuyā ca pīṭhakena pahaṭā, taṅkhaṇaññeva matā tāvatiṃsesu uppannā, tassaṃyeva rattiyaṃ therassa upaṭṭhānaṃ āgatā, kevalakappaṃ gijjhakūṭaṃ cando viya sūriyo viya ca obhāsentī theraṃ vanditvā pañjalikā namassamānā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ thero –

Obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakanti means the Sugarcane-Giver's Mansion. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying in Rajagaha, etc., everything is similar to what was said in the previous mansion. But this is the distinction – here, sugarcane was given, and she was struck by her mother-in-law with a stool, and dying at that very moment, she was born in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. On that very night, she came to attend upon the Elder, illuminating Vulture Peak like the moon, like the sun, and having paid homage to the Elder, standing respectfully with her hands clasped together to one side. Then the Elder –

296.

296.

‘‘Obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakaṃ, atirocasi candimasūriyā viya;

“Having illuminated the earth together with the gods, you outshine the moon and sun;
With beauty, and complexion, and glory, and splendor, like Brahmā among the gods, the thirty-three, together with Indra.

297.

297.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ uppalamāladhārinī, āveḷinī kañcanasannibhattace;

“I ask you, garlanded with lotuses, adorned with jeweled ornaments, with skin like gold;
Adorned, wearing excellent garments, who are you, fair deity, who venerates me?

298.

298.

‘‘Kiṃ tvaṃ pure kammamakāsi attanā, manussabhūtā purimāya jātiyā;

“What meritorious deed did you do in the past, being a human being in a former birth?
A gift well-practiced, or virtue and self-restraint, by what have you attained a happy destiny, glorious one?
Deity, questioned, declare, by what action is this the fruit?”

Imāhi gāthāhi pucchi.

He asked with these verses.

296-7.Tatthaobhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakanti candimasūriyarasmisammissehi sinerupassaviniggatehi pabhāvisarehi vijjotayamānatāya devena ākāsena sahāti sadevakaṃ upagatabhūmibhāgabhūtaṃ imaṃ pathaviṃ vijjotetvā, ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ katvāti attho. Obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ candimasūriyā viyāti yojanā.Atirocasīti atikkamitvā rocasi. Taṃ pana atirocanaṃ kena kiṃ viya kena vāti āha‘‘siriyā’’tiādi. Tatthasiriyāti sobhaggādisobhāvisesena.Tejasāti attano ānubhāvena.Āveḷinīti ratanamayapupphāveḷavatī.

296-7.There, obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakanti, because of illuminating this earth, which consists of an area of land that has approached together with the gods, together with the sky, by means of the streams of light emitted from the slopes of Mount Sineru mingled with the rays of the moon and sun, having made it a single illumination, a single radiance, is the meaning. Having illuminated the earth, like the moon and sun, is the connection. Atirocasīti means you shine surpassing. But he says with what, like what, by what is that surpassing shining, ‘‘siriyā’’tiādi. There, siriyāti means by a special kind of beauty such as loveliness, etc. Tejasā means by one’s own power. Āveḷinīti means possessing a jewel-made flower garland.

Evaṃ therena pucchitā devatā imāhi gāthāhi vissajjesi –

Having been asked thus by the Elder, the deity explained with these verses –

299.

299.

‘‘Idāni bhante imameva gāmaṃ, piṇḍāya amhākaṃ gharaṃ upāgami;

“Now, Bhante, you came to our house in this very village,
Then, with a serene mind and boundless joy, I gave you a piece of sugarcane.

300.

300.

‘‘Sassu ca pacchā anuyuñjate mamaṃ, kahaṃ nu ucchuṃ vadhuke avākiri;

“And afterwards my mother-in-law questioned me, ‘Where did you throw the sugarcane, wretch?’
It was not thrown away, nor was it eaten by me; I myself gave it to the peaceful bhikkhu.

301.

301.

‘‘Tuyhaṃ nvidaṃ issariyaṃ atho mama, itissā sassu paribhāsate mamaṃ;

“Is this your authority, or mine?’ Thus my mother-in-law reproached me;
Taking a stool, she struck me; from that, having passed away, I am a deity.

302.

302.

‘‘Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā, sukhañca kammaṃ anubhomi attanā;

“That deed, that meritorious act, was done by me; and I experience the pleasant result myself;
Together with the gods, we attend upon each other, we rejoice with the five strands of sense pleasure.

303.

303.

‘‘Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā, sukhañca kammaṃ anubhomi attanā;

“That deed, that meritorious act, was done by me; and I experience the pleasant result myself;
Guarded by the Lord of Gods, protected by the thirty-three, endowed with the five strands of sense pleasure.

304.

304.

‘‘Etādisaṃ puññaphalaṃ anappakaṃ, mahāvipākā mama ucchudakkhiṇā;

“Such a small fruit of merit as this, great is the result of my sugarcane offering;
Together with the gods, we attend upon each other, we rejoice with the five strands of sense pleasure.

305.

305.

‘‘Etādisaṃ puññaphalaṃ anappakaṃ, mahājutikā mama ucchudakkhiṇā;

“Such a small fruit of merit as this, great is the splendor of my sugarcane offering;
Guarded by the Lord of Gods, protected by the thirty-three, like thousand-eyed Indra in the Nandana Grove.

306.

306.

‘‘Tuvañca bhante anukampakaṃ viduṃ, upecca vandiṃ kusalañca pucchisaṃ;

“And you, Bhante, knowing compassion, I approached and venerated, and inquired about merit;
Then, with a serene mind and boundless joy, I gave you a piece of sugarcane.”

299.Tatthaidānīti anantarātītadivasattā āha, adhunāti attho.Imameva gāmanti imasmiṃyeva gāme, rājagahaṃ sandhāya vadati. Vuttañhi ‘‘gāmopi nigamopi nagarampi ‘gāmo’ icceva vuccatī’’ti. Bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Upāgamīti upagato ahosi.Atulāyāti anupamāya, appamāṇāya vā.

299.Here, idānī means beginning from the previous day, the meaning is "now." Imameva gāmaṃ means in this very village, referring to Rājagaha. For it was said, "Whether it be a village, a market town, or a city, it is called a 'gāma'." This is an application locative. Upāgamī means approached, went to. Atulāyā means incomparable, or immeasurable.

300.Avākirīti apanesi chaḍḍesi, vināsesi vā.Santassāti sādhurūpassa santakilesassa parissamamappattassa vā.

300.Avākirī means removed, threw away, or destroyed. Santassā means of good form, with calmed defilements, or not having reached fatigue.

301.Tuyhaṃ nūtinu-saddo anattamanatāsūcane nipāto, so ‘‘mamā’’ti etthāpi ānetvā yojetabbo ‘‘mama nū’’ti.Idaṃ issariyanti gehe ādhipaccaṃ sandhāyāha.Tato cutāti tato manussalokato cutā. Yasmā ṭhitaṭṭhānato apagatāpi ‘‘cutā’’ti vuccati, tasmā cutiṃ visesetuṃ‘‘kālakatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kālakatāpi ca na yattha katthaci nibbattā, apica kho devattaṃ upagatāti dassentī āha‘‘amhi devatā’’ti.

301.Tuyhaṃ nū here, the word nu is a particle indicating displeasure; it should also be brought and connected to "mama," as in "mama nū." Idaṃ issariyaṃ refers to dominion over the household. Tato cutā means deceased from that human world. Since those who have departed from their standing place are also called "cutā," therefore, to specify the passing away, ‘‘kālakatā’’ is said. And having passed away, she was not reborn just anywhere; furthermore, showing that she went to the state of a deity, he says, ‘‘amhi devatā’’ meaning "I am a goddess."

302.Tadevakammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayāti tadeva ucchukhaṇḍadānamattaṃ kusalaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ mayā, aññaṃ na jānāmīti attho.Sukhañca kammanti sukhañca kammaphalaṃ. Kammaphalañhi idha ‘‘kamma’’nti vuttaṃ uttarapadalopena, kāraṇopacārena vā ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati (dī. ni. 3.80). Anubhomi sakaṃ puñña’’nti (vi. va. 133) ca ādīsu viya. Kammanti vā karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ, kammenāti attho. Kamme vā bhavaṃ kammaṃ yathā kammanti. Atha vā kāmetabbatāya kammaṃ. Tañhi sukharajanīyabhāvato kāmūpasaṃhitaṃ kāmetabbanti kamanīyaṃ.Attanāti attanā eva, sayaṃvasitāya seribhāvena sayamevāti attho.Paricārayāmahaṃ attānanti purimagāthāya ‘‘attanā’’ti vuttaṃ padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmena ‘‘attāna’’nti yojetabbaṃ.

302.Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā means just that much, merely giving a piece of sugarcane, is the wholesome action done by me; I know nothing else. Sukhañca kammaṃ means and the happiness, the fruit of action. For here, the fruit of action is called "kamma" by the elision of the latter word, or by the treatment of the cause, as in places such as, "Due to undertaking skillful things, monks, merit thus increases (dī. ni. 3.80). I experience my own merit (vi. va. 133)." Or "kamma" is an application locative in the sense of doing, meaning "by action." Or "kammaṃ" is "bhavaṃ kammaṃ" (being action) as in "yathā kammaṃ" (according to action). Alternatively, "kammaṃ" is so because it is to be desired. Since that is accompanied by desire due to its nature of creating happiness, it is to be desired, it is lovely. Attanā means by oneself, freely, by one's own power, oneself alone. Paricārayāmahaṃ attānaṃ in the previous verse, the word "attanā" should be connected as "attānaṃ" by transformation of the inflection.

303-5.Devindaguttāti devindena sakkena guttā, devindo viya vā guttā mahāparivāratāya.Samappitāti suṭṭhu appitā samannāgatā.Mahāvipākāti vipulaphalā.Mahājutikāti mahātejā, mahānubhāvāti attho.

303-5.Devindaguttā means protected by Devinda Sakka, or like Devinda, protected due to having a large retinue. Samappitā means well-endowed, endowed. Mahāvipākā means of great result, abundant fruit. Mahājutikā means of great splendor, of great power.

306.Tuvanti taṃ.Anukampakanti kāruṇikaṃ.Vidunti sappaññaṃ, sāvakapāramiyā matthakaṃ pattanti attho.Upeccāti upagantvā.Vandinti pañcapatiṭṭhitena abhivādayiṃ.Kusalañcaārogyapucchisaṃapucchiṃ,atulāya pītiyāidañca kusalaṃ anussarāmīti adhippāyo. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

306.Tuvaṃ means you. Anukampakaṃ means compassionate. Viduṃ means wise, having reached the peak of the disciple's perfections. Upeccā means having approached. Vandiṃ means I saluted with the five-point prostration. Kusalañca arogyaṃ pucchisaṃ means I asked about well-being and health, atulāya pītiyā the idea is "and I remember this good deed with incomparable joy." The rest is in the same manner as stated below.

Ucchudāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sugarcane-Giver's Mansion is Finished.

3. Pallaṅkavimānavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Couch Mansion

Pallaṅkaseṭṭhemaṇisoṇṇacitteti pallaṅkavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena sāvatthiyaṃ aññatarassa upāsakassa dhītā kulapadesādinā sadisassa tattheva aññatarassa kulaputtassa dinnā, sā ca hoti akkodhanā sīlācārasampannā patidevatā samādinnapañcasīlā, uposathe sakkaccaṃ uposathasīlāni ca rakkhati. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallānatthero heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva gantvā –

Pallaṅkaseṭṭhe maṇisoṇṇacitte means the couch mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, in Sāvatthi, the daughter of a certain lay follower, similar in lineage and so forth, was given to a certain young man from a good family right there, and she was without anger, endowed with morality and good conduct, devoted to her husband like a deity, having undertaken the five precepts, and carefully observing the Uposatha precepts on the Uposatha days. Later, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna went to her in the same manner as described below –

307.

307.

‘‘Pallaṅkaseṭṭhe maṇisoṇṇacitte, pupphābhikiṇṇe sayane uḷāre;

‘‘On the finest couch, adorned with jewels and gold,
On a magnificent bed strewn with flowers;
There you shine, goddess of great power,
Displaying various miraculous powers.

308.

308.

‘‘Imā ca te accharāyo samantato, naccanti gāyanti pamodayanti;

‘‘And these celestial nymphs all around you,
Dance, sing, and delight you;
You have attained divine power, goddess of great might,
What merit did you do when you were a human?
By what have you such radiant power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?’’ –

Gāthāhi pucchi.

He asked with these verses.

Sāpissa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

She explained to him with these verses –

309.

309.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, aḍḍhe kule suṇisā ahosiṃ;

‘‘Among humans, I was a human being,
In a wealthy family, I was a daughter-in-law;
Without anger, obedient to my husband,
On the Uposatha day, I was diligent.

310.

310.

‘‘Manussabhūtā daharā apāpikā, pasannacittā patimābhirādhayiṃ;

‘‘As a young woman, without evil, with a serene mind,
I pleased my husband;
Day and night, acting agreeably,
In the past, I was virtuous.

311.

311.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viratā acorikā, saṃsuddhakāyā sucibrahmacārinī;

‘‘Abstaining from killing, non-stealing,
Of purified body, practicing pure brahmacariya;
Not drinking alcohol, nor speaking falsely,
I was a fulfiller of the precepts of training.

312.

312.

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;

‘‘On the fourteenth and fifteenth days,
And the eighth day of the fortnight;
And on the special Uposatha days,
I was of joyful mind.

313.

313.

‘‘Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ anudhammacārinī, uposathaṃ pītimanā upāvasiṃ;

‘‘Endowed with the eight factors, practicing in accordance with the Dhamma,
I observed the Uposatha with a joyful heart;
And this noble, eight-factored one,
Having undertaken this wholesome act bringing happiness,
As a gracious wife, obedient to my husband,
I was formerly a female disciple of the Well-gone One.

314.

314.

‘‘Etādisaṃ kusalaṃ jīvaloke, kammaṃ karitvāna visesabhāginī;

‘‘Having done such wholesome deeds in the world,
A partaker of special blessings;
At the breaking up of the body, after death,
I have attained divine power, come to a good destination.

315.

315.

‘‘Vimānapāsādavare manorame, parivāritā accharāsaṅgaṇena;

‘‘In a splendid and delightful mansion-palace,
Surrounded by a host of celestial nymphs;
Self-luminous, the divine hosts delight me,
Of long life, I have come to a divine mansion.’’

307.Tatthapallaṅkaseṭṭheti pallaṅkavare uttamapallaṅke. Taṃyevassa seṭṭhataṃ dassetuṃ‘‘maṇisoṇṇacitte’’ti vuttaṃ, vividharatanaraṃsijālasamujjalehi maṇīhi ceva suvaṇṇena ca vicitte ‘‘tatthā’’ti ‘‘sayane’’ti ca vutte sayitabbaṭṭhānabhūte pallaṅkaseṭṭhe.

307.There, pallaṅkaseṭṭhe means on the best couch, on an excellent couch. Just to show that it was the best, ‘‘maṇisoṇṇacitte’’ is said, meaning adorned with jewels and gold, radiant with various arrays of jewels and gold; "tatthā" and "sayane" having been said, on the finest couch, the place where one lies down.

308.Teti tuyhaṃ samantato. ‘‘Pamodayantī’’ti padaṃ pana apekkhitvā ‘‘ta’’nti vibhatti vipariṇāmetabbā.Pamodayantīti vā pamodanaṃ karonti, pamodanaṃ tuyhaṃ uppādentīti attho.

308.Te means to you, all around. However, the word "pamodayantī" needs the inflection to be transformed to "taṃ," in agreement. Alternatively, pamodayantī means they do delight, they produce delight for you.

310.Daharā apāpikāti daharāpi apāpikā. ‘‘Daharāsu pāpikā’’ti vā pāṭho, soyevattho. ‘‘Daharassāpāpikā’’tipi paṭhanti, daharassa sāmikassa apāpikā, sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhānena anaticariyāya ca bhaddikāti attho. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘pasannacittā’’tiādi.Abhirādhayinti ārādhesiṃ.Rattoti rattiyaṃ.

310.Daharā apāpikā means even as a young woman, without evil. Alternatively, the reading is "daharāsu pāpikā," the meaning is the same. Some also read "daharassāpāpikā," meaning without evil to the young husband, a well-behaved one by diligently attending and not transgressing. Therefore it is said, ‘‘pasannacittā’’ and so on. Abhirādhayiṃ means I pleased. Ratto means at night.

311.Acorikāti coriyarahitā, adinnādānā paṭiviratāti attho. ‘‘Viratā ca coriyā’’tipi pāṭho, theyyato ca viratāti attho.Saṃsuddhakāyāti parisuddhakāyakammantatāya sammadeva suddhakāyā, tato evasucibrahmacārinīsāmikato aññattha abrahmacariyāsambhavato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –

311.Acorikā means without theft, abstaining from taking what is not given. Alternatively, the reading is "viratā ca coriyā," meaning abstaining from theft. Saṃsuddhakāyā means with a very pure body due to purity of bodily action, therefore, sucibrahmacārinī since there is no possibility of unchastity other than with the husband. For thus it was said –

‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma,

‘‘And we do not transgress against our wives,
Nor do our wives transgress against us;
We practice brahmacariya apart from them,
Therefore, our children do not die young.’’ (jā. 1.10.97);

sucibrahmacārinīti sucino suddhassa brahmassa seṭṭhassa uposathasīlassa, maggabrahmacariyassa vā anurūpassa pubbabhāgabrahmacariyassa vasena sucibrahmacārinī.

sucibrahmacārinī means practicing pure brahmacariya with respect to pure, excellent brahmacariya, or brahmacariya in conformity with the brahmacariya of the path, which is the preliminary part.

313.Anudhammacārinīti ariyānaṃ dhammassa anudhammaṃ caraṇasīlā. Imañca anantaraṃ vuttaṃ niddosatāyaariyaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgavarehiaṭṭhahi uttamaṅgehi ariyattā eva vāariyaṭṭhaṅgavarehi upetaṃārogyaṭṭhena anavajjaṭṭhena cakusalaṃsukhavipākatāya sukhānisaṃsatāya casukhudrayaṃ upāvasinti yojanā.

313.Anudhammacārinī means one who habitually practices in accordance with the Dhamma of the Noble Ones. This, being faultless, is immediately said to be ariyaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgavarehi meaning "noble," with eight excellent factors, or just by being noble, ariyaṭṭhaṅgavarehi upetaṃ endowed with the eight excellent noble factors; kusalaṃ because of its nature of happiness, and because of its having happiness as its result, and because it is blameless in the sense of health and well-being, sukhudrayaṃ upāvasiṃ is the connection.

314.Visesabhāginīti visesassa dibbassa sampattibhavassa bhāginī.Sugatimhi āgatāti sugatiṃ āgatā upagatā, sugatimhi vā sugatiyaṃ dibbasampattiyaṃ āgatā. ‘‘Sugatiñhi āgatā’’tipi pāṭho. Tatthati nipātamattaṃ, hetuattho vā, yasmā sugatiṃ āgatā, tasmā visesabhāginīti yojanā.

314.Visesabhāginī means a partaker of special, divine prosperity. Sugatimhi āgatā means come to a good destination, approached a good destination, or in a good destination, come to divine prosperity. Alternatively, the reading is "sugatiñhi āgatā." There, is merely a particle, or it is a reason, since she has come to a good destination, therefore she is a partaker of special blessings.

315.Vimānapāsādavareti vimānesu uttamapāsāde, vimānasaṅkhāte vā aggapāsāde, vimāne vā vigatamāne appamāṇe mahante varapāsādeparivāritā accharāsaṅgaṇena sayaṃpabhāpamodāmi, ‘‘amhī’’ti vā padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.Dīghāyukinti heṭṭhimehi devehi dīghatarāyukatāya tatrūpapannehi anappāyukatāya ca dīghāyukiṃmaṃyathāvuttaṃdevavimānamāgataṃupagataṃdevagaṇā ramentīti yojanā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

315.Vimānapāsādavare means in the excellent palace among the mansions, or in the chief palace called a mansion, or in the mansion, in the great, immeasurable, excellent palace; parivāritā accharāsaṅgaṇena sayaṃpabhā I rejoice, or the word "amhī" should be brought and connected. Dīghāyukiṃ because of having a longer lifespan than the lower deities, and because of having an insignificant lifespan compared to those born there, of long life, maṃ me, as stated, devavimānamāgataṃ the aforementioned, who has come to the divine mansion, devagaṇā ramentī the hosts of deities delight. The rest is in the same manner as stated.

Pallaṅkavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Couch Mansion is Finished.

4. Latāvimānavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Creeper Mansion

Latāca sajjā pavarā ca devatāti latāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena sāvatthivāsino aññatarassa upāsakassa dhītā latā nāma paṇḍitā byattā medhāvinī patikulaṃ gatā bhattu sassusasurānañca manāpacārinī piyavādinī parijanassa saṅgahakusalā gehe kuṭumbabhārassa nittharaṇasamatthā akkodhanā sīlācārasampannā dānasaṃvibhāgaratā akhaṇḍapañcasīlā uposatharakkhaṇe ca appamattā ahosi. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā vessavaṇassa mahārājassa dhītā hutvā nibbatti latātveva nāmena. Aññāpi tassā sajjā, pavarā, accimatī, sutāti catasso bhaginiyo ahesuṃ. Tā pañcapi sakkena devarājena ānetvā nāṭakitthibhāvena paricārikaṭṭhāne ṭhapitā. Latā panassa naccagītādīsu chekatāya iṭṭhatarā ahosi.

Latā ca sajjā pavarā ca devatā means the creeper mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, the daughter of a certain lay follower living in Sāvatthi, named Latā, was wise, clever, intelligent, having gone to the household of her husband, acting agreeably to her husband, mother-in-law, and father-in-law, speaking pleasantly, skilled in helping the servants, capable of managing the household affairs at home, without anger, endowed with morality and good conduct, delighting in generosity and sharing, keeping the five precepts unbroken, and diligent in observing the Uposatha. Later, she passed away and was reborn as the daughter of the Great King Vessavaṇa, with the very name Latā. She had four other sisters named Sajjā, Pavarā, Accimatī, and Sutā. All five of them were brought by Sakka, the King of the Gods, and placed in the position of attendants as actresses. However, Latā was more pleasing to him because of her skill in dancing, singing, and so on.

Tāsaṃ ekato samāgantvā sukhanisajjāya nisinnānaṃ saṅgītanepuññaṃ paṭicca vivādo uppanno. Tā sabbāpi vessavaṇassa mahārājassa santikaṃ gantvā pucchiṃsu ‘‘tāta, katamā amhākaṃ naccādīsu kusalā’’ti? So evamāha ‘‘gacchatha dhītaro anotattadahatīre devasamāgame saṅgītaṃ pavattetha, tattha vo viseso pākaṭo bhavissatī’’ti. Tā tathā akaṃsu. Tattha devaputtā latāya naccamānāya attano sabhāvena ṭhātuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu, sañjātapahāsā acchariyabbhutacittajātā nirantaraṃ sādhukāraṃ dentā ukkuṭṭhisadde celukkhepe ca pavattentā himavantaṃ kampayamānā viya mahantaṃ kolāhalamakaṃsu. Itarāsu pana naccantīsu sisirakāle kokilā viya tuṇhībhūtā nisīdiṃsu. Evaṃ tattha saṅgīte latāya viseso pākaṭo ahosi.

Once, when they had gathered together and were sitting comfortably, a dispute arose regarding their skill in music. They all went to the Great King Vessavaṇa and asked, "Father, which of us is skilled in dancing and so on?" He said, "Go, daughters, perform music at the assembly of gods on the shore of Lake Anotatta, there your distinction will become evident." They did so. There, when Latā was dancing, the sons of the gods could not remain in their normal state, and with laughter arising, becoming astonished and amazed, continuously giving approval, and making great commotion as if shaking the Himalayas, creating sounds of snapping fingers and waving cloths. However, when the others were dancing, they sat silently like cuckoos in the winter season. Thus, Latā's distinction became evident in the music there.

Atha tāsaṃ devadhītānaṃ sutāya devadhītāya etadahosi ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ayaṃ latā amhe abhibhuyya tiṭṭhati vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca, yaṃnūnāhaṃ latāya katakammaṃ puccheyya’’nti. Sā taṃ pucchi. Itarāpi tassā etamatthaṃ vissajjesi. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ vessavaṇamahārājā devacārikavasena upagatassa āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa ācikkhi. Thero tamatthaṃ pucchāya mūlakāraṇato paṭṭhāya bhagavato ārocento –

Then, it occurred to Sutā, one of those daughters of the gods, "What action did this Latā do that she surpasses us in complexion and fame? I wonder if I should ask Latā what she did." She asked her. The other one explained this matter to her. Then the Great King Vessavaṇa told all this to Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, who had come as a divine wanderer. The Elder, when reporting this matter to the Blessed One, beginning from the root cause of the question –

316.

316.

‘‘Latā ca sajjā pavarā ca devatā, accimatī rājavarassa sirīmato;

‘‘Latā and Sajjā, and Pavarā, too, a goddess,
And Accimatī, of the glorious king;
And Sutā, daughter of King Vessavaṇa,
Radiant with righteous qualities, she shines.

317.

317.

‘‘Pañcettha nāriyo āgamaṃsu nhāyituṃ, sītodakaṃ uppaliniṃ sivaṃ nadiṃ;

‘‘Five ladies came here to bathe,
In the cool water, the lotus-filled, safe river;
Having bathed there and enjoyed themselves, the goddesses,
Having danced and sung, Sutā said to Latā:

318.

318.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ uppalamāladhārini, āveḷini kañcanasannibhattace;

‘‘I ask you, wearer of a lotus garland,
O Avelini, with skin like burnished gold;
With dark eyes like a dark cloud,
Of long life, by what is your fame made?

319.

319.

‘‘Kenāsi bhadde patino piyatarā, visiṭṭhakalyāṇitarassu rūpato;

‘‘By what, O beautiful one, are you more dear to your husband,
More excellent, more beautiful in form?
Skilled in dancing, singing, and playing,
Tell us, you who are asked by human women.’’ –

Sutāya pucchā.

Sutā's question.

320.

320.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, uḷārabhoge kule suṇisā ahosiṃ;

‘‘Among humans, I was a human being,
In a wealthy family, I was a daughter-in-law;
Without anger, obedient to my husband,
On the Uposatha day, I was diligent.

321.

321.

‘‘Manussabhūtā daharā apāpikā, pasannacittā patimābhirādhayiṃ;

‘‘As a young woman, without evil, with a serene mind,
I pleased my husband;
With the world of gods, I pleased my mother-in-law and father-in-law, and my slaves,
I pleased them, by that my fame is made.

322.

322.

‘‘Sāhaṃ tena kusalena kammunā, catubbhi ṭhānehi visesamajjhagā;

‘‘By that wholesome deed,
I have attained distinction in four ways;
Life, complexion, happiness, and strength,
And the joy of play, I experience them unsparingly.

323.

323.

‘‘Sutaṃ nu taṃ bhāsati yaṃ ayaṃ latā, yaṃ no apucchimha akittayī no;

"Surely you heard what this creeper says, what we asked, it declared to us; 'Husbands are indeed superior for us women, their destiny and divinity are excellent.’

324.

324.

‘‘Patīsu dhammaṃ pacarāma sabbā, patibbatā yattha bhavanti itthiyo;

"We all practice the Dhamma towards our husbands, where women are devoted to their husbands; having practiced the Dhamma towards our husbands, we shall attain what this creeper says.’

325.

325.

‘‘Sīho yathā pabbatasānugocaro, mahindharaṃ pabbatamāvasitvā;

"Just as a lion, whose range is a mountain ridge, having inhabited a great mountain, overpowering and killing other quadrupeds, eats the small deer, a meat-eater.

326.

326.

‘‘Tatheva saddhā idha ariyasāvikā, bhattāraṃ nissāya patiṃ anubbatā;

"Likewise, a faithful noble female disciple here, relying on her husband, devoted to her husband, having slain anger and overcome stinginess, rejoices in heaven, practicing the Dhamma"’ –

Latāya vissajjananti āha.

He said, "By the creeper it was declared."

316.Tatthalatā ca sajjā pavarā accimatī sutāti tāsaṃ nāmaṃ.Ca-saddo samuccayattho.Rājavarassāti catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ varassa seṭṭhassa devarājassa. Sakkassa paricārikāti adhippāyo.Raññoti mahārājassa. Tenāha‘‘vessavaṇassa dhītā’’ti, idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ, vacanavipallāso vā, dhītaroti attho. Rājati vijjotatīti rājī, rājīti matā paññātārājīmatī,idaṃ tāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ visesanaṃ. Nāmameva etaṃ ekissā devatāyāti keci, tesaṃ matena ‘‘pavarā’’ti sabbāsaṃ visesanameva.Dhammaguṇehīti dhammiyehi dhammato anapetehi guṇehi, yathābhuccaguṇehīti attho.Sobhathāti virocatha.

316. There, Latā, Sajjā, Pavarā, Accimatī, Sutā are their names. The word "ca" is in the sense of aggregation. Rājavarassa means the best of the four Great Kings, the excellent Devarāja. The meaning is, an attendant of Sakka. Rañño means of the Great King. Therefore, he said, ‘‘Vessavaṇassa dhītā’’, this should be connected individually, or it is a reversal of words, meaning daughters. One who shines is Rājī, she who is known as Rājī is Rājīmatī, this is a specification of all of them. Some say that this is just the name of one deity, according to their view "Pavarā" is a specification of all. Dhammaguṇehī means with qualities that are righteous, not deviating from the Dhamma, meaning with genuine qualities. Sobhatha means you shine.

317.Pañcettha nāriyoti pañca yathāvuttanāmā devadhītaro ettha imasmiṃ himavantapadese.Sītodakaṃ uppaliniṃ sivaṃ nadinti anotattadahato nikkhantanadimukhaṃ sandhāya vadati.Naccitvā gāyitvāti pitu vessavaṇassa āṇāya devasamāgame tāhi katassa naccagītassa vasena vuttaṃ.Sutā lataṃ bravīti sutā devadhītā lataṃ attano bhaginiṃ kathesi. ‘‘Sutā lataṃ bravu’’ntipi paṭhanti, sutā dhītaro vessavaṇassa mahārājassa lataṃ kathesunti attho.

317. Pañcettha nāriyo means five daughters of deities with names as stated above, here in this Himalayan region. Sītodakaṃ uppaliniṃ sivaṃ nadi means he speaks referring to the river mouth that emerges from Anotatta Lake. Naccitvā gāyitvā means said in terms of the dancing and singing done by them in the assembly of gods by the order of their father, Vessavaṇa. Sutā lataṃ bravī means Sutā, the daughter of a deity, spoke to Latā, her sister. "Sutā lataṃ bravu" is also read, meaning the daughters of the Great King Vessavaṇa spoke to Latā.

318.Timiratambakkhīti niculakesarabhāsasadisehi tambarājīhi samannāgatakkhi.Nabheva sobhaneti nabhaṃ viya sobhamāne, saradasamaye abbhamahikādiupakkilesavimuttaṃ nabhaṃ viya suvisuddhaṅgapaccaṅgatāya virājamāneti attho. Atha vānabhevāti nabhe eva, samuccayattho eva-saddo, ākāsaṭṭhavimānesu himavantayugandharādibhūmipaṭibaddhaṭṭhānesu cāti sabbattheva sobhamāneti attho.Kena katoti kena kīdisena puññena nibbattito.Yasoti parivārasampatti kittisaddo ca. Kittisaddaggahaṇena ca kittisaddahetubhūtā guṇā gayhanti.

318. Timiratambakkhī means with eyes endowed with reddish-brown lines similar to the color of Nicula or Kesara flowers. Nabheva sobhane means shining like the sky, shining with a very pure body and limbs like the sky freed from the defilements of clouds and haze in the autumn season. Or nabhevā means just in the sky, the word "eva" is in the sense of aggregation, meaning shining everywhere, whether in aerial mansions or in places connected to the Himalayan Yugandhara and other lands. Kena kato means by what kind of merit was it produced. Yaso means the prosperity of retinue and the sound of fame. And by grasping the sound of fame, the qualities that are the cause of the sound of fame are grasped.

319.Patino piyatarāti sāmino piyatarā sāmivallabhā. Tenassā subhagataṃ dasseti.Visiṭṭhakalyāṇitarassū rūpatoti rūpasampattiyā visiṭṭhā uttamā kalyāṇitarā sundaratarā,assūti nipātamattaṃ. ‘‘Visiṭṭhakalyāṇitarāsi rūpato’’ti ca paṭhanti.Padakkhiṇāti pakārehi, visesena vā dakkhiṇā kusalā.Naccanagītavāditeti ettha naccanāti vibhattilopo kato, nacce ca gīte ca vādite cāti attho.Naranāripucchitāti devaputtehi devadhītāhi ca ‘‘kahaṃ latā, kiṃ karoti latā’’ti rūpadassanatthañceva sippadassanatthañca pucchitā.

319. Patino piyatarā means more beloved than the master, dear to the husband. Thus he shows her good fortune. Visiṭṭhakalyāṇitarassū rūpato means superior, excellent, more beautiful in terms of beauty, assū is just a particle. "Visiṭṭhakalyāṇitarāsi rūpato" is also read. Padakkhiṇā means skilled in various ways or especially. Naccanagītavādite here, there is a elision of the case ending in naccana, meaning in dance, song and instrumental music. Naranāripucchitā means asked by sons and daughters of gods, "Where is Latā, what is Latā doing?" for the purpose of seeing her beauty and showing her skill.

321.Niccaṃ kāyena asaṃsaṭṭhatāya devo viya rameti, dutiyo varoti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭhabhātā, saha devarenātisadevaraṃ. Sassu ca sasuro ca sasurā, saha sasurehītisassasuraṃ. Saha dāsehi dāsīhi cātisadāsakaṃpatimābhirādhayinti sambandho.Tamhi katoti tamhi kule, kāle vā suṇisākāle kato yaso tannibbattakapuññassa nibbattanenāti adhippāyo.Mamāti idaṃ ‘‘kato’’ti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘mayā’’ti pariṇāmetabbaṃ.

321. Always delights like a god due to non-contact with the body, or the younger brother of the husband is the second husband, with the brother-in-law means sadevaraṃ. Mother-in-law and father-in-law are parents-in-law, with the parents-in-law means sassasuraṃ. With male and female servants means the connection is that she pleases her husband sadāsakaṃ patimābhirādhayanti. Tamhi kato means the fame that was done in that family or time, in the time of being a daughter-in-law, is due to the production of the merit that caused it. Mamā this word should be transformed to "mayā" by expecting the word "kato".

322.Catubbhiṭhānehīti catūhi kāraṇehi, catūsu vā ṭhānesu nimittabhūtesu.Visesamajjhagāti aññāhi atisayaṃ adhigatā.Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhaṃ balañcāti ‘‘catūhi ṭhānehī’’ti vuttānaṃ sarūpato dassanaṃ. Āyuādayo eva hissā aññāhi visiṭṭhasabhāvatāya visesā tassā tathā sambhāvanāvasena gahetabbatāya hetubhāvato ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Visesamajjhagā. Kīdisaṃ? Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhañca balañcāti yojanā.

322. Catubbhiṭhānehī means by four causes, or in four places that are causal. Visesamajjhagā means she attained superiority over others. Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhaṃ balañcā is showing in their own form what was said as "by four causes." Since Āyu, etc., are the causes of her being regarded as superior to others, of her being considered in that way due to her distinct nature, they are also called "ṭhāna". Visesamajjhagā. What kind? The connection is: Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhañca balañca.

323.Sutaṃnu taṃ bhāsati yaṃ ayaṃ latāti ayaṃ latā amhākaṃ jeṭṭhabhaginī yaṃ bhāsati, taṃ tumhehi sutaṃ nu kiṃ asuta’’nti itarā tisso bhaginiyo pucchati.Yaṃ noti yaṃ amhākaṃ saṃsayitaṃ.Noti nipātamattaṃ, punanoti amhākaṃ, avadhāraṇe vā ‘‘na no samaṃ atthī’’tiādīsu (khu. pā. 6.3; su. ni. 226) viya, tena akittayiyeva, aviparītaṃ byākāsiyevāti attho.Patino kiramhākaṃ visiṭṭha nārīnaṃ, gatī ca tāsaṃ pavarā ca devatāti anatthato pālanato patino sāmikā nā amhākaṃ nārīnaṃ itthīnaṃ visiṭṭhā gati ca tāsaṃ paṭisaraṇañca, tāsaṃ mātugāmānaṃ saraṇato pavarā uttamā devatā ca sammadeva ārādhitā sampati āyatiñca hitasukhāvahāti attho.

323. Sutaṃnu taṃ bhāsati yaṃ ayaṃ latā means this Latā, our eldest sister, what she says, have you heard that or not?” the other three sisters ask. Yaṃ no means what we doubted. No is just a particle, again no means for us, or in the sense of determination, like in "na no samaṃ atthi" (Khuddaka Nikāya 6.3; Sutta Nipata 226), therefore she has certainly declared, she has explained without error. Patino kiramhākaṃ visiṭṭha nārīnaṃ, gatī ca tāsaṃ pavarā ca devatā means husbands, from protecting and governing, are indeed superior for us women, and their destiny and divinity are excellent, and the well-worshipped deities are superior from the refuge of those women, and they bring welfare and happiness in the future.

324.Patīsu dhammaṃ pacarāma sabbāti sabbāva mayaṃ patīsu attano sāmikesu pubbuṭṭhānādikaṃ caritabbadhammaṃ pacarāma.Yatthāti yaṃ nimittaṃ, yasmiṃ vā patīsu caritabbadhamme cariyamāneitthiyo patibbatānāmabhavanti. Lacchāmase bhāsati yaṃ ayaṃ latāti ayaṃ latā yaṃ sampattiṃ etarahi labhatīti bhāsati, taṃ sampattiṃpatīsu dhammaṃ pacaritvāti labhissāma.

324. Patīsu dhammaṃ pacarāma sabbā means we all practice the Dhamma towards our husbands, the duties to be performed such as rising early for our husbands. Yatthā means that which is the cause, or when the duties to be performed are practiced towards husbands, women itthiyo patibbatā are called bhavanti. Lacchāmase bhāsati yaṃ ayaṃ latā means we will attain the prosperity that this Latā speaks of as attaining now, patīsu dhammaṃ pacaritvā.

325.Pabbatasānugocaroti pabbatavanasaṇḍacārī.Mahindharaṃ pabbatamāvasitvāti mahiṃ dhāretīti mahindharanāmakaṃ pabbataṃ acalaṃ āvasitvā adhivasitvā, tattha vasantoti attho. ‘‘Āvasitvā’’ti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā bhummatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Pasayhāti abhibhavitvā.Khuddeti balavasenanihīne pamāṇato pana mahante hatthiādikepi mige so hantiyeva.

325. Pabbatasānugocaro means one whose range is the mountain forest thicket. Mahindharaṃ pabbatamāvasitvā means having inhabited, resided on Mahindhara mountain, which bears the earth, and dwelling there. For the word "āvasitvā" is an accusative of location, expecting the word.

326.Tathevāti gāthāya ayaṃ upamāsaṃsandanena saddhiṃ atthayojanā – yathā sīho attano nivāsagocaraṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pabbataṃ nissāya vasanto attano yathicchitamatthaṃ sādheti, evameva sāsaddhāpasannāariyasāvikāghāsacchādanādīhi bharaṇato posanatobhattāraṃ patiṃsāmikaṃnissāyavasantī sabbatthāpi patianukūlatāsaṅkhātena vatena taṃanubbatāparijanādīsu uppajjanakaṃkodhaṃ vadhitvāpajahitvā pariggahavatthūsu uppajjanakaṃmaccheraṃ abhibhuyyaabhibhavitvā anuppādetvā patibbatādhammassa ca upāsikādhammassa ca sammadeva caraṇatodhammacārinī sā saggamhidevalokemodati,pamodaṃ āpajjatīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

326. Tathevā the meaning of this verse is connected with the comparison—just as a lion, relying on the mountain that is his dwelling place, accomplishes his desired purpose, so too that saddhā faithful ariyasāvikā noble female disciple, bhattāraṃ patiṃ relying on her husband, the master, for support and nourishment with food and clothing, nissāya living anubbatā conforming to him in all respects with the vow of being agreeable to her husband, kodhaṃ vadhitvā having slain anger that arises among the retinue, etc., maccheraṃ abhibhuyya having overcome stinginess that arises regarding objects of possession, by not producing it, and by rightly practicing the Dhamma of devotion to her husband and the Dhamma of a female lay follower, dhammacārinī sā saggamhi she, practicing the Dhamma, modati, rejoices in the heavenly world, attains joy. The rest is as previously stated.

Latāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of Latā's Mansion is Finished.

5. Guttilavimānavaṇṇanā
5. Description of Guttila's Mansion

Sattatantiṃ sumadhuranti guttilavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati rājagahe viharante āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gantvā tattha paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitesu chattiṃsāya vimānesu chattiṃsa devadhītaro paccekaṃ accharāsahassaparivārā mahatiṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantiyo disvā tāhi pubbe katakammaṃ ‘‘abhikkantena vaṇṇenā’’tiādīhi tīhi gāthāhi paṭipāṭiyā pucchi. Tāpi tassa pucchānantaraṃ ‘‘vatthuttamadāyikā nārī’’tiādinā byākariṃsu. Atha thero tato manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesi. Taṃ sutvā bhagavā ‘‘moggallāna, tā devatā na kevalaṃ tayā eva pucchitā evaṃ byākariṃsu, atha kho pubbe mayāpi pucchitā evameva byākariṃsū’’ti vatvā therena yācito atītaṃ attano guttilācariyaṃ kathesi.

Sattatantiṃ sumadhuranti refers to Guttila's mansion. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling in Rājagaha, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a divine journey in the manner described below, went to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven and saw thirty-six daughters of deities, each surrounded by a retinue of a thousand nymphs, experiencing great divine prosperity in thirty-six mansions arranged in order, and he asked them about the past deeds they had done with three verses beginning "abhikkantena vaṇṇena". After he asked, they explained with "vatthuttamadāyikā nārī," etc. Then the Elder came from there to the human world and reported this matter to the Blessed One. Having heard that, the Blessed One said, "Moggallāna, those deities were not only asked by you and explained in this way, but indeed they were asked by me in the past and explained in just this way," and having been requested by the Elder, he related his past as Guttila the teacher.

Atīte bārāṇasiyaṃ brahmadatte rajjaṃ kārente bodhisatto gandhabbakule nibbattitvā gandhabbasippe pariyodātasippatāya timbarunāradasadiso sabbadisāsu pākaṭo paññātā ācariyo ahosi nāmena guttilo nāma. So andhe jiṇṇe mātāpitaro posesi. Tassa sippanipphattiṃ sutvā ujjenivāsī musilo nāma gandhabbo upagantvā taṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ ṭhito ‘‘kasmā āgatosī’’ti ca vutte ‘‘tumhākaṃ santike sippaṃ uggaṇhitu’’nti āha. Guttilācariyo taṃ oloketvā lakkhaṇakusalatāya ‘‘ayaṃ puriso visamajjhāsayo kakkhaḷo pharuso akataññū bhavissati, na saṅgahetabbo’’ti sippuggahaṇatthaṃ okāsaṃ nākāsi. So tassa mātāpitaro payirupāsitvā tehi yācāpesi. Guttilācariyo mātāpitūhi nippīḷiyamāno ‘‘garuvacanaṃ alaṅghanīya’’nti tassa sippaṃ paṭṭhapetvā vigatamacchariyatāya kāruṇikatāya ca ācariyamuṭṭhiṃ akatvā anavasesato sippaṃ sikkhāpesi.

In the past, when Brahmadatta was reigning in Bārāṇasī, the Bodhisatta was born into a musicians' family and became an expert in music, as skilled as Timburu and Nārada, famous and known in all directions, named Guttila. He supported his blind, aged parents. Having heard of his musical skill, a musician named Musila, a resident of Ujjenī, approached him, paid homage, and stood to one side. When asked, "Why have you come?" he said, "To learn music from you." Guttila the teacher looked at him and, skilled in discerning character, thought, "This man will be crooked, harsh, rough, and ungrateful; he should not be associated with," and did not give him the opportunity to learn music. He attended to his parents and made them plead. Guttila the teacher, being pressed by his parents, thinking, "The word of elders is not to be transgressed," started teaching him music, and without any jealousy and with compassion, he taught him music completely, without keeping anything secret in the teacher's fist.

Sopi medhāvitāya pubbekataparicayatāya akusītatāya ca na cirasseva pariyodātasippo hutvā cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ bārāṇasī jambudīpe agganagaraṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ idha sarājikāya parisāya sippaṃ dasseyyaṃ, evāhaṃ ācariyatopi jambudīpe pākaṭo paññāto bhavissāmī’’ti. So ācariyassa ārocesi ‘‘ahaṃ rañño purato sippaṃ dassetukāmo, rājānaṃ maṃ dassethā’’ti. Mahāsatto ‘‘ayaṃ mama santike uggahitasippo patiṭṭhaṃ labhatū’’ti karuṇāyamāno taṃ rañño santikaṃ netvā ‘‘mahārāja imassa me antevāsikassa vīṇāya paguṇataṃ passathā’’ti āha. Rājā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā tassa vīṇāvādanaṃ sutvā parituṭṭho taṃ gantukāmaṃ nivāretvā ‘‘mameva santike vasa, ācariyassa dinnakoṭṭhāsato upaḍḍhaṃ dassāmī’’ti āha. Musilo ‘‘nāhaṃ ācariyato hāyāmi, samameva dethā’’ti vatvā raññā ‘‘mā evaṃ bhaṇi, ācariyo nāma mahanto, upaḍḍhameva tuyhaṃ dassāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘mama ca ācariyassa ca sippaṃ passathā’’ti vatvā rājagehato nikkhamitvā ‘‘ito sattame divase mama ca guttilācariyassa ca rājaṅgaṇe sippadassanaṃ bhavissati, taṃ passitukāmā passantū’’ti tattha tattha āhiṇḍanto ugghosesi.

He too, due to his intelligence, past familiarity, and diligence, soon became an expert in music and thought, "This Bārāṇasī is the foremost city in Jambudīpa; why don't I show my skill to the assembly including the king? Thus, I will become famous and known in Jambudīpa, even more than my teacher." He announced to his teacher, "I want to show my skill in front of the king; please introduce me to the king." The Great Being, feeling compassion, thinking, "May this disciple of mine, who has learned skill from me, gain a footing," took him to the king and said, "Great King, see the proficiency of this disciple of mine on the lute." The king, having agreed with "Good," listened to his lute playing and, being pleased, prevented him from leaving and said, "Stay with me; I will give you half of the share given to your teacher." Musila, saying, "I am not inferior to my teacher; give it equally," and being told by the king, "Do not speak thus; the teacher is great; I will only give half to you," said, "See the skill of both me and my teacher," and left the royal palace, proclaiming as he wandered here and there, "On the seventh day from now, there will be a display of skill by me and Guttila the teacher in the royal courtyard; those who wish to see it may come."

Mahāsatto taṃ sutvā ‘‘ayaṃ taruṇo thāmavā, ahaṃ pana jiṇṇo dubbalo, yadi pana me parājayo bhaveyya, mataṃ me jīvitā seyyaṃ, tasmā araññaṃ pavisitvā ubbandhitvā marissāmī’’ti araññaṃ gato maraṇabhayatajjito paṭinivatti. Puna maritukāmo hutvā gantvā punapi maraṇabhayena paṭinivatti. Evaṃ gamanāgamanaṃ karontassa taṃ ṭhānaṃ vigatatiṇaṃ ahosi. Atha devarājā mahāsattaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dissamānarūpo ākāse ṭhatvā evamāha ‘‘ācariya, kiṃ karosī’’ti. Mahāsatto –

Having heard that, the Great Being thought, "This young man is strong, but I am old and weak; if I were to be defeated, death would be better for me than life; therefore, I will enter the forest and hang myself," and went into the forest, terrified by the fear of death, and returned. Again, intending to die, he went and again returned, frightened by the fear of death. As he was going back and forth in this way, that place became devoid of grass. Then the Devarāja approached the Great Being, stood in the sky in a visible form, and said, "Teacher, what are you doing?" The Great Being—

327.

327.

‘‘Sattatantiṃ sumadhuraṃ, rāmaṇeyyaṃ avācayiṃ;

"I taught the sweet-sounding lute with its seven strings, which is delightful;
He challenges me in the arena, be my refuge, Kosiya." –

Attano cittadukkhaṃ pavedesi.

Expressed his mental anguish.

sattatantiṃ,taṃ visayaṃ katvā yathārahaṃ dvāvīsatiyā sutibhedānaṃ ahāpanato suṭṭhu madhurantisumadhuraṃ,yathādhigatānaṃ samapaññāsāya mucchanānaṃ paribyattatāya sarassa ca vīṇāya ca aññamaññasaṃsandanena suṇantānaṃ ativiya manoramabhāvatorāmaṇeyyaṃ,saragatādivibhāgato chajjādicatubbidhaṃ gandhabbaṃ ahāpetvā gandhabbasippaṃavācayinti vācesiṃ uggaṇhāpesiṃ sikkhāpesiṃ.Somusilo antevāsī samānomaṃattano ācariyaṃraṅgamhiraṅgamaṇḍaleavhetisārambhavasena attano visesaṃ dassetuṃ saṅghaṭṭiyati, ‘‘ehi sippaṃ dassehī’’ti maṃ ācikkhi, tassametvaṃkosiyadevarājasaraṇaṃavassayohohīti.

sattatantiṃ, having made that the object, sumadhuraṃ, very sweet, because of the non-loss of the twenty-two kinds of intonations as appropriate, rāmaṇeyyaṃ, delightful, because of the great delightfulness to those who hear due to the equal expertise of the fifty mucchanās and the mutual blending of the sound and the lute, avācayi means I taught, caused to learn, taught, having not lost the fourfold Gandhabba, Chajjādi, due to the division of musical notes etc., I taught the Gandhabba art.So Musila, being a resident pupil, maṃ his teacher raṅgamhi in the arena avheti contends to show his specialty with the force of anger, ‘‘come show your skill’’ he called to me. May me you kosiya Devarāja be saraṇaṃ refuge.hohī.

Taṃ sutvā sakko devarājā ‘‘mā bhāyi ācariya, ahaṃ te saraṇaṃ parāyaṇa’’nti dassento –

Having heard that, Sakka, the Devarāja, showing that "I am your refuge and ultimate resort,"—

328.

328.

‘‘Ahaṃ te saraṇaṃ homi, ahamācariyapūjako;

"I will be your refuge, I am a worshiper of teachers;
The student will not conquer you, you will conquer the student, teacher." –

‘‘ahamācariyapūjako’’ti. Ahaṃ ācariyānaṃ pūjako, na musilo viya yugaggāhī, mādisesu antevāsikesu ṭhitesu tādisassa ācariyassa kathaṃ parājayo, tasmā na taṃ jayissati sisso, aññadatthu sissaṃ musilaṃ ācariya tvameva jayissasi, so pana parājito vināsaṃ pāpuṇissatīti adhippāyo. Evañca pana vatvā ‘‘ahaṃ sattame divase sākacchāmaṇḍalaṃ āgamissāmi, tumhe vissatthā vādethā’’ti samassāsetvā gato.

"I am a worshipper of teachers." I am a worshipper of teachers, not like Musila, a mere repeater of texts; when such disciples as I remain, how can there be defeat for such a teacher? Therefore, that disciple will not win; rather, you, the teacher, will defeat the disciple Musila; but he, being defeated, will meet destruction. Such was his intention. And having spoken thus, he reassured them, saying, "On the seventh day, I will come to the discussion pavilion; you may argue confidently," and then he departed.

Sattame pana divase rājā saparivāro rājasabhāyaṃ nisīdi. Guttilācariyo ca musilo ca sippadassanatthaṃ sajjā hutvā upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṃ vanditvā attano attano laddhāsane nisīditvā vīṇā vādayiṃsu. Sakko āgantvā antalikkhe aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ mahāsattova passati, itare pana na passanti. Parisā dvinnampi vādane samacittā ahosi. Sakko guttilaṃ ‘‘ekaṃ tantiṃ chindā’’ti āha. Chinnāyapi tantiyā vīṇā tatheva madhuranigghosā ahosi. Evaṃ ‘‘dutiyaṃ, tatiyaṃ, catutthaṃ, pañcamaṃ, chaṭṭhaṃ, sattamaṃ chindā’’ti āha, tāsu chinnāsupi vīṇā madhuranigghosāva ahosi. Taṃ disvā musilo parājitabhūtarūpo pattakkhandho ahosi, parisā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā celukkhepe karontī guttilassa sādhukāramadāsi. Rājā musilaṃ sabhāya nīharāpesi, mahājano leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paharanto musilaṃ tattheva jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpesi.

On the seventh day, the king, with his retinue, sat in the royal assembly. Guttila the teacher and Musila, adorned for the display of skill, approached, paid homage to the king, and sat down on the seats prepared for them and played their lutes. Sakka came and stood in the sky. Only the great being saw him, but the others did not. The assembly was of one mind in appreciating the playing of both. Sakka said to Guttila, "Cut one string." Even with the string cut, the lute remained with a sweet sound. Thus he said, "Cut the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh," and even with those cut, the lute remained sweetly resonant. Seeing this, Musila, defeated and dejected, was utterly cast down. The assembly, delighted and pleased, shouting and waving their garments, gave praise to Guttila. The king had Musila driven out of the assembly, and the great crowd, striking him with sticks and clubs, caused Musila to meet his end right there.

Sakko devānamindo mahāpurisena saddhiṃ sammodanīyaṃ katvā devalokameva gato. Taṃ devatā ‘‘mahārāja, kuhiṃ gatatthā’’ti pucchitvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā ‘‘mahārāja, mayaṃ guttilācariyaṃ passissāma, sādhu no taṃ idhānetvā dassehī’’ti āhaṃsu. Sakko devānaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā mātaliṃ āṇāpesi ‘‘gaccha vejayantarathena amhākaṃ guttilācariyaṃ ānehi, devatā taṃ dassanakāmā’’ti, so tathā akāsi. Sakko mahāsattena saddhiṃ sammodanīyaṃ katvā evamāha ‘‘ācariya, vīṇaṃ vādaya, devatā sotukāmā’’ti. ‘‘Mayaṃ sippūpajīvino, vetanena vinā sippaṃ na dassemā’’ti. ‘‘Kīdisaṃ pana vetanaṃ icchasī’’ti. ‘‘Nāññena me vetanena kiccaṃ atthi, imāsaṃ pana devatānaṃ attanā attanā pubbekatakusalakathanameva me vetanaṃ hotū’’ti āha. Tā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchiṃsu. Atha mahāsatto pāṭekkaṃ tāhi tadā paṭiladdhasampattikittanamukhena tassā hetubhūtaṃ purimattabhāve kataṃ sucaritaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno viya pucchanto ‘‘abhikkantena vaṇṇenā’’tiādigāthāhi pucchi. Tāpi ‘‘vatthuttamadāyikā nārī’’tiādinā yathā etarahi therassa, evameva tassa byākariṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘moggallāna tā devatā na kevalaṃ tayā eva pucchitā evaṃ byākariṃsu, atha kho pubbe mayāpi pucchitā evameva byākariṃsū’’ti.

Sakka, the king of the gods, after exchanging greetings with the great being, went to the world of the gods. The deities, having asked, "Great king, where did you go?", and having heard that account, said, "Great king, we wish to see Guttila the teacher; please bring him here and show him to us." Sakka, hearing the words of the gods, commanded Mātali, saying, "Go with the Vejayanta chariot and bring our Guttila the teacher; the deities wish to see him." And he did so. Sakka, having exchanged greetings with the great being, said thus: "Teacher, play the lute; the deities wish to hear it." "We live by our skill, and we do not display our skill without payment." "What kind of payment do you desire?" "I have no need for any other payment; let my payment be the recounting by each of these deities of the meritorious deeds they performed in the past." They agreed, saying, "Good." Then the great being, like the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, asking each of them individually about the possessions they had then obtained, through the fame of their deeds, inquired with verses beginning "With surpassing beauty." They, too, explained to him, just as they do to the Elder now, beginning with "A woman who gave excellent cloth." Therefore, it was said, "Moggallāna, not only were those deities questioned by you and did they explain thus, but formerly they were also questioned by me, and they explained in just the same way."

Tā kira itthiyo kassapasammāsambuddhakāle manussattabhāve ṭhitā taṃ taṃ puññaṃ akaṃsu. Tattha ekā itthī vatthaṃ adāsi, ekā sumanamālaṃ, ekā gandhaṃ, ekā uḷārāni phalāni, ekā ucchurasaṃ, ekā bhagavato cetiye gandhapañcaṅgulikaṃ adāsi, ekā uposathaṃ upavasi, ekā upakaṭṭhāya velāya nāvāya bhuñjantassa bhikkhuno udakaṃ adāsi, ekā kodhanānaṃ sassusasurānaṃ akkodhanā upaṭṭhānaṃ akāsi, ekā dāsī hutvā atanditācārā ahosi, eko piṇḍacārikassa bhikkhuno khīrabhattaṃ adāsi, ekā phāṇitaṃ adāsi, ekā ucchukhaṇḍaṃ adāsi, ekā timbarusakaṃ adāsi, ekā kakkārikaṃ adāsi, ekā eḷālukaṃ adāsi, ekā valliphalaṃ adāsi, ekā phārusakaṃ adāsi, ekā aṅgārakapallaṃ adāsi, ekā sākamuṭṭhiṃ adāsi, ekā pupphakamuṭṭhiṃ adāsi, ekā mūlakalāpaṃ adāsi, ekā nimbamuṭṭhiṃ adāsi, ekā kañjikaṃ adāsi, ekā tilapiññākaṃ adāsi, ekā kāyabandhanaṃ adāsi, ekā aṃsabaddhakaṃ adāsi, ekā āyogapaṭṭaṃ adāsi, ekā vidhūpanaṃ, ekā tālavaṇṭaṃ, ekā morahatthaṃ, ekā chattaṃ, ekā upāhanaṃ, ekā pūvaṃ, ekā modakaṃ, ekā sakkhalikaṃ adāsi. Tā ekekā accharāsahassaparivārā pahatiyā deviddhiyā virājamānā tāvatiṃsabhavane sakkassa devarājassa paricārikā hutvā nibbattā guttilācariyena pucchitā ‘‘vatthuttamadāyikā nārī’’tiādinā attanā attanā katakusalaṃ paṭipāṭiyā byākariṃsu.

It is said that those women, while living as humans in the time of Kassapa Sammāsambuddha, performed various meritorious deeds. There, one woman gave cloth, one a garland of jasmine, one perfume, one excellent fruits, one sugarcane juice, one applied a fragrant five-fingered mark on the Buddha's shrine, one observed the uposatha, one at a landing place gave water to a bhikkhu who was eating in a boat, one without anger attended to a harsh mother-in-law and father-in-law, one as a servant was diligent in conduct, one gave milk-rice to a bhikkhu who was going for alms, one gave molasses, one gave a piece of sugarcane, one gave timbarusaka fruit, one gave kakkārika fruit, one gave eḷāluka fruit, one gave valliphala fruit, one gave phārusaka fruit, one gave a charcoal fragment, one gave a handful of greens, one gave a handful of flowers, one gave a bunch of radishes, one gave a handful of neem leaves, one gave kañjika, one gave sesame oil-cake, one gave a waistband, one gave a shoulder strap, one gave a girdle, one gave a fan, one gave a palm leaf fan, one gave a peacock fan, one gave an umbrella, one gave sandals, one gave a cake, one gave a sweet ball, one gave sakkhalika. They, each surrounded by a thousand nymphs, shining with divine power, were born as attendants to Sakka, the king of the gods, in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and when asked by Guttila the teacher, they explained in order their meritorious deeds, beginning with "A woman who gave excellent cloth."

329.

329.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity;
Illuminating all directions, like a medicinal herb, a star.

330.

330.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such beauty yours? By what does this prosper for you?
And do those enjoyments arise for you, whatever is dear to the mind?

331.

331.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ devi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, goddess of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what are you so radiant with power? And your beauty shines in all directions?"

332.

332.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā, moggallānena pucchitā;

"That goddess, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna;
Asked a question, she explained, the fruit of which action is this."

333.

333.

‘‘Vatthuttamadāyikā nārī, pavarā hoti naresu nārīsu;

"A woman who gives excellent cloth, is supreme among women and among humans;
Thus, giving what is dear and pleasing, she obtains a divine station upon arrival.

334.

334.

‘‘Tassā me passa vimānaṃ, accharā kāmavaṇṇinīhamasmi;

"Behold my mansion, I am a nymph, a charmer of desire;
Of a thousand nymphs, I am the best, behold the result of merit.

335.

335.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that is such beauty mine, by that does this prosper for me;
And do those enjoyments arise for me, whatever is dear to the mind.

336.

336.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūtā yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I declare to you, bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did when I was a human being;
By that am I so radiant with power, and my beauty shines in all directions."

(Yathā ca ettha, evaṃ upari sabbavimānesu vitthāretabbaṃ.)

(And just as here, so too, it should be expanded in all the above mansions.)

341.

341.

‘‘Pupphuttamadāyikā nārī, pavarā hoti naresu nārīsu…pe….

"A woman who gives excellent flowers, is supreme among women and among humans…pe….

349.

349.

‘‘Gandhuttamadāyikā nārī, pavarā hoti naresu nārīsu…pe….

"A woman who gives excellent perfume, is supreme among women and among humans…pe….

357.

357.

‘‘Phaluttamadāyikā nārī…pe….

"A woman who gives excellent fruit…pe….

365.

365.

‘‘Rasuttamadāyikā nārī…pe….

"A woman who gives excellent flavor…pe….

373.

373.

‘‘Gandhapañcaṅgulikaṃ ahamadāsiṃ,kassapassa bhagavato thūpamhi…pe….

"I gave a fragrant five-fingered mark, at the stupa of Kassapa, the Blessed One…pe….

381.

381.

‘‘Bhikkhū ca ahaṃ bhikkhuniyo ca, addasāsiṃ panthapaṭipanne;

"I saw bhikkhus and bhikkhunīs, who were on the path;
Having heard their Dhamma, I observed the one-day uposatha.

382.

382.

‘‘Tassā me passa vimānaṃ…pe….

"Behold my mansion…pe….

389.

389.

‘‘Udake ṭhitā udakamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno cittena vippasannena…pe….

"Standing in the water, I gave water, to a bhikkhu with a serene mind…pe….

397.

397.

‘‘Sassuñcāhaṃ sasurañca, caṇḍike kodhane ca pharuse ca;

"Both my mother-in-law and father-in-law, were fierce, angry, and harsh;
Without envy, I attended to them, diligently with my own virtue…pe….

405.

405.

‘‘Parakammakarī āsiṃ, atthenātanditā dāsī;

"I was a hired worker, a servant diligent in purpose;
Without anger, without conceit, sharing a portion of the gruel…pe….

413.

413.

‘‘Khīrodanaṃ ahamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno piṇḍāya carantassa;

"I gave milk-rice, to a bhikkhu going for alms;
Having done this deed, I rejoice, having attained a good destination…pe….

421.

421.

‘‘Phāṇitaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave molasses…pe….

429.

429.

‘‘Ucchukhaṇḍikaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave a piece of sugarcane…pe….

437.

437.

‘‘Timbarusakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave timbarusaka fruit…pe….

445.

445.

‘‘Kakkārikaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave kakkārika fruit…pe….

453.

453.

‘‘Eḷālukaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave eḷāluka fruit…pe….

461.

461.

‘‘Valliphalaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave valliphala fruit…pe….

469.

469.

‘‘Phārusakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave phārusaka fruit…pe….

477.

477.

‘‘Hatthappatāpakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave a hand warmer…pe….

485.

485.

‘‘Sākamuṭṭhiṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave a handful of greens…pe….

493.

493.

‘‘Pupphakamuṭṭhiṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave a handful of flowers…pe….

501.

501.

‘‘Mūlakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

"I gave a radish…pe….

509.‘‘Nimbamuṭṭhiṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

509."I gave a handful of neem leaves…pe….

517.‘‘Ambakañjikaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

517."I gave mango kañjika…pe….

525.‘‘Doṇinimmajjaniṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

525."I gave a trough-cleaner…pe….

533.‘‘Kāyabandhanaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

533."I gave a waistband…pe….

541.‘‘Aṃsabaddhakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

541."I gave a shoulder strap…pe….

549.‘‘Āyogapaṭṭaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

549."I gave a girdle…pe….

557.‘‘Vidhūpanaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

557."I gave a fan…pe….

565.‘‘Tālavaṇṭaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

565."I gave a palm leaf fan…pe….

573.‘‘Morahatthaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

573."I gave a peacock fan…pe….

581.‘‘Chattaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

581."I gave an umbrella…pe….

589.‘‘Upāhanaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

589."I gave sandals…pe….

597.‘‘Pūvaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

597."I gave a cake…pe….

605.‘‘Modakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ…pe….

605."I gave a sweet ball…pe….

613.‘‘Sakkhalikaṃ ahamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno piṇḍāya carantassa…pe….

613."I gave sakkhalika, to a bhikkhu going for alms…pe….

614.

614.

‘‘Tassā me passa vimānaṃ, accharā kāmavaṇṇinīhamasmiṃ;

"Behold my mansion, I am a nymph, a charmer of desire;
Of a thousand nymphs, I am the best, behold the result of merit.

615.‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

615."By that is such beauty mine…pe… and my beauty shines in all directions."

Evaṃ mahāsatto tāhi devatāhi katasucarite byākate tuṭṭhamānaso sammodanaṃ karonto attano ca sucaritacaraṇe yuttapayuttataṃ vivaṭṭajjhāsayatañca pavedento āha –

Thus, when the good conduct done by those deities was explained, the great being, with a delighted mind, making rejoicings, revealing his own diligence and application in the practice of good conduct and his straightforward intention, said:

617.

617.

‘‘Svāgataṃ vata me ajja, suppabhātaṃ suhuṭṭhitaṃ;

"Welcome indeed is it to me today, a good dawn, a good rising;
That I have seen goddesses, nymphs, charmers of desire.

618.

618.

‘‘Imāsāhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā, kāhāmi kusalaṃ bahuṃ;

"Having heard their Dhamma, I will do much good;
By giving, by even conduct, by restraint, and by self-control;
I shall go there, where having gone, they do not grieve."

333.Tatthavatthuttamadāyikāti vatthānaṃ uttamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, vatthesu vā bahūsu uccinitvā gahitaṃ ukkaṃsagataṃ pavaraṃ koṭibhūtaṃ vatthaṃ vatthuttamaṃ, tassa dāyikā. ‘‘Pupphuttamadāyikā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo.Piyarūpadāyikāti piyasabhāvassa piyajātikassa ca vatthuno dāyikā.Manāpanti manavaḍḍhanakaṃ.Dibbanti divi bhavattā dibbaṃ.Upeccāti upagantvā cetetvā, ‘‘edisaṃ labheyya’’nti pakappetvāti attho.Ṭhānanti vimānādikaṃ ṭhānaṃ, issariyaṃ vā. ‘‘Manāpā’’tipi pāṭho, aññesaṃ manavaḍḍhanakā hutvāti attho.

333. There, vatthuttamadāyikā means the best or most excellent of cloths, or among many cloths, having chosen and taken the most prominent, the foremost, the finest cloth, she is the giver of that best cloth. The same method applies to "pupphuttamadāyikā," etc. Piyarūpadāyikā means the giver of an object that is pleasing in nature and kind. Manāpaṃ means delighting the mind. Dibbaṃ means divine, being in heaven. Upecca means having approached, having intended, meaning having planned "may I obtain such." Ṭhānaṃ means a place, such as a mansion, or sovereignty. "Manāpā" is also a reading, meaning being delightful to the minds of others.

334.Passa puññānaṃ vipākanti vatthuttamadānassa nāma idamīdisaṃ phalaṃ passāti attanā laddhasampattiṃ sambhāventī vadati.

334. Passa puññānaṃ vipākaṃ means, "Behold, such is the fruit of giving the best cloth," she speaks, extolling the prosperity she has obtained through her own merit.

341.Pupphuttamadāyikāti ratanattayapūjāvasena pupphuttamadāyikā, tathā gandhuttamadāyikāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha pupphuttamaṃ sumanapupphādi, gandhuttamaṃ candanagandhādi, phaluttamaṃ panasaphalādi, rasuttamaṃ gorasasappiādi veditabbaṃ.

341. Pupphuttamadāyikā means the giver of the best flowers in the manner of worshiping the Triple Gem; similarly, gandhuttamadāyikā should be understood. There, the best of flowers means jasmine flowers, etc., the best of perfumes means sandalwood perfume, etc., the best of fruits means jackfruit, etc., and the best of flavors should be understood as ghee, etc., derived from cow products.

373.Gandhapañcaṅgulikanti gandhena pañcaṅgulikadānaṃ.Kassapassa bhagavato thūpamhīti kassapasammāsambuddhassa yojanike kanakathūpe.

373. Gandhapañcaṅgulikaṃ means the giving of a five-fingered mark with perfume. Kassapassa bhagavato thūpamhi means at the yojanika golden shrine of Kassapa Sammāsambuddha.

381.Panthapaṭipanneti maggaṃ gacchante.Ekūposathanti ekadivasaṃ uposathavāsaṃ.

381. Panthapaṭipanne means going on the road. Ekūposathaṃ means a one-day observance of the uposatha.

389.Udakamadāsinti mukhavikkhālanatthaṃ pivanatthañca udakaṃ pānīyaṃ adāsiṃ.

389. Udakamadāsi means I gave water, drinking water, for washing the face and for drinking.

397.Caṇḍiketi caṇḍe.Anusūyikāti usūyā rahitā.

397. Caṇḍike means fierce. Anusūyikā means without envy.

405.Parakammakarīti paresaṃ veyyāvaccakārinī.Atthenāti atthakiccena.Saṃvibhāginī sakassa bhāgassāti atthikānaṃ attanā paṭiladdhabhāgassa saṃvibhajanasīlā.

405. Parakammakarī means one who does service for others. Atthenā means with a matter or business. Saṃvibhāginī sakassa bhāgassā means habitually sharing her own received portion with those in need.

413.Khīrodananti khīrasammissaṃ odanaṃ, khīrena saddhiṃ odanaṃ vā.

413. Khīrodana means rice mixed with milk, or rice together with milk.

437.Timbarusakanti tiṇḍukaphalaṃ. Tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarusaṃ, tassa phalaṃ timbarusakanti vadanti.

437. Timbarusaka means the fruit of the tiṇḍuka tree. They say timbarusa is a type of creeper similar to tipusa, and timbarusaka is its fruit.

445.Kakkārikanti khuddakeḷālukaṃ, tipusanti ca vadanti.

445. Kakkārika means small cucumbers, also called tipusa.

477.Hatthappatāpakanti mandāmukhiṃ.

477. Hatthappatāpaka means dim-witted.

517.Ambakañjikanti ambilakañjikaṃ.

517. Ambakañjika means sour gruel.

525.Doṇinimmajjaninti satelaṃ tilapiññākaṃ.

525. Doṇinimmajjani means sesame oil cake with oil.

557.Vidhūpananti caturassabījaniṃ.

557. Vidhūpana means a square fan.

565.Tālavaṇṭanti tālapattehi katamaṇḍalabījaniṃ.

565. Tālavaṇṭa means a circular fan made of palm leaves.

573.Morahatthanti mayūrapiñche hi kataṃ makasabījaniṃ.

573. Morahattha means a fly whisk made of peacock feathers.

617.Svāgataṃvata meti mayhaṃ idhāgamanaṃ sobhanaṃ vata aho sundaraṃ.Ajja suppabhātaṃsuhuṭṭhitanti ajja mayhaṃ rattiyā suṭṭhu pabhātaṃ sammadeva vibhāyanaṃ jātaṃ, sayanato uṭṭhānampi suhuṭṭhitaṃ suṭṭhu uṭṭhitaṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇāti āha‘‘yaṃ addasāmi devatāyo’’tiādi.

617. Svāgataṃ vata me means, "Indeed, my coming here is auspicious, how wonderful!" Ajja suppabhātaṃ suhuṭṭhita means, "Today, the dawn has broken well for me, the day has indeed dawned, and my rising from bed has been well done, excellently risen." He says the reason is ‘‘yaṃ addasāmi devatāyo’’tiādi, "because I saw the goddesses," and so on.

618.Dhammaṃ sutvāti kammaphalassa paccakkhakaraṇavasena tumhehi kataṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā.Kāhāmīti karissāmi.Samacariyāyāti kāyasamācārikassa sucaritassa caraṇena.Saññamenāti sīlasaṃvarena.Damenāti manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ damena. Idāni tassa kusalassa attano lokassa ca vivaṭṭūpanissayataṃ dassetuṃ‘‘svāhaṃ tattha gamissāmi, yattha gantvā na socare’’ti vuttaṃ.

618. Dhammaṃ sutvā means having heard the Dhamma, the wholesome deeds done by you, through the realization of the fruits of kamma. Kāhāmī means I will do. Samacariyāyā means by conduct of good bodily behavior. Saññamenā means by the restraint of morality (sīla). Damenā means by the taming of the six senses, including the mind. Now, to show that this wholesome deed is a condition for the opening up of his own world, it is said, ‘‘svāhaṃ tattha gamissāmi, yattha gantvā na socare’’, "I shall go there, where having gone, they do not grieve."

Evamayaṃ yadipi vatthuttamadāyikāvimānādivasena chattiṃsavimānasaṅgahā desanā āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa viya guttilācariyassāpi vibhāvanavasena pavattāti ‘‘guttilavimāna’’ntveva saṅgahaṃ āruḷhā, vimānāni pana itthipaṭibaddhānīti itthivimāneyeva saṅgahitāni. Tā pana itthiyo kassapassa dasabalassa kāle yathāvuttadhammacaraṇe aparāparuppannacetanāvasena dutiyattabhāvato paṭṭhāya ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devaloke eva saṃsarantiyo amhākampi bhagavato kāle tāvatiṃsabhavaneyeva nibbattā, āyasmatā mahāmoggallānena pucchitā kammasarikkhatāya guttilācariyena pucchitakāle viya byākariṃsūti daṭṭhabbā.

Thus, although this collection of thirty-six Vimanavatthu stories is a discourse that originated from Vimanavatthu stories which bestow the best of objects, like Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna, it also occurred through the differentiating efforts of Acariya Guttila, and is therefore included as the "Guttila Vimāna". However, since the Vimanavatthu stories are related to women, they are included only as women's Vimanavatthu stories. These women, in the time of Kassapa, the Ten-Powered One, from their second existence onwards, due to their diverse and continuous intentions in the practice of the Dhamma as mentioned, wandered in the deva-world for the duration of one Buddha-interval (buddhantara), and in the time of our Blessed One, they were reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa realm. Questioned by Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna, they explained according to the similarity of their kamma, just as they had when questioned by Acariya Guttila, so it should be seen.

Guttilavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Guttila Vimāna is finished.

6. Daddallavimānavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Daddalla Vimāna

Daddallamānāvaṇṇenāti daddallavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena nālakagāmake āyasmato revatattherassa upaṭṭhākassa aññatarassa kuṭumbikassa dve dhītaro ahesuṃ, ekā bhaddā nāma, itarā subhaddā nāma. Tāsu bhaddā patikulaṃ gatā saddhā pasannā buddhisampannā vañjhā ca ahosi. Sā sāmikaṃ āha ‘‘mama kaniṭṭhā subhaddā nāma atthi, taṃ ānehi, sacassā putto bhaveyya, so mamapi putto siyā, ayañca kulavaṃso na nasseyyā’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā tathā akāsi.

Daddallamānā vaṇṇenāti means the Daddalla Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi in Jeta's Grove. At that time, in the village of Nālakagāma, there were two daughters of a certain householder who was an attendant of Āyasmā Revata Thera, one named Bhaddā, and the other named Subhaddā. Among them, Bhaddā went to her husband's family and was faithful, devoted, intelligent, and barren. She said to her husband, "I have a younger sister named Subhaddā. Bring her here. If she has a son, he will also be my son, and this family line will not be lost." He agreed, saying "Good," and did so.

Atha bhaddā subhaddaṃ ovadi ‘‘subhadde, dānasaṃvibhāgaratā dhammacariyāya appamattā hohi, evaṃ te diṭṭhadhammiko samparāyiko ca attho hatthagato eva hotī’’ti. Sā tassā ovāde ṭhatvā vuttanayena paṭipajjamānā ekadivasaṃ āyasmantaṃ revatattheraṃ attaṭṭhamaṃ nimantesi. Thero subhaddāya puññūpacayaṃ ākaṅkhanto saṅghuddesavasena satta bhikkhū gahetvā tassā gehaṃ agamāsi. Sā pasannacittā āyasmantaṃ revatattheraṃ te ca bhikkhū paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi, thero anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā nimmānaratīnaṃ devānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajji. Bhaddā pana puggalesu dānāni datvā sakkassa devānamindassa paricārikā hutvā nibbatti.

Then Bhaddā advised Subhaddā, "Subhaddā, be devoted to giving and sharing, and be diligent in the practice of the Dhamma. In this way, both your visible and future welfare will certainly be in your grasp." She, abiding by her advice and practicing as stated, one day invited Āyasmā Revata Thera along with seven other monks as the eighth, for a meal. The Thera, desiring an accumulation of merit for Subhaddā, took seven monks in accordance with the procedure for a Sangha-offering and went to her house. With a delighted mind, she satisfied Āyasmā Revata Thera and those monks with delicious foods and edibles offered with her own hands. The Thera gave thanks and departed. Later, she passed away and was reborn in the company of the Nimmānarati devas. Bhaddā, on the other hand, gave alms to individuals and was reborn as an attendant of Sakka, the King of the Devas.

Atha subhaddā attano sampattiṃ paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kena nu kho ahaṃ puññena idhūpapannā’’ti āvajjentī ‘‘bhaddāya ovāde ṭhatvā saṅghagatāya dakkhiṇāya imaṃ sampattiṃ sampattā, bhaddā nu kho kahaṃ nibbattā’’ti olokentī taṃ sakkassa paricārikābhāvena nibbattaṃ disvā anukampamānā tassā vimānaṃ pāvisi. Atha naṃ bhaddā –

Then Subhaddā, reflecting on her own prosperity and considering, "By what merit have I been reborn here?" saw that "Having stood by Bhaddā's advice, I attained this prosperity by the offering to the Sangha. Where has Bhaddā been reborn?" Looking around, she saw her reborn as an attendant of Sakka, and out of compassion, she entered her Vimanavatthu. Then Bhaddā (said to her):

619.

619.

‘‘Daddallamānā vaṇṇena, yasasā ca yasassinī;

"Shining with beauty, and glorious with fame;
Among all the Tāvatiṃsa devas, you outshine them in beauty.

620.

620.

‘‘Dassanaṃ nābhijānāmi, idaṃ paṭhamadassanaṃ;

"I do not recognize your appearance, this is the first time I see you;
From which realm have you come, that you call me by name?" –

Dvīhi gāthāhi pucchi. Sāpi tassā –

She asked with two verses. She (Subhaddā) replied to her:

621.

621.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadde subhaddāsiṃ, pubbe mānusake bhave;

"I, Bhaddā, was Subhaddā, formerly in the human realm;
I was your co-wife, and also your younger sister.

622.

622.

‘‘Sā ahaṃ kāyassa bhedā, vippamuttā tato cutā;

"Having broken up my body, freed from there, having passed away;
I have been reborn in the company of the Nimmānarati devas." – she explained with two verses.

619-20.Tatthavaṇṇenāti vaṇṇādisampattiyā.Dassanaṃ nābhijānāmīti ito pubbe tava dassanaṃ nābhijānāmi, tvaṃ mayā na diṭṭhapubbāti attho. Tenāha‘‘idaṃ paṭhamadassana’’nti. Kasmā kāyā nu āgamma, nāmena bhāsase mamanti kataradevanikāyato āgantvā ‘‘bhadde’’ti nāmena maṃ ālapasi.

619-20. There, vaṇṇenā means with the accomplishment of beauty, etc. Dassanaṃ nābhijānāmī means, "I do not recognize your appearance from before; you have not been seen by me before," is the meaning. Therefore, she says ‘‘idaṃ paṭhamadassana’’nti, "this is the first time I see you." Kasmā kāyā nu āgamma, nāmena bhāsase mama means, "From which group of devas have you come, that you address me by the name 'Bhaddā'?"

621.Ahaṃbhaddeti etthabhaddeti ālapanaṃ.Subhaddāsinti ahaṃ subhaddā nāma tava bhaginī kaniṭṭhikā āsiṃ ahosiṃ, tattha pubbe mānusake bhave sahabhariyā samānabhariyā te tayā ekasseva bhariyā, tava patino eva bhariyā, āsinti attho. Puna bhaddā –

621. Ahaṃ bhaddeti here, bhaddeti is an address. Subhaddāsiṃti means, "I was Subhaddā, your younger sister by name, I was." There, in the former human existence, sahabhariyā, samānabhariyā te, "a co-wife with you, a wife with you, with the same husband," is the meaning. Again, Bhaddā (asked):

623.

623.

‘‘Pahūtakatakalyāṇā, te deve yanti pāṇino;

"Those beings who have done much good go to the deva-world;
Among whom will you proclaim your birth, Subhaddā?

624.

624.

‘‘Atha tvaṃ kena vaṇṇena, kena vā anusāsitā;

"Then by what goodness, or by whose instruction,
By what kind of giving, with what good vows, are you glorious?

625.

625.

‘‘Yasaṃ etādisaṃ pattā, visesaṃ vipulamajjhagā;

"Having attained such fame, reached such great distinction;
Tell me, goddess, when asked, what is the fruit of which kamma?" –

Tīhi gāthāhi pucchi. Puna subhaddā –

She asked with three verses. Again, Subhaddā (replied):

626.

626.

‘‘Aṭṭheva piṇḍapātāni, yaṃ dānaṃ adadaṃ pure;

"Just eight morsels of food, that gift I gave before;
To the Sangha, worthy of offerings, with delighted hands.

627.

627.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my beauty…pe…
And my radiance shines in all directions." –

Byākāsi.

She explained.

623.Tatthapahūtakatakalyāṇā te deve yantīti pahūtakatakalyāṇā mahāpuññātenimmānaratino deveyantiuppajjanavasena gacchantipāṇinosattā,yesaṃnimmānaratīnaṃ devānaṃ antaretvaṃ attano jātiṃ kittayissasikathesīti yojanā.

623. There, pahūtakatakalyāṇā te deve yantīti means pahūtakatakalyāṇā, "those who have done much good" te nimmānaratino deve yanti, "those Nimmānarati devas go," in the sense of arising, pāṇino sattā, "beings." Yesaṃ nimmānaratīnaṃ devānaṃ antare tvaṃ attano jātiṃ kittayissasi, "among which Nimmānarati devas will you proclaim your birth?" is the connection.

624.Kena vaṇṇenāti kena kāraṇena.Kīdisenevāti evasaddo samuccayattho, kīdisena cāti attho, ayameva vā pāṭho.Subbatenāti sundarena vatena, suvisuddhena sīlenāti attho.

624. Kena vaṇṇenāti, "by what reason?" Kīdisenevāti the word eva is in the sense of a collection, "and by what kind?" is the meaning, or this itself is the reading. Subbatenāti, "by beautiful vows," meaning by very pure morality (sīla).

626.Aṭṭhevapiṇḍapātānīti aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dinnapiṇḍapāte sandhāya vadati.Adadanti adāsiṃ.

626. Aṭṭheva piṇḍapātānīti, "just eight morsels of food," she speaks referring to the alms food given to eight monks. Adadanti, "I gave."

Evaṃ subhaddāya kathite puna bhaddā –

When Subhaddā had spoken thus, again Bhaddā (said):

629.

629.

‘‘Ahaṃ tayā bahutare bhikkhū, saññate brahmacārayo;

"I satisfied many more monks than you,
Restrained and celibate, with food and drink,

630.

630.

‘‘Tayā bahutaraṃ datvā, hīnakāyūpagā ahaṃ;

"Having given more than you, I have gone to an inferior state;
How is it that having given less, you have reached such great distinction?
Tell me, goddess, when asked, what is the fruit of which kamma?" –

tayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Puna subhaddā –

tayāti is an ablative used in place of an instrumental. Again, Subhaddā (replied):

631.

631.

‘‘Manobhāvanīyo bhikkhu, sandiṭṭho me pure ahu;

"A monk pleasing to the mind, was seen by me before;
I invited him to a meal, Revata as the eighth to myself.

632.

632.

‘‘So me atthapurekkhāro, anukampāya revato;

"He was mindful of my welfare, Revata out of compassion;
He said to me, 'Give to the Sangha,' I did as he said.

633.

633.

‘‘Sā dakkhiṇā saṅghagatā, appameyye patiṭṭhitā;

"That offering given to the Sangha, is established in the immeasurable;
That given by you to individuals, is not of such great fruit." –

Attanā katakammaṃ kathesi.

She told of the kamma she had done.

631.Tatthamanobhāvanīyoti manavaḍḍhanako uḷāraguṇatāya sambhāvanīyo.Sandiṭṭhoti nimantanavasena bodhito kathito. Tenāha‘‘tāhaṃ bhattena nimantesiṃ, revataṃ attanaṭṭhama’’nti, taṃ manobhāvanīyaṃ ayyaṃ revataṃ attanaṭṭhamaṃ bhattena ahaṃ nimantesiṃ.

631. There, manobhāvanīyoti means "pleasing to the mind," worthy of respect due to his excellent qualities. Sandiṭṭhoti, "seen," means made known or spoken to in the context of an invitation. Therefore, she says ‘‘tāhaṃ bhattena nimantesiṃ, revataṃ attanaṭṭhama’’, "I invited that mind-pleasing Venerable Revata to a meal as the eighth to myself."

632-3.So me atthapurekkhāroti so ayyo revato dānassa mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena mama atthapurekkhāro hitesī.Saṅghe dehīti maṃvocāti ‘‘yadi tvaṃ subhadde aṭṭhannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dātukāmā, yasmā puggalagatāya dakkhiṇāya saṅghagatā eva dakkhiṇā mahapphalatarā, tasmā saṅghe dehi, saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dehī’’ti maṃ abhāsi.Tanti taṃ dānaṃ.

632-3. So me atthapurekkhāroti, "that Venerable Revata was mindful of my welfare," because he brought about the great fruit of the gift, he was concerned for my welfare. Saṅghe dehīti maṃvocāti, "he said to me, 'Give to the Sangha'," meaning "If you, Subhaddā, intend to give to eight monks, since an offering given to the Sangha is more fruitful than an offering given to individuals, therefore give to the Sangha, give the offering dedicated to the Sangha," he spoke to me. Tanti, "that" means that gift.

Evaṃ subhaddāya vutte bhaddā tamatthaṃ sampaṭicchantī uttari ca tathā paṭipajjitukāmā –

When Subhaddā had spoken thus, Bhaddā, accepting that meaning and desiring to practice further in that way (said):

634.

634.

‘‘Idānevāhaṃ jānāmi, saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ;

"Only now do I know, that giving to the Sangha is of great fruit;
I, having gone to human existence, generous, free from stinginess;
I will give offerings to the Sangha, diligently, again and again." –

Gāthamāha. Subhaddā pana attano devalokameva gatā. Atha sakko devānamindo sabbe deve tāvatiṃse attano sarīrobhāsena abhibhuyya virocamānaṃ subhaddaṃ devadhītaraṃ disvā tañca tāsaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ sutvā tāvadeva ca subhaddāya antarahitāya taṃ ‘‘ayaṃ nāmā’’ti ajānanto –

She spoke a verse. Subhaddā, however, went to her own deva-world. Then Sakka, the King of the Devas, having surpassed all the devas in Tāvatiṃsa with the radiance of his own body, seeing the deva-daughter Subhaddā shining forth, and having heard their conversation, immediately upon Subhaddā's disappearance, not knowing "this is her name" –

635.

635.

‘‘Kā esā devatā bhadde, tayā mantayate saha;

"Who is this goddess, Bhaddā, conversing with you?
Among all the Tāvatiṃsa devas, she outshines them in beauty." –

Bhaddaṃ pucchi. Sāpissa –

He asked Bhaddā. She (replied) to him:

636.

636.

‘‘Manussabhūtā devinda, pubbe mānusake bhave;

"Having been a human, Devinda, formerly in the human realm;
She was my co-wife, and also my younger sister,
Having given offerings to the Sangha, having done merit, she shines forth." –

Kathesi. Atha sakko tassā saṅghagatāya dakkhiṇāya mahapphalabhāvaṃ dassento dhammaṃ kathesi. Tena vuttaṃ –

She told. Then Sakka, showing the great fruit of the offering given to the Sangha, spoke this Dhamma:

637.

637.

‘‘Dhammena pubbe bhaginī, tayā bhadde virocati;

"By the Dhamma, sister, you shine forth, Bhaddā;
The offering which she established in the immeasurable Sangha.

638.

638.

‘‘Pucchito hi mayā buddho, gijjhakūṭamhi pabbate;

"For I was asked by the Buddha, on Gijjhakūṭa mountain;
About the result of sharing, where a gift is of great fruit.

639.

639.

‘‘Yajamānānaṃ manussānaṃ, puññapekkhāna pāṇinaṃ;

"For humans making offerings, beings seeking merit;
Performing intentional merit, where a gift is of great fruit.

640.

640.

‘‘Taṃ me buddho viyākāsi, jānaṃ kammaphalaṃ sakaṃ;

"That was explained to me by the Buddha, knowing the result of his own kamma;
About the result of sharing, where a gift is of great fruit.

641.

641.

‘‘Cattāro ca paṭipannā, cattāro ca phale ṭhitā;

"Four are those who have entered the path, four are those established in the fruit;
This Sangha is upright, endowed with wisdom and morality.

642.

642.

‘‘Yajamānānaṃ manussānaṃ, puññapekkhāna pāṇinaṃ;

"For humans making offerings, beings seeking merit;
Performing intentional merit, a gift given to the Sangha is of great fruit.

643.

643.

‘‘Eso hi saṅgho vipulo mahaggato, esappameyyo udadhīva sāgaro;

"This Sangha is vast and of great worth, it is immeasurable like the ocean;
These are the noble disciples, heroes among men, who proclaim the Dhamma, the source of light.

644.

644.

‘‘Tesaṃ sudinnaṃ suhutaṃ suyiṭṭhaṃ, ye saṅghamuddissa dadanti dānaṃ;

"For those who give alms dedicating to the Sangha, it is well-given, well-sacrificed, well-offered; that offering, being Sangha-gone, is established as greatly fruitful, praised by the knowers of the world."

645.

645.

‘‘Etādisaṃ yaññamanussarantā, ye vedajātā vicaranti loke;

"Remembering such a sacrifice, those who wander in the world born of the Vedas, having removed the stain of stinginess with its root, unblamed, go to a heavenly place."

637.Tatthadhammenāti kāraṇena ñāyena vā.Tayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Idāni taṃ ‘‘dhammenā’’ti vuttakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃyaṃ saṅghamhi appameyye, patiṭṭhāpesi dakkhiṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.Appameyyeti guṇānubhāvassa attani katānaṃ kārānaṃ phalavisesassa ca vasena paminituṃ asakkuṇeyye.

637. Here, dhammenā means by reason or by justice. Tayā is the word of instrumentality in the sense of cause. Now, to show that reason stated as "dhammenā," it is said, yaṃ saṅghamhi appameyye, patiṭṭhāpesi dakkhiṇa ("whatever donation you have established in the immeasurable Sangha"). Appameyye means unable to be measured by way of the power of virtues, the benefits done to oneself, and the specific result of those deeds.

638-9.Ayañca attho bhagavato sammukhā ca suto, sammukhā ca paṭiggahitoti dassento‘‘pucchito’’tiādimāha. Tatthayajamānānanti dadantānaṃ.Puññapekkhāna pāṇinanti anunāsikalopaṃ katvā niddeso, puññaphalaṃ ākaṅkhantānaṃ sattānaṃ.Opadhikanti upadhi nāma khandhā, upadhissa karaṇasīlaṃ, upadhipayojananti vā opadhikaṃ, attabhāvajanakaṃ paṭisandhipavattivipākadāyakaṃ.

638-9. Showing that this meaning was heard and received directly from the Blessed One, he said, ‘‘pucchito’’ ("when asked") and so on. There, yajamānānanti means to those who are giving. Puññapekkhāna pāṇinanti this is an indication made by eliding the nasal consonant, it means to beings desiring the fruit of merit. Opadhikanti, upadhi means the aggregates (khandha); that which has the characteristic of causing upadhi, or that which serves the purpose of upadhi is opadhikaṃ, meaning generating a new existence, giving the result of rebirth-linking.

640.Jānaṃ kammaphalaṃ sakanti sattānaṃ sakaṃ sakaṃ yathāsakaṃ puññaṃ puññaphalañca hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya jānanto. Sakanti vā yakārassa kakāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ, sayaṃ attanāti attho.

640. Jānaṃ kammaphalaṃ sakanti knowing each being's own merit and the fruit of merit as clearly as an āmalaka fruit in the palm of one's hand. Or, saka is said by changing the ya to ka, meaning sayaṃ, oneself.

641.Paṭipannāti paṭipajjamānā, maggaṭṭhāti attho.Ujubhūtoti ujupaṭipattiyā ujubhāvaṃ patto dakkhiṇeyyo jāto.Paññāsīlasamāhitoti paññāya sīlena ca samāhito, diṭṭhisīlasampanno ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca samannāgato. Tenāpissa paramatthasaṅghabhāvameva vibhāveti. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṅghaṭitattā hi saṅgho. Atha vā samāhitaṃ samādhi, paññā sīlaṃ samāhitañca assa atthītipaññāsīlasamāhito. Tenassa sīlādidhammakkhandhattayasampannatāya aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ vibhāveti.

641. Paṭipannāti means practicing, meaning those established on the path (maggaṭṭha). Ujubhūtoti having attained uprightness (uju) by way of upright practice, having become worthy of offerings. Paññāsīlasamāhitoti endowed with wisdom and morality, possessing right view and morality, possessing noble view and noble morality. By that, he clarifies that it is indeed the Sangha in the ultimate sense. For the Sangha is constituted by the commonality of view and morality. Alternatively, samāhitaṃ is concentration (samādhi); one who possesses wisdom, morality, and concentration is paññāsīlasamāhito. By that, he clarifies that due to the accomplishment of the three aggregates of virtue—morality, etc.—he is the foremost recipient of offerings.

643.Vipulo mahaggatoti guṇehi mahattaṃ gatoti mahaggato, tato eva attani katānaṃ kārānaṃ phalavepullahetutāya vipulo.Udadhīva sāgaroti yathā udakaṃ ettha dhīyatīti ‘‘udadhī’’ti laddhanāmo sāgaro, ‘‘ettakāni udakāḷhakānī’’tiādinā udakato appameyyo, evamesa guṇatoti attho.Ete hītihi-saddo avadhāraṇe nipāto, ete eva seṭṭhāti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ –

643. Vipulo mahaggatoti mahaggato means having attained greatness through virtues; therefore, vipulo means vast due to being the cause of the abundance of the fruit of deeds done to oneself. Udadhīva sāgaroti just as the ocean, named "udadhī" because water is stored (dhīyati) there, is immeasurable compared to water, by saying "so many āḷhakas of water," similarly, this one is immeasurable in virtues. Ete hīti, the word hi is a particle of determination; it means these alone are the best. This was said:

‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, saṅghā vā gaṇā vā, tathāgatasāvakasaṅgho tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34; 5.32).

"To the extent that there are Sanghas or groups, the Sangha of the disciples of the Tathāgata is declared the foremost among them." (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34; 5.32).

Naravīrasāvakāti naresu vīriyasampannassa narassa sāvakā.Pabhaṅkarāti lokassa ñāṇālokakarā.Dhammamudīrayantīti dhammaṃ uddisanti. Kathaṃ? Dhammasāminā hi dhammapajjoto ariyasaṅghe ṭhapito.

Naravīrasāvakāti disciples of the hero among men, endowed with vigor. Pabhaṅkarāti illuminators of the world with knowledge. Dhammamudīrayantīti they proclaim the Dhamma. How? For the lamp of the Dhamma has been placed in the Noble Sangha by the Lord of the Dhamma.

644.Ye saṅghamuddissa dadanti dānanti ye sattā ariyasaṅghaṃ uddissa sammutisaṅghe antamaso gotrabhupuggalesupi dānaṃ dadanti, taṃ dānaṃ saṃvibhāgavasena dinnampisudinnaṃ,āhunapāhunavasena hutampisuhutaṃ,mahāyāgavasena yiṭṭhampisuyiṭṭhameva hoti. Kasmā? Yasmāsā dakkhiṇā saṅghagatā patiṭṭhitā mahapphalā lokavidūna vaṇṇitāti, lokavidūhi sammāsambuddhehi ‘‘na tvevāhaṃ, ānanda, kenaci pariyāyena saṅghagatāya dakkhiṇāya pāṭipuggalikaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ mahapphalataraṃ vadāmi (ma. ni. 3.380). Puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānānaṃ, saṅgho ve yajataṃ mukhaṃ (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 574; mahāva. 300). Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.74; saṃ. ni. 5.997) ca ādinā mahapphalatā vaṇṇitā pasatthā thomitāti attho.

644. Ye saṅghamuddissa dadanti dānanti those beings who, dedicating to the Noble Sangha, give alms even to individuals of conventional Sangha down to those of the gotrabhū, that alms, even when given as sharing, is sudinnaṃ (well-given); even when sacrificed as āhuna and pāhuna, it is suhutaṃ (well-sacrificed); even when offered as a great sacrifice, it is suyiṭṭhaṃ (well-offered). Why? Because sā dakkhiṇā saṅghagatā patiṭṭhitā mahapphalā lokavidūna vaṇṇitāti that offering, being Sangha-gone, is established as greatly fruitful, praised by the knowers of the world, that is, by the Sammāsambuddhas. "Indeed, Ānanda, I do not say that an individual offering is more fruitful than an offering given to the Sangha in any way (ma. ni. 3.380). The Sangha is the face of those who sacrifice, desiring merit (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 574; mahāva. 300). It is the unsurpassed field of merit for the world (ma. ni. 1.74; saṃ. ni. 5.997)," and so on; its great fruitfulness is praised, commended, and lauded, that is the meaning.

645.Īdisaṃ yaññamanussarantāti etādisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa attanā kataṃ dānaṃ anussarantā.Vedajātāti jātasomanassā.Vineyya maccheramalaṃsamūlanti maccherameva cittassa malinabhāvakaraṇatomaccheramalaṃ,atha vā maccherañca aññaṃ issālobhadosādimalañcāti maccheramalaṃ. Tañca avijjāvicikicchāvipallāsādīhi saha mūlehīti samūlaṃ vineyya vinayitvā vikkhambhetvā aninditvā saggamupenti ṭhānanti yojanā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

645. Īdisaṃ yaññamanussarantāti remembering such alms given by oneself dedicating to the Sangha. Vedajātāti those whose joy is born. Vineyya maccheramalaṃ samūlanti because stinginess itself causes the mind to be stained, it is maccheramalaṃ (the stain of stinginess); or, stinginess and other stains of envy, greed, hatred, etc., are maccheramalaṃ. And that, together with the roots of ignorance, doubt, and distortions, etc., is samūlaṃ (with its root); having removed, dispelled, and eliminated, they go to a heavenly place, unblamed; this is the connection. The rest is as previously stated.

Imaṃ pana sabbaṃ pavattiṃ sakko devānamindo ‘‘daddallamānā vaṇṇenā’’tiādinā āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa ācikkhi, āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavato ārocesi, bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosi.

However, Sakka, the lord of devas, explained all this occurrence to venerable Mahāmoggallāna with "daddallamānā vaṇṇenā" and so on; venerable Mahāmoggallāna reported it to the Blessed One; the Blessed One, having made that matter into a basis of explanation, taught the Dhamma to the assembled audience. That teaching was meaningful to the great assembly.

Daddallavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Daddalla Vihāra is finished.

7. Pesavatīvimānavaṇṇanā
7. Pesavatī Vihāra

Phalikarajatahemajālachannanti pesavatīvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena magadhesu nālakagāme ekasmiṃ gahapatimahāsārakule pesavatī nāma kulasuṇhā ahosi. Sā kira kassapassa bhagavato yojanike kanakathūpe kayiramāne dārikā hutvā mātarā saddhiṃ cetiyaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā mātaraṃ pucchi ‘‘kiṃ ime, amma, karontī’’ti? ‘‘Cetiyaṃ kātuṃ suvaṇṇiṭṭhakā karontī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā dārikā pasannamānasā mātaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma, mama gīvāya idaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ khuddakapiḷandhanaṃ atthi, imāhaṃ cetiyatthāya demī’’ti. Mātā ‘‘sādhu dehī’’ti vatvā taṃ gīvato omuñcitvā suvaṇṇakārassa hatthe adāsi ‘‘idaṃ imāya dārikāya pariccajitaṃ, imampi pakkhipitvā iṭṭhakaṃ karohī’’ti. Suvaṇṇakāro tathā akāsi. Sā dārikā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā teneva puññakammena devaloke nibbattitvā sugatiyaṃyeva aparāparaṃ saṃsarantī amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle nālakagāme nibbattā anukkamena dvādasavassikā jātā.

Phalikarajatahemajālachannanti the Pesavatī Vihāra. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, in the Magadhas, in the village of Nāḷaka, in a very wealthy householder's family, there was a daughter-in-law named Pesavatī. It seems that when the Yojana-high golden stupa of Kassapa Buddha was being built, she, as a young girl, went with her mother to the stupa site and asked her mother, "What are they doing, mother?" "They are making golden bricks to build a stupa." Hearing that, the girl, with a pleased mind, said to her mother, "Mother, I have this small golden ornament on my neck; I give this for the sake of the stupa." Her mother said, "Good, give it," and having removed it from her neck, she gave it to the goldsmith, saying, "This has been donated by this girl; add this also and make a brick." The goldsmith did so. In a later existence, that girl, having passed away, was reborn in the deva world due to that meritorious deed, and continuously transmigrating in happy existences, she was born in the village of Nāḷaka in the time of our Blessed One, and gradually grew to be twelve years old.

Sā ekadivasaṃ mātarā pesitaṃ mūlaṃ gahetvā telatthāya aññataraṃ āpaṇaṃ agamāsi. Tasmiñca āpaṇe aññataro kuṭumbiyaputto pitarā nidahitvā ṭhapitaṃ bahuṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ muttāmaṇiratanāni ca gahetuṃ uddharanto āpaṇiko kammabalena kathalapāsāṇasakkhararūpena upaṭṭhahantāni disvā tato ekadesaṃ ‘‘puññavantānaṃ vasena hiraññasuvaṇṇādi bhavissatī’’ti vīmaṃsituṃ rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapesi. Atha naṃ sā dārikā disvā ‘‘kasmā āpaṇe ratanāni evaṃ ṭhapitāni, nanu nāma sammadeva paṭisāmetabbānī’’ti āha. Āpaṇiko taṃ sutvā ‘‘mahāpuññā ayaṃ dārikā, imissā vasena sabbamidaṃ hiraññādi eva hutvā amhākaṃ viniyogaṃ gamissati, saṅgaṇhissāmi na’’nti cintetvā tassā mātu santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘imaṃ dārikaṃ mayhaṃ puttassatthāya dehī’’ti vāretvā bahudhanaṃ datvā āvāhavivāhaṃ katvā taṃ attano gehaṃ ānesi. Athassā sīlācāraṃ ñatvā bhaṇḍāgāraṃ vivaritvā ‘‘kiṃ ettha passasī’’ti vatvā tāya ‘‘hiraññasuvaṇṇamaṇimeva rāsikataṃ passāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘etāni amhākaṃ kammabalena antaradhāyantāni tava puññavisesena puna visesāni jātāni, tasmā ito paṭṭhāya imasmiṃ gehe sabbaṃ tvaṃyeva vicārehi, tayā dinnameva mayaṃ paribhuñjissāmā’’ti vatvā tato pabhuti taṃ ‘‘pesavatī’’ti vohariṃsu.

One day, she took some roots that her mother had sent to a certain shop for oil. In that shop, another householder's son, while taking out a large amount of silver and gold, pearls, gems, and jewels that had been deposited and stored by his father, saw them appearing as gravel, stone chips, and pebbles due to the power of his deeds; to discern whether a portion of that would become silver, gold, etc., by virtue of those with merit, he made a pile and kept it aside. Then, seeing that girl, he said, "Why are jewels kept like this in the shop? Shouldn't they be properly put away?" The shopkeeper, hearing that, thought, "This girl has great merit; by virtue of this, all this silver, etc., will indeed become such and be available for our use; I will take her into my family," and going to her mother, he asked, "Give me this girl for my son," and having given much wealth, he arranged a marriage and brought her to his house. Then, knowing her virtue and conduct, he opened the treasury and said, "What do you see here?" When she said, "I see only piles of silver, gold, and jewels," he said, "These, disappearing due to our deeds, have become special again due to your special merit; therefore, from now on, you alone manage everything in this house; we will use only what is given by you," and from then on, they called her "Pesavatī."

Tena ca samayena āyasmā dhammasenāpati attano āyusaṅkhārānaṃ parikkhīṇabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘mayhaṃ mātuyā rūpasāribrāhmaṇiyā posāvanikamūlaṃ datvā parinibbāyissāmī’’ti cintetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā parinibbānaṃ anujānāpetvā satthu āṇāya mahantaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvā anekehi thutisahassehi bhagavantaṃ thometvā yāva dassanavisayātikkamā abhimukhova apakkamitvā puna vanditvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto vihārā nikkhamma bhikkhusaṅghassa ovādaṃ datvā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ samassāsetvā catassopi parisā nivattetvā anukkamena nālakagāmaṃ patvā mātaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā paccūsasamaye jātovarake parinibbāyi. Parinibbutassa cassa sarīrasakkārakaraṇavasena devā ceva manussā ca sattāhaṃ vītināmesuṃ, agarucandanādīhi hatthasatubbedhaṃ citakamakaṃsu.

At that time, venerable Dhammasenāpati, knowing that the lifespan was coming to an end, thought, "I will give the means of support to my mother, Rūpasārībrāhmaṇī, and then attain parinibbāna," and approaching the Blessed One, having obtained permission for parinibbāna, showing a great miracle by the command of the Teacher, having praised the Blessed One with many thousands of praises, receding face-forward until passing out of sight, and again having paid homage, having given advice to the Sangha of monks, having consoled venerable Ānanda, having turned back all four assemblies, gradually reaching the village of Nāḷaka, having established his mother in the fruit of stream-entry, he attained parinibbāna at dawn in the Jātovaraka grove. After his parinibbāna, devas and humans spent seven days venerating his body, making a pyre of sandalwood, etc., seven hatthas high.

Pesavatīpi therassa parinibbānaṃ sutvā ‘‘gantā pūjessāmī’’ti suvaṇṇapupphehi gandhajātehi ca pūritāni caṅkoṭakāni gāhāpetvā gantukāmā sasuraṃ āpucchitvā tena ‘‘tvaṃ garubhārā, tattha ca mahājanasammaddo, pupphagandhāni pesetvā idheva hohī’’ti vuttāpi saddhājātā ‘‘yadipi me tattha jīvitantarāyo siyā, gantāva pūjāsakkāraṃ karissāmī’’ti taṃ vacanaṃ aggahetvā saparivārā tattha gantvā gandhapupphādīhi pūjetvā katañjalī aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiñca samaye theraṃ pūjetuṃ āgatānaṃ rājaparisānaṃ hatthī matto hutvā taṃ padesaṃ upagañchi. Taṃ disvā maraṇabhayabhītesu manussesu palāyantesu janasammaddena patitaṃ pesavatiṃ mahājano akkamitvā māresi. Sā pūjāsakkāraṃ katvā theragatāya saddhāya sampannacittā eva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti, accharāsahassañcassā parivāro ahosi.

Pesavatī also, hearing of the Thera's parinibbāna, thinking, "I will go and honor him," having taken baskets filled with golden flowers and various fragrances, wishing to go, having taken leave of her father-in-law, even though he said, "You are too burdened, and there is a great crowd there; send flowers and fragrances and stay here," being filled with faith, thinking, "Even if there is danger to my life there, I will go and pay homage," not heeding his words, she went there with her retinue and stood with hands clasped, honoring him with fragrances, flowers, etc. At that time, an elephant of the royal retinue that had come to honor the Thera became intoxicated and approached that place. Seeing that, as people fled, fearing for their lives, Pesavatī, who had fallen in the crowd, was trampled to death by the crowd. Having made offerings and homage, with a mind filled with faith gone to the Thera, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and a thousand nymphs became her retinue.

Sā tāvadeva attano dibbasampattiṃ oloketvā ‘‘kīdisena nu kho puññena mayā esā laddhā’’ti, tassā hetuṃ upadhārentī theraṃ uddissa kataṃ pūjāsakkāraṃ disvā, ratanattaye abhippasannamānasā satthāraṃ vandituṃ accharāsahassaparivutā saṭṭhisakaṭabhārālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitattabhāvā sumahatiyā deviddhiyā cando viya ca sūriyo viya ca dasa disā obhāsayamānā saha vimānena āgantvā vimānato oruyha bhagavantaṃ vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Tena ca samayena āyasmā vaṅgīso bhagavato samīpe nisinno bhagavantaṃ evamāha ‘‘paṭibhāti maṃ bhagavā imissā devatāya katakammaṃ pucchitu’’nti. ‘‘Paṭibhātu taṃ, vaṅgīsā’’ti bhagavā avoca. Atha āyasmā vaṅgīso tāya devatāya katakammaṃ pucchitukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāvassā vimānaṃ saṃvaṇṇento āha –

Immediately looking at her divine fortune, thinking, "By what merit have I obtained this?" discerning the cause, seeing the offerings and homage made dedicating to the Thera, with a mind greatly pleased with the Triple Gem, surrounded by a thousand nymphs, with her body adorned like sixty cartloads of ornaments, with great divine power, illuminating the ten directions like the moon and the sun, coming together with her Vihāra, descending from the Vihāra, having paid homage to the Blessed One, she stood with hands clasped. At that time, venerable Vaṅgīsa, sitting near the Blessed One, said to the Blessed One, "It occurs to me, Blessed One, to ask this devatā about the deeds she has done." "Let it occur to you, Vaṅgīsa," said the Blessed One. Then, venerable Vaṅgīsa, wishing to ask that devatā about the deeds she had done, first praised her Vihāra, saying:

646.

646.

‘‘Phalikarajatahemajālachannaṃ, vividhacitratalamaddasaṃ surammaṃ;

"Covered with crystal, silver, and golden nets, with various painted surfaces, delightful, very well-made, endowed with arches, filled with splendor, this beautiful Vihāra."

647.

647.

‘‘Bhāti ca dasa disā nabheva suriyo, sarade tamonudo sahassaraṃsī;

"It shines in the ten directions like the sun in the sky, dispelling darkness in autumn with a thousand rays; likewise, your Vihāra blazes, like a flame without smoke at night in the sky."

648.

648.

‘‘Musatīva nayanaṃ sateratāva, ākāse ṭhapitamidaṃ manuññaṃ;

"It is delightful, pleasing to the eye, as if filled with essence, placed in the sky; resounding with the blended sounds of lute and drum, prosperous like the city of Indra, this is yours."

649.

649.

‘‘Padumakumuduppalakuvalayaṃ, yodhikabandhukanojakā ca santi;

"There are lotuses, water lilies, blue lotuses, and kuvalayas, yodhikas, bandhukas, and kanojakās; sāla trees in bloom, flowering asokas, this is frequented by various tree-top fragrances."

650.

650.

‘‘Saḷalalabujabhujakasaṃyuttā, kusakasuphullitalatāvalambinīhi;

"Connected with saḷala and labuja trees, with creepers hanging down covered with flowers, adorned with jewel-like nets, delightful ponds are present for you."

651.

651.

‘‘Udakaruhā ca yetthi pupphajātā, thalajā ye ca santi rukkhajātā;

"Water-grown plants and those that bear flowers, and those that are tree-grown; human, inhuman, and divine enjoyments, all are born in your dwelling."

652.

652.

‘‘Kissa saṃyamadamassayaṃ vipāko, kenāsi kammaphalenidhūpapannā;

"What restraint and taming is this the result of? By what deed are you endowed with such splendor? And how did you obtain this Vihāra? Tell us that in succession, O beautiful one!"

646.Tatthaphalikarajatahemajālachannanti phalikamaṇīhi rajatahemajālehi ca chāditaṃ, phalikamaṇimayāhi bhittīhi rajatahemamayehi jālehi ca samantato heṭṭhā ca upari ca chāditaṃ, vividhavaṇṇānaṃ vicittasannivesānañca talānaṃ bhūmīnaṃ vasenavividhacitratalaṃ addasaṃpassiṃ.Surammanti suṭṭhu ramaṇīyaṃ. Viharitukāmā vasanti etthātibyamhaṃ,bhavanaṃ.Toraṇūpapannanti vividhamālākammādivicittena sattaratanamayena toraṇena upetaṃ. Toraṇanti vā dvārakoṭṭhakapāsādassa nāmaṃ, tena ca anekabhūmakena vicittākārena taṃ vimānaṃ upetaṃ.Rucakupatiṇṇanti suvaṇṇavālikāhi okiṇṇaṅgaṇaṃ. Vālikasadisā hi suvaṇṇakhaṇḍā rucā nāma, rucameva rucakanti vuttaṃ.Subhanti sobhati, suṭṭhu bhātīti vā subhaṃ.Vimānanti visiṭṭhamānaṃ, pamāṇato mahantanti attho.

646. Here, phalikarajatahemajālacchannaṃ means covered with crystal jewels, silver, and gold nets; covered all around, below, and above with crystal gem walls and silver-gold nets; vividhacitratalaṃ addasaṃ means "I saw various patterned floors" in accordance with the grounds of diverse-colored and uniquely arranged surfaces. Surammaṃ means exceedingly delightful. Byamhaṃ, bhavanaṃ means where those desiring to enjoy themselves reside. Toraṇūpapannaṃ means endowed with a gate adorned with various floral designs and made of the seven precious jewels. Toraṇaṃ, or gate, is the name for the entrance tower of a palace, and that vimāna was endowed with it in its multi-storied and uniquely shaped form. Rucakupatiṇṇaṃ means an courtyard strewn with golden sand. Small pieces of gold resembling sand are called rucā, and rucameva rucakanti is said. Subhaṃ means beautiful, or it shines exceedingly, hence subhaṃ. Vimānaṃ means a distinguished measure, meaning great in extent.

647.Bhātīti jotati ujjalati.Nabheva suriyoti ākāse ādicco viya.Saradeti saradasamaye.Tamonudoti andhakāraviddhaṃsano.Tathā tapati midanti yathā saradakāle sahassaraṃsī sūriyo, tathā tapati dibbati idaṃ tava vimānaṃ, ma-kāro padasandhikaro.Jalamiva dhūmasikhoti jalanto aggi viya. Aggi hi tassa aggato dhūmo paññāyatīti ‘‘dhūmasikho dhūmaketū’’ti ca vuccati.Niseti nisati, rattiyanti attho.Nabhaggeti nabhakoṭṭhāse, ākāsapadeseti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Nagagge’’ti vā pāṭho, pabbatasikhareti attho. Idaṃ tava vimānanti yojanā.

647. Bhāti means it gleams and shines. Nabheva suriyo means like the sun in the sky. Sarade means in the autumn season. Tamonudo means dispelling darkness. Tathā tapati midaṃ means just as the thousand-rayed sun in the autumn season, so too does your vimāna shine and glow; the ma-kāro is a euphonic addition. Jalamiva dhūmasikho means like a burning fire. For fire, smoke is visible at its tip, hence it is also called "dhūmasikho dhūmaketū." Nise means night, the meaning is night. Nabhagge means in the expanse of the sky, which means in the region of the sky. Alternatively, there is the reading "nagagge," meaning on the summit of a mountain. The construction is: idaṃ tava vimānaṃ.

648.Musatīvanayananti ativiya attano pabhassaratāya paṭihanantaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ adentaṃ olokentānaṃ cakkhuṃ musati viya. Tenāha‘‘sateratāvā’’ti, vijjulatā viyāti attho.Vīṇāmurajasammatāḷaghuṭṭhanti mahatīādivīṇānaṃ bheriādipaṭahānaṃ hatthatāḷakaṃsatāḷānañca saddehi ghositaṃ ekaninnādaṃ.Iddhanti devaputtehi devadhītāhi dibbasampattiyā ca samiddhaṃ.Indapuraṃ yathāti sudassananagaraṃ viya.

648. Musatīva nayanaṃ means because of its exceeding brightness, it is as if blinding the eye sight of those who look, preventing them from performing the function of seeing. Therefore, he said ‘‘sateratāvā’’, meaning like lightning. Vīṇāmurajasammatāḷaghuṭṭhaṃ means resounding with the sounds of great lutes, bheri drums, hand cymbals, and kaṃsatāḷa cymbals, a unified sound. Iddhaṃ means prosperous with deva-puttas, deva-dhītās, and divine opulence. Indapuraṃ yathā means like the city of Sudassana.

649.Padumāni ca kumudāni ca uppalāni ca kuvalayāni capadumakumuduppalakuvalayanti ekattavasena vuttaṃ. Atthīti vacanaṃ pariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ. Tattha padumaggahaṇena puṇḍarīkampi gahitaṃ, kumudaggahaṇena setarattabhedāni sabbāni kumudāni, uppalaggahaṇena rattauppalaṃ sabbā vā uppalajāti, kuvalayaggahaṇena nīluppalameva gahitanti veditabbaṃ.Yodhikabandhukanojakā ca santīti ca-kāro nipātamattaṃ, yodhikabandhujīvakaanojakarukkhā ca santīti attho. Keci ‘‘anojakāpi santī’’ti pāṭhaṃ vatvā ‘‘anojakāpīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti atthaṃ vadanti.Sālakusumitapupphitā asokāti sālā kusumitā pupphitā asokāti yojetabbaṃ.Vividhadumaggasugandhasevitamidanti nānāvidhānaṃ uttamarukkhānaṃ sobhanehi gandhehi sevitaṃ paribhāvitaṃ idaṃ te vimānanti attho.

649. Padumāni, kumudāni, uppalāni, and kuvalayāni are stated as one, padumakumuduppalakuvalayaṃ. The word "atthi" should be understood and connected by transformation. Here, by the inclusion of paduma, puṇḍarīka is also included; by the inclusion of kumuda, all kumudas of white and red varieties; by the inclusion of uppala, red uppala or all varieties of uppala; by the inclusion of kuvalaya, only blue uppala should be understood. Yodhikabandhukanojakā ca santī means the ca-kāro is merely an expletive; yodhika, bandhu, jīvaka, and anojaka trees are also present. Some say the reading is "anojakāpi santī," and they state the meaning is "anojakāpi is said." Sālakusumitapupphitā asokā is to be construed as sālā kusumitā, pupphitā asokā. Vividhadumaggasugandhasevitamidaṃ means this your vimāna is served and pervaded by the lovely fragrances of various excellent trees.

650.Saḷalalabujabhujakasaṃyuttāti tīre ṭhitehi saḷalehi labujehi bhujakarukkhehi ca sahitā. Bhujako nāma eko sugandharukkho devaloke ca gandhamādane ca atthi, aññattha natthīti vadanti.Kusakasuphullitalatāvalambinīhīti kusakehi tālanāḷikerādīhi tiṇajātīhi olambamānāhi santānakavalliādīhi suṭṭhu kusumitalatāhi ca saṃyuttāti yojanā.Maṇijālasadisāti maṇijālasadisajalā. ‘‘Maṇijalasadisā’’tipi pāḷi, maṇisadisajalāti attho.Yasassinīti devatāya ālapanaṃ.Upaṭṭhitā teti yathāvuttaguṇā ramaṇīyā pokkharaṇī tava vimānasamīpe ṭhitā.

650. Saḷalalabujabhujakasaṃyuttā means together with saḷala, labuja, and bhujaka trees standing on the bank. Bhujaka is a fragrant tree that exists in the deva-world and on Gandhamādana mountain, but not elsewhere, they say. Kusakasuphullitalatāvalambinīhī means connected with kusaka plants like tāla and nāḷikera, and with beautifully flowering creepers such as santānakavalli, which hang down. Maṇijālasadisā means water like a jeweled net. "Maṇijalasadisā" is also a reading, meaning water resembling jewels. Yasassinī is an address to the devatā. Upaṭṭhitā te means the lovely pond with the qualities as described is situated near your vimāna.

651.Udakaruhāti yathāvutte padumādike sandhāya vadati.Yetthīti ye atthi.Thalajāti yodhikādikā.Ye ca santīti ye aññepi rukkhajātā pupphūpagā ca phalūpagā ca, tepi tava vimānasamīpe santiyeva.

651. Udakaruhā He speaks in reference to the paduma and other flowers mentioned earlier. Yetthī means those that exist. Thalajā means yodhika and the like. Ye ca santī means any other kinds of trees that bear flowers and fruits are also present near your vimāna.

652.Kissa saṃyamadamassayaṃ vipākoti kāyasaṃyamādīsu kīdisassa saṃyamassa, indriyadamanādīsu kīdisassa damassa ayaṃ vipāko.Kenāsīti aññameva upapattinibbattakaṃ, aññaṃ upabhogasukhanibbattakaṃ hotīti ‘‘kenāsi kammaphalenidhūpapannā’’ti vatvā puna‘‘yathā ca te adhigatamidaṃ vimāna’’nti āha. Tatthakammaphalenāti kammaphalena vipaccituṃ āraddhenāti vacanaseso, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.Tadanupadaṃ avacāsīti taṃ kammaṃ mayā vuttapadassa anupadaṃ anurūpapadaṃ katvā katheyyāsi.Aḷārapamheti bahalasaṃhatapakhume, gopakhumeti adhippāyo.

652. Kissa saṃyamadamassayaṃ vipāko means, of what kind of restraint in bodily restraint and the like, of what kind of taming in the taming of the senses and the like, is this the result? Kenāsī Since one thing brings about rebirth, and another brings about the experience of pleasure, after saying ‘‘kenāsi kammaphalenidhūpapannā’’, he again asks ‘‘yathā ca te adhigatamidaṃ vimāna’’. There, kammaphalena means "by the result of karma that has begun to ripen," this being the remainder of the sentence, and this karaṇa-vacanaṃ is in the sense of itthambhūtalakkhaṇa. Tadanupadaṃ avacāsī means you should speak that deed by uttering words that follow immediately and are appropriate to what I have said. Aḷārapamhe means with thick, dense eyelashes, intending to mean gopakhuma.

Atha devatā āha –

Then, the devatā said -

653.

653.

‘‘Yathā ca me adhigatamidaṃ vimānaṃ, koñcamayūracakora saṅghacaritaṃ;

‘‘Just as I attained this vimāna, frequented by flocks of herons, peacocks, and ruddy geese;
Adorned with divine ducks, swans, and royal geese, resounded with birds, karaṇḍavas, and kokilas.

654.

654.

‘‘Nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhā, pāṭalijambuasokarukkhavantaṃ;

‘‘Diverse with various santānaka-flower trees, possessing pāṭali, jambu, and asoka trees;
Just as I attained this vimāna, that I will tell you, listen, O Bhante.

655.

655.

‘‘Magadhavarapuratthimena, nālakagāmo nāma atthi bhante;

‘‘East of the best city of Magadha, there is a village named Nāḷaka, O Bhante;
There I was formerly a daughter-in-law, they knew me there as Pesavatī.

656.

656.

‘‘Sāhamapacitatthadhammakusalaṃ, devamanussapūjitaṃ mahantaṃ;

‘‘I, with joyful mind, sprinkled flowers upon the great Upatissa, the proficient in meaning and dhamma, the meritorious, revered by devas and humans, the one who was extinguished, immeasurable.

657.

657.

‘‘Paramagatigatañca pūjayitvā, antimadehadharaṃ isiṃ uḷāraṃ;

‘‘And having honored the one gone to the ultimate goal, the eminent sage who bore the final body;
Having abandoned the human aggregation, I, gone to the Tidasas, dwell here in this place.’’

653.Tatthakoñcamayūracakorasaṅghacaritanti sārasasikhaṇḍikumbhakārakukkuṭagaṇehi tattha tattha vicaritaṃ.Dibyapilavahaṃsarājaciṇṇanti udake pilavitvā vicaraṇato ‘‘pilavā’’ti laddhanāmehi udakasakuṇehi haṃsarājehi ca tahiṃ tahiṃ vicaritaṃ.Dijakāraṇḍavakokilābhinaditanti kāraṇḍavehi kādambehi kokilehi aññehi ca dijehi abhināditaṃ.

653. There, koñcamayūracakorasaṅghacaritaṃ means frequented here and there by flocks of sārasas, peacocks, ruddy geese, cuckoos. Dibyapilavahaṃsarājaciṇṇaṃ means frequented here and there by water birds named "pilavā" because they float around on the water, and by royal swans. Dijakāraṇḍavakokilābhinaditaṃ means resounded by karaṇḍavas, kādambas, kokilas, and other birds.

654.Nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhāti nānāvidhasākhāpasākhavantā nānāpuppharukkhā nānāsantānakapuppharukkhā, tehi vividhaṃ cittākāraṃ vicittasannivesaṃ nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhā. ‘‘Vividha’’nti hi vattabbe ‘‘vividhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Santānakāti hi kāmavalliyo, nānāvidhapuppharukkhā ca vividhā ettha santi, tehi vā vividhanti nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhā. ‘‘Nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhaṃ, pāṭalijambuasokarukkhavanta’’nti ca keci paṭhanti. Tehi ‘‘puppharukkhā santī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Puppharukkhā’’ti vā avibhattikaniddeso, puppharakkhanti vuttaṃ hoti.

654. Nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhā means diverse with various santānaka-flower trees, with various kinds of branches and sub-branches, with various flower trees; nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhā, diverse with various santānaka-flower trees means diverse and patterned in various ways, uniquely arranged. Although "vividhaṃ" should be said, "vividhā" is said. Santānaka are desire-creepers, and because various kinds of flower trees are diverse here, or because they are diverse, nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhā. Some also recite "nānāsantānakapuppharukkhavividhaṃ, pāṭalijambuasokarukkhavantaṃ." With them, the phrase "puppharukkhā santī" should be brought in and connected. Or "puppharukkhā" is an undeclined specification, meaning puppharakkhanti is said.

655.Magadhavarapuratthimenāti magadhavare puratthimena, abhisambodhiṭṭhānatāya uttame magadharaṭṭhe puratthimadisāya.Tattha ahosiṃ pure suṇisāti pubbe ahaṃ tasmiṃ nālakagāme ekasmiṃ gahapatikule suṇisā suṇhā ahosiṃ.

655. Magadhavarapuratthimenā means east of the best city of Magadha, in the eastern direction of the excellent Magadha country, due to its being the place of enlightenment. Tattha ahosiṃ pure suṇisā means formerly in that Nāḷaka village, I was a daughter-in-law, suṇhā, in a certain householder's family.

656.ti sayaṃ. Atthe ca dhamme ca kusaloti atthadhammakusalo, bhagavā. Apacito atthadhammakusalo etenātiapacitatthadhammakusalo,dhammasenāpati, taṃ. Apacitaṃ vā apacayo, nibbānaṃ, tasmiṃ avasiṭṭhaatthadhamme ca kusalaṃ, apacite vā pūjanīye atthe dhamme nirodhe magge ca kusalaṃ. Mahantehi uḷārehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattāmahantaṃ. Kusumehīti ratanamayehi itarehi ca kusumehi.

656. means herself. Skilled in meaning and dhamma is atthadhammakusalo, the Blessed One. Apacito atthadhammakusalo etenāti apacitatthadhammakusalo, the General of the Dhamma, referring to him. Or apacitaṃ is apacayo, Nibbāna, and kusalaṃ in the remaining meaning and dhamma in that, or kusalaṃ in the meaning, dhamma, cessation, and path that are worthy of reverence. Mahantaṃ because he is endowed with great and eminent aggregates of morality and the like. Kusumehī means with jeweled and other flowers.

657.Paramagatigatanti anupādisesanibbānaṃ pattaṃ.Samussayanti sarīraṃ.Tidasagatāti tidasabhavanaṃ gatā, tāvatiṃsaṃ devanikāyaṃ upapannā.Idhāti imasmiṃ devaloke.Āvasāmi ṭhānanti imaṃ vimānaṃ adhivasāmi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

657. Paramagatigataṃ means attained to the Nibbāna without remainder. Samussayaṃ means the body. Tidasagatā means gone to the Tidasas heaven, reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa deva-community. Idhā means in this deva-world. Āvasāmi ṭhānaṃ means I dwell in this vimāna. The rest is as said before.

Evaṃ āyasmatā vaṅgīsena devatāya ca kathitakathāmaggaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

In this way, after Āyasmā Vaṅgīsa and the devatā had a conversation establishing the origin, the Blessed One taught the Dhamma in detail to the assembled gathering. That teaching was meaningful to the great assembly.

Pesavatīvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Pesavatīvimāna is finished.

8. Mallikāvimānavaṇṇanā
8. Mallikāvimānavaṇṇanā

Pītavatthepītadhajeti mallikāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Dhammacakkappavattanamādiṃ katvā yāva subhaddaparibbājakavinayanā katabuddhakicce kusinārāyaṃ upavattane mallarājūnaṃ sālavane yamakasālānamantare visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ paccūsavelāyaṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbute bhagavati lokanāthe devamanussehi tassa sarīrapūjāya kayiramānāya tadā kusinārāyaṃ vasamānā bandhulamallassa bhariyā mallarājaputtī mallikā nāma upāsikā saddhā pasannā visākhāya mahāupāsikāya pasādhanasadisaṃ attano mahālatāpasādhanaṃ gandhodakena dhovitvā dukūlacumbaṭakena majjitvā aññañca bahuṃ gandhamālādiṃ gahetvā bhagavato sarīraṃ pūjesi. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana mallikāvatthu dhammapadavaṇṇanāyaṃ āgatameva.

Pītavatthe pītadhaje refers to the Mallikāvimāna. What is its origin? After the Blessed One, the Lord of the World, had completed his Buddha-work beginning with the turning of the Wheel of Dhamma up to the conversion of Subhadda the wanderer, and while the devas and humans were paying homage to his body, which had passed away into the Nibbāna-element without remainder at dawn on the Visākha full-moon day between the twin Sāla trees in the Sāla grove of the Malla kings in Upavattana in Kusinārā, at that time Mallikā, a female lay follower, the daughter of a Malla king and the wife of Bandhula Malla, residing in Kusinārā, with faith and delight, washed her great creeper-ornament, similar to the ornament of Visākhā the great female lay follower, with scented water, dried it with a dukūla cloth, and taking other various garlands and scents, honored the body of the Blessed One. This is the summary here, but the story of Mallikā has already come in detail in the Dhammapada commentary.

Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti, tena pūjānubhāvena assā aññehi asādhāraṇā uḷārā dibbasampatti ahosi. Vatthālaṅkāravimānāni sattaratanasamujjalāni visesato siṅgīsuvaṇṇobhāsāni ativiya pabhassarāni sabbā disā āsiñcamānāva suvaṇṇarasadhārāpiñjarā karonti. Athāyasmā nārado devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ disvā upagañchi. Sā taṃ disvā vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. So taṃ –

In the latter part of her life, having passed away, she was reborn among the Tāvatiṃsas, and by the power of that offering, she had extraordinary and magnificent divine wealth unlike others. Garments, ornaments, and vimānas, shining with the seven jewels, especially with the golden glow of siṅgī, were exceedingly radiant, as if drenching all directions, making them appear tinged with streams of golden dye. Then Āyasmā Nārada, wandering on a deva-pilgrimage, saw her and approached. Seeing him, she bowed, raised her joined palms, and stood. He asked her –

658.

658.

‘‘Pītavatthe pītadhaje, pītālaṅkārabhūsite;

‘‘Wearing yellow clothes, with a yellow banner, adorned with yellow ornaments;
With yellow undergarments and lovely speech, you shine as if unadorned.

659.

659.

‘‘Kā kambukāyūradhare, kañcanāveḷabhūsite;

‘‘Who are you, wearing a conch-shell necklace, adorned with golden armlets;
Covered with a golden net, with various jewel garlands?

660.

660.

‘‘Sovaṇṇamayā lohitaṅgamayā ca, muttāmayā veḷuriyamayā ca;

‘‘Made of gold and red gold, made of pearls and beryl;
Made of masāragalla gems and red gold, adorned with pārevatakkhī jewels.

661.

661.

‘‘Koci koci ettha mayūrasussaro, haṃsassarañño karavīkasussaro;

‘‘Here and there is the lovely sound of peacocks, the sound of geese, the lovely sound of karavīkas;
Their sound is heard in a lovely form, like an orchestra of five instruments being played.

662.

662.

‘‘Ratho ca te subho vaggu, nānāratanacittito;

‘‘And your chariot is very beautiful, adorned with various jewels;
With various colored elements, it shines as if well-divided.

663.

663.

‘‘Tasmiṃ rathe kañcanabimbavaṇṇe, yā tvaṃ ṭhitā bhāsasimaṃ padesaṃ;

‘‘On that chariot, the color of a golden statue, you stand, illuminating this region;
O devatā, when asked, tell, what deed is this the result of?’’ – he asked;

658.Tatthapītavattheti parisuddhacāmīkarapabhassaratāya pītobhāsanivāsane.Pītadhajeti vimānadvāre rathe ca samussitahemamayavipulaketubhāvato pītobhāsadhaje.Pītālaṅkārabhūsiteti pītobhāsehi ābharaṇehi alaṅkate. Satipi alaṅkārānaṃ nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalavividharatanavicittabhāve tādisasucaritavisesanibbattatāya pana suparisuddhacāmīkaramarīcijālavijjotitattā visesato pītanibhāsāni tassā ābharaṇāni ahesuṃ.Pītantarāhīti pītavaṇṇehi uttariyehi. ‘‘Santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabba’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 523-524) nivāsane antarasaddo āgato, idha pana ‘‘antarasāṭakā’’tiādīsu viya uttariye daṭṭhabbo. Antarā uttariyaṃ uttarāsaṅgo upasaṃbyānanti pariyāyasaddā ete.Vaggūhīti sobhanehi saṇhamaṭṭhehi.Apiḷandhāva sobhasīti tvaṃ imehi alaṅkārehi analaṅkatāpi attano rūpasampattiyāva sobhasi. Te pana alaṅkārā tava sarīraṃ patvā sobhanti, tasmā analaṅkatāpi tvaṃ alaṅkatasadisīti adhippāyo.

658. There, pītavatthe means wearing a garment that has a yellow glow due to the purity and brilliance of refined gold. Pītadhaje means having a banner with a yellow glow, due to the abundant golden standards raised at the entrance of the vimāna and on the chariot. Pītālaṅkārabhūsite means adorned with ornaments that have a yellow glow. Even though the ornaments had various patterns of shimmering jeweled networks with diverse precious stones, their ornaments were especially golden in appearance because they were produced by such a special merit and because they were illuminated by the exceedingly pure rays of refined gold. Pītantarāhī means with yellow upper garments. In instances such as ‘‘Santaruttaraparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā tato cīvaraṃ sāditabba’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 523-524), the word antara has come to mean the undergarment, but here it should be understood as the upper garment, as in "antarasāṭakā" and the like. Antarā, uttariyaṃ, uttarāsaṅgo, and upasaṃbyāna are synonyms. Vaggūhī means with beautiful, smooth, and polished qualities. Apiḷandhāva sobhasī means even unadorned by these ornaments, you shine by your own beauty. But those ornaments, having reached your body, shine; therefore, the meaning is that even unadorned, you are like one adorned.

659.Kā kambukāyūradhareti kā tvaṃ kataradevanikāyapariyāpannā suvaṇṇamayaparihārakadhare, suvaṇṇamayakeyūradhare vā. Kambuparihārakanti ca hatthālaṅkāraviseso vuccati, kāyūranti bhujālaṅkāraviseso. Atha vā kambūti suvaṇṇaṃ, tasmā kambukāyūradhare suvaṇṇamayabāhābharaṇadhareti attho.Kañcanāveḷabhūsiteti kañcanamayāveḷapiḷandhanabhūsite.Hemajālakasañchanneti ratanaparisibbitena hemamayena jālakena chāditasarīre.Nānāratanamālinīti nakkhattamālāya viya kāḷapakkharattiyaṃ sīse paṭimukkāhi vividhāhi ratanāvalīhi nānāratanamālinī kā tvanti pucchati.

659. Kā kambukāyūradhareti who are you? To which group of devas do you belong, adorned with golden bracelets or golden armlets? Kambuparihāraka refers to a specific type of hand ornament, while kāyūra refers to a specific type of arm ornament. Alternatively, kambu means gold; therefore, kambukāyūradhare means wearing golden arm ornaments. Kañcanāveḷabhūsiteti adorned with golden hair ornaments. Hemajālakasañchanneti with your body covered by a golden net interwoven with jewels. Nānāratanamālinīti like a constellation necklace on a dark night, adorned with various jeweled garlands hanging from your head; who are you? he asks.

660.Sovaṇṇamayātiādi yāhi ratanamālāhi sā devatā nānāratanamālinīti vuttā, tāsaṃ dassanaṃ. Tatthasovaṇṇamayāti siṅgīsuvaṇṇamayā mālā.Lohitaṅgamayāti padumarāgādirattamaṇimayā.Masāragallāti masāragallamaṇimayā.Sahalohitaṅgāti lohitaṅgamaṇimayāhi saddhiṃ kabaramaṇimayā ceva lohitaṅgasaṅkhātarattamaṇimayā cāti attho.Pārevatakkhīhi maṇīhi cittatāti pārevatakkhisadisehi maṇīhi yathāvuttamaṇīhi ca saṅkhatacittabhāvā imā tava kesahatthe ratanamālāti adhippāyo.

660. Sovaṇṇamayātiādi the following describes the jeweled garlands with which that devi is called nānāratanamālinī. Among them, sovaṇṇamayāti garlands made of pure gold. Lohitaṅgamayāti made of red gems such as ruby and padumarāga. Masāragallāti made of masāragalla gems. Sahalohitaṅgāti together with lohitaṅga gems, as well as kabaramaṇi gems, namely red gems known as lohitaṅga. Pārevatakkhīhi maṇīhi cittatāti adorned with dove-eye-like gems and the aforementioned gems, these jeweled garlands in your hair are intricate, is the idea.

661.Koci kocīti ekacco ekacco.Etthāti etesu mālādāmesu.Mayūrasussaroti mayūro viya sundaranādo.Haṃsassaraññoti haṃsassaro añño, haṃsasadisassaro aparo.Karavīkasussaroti karavīko viya sobhanassaro. Tesaṃ mālādāmānaṃ yathā mayūrassaro, haṃsassaro, karavīkassaro, evaṃ vaggurūpo madhurākāro saro suyyati. Kimiva?Pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyamivappavāditaṃ. Yathā kusalena vādite pañcaṅgike tūriye, evaṃ tesaṃ saro suyyati, vaggurūpoti attho. Bhummatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.

661. Koci kocīti one and another. Etthāti in these garlands. Mayūrasussaroti a beautiful sound like a peacock. Haṃsassaraññoti another sound like a swan’s. Karavīkasussaroti a lovely sound like a karavīka bird. From those garlands, a warbling, sweet sound is heard, like the sounds of a peacock, a swan, or a karavīka bird. Like what? Pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyamivappavāditaṃ Like a five-piece orchestra well played, so is their sound heard, a warbling sound, is the meaning. This is a locative usage in the sense of location.

662.Nānāvaṇṇāhi dhātūhīti anekarūpāhi akkhacakkaīsādiavayavadhātūhi.Suvibhattova sobhatīti avayavānaṃ aññamaññaṃ yuttappamāṇatāya vibhattivibhāgasampattiyā ca suvibhattova hutvā virājati. Atha vā suvibhattovāti kevalaṃ kammanibbattopi susikkhitena sippācariyena vibhattova viracito viya sobhatīti attho.

662. Nānāvaṇṇāhi dhātūhīti with various colored component parts such as axle, wheel, and shaft. Suvibhattova sobhatīti because of the fitting proportions of the parts to each other and the proper arrangement of the divisions, it shines, being well-divided. Alternatively, suvibhattova means it shines as if skillfully crafted and arranged by a well-trained artisan, even if it is solely the result of karma.

663.Kañcanabimbavaṇṇeti sātisayaṃ pītobhāsatāya kañcanabimbakasadise tasmiṃ rathe. Kañcanabimbavaṇṇeti vā tassā devatāya ālapanaṃ, gandhodakena dhovitvā jātihiṅgulakarasena majjitvā dukūlacumbaṭakena majjitakañcanapaṭimāsadiseti attho.Bhāsasimaṃ padesanti imaṃ sakalampi bhūmipadesaṃ bhāsayasi vijjotayasi.

663. Kañcanabimbavaṇṇeti in that chariot, which is like a golden statue because of its exceedingly yellow radiance. Or, Kañcanabimbavaṇṇe is an address to that devi, meaning she is like a golden statue washed with scented water and dyed with jatihingulaka dye, then polished with a dukūla cloth. Bhāsasimaṃ padesanti you illuminate this entire region of the earth.

Evaṃ therena pucchitā sāpi devatā imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Thus questioned by the Thera, that devi explained with these verses:

664.

664.

‘‘Sovaṇṇajālaṃ maṇisoṇṇacittitaṃ, muttācitaṃ hemajālena channaṃ;

‘‘Sovaṇṇajālaṃ maṇisoṇṇacittitaṃ, muttācitaṃ hemajālena channaṃ;
Parinibbute gotame appameyye, pasannacittā ahamābhiropayiṃ.

665.

665.

‘‘Tāhaṃ kammaṃ karitvāna, kusalaṃ buddhavaṇṇitaṃ;

‘‘Tāhaṃ kammaṃ karitvāna, kusalaṃ buddhavaṇṇitaṃ;
Apetasokā sukhitā, sampamodāmanāmayā’’ti.

664.Tatthasovaṇṇajālanti sarīrappamāṇena kataṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ jālaṃ.Maṇisoṇṇacittitanti sīsādiṭṭhānesu sīsūpagagīvūpagādiābharaṇavasena nānāvidhehi maṇīhi ca suvaṇṇena ca cittitaṃ.Muttācitanti antarantarā ābaddhāhi muttāvalīhi ācitaṃ.Hemajālena channanti hemamayena pabhājālena channaṃ. Tañhi nānāvidhehi maṇīhi ceva suvaṇṇena ca cittitaṃ muttāvalīhi ācitampi suparisuddhassa rattasuvaṇṇasseva yebhuyyatāya divākarakiraṇasamphassato ativiya pabhassarena hemamayena pabhājālena sañchāditaṃ ekobhāsaṃ hutvā kañcanādāsaṃ viya tiṭṭhati.Parinibbuteti anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbute.Gotameti bhagavantaṃ gottena niddisati.Appameyyeti guṇānubhāvato paminituṃ asakkuṇeyye.Pasannacittāti kammaphalavisayāya buddhārammaṇāya ca saddhāya pasannamānasā.Abhiropayinti pūjāvasena sarīre ropesiṃ paṭimuñciṃ.

664. There, sovaṇṇajālanti a golden net made to the size of the body. Maṇisoṇṇacittitanti adorned with various jewels and gold in places like the head, head ornaments, neck ornaments, and so on. Muttācitanti covered with strands of pearls strung at intervals. Hemajālena channanti covered with a golden net of light. Indeed, though adorned with various jewels and gold and covered with strands of pearls, it stands as a single, golden mass, exceedingly radiant due to the touch of the sun's rays because the abundance consists of very pure red gold, like a golden mirror. Parinibbuteti when the Buddha had attained Parinibbāna, the Nibbāna element without remainder. Gotameti he indicates the Blessed One by his gotta. Appameyyeti immeasurable due to the power of his qualities. Pasannacittāti with a mind pleased by faith in the subject of karma and with the Buddha as its object. Abhiropayinti I placed or adorned it on my body as an offering.

665.Tāhanti taṃ ahaṃ.Kusalanti kucchitasalanādiatthena kusalaṃ.Buddhavaṇṇitanti ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.139; a. ni. 4.34) sammāsambuddhena pasatthaṃ.Apetasokāti sokahetūnaṃ bhogabyasanādīnaṃ abhāvena apagatasokā. Tena cittadukkhābhāvamāha.Sukhitāti sañjātasukhā sukhappattā. Etena sarīradukkhābhāvaṃ vadati. Cittadukkhābhāvena cassā pamodāpatti, sarīradukkhābhāvena arogatā. Tenāha‘‘sampamodāmanāmayā’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayañca attho tadā attanā devatāya ca kathitaniyāmeneva saṅgītikāle āyasmatā nāradena dhammasaṅgāhakānaṃ ārocito, te ca taṃ tatheva saṅgahaṃ āropayiṃsūti.

665. Tāhanti that I. Kusalanti kusala because of destroying bad qualities. Buddhavaṇṇitanti praised by the Sammāsambuddha, beginning with "To whatever extent, bhikkhus, beings are footless or two-footed" (SN 5.139; AN 4.34). Apetasokāti free from sorrow due to the absence of causes of sorrow such as the ruin of wealth. By this, she indicates the absence of mental suffering. Sukhitāti experiencing happiness, having attained happiness. By this, she speaks of the absence of bodily suffering. With the absence of mental suffering comes joy, and with the absence of bodily suffering comes health. Therefore, she says ‘‘sampamodāmanāmayā’’. The rest is as previously stated. This meaning was declared by Āyasmā Nārada at the time of the Sangīti, in the very way it was spoken by himself and the devi, to the compilers of the Dhamma, and they included it in the Sangīti in that very way.

Mallikāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Mallikāvimānavaṇṇanā is finished.

9. Visālakkhivimānavaṇṇanā
9. Visālakkhivimānavaṇṇanā

Kā nāma tvaṃ visālakkhīti visālakkhivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati parinibbute raññā ajātasattunā attanā paṭiladdhā bhagavatā sarīradhātuyo gahetvā rājagahe thūpe ca mahe ca kate rājagahavāsinī ekā mālākāradhītā sunandā nāma upāsikā ariyasāvikā sotāpannā pituṃ gehato pesitaṃ bahuṃ mālañca gandhañca pesetvā devasikaṃ cetiye pūjaṃ kāresi, uposathadivasesu pana sayameva gantvā pūjaṃ akāsi. Sā aparabhāge aññatarena rogena phuṭṭhā kālaṃ katvā sakkassa devarañño paricārikā hutvā nibbatti. Athekadivasaṃ sā sakkena devānamindena saha cittalatāvanaṃ pāvisi. Tattha ca aññāsaṃ devatānaṃ pabhā pupphādīnaṃ pabhāhi paṭihatā hutvā vicittavaṇṇā hoti, sunandāya pana pabhā tāhi anabhibhūtā sabhāveneva aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā sakko devarājā tāya katasucaritaṃ ñātukāmo imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Kā nāma tvaṃ visālakkhīti Visālakkhī Vimāna. What is its origin? When the Blessed One attained Parinibbāna, King Ajātasattu, having obtained the bodily relics of the Blessed One for himself, built a thūpa and held a great festival in Rājagaha. In Rājagaha, a female lay follower named Sunandā, the daughter of a garland maker, was a noble disciple, a Sotāpanna. Sending many garlands and perfumes from her father's house, she daily made offerings at the cetiya. On Uposatha days, she went herself to make offerings. Later, struck by some disease, she passed away and was reborn as an attendant to Sakka, King of the Devas. Then one day, she entered the Cittalatāvana with Sakka, the King of the Devas. There, the radiance of other devis was obscured by the radiance of the flowers and other things, making them appear variegated, but Sunandā's radiance stood naturally, unobscured by them. Seeing this, Sakka, the King of the Devas, wishing to know the good deed she had done, asked her with these verses:

666.

666.

‘‘Kā nāma tvaṃ visālakkhi, ramme cittalatāvane;

‘‘Kā nāma tvaṃ visālakkhi, ramme cittalatāvane;
Samantā anupariyāsi, nārīgaṇapurakkhatā.

667.

667.

‘‘Yadā devā tāvatiṃsā, pavisanti imaṃ vanaṃ;

‘‘Yadā devā tāvatiṃsā, pavisanti imaṃ vanaṃ;
Sayoggā sarathā sabbe, citrā honti idhāgatā.

668.

668.

‘‘Tuyhañca idha pattāya, uyyāne vicarantiyā;

‘‘Tuyhañca idha pattāya, uyyāne vicarantiyā;
Kāye na dissatī cittaṃ, kena rūpaṃ tavedisaṃ;
Devate pucchitācikkha, kissa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti.

666.Tatthakā nāma tvanti purimattabhāve kā nāma kīdisī nāma tvaṃ, yattha katena sucaritena ayaṃ te īdisī ānubhāvasampatti ahosīti adhippāyo.Visālakkhīti vipulalocane.

666. There, kā nāma tvanti what is your name, of what kind, in your previous existence, by which good deed this attainment of such power came to you, is the idea. Visālakkhīti broad-eyed one.

667.Yadāti yasmiṃ kāle.Imaṃ vananti imaṃ cittalatānāmakaṃ upavanaṃ.Citrā hontīti imasmiṃ cittalatāvane vicittapabhāsaṃsaggena attano sarīravatthālaṅkārādīnaṃ pakatiobhāsatopi visiṭṭhabhāvappattiyā vicitrākārā honti.Idhāgatāti idha āgatā sampattā, idha vā āgamanahetu.

667. Yadāti at what time. Imaṃ vananti this park called Cittalatā. Citrā hontīti in this Cittalatāvana, due to contact with variegated radiance, the natural radiance of their bodies, clothes, ornaments, and so on becomes more distinct, and they become variegated. Idhāgatāti those who have come here, arrived here, or the reason for coming here.

668.Idha pattāyāti imaṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattāya upagatāya.Kenarūpaṃ tavedisanti kena kāraṇena tava rūpaṃ sarīraṃ edisaṃ evarūpaṃ, cittalatāvanassa pabhaṃ abhibhavantaṃ tiṭṭhatīti adhippāyo.

668. Idha pattāyāti having arrived at this place, having approached. Kena rūpaṃ tavedisanti by what cause is your rūpa, your body, like this, standing overwhelming the radiance of the Cittalatāvana, is the idea.

Evaṃ sakkena puṭṭhā sā devatā imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Thus questioned by Sakka, that devi explained with these verses:

669.

669.

‘‘Yena kammena devinda, rūpaṃ mayhaṃ gatī ca me;

‘‘Yena kammena devinda, rūpaṃ mayhaṃ gatī ca me;
Iddhi ca ānubhāvo ca, taṃ suṇohi purindada.

670.

670.

‘‘Ahaṃ rājagahe ramme, sunandā nāmupāsikā;

‘‘Ahaṃ rājagahe ramme, sunandā nāmupāsikā;
Saddhā sīlena sampannā, saṃvibhāgaratā sadā.

671.

671.

‘‘Acchādanañca bhattañca, senāsanaṃ padīpiyaṃ;

‘‘Acchādanañca bhattañca, senāsanaṃ padīpiyaṃ;
Adāsiṃ ujubhūtesu, vippasannena cetasā.

672.

672.

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;
Pāṭihāriyapakkhañca, aṭṭhaṅgasusamāgataṃ.

673.

673.

‘‘Uposathaṃ upavasissaṃ, sadā sīlesu saṃvutā;

‘‘Uposathaṃ upavasissaṃ, sadā sīlesu saṃvutā;
Saññamā saṃvibhāgā ca, vimānaṃ āvasāmahaṃ.

674.

674.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viratā, musāvādā ca saññatā;

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viratā, musāvādā ca saññatā;
Theyyā ca aticārā ca, majjapānā ca ārakā.

675.

675.

‘‘Pañcasikkhāpade ratā, ariyasaccāna kovidā;

‘‘Pañcasikkhāpade ratā, ariyasaccāna kovidā;
Upāsikā cakkhumato, gotamassa yasassino.

676.

676.

‘‘Tassā me ñātikulā dāsī, sadā mālābhihārati;

‘‘Tassā me ñātikulā dāsī, sadā mālābhihārati;
Tāhaṃ bhagavato thūpe, sabbamevābhiropayiṃ.

677.

677.

‘‘Uposathe cahaṃ gantvā, mālāgandhavilepanaṃ;

‘‘Uposathe cahaṃ gantvā, mālāgandhavilepanaṃ;
Thūpasmiṃ abhiropesiṃ, pasannā sehi pāṇibhi.

678.

678.

‘‘Tena kammena devinda, rūpaṃ mayhaṃ gatī ca me;

‘‘Tena kammena devinda, rūpaṃ mayhaṃ gatī ca me;
Iddhi ca ānubhāvo ca, yaṃ mālaṃ abhiropayiṃ.

679.

679.

‘‘Yañca sīlavatī āsiṃ, na taṃ tāva vipaccati;

‘‘Yañca sīlavatī āsiṃ, na taṃ tāva vipaccati;
Āsā ca pana me devinda, sakadāgāminī siya’’nti.

669.Tatthagatīti ayaṃ devagati, nibbatti vā.Iddhīti ayaṃ deviddhi, adhippāyasamijjhanaṃ vā.Ānubhāvoti pabhāvo.Purindadāti sakkaṃ ālapati. So hi pure dānaṃ adāsīti ‘‘purindado’’ti vuccati.

669. There, gatīti this deva existence, or rebirth. Iddhīti this deva power, or the fulfillment of intentions. Ānubhāvoti influence. Purindadāti he addresses Sakka. He is called "Purindada" because he gave alms in the past.

676.Ñātikulāti pitu gehaṃ sandhāya vadati.Sadā mālābhihāratīti sadā sabbakālaṃ divase divase ñātikulato dāsiyā pupphaṃ mayhaṃ abhiharīyati.Sabbamevābhiropayinti mayhaṃ piḷandhanatthāya pitugehato āhaṭaṃ mālaṃ aññañca gandhādiṃ sabbameva attanā aparibhuñjitvā bhagavato thūpe pūjanavasena abhiropayiṃ pūjaṃ kāresiṃ.

676. Ñātikulāti he speaks referring to his father's house. Sadā mālābhihāratīti always, at all times, day by day, flowers are brought to me from my relatives’ house by a female servant. Sabbamevābhiropayinti without using for myself any of the garlands and other perfumes brought from my father’s house for my adornment, I offered them all to the thūpa of the Blessed One as an act of worship.

677-8.Uposathe cahaṃ gantvāti uposathadivase ahameva thūpaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā.Yaṃ mālaṃ abhiropayinti yaṃ tadā bhagavato thūpe mālāgandhābhiropanaṃ kataṃ, tena kammenāti yojanā.

677-8. Uposathe cahaṃ gantvāti on the Uposatha day, I myself went to the thūpa. Yaṃ mālaṃ abhiropayinti the connection is: by that karma, the offering of garlands and perfumes made to the thūpa of the Blessed One at that time.

679.Na taṃ tāva vipaccatīti yaṃ sīlavatī āsiṃ, taṃ sīlarakkhaṇaṃ taṃ rakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ pūjāmayapuññassa balavabhāvena aladdhokāsaṃ na tāva vipaccati, na vipaccituṃ āraddhaṃ, aparasmiṃyeva attabhāve tassa vipākoti attho.Āsā ca pana me devinda, sakadāgāminī siyanti ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho ahaṃ sakadāgāminī bhaveyya’’nti patthanā ca me devinda, ariyadhammavisayāva, na bhavavisesavisayā. Sā pana sappimaṇḍaṃ icchato dadhito pacitaṃ viya anipphādinīti dasseti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

679. Na taṃ tāva vipaccatīti because the act of protecting my sīla is strong, that sīla, which I maintained, has not yet found an opportunity to ripen; it has not begun to ripen, its result will occur in another existence, is the meaning. Āsā ca pana me devinda, sakadāgāminī siyanti "how could I become a Sakadāgāminī?" this aspiration of mine, Devinda, only concerns the Noble Dhamma, not a specific existence. However, it shows that it is unproductive, like churning butter from curdled milk when one wants ghee. The rest is as previously stated.

Imaṃ pana atthaṃ sakko devānamindo attanā ca tāya devadhītāya ca vuttaniyāmeneva āyasmato vaṅgīsattherassa ārocesi. Āyasmā vaṅgīso saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakānaṃ mahātherānaṃ ārocesi, te ca taṃ tatheva saṅgītiṃ āropayiṃsūti.

This meaning, in the very way it was spoken by Sakka, King of the Devas, and that devadhītā, was reported to Āyasmā Vaṅgīsatthera. Āyasmā Vaṅgīsa reported it to the Mahātheras who compiled the Dhamma at the time of the Sangīti, and they included it in the Sangīti in that very way.

Visālakkhivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Visālakkhivimānavaṇṇanā is finished.

10. Pāricchattakavimānavaṇṇanā
10. Pāricchattakavimānavaṇṇanā

Pāricchattake koviḷāreti pāricchattakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sāvatthivāsī aññataro upāsako bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, svātanāya nimantetvā, attano gehadvāre mahantaṃ maṇḍapaṃ sajjetvā sāṇipākāraṃ parikkhipitvā upari vitānaṃ bandhitvā dhajapaṭākādayo ussāpetvā nānāvirāgavaṇṇāni vatthāni gandhadāmamālādāmāni ca olambetvā sittasammaṭṭhe padese āsanāni paññāpetvā bhagavato kālaṃ ārocesi. Atha bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya devavimānaṃ viya alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ maṇḍapaṃ pavisitvā sahassaraṃsī viya aṇṇavakucchiṃ obhāsayamāno paññatte āsane nisīdi. Upāsako gandhapupphadhūmadīpehi bhagavantaṃ pūjesi.

Pāricchattake koviḷāreti Pāricchattaka Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was staying at Jetavana in Sāvatthi. At that time, a certain lay follower living in Sāvatthi approached the Blessed One, invited him for the next day, prepared a large pavilion at the entrance to his house, surrounded it with a screen of cloth, hung a canopy overhead, raised flags and banners, draped cloths of various colors, and hung garlands and strands of flowers. He had seats arranged on the sprinkled and swept ground and informed the Blessed One when it was time. Then, in the forenoon, the Blessed One, having dressed and taken his bowl and robe, entered the pavilion, which was adorned and prepared like a deva's palace, and sat down on the prepared seat, illuminating the ocean’s belly like a thousand rays of light. The lay follower honored the Blessed One with perfumes, flowers, incense, and lamps.

Tena ca samayena aññatarā kaṭṭhahārikā itthī andhavane supupphitaṃ asokarukkhaṃ disvā sapallavaṅkurāni piṇḍīkatāni bahūni asokapupphāni gahetvā āgacchantī, bhagavantaṃ tattha nisinnaṃ disvā pasannacittā āsanassa samantato tehi pupphehi pupphasantharaṃ santharantī, bhagavato pūjaṃ katvā vanditvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā namassamānā agamāsi. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti, accharāsahassaparivārā yebhuyyena nandanavane naccantī gāyantī pāricchattakamālā ganthentī pamodamānā kīḷantī sukhaṃ anubhavati. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayena devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gantvā taṃ disvā tāya katakammaṃ imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

At that time, a certain woman who gathered firewood, seeing a well-flowered ashoka tree in the Andhavana, took many ashoka flowers tied with shoots and leaves and came along. Seeing the Blessed One sitting there, with a clear mind, she spread a layer of flowers around the seat with those flowers, paid homage to the Blessed One, venerated Him, circumambulated Him three times, paid homage and departed. Later, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Surrounded by a thousand nymphs, mostly in the Nandanavana, she danced, sang, strung garlands of pāricchattaka flowers, rejoiced, played, and experienced happiness. Then, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a divine tour in the manner described above, went to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, saw her, and asked about the deed she had done with these verses:

680.

680.

‘‘Pāricchattake koviḷāre, ramaṇīye manorame;

“In the Pāricchattaka Koviḷāra, delightful and pleasing,
Stringing a divine garland, you sing and greatly rejoice.

681.

681.

‘‘Tassā te naccamānāya, aṅgamaṅgehi sabbaso;

“As you dance, with every part of your body,
Divine sounds emanate, delightful and pleasing.

682.

682.

‘‘Tassā te naccamānāya, aṅgamaṅgehi sabbaso;

“As you dance, with every part of your body,
Divine scents waft, pure and pleasing.

683.

683.

‘‘Vivattamānā kāyena, yā veṇīsu piḷandhanā;

“As your body turns, whatever adorns your braids,
Their sound is heard, like a five-piece orchestra.

684.

684.

‘‘Vaṭaṃsakā vātadhutā, vātena sampakampitā;

“The earrings, shaken by the wind, trembling in the breeze,
Their sound is heard, like a five-piece orchestra.

685.

685.

‘‘Yāpi te sirasmiṃ mālā, sucigandhā manoramā;

“And that garland on your head, pure and pleasing,
Its scent wafts in every direction, like a mañjūsaka tree.

686.

686.

‘‘Ghāyase taṃ sucigandhaṃ, rūpaṃ passasi amānusaṃ;

“You smell that pure scent, you see an inhuman form,
Tell me, goddess, when asked, what deed is this fruit of?”

680.Tatthapāricchattake koviḷāreti pāricchattakanāmake koviḷārapupphe ādāya dibbamālaṃ ganthamānāti yojanā. Yañhi lokiyā ‘‘pārijāta’’nti vadanti, taṃ māgadhabhāsāya ‘‘pāricchattaka’’nti vuccati. Koviḷāroti ca koviḷārajātiko, so ca manussalokepi devalokepi koviḷāro, tassāpi jātīti vadanti.

680. Here, pāricchattake koviḷāre means taking a koviḷāra flower named pāricchattaka and stringing a divine garland. What lay people call "pārijāta" is called "pāricchattaka" in Magadhi. And koviḷāra means a type of koviḷāra. They say that koviḷāras exist both in the human world and in the world of devas, and it is a species of that.

681.Tassā pana devatāya naccanakāle aṅgabhāravasena sarīrato ca piḷandhanato ca ativiya madhuro saddo niccharati, gandho sadā sabbā disāpi pharitvā tiṭṭhati. Tenāha‘‘tassā te naccamānāyā’’tiādi. Tatthasavanīyāti sotuṃ yuttā, savanassa vā hitā, kaṇṇasukhāti attho.

681. Moreover, at the time of that goddess's dance, a very sweet sound emanates from her body and adornments due to the movement of her limbs, and a fragrance always permeates all directions. Therefore, he said, "tassā te naccamānāyā" etc. Here, savanīyā means fit to be heard, or beneficial to hearing, meaning pleasing to the ear.

683.Vivattamānā kāyenāti tava kāyena sarīrena parivattamānena, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.Yā veṇīsu piḷandhanāti yāni te kesaveṇīsu piḷandhanāni, vibhattilopo cettha daṭṭhabbo, liṅgavipallāso vā.

683. Vivattamānā kāyena means with your body turning, this instrumental case denotes the characteristic. Yā veṇīsu piḷandhanā means whatever adorns your hair braids; an elision of the inflection should be seen here, or a gender shift.

684.Vaṭaṃsakāti ratanamayā kaṇṇikā vaṭaṃsakāti attho.Vātadhutāti mandena mālutena dhūpayamānā.Vātenasampakampitāti vātena samantato visesato kampitā calitā. Atha vāvaṭaṃsakā vātadhutā, vātena sampakampitāti avāteritāpi vāteritāpi ye te vaṭaṃsakā kampitā, tesaṃ suyyati nigghosoti atthayojanā.

684. Vaṭaṃsakā means jeweled earrings, the meaning is vaṭaṃsakā. Vātadhutā means shaken by a gentle breeze. Vātena sampakampitā means shaken and moved especially by the wind from all sides. Or, alternatively, vaṭaṃsakā vātadhutā, vātena sampakampitā means those earrings that are shaken whether moved by the wind or not, the interpretation is that their sound is heard.

685.Vāti gandho disā sabbāti tassā te sirasmiṃ dibbamālāya gandho vāyati sabbā disā. Yathā kiṃ?Rukkho mañjūsako yathāti, yathā nāma mañjūsako rukkho supupphito attano gandhena bahūni yojanāni pharamāno sabbā disā vāyati, evaṃ tava sirasmiṃ piḷandhanamālāya gandhoti attho. So kira rukkho gandhamādane paccekabuddhānaṃ uposathakaraṇamaṇḍalamāḷakamajjhe tiṭṭhati. Yattakāni devaloke ca manussaloke ca surabhikusumāni, tāni tassa sākhaggesu nibbattanti. Tena so ativiya sugandho hoti. Evaṃ tāya devatāya piḷandhanamālāya gandhoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rukkho mañjūsako yathā’’ti.

685. Vāti gandho disā sabbā means the scent of the divine garland on your head wafts in all directions. Like what? Rukkho mañjūsako yathā means, just as a mañjūsaka tree, when well-flowered, wafts its scent many leagues, filling all directions, so too is the scent of the garland worn on your head. It is said that this tree stands in the middle of the Uposatha-observance pavilion of the Paccekabuddhas on Gandhamādana mountain. As many fragrant flowers as there are in the worlds of gods and humans arise on the tips of its branches. Therefore, it is exceedingly fragrant. Similarly, is the scent of the garland worn by that goddess. Therefore, it was said, "rukkho mañjūsako yathā".

686.Yadipi tassa saggassa chaphassāyatanikabhāvato sabbānipi tattha ārammaṇāni piyarūpāniyeva, gandharūpānaṃ pana savisesānaṃ tassā devatāya lābhibhāvato‘‘ghāyase taṃ sucigandhaṃ, rūpaṃ passasi amānusa’’nti vuttaṃ.

686. Although, since that heaven is of the six sense-sphere realm, all the objects there are indeed of pleasing form, because that goddess has special attainment of fragrant forms, it was said "ghāyase taṃ sucigandhaṃ, rūpaṃ passasi amānusaṃ".

Atha devatā dvīhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Then the goddess explained with two verses:

687.

687.

‘‘Pabhassaraṃ accimantaṃ, vaṇṇagandhena saṃyutaṃ;

“Radiant and bright, endowed with color and scent,
An ashoka flower garland, I offered to the Buddha.

688.

688.

‘‘Tāhaṃ kammaṃ karitvāna, kusalaṃ buddhavaṇṇitaṃ;

“Having done that deed, meritorious and praised by the Buddha,
Free from sorrow, happy, greatly rejoicing, and without illness.”

687.Tattha sudhotapavāḷasaṅghātasannibhassa kiñjakkhakesarasamudāyena bhāṇuraṃsijālassa viya asokapupphuttamassa tadā upaṭṭhitataṃ sandhāyāha‘‘pabhassaraṃ accimanta’’nti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

687. There, referring to the excellence of the ashoka flowers that were present at that time, like a mass of molten coral, splendid with a network of rays from the collection of filaments and pollen, she said, "pabhassaraṃ accimantaṃ". The rest is as previously stated.

Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tāya devatāya attano sucaritakamme kathite saparivārāya tassā dhammaṃ desetvā tato manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato taṃ pavattiṃ kathesi. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattamahājanassa dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, after the goddess told of her good conduct, taught her and her retinue the Dhamma, and then returned to the human world and related that event to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that the basis for a teaching and taught the Dhamma to the assembled multitude, and that teaching was beneficial to the multitude.

Pāricchattakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Pāricchattaka celestial mansion is complete.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Paramatthadīpanī, commentary on the Khuddaka Nikāya, in the Vimānavatthu,

Dasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa tatiyassa pāricchattakavaggassa

The meaning-explanation of the third Pāricchattaka group, adorned with ten objects,

Atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Is complete.

4. Mañjiṭṭhakavaggo

4. Mañjiṭṭhaka Group

1. Mañjiṭṭhakavimānavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the Mañjiṭṭhaka Celestial Mansion

mañjiṭṭhake vimānasminti mañjiṭṭhakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tattha aññataro upāsako bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā anantaravimāne vuttanayeneva maṇḍapaṃ sajjetvā tattha nisinnaṃ satthāraṃ pūjetvā dānaṃ deti. Tena ca samayena aññatarā kuladāsī andhavane supupphitaṃ sālarukkhaṃ disvā tattha pupphāni gahetvā hīrehi āvuṇitvā vaṭaṃsake katvā puna bahūni muttapupphāni aggapupphāni ca gahetvā nagaraṃ paviṭṭhā. Tasmiṃ maṇḍape yugandharapabbatakucchiṃ obhāsayamānaṃ bālasūriyaṃ viya chabbaṇṇabuddharaṃsiyo vissajjetvā nisinnaṃ, bhagavantaṃ disvā pasannacittā tehi pupphehi pūjentī vaṭaṃsakāni āsanassa samantato ṭhapetvā itarāni ca pupphāni okiritvā sakkaccaṃ vanditvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā agamāsi. Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti, tattha tassā rattaphalikamayaṃ vimānaṃ, tassa ca purato suvaṇṇavālukāsanthatabhūmibhāgaṃ mahantaṃ sālavanaṃ pāturahosi. Sā yadā vimānato nikkhamitvā sālavanaṃ pavisati, tadā sālasākhā onamitvā tassā upari kusumāni okiranti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayena upagantvā imāhi gāthāhi katakammaṃ pucchi –

mañjiṭṭhake vimānasmiṃ means the mañjiṭṭhaka celestial mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Savatthi, in Jeta's Grove. There, a certain lay follower invited the Blessed One, and in the same manner as described in the Anantaravimāna, prepared a pavilion, and honoring the Teacher who was seated there, gave alms. At that time, a certain female servant, seeing a well-flowered sal tree in the Andhavana, took flowers from it, wound them with gold ornaments, and made earrings. Then, taking many jasmine flowers and choice flowers, she entered the city. Seeing the Blessed One seated in that pavilion, emitting six-colored Buddha-rays like the young sun illuminating the side of Mount Yugandhara, with a clear mind, she honored Him with those flowers, placed the earrings around the seat, scattered the other flowers, respectfully venerated Him, circumambulated Him three times, and departed. Later, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. There, a celestial mansion made of red crystal appeared for her, and in front of it, a large sal forest appeared on a ground covered with golden sand. When she came out of the mansion and entered the sal forest, the sal branches bent down and scattered flowers upon her. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, approaching her in the manner described above, asked about the deed she had done with these verses:

689.

689.

‘‘Mañjiṭṭhake vimānasmiṃ, soṇṇavālukasanthate;

“In the mañjiṭṭhaka celestial mansion, on the golden-sanded ground,
You delight in well-played five-piece music.

690.

690.

‘‘Tamhā vimānā oruyha, nimmitā ratanāmayā;

“Descending from that mansion, fashioned of gems,
You enter the sal forest, flowering in all seasons.

691.

691.

‘‘Yassa yasseva sālassa, mūle tiṭṭhasi devate;

“At the base of whichever sal tree you stand, goddess,
That excellent tree, bending down, releases flowers.

692.

692.

‘‘Vāteritaṃ sālavanaṃ, ādhutaṃ dijasevitaṃ;

“The sal forest, stirred by the wind, shaken, frequented by birds,
Its scent wafts in every direction, like a mañjūsaka tree.

693.

693.

‘‘Ghāyase taṃ sucigandhaṃ, rūpaṃ passasi amānusaṃ;

“You smell that pure scent, you see an inhuman form,
Tell me, goddess, when asked, what deed is this fruit of?”

689.Tatthamañjiṭṭhake vimānasminti rattaphalikamaye vimāne. Sinduvārakaṇavīramakulasadisavaṇṇañhi ‘‘mañjiṭṭhaka’’nti vuccati.Soṇṇavālukasanthateti samantato vippakiṇṇāhi suvaṇṇavālukāhi santhatabhūmibhāge.Ramasi suppavāditeti suṭṭhu pavāditena pañcaṅgikena tūriyena abhiramasi.

689. There, mañjiṭṭhake vimānasmiṃ means in the celestial mansion made of red crystal. What is similar in color to sinduvāra, kaṇavīra, and makula is called "mañjiṭṭhaka". Soṇṇavālukasanthate means on a ground spread with golden sand scattered all around. Ramasi suppavādite means you delight in well-played five-piece music.

690.Nimittāratanāmayāti tava sucaritasippinā abhinimmitā ratanamayā vimānā.Ogāhasīti pavisasi.Sabbakālikanti sabbakāle sukhaṃ sabbautusappāyaṃ, sabbakāle pupphanakaṃ vā.

690. Nimittā ratanāmayā means celestial mansions made of gems, created by your skillful good deeds. Ogāhasī means you enter. Sabbakālikaṃ means happiness at all times, suitable for all seasons, or flowering at all times.

692.Vāteritanti yathā pupphāni okiranti, evaṃ vātena īritaṃ calitaṃ.Ādhutanti mandena mālutena saṇikasaṇikaṃ vidhūpayamānaṃ.Dijasevitanti mayūrakokilādisakuṇasaṅghehi upasevitaṃ.

692. Vāterita means stirred, moved by the wind, just as the flowers are scattered. Ādhuta means gently shaken by a mild breeze. Dijasevita means frequented by flocks of birds such as peacocks and cuckoos.

Evaṃ therena puṭṭhā sā devatā imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Asked thus by the Elder, that goddess explained with these verses:

694.

694.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, dāsī ayirakule ahuṃ;

“Among humans, I was a human being, a servant in a noble family;
Seeing the Buddha seated, I scattered sal flowers.

695.

695.

‘‘Vaṭaṃsakañca sukataṃ, sālapupphamayaṃ ahaṃ;

“And earrings well-made, of sal flowers,
I offered to the Buddha, with joyful hands.

696.

696.

‘‘Tāhaṃ kammaṃ karitvāna, kusalaṃ buddhavaṇṇitaṃ;

“Having done that deed, meritorious and praised by the Buddha,
Free from sorrow, happy, greatly rejoicing, and without illness.”

694-5.Tatthaayirakuleti ayyakule, sāmikageheti attho.Ahunti ahosiṃ.Okirinti pupphehi vippakiriṃ.Upanāmesinti pūjāvasena upanāmesiṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

694-5. There, ayirakule means in the noble family, meaning the house of the master. Ahuṃ means I was. Okiriṃ means I scattered the flowers. Upanāmesiṃ means I offered as homage. The rest is as previously stated.

Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno saparivārāya tassā devatāya dhammaṃ desetvā manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato tamatthaṃ nivedesi. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattamahājanassa dhammaṃ desesi. Desanā sadevakassa lokassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, after teaching the Dhamma to that goddess and her retinue, returned to the human world and reported that matter to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made that the basis for a teaching and taught the Dhamma to the assembled multitude. The teaching was beneficial to the world, including the devas.

Mañjiṭṭhakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Mañjiṭṭhaka celestial mansion is complete.

2. Pabhassaravimānavaṇṇanā
2. Description of the Pabhassara Celestial Mansion

Pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibheti pabhassaravimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati. Tena ca samayena rājagahe aññataro upāsako mahāmoggallānatthere abhippasanno hoti. Tassekā dhītā saddhā pasannā, sāpi there garucittīkārabahulā hoti. Athekadivasaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno rājagahe piṇḍāya caranto taṃ kulaṃ upasaṅkami. Sā theraṃ disvā somanassajātā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā there tattha nisinne sumanamālāya pūjetvā madhuraṃ guḷaphāṇitaṃ therassa patte ākiri, thero anumoditukāmo nisīdi. Sā gharāvāsassa bahukiccatāya anokāsataṃ pavedetvā ‘‘aññasmiṃ divase dhammaṃ sossāmī’’ti theraṃ vanditvā uyyojesi. Tadaheva ca sā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno upasaṅkamitvā imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhe means the Pabhassara celestial mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Rajagaha. At that time, a certain lay follower in Rajagaha had great faith in Venerable Mahāmoggallāna. He had a daughter who was faithful and devoted, and she also held the Elder in great esteem and respect. Then, one day, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while wandering for alms in Rajagaha, approached that family. Seeing the Elder, she became joyful, prepared a seat, honored the Elder who was seated there with jasmine flowers, and poured sweet molasses candy into the Elder's bowl. The Elder sat down, intending to give thanks. She, being busy with household affairs and unable to find the time, excused herself, saying, "I will listen to the Dhamma on another day," venerated the Elder, and sent him away. That very day, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna approached her and asked her with these verses:

697.

697.

‘‘Pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhe, surattavatthavasane;

“O, radiant, excellent, and shining, clad in beautiful red garments,
Powerful one, with body lovely as sandalwood,
Who are you, beautiful goddess, who venerates me?

698.

698.

‘‘Pallaṅko ca te mahaggho, nānāratanacittito ruciro;

“And your couch, of great value, adorned with various gems and delightful,
Where you sit and shine, like the king of gods in Nandana Grove.

699.

699.

‘‘Kiṃ tvaṃ pure sucaritamācarī bhadde, kissa kammassa vipākaṃ;

“What good deeds did you do in the past, virtuous one? What is the result of what action?
You experience in the world of the devas, tell me when asked, goddess;
What deed is this fruit of?”

697.Tatthapabhassaravaravaṇṇanibheti nibhāti dibbatīti nibhā, vaṇṇova nibhā vaṇṇanibhā, ativiya obhāsanato pabhassarā chavidosābhāvena varā uttamā vaṇṇanibhā etissāti pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhā. Āmantanavasena ‘‘pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhe’’ti vuttaṃ.Surattavatthavasaneti suṭṭhu rattavatthanivatthe.Candanaruciragatteti candanānulittaṃ viya ruciragatte, gosītacandanena bahalatarānulittaṃ viya surattamanuññasarīrāvayaveti attho, candanānulepena vā ruciragatte.

697. There, pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhe means nibhā is brightness, vaṇṇova nibhā is color-brightness, and vaṇṇanibhā means brightness of color, so she is called pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhā because she is exceedingly radiant and excellent due to the absence of dull complexion. "pabhassaravaravaṇṇanibhe" is said in the vocative case. Surattavatthavasane means well-clothed in red garments. Candanaruciragatte means with a body as lovely as if smeared with sandalwood, meaning with limbs of a very pleasing body, as if thickly smeared with Gosīta sandalwood, or with a body lovely due to sandalwood paste.

Evaṃ therena puṭṭhā devatā imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Thus asked by the Elder, the goddess explained with these verses:

700.

700.

‘‘Piṇḍāya te carantassa, mālaṃ phāṇitañca adadaṃ bhante;

“As you wandered for alms, I gave you a garland and molasses candy, venerable sir;
This is the result of that deed, which I experience in the world of the devas.

701.

701.

‘‘Hoti ca me anutāpo, aparaddhaṃ dukkhitañca me bhante;

"And I have remorse, afflicted and suffering, O Bhante;
Because I did not listen to the Dhamma, well-proclaimed by the Dhammarāja."

702.

702.

‘‘Taṃ taṃ vadāmi bhaddante, yassa me anukampiyo koci;

"That, that I say, O good sir, to whomever I feel compassion;
Establish them in the Dhammas, well-proclaimed by the Dhammarāja."

703.

703.

‘‘Yesaṃ atthi saddhā buddhe, dhamme ca saṅgharatane;

"Those who have faith in the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Sangha-jewel;
They outshine me, in lifespan, glory, and splendor."

704.

704.

‘‘Patāpena vaṇṇena uttaritarā, aññe mahiddhikatarā mayā devā’’ti.

"More superior in power and beauty, other more mighty devas than I."

700.Tatthamālanti sumanapupphaṃ.Phāṇitanti ucchurasaṃ gahetvā kataphāṇitaṃ.

700. There, māla means sumana flowers. Phāṇita means phāṇita made by taking sugarcane juice.

701.Anutāpoti vippaṭisāro. Tassa kāraṇamāha‘‘aparaddhaṃ dukkhatañca me bhante’’ti. Idāni taṃ sarūpato dasseti‘‘sāhaṃ dhammaṃ nāssosi’’nti, sā ahaṃ tadā tava desetukāmassa dhammaṃ na suṇiṃ. Kīdisaṃ?Sudesitaṃ dhammarājenāti, sammāsambuddhena ādikalyāṇāditāya ekantaniyyānikatāya ca svākhātanti attho.

701. Anutāpo means remorse. She states the reason for it, "aparaddhaṃ dukkhatañca me bhante": "I am afflicted and suffering, O Bhante." Now, she shows that in its own form, "sāhaṃ dhammaṃ nāssosiṃ": "I did not listen to the Dhamma," that I did not listen to the Dhamma of you, who wanted to preach. What kind of Dhamma? "Sudesitaṃ dhammarājena": "well-proclaimed by the Dhammarāja," means well-expounded by the Sammāsambuddha, due to being auspicious in the beginning, etc., and being exclusively leading to liberation.

702.Tanti tasmā dhammarājena sudesitattā asavanassa ca mādisānaṃ anutāpahetubhāvato.Tanti tuvaṃ, tuyhanti attho.Yassāti yo assa.Anukampiyoti anukampitabbo.Kocīti yo koci.Dhammesūti sīlādidhammesu. ‘‘Dhamme hī’’ti vā pāṭho, sāsanadhammeti attho. Hīti nipātamattaṃ, vacanavipallāso vā.Tanti anukampitabbapuggalaṃ.Sudesitanti suṭṭhu desitaṃ.

702. Taṃ: therefore, because it is well-proclaimed by the Dhammarāja and because not listening to it is a cause for remorse for people like me. Taṃ: you, meaning to you. Yassa: to whom. Anukampiyo: worthy of compassion. Kocī: whoever. Dhammesu: in the Dhammas such as morality, etc. Alternatively, there is the reading "Dhamme hī," meaning the Dhamma of the Teaching. Hī is merely a particle, or it is a change of wording. Taṃ: the person worthy of compassion. Sudesitaṃ: well-proclaimed.

703-4.Te maṃ ativirocantīti te ratanattaye pasannā devaputtā maṃ atikkamitvā virocanti.Patāpenāti tejasā ānubhāvena.Aññeti ye aññe.Mayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Vaṇṇena uttaritarā mahiddhikatarā ca devā, te ratanattaye abhippasannāyevāti dasseti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

703-4. Te maṃ ativirocantī: those devaputtas who are devoted to the Triple Gem outshine me. Patāpena: by power, influence. Aññe: those others. Mayā: ablative case without consideration. Devas more superior in beauty and more mighty, show that they are indeed fully devoted to the Triple Gem. The rest is as previously stated.

Pabhassaravimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Pabhassara Vimāna is finished.

3. Nāgavimānavaṇṇanā
3. Description of the Nāga Vimāna

Alaṅkatā maṇikañcanācitanti nāgavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṃ viharati isipatane migadāye. Tena samayena bārāṇasivāsinī ekā upāsikā saddhā pasannā sīlācārasampannā bhagavantaṃ uddissa vatthayugaṃ vāyāpetvā suparidhotaṃ kārāpetvā upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato pādamūle ṭhapetvā evamāha ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante bhagavā, imaṃ vatthayugaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya yaṃ mama assa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti. Bhagavā taṃ paṭiggahetvā tassā upanissayasampattiṃ disvā dhammaṃ desesi, sā desanāvasāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahitvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gehaṃ agamāsi. Sā na cirasseva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppannā sakkassa devarājassa piyā ahosi vallabhā yasuttarā nāma nāmena. Tassā puññānubhāvena hemajālasañchanno kuñjaravaro nibbatti, tassa ca khandhe maṇimayo maṇḍapo, majjhe supaññattaratanapallaṅko nibbatti, dvīsu dantesu cassa kamalakuvalayujjalā ramaṇīyā dve pokkharaṇiyo pāturahesuṃ. Tattha padumakaṇṇikāsu ṭhitā devadhītā paggahitapañcaṅgikatūriyā naccanti ceva gāyanti ca.

Alaṅkatā maṇikañcanācitaṃ means the Nāga Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Bārāṇasī, at Isipatana, the Deer Park. At that time, a female lay follower living in Bārāṇasī, faithful, devoted, accomplished in virtuous conduct, having had a pair of cloths woven for the Blessed One, having had them well-cleaned, approached the Blessed One, placed them at the Blessed One's feet, and said thus: "May the Blessed One accept this pair of cloths out of compassion, which may be for my long-term welfare and happiness." The Blessed One, having accepted it, having seen the maturity of her supporting conditions, preached the Dhamma. At the end of the discourse, she was established in the fruit of Stream-entry. Having paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him, she went home. Not long after, she passed away and was reborn among the Tāvatiṃsa devas, and became beloved and dear to Sakka, the King of the Devas, named Yasuttarā. By the power of her merit, an excellent elephant, covered with a golden net, arose. On its back arose a jeweled pavilion made of gems, and in the middle arose a well-prepared jeweled couch. On its two tusks, two lovely ponds appeared, radiant with lotus and blue water lily. There, deva-maidens, standing on the lotus pistils, playing musical instruments with five components held up, danced and sang.

Satthā bārāṇasiyaṃ yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṃ pakkāmi. Anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā tatra sudaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Atha sā devatā attanā anubhuyyamānaṃ dibbasampattiṃ oloketvā tassā kāraṇaṃ upadhārentī ‘‘satthu vatthayugadānakāraṇa’’nti ñatvā sañjātasomanassā bhagavati pasādabahumānā vanditukāmā abhikkantāya rattiyā hatthikkhandhavaragatā ākāsena āgantvā tato otaritvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ āyasmā vaṅgīso bhagavato anuññāya imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

The Teacher, having dwelt in Bārāṇasī as long as he pleased, set out on tour towards Sāvatthi. In due course, having arrived at Sāvatthi, the Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery. Then that devatā, looking at the divine wealth she was experiencing, considering its cause, knowing that it was "because of the gift of the pair of cloths to the Teacher," with joy arisen, with much appreciation and reverence for the Blessed One, wanting to pay homage, having gone on an elephant’s excellent back in the sky during the night that had passed, having descended from there, having paid homage to the Blessed One, having raised her joined palms, stood to one side. Venerable Vaṅgīsa, with the Blessed One's permission, asked her with these verses:

705.

705.

‘‘Alaṅkatā maṇikañcanācitaṃ, sovaṇṇajālacitaṃ mahantaṃ;

"Adorned, covered with jewels and gold,
Covered with a golden net, great;
Having mounted an excellent elephant, well-trained,
You have come here through the sky, in the atmosphere."

706.

706.

‘‘Nāgassa dantesu duvesu nimmitā, acchodakā paduminiyo suphullā;

"On the nāga's two tusks are created,
Ponds of clear water, full of lotuses;
And on the lotuses groups of instruments resound,
And these lovely ones are dancing."

707.

707.

‘‘Deviddhipattāsi mahānubhāve, manussabhūtā kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"You have attained divine power, great influence,
What merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what are you so radiant with power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?"

705.Tatthaalaṅkatāti sabbābharaṇavibhūsitā.Maṇikañcanācitanti tehi dibbamānehi maṇisuvaṇṇehi ācitaṃ.Sovaṇṇajālacitanti hemajālasañchannaṃ.Mahantanti vipulaṃ.Sukappitanti gamanasannāhavasena suṭṭhu sannaddhaṃ.Vehāyasanti vehāyasabhūte hatthipiṭṭhe.Antalikkheti ākāse, ‘‘alaṅkatamaṇikañcanācita’’ntipi pāṭho. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – devate, tvaṃ sabbālaṅkārehi alaṅkatā alaṅkatamaṇikañcanācitaṃ, ativiya dibbamānehi maṇīhi kañcanehi ca alaṅkaraṇavasena khacitaṃ, hemajālehi kumbhālaṅkārādibhedehi hatthālaṅkārehi citaṃ āmuttaṃ mahantaṃ ativiya brahantaṃ uttamaṃ gajaṃ āruyha hatthipiṭṭhiyā nisinnā ākāseneva idha amhākaṃ santikaṃ āgatāti.

705. There, alaṅkatā means adorned with all ornaments. Maṇikañcanācitaṃ means covered with those divine jewels and gold. Sovaṇṇajālacitaṃ means covered with a golden net. Mahantaṃ means large. Sukappitaṃ means well-trained in terms of going and being harnessed. Vehāyasaṃ means on the elephant's back, which is in the sky. Antalikkhe means in the sky. Alternatively, there is the reading "alaṅkatamaṇikañcanācitaṃ." Here is the meaning in brief: O devatā, you are adorned with all adornments, adorned, covered with jewels and gold, exceedingly inlaid with jewels and gold that are shining divinely for the sake of decoration, covered, surrounded by golden nets, with different kinds of elephant adornments, such as pot decorations, etc., having mounted a great, exceedingly large, excellent elephant, seated on the elephant's back, you have come here to our presence through the sky.

706.Nāgassa dantesu duvesu nimmitāti erāvaṇassa viya nāgarājassa imassa dvīsu dantesu dve pokkharaṇiyo sucaritasippinā suṭṭhu viracitā.Tūriyagaṇāti pañcaṅgikatūriyasamūhā.Pabhijjareti dvādasannaṃ layabhedānaṃ vasena pabhedaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Pavajjare’’ti ca paṭhanti, pakārehi vādīyantīti attho.

706. Nāgassa dantesu duvesu nimmitā means two ponds are well-crafted on the two tusks of this nāgarāja, like those of Erāvaṇa, by a good artisan. Tūriyagaṇā means groups of musical instruments with five components. Pabhijjare means they go to diversification in terms of twelve kinds of rhythmic variations. And some read "pavajjare," meaning they are played in various ways.

Evaṃ therena puṭṭhā devatā imāhi gāthāhi vissajjesi –

Having been asked thus by the Thera, the devatā replied with these verses:

708.

708.

‘‘Bārāṇasiyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, buddhassahaṃ vatthayugaṃ adāsiṃ;

"Having approached Bārāṇasī,
I gave a pair of cloths to the Buddha;
Having paid homage to his feet, I sat on the ground,
Pleased, I made the añjali."

709.

709.

‘‘Buddho ca me kañcanasannibhattaco, adesayi samudayadukkhaniccataṃ;

"And the Buddha, with his complexion like gold,
Taught me the arising, suffering, and impermanence;
The unconditioned, the cessation of suffering, the eternal,
He taught the path, by which I came to understand."

710.

710.

‘‘Appāyukī kālakatā tato cutā, upapannā tidasagaṇaṃ yasassinī;

"Short-lived, having died at the end of my life, fallen from there,
I was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa host, glorious;
I am one of Sakka's consorts,
Named Yasuttarā, renowned in the directions."

708-9.Tatthachamāti bhūmiyaṃ. Bhummatthe hi idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.Vittāti tuṭṭhā.Yatoti yato satthu sāmukkaṃsikadhammadesanato.Vijānisanti cattāri ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhiṃ.

708-9. There, chamā means on the ground. Indeed, this is the locative case in the sense of location. Vittā means delighted. Yato means from which, from the Teacher's teaching of the Dhamma in its entirety. Vijānisaṃ means I penetrated the four Noble Truths.

710.Appāyukīti ‘‘īdisaṃ nāma uḷāraṃ puññaṃ katvā na tayā etasmiṃ dukkhabahule manussattabhāve evaṃ ṭhātabba’’nti sañjātābhisandhinā viya parikkhayaṃ gatena kammunā appāyukā samānā.Aññatarā pajāpatīti soḷasasahassānaṃ mahesīnaṃ aññatarā.Disāsu vissutāti dvīsu devalokesu sabbadisāsu pākaṭā paññātā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

710. Appāyukī means, "having done such an excellent merit, you should not stay in this human existence full of suffering," as if by karma that has come to an end due to an intention that has arisen, being short-lived. Aññatarā pajāpatī means one of the sixteen thousand consorts. Disāsu vissutā means known, renowned in all directions in the two deva-worlds. The rest is as previously stated.

Nāgavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Nāga Vimāna is finished.

4. Alomavimānavaṇṇanā
4. Description of the Aloma Vimāna

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti alomavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatane migadāye viharanto pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya bārāṇasiṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Tatthekā alomā nāma duggatitthī bhagavantaṃ disvā pasannacittā aññaṃ dātabbaṃ apassantī ‘‘īdisampi bhagavato dinnaṃ mayhaṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā paribhinnavaṇṇaṃ aloṇaṃ sukkhakummāsaṃ upanesi, bhagavā paṭiggahesi. Sā taṃ dānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā somanassaṃ pavedesi, sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇena means the Aloma Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One, while dwelling in Bārāṇasī, at Isipatana, the Deer Park, having dressed in the morning, taking his bowl and robe, entered Bārāṇasī for alms. There, a poor woman named Alomā, seeing the Blessed One, with a pleased mind, not seeing anything else to give, thinking, "even this given to the Blessed One will be of great fruit to me," offered stale, unsalted, dried sour gruel. The Blessed One accepted it. She expressed joy, making that giving as the object. She, later on, having died, was reborn among the Tāvatiṃsas. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna –

711.

711.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe… vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"With surpassing beauty…pe… and your complexion shines in all directions." –

Pucchi. Sāpi tassa byākāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ –

asked. She also explained that to him, to show that –

714.

714.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti. – vuttaṃ;

"That devatā, delighted…pe… by whose karma is this the fruit?" – was said;

715.

715.

‘‘Ahañca bārāṇasiyaṃ, buddhassādiccabandhuno;

"And I, in Bārāṇasī, to the Buddha, kinsman of the sun;
Gave dried sour gruel,
Pleased, with my own hands."

716.

716.

‘‘Sukkhāya aloṇikāya ca, passa phalaṃ kummāsapiṇḍiyā;

"By dried and unsalted gruel,
See the fruit of the ball of sour gruel;
Having seen Alomā delighted,
Who would not do merit?"

717.

717.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"By that, such is my beauty…pe… and my complexion shines in all directions."

716.Tatthaalomaṃ sukhitaṃ disvāti alomampi nāma sukkhakummāsamattaṃ datvā evaṃ dibbasukhena sukhitaṃ disvā.Ko puññaṃ na karissatīti ko nāma attano hitasukhaṃ icchanto puññaṃ na karissatīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

716. There, alomaṃ sukhitaṃ disvā means having seen even Alomā delighted with such divine happiness, having given just dried sour gruel. Ko puññaṃ na karissatī means who, wanting their own welfare and happiness, would not do merit?

Alomavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Aloma Vimāna is finished.

5. Kañjikadāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā
5. Description of the Kañjikadāyikā Vimāna

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti kañjikadāyikāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā andhakavinde viharati. Tena ca samayena bhagavato kucchiyaṃ vātarogo uppajji. Bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi ‘‘gaccha tvaṃ ānanda, piṇḍāya caritvā mayhaṃ bhesajjatthaṃ kañjikaṃ āharā’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ bhante’’ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā mahārājadattiyaṃ pattaṃ gahetvā attano upaṭṭhākavejjassa nivesanadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā vejjassa bhariyā paccuggantvā vanditvā pattaṃ gahetvā theraṃ pucchi ‘‘kīdisena vo, bhante, bhesajjena attho’’ti. Sā kira buddhisampannā ‘‘bhesajjena payojane sati thero idhāgacchati, na bhikkhattha’’nti sallakkhesi. ‘‘Kañjikenā’’ti ca vutte ‘‘na yidaṃ bhesajjaṃ mayhaṃ ayyassa, tathā hesa bhagavato patto, handāhaṃ lokanāthassa anucchavikaṃ kañjikaṃ sampādemī’’ti somanassajātā sañjātabahumānā badarayūsena yāguṃ sampādetvā pattaṃ pūretvā tassa parivārabhāvena aññañca bhojanaṃ paṭiyādetvā pesesi. Taṃ paribhuttamattasseva bhagavato so ābādho vūpasami. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajjitvā mahatiṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantī modati. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ accharāsahassaparivārena vicarantiṃ disvā tāya katakammaṃ imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇena means the Kañjikadāyikā Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Andhakavinda. And at that time, a wind disorder arose in the Blessed One's stomach. The Blessed One addressed Venerable Ānanda, "Go, Ānanda, having gone for alms, bring kañjika for me as medicine." "Yes, Bhante," Venerable Ānanda, having agreed to the Blessed One, taking the bowl, stood at the door of his attendant physician's residence. Seeing him, the physician's wife went out to greet him, paid homage, took the bowl, and asked the Thera, "What kind of medicine do you need, Bhante?" She, indeed, was wise, "The Thera comes here when there is a need for medicine, not for alms," she considered. When it was said, "With kañjika," she said, "This is not medicine for my lord; indeed, that is the Blessed One's bowl; come, let me prepare kañjika suitable for the Lokanātha," with joy arisen, with much reverence arisen, having prepared rice gruel with badara juice, having filled the bowl, having prepared other food as his retinue, she sent it. As soon as it was consumed, that illness of the Blessed One subsided. She, at another time, having died, having been reborn among the Tāvatiṃsas, enjoying great divine wealth, rejoices. Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a deva-tour, seeing her wandering with a retinue of a thousand apsaras, asked her about the karma she had done with these verses:

719.

719.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena …pe… vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"With surpassing beauty…pe… and your complexion shines in all directions." –

Sāpi byākāsi.

She also explained.

721.

721.

‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That devatā, delighted…pe… by whose karma is this the fruit?"

723.

723.

‘‘Ahaṃ andhakavindamhi, buddhassādiccabandhuno;

"I, in Andhakavinda, to the Buddha, kinsman of the sun;
Gave kolasampāka, kañjika smoked with oil."

724.

724.

‘‘Pipphalyā lasuṇena ca, missaṃ lāmañjakena ca;

"Mixed with long pepper, garlic,
And lāmañjaka;
I gave to the one who is upright,
With a very pleased mind."

725.

725.

‘‘Yā mahesittaṃ kāreyya, cakkavattissa rājino;

"If a woman were to cause the great dominion,
Of a wheel-turning monarch;
A woman with all beautiful limbs,
And not displeasing to her husband;
She is not worth a sixteenth part,
Of one gift of kañjika."

726.

726.

‘‘Sataṃ nikkhā sataṃ assā, sataṃ assatarīrathā;

"A hundred nikkhas, a hundred horses,
A hundred mule-drawn chariots;
A hundred thousand maidens,
With loosened jeweled earrings;
They are not worth a sixteenth part,
Of one gift of kañjika."

727.

727.

‘‘Sataṃ hemavatā nāgā, īsādantā urūḷhavā;

"A hundred elephants from the Himalayas,
With tusks like plough-shafts, strong;
Golden-harnessed elephants,
Wearing golden ornaments,
They are not worth a sixteenth part,
Of one gift of kañjika."

728.

728.

‘‘Catunnamapi dīpānaṃ, issaraṃ yodha kāraye;

"Even if one were to cause the dominion,
Over the four continents;
It is not worth a sixteenth part,
Of one gift of kañjika."

723-4.Tatthaadāsiṃ kolasampāpakaṃ, kañjikaṃ teladhūpitanti badaramodakakasāve catuguṇodakasamodite pākena catutthabhāgāvasiṭṭhaṃ yāguṃ pacitvā taṃ tikaṭukaajamodahiṅgujīrakalasuṇādīhi kaṭukabhaṇḍehi abhisaṅkharitvā sudhūpitaṃ katvā lāmañjagandhaṃ gāhāpetvā pasannacittena bhagavato patte ākiritvā satthāraṃ uddisitvā adāsiṃ, therassa hatthe patiṭṭhapesinti dasseti. Tenāha –

723-4.Here, "adāsiṃ kolasampāpakaṃ, kañjikaṃ teladhūpitaṃ" means having cooked a gruel, reduced to a quarter of its original volume by boiling, with the addition of four times its quantity of water to a sour jujube-fruit drink, I flavored it with pungent condiments such as long pepper, garlic, celery, asafoetida, cumin, and salt, smoked it well to infuse a fragrant lāmajjaka scent, and with a serene mind, I poured it into the Blessed One’s bowl, presenting it with the intention of honoring the Teacher, and placed it in the Elder's hand. This is what he indicates. Therefore, he said –

‘‘Pipphalyālasuṇena ca, missaṃ lāmañjakena ca;

"Mixed with long pepper, garlic, and with lāmajjaka; I gave it to the one who is upright, with a very clear mind."

Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

The rest is as previously stated.

Evaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno tāya devatāya attanā samupacitasucaritakamme āvikate saparivārāya tassā dhammaṃ desetvā manussalokaṃ āgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, having revealed the meritorious deed he had accumulated to that deity, preached the Dhamma to her and her retinue, and then returned to the human world and reported the incident to the Blessed One. The Blessed One made this the basis for a teaching and preached the Dhamma in the midst of the four assemblies. That teaching was beneficial to the multitude.

Kañjikadāyikāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Mansion of the Sour Gruel Giver is concluded.

6. Vihāravimānavaṇṇanā
6. The Commentary on the Monastery Mansion

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti vihāravimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena visākhā mahāupāsikā aññatarasmiṃ ussavadivase uyyāne vicaraṇatthaṃ sahāyikāhi parijanena ca ussāhitā sunhātānulittā subhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā mahālatāpasādhanaṃ piḷandhitvā pañcamattehi sahāyikāsatehi parivāritā mahantena issariyena mahatā paricchedena gehato nikkhamma uyyānaṃ uddissa gacchantī cintesi ‘‘bāladārikāya viya kiṃ me moghakīḷitena, handāhaṃ vihāraṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ manobhāvanīye ca ayye vandissāmi, dhammañca sossāmī’’ti vihāraṃ gantvā ekamante ṭhatvā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ omuñcitvā taṃ dāsiyā hatthe datvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Tassā bhagavā dhammaṃ desesi.

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenāti: the monastery mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, Visākhā, the great female lay follower, on a certain festival day, being encouraged by her friends and attendants to go for a stroll in the park, having bathed and perfumed herself, eaten a fine meal, and donned the "great-creeper" ornament, surrounded by five hundred companions, with great pomp and a large retinue, departed from her house intending to go to the park. She thought, "What is the point of frivolous play like a young girl? Instead, I will go to the monastery, pay homage to the Blessed One and the esteemed elders agreeable to my mind, and listen to the Dhamma." Going to the monastery, she stood aside, removed the great-creeper ornament, gave it to a female servant, paid homage to the Blessed One, and sat to one side. The Blessed One then preached the Dhamma to her.

Sā dhammaṃ sutvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā manobhāvanīye ca bhikkhū vanditvā vihārato nikkhamitvā thokaṃ gantvā dāsiṃ āha ‘‘handa je ābharaṇaṃ piḷandhissāmī’’ti. Sā taṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ katvā bandhitvā vihāre ṭhapetvā tahaṃ tahaṃ vicaritvā gamanakāle vissaritvā gatattā ‘‘vissaritaṃ mayā, tiṭṭha ayye āharissāmī’’ti nivattitukāmā ahosi. Visākhā ‘‘sace je vihāre ṭhapetvā vissaritaṃ, tassa vihārasseva atthāya taṃ pariccajissāmī’’ti vihāraṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā attano adhippāyaṃ pavedentī ‘‘vihāraṃ, bhante, kāressāmi, adhivāsetu me bhagavā anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti āha. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

Having listened to the Dhamma, she paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him, paid homage to the monks agreeable to her mind, and left the monastery. Going a short distance, she said to the female servant, "Come, I will put on the ornament." The servant, having wrapped it up and tied it, had left it at the monastery, and having wandered here and there, she had forgotten it when leaving. "I forgot it; wait, mistress, I will fetch it," she intended to return. Visākhā thought, "If it was left in the monastery and forgotten, I will relinquish it for the sake of the monastery itself." Going to the monastery, she approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and, declaring her intention, said, "I will have a monastery built, Venerable One; may the Blessed One accept my request out of compassion." The Blessed One accepted by remaining silent.

Sā taṃ piḷandhanaṃ satasahassādhikanavakoṭiagghanakaṃ vissajjetvā āyasmatā mahāmoggallānena navakammādhiṭṭhāyakena suvibhattabhittithambhatulāgopānasikaṇṇikadvārabāhavātapāna sopānādigehāvayavaṃ manoharaṃ suvikappitakaṭṭhakammaramaṇīyaṃ suparikammakatasudhākammaṃ manuññaṃ suviracitamālākammalatākammādicittakammavicittaṃ supariniṭṭhitamaṇikuṭṭima sadisabhūmitalaṃ devavimānasadisaṃ heṭṭhābhūmiyaṃ pañca gabbhasatāni, uparibhūmiyaṃ pañca gabbhasatānīti gabbhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ buddhassa bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassa ca vasanānucchavikaṃ mahantaṃ pāsādaṃ tassa parivārapāsādasahassañca tesaṃ parivārabhāvena kuṭimaṇḍapacaṅkamanādīni ca kārentī navahi māsehi vihāraṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Pariniṭṭhite ca vihāre navaheva hiraññakoṭīhi vihāramahaṃ kārentī pañcamattehi sahāyikāsatehi saddhiṃ pāsādaṃ abhiruhitvā tassa sampattiṃ disvā somanassajātā sahāyikā āha ‘‘imaṃ evarūpaṃ pāsādaṃ kārentiyā yaṃ mayā puññaṃ pasutaṃ, taṃ anumodatha, pattidānaṃ vo dammī’’ti. ‘‘Aho sādhu aho sādhū’’ti pasannacittā sabbāpi anumodiṃsu.

She spent the ornament, worth nine hundred million plus one hundred thousand, and with Venerable Mahāmoggallāna as the superintendent of construction, she had a monastery built with well-divided walls, pillars, beams, eaves, cornices, doorposts, windows, stairs, and other parts of the building, beautiful with skillfully crafted woodwork, delightful with excellent plastering, pleasing with well-arranged floral decorations, creeper decorations, and various paintings, and with a perfectly finished jewel-paved floor, like a celestial mansion. It consisted of five hundred chambers on the ground floor and five hundred chambers on the upper floor, adorned with a thousand chambers, a great palace fitting for the Blessed Buddha and the Sangha of monks to dwell in, along with a thousand surrounding palaces and, as subsidiary structures to them, halls, pavilions, walkways, and so forth. She completed the monastery in nine months. Upon the monastery’s completion, spending nine hundred million in gold on the dedication festival, together with five hundred companions, she ascended to the palace, and seeing its splendor, filled with joy, she said to her companions, "Whatever merit I have generated by having this palace constructed, rejoice in it; I will give you a share." "Excellent! Excellent!" they all rejoiced with delighted minds.

Tattha aññatarā upāsikā visesato taṃ pattidānaṃ manasākāsi. Sā na cirasseva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. Tassā puññānubhāvena anekakūṭāgārapākārauyyānapokkharaṇiādipaṭimaṇḍitaṃ soḷasayojanāyāmavitthārabbedhaṃ attano pabhāya yojanasataṃ pharantaṃ ākāsacāriṃ mahantaṃ vimānaṃ pāturahosi. Sā gacchantīpi accharāsahassaparivārā saha vimānena gacchati. Visākhā pana mahāupāsikā vipulapariccāgatāya saddhāsampattiyā ca nimmānaratīsu nibbattitvā sunimmitadevarājassa aggamahesibhāvaṃ sampāpuṇi. Athāyasmā anuruddho devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ visākhāya sahāyikaṃ tāvatiṃsabhavane uppannaṃ disvā –

Among them, one female lay follower especially directed her mind toward the sharing of merit. Not long after, she passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Through the power of her merit, a great aerial mansion appeared, adorned with numerous multi-storied pavilions, ramparts, parks, ponds, and so forth, extending sixteen yojanas in length and width, and shining a hundred yojanas with its own radiance. As she traveled, surrounded by a thousand nymphs, she traveled together with her mansion. Visākhā, the great female lay follower, however, due to her great generosity and perfection of faith, was reborn in the Nimmānarati heaven and attained the position of chief consort to the Deva-king Sunimmita. Then, Venerable Anuruddha, while traveling in the heavens, saw Visākhā's companion arisen in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven –

729.

729.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

"With surpassing beauty, you stand, O deity, illuminating all directions, like a star, like a medicinal herb.

730.

730.

‘‘Tassā te naccamānāya, aṅgamaṅgehi sabbaso;

"As you dance, with every part of your body, divine sounds emanate, delightful and enchanting.

731.

731.

‘‘Tassā te naccamānāya, aṅgamaṅgehi sabbaso;

"As you dance, with every part of your body, divine fragrances drift, pure and delightful.

732.

732.

‘‘Vivattamānā kāyena, yā veṇīsu piḷandhanā;

"As you move your body, the ornaments that adorn your braids, the sound of them is heard, like a five-piece orchestra.

733.

733.

‘‘Vaṭaṃsakā vātadhutā, vātena sampakampitā;

"The earrings, swayed by the wind, tremble in the breeze, the sound of them is heard, like a five-piece orchestra.

734.

734.

‘‘Yāpi te sirasmiṃ mālā, sucigandhā manoramā;

"And the garland on your head, pure and delightful, its fragrance wafts in all directions, like a mañjūsaka tree.

735.

735.

‘‘Ghāyase taṃ sucigandhaṃ, rūpaṃ passasi amānusaṃ;

"You smell that pure fragrance, you see a form that is not human; O deity, when asked, declare, what is the fruit of which deed?" –

Imāhi gāthāhi pucchi. Sāpi tassa evaṃ byākāsi –

He asked with these verses. She replied to him thus –

736.

736.

‘‘Sāvatthiyaṃ mayhaṃ sakhī bhadante, saṅghassa kāresi mahāvihāraṃ;

"In Sāvatthi, my friend, venerable sir, had a great monastery built for the Sangha; being pleased there, I rejoiced, seeing the residence, so dear to me.

737.

737.

‘‘Tāyeva me suddhanumodanāya, laddhaṃ vimānabbhutadassaneyyaṃ;

"By that very pure rejoicing of mine, I have obtained a mansion wonderful to behold; extending sixteen yojanas in every direction, it travels through the sky by my power.

738.

738.

‘‘Kūṭāgārā nivesā me, vibhattā bhāgaso mitā;

"My multi-storied pavilions, residences, are divided, measured into portions; gleaming, they shine, a hundred yojanas around.

739.

739.

‘‘Pokkharañño ca me ettha, puthulomanisevitā;

"And here are my ponds, frequented by divine fish; with clear water, serene, strewn with golden sand.

740.

740.

‘‘Nānāpadumasañchannā, puṇḍarīkasamotatā;

"Covered with various lotuses, adorned with white lotuses; fragrant scents drift, delightful, carried by the gentle breeze.

741.

741.

‘‘Jambuyo panasā tālā, nāḷikeravanāni ca;

"Mangoes, jackfruits, palmyra palms, and groves of coconut trees; grown within the residence, various trees, planted.

742.

742.

‘‘Nānātūriyasaṅghuṭṭhaṃ, accharāgaṇaghositaṃ;

"Resounding with various musical instruments, filled with the voices of nymphs; even one who sees me in a dream, that person would be delighted.

743.

743.

‘‘Etādisaṃ abbhutadassaneyyaṃ, vimānaṃ sabbaso pabhaṃ;

"Such a wonderful mansion to behold, shining in every way; it has arisen from my deed, enough to do meritorious deeds."

736.Tatthasāvatthiyaṃ mayhaṃ sakhī bhadante, saṅghassa kāresi mahāvihāranti bhante anuruddha, sāvatthiyā samīpe pācīnapasse mayhaṃ mama sakkhī sahāyikā visākhā mahāupāsikā āgatāgataṃ cātuddisaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ uddissa navahiraññakoṭipariccāgena pubbārāmaṃ nāma mahantaṃ vihāraṃ kāresi.Tatthappasannā ahamānumodinti tasmiṃ vihāre katapariyosite saṅghassa niyyādiyamāne tāya kate pattidāne ‘‘aho ṭhāne vata pariccāgo kato’’ti pasannā ratanattaye kammaphale ca sañjātapasādā ahaṃ anumodiṃ. Vatthuvasena tassā anumodanāya uḷārabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘disvā agārañca piyañca meta’’nti āha. Sahassagabbhaṃ ativiya ramaṇīyaṃ devavimānasadisaṃ tañca agāraṃ mahantaṃ pāsādaṃ piyañca me buddhappamukhaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa tādisaṃ mahantaṃ dhanapariccāgaṃ disvā anumodinti yojanā.

736.There, "sāvatthiyaṃ mayhaṃ sakhī bhadante, saṅghassa kāresi mahāvihāraṃ": Venerable Anuruddha, near Sāvatthi, on the eastern side, my friend, my companion Visākhā, the great female lay follower, for the Sangha of monks from the four directions who come and go, at the expense of nine hundred million in gold, had a great monastery built called Pubbārāma. "Tatthappasannā ahamānumodiṃ": when that monastery was completed and dedicated to the Sangha, I, being pleased with the gift she made, rejoiced with faith arising in the Triple Gem and the result of karma, thinking, "Indeed, the giving has been well done." To show the magnificence of her rejoicing based on the object, she said "disvā agārañca piyañca metaṃ": seeing that residence, a thousand-chambered great palace, exceedingly beautiful and like a celestial mansion, and seeing the great expenditure of wealth made for the Sangha headed by the Buddha, I rejoiced. This is the meaning.

737.Tāyeva me suddhanumodanāyāti yathāvuttāya deyyadhammapariccāgābhāvena suddhāya kevalāya anumodanāyeva.Laddhaṃ vimānabbhutadassaneyyanti mayhaṃ pubbe īdisassa abhūtapubbatāya abbhutaṃ samantabhaddakabhāvena ativiya surūpatāya ca dassaneyyaṃ imaṃ vimānaṃ laddhaṃ adhigataṃ. Evaṃ tassa vimānassa abhirūpataṃ dassetvā idāni pamāṇamahattaṃ pabhāvamahattaṃ upabhogavatthumahattañca dassetuṃ‘‘samantato soḷasayojanānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaiddhiyā mamāti mama puññiddhiyā.

737."Tāyeva me suddhanumodanāyā": by that very pure rejoicing alone, without any giving of material objects. "Laddhaṃ vimānabbhutadassaneyyaṃ": I have obtained this mansion, wonderful to behold, which had never existed before and is exceedingly beautiful in every way. Having thus shown the beauty of that mansion, now to show its great size, great splendor, and great enjoyment of objects, "samantato soḷasayojanānī" and so forth was said. There, "iddhiyā mamā": by my meritorious power.

739.Pokkharaññoti pokkharaṇiyo.Puthulomanisevitāti dibbamacchehi upasevitā.

739.Pokkharañño: ponds. Puthulomanisevitā: frequented by divine fish.

740.Nānāpadumasañchannāti satapattasahassapattādibhedehi nānāvidhehi rattapadumehi rattakamalehi ca sañchāditā.Puṇḍarīkasamotatāti nānāvidhehi setakamalehi samantato avatatā, nānārukkhā aropimā surabhī sampavāyantīti yojanā.

740.Nānāpadumasañchannā: covered with various kinds of red lotuses, such as the satapatta and sahassapatta. Puṇḍarīkasamotatā: adorned all around with various kinds of white lotuses. Nānārukkhā aropimā surabhī sampavāyantīti yojanā: various trees, planted, send forth fragrant scents. This is the connection.

742.Sopīti so supinadassāvīpi.Vittoti tuṭṭho.

742.Sopī: even that dream-seer. Vitto: delighted.

743.Sabbasopabhanti samantato obhāsamānaṃ.Kamme hīti kammanimittaṃ.ti nipātamattaṃ. Cetanānaṃ vā aparāparuppattiyā bahubhāvato ‘‘kammehī’’ti vuttaṃ.Alanti yuttaṃ.Kātaveti kātuṃ.

743.Sabbaso pabhaṃ: shining in every way. Kamme hī: due to karma. : merely a particle. Or, because of the multiplicity of consciousnesses arising one after another, "kammehī" was said. Alaṃ: fitting. Kātave: to do.

Idāni thero visākhāya nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetukāmo imaṃ gāthamāha –

Now, the Elder, wishing to inquire about Visākhā's place of rebirth, spoke this verse –

744.

744.

‘‘Tāyeva te suddhanumodanāya,

"By that very pure rejoicing of yours, you have obtained a mansion wonderful to behold; that woman who gave the gift, tell me, where was she reborn?"

744.Tatthayā ceva sā dānamadāsi nārīti yassa dānassa anumodanāya tvaṃ īdisaṃ sampattiṃ paṭilabhi, taṃ dānaṃ yā ceva sā nārī adāsīti visākhaṃ mahāupāsikaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tāya eva devatāya tassā sampattiṃ kathāpetukāmo āha ‘‘tassā gatiṃ brūhi kuhiṃ uppannā sā’’ti.Tassā gatinti tāya nibbattadevagatiṃ.

744.There, "yā ceva sā dānamadāsi nārī": that woman who gave that gift, by the rejoicing of which you have obtained such prosperity, that is, he is speaking with reference to Visākhā, the great female lay follower. Wishing to have her prosperity spoken of by that very deity, he said, "tassā gatiṃ brūhi kuhiṃ uppannā sā." Tassā gatiṃ: her state of rebirth.

Idāni therena pucchitamatthaṃ dassentī āha –

Now, showing the matter asked by the Elder, she said –

745.

745.

‘‘Yā sā ahu mayhaṃ sakhī bhadante, saṅghassa kāresi mahāvihāraṃ;

"That friend of mine, venerable sir, had a great monastery built for the Sangha; knowing the Dhamma, she gave gifts, she was reborn among the Nimmānarati gods.

746.

746.

‘‘Pajāpatī tassa sunimmitassa,

"The consort of that Sunimmita, inconceivable is her karmic result; this that you ask, 'where was she reborn?' that I declare to you, not otherwise."

745.Tatthaviññātadhammāti viññātasāsanadhammā, paṭividdhacatusaccadhammāti attho.

745.There, "viññātadhammā": knowing the Dhamma of the Teaching, meaning one who has penetrated the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths.

746.Sunimmitassāti sunimmitassa devarājassa.Acintiyo kammavipāka tassāti vibhattilopaṃ katvā niddeso, tassā mama sakhiyā nibbānaratīsu nibbattāya kammavipāko puññakammassa vipākabhūtā dibbasampatti acintiyā appameyyāti attho.Anaññathāti aviparītaṃ yathāsabhāvato. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ tassā sampattiṃ aññāsīti? Subhaddā viya bhaddāya, visākhāpi devadhītā imissā santikaṃ agamāsi.

746.Sunimmitassā: of the Deva-king Sunimmita. Acintiyo kammavipāka tassā: this is a designation made by omitting the विभक्ति (case ending); the divine prosperity that is the result of the meritorious karma of my friend who was reborn in the Nimmānarati heaven is inconceivable, immeasurable. Anaññathā: not different, according to its true nature. How did she know of her prosperity? Like Subhaddā knew of Bhaddā, Visākhā also, the daughter of the gods, went to her presence.

Idāni devadhītā theraṃ aññesampi dānasamādapane niyojentī imāhi gāthāhi dhammaṃ desesi –

Now, the daughter of the gods, urging the Elder to engage others in giving, preached the Dhamma with these verses –

747.

747.

‘‘Tenahaññepi samādapetha, saṅghassa dānāni dadātha vittā;

"Therefore, encourage others too, give gifts to the Sangha, you who are wealthy; and listen to the Dhamma with a clear mind, for rare is the human attainment that has been obtained.

748.

748.

‘‘Yaṃ maggaṃ maggādhipatī adesayi, brahmassaro kañcanasannibhattaco;

"The path that the Lord of the Path proclaimed, with a voice like Brahmā, with skin like gold; give gifts to the Sangha, you who are wealthy, where the offerings become of great fruit.

749.

749.

‘‘Ye puggalā aṭṭha sataṃ pasatthā, cattāri etāni yugāni honti;

"Those eight individuals, praised by the virtuous, these four pairs exist; they are worthy of offerings, disciples of the Well-gone One, offerings given to them are of great fruit.

750.

750.

‘‘Cattāro ca paṭipannā, cattāro ca phale ṭhitā;

"And four are those who have entered the path, and four are those established in the fruit;
This Sangha is upright, endowed with wisdom and virtue.

751.

751.

‘‘Yajamānānaṃ manussānaṃ, puññapekkhāna pāṇinaṃ;

"For those humans who are donors, seeking merit with their hands,
Making merit that increases, what is given to the Sangha is of great fruit.

752.

752.

‘‘Eso hi saṅgho vipulo mahaggato, esappameyyo udadhīva sāgaro;

"For this Sangha is vast and of great value, immeasurable like the ocean sea;
These are the best disciples, heroes among men, dispelling darkness, they proclaim the Dhamma.

753.

753.

‘‘Tesaṃ sudinnaṃ suhutaṃ suyiṭṭhaṃ, ye saṅghamuddissa dadanti dānaṃ;

"Well-given, well-sacrificed, well-offered is it to them, who give alms intending for the Sangha;
That alms-offering, given to the Sangha, is established, of great fruit, praised by the knowers of the world.

754.

754.

‘‘Etādisaṃ yaññamanussarantā, ye vedajātā vicaranti loke;

"Remembering such a sacrifice as this, those born of the Vedas wander in the world;
Having removed the stain of stinginess completely, unblamed, they go to a heavenly place."

747.Tatthatenahaññepīti tenahi aññepi.Tenāti ca tena kāraṇena,ti nipātamattaṃ. ‘‘Samādapethā’’ti vatvā samādapanākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘saṅghassa dānāni dadāthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaṃ manussabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha‘‘sudullabho laddho manussalābho’’ti. Tattha aṭṭha akkhaṇā nāma tayo apāyā arūpā asaññasattā paccantadeso indriyānaṃ vekallaṃ niyatamicchādiṭṭhikatā apātubhāvo buddhassāti.

747. There, tenahaññepī means "tena hi aññepi" (then indeed, others). Tenā means "tena kāraṇena" (by that reason), is merely a particle. Having said "Samādapethā" (encourage them), to show the way of encouragement, it was said, "saṅghassa dānāni dadāthā" (give gifts to the Sangha), etc. Referring to the human state that is free from the eight unwholesome conditions, he said, "sudullabho laddho manussalābho" (the attainment of human birth is very difficult to obtain). Here, the eight unwholesome conditions (akkhanā) are the three woeful planes, the formless realms, the mindless beings, the border regions, deficiency of the senses, adherence to wrong views, and not being born during the appearance of a Buddha.

748.Yaṃmagganti yaṃ khettavisese kataṃ dānaṃ, taṃ ekantena sugatisampāpanato sugatigāmimaggaṃ apāyamaggato jagghamaggādito ca ativiya seṭṭhabhāvena maggādhipanti katvā. Dānampi hi saddhāhiriyo viya ‘‘devalokagāmimaggo’’ti vuccati. Yathāha –

748. Yaṃ maggaṃ means that the gift given in a special field, that certainly, by leading to a good destination, is the path to a good destination, and because of being much better than the path to woeful states and the detestable path, is considered the chief path. Giving (dāna), like moral shame and fear (hiri), is called "the path leading to the world of gods." As it was said –

‘‘Saddhā hiriyaṃ kusalañca dānaṃ, dhammā ete sappurisānuyātā;

"Moral shame and fear, virtue and giving, these qualities are followed by good people;
Indeed, they call this the divine path; by this, one goes to the world of gods." (A. Ni. 8.32; Kathā. 480);

Saṅghassa dānāni dadāthātiādinā punapi dakkhiṇeyyesu dānasaṃvibhāge niyojentī āha.

Again, by Saṅghassa dānāni dadāthā (give gifts to the Sangha), etc., he instructs them in giving and sharing with those worthy of offerings (dakkhiṇeyya).

749.Idāni taṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ sarūpato dassentī‘‘ye puggalā aṭṭha sataṃ pasatthā’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthayeti aniyamitaniddeso.Puggalāti sattā.Aṭṭhāti tesaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo. Te hi cattāro ca paṭipannā cattāro ca phale ṭhitāti aṭṭha honti.Sataṃ pasatthāti sappurisehi buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakehi aññehi ca devamanussehi passatthā. Kasmā? Sahajātasīlādiguṇayogato. Tesañhi campakabakulakusumādīnaṃ viya sahajātavaṇṇagandhādayo sahajātasīlasamādhiādayo guṇā, tena te vaṇṇagandhādisampannāni viya pupphāni devamanussānaṃ sataṃ piyā manāpā pāsaṃsiyā ca honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ye puggalā aṭṭha sataṃ pasatthā’’ti. Te pana saṅkhepato sotāpattimaggaṭṭho phalaṭṭhoti ekaṃ yugaṃ, evaṃ yāva arahattamaggaṭṭho phalaṭṭhoti ekaṃ yuganti cattāri yugāni honti. Tenāha‘‘cattāri etāni yugāni honti te dakkhiṇeyyā’’ti.Teti pubbe aniyamato uddiṭṭhānaṃ niyametvā dassanaṃ. Te hi sabbepi kammaṃ kammaphalañca saddahitvā dātabbadeyyadhammasaṅkhātaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ arahantīti dakkhiṇeyyā guṇavisesayogena dānassa mahapphalabhāvasādhanato.Sugatassa sāvakāti sammāsambuddhassa dhammasavanante ariyāya jātiyā jātatāya taṃ dhammaṃ suṇantīti sāvakā.Etesu dinnāni mahapphalānīti etesu sugatassa sāvakesu appakānipi dānāni dinnāni paṭiggāhakato dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyā mahapphalāni honti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, saṅghā vā gaṇā vā, tathāgatasāvakasaṅgho tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; itivu. 90).

749. Now, showing that worthy of offering, the Noble Sangha, in its true form, he speaks the verse, "ye puggalā aṭṭha sataṃ pasatthā" (those eight persons who are praised by the good). Here, ye is an indefinite designation. Puggalā means beings. Aṭṭha means the numerical limit of them. For they are eight, as four are those who have entered the path and four are those established in the fruit. Sataṃ pasatthā means praised by the good, by Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, disciples, and other gods and humans. Why? Because of the association with qualities such as innate morality, etc. For them, like the champak, bakul, and jasmine flowers, innate qualities such as innate color, scent, etc., and innate morality, concentration, etc., are present; therefore, like flowers endowed with color, scent, etc., they are dear, pleasing, and praiseworthy to gods and humans. Therefore, it was said, "ye puggalā aṭṭha sataṃ pasatthā" (those eight persons who are praised by the good). But those, in brief, are one pair consisting of the one standing on the path to stream-entry and the one established in the fruit, thus up to one pair consisting of the one standing on the path to arahantship and the one established in the fruit—these are the four pairs. Therefore, he said, "cattāri etāni yugāni honti te dakkhiṇeyyā" (these four pairs are worthy of offerings). Te shows the specification of those previously designated indefinitely. Indeed, all of them, having faith in actions and the results of actions, are worthy of the offering called dakkhiṇa, which consists of things suitable for giving, because of the association with special qualities and because of establishing the state of great fruit of giving. Sugatassa sāvakā means disciples because they are born of the Noble birth, at the end of hearing the Dhamma of the Sammāsambuddha, and they hear that Dhamma. Etesu dinnāni mahapphalānī means even small gifts given to these disciples of the Sugata are of great fruit because of the purity of the offering arising from the recipient. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "To whatever extent there are Sanghas or groups, the Sangha of the Tathāgata’s disciples is declared the foremost among them" etc. (A. Ni. 4.34; 5.32; Itivu. 90).

750.Cattāroca paṭipannātiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.

750. Cattāro ca paṭipannā (and four are those who have entered the path), etc., the meaning of this was already stated below.

Idha pana āyasmā anuruddho attanā devatāya ca vuttamatthaṃ manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Here, Venerable Anuruddha, having come to the human world, announced to the Blessed One the matter spoken by himself and the deity. The Blessed One, having made that matter the starting point, taught the Dhamma to the assembled assembly. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Vihāravimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Vihāravimāna Commentary is finished.

7. Caturitthivimānavaṇṇanā
7. Caturitthivimāna Commentary

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti caturitthivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ viharante āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayena devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gato. So tattha paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitesu catūsu vimānesu catasso devadhītaro paccekaṃ accharāsahassaparivārā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantiyo disvā tāhi pubbe katakammaṃ pucchanto –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇena (with surpassing beauty) refers to the Caturitthivimāna. What is its origin? While the Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering on a divine tour in the manner described below, went to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. There, he saw four daughters of the gods, each attended by a thousand nymphs, experiencing divine bliss in four mansions arranged in order. Asking them about the good deeds they had done in the past –

755.‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe…vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

755.“With surpassing beauty…pe…your radiance illuminates all directions.” –

Imāhi gāthāhi paṭipāṭiyā pucchi. Tāpi tassa pucchānantaraṃ paṭipāṭiyā byākariṃsu. Taṃ dassetuṃ –

He asked in order with these verses. After his question, they also explained in order. To show that –

758.‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe…yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti. –

758.“That goddess, delighted…pe…by what deed is this the fruit?” –

Ayaṃ gāthā vuttā.

This verse was spoken.

Tā kira kassapassa bhagavato kāle esikānāmake raṭṭhe paṇṇakate nāma nagare kulagehe nibbattā vayappattā tasmiṃyeva nagare patikulaṃ gatā samaggavāsaṃ vasanti. Tāsu ekā aññataraṃ piṇḍacārikaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā pasannacittā indīvarakalāpaṃ adāsi, aparā aññassa nīluppalahatthakaṃ adāsi, aparā padumahatthakaṃ adāsi, aparā sumanamakuḷāni adāsi. Tā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattiṃsu, tāsaṃ accharāsahassaṃ parivāro ahosi. Tā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavitvā tato cutā tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena aparāparaṃ tattheva saṃsarantiyo imasmiṃ buddhuppāde tattheva uppannā vuttanayena āyasmatā mahāmoggallānena pucchitā. Tāsu ekā attanā kataṃ pubbakammaṃ therassa kathentī –

It is said that in the time of Kassapa Buddha, in the country named Esika, in the city named Paṇṇakata, they were born in a family household. Having reached adulthood, they went to their husband's families in that same city and lived together harmoniously. Among them, one, seeing a bhikkhu wandering for alms, gave with a pleased mind a handful of blue lotuses (indīvara); another gave a handful of blue water lilies (nīluppala); another gave a handful of red lotuses (paduma); another gave buds of jasmine (sumana). In another time, having passed away, they were reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and a thousand nymphs were their attendants. Having experienced divine bliss there for as long as their life lasted, having passed away from there, due to the remaining ripening of that same deed, continuing to transmigrate there again and again, they were born there in this Buddha's era. As described above, they were asked by Venerable Mahāmoggallāna. Among them, one, telling the Elder the good deed she had done –

759.

759.

‘‘Indīvarānaṃ hatthakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno piṇḍāya carantassa;

"A handful of blue lotuses (indīvara), I gave,
To a bhikkhu wandering for alms;
In Esika, in the eminent, lovely city of Paṇṇakata.

760.

760.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"By that, such is my beauty…pe…my radiance illuminates all directions." –

Āha. Aparā –

She said. Another –

766.

766.

‘‘Nīluppalahatthakaṃ ahamadāsiṃ, bhikkhuno piṇḍāya carantassa;

"A handful of blue water lilies (nīluppala), I gave,
To a bhikkhu wandering for alms;
In Esika, in the eminent, lovely city of Paṇṇakata.

767.‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

767.“By that, such is my beauty…pe…my radiance illuminates all directions.” –

Āha. Aparā –

She said. Another –

773.

773.

‘‘Odātamūlakaṃ haritapattaṃ, udakasmiṃ sare jātaṃ ahamadāsiṃ;

"White-rooted with green leaves,
Grown in the water of a pond, I gave;
To a bhikkhu wandering for alms, in Esika, in the eminent;
Lovely city of Paṇṇakata.

774.‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

774.“By that, such is my beauty…pe…my radiance illuminates all directions.” –

Āha. Aparā –

She said. Another –

780.

780.

‘‘Ahaṃ sumanā sumanassa sumanamakuḷāni, dantavaṇṇāni ahamadāsiṃ;

"I, Sumanā, of a good mind, buds of jasmine (sumanamakuḷāni),
Tooth-colored, I gave;
To a bhikkhu wandering for alms, in Esika, in the eminent;
Lovely city of Paṇṇakata.

781.‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

781.“By that, such is my beauty…pe…my radiance illuminates all directions.” –

Āha.

She said.

759.Tatthaindīvarānaṃ hatthakanti uddālakapupphahatthaṃ vātaghātakapupphakalāpaṃ.Esikānanti esikāraṭṭhassa.Uṇṇatasmiṃ nagaravareti uṇṇate bhūmipadese niviṭṭhe meghodaraṃ lihantehi viya accuggatehi pāsādakūṭāgārādīhi uṇṇate uttamanagare.Paṇṇakateti evaṃnāmake nagare.

759. There, indīvarānaṃ hatthakaṃ means a handful of uddālaka flowers or a cluster of vātaghātaka flowers. Esikānaṃ means of the Esika country. Uṇṇatasmiṃ nagaravare means in the elevated city, situated in an elevated place, elevated with palaces, peaked houses, etc., as if licking the clouds, in the excellent city. Paṇṇakate means in the city named Paṇṇakata.

766.Nīluppalahatthakanti kuvalayakalāpaṃ.

766. Nīluppalahatthakaṃ means a cluster of kuvalaya flowers.

773.Odātamūlakanti setamūlaṃ, bhisamūlānaṃ dhavalatāya vuttaṃ, padumakalāpaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tenāha ‘‘haritapatta’’ntiādi. Tatthaharitapattanti nīlapattaṃ. Avijahitamakuḷapattassa hi padumassa bāhirapattāni haritavaṇṇāni eva honti.Udakasmiṃ sare jātanti sare udakamhi jātaṃ, saroruhanti attho.

773. Odātamūlakaṃ means white-rooted, said because of the whiteness of the lotus roots, referring to a cluster of lotuses. Therefore, he says "haritapattaṃ" (green leaves), etc. Here, haritapattaṃ means blue leaves. For the outer leaves of a lotus, which has inseparable buds and leaves, are indeed green. Udakasmiṃ sare jātaṃ means grown in the water of a pond, it means saroruha (lotus).

780.Sumanāti evaṃnāmā.Sumanassāti sundaracittassa.Sumanamakuḷānīti jātisumanapupphamakuḷāni.Dantavaṇṇānīti sajjukaṃ ullikhitahatthidantasadisavaṇṇāni.

780. Sumanā is a name. Sumanassā means of a beautiful mind. Sumanamakuḷānī means buds of jāti-jasmine flowers. Dantavaṇṇānī means of a color like freshly polished elephant tusks.

Evaṃ tāhi attanā katakamme kathite thero tāsaṃ anupubbiṃ kathaṃ kathetvā saccāni pakāsesi. Saccapariyosāne sā sabbāpi sahaparivārā sotāpannā ahesuṃ. Thero taṃ pavattiṃ manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā dhammadesanā mahājanassa sātthikā jātāti.

Thus, when the deeds done by them were told, the Elder, having related the story in sequence, revealed the Truths. At the end of the Truths, all of them, together with their attendants, became stream-enterers. The Elder, having come to the human world, announced that event to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having made that matter the starting point, taught the Dhamma to the assembled assembly. That teaching of the Dhamma became beneficial to the great multitude.

Caturitthivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Caturitthivimāna Commentary is finished.

8. Ambavimānavaṇṇanā
8. Ambavimāna Commentary

Dibbaṃte ambavanaṃ rammanti ambavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ aññatarā upāsikā āvāsadānassa mahapphalataṃ mahānisaṃsatañca sutvā chandajātā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā evamāha ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ āvāsaṃ kāretukāmā, icchāmi tādisaṃ okāsaṃ, ācikkhatū’’ti. Bhagavā bhikkhū āṇāpesi, bhikkhū tassā okāsaṃ dassesuṃ. Sā tattha ramaṇīyaṃ āvāsaṃ kāretvā tassa samantato ambarukkhe ropesi. So āvāso samantato ambapantīhi parikkhitto chāyūdakasampanno muttājālasadisavālukākiṇṇapaṇḍarabhūmibhāgo ativiya manoharo ahosi. Sā taṃ vihāraṃ nānāvaṇṇehi vatthehi pupphadāmagandhadāmādīhi ca devavimānaṃ viya alaṅkaritvā telapadīpaṃ āropetvā ambarukkhe ca ahatehi vatthehi veṭhetvā saṅghassa niyyādesi.

Dibbaṃ te ambavanaṃ rammaṃ (Your divine mango grove is delightful) refers to the Ambavimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, a certain female lay follower in Sāvatthi, having heard of the great fruitfulness and great benefit of giving a dwelling place (āvāsa-dāna), with desire arisen, having greeted the Blessed One, said thus, "Venerable Sir, I wish to have a dwelling place built; I desire such an opportunity, may you indicate it." The Blessed One commanded the bhikkhus; the bhikkhus showed her a suitable place. There, she had a delightful dwelling place built and planted mango trees (amba-rukkha) all around it. That dwelling place, surrounded on all sides by rows of mango trees, endowed with shade and water, with a ground section strewn with sand resembling a net of pearls, was exceedingly charming. Having adorned that monastery like a divine mansion with cloths of various colors, garlands of flowers, garlands of scents, etc., having lit an oil lamp, and having wrapped the mango trees with unused cloths, she dedicated it to the Sangha.

Sā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti, tassā mahantaṃ vimānaṃ pāturahosi ambavanaparikkhittaṃ. Sā tattha accharāgaṇaparivāritā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavati. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno upagantvā imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Later, having passed away, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. A great mansion surrounded by a mango grove appeared to her. There, surrounded by a host of nymphs, she experiences divine bliss. Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, having approached her, asked her with these verses –

783.

783.

‘‘Dibbaṃ te ambavanaṃ rammaṃ, pāsādettha mahallako;

"Your divine mango grove is delightful, a large palace is here;
Filled with the sound of various instruments, resounding with a host of nymphs.

784.

784.

‘‘Padīpo cettha jalati, niccaṃ sovaṇṇayo mahā;

"A lamp burns here, constantly golden and great;
Surrounded on all sides by trees with fruits of cloth.

785.‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

785.“By what, is such your beauty…pe…your radiance illuminates all directions."

787.‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

787.“That goddess, delighted…pe…by what deed is this the fruit?”

788.

788.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, purimāya jātiyā manussaloke;

"I, among humans, having been a human,
In a previous birth in the human world;
Had a monastery built for the Sangha, surrounded by mango trees.

789.

789.

‘‘Pariyosite vihāre, kārente niṭṭhite mahe;

"When the monastery was finished, while being built, the great undertaking completed;
Having covered it with mango trees, having made fruits of cloth.

790.

790.

‘‘Padīpaṃ tattha jāletvā, bhojayitvā gaṇuttamaṃ;

"Having lit a lamp there, having fed the excellent assembly;
I dedicated that to the Sangha, pleased with my own hands.

791.

791.

‘‘Tena me ambavanaṃ rammaṃ, pāsādettha mahallako;

"By that, my mango grove is delightful, a large palace is here;
Filled with the sound of various instruments, resounding with a host of nymphs.

792.

792.

‘‘Padīpo cettha jalati, niccaṃ sovaṇṇayo mahā;

"A lamp burns here, constantly golden and great;
Surrounded on all sides by trees with fruits of cloth.

793.

793.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

“By that, such is my beauty…pe…my radiance illuminates all directions.” –

Sā devatā byākāsi.

That goddess explained.

783.Tatthamahallakoti mahanto āyāmavitthārehi ubbedhena ca vipulo, uḷāratamoti attho.Accharāgaṇaghositoti taṃ pamodituṃ saṅgītivasena ceva piyasallāpavasena ca accharāsaṅghena samugghosito.

783. There, mahallako means large, extensive in length and breadth, and vast in height, meaning exceedingly grand. Accharāgaṇaghosito means, to gladden her, resounded with a host of nymphs, both in the manner of music and in the manner of affectionate conversation.

784.Padīpo cettha jalatīti sūriyarasmisamujjalakiraṇavitāno ratanappadīpo ca ettha etasmiṃ pāsāde abhijalati.Dussaphalehīti dussāni phalāni etesanti dussaphalā. Tehi samuggiriyamānadibbavatthehīti attho.

784.Padīpo cettha jalatīti means here in this palace a jewel lamp, with a spread of rays brightened by the sun’s rays, is burning. Dussaphalehīti means with cloths as fruits; that is, with divine garments being lifted up.

789.Kārente niṭṭhite maheti katapariyositassa vihārassa mahe pūjāya karīyamānāya ca.Katvā dussamaye phaleti dusseyeva tesaṃ ambānaṃ phalaṃ katvā.

789.Kārente niṭṭhite mahe means while a great festival of the completed monastery was being performed. Katvā dussamaye phale means having made the fruits of those mangoes out of cloth.

790.Gaṇuttamanti gaṇānaṃ uttamaṃ bhagavato sāvakasaṅghaṃ.Niyyādesinti sampaṭicchāpesiṃ, adāsinti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

790.Gaṇuttamanti means to the best of groups, the Blessed One's community of disciples. Niyyādesinti means I caused to receive, I gave. The rest is as previously stated.

Ambavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Mango Tree Mansion is complete.

9. Pītavimānavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Yellow Mansion

Pītavatthepītadhajeti pītavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati parinibbute raññā ajātasattunā attanā paṭiladdhā bhagavato sarīradhātuyo gahetvā thūpe ca mahe ca kate rājagahavāsinī aññatarā upāsikā pātova katasarīrapaṭijagganā ‘‘satthu thūpaṃ pūjessāmī’’ti yathāladdhāni cattāri kosātakīpupphāni gahetvā saddhāvegena samussāhitamānasā maggaparissayaṃ anupadhāretvāva thūpābhimukhī gacchati. Atha naṃ taruṇavacchā gāvī abhidhāvantī vegena āpatitvā siṅgena paharitvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpesi. Sā tāvadeva tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattantī sakkassa devarañño uyyānakīḷāya gacchantassa parivārabhūtānaṃ aḍḍhatiyānaṃ nāṭakakoṭīnaṃ majjhe attano sarīrapabhāya tā sabbā abhibhavantī saha rathena pāturahosi. Taṃ disvā sakko devarājā vimhitacitto acchariyabbhutajāto ‘‘kīdisena nu kho oḷārikena kammunā ayaṃ edisiṃ sumahatiṃ deviddhimupāgatā’’ti taṃ imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Pītavatthe pītadhaje means a yellow mansion. What is its origin? When the Blessed One had passed away, King Ajātasattu, having obtained the bodily relics of the Blessed One, made a stupa and a great festival. A certain female lay follower residing in Rājagaha, having early in the morning performed the necessary duties for her body, thinking, "I will honor the Blessed One's stupa," took four kosātakī flowers as she found them, and with a mind uplifted by the force of faith, without even considering the dangers of the road, went towards the stupa. Then a cow with a young calf, rushing towards her, struck her with its horn, causing her to lose her life. Immediately upon death, she was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. While she was being reborn, Sakka, the king of the gods, going out for pleasure in the park, saw her in the midst of thirty-five million actresses who were part of his retinue. Surpassing them all with the radiance of her own body, she appeared together with a chariot. Seeing this, Sakka, the king of the gods, his mind astonished and filled with wonder, asked her with these verses, "By what kind of magnificent deed has she attained such great divine power?" –

795.

795.

‘‘Pītavatthe pītadhaje, pītālaṅkārabhūsite;

"Clad in yellow, with yellow banners, adorned with yellow ornaments,
Anointed with yellow sandalwood, wearing a garland of yellow lotuses.

796.

796.

‘‘Pītapāsādasayane, pītāsane pītabhājane;

"On a yellow palace couch, on a yellow seat, in a yellow vessel,
With a yellow parasol, in a yellow chariot, with a yellow horse, with a yellow fan.

797.

797.

‘‘Kiṃ kammamakarī bhadde, pubbe mānusake bhave;

"What deed did you do, noble lady, in your former human existence?
Asked by the deity, declare it; what is the fruit of which deed?"

Sāpissa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

She then explained with these verses –

798.

798.

‘‘Kosātakī nāma latatthi bhante, tittikā anabhicchitā;

"There is a vine called kosātakī, revered sir, bitter and undesired;
Of that, I offered four flowers to the stupa.

799.

799.

‘‘Satthu sarīramuddissa, vippasannena cetasā;

"Intending towards the Teacher's relics, with a clear mind;
I did not watch the road, nor was my mind focused on that.

800.

800.

‘‘Tato maṃ avadhī gāvī, thūpaṃ apattamānasaṃ;

"Then a cow killed me, my mind not having reached the stupa;
If I had accumulated that, surely there would be more than this.

801.

801.

‘‘Tena kammena devinda, maghavā devakuñjara;

"By that deed, O Sakka, lord of gods, thousand-eyed one;
Having abandoned the human body, I have come to your fellowship."

795-6.Tatthapītacandanalittaṅgeti suvaṇṇavaṇṇena candanena anulittasarīre.Pītapāsādasayaneti sabbasovaṇṇamayena pāsādena suvaṇṇaparikkhittehi sayanehi ca samannāgate. Evaṃ sabbattha heṭṭhā upari ca pītasaddena suvaṇṇameva gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

795-6. Here, pītacandanalittaṅge means with a body anointed with gold-colored sandalwood. Pītapāsādasayane means endowed with a palace made entirely of gold and couches adorned with gold. Thus, everywhere the word "yellow" should be understood as referring to gold, both below and above.

798.Latatthīti latā atthi.Bhanteti sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ gāravena ālapati.Anabhicchitāti na abhikaṅkhitā.

798. Latatthīti means there is a creeper. Bhanteti means she addresses Sakka, the king of the gods, with respect. Anabhicchitāti means not desired.

799.Sarīranti sarīrabhūtaṃ dhātuṃ. Avayave cāyaṃ samudāyavohāro yathā ‘‘paṭo ḍaḍḍho, samuddo diṭṭho’’ti ca.Assāti gorūpassa.Magganti āgamanamaggaṃ.Na avekkhissanti na olokayiṃ. Kasmā?Na taggamanasā satīti, tassaṃ gāviyaṃ gatamanā ṭhapitamanā na hontī, aññadatthu bhagavato thūpagatamanā eva samānāti attho. ‘‘Tadaṅgamanasā satī’’ti ca pāṭho, tadaṅge tassa bhagavato dhātuyā aṅge mano etissāti tadaṅgamanasā. Evaṃbhūtā ahaṃ tadā tassā maggaṃ nāvekkhissanti dasseti.

799. Sarīranti means the bodily relic. This is a collective usage referring to a part, just as in "the cloth is burnt" and "the ocean is seen." Assāti means of the cow. Magganti means the road of approach. Na avekkhissanti means I did not look. Why? Na taggamanasā satīti, means not having her mind fixed on that cow, but rather being focused on the Blessed One's stupa. "Tadaṅgamanasā satī" is also a reading; tadaṅge means her mind was on the element of that Blessed One's relic. Being of such a nature, she shows that she did not look at the road at that time.

800.Thūpaṃ apattamānasanti thūpaṃ cetiyaṃ asampattaajjhāsayaṃ, manasi bhavoti hi mānaso, ajjhāsayo manoratho. ‘‘Thūpaṃ upagantvā pupphehi pūjessāmī’’ti uppannamanorathassa asampuṇṇatāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Thūpaṃ cetiyaṃ pana pupphehi pūjanacittaṃ siddhameva, yena sā devaloke uppanna.Tañcāhaṃ abhisañceyyanti tañce ahaṃ abhisañcineyyaṃ, pupphapūjanena hi puññaṃ ahaṃ thūpaṃ abhigantvā yathādhippāyaṃ pūjanena sammadeva cineyyaṃ upacineyyanti attho.Bhiyyo nūna ito siyāti ito yathāladdhasampattitopi bhiyyo upari uttaritarā sampatti siyāti maññeti attho.

800. Thūpaṃ apattamānasanti means her intention had not reached the stupa, for mānaso means that which is in the mind, intention, desire. This is said because the desire that arose in her – "I will go to the stupa and honor it with flowers" – was not fulfilled. However, the thought of honoring the stupa with flowers was indeed accomplished, by which she was born in the deva-world. Tañcāhaṃ abhisañceyyanti means if I had accumulated that, for by honoring with flowers, I would have properly accumulated merit by going to the stupa and honoring it according to my intention. Bhiyyo nūna ito siyāti maññeti means she thought that there would surely be a greater attainment than this attainment already gained.

801.Maghavādevakuñjarāti ālapanaṃ. Tatthadevakuñjarāti sabbabalaparakkamādivisesehi devesu kuñjarasadiso.Sahabyanti sahabhāvaṃ.

801. Maghavā devakuñjarāti is a form of address. There, devakuñjarāti means like an elephant among the gods due to his superior strength, prowess, and other qualities. Sahabyanti means fellowship.

802.

802.

‘‘Idaṃ sutvā tidasādhipati, maghavā devakuñjaro;

"Having heard this, the lord of the Tāvatiṃsa, Sakka, the elephant of gods,
While pleasing the Tāvatiṃsa gods, said this to Mātali." –

Idaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakavacanaṃ. Tato sakko mātalipamukhassa devagaṇassa imāhi gāthāhi dhammaṃ desesi –

This is the word of the compilers of the Dhamma. Then Sakka taught the Dhamma to the assembly of gods, headed by Mātali, with these verses –

803.

803.

‘‘Passa mātali accheraṃ, cittaṃ kammaphalaṃ idaṃ;

"See, Mātali, this wondrous, varied fruit of kamma;
Even a small gift, if given, yields great fruit.

804.

804.

‘‘Natthi citte pasannamhi, appakā nāma dakkhiṇā;

"There is no such thing as a small offering when the mind is clear,
Whether to the Tathāgata, the Fully Enlightened One, or to his disciple.

805.

805.

‘‘Ehi mātali amhepi, bhiyyo bhiyyo mahemase;

"Come, Mātali, let us also celebrate more and more;
Relics of the Tathāgata—happy is the accumulation of merit.

806.

806.

‘‘Tiṭṭhante nibbute cāpi, same citte samaṃ phalaṃ;

"Whether standing or extinguished, with the same mind, the fruit is the same;
Due to the intention of the mind, beings go to a good destination.

807.

807.

‘‘Bahūnaṃ vata atthāya, uppajjanti tathāgatā;

"For the benefit of many, indeed, do the Tathāgatas arise;
Having made an offering to them, givers go to heaven."

802.Tatthapasādentoti pasanne karonto, ratanattaye saddhaṃ uppādentoti attho.

802. There, pasādentoti means making them pleased, generating faith in the Triple Gem.

803.Cittanti vicittaṃ acinteyyaṃ.Kammaphalanti deyyadhammassa anuḷārattepi khettasampattiyā ca cittasampattiyā ca uḷārassa puññakammassa phalaṃ passāti yojanā.Appakampi kataṃ deyyaṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphalanti etthakatanti kāravasena sakkāravasena āyatane viniyuttaṃ.Deyyanti dātabbavatthuṃ.Puññanti tathāpavattaṃ puññakammaṃ.

803. Cittanti means varied, inconceivable. Kammaphalanti means the connection is to "see the fruit of meritorious kamma," which is magnificent due to the perfection of the field and the perfection of the mind, even though the gift may not be magnificent. Appakampi kataṃ deyyaṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphalanti, here katanti means arranged in a place of reverence with honor. Deyyanti means the object to be given. Puññanti means the meritorious kamma that occurs in that way.

804.Idāni yattha appakampi kataṃ puññaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti, taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento‘‘natthi citte pasannamhī’’ti gāthamāha. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.

804. Now, showing by making it clear where even a small meritorious deed becomes greatly fruitful, he speaks this verse, ‘‘natthi citte pasannamhī’’ti. That is very easy to understand.

805-6.Amhepīti mayampi.Mahemaseti mahāmase pūjāmase.Cetopaṇidhihetu hīti attano cittassa sammadeva ṭhapananimittaṃ, attasammāpaṇidhānenāti attho. Tenāha bhagavā –

805-6. Amhepīti means we also. Mahemaseti means let us celebrate a great festival, let us honor. Cetopaṇidhihetu hīti means because of the proper establishment of one's own mind, that is, by proper self-application. Therefore, the Blessed One said –

‘‘Na taṃ mātāpitā kayirā, aññe vāpi ca ñātakā;

‘‘Na taṃ mātāpitā kayirā, aññe vāpi ca ñātakā;
Sammā paṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti. (dha. pa. 43);

Evañca pana vatvā sakko devānamindo uyyānakīḷāya ussāhaṃ paṭippassambhetvā tatova paṭinivattitvā attanā abhiṇhaṃ pūjaneyyaṭṭhānabhūte cūḷāmaṇicetiye sattāhaṃ pūjaṃ akāsi. Atha aparena samayena devacārikaṃ gatassa āyasmato nāradattherassa taṃ pavattiṃ gāthāheva kathesi, thero dhammasaṅgāhakānaṃ ārocesi, te tathā naṃ saṅgahaṃ āropesunti.

"Neither mother nor father, nor any other relatives, can do that; a mind well-directed can do even better than that." Saying this, Sakka, the king of the gods, stopped his enthusiasm for the park pleasure and, turning back from there, made offerings for seven days to the Cūḷāmaṇi shrine, a place that he frequently honored. Then, at another time, when Venerable Nārada Thera had gone on a divine tour, he related that occurrence in verses. The Thera informed the compilers of the Dhamma, and they included it in the collection in that way.

Pītavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Yellow Mansion is complete.

10. Ucchuvimānavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Sugarcane Mansion

Obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakanti ucchuvimānaṃ. Taṃ heṭṭhā ucchuvimānena pāḷito ca aṭṭhuppattito ca sadisameva. Kevalaṃ tattha sassu suṇisaṃ pīṭhakena paharitvā māresi, idha pana leḍḍunāti ayameva viseso. Vatthuno pana bhinnattā ubhayampi visuṃyeva saṅgahaṃ āruḷhanti veditabbaṃ.

Obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakanti means the Sugarcane Mansion. This is similar to the previous Sugarcane Mansion in terms of being rewarded due to sugarcane and in terms of its origin. Only there, the mother-in-law killed the daughter-in-law by striking her with a stool, while here, it was with a clod of earth; this is the only difference. However, due to the difference in the story, both were included separately in the collection.

808.

808.

‘‘Obhāsayitvā pathaviṃ sadevakaṃ, atirocasi candimasūriyā viya;

"Having illuminated the earth together with the world of gods, you shine forth, like the moon and the sun;
With glory, beauty, fame, and radiance, like Brahmā among the gods in Tāvatiṃsa together with Indra.

809.

809.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ uppalamāladhārinī, āveḷinī kañcanasannibhattace;

"I ask you, wearing a garland of lotuses, adorned, with a complexion like gold;
Adorned, wearing excellent garments, who are you, O beautiful deity, that you salute me?

810.

810.

‘‘Kiṃ tvaṃ pure kammamakāsi attanā, manussabhūtā purimāya jātiyā;

"What deed did you do by yourself in your former existence as a human being?
Did you practice giving, good conduct, or self-restraint? By what have you been reborn in a happy destination, O glorious one?
Asked by the deity, declare it; what is the fruit of which deed?" –

Āyasmā mahāmoggallānatthero pucchi. Tato devatā imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Venerable Mahāmoggallāna Thera asked. Then the deity explained with these verses –

811.

811.

‘‘Idāni bhante imameva gāmaṃ, piṇḍāya amhākaṃ gharaṃ upāgami;

"Now, revered sir, you came to our house in this very village for alms;
Then, with a clear mind and immeasurable joy, I gave you a piece of sugarcane.

812.

812.

‘‘Sassu ca pacchā anuyuñjate mamaṃ, kahaṃ nu ucchuṃ vadhuke avākiri;

"Afterwards, my mother-in-law questioned me, 'Where did you throw the sugarcane, you wretched woman?'
I did not throw it away, nor did I eat it myself; I gave it myself to the peaceful bhikkhu.

813.

813.

‘‘‘Tuyhaṃ nvidaṃ issariyaṃ atho mama’, itissā sassu paribhāsate mamaṃ;

"'Is this your authority or mine?' In this way, my mother-in-law scolded me;
Taking a clod of earth, she struck me a blow; from there, having died, I am a deity.

814.

814.

‘‘Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā, sukhañca kammaṃ anubhomi attanā;

"That same deed was a skillful one done by me, and I experience the happiness of that deed myself;
I am attended by the gods, I rejoice with the five sense pleasures.

815.

815.

‘‘Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā, sukhañca kammaṃ anubhomi attanā;

"That same deed was a skillful one done by me, and I experience the happiness of that deed myself;
Guarded by the king of gods, protected by the Tāvatiṃsa gods, I am endowed with the five sense pleasures.

816.

816.

‘‘Etādisaṃ puññaphalaṃ anappakaṃ, mahāvipākā mama ucchudakkhiṇā;

"Such is the not-small fruit of merit, my sugarcane offering of great result;
I am attended by the gods, I rejoice with the five sense pleasures.

817.

817.

‘‘Etādisaṃ puññaphalaṃ anappakaṃ, mahājutikā mama ucchudakkhiṇā;

"Such is the not-small fruit of merit, my sugarcane offering of great radiance;
Guarded by the king of gods, protected by the Tāvatiṃsa gods, like thousand-eyed Indra in the Nandana Grove.

818.

818.

‘‘Tuvañca bhante anukampakaṃ viduṃ, upecca vandiṃ kusalañca pucchisaṃ;

"And you, revered sir, are known to be compassionate, having approached, I saluted and asked about what is skillful;
Then, with a clear mind and immeasurable joy, I gave you a piece of sugarcane."

Sesaṃ vuttasadisamevāti.

The rest is similar to what has been said.

Ucchuvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Sugarcane Mansion is complete.

11. Vandanavimānavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Salutation Mansion

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti vandanavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena samayena sambahulā bhikkhū aññatarasmiṃ gāmakāvāse vassaṃ vasitvā vutthavassā pavāretvā senāsanaṃ paṭisāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṃ uddissa bhagavantaṃ dassanatthāya gacchantā aññatarassa gāmassa majjhena atikkamanti. Tattha aññatarā itthī te bhikkhū disvā pasannacittā sañjātagāravabahumānā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā sirasmiṃ añjaliṃ paggayha yāva dassanūpacārā pasādasommāni akkhīni ummīletvā olokentī aṭṭhāsi. Sā aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. Atha naṃ tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantiṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā means the Salutation Mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove, in Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery. At that time, many bhikkhus, having spent the rainy season in a certain village dwelling, having finished the rains and performed pavāraṇā, putting away their dwelling places, taking their bowl and robe, and heading towards Sāvatthi to see the Blessed One, passed through the middle of a certain village. There, a certain woman, seeing those bhikkhus, with a clear mind, having developed respect and high regard, saluted them with the five-point prostration, raised her joined hands to her head, and stood there, gazing with clear and gentle eyes, showing respect until they were out of sight. At another time, she died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna asked her, experiencing divine prosperity there, with these verses –

819.‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena…pe…vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

819."With surpassing beauty…pe…and your radiance illuminates all directions."

822.‘‘Sā devatā attamanā…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

822."That deity, delighted…pe…what is the fruit of which deed?"

823.

823.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūtā, disvāna samaṇe sīlavante;

"I, a human among humans, having seen the virtuous samaṇas;
Having saluted their feet, I cleared my mind, and delighted, I made an añjali.

824.

824.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"By that, such is my beauty…pe…and my radiance illuminates all directions." –

Imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi.

She explained with these verses.

823.Tatthasamaṇeti samitapāpe.Sīlavanteti sīlaguṇayutte.Manaṃ pasādayinti ‘‘sādhurūpā vatime ayyā dhammacārino samacārino brahmacārino’’ti tesaṃ guṇe ārabbha cittaṃ pasādesiṃ.Vittā cahaṃ añjalikaṃ akāsinti tuṭṭhā somanassajātā ahaṃ vandiṃ. Pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pasādavikasitāni akkhīni ummīletvā dassanamattampi imesaṃ sattānaṃ bahūpakāraṃ, pageva vandanāti. Tenāha‘‘tena metādiso vaṇṇo’’tiādi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

823.Here, samaṇe means one who has calmed evil. Sīlavante means endowed with the quality of virtue. Manaṃ pasādayi means "These venerable ones are of good form, practitioners of the Dhamma, practitioners of the righteous path, practitioners of the holy life," thus I gladdened my mind reflecting on their virtues. Vittā cahaṃ añjalikaṃ akāsi means, being delighted and filled with joy, I paid homage. Even merely seeing the eyes of the amiable monks, radiant with joy, is greatly beneficial to beings, what to say of paying homage. Therefore, he said, ‘‘tena metādiso vaṇṇo’’ etc. The rest is as previously stated.

Vandanavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Vandanavimāna is complete.

12. Rajjumālāvimānavaṇṇanā
12. Description of the Rajjumālāvimāna

Abhikkantenavaṇṇenāti rajjumālāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena gayāgāmake aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa dhītā tasmiṃyeva gāme ekassa brāhmaṇakumārassa dinnā patikulaṃ gatā, tasmiṃ gehe issariyaṃ vattentī tiṭṭhati. Sā tasmiṃ gehe dāsiyā dhītaraṃ disvā na sahati. Diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya kodhena taṭataṭāyamānā akkosati paribhāsati, khaṭakañcassā deti. Yadā pana sā vayappattiyā kiccasamatthā jātā, tadā naṃ jaṇṇukapparamuṭṭhīhi paharateva yathā taṃ purimajātīsu baddhāghātā.

Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā refers to the Rajjumālāvimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi in Jeta's Grove. At that time, a certain brahmin's daughter in Gayāgāma was given to a brahmin youth in that same village and went to her husband's family, where she lived wielding authority in that household. She could not bear to see the daughter of a female slave in that house. From the time she saw her, she was constantly agitated with anger, scolding, and insulting her, even pinching her with fingernails. When the slave girl came of age and was able to perform tasks, she would strike her with fists at knee-level, as if bound by hatred from previous lives.

Sā kira dāsī kassapadasabalassa kāle tassā sāminī ahosi, itarā dāsī. Sā taṃ leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi muṭṭhiādīhi ca abhiṇhaṃ abhihanati. Sā tena nibbinnā yathābalaṃ dānādīni puññāni katvā ‘‘anāgate ahaṃ sāminī hutvā imissā upari issariyaṃ vatteyya’’nti patthanaṃ ṭhapesi. Atha sā dāsī tato cutā aparāparaṃ saṃsarantī imasmiṃ buddhuppāde vuttanayena gayāgāmake brāhmaṇakule nibbattitvā patikulaṃ gatā, itarāpi tassā dāsī ahosi. Evaṃ baddhāghātatāya sā taṃ viheṭheti.

It is said that the slave girl had been the mistress in the time of Kassapa, the Ten-Powered One, and the other woman had been the slave. The mistress frequently struck her with clods of earth, sticks, fists, etc. Wearied by this, she performed meritorious deeds such as giving according to her ability and made the aspiration, "In the future, may I become the mistress and wield authority over her." Then that slave girl, passing away from there and wandering on and on, was reborn in this Buddha-era in a brahmin family in Gayāgāma, as described above, and went to her husband's family; the other woman was also her slave. Thus, due to their bound hatred, she tormented her.

Evaṃ viheṭhentī akāraṇeneva kesesu gahetvā hatthehi ca pādehi ca suhataṃ hani. Sā nhāpitasālaṃ gantvā khuramuṇḍaṃ kāretvā agamāsi. Sāminī ‘‘kiṃ je duṭṭhadāsi muṇḍanamattena tava vippamokkho’’ti rajjuṃ sīse bandhitvā tattha naṃ gahetvā oṇametvā ghāteti, tassā tañca rajjuṃ apanetuṃ na deti. Tato paṭṭhāya dāsiyā ‘‘rajjumālā’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi.

Tormenting her in this way, she would seize her hair and beat her severely with her hands and feet for no reason. The slave girl went to the bathing hall, had her head shaved, and left. The mistress said, "O wicked slave, do you think you are freed just by shaving your head?" and tying a rope around her head, she took her there, bent her over, and killed her, not allowing her to remove the rope. From then on, the slave girl was known as "Rajjumālā" (Rope-garland).

Athekadivasaṃ satthā paccūsasamaye mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya lokaṃ volokento rajjumālāya sotāpattiphalūpanissayaṃ, tassā ca brāhmaṇiyā saraṇesu sīlesu ca patiṭṭhānaṃ disvā araññaṃ pavisitvā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vissajjento. Rajjumālāpi kho divase divase tāya tathā viheṭhiyamānā ‘‘kiṃ me iminā dujjīvitenā’’ti nibbinnarūpā jīvite maritukāmā ghaṭaṃ gahetvā udakatitthaṃ gacchantī viya gehato nikkhantā anukkamena vanaṃ pavisitvā bhagavato nisinnarukkhassa avidūre aññatarassa rukkhassa sākhāya rajjuṃ bandhitvā pāsaṃ katvā ubbandhitukāmā ito cito ca olokentī addasa bhagavantaṃ tattha nisinnaṃ pāsādikaṃ pasādanīyaṃ uttamadamathasamathamanuppattaṃ chabbaṇṇabuddharasmiyo vissajjentaṃ. Disvā buddhagāravena ākaḍḍhiyamānahadayā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhagavā mādisānampi dhammaṃ deseti, yamahaṃ sutvā ito dujjīvitato mucceyya’’nti cintesi.

Then one day, the Teacher, arising at dawn from the attainment of great compassion, surveyed the world and saw the condition for Rajjumālā's attainment of Stream-entry, and the brahmin woman's establishment in the refuges and precepts. He entered the forest and sat at the foot of a certain tree, emitting six-colored Buddha-rays. Rajjumālā, being tormented daily in that way, thinking, "What is the use of this miserable life?" and wishing to die, left the house as if going to the water-ghat to fetch water. Gradually, she entered the forest and, not far from the tree where the Blessed One was sitting, tied a rope to the branch of another tree, made a noose, and looked around, intending to hang herself. She saw the Blessed One sitting there, pleasing, inspiring confidence, having attained the ultimate taming and calming, emitting six-colored Buddha-rays. Seeing him, her heart drawn by reverence for the Buddha, she thought, "Does the Blessed One also teach the Dhamma to people like me, which I could hear and be freed from this miserable life?"

Atha bhagavā tassā cittācāraṃ oloketvā ‘‘rajjumāle’’ti āha. Sā taṃ sutvā amatena viya abhisittā pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭṭhā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Tassā bhagavā anupubbikathānupubbakaṃ catusaccakathaṃ kathesi, sā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Satthā ‘‘vaṭṭati ettako rajjumālāya anuggaho, idānesā kenaci appadhaṃsiyā jātā’’ti araññato nikkhamitvā gāmassa avidūre aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi. Rajjumālāpi attānaṃ vinipātetuṃ abhabbatāya khantimettānuddayasampannatāya ca ‘‘brāhmaṇī maṃ hanatu vā viheṭhetu vā yaṃ vā taṃ vā karotū’’ti ghaṭena udakaṃ gahetvā gehaṃ agamāsi. Sāmiko gehadvāre ṭhito taṃ disvā ‘‘tvaṃ ajja udakatitthaṃ gatā cirāyitvā āgatā, mukhavaṇṇo ca te ativiya vippasanno, tvañca aññena ākārena upaṭṭhāsi, kiṃ eta’’nti pucchi. Sā tassa taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi.

Then the Blessed One, observing her state of mind, said, "Rajjumālā." Hearing that, she was as if sprinkled with the nectar of immortality, filled with uninterrupted joy, approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and stood to one side. To her, the Blessed One gave a progressive discourse, the Four Noble Truths, and she was established in the fruit of Stream-entry. The Teacher thought, "This much grace for Rajjumālā is sufficient, now she has become unshakeable by anyone," and leaving the forest, he sat at the foot of another tree not far from the village. Rajjumālā, no longer able to kill herself, and endowed with patience, loving-kindness, and compassion, thinking, "Let the brahmin woman kill or torment me, or do whatever she will," took water in the ghat and went home. Her husband, standing at the door of the house, saw her and asked, "Today you went to the water-ghat and have come back late, and the color of your face is exceedingly clear, and you appear in a different manner; what is this?" She told him the whole story.

Brāhmaṇo tassā vacanaṃ sutvā tussitvā gehaṃ gantvā rajjumālāya upari ‘‘tayā na kiñci kātabba’’nti suṇisāya vatvā tuṭṭhamānaso sīghataraṃ satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā sādarena katapaṭisanthāro satthāraṃ nimantetvā attano gehaṃ ānetvā paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena parivisitvā bhagavantaṃ bhuttāviṃ onītapattapāṇiṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi, suṇisāpissa upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Gayāgāmavāsinopi brāhmaṇagahapatikā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā appekacce abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu, appekacce sammodanīyaṃ katvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu.

The brahmin, hearing her words, rejoiced and, going into the house, said to his daughter-in-law regarding Rajjumālā, "You must not do anything," and with a delighted mind, he quickly went to the Teacher, paid homage, exchanged courteous greetings, invited the Teacher, brought him to his house, served him with delicious foods and edibles, and after the Blessed One had finished eating and withdrawn his hand from the bowl, he approached and sat to one side; his daughter-in-law also approached, paid homage, and sat to one side. The brahmins and householders living in Gayāgāma, hearing that story, approached the Blessed One; some paid homage and sat to one side, others exchanged courteous greetings and sat to one side.

Satthā rajjumālāya tassā ca brāhmaṇiyā purimajātīsu katakammaṃ vitthārato kathetvā sampattaparisāya anurūpaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. Taṃ sutvā brāhmaṇī ca mahājano ca tattha sannipatito saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhahi. Satthā āsanā uṭṭhahitvā sāvatthimeva agamāsi. Brāhmaṇo rajjumālaṃ dhītuṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. Tassa suṇisā rajjumālaṃ piyacakkhūhi olokentī yāvajīvaṃ manāpeneva sinehena parihari. Rajjumālā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti, accharāsahassañcassā parivāro ahosi. Sā saṭṭhisakaṭabhārappamāṇehi dibbābharaṇehi paṭimaṇḍitattabhāvā accharāsahassaparivuttā nandanavanādīsu mahatiṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamānā pamuditamanā vicarati. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ gato taṃ mahantena dibbānubhāvena mahatiyā deviddhiyā vijjotamānaṃ disvā tāya katakammaṃ imāhi gāthāhi pucchi.

The Teacher, recounting in detail the actions done by Rajjumālā and that brahmin woman in their previous lives, taught the Dhamma appropriate to the assembly. Hearing that, the brahmin woman and the great multitude who had gathered there were established in the refuges and precepts. The Teacher, rising from his seat, went to Sāvatthi. The brahmin placed Rajjumālā in the position of a daughter. His daughter-in-law, looking at Rajjumālā with affectionate eyes, cared for her with constant love as long as she lived. Rajjumālā, in the latter part of her life, passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and a thousand nymphs were her attendants. Adorned with divine ornaments weighing sixty cartloads, surrounded by a thousand nymphs, she wandered through the Nandana Garden and other places, experiencing great divine wealth with a joyful heart. Then Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, on a tour of the heavens, saw her shining with great divine power and great heavenly glory, and asked her about the deeds she had done with these verses:

826.

826.

‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi devate;

‘‘With surpassing beauty, O deity, do you stand;
Raising your hands and feet, you dance to exquisite music.

827.

827.

‘‘Tassā te naccamānāya, aṅgamaṅgehi sabbaso;

‘‘As you dance, in every part of your body,
Divine sounds issue forth, pleasing and delightful.

828.

828.

‘‘Tassā te naccamānāya, aṅgamaṅgehi sabbaso;

‘‘As you dance, in every part of your body,
Divine fragrances waft, pure and delightful.

829.

829.

‘‘Vivattamānā kāyena, yā veṇīsu piḷandhanā;

‘‘As you move your body, the ornaments in your braids,
Their sound is heard like a five-part orchestra.

830.

830.

‘‘Vaṭaṃsakā vātadhutā, vātena sampakampitā;

‘‘The earrings, shaken by the wind, stirred by the breeze,
Their sound is heard like a five-part orchestra.

831.

831.

‘‘Yāpi te sirasmiṃ mālā, sucigandhā manoramā;

‘‘And the garland on your head, pure and delightful,
Its fragrance wafts in every direction, like a mañjūsaka tree.

832.

832.

‘‘Ghāyase taṃ sucigandhaṃ, rūpaṃ passasi amānusaṃ;

‘‘You smell that pure fragrance, you see an inhuman form;
O deity, when asked, tell me, what deed is this the fruit of?’’

826.Tatthahatthe pāde ca viggayhāti hatthe ca pāde ca vividhehi ākārehi gahetvā, pupphamuṭṭhipupphañjaliādibhedassa sākhābhinayassa dassanavasena vividhehi ākārehi hatthe, ca, samapādādīnampi ṭhānavisesānaṃ dassanavasena vividhehi ākārehi pāde ca upādiyitvāti attho. Ca-saddena sākhābhinayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Naccasīti naṭasi.Yā tvanti yā vuttanayavasena naccaṃ karosīti attho.Suppavāditeti sundare pavajjane sati tava naccassa anurūpavasena vīṇāvaṃsamudiṅgatāḷādike vādiyamāne, pañcaṅgike tūriye paggayhamāneti attho. Sesaṃ heṭṭhāvimāne vuttanayameva.

826.Here, hatthe pāde ca viggayhā means taking hands and feet in various ways, in the manner of showing branch gestures, such as flower-fist, flower-offering, etc., and in various ways in the manner of showing special positions such as equal feet, etc. The word "ca" includes branch gestures. Naccasī means you dance. Yā tva means you, who in the manner described, are dancing. Suppavādite means when a beautiful playing is present, when a vīṇā, flute, mudiṅga, ṭāla, and other instruments are being played in a manner appropriate to your dance, when a five-part orchestra is being performed. The rest is as previously stated in the former vimāna.

Evaṃ therena pucchitā sā devatā attano purimajātiādiṃ imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Thus, being asked by the Elder, that deity explained her former life, etc., with these verses:

833.

833.

‘‘Dāsī ahaṃ pure āsiṃ, gayāyaṃ brāhmaṇassahaṃ;

‘‘I was formerly a slave, in Gayā, of a brahmin;
Of little merit, unfortunate, they knew me as Rajjumālā.

834.

834.

‘‘Akkosānaṃ vadhānañca, tajjanāya ca uggatā;

‘‘Used to scolding and beatings, and harsh words,
Taking a pot, I went out for water.

835.

835.

‘‘Vipathe kuṭaṃ nikkhipitvā, vanasaṇḍaṃ upāgamiṃ;

‘‘Leaving the pot by the roadside, I approached a grove of trees;
‘Here I will die, what is the use of my life?’

836.

836.

‘‘Daḷhaṃ pāsaṃ karitvāna, āsumbhitvāna pādape;

‘‘Making a strong noose, having climbed a tree,
Then I looked around, ‘Who is dwelling in the forest?’

837.

837.

‘‘Tatthaddasāsiṃ sambuddhaṃ, sabbalokahitaṃ muniṃ;

‘‘There I saw the Fully Enlightened One, the sage who benefits all the world;
Sitting at the foot of a tree, meditating, fearless.

838.

838.

‘‘Tassā me ahu saṃvego, abbhuto lomahaṃsano;

‘‘Awe came over me, a wondrous thrill;
‘Who is dwelling in the forest, a human or a deity?’

839.

839.

‘‘Pāsādikaṃ pasādanīyaṃ, vanā nibbanamāgataṃ;

‘‘Pleasing, inspiring confidence, coming forth from the forest;
Seeing him, my mind was gladdened, ‘He is not like anyone else.’

840.

840.

‘‘Guttindriyo jhānarato, abahiggatamānaso;

‘‘With guarded senses, delighting in meditation, with unscattered mind;
Beneficial to all the world, this will be a Buddha.

841.

841.

‘‘Bhayabheravo durāsado, sīhova guhamassito;

‘‘Fearsome, difficult to approach, like a lion dwelling in a cave;
Rare to see, like an udumbara flower.

842.

842.

‘‘So maṃ mudūhi vācāhi, ālapitvā tathāgato;

‘‘He, the Thus-gone One, addressing me with gentle words;
Said to me, ‘Rajjumālā, go for refuge to the Thus-gone One.’

843.

843.

‘‘Tāhaṃ giraṃ suṇitvāna, nelaṃ atthavatiṃ suciṃ;

‘‘Hearing that speech, meaningful, pure;
Smooth, gentle, and pleasing, dispelling all sorrow.

844.

844.

‘‘Kallacittañca maṃ ñatvā, pasannaṃ suddhamānasaṃ;

‘‘Knowing me to be of a malleable mind, serene, with a pure heart;
Beneficial to all the world, the Thus-gone One instructed me.

845.

845.

‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti maṃvoca, ayaṃ dukkhassa sambhavo;

‘‘‘This is suffering,’ he said to me, ‘this is the arising of suffering;
The cessation of suffering and the path, direct, leading to the immortal state.’

846.

846.

‘‘Anukampakassa kusalassa, ovādamhi ahaṃ ṭhitā;

‘‘Standing in the instruction of the compassionate, skillful one;
I attained the deathless peace, Nibbāna, the imperishable state.

847.

847.

‘‘Sāhaṃ avaṭṭhitāpemā, dassane avikampinī;

‘‘I am established in love, unwavering in seeing;
With faith rooted, a true daughter of the Buddha.

848.

848.

‘‘Sāhaṃ ramāmi kīḷāmi, modāmi akutobhayā;

‘‘I delight, I play, I rejoice, fearless;
I wear divine garlands, I drink honeyed wine.

849.

849.

‘‘Saṭṭhitūriyasahassāni, paṭibodhaṃ karonti me;

‘‘Sixty thousand instruments awaken me;
Āḷambo, Gaggaro, Bhīmo, Sādhuvādī, and Saṃsayo.

850.

850.

‘‘Pokkharo ca suphasso ca, viṇāmokkhā ca nāriyo;

‘‘Pokkharo and Suphasso, female vīṇā players;
Nandā, Sunandā, Soṇadinnā, and Sucimhitā.

851.

851.

‘‘Alambusā missakesī ca, puṇḍarīkātidāruṇī;

‘‘Alambusā, Missakesī, Puṇḍarīkātidāruṇī;
Eṇīphassā, Suphassā, Subhaddā, and Muduvādinī.

852.

852.

‘‘Etā caññā ca seyyāse, accharānaṃ pabodhikā;

‘‘These and other excellent nymphs who awaken me;
They approach me in time, the deities speak to me.

853.

853.

‘‘Handa naccāma gāyāma, handa taṃ ramayāmase;

‘‘Come, let us dance and sing, come, let us delight you;
This is not for those who have not done merit, this is for those who have done merit.

854.

854.

‘‘Asokaṃ nandanaṃ rammaṃ, tidasānaṃ mahāvanaṃ;

‘‘The sorrowless, delightful, beautiful, great forest of the Thirty-three;
Happiness for those who have not done merit is not here, nor in the next world.

855.

855.

‘‘Sukhañca katapuññānaṃ, idha ceva parattha ca;

‘‘Happiness for those who have done merit is both here and in the next world;
For those who desire their companionship, much good should be done;
For those who have done merit rejoice, endowed with heavenly enjoyments.’’

856.

856.

‘‘Bahūnaṃ vata atthāya, uppajjanti tathāgatā;

"Indeed, for the benefit of many, the Tathāgatas arise;
Worthy of offerings from humans, a mine of fields of merit;
Having performed deeds there, donors rejoice in heaven."

833.Tatthadāsī ahaṃ pure āsinti pure purimajātiyaṃ ahaṃ antojātā dāsī ahosiṃ. Tattha kassāti āha‘‘gayāyaṃ brāhmaṇassaha’’nti, gayānāmake gāme aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa.Hanti nipātamattaṃ.Appapuññāti mandabhāgyā apuññā.Alakkhikāti nissirikā kālakaṇṇī.Rajjumālāti maṃ vidunti, kese gahetvā ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanadukkhena muṇḍake kate punapi tadatthameva sīse daḷhaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapitarajjukuṇḍalakavasena ‘‘rajjumālā’’ti maṃ manussā jāniṃsu.

833. There, I was formerly a slave girl means, in a former birth, I was born as a slave girl. About whose (slave girl)? He says, "In Gayā, of a brahmin," in the village named Gayā, of a certain brahmin. Ha is merely an expletive. Appapuññā means unlucky, without merit. Alakkhikā means without fortune, a jinx. Rajjumālā they knew me as means, having made (my head) bald with the suffering of pulling and dragging the hair, and again tightly binding and placing a coil of rope on my head for that very purpose, people knew me as "Rajjumālā."

834.Vadhānanti tāḷanānaṃ.Tajjanāyāti bhayasaṃtajjanena.Uggatāti uggatāya domanassuppattiyā.Udahāriyāti udakahārikā, udakaṃ āharantī viya hutvāti adhippāyo.

834. Vadhānaṃ means of beatings. Tajjanāya means with frightening threats. Uggatā means with arisen sorrow. Udahāriyā means water-carrier, the meaning is as if bringing water.

835.Vipatheti apathe, maggato apakkamitvāti attho.Kvatthoti ko attho. Soyeva vā pāṭho.

835. Vipathe means on the wrong path, having strayed from the path, is the meaning. Kvattho means what is the meaning? Or that is the reading.

836.Daḷhaṃ pāsaṃ karitvānāti bandhanapāsaṃ thiraṃ acchijjanakaṃ katvā.Āsumbhitvāna pādapeti viṭape lagganavasena pādape rukkhe khipitvā.Tato disā vilokesiṃ, ko nu kho vanamassitoti imaṃ vanaṃ pavisanavasena assito nu kho koci atthi, yato me maraṇantarāyo siyāti adhippāyo.

836. Daḷhaṃ pāsaṃ karitvānā means having made a firm, unbreakable noose for binding. Āsumbhitvāna pādape means having thrown (the noose) on a tree, attaching it to a branch. Tato disā vilokesiṃ, ko nu kho vanamassito means is there anyone dwelling in this forest by entering this forest, from whom there might be danger of death for me, is the meaning.

837.Sambuddhantiādi tadā tassā tādise nicchaye asatipi sabhāvavasena vuttaṃ. Tassattho – sayameva sammadeva ca sabbassāpi bujjhitabbassa buddhattāsambuddhaṃ,mahākaruṇāyogena hīnādibhedabhinnassa sabbassāpi lokassa ekantahitattāsabbalokahitaṃ,ubhayalokaṃ munanatomuniṃ,nisajjāvasena kilesābhisaṅkhārehi ṭhānā cāvanābhāvena canisinnaṃ,ārammaṇūpanijjhānena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena cajhāyantaṃ,bodhimūleyeva bhayahetūnaṃ samucchinnattā kutocipi bhayābhāvatoakutobhayanti veditabbaṃ.

837. Sambuddha etc., although that determination was not present in her at that time, it was stated according to (his) inherent nature. Its meaning is - because of being awakened by himself, rightly, and of everything that should be awakened, (he is) Sambuddha; because of being the sole benefit of all the world, which is distinct in its divisions of low and so on, by means of the great compassion, (he is) sabbalokahitaṃ; because of understanding both worlds, (he is) muniṃ; because of not moving from his place due to the disturbances of defilement-saṅkhāras by way of sitting, (he is) nisinnaṃ; because of contemplating with object-contemplation and characteristic-contemplation, (he is) jhāyantaṃ; because the causes of fear were completely cut off at the foot of the Bodhi tree itself, and because of the absence of fear from anywhere, (he is) akutobhayaṃ, should be understood.

838.Saṃvegonāma sahottappaṃ ñāṇaṃ, so tassā bhagavato dassanena uppajji. Tenāha‘‘tassā me ahu saṃvego’’ti.

838. Saṃvego is the name for knowledge together with trembling, that arose for her upon seeing the Blessed One. Therefore he said, ‘‘tassā me ahu saṃvego’’ti.

839.Pāsādikanti pasādāvahaṃ, dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāketumālālaṅkatāya samantapāsādikāya attano sarīrasobhāsampattiyā rūpakāyadassanabyāvaṭassa janassa sādhubhāvato pasādasaṃvaḍḍhananti attho.Pasādanīyanti dasabala-catuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇañāṇa-aṭṭhārasāveṇika-buddhadhammapabhutiaparimāṇaguṇasamannāgatāya dhammakāyasampattiyā sarikkhakajanassa pasīditabbayuttaṃ, pāsādikanti attho.Vanāti kilesavanato apakkamitvā.Nibbanamāgatanti nittaṇhabhāvaṃ nibbānameva upagataṃ adhigataṃ.Yādisakīdisoti yo vā so vā, pacurajanoti attho.

839. Pāsādika means inducing serenity, because of the thirty-two marks of a great man, the eighty minor marks, the fathom-length radiance, and being adorned with a garland of flags, (he is) the increasing of serenity for the people engaged in seeing the form body, which is entirely serene, because of the goodness. Pasādanīya means fit to be pleased by the comparable people because of the attainment of the Dhamma-body, which is endowed with immeasurable qualities such as the ten powers, the four confidences, the six uncommon knowledges, the eighteen unique qualities of a Buddha, and the Dhamma, etc., the meaning is serene. Vanā means having departed from the forest of defilements. Nibbanamāgata means the state of being without craving itself has approached, attained Nibbāna. Yādisakīdiso means whoever that may be, meaning many people.

840-41.Manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ aggamaggagopanāya gopitattāguttindriyo. Aggaphalajjhānābhiratiyājhānarato. Tato eva bahibhūtehi rūpādiārammaṇehi apakkamitvā visayajjhatte nibbāne ca ogāḷhacittatāyaabahiggatamānaso. Micchāgāhamocanabhayena vipallāsavantehi micchādiṭṭhikehi bhāyitabbato tesañca bhayajananatobhayabheravo. Payogāsayavipannehi anupagamanīyato ca kenacipi anāsādanīyato cadurāsado. Dullabhāyanti dullabho ayaṃ.Dassanāyāti daṭṭhumpi.Pupphaṃ odumbaraṃ yathāti yathā nāma udumbare bhavaṃ pupphaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ, kadācideva bhaveyya, na vā bhaveyya, evaṃ īdisassa uttamapuggalassāti attho.

840-41. Because the faculties, with the mind as the sixth, are protected by guarding the foremost path, (he is) guttindriyo. Because of delighting in the foremost fruit-jhāna, (he is) jhānarato. Therefore, because of having turned away from external objects such as forms, and because of (his) mind plunged into Nibbāna, which is internal to the object, (he is) abahiggatamānaso. Because he is to be feared by those of wrong view who are full of perversions, for fear of release from wrong grasp, and because he causes fear to them, (he is) bhayabheravo. Because he is not to be reached by those who are ruined by the path of effort, and because he is not to be attained by anyone, (he is) durāsado. Dullabhāya means this is difficult to obtain. Dassanāyā means even to see. Pupphaṃ odumbaraṃ yathā means just as a flower arising in the udumbara tree is difficult to see, it might occur sometime, or it might not occur, so it is with such an excellent person, is the meaning.

842.Sotathāgato mudūhi vācāhisaṇhāya vācāya‘‘rajjumāle’’timaṃ ālapitvāāmantetvāsaraṇaṃ gaccha tathāgatanti ‘‘tathā āgato’’tiādinātathāgataṃsammāsambuddhaṃsaraṇaṃ gacchātimaṃ avocaabhāsīti yojanā.

842. Sotathāgato mudūhi vācāhi with gentle speech ‘‘rajjumāle’’timaṃ ālapitvā having addressed me saraṇaṃ gaccha tathāgata means tathāgataṃ the Sammāsambuddha, by "tathā āgato" etc. saraṇaṃ gacchātimaṃ avoca spoke to me, is the connection.

843-4.Tāhanti taṃ ahaṃ.Giranti vācaṃ.Nelanti niddosaṃ.Atthavatinti atthayuttaṃ sātthaṃ, ekantahitaṃ vā. Vacīsoceyyatāyasuciṃ. Akakkhaḷatāyasaṇhaṃ. Veneyyānaṃ mudubhāvakarattāmudu. Savanīyabhāvenavagguṃ. Sabbasokāpanūdananti ñātibyasanādivasena uppajjanakassa sabbassāpi sokassa vinodanaṃ giraṃ sutvāna pasannacittā ahosinti sambandho. Sabbametaṃ dānakathaṃ ādiṃ katvā ussakkitvā nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ vibhāvanavasena pavattitaṃ bhagavato anupubbikathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tenevāha‘‘kallacittañca maṃ ñatvā’’tiādi.

843-4. Tāha means that I. Gira means speech. Nela means faultless. Atthavati means endowed with meaning, purposeful, or solely beneficial. Suciṃ because of purity of speech. Saṇhaṃ because of not being rough. Mudu because of making the trainable gentle. Vagguṃ because of being audible. Sabbasokāpanūdana means having heard the speech that removes all sorrow that arises due to loss of relatives etc., the connection is that she became with a pleased mind. He speaks all this referring to the graduated teaching of the Blessed One, which began with talk on giving, and proceeded by arousing and distinguishing the benefits in renunciation. Therefore he said ‘‘kallacittañca maṃ ñatvā’’tiādi.

kallacittanti kammaniyacittaṃ, heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacittaṃ, bhāvanākammassa yoggacittanti attho. Tenevāha‘‘pasannaṃ suddhamānasa’’nti. Tattha‘‘pasanna’’nti iminā assaddhiyāpagamamāha,‘‘suddhamānasa’’nti iminā kāmacchandādiapagamanena muducittataṃ udaggacittatañca dasseti.Anusāsīti ovadi, sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya saha upāyena pavattinivattiyo upadisīti attho. Tenevāha‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi. Anusāsitākāradassanañhetaṃ.

Kallacitta means workable mind, because the mental faults of disbelief etc. have departed from the teaching that was given below, (it is) a mind fit for the upper teaching by approaching to the state of being a vessel, a mind fit for work, meaning a mind suitable for the work of cultivation. Therefore he said ‘‘pasannaṃ suddhamānasa’’nti. There, by ‘‘pasanna’’ he spoke of the departure of disbelief, by ‘‘suddhamānasa’’ he shows the tenderness and upliftedness of the mind by the departure of sensual desire etc. Anusāsī means advised, he advised with the means together with the excellent Dhamma talk, the way of proceeding and turning back, is the meaning. Therefore he said ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi. This is the showing of the manner of advising.

845.Tatthaidaṃ dukkhanti maṃvocāti idaṃ taṇhāvajjaṃ tebhūmakaṃ dhammajātaṃ bādhakasabhāvattā kucchikaṃ hutvā tucchasabhāvattā tathattā ca dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti mayhaṃ abhāsi.Ayaṃ dukkhassa sambhavoti ayaṃ āmataṇhādibhedā taṇhā yathāvuttassa dukkhassa sambhavo pabhavo uppatti hetu samudayo ariyasaccanti.Dukkhanirodhoti dukkhassa santibhāvo asaṅkhatadhātu nirodho ariyasaccanti. Antadvayassa parivajjanatoañjasonibbānagāminipaṭipadābhāvatoamatogadhomaggo ariyasaccanti maṃ avocāti sambandho.

845. There, idaṃ dukkhanti maṃvocā means this craving-fault, the three-planed assemblage of Dhammas is Dukkha, an Ariya Sacca, because of its nature of oppressing, being contemptible, being of empty nature, and being thus. Ayaṃ dukkhassa sambhavo means this craving with divisions of craving for becoming etc., is the origin, source, arising, cause, and origination of the Dukkha that was spoken of, an Ariya Sacca. Dukkhanirodho means the peaceful state of Dukkha is the unconditioned element, the cessation, an Ariya Sacca. Añjaso because of avoiding the two extremes, amatogadho the path that goes to Nibbāna because of the state of Ariya Sacca, he spoke to me, is the connection.

846.Kusalassāti ovādadāne veneyyadamane chekassa, appamādapaṭipattiyā vā matthakappattiyā anavajjassa.Ovādamhi ahaṃ ṭhitāti yathāvutte ovāde anusiṭṭhiyaṃ sikkhāttayapāripūriyā saccapaṭivedhena ahaṃ patiṭṭhitā. Tenāha‘‘ajjhagā amataṃ santiṃ, nibbānaṃ padamaccuta’’nti, idaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhānassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yā niccatāya maraṇābhāvatoamataṃ,sabbadukkhavūpasamatāyasantiṃ,adhigatānaṃ acavanahetutāyaaccutaṃ nibbānaṃ padaṃ ajjhagāadhigañchi, sā ekaṃsena satthu ovāde patiṭṭhitā nāmāti.

846. Kusalassā means skilled in giving advice and taming the trainable, or blameless by reaching the summit with diligent practice. Ovādamhi ahaṃ ṭhitā means in the advice that was spoken of, in the instruction, by the complete fulfillment of the three trainings, I am established by the penetration of the truth. Therefore he said ‘‘ajjhagā amataṃ santiṃ, nibbānaṃ padamaccuta’’nti, this is the statement of the reason for being established in the advice. Because of being permanent and without death, (it is) amataṃ, because of the subsiding of all suffering, (it is) santiṃ, because of the non-falling away of those who have attained it, accutaṃ nibbānaṃ padaṃ ajjhagā I reached, attained the Nibbāna state, she is indeed named as established in the advice of the Teacher.

847.Avaṭṭhitāpemāti daḷhabhattī ratanattaye niccalapasādasinehā. Kasmā? Yasmādassane avikampinī,‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti etasmiṃ sammādassane acalā kenaci acālanīyā. Kena panetaṃ avikampananti āha‘‘mūlajātāyasaddhāyā’’ti. Ayaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā araha’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.74; saṃ. ni. 5.997; a. ni. 9.27) sammāsambuddhe, ‘‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammā’tiādinā tassa dhamme, ‘‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’tiādinā tassa saṅghe ca saccābhisamayasaṅkhātena mūlena jātamūlā saddhā, tāya ahaṃ avikampinīti dasseti. Tato evadhītā buddhassa orasāti sammāsambuddhassa ure vāyāmajanitābhijātitāya orasaputtī.

847. Avaṭṭhitāpemā means firm devotion, unwavering serene affection in the Triple Gem. Why? Because dassane avikampinī, in this right view of "the Sammāsambuddha is the Blessed One, the Dhamma is well-proclaimed, the Saṅgha is practicing well" (she is) unshakeable, not to be moved by anyone. But by what is this unshakeable? He says ‘‘mūlajātāyasaddhāyā’’. This faith born from the root, with the root counted as the penetration of truth in the Sammāsambuddha by "Iti pi so bhagavā arahaṃ" etc. (Ma. Ni. 1.74; Saṃ. Ni. 5.997; A. Ni. 9.27), in his Dhamma by "Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo" etc., and in his Saṅgha by "Suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho" etc., therefore, dhītā buddhassa orasā means the actual daughter of the Sammāsambuddha because of the noble birth produced from his breast.

848.Sāhaṃ ramāmīti sā ahaṃ tadā ariyāya jātiyā idāni devūpapattiyā āgatā maggaratiyā phalaratiyā ca ramāmi, kāmaguṇaratiyākīḷāmi,ubhayenāpimodāmi. Attānuvādabhayādīnaṃ apagatattāakutobhayā. Madhumaddavanti madhusaṅkhātaṃ maddavakaraṃ, naccanagāyanakālesu sarīrassa sarassa ca mudubhāvāvahaṃ gandhapānaṃ sandhāya vadati.‘‘Madhumādava’’ntipi paṭhanti, ādavaṃ yāvadavaṃ yāvadeva davatthaṃ madhuraṃ pivāmīti attho.

848. Sāhaṃ ramāmī means that I, having come to the noble birth at that time, and now to the heavenly rebirth, delight in the path-rapture and fruit-rapture, kīḷāmi I play with sensual pleasure-rapture, modāmi I rejoice with both. Because fear of self-reproach etc. has departed, (I am) akutobhayā. Madhumaddava means referring to the fragrant drink that brings about the tenderness of the body and voice at the times of dancing and singing. Some read "Madhumādava," the meaning is I drink the sweet as long as there is sweetness, as much as there is the state of sweetness.

849.Puññakkhettānamākarāti sadevakassa lokassa puññakkhettabhūtānaṃ ariyānaṃ maggaphalaṭṭhānaṃ ariyasaṅghassa ākarā uppattiṭṭhānaṃ tathāgatā.Yathāti yasmiṃ puññakkhette. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

849. Puññakkhettānamākarā means the Tathāgatas are the mine, the place of origin of the Ariyas in the states of path and fruit, the Ariya Saṅgha, who are the field of merit for the world with the devas. Yathā means in which field of merit. The rest is the same as stated above.

Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno attanā ca devatāya ca pavattitaṃ imaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Then, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, having come to the human world, reported this conversation that had taken place between himself and the deity to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having made that matter the occasion (for teaching), taught the Dhamma to the assembled assembly. That teaching was fruitful for the great multitude.

Rajjumālāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The explanation of the Rajjumālā Vimāna is finished.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Paramatthadīpanī, the commentary on the Khuddaka Nikāya, in the Vimānavatthu,

Dvādasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa catutthassa mañjiṭṭhakavaggassa

The meaning-explanation of the fourth chapter, adorned with twelve objects,

Atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

is finished.

Niṭṭhitā ca itthivimānavaṇṇanā.

And the explanation of the Itthivimāna is finished.

2. Purisavimānaṃ

2. Purisavimānaṃ

5. Mahārathavaggo

5. Mahārathavaggo

1. Maṇḍūkadevaputtavimānavaṇṇanā
1. Maṇḍūkadevaputtavimānavaṇṇanā

ko me vandati pādānīti maṇḍūkadevaputtavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā campāyaṃ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre. So paccūsavelāyaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya veneyyabandhave satte volokento addasa ‘‘ajja mayi sāyanhasamaye dhammaṃ desente eko maṇḍūko mama sare nimittaṃ gaṇhanto parūpakkamena maritvā devaloke nibbattitvā mahatā devaparivārena mahājanassa passantasseva āgamissati, tattha bahūnaṃ dhammābhisamayo bhavissatī’’ti disvā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ campānagaraṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā, bhikkhūnaṃ sulabhapiṇḍapātaṃ katvā katabhattakicco vihāraṃ pavisitvā bhikkhūsu vattaṃ dassetvā, attano attano divāṭṭhānaṃ gatesu gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā phalasamāpattisukhena divasabhāgaṃ khepetvā, sāyanhasamaye catūsu parisāsu sannipatitāsu surabhigandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā taṅkhaṇānurūpena pāṭihāriyena pokkharaṇitīre dhammasabhāmaṇḍapaṃ pavisitvā alaṅkatavarabuddhāsane nisinno manosilātale sīhanādaṃ nadanto achambhītakesarasīho viya aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ brahmassaraṃ nicchārento acinteyyena buddhānubhāvena anupamāya buddhalīlāya dhammaṃ desetuṃ ārabhi.

ko me vandati pādānī is the Maṇḍūkadevaputta Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Campā on the bank of the Gaggara lotus pond. At dawn, having attained the Great Compassion Samādhi that is customary for the Buddhas, and rising from that, while observing beings who are connections to be trained, he saw, "Today, while I am teaching the Dhamma in the evening, a frog will take the sound as a sign, and dying due to the oppression of others, will be reborn in the deva-world, and will come with a great deva-retinue while the great multitude is watching, there will be an attainment of Dhamma for many there," seeing (that), having dressed in the morning time, and taking his bowl and robe, having entered the city of Campā for alms with a great Saṅgha of monks, having easily obtained alms for the monks, having finished his meal, and having entered the monastery, having shown the duties to the monks, after they had gone to their own day-quarters, having entered the perfumed chamber, having spent the day in the bliss of fruit-attainment, in the evening time, when the four assemblies were gathered together, having emerged from the fragrant perfumed chamber, having entered the Dhamma-assembly pavilion on the bank of the lotus pond with a miracle befitting the moment, seated on the excellent adorned Buddha-seat, roaring the lion's roar on the manosilā slab, like a fearless lion with eight qualities, emitting a Brahma-voice, he began to teach the Dhamma with the inconceivable Buddha-power and the incomparable Buddha-grace.

Tasmiñca khaṇe eko maṇḍūko pokkharaṇito āgantvā ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti dhammasaññāya sare nimittaṃ gaṇhanto parisapariyante nipajji. Atheko vacchapālo taṃ padesaṃ āgato satthāraṃ dhammaṃ desentaṃ parisañca paramena upasamena dhammaṃ suṇantaṃ disvā taggatamānaso daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto maṇḍūkaṃ anoloketvā tassa sīse sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsi. So dhammasaññāya pasannacitto tāvadeva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbattitvā suttappabuddho viya tattha accharāsaṅghaparivutaṃ attānaṃ disvā ‘‘kuto nu kho idha ahaṃ nibbatto’’ti āvajjento purimajātiṃ disvā ‘‘ahampi nāma idha uppajjiṃ, īdisañca sampattiṃ paṭilabhiṃ, kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ akāsi’’nti upadhārento aññaṃ na addasa aññatra bhagavato sare nimittaggāhā. So tāvadeva saha vimānena āgantvā vimānato otaritvā, mahājanassa passantasseva mahatā parivārena mahantena dibbānubhāvena upasaṅkamitvā, bhagavato pāde sirasā vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha namassamāno aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ bhagavā jānantova mahājanassa kammaphalaṃ buddhānubhāvañca paccakkhaṃ kātuṃ –

And at that moment, a frog came from the lotus pond, and thinking "This is the Dhamma being spoken," taking the sound as a sign, lay down at the edge of the assembly. Then a cowherd came to that place, and seeing the Teacher teaching the Dhamma and the assembly listening to the Dhamma with the utmost serenity, with his mind absorbed, holding up a stick, stood crushing the frog's head without looking at it. He, with his mind pleased by the Dhamma-perception, having died at that very moment, was reborn in a golden mansion of twelve yojanas in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and seeing himself surrounded by a host of nymphs there, like one awakened from sleep, considering "From where was I reborn here?", and seeing his former birth, thinking, "Did I arise here, and attain such fortune, what deed did I do?", he did not see anything other than taking the sound of the Blessed One as a sign. He, together with his mansion, having come at that very moment, having descended from the mansion, while the great multitude was watching, with a great retinue and great divine power, having approached, and bowed at the feet of the Blessed One with his head, stood paying homage with joined palms. Then the Blessed One, knowing him, in order to make the fruit of deeds and the Buddha-power apparent to the great multitude -

857.

857.

‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;

"Who bows at my feet,
Blazing with power and glory;
With surpassing beauty,
Illuminating all directions?"

koti devanāgayakkhamanussādīsu ko, katamoti attho.Meti mama.Pādānīti pāde.Iddhiyāti imāya īdisāya deviddhiyā.Yasasāti iminā īdisena parivārena paricchedena ca.Jalanti vijjotamāno.Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena sundarena.Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena, sarīravaṇṇanibhāyāti attho.

ko means who, which, among devas, nāgas, yakkhas, humans etc., is the meaning. Me means my. Pādānī means feet. Iddhiyā means with this such divine power. Yasasā means with this such retinue and entourage. Jalaṃ means blazing. Abhikkantenā means with exceedingly beautiful, lovely, beautiful. Vaṇṇenā means with complexion, the meaning is with the glow of the body's complexion.

Atha devaputto attano purimajātiādiṃ āvi karonto imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Then the deva-son, revealing his former birth etc., explained with these verses -

858.

858.

‘‘Maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsiṃ, udake vārigocaro;

"I was a frog in the past, living in the water;
While listening to your Dhamma, a cowherd killed me.

859.

859.

‘‘Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassa, iddhiṃ passa yasañca me;

"For a moment of mental serenity, see my power and glory;
See also my influence, see my beauty and radiance.

860.

860.

‘‘Ye ca te dīghamaddhānaṃ, dhammaṃ assosuṃ gotama;

"And those who have heard the Dhamma for a long time, Gotama,
They have attained the immovable state, where having gone, they do not grieve."

858.Tatthapureti purimajātiyaṃ.Udaketi idaṃ tadā attano uppattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ.Udake maṇḍūkoti etena uddhumāyikādikassa thale maṇḍūkassa nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viyāti gocaro, ghāsesanaṭṭhānaṃ. Vāri udakaṃ gocaro etassātivārigocaro. Udakacārīpi hi koci kacchapādi avārigocaropi hotīti ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ.Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassāti brahmassarena karavīkarutamañjunā desentassa tava dhammaṃ ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare nimittaggāhavasena suṇantassa, anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Avadhī vacchapālakoti vacche rakkhanto gopāladārako mama samīpaṃ āgantvā daṇḍamolubbhitvā tiṭṭhanto mama sīse daṇḍaṃ sannirumbhitvā maṃ māresi.

858. There, pure means in a previous birth. Udake here indicates the place of his origin at that time. Udake maṇḍūko (a frog in the water): by this, the returning of the frog on land such as Uddhumāyika is prevented. Gāvo caranti ettha (cows graze here) is gocaro, gocaro viyāti gocaro (like a pasture), a place for seeking food. Vāri udakaṃ gocaro etassa (water is its pasture) is vārigocaro. Because some aquatic creatures, such as turtles, are not aquatic, it is specified as "vārigocaro." Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassa means while listening to your Dhamma as you preached with a Brahma-like voice, melodious and pleasing like a Karavīka bird, taking the sound as a sign with the thought "this is the Dhamma being spoken"; this should be understood as a respectful term though seemingly casual. Avadhī vacchapālako means a young cowherd, guarding the calves, came near me and, brandishing a stick while standing, struck the stick firmly on my head and killed me.

859.Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassāti tava dhamme muhuttamattaṃ uppannassa cittapasādassa hetubhūtassaiddhinti samiddhiṃ, dibbavibhūtinti attho.Yasanti parivāraṃ.Ānubhāvanti kāmavaṇṇitādidibbānubhāvaṃ.Vaṇṇanti sarīravaṇṇasampattiṃ.Jutinti dvādasayojanāni pharaṇasamatthaṃ pabhāvisesaṃ.

859. Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassa means iddhi (success), divine power, which is the cause of a moment of mental serenity that arose in your Dhamma. Yasa means retinue. Ānubhāva means the divine influence of desirable qualities and so on. Vaṇṇa means the beauty of the body's complexion. Juti means a special radiance capable of spreading twelve yojanas.

860.Yeti ye sattā. Ca-saddo byatireke.Teti tava.Dīghamaddhānanti bahuvelaṃ.Assosunti suṇiṃsu.Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati.Acalaṭṭhānanti nibbānaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – gotama bhagavā ahaṃ viya ittarameva kālaṃ asuṇitvā ye pana katapuññā ciraṃ kālaṃ tava dhammaṃ assosuṃ sotuṃ labhiṃsu, te dīgharattaṃ saṃsārabyasanābhibhūtā ime sattā yattha gantvā na soceyyuṃ, taṃ asokaṃ sassatabhāvena acalaṃ santipadaṃ pattā eva, na tesaṃ tassa pattiyā antarāyoti.

860. Ye means those beings. The word "ca" is exclusive. Te means your. Dīghamaddhānaṃ means for a long time. Assosuṃ means heard. Gotamā means he addresses the Blessed One by his clan name. Acalaṭṭhānaṃ means Nibbāna. The meaning here is this: Gotama, Blessed One, those meritorious ones who, unlike me, have not listened for a trivial time, but have heard or had the opportunity to hear your Dhamma for a long time, those beings overwhelmed by the miseries of Saṃsāra for a long time, having gone where they do not grieve, have indeed attained that sorrowless, eternally immovable state of peace, and there is no obstacle to their attainment.

Athassa bhagavā sampattaparisāya ca upanissayasampattiṃ oloketvā vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāpariyosāne so devaputto sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi, caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Devaputto bhagavantaṃ vanditvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghassa ca añjaliṃ katvā saha parivārena devalokameva gatoti.

Then the Blessed One, observing the maturity of the assembly and their potential for enlightenment, taught the Dhamma in detail. At the end of the discourse, that devaputta was established in the fruit of Sotāpatti, and a comprehension of the Dhamma arose in eighty-four thousand living beings. The devaputta, having paid homage to the Blessed One, circumambulated him three times, and having made añjali to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, departed with his retinue to the deva world.

Maṇḍūkadevaputtavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Maṇḍūka Devaputta Vimāna is complete.

2. Revatīvimānavaṇṇanā
2. Revatī Vimāna Description

Uṭṭhehirevate supāpadhammeti revatīvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṃ viharati isipatane migadāye. Tena samayena bārāṇasiyaṃ saddhāsampannassa kulassa putto nandiyo nāma upāsako ahosi saddhāsampanno dāyako dānapati saṅghupaṭṭhāko. Athassa mātāpitaro sammukhagehato mātuladhītaraṃ revatiṃ nāma kaññaṃ ānetukāmā ahesuṃ. Sā pana assaddhā adānasīlā, nandiyo taṃ na icchi. Tassa mātā revatiṃ āha ‘‘amma, tvaṃ imaṃ gehaṃ āgantvā bhikkhusaṅghassa nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ haritena gomayena upalimpitvā āsanāni paññāpehi, ādhārake ṭhapehi, bhikkhūnaṃ āgatakāle vanditvā pattaṃ gahetvā nisīdāpetvā dhamakaraṇena pānīyaṃ parissāvetvā bhuttakāle pattāni dhovāhi, evaṃ me puttassa ārādhikā bhavissasī’’ti. Sā tathā akāsi. Atha naṃ ‘‘ovādakkhamā jātā’’ti puttassa ārocetvā tena ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchite divasaṃ ṭhapetvā āvāhaṃ kariṃsu.

Uṭṭhehi revate supāpadhamme (Arise, Revatī, of exceedingly evil ways) is the Revatī Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Bārāṇasī, at Isipatana, in the Deer Park. At that time, in Bārāṇasī, there was a lay follower named Nandiya, the son of a family endowed with faith, a generous donor, and a supporter of the Saṅgha. Then his parents wanted to bring a maiden named Revatī, the daughter of his maternal uncle, from the house across the street. But she was faithless and uncharitable, and Nandiya did not want her. His mother said to Revatī, "My dear, having come to this house, plaster the seating area for the Saṅgha of bhikkhus with green cow dung, arrange the seats, place the stands, and when the bhikkhus arrive, pay homage, take their bowls, invite them to sit, strain the water with a water strainer, and wash the bowls after the meal; thus, you will be pleasing to my son." She did so. Then, thinking that she had become "capable of being advised," they informed the son, and when he agreed with "good," they set a day and performed the marriage.

Atha naṃ nandiyo āha ‘‘sace bhikkhusaṅghaṃ mātāpitaro ca me upaṭṭhahissasi, evaṃ imasmiṃ gehe vasituṃ labhissasi, appamattā hohī’’ti. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā kiñci kālaṃ saddhā viya hutvā bhattāraṃ anavattentī dve putte vijāyi. Nandiyassa mātāpitaro kālamakaṃsu. Gehe sabbissariyaṃ tassā eva ahosi. Nandiyopi mahādānapati hutvā bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ paṭṭhapesi, kapaṇaddhikādīnampi gehadvāre pākavattaṃ paṭṭhapesi. Isipatanamahāvihāre catūhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ catusālaṃ kāretvā mañcapīṭhādīni attharāpetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā tathāgatassa hatthe dakkhiṇodakaṃ pātetvā niyyādesi, saha dakkhiṇodakadānena tāvatiṃsabhavane āyāmato ca vitthārato ca samantā dvādasayojaniko yojanasatubbedho sattaratanamayo accharāgaṇasahassasaṅghuṭṭho dibbapāsādo uggañchi.

Then Nandiya said to her, "If you support the Saṅgha of bhikkhus and my parents, then you will be able to live in this house; be diligent." She agreed with "good" and, pretending to have faith for some time, bore two sons without offending her husband. Nandiya's parents passed away. All the authority in the house belonged to her alone. Nandiya, being a great donor, established a donation for the Saṅgha of bhikkhus and also established a feeding program for the poor and needy at the gate of his house. Having built a four-sided hall adorned with four chambers in the Isipatana Mahāvihāra, spread out couches and chairs, gave a great donation to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus with the Buddha at its head, and poured the water of dedication into the hands of the Tathāgata, a divine palace made of seven jewels, twelve yojanas in extent and breadth all around and one hundred yojanas high, filled with thousands of celestial nymphs, arose in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven simultaneously with the donation of the water of dedication.

Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ pāsādaṃ disvā attānaṃ vandituṃ āgate devaputte pucchi ‘‘kassāyaṃ pāsādo’’ti? ‘‘Imassa, bhante, pāsādassa sāmiko manussaloke bārāṇasiyaṃ nandiyo nāma kuṭumbiyaputto saṅghassa isipatanamahāvihāre catusālaṃ kāresi, tassāyaṃ nibbatto pāsādo’’ti āhaṃsu. Pāsāde nibbattadevaccharāyopi theraṃ vanditvā ‘‘bhante, mayaṃ bārāṇasiyaṃ nandiyassa nāma upāsakassa paricārikā bhavituṃ idha nibbattā, tassa evaṃ vadetha ‘‘tuyhaṃ paricārikā bhavituṃ nibbattā, devatāyo tayi cirāyante ukkaṇṭhitā, devalokasampatti nāma mattikābhājanaṃ bhinditvā suvaṇṇabhājanassa gahaṇaṃ viya atimanāpa’nti vatvā idhāgamanatthāya tassa vadethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā sahasā devalokato āgantvā catuparisamajjhe bhagavantaṃ pucchi ‘‘nibbattati nu kho, bhante, katapuññānaṃ manussaloke ṭhitānaṃyeva dibbasampattī’’ti? ‘‘Nanu te, moggallāna, nandiyassa devaloke nibbattā dibbasampatti sāmaṃ diṭṭhā, kasmā maṃ pucchasī’’ti? ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante, nibbattatī’’ti. Athassa satthā ‘‘yathā ciraṃ vippavasitvā āgataṃ purisaṃ mittabandhavā abhinandanti sampaṭicchanti, evaṃ katapuññaṃ puggalaṃ ito paralokaṃ gataṃ sakāni puññāni sampattihatthehi sampaṭicchanti paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti dassento –

Then, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while wandering on a deva-excursion, saw that palace and asked the devaputtas who had come to pay homage to him, "To whom does this palace belong?" They said, "Venerable sir, the owner of this palace is a householder's son named Nandiya in Bārāṇasī in the human world, who built a four-sided hall in the Isipatana Mahāvihāra; this palace has arisen for him." The devaccharās who had arisen in the palace also paid homage to the Thera and said, "Venerable sir, we have arisen here to be attendants of the lay follower Nandiya in Bārāṇasī; please tell him this: 'The devatās who have arisen to be your attendants are longing for you; the wealth of the deva world is very pleasing, like taking a golden vessel after breaking an earthenware one,' and tell him to come here." The Thera, having agreed with "good," suddenly came from the deva world and asked the Blessed One in the midst of the four assemblies, "Does divine wealth arise for meritorious people while they are still in the human world, venerable sir?" "Moggallāna, have you not yourself seen the divine wealth that has arisen for Nandiya in the deva world? Why do you ask me?" "Yes, venerable sir, it does arise." Then the Teacher, showing that "just as relatives and friends rejoice and welcome a man who has come from afar after a long absence, so too, one's own merits welcome a meritorious person who has gone from this world to the next with hands full of wealth," recited these verses:

861.

861.

‘‘Cirappavāsiṃ purisaṃ, dūrato sotthimāgataṃ;

"A man who has been long away, who has come safely from afar,
His relatives, friends, and companions welcome him on arrival.

862.

862.

‘‘Tatheva katapuññampi, asmā lokā paraṃ gataṃ;

"Likewise, the merit of one who has done good, who has gone from this world to the next,
His merit receives him, like relatives welcoming a loved one."

Nandiyo taṃ sutvā bhiyyosomattāya dānāni deti, puññāni karoti, so vaṇijjāya gacchanto revatiṃ āha ‘‘bhadde, mayā paṭṭhapitaṃ saṅghassa dānaṃ anāthānaṃ pākavattañca tvaṃ appamattā pavatteyyāsī’’ti. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇi. So pavāsagatopi yattha yattha vāsaṃ kappeti, tattha tattha bhikkhūnaṃ anāthānañca yathāvibhavaṃ dānaṃ detiyeva. Tassa anukampāya khīṇāsavā dūratopi āgantvā dānaṃ sampaṭicchanti. Revatī pana tasmiṃ gate katipāhameva dānaṃ pavattetvā anāthānaṃ bhattaṃ upacchindi, bhikkhūnampi bhattaṃ kaṇājakaṃ bilaṅgadutiyaṃ adāsi. Bhikkhūnaṃ bhuttaṭṭhāne attanā bhuttāvasesāni sitthāni macchamaṃsakhaṇḍamissakāni calakaṭṭhikāni ca pakiritvā manussānaṃ dasseti ‘‘passatha samaṇānaṃ kammaṃ, saddhādeyyaṃ nāma evaṃ chaḍḍentī’’ti.

Having heard that, Nandiya gave donations and performed meritorious deeds even more abundantly. As he was going for trade, he said to Revatī, "My dear, you should diligently maintain the donation to the Saṅgha and the feeding program for the helpless that I have established." She agreed with "good." Even while he was away, wherever he stayed, he continued to give donations to the bhikkhus and the helpless according to his means. Out of compassion for him, even arahants would come from afar to receive the donation. But Revatī, after he had left, maintained the donation for only a few days and then discontinued the food for the helpless and gave the bhikkhus food mixed with broken rice and sesame seeds. Having scattered the remains of the food that she herself had eaten, mixed with fish and meat scraps and chicken bones, in the place where the bhikkhus had eaten, she showed it to the people, saying, "Look at the deeds of the samaṇas; this is how they discard what is given in faith."

Atha nandiyo vohārakasiddhi yathālābho āgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā revatiṃ gehato nīharitvā gehaṃ pāvisi. Dutiyadivase buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ pavattetvā niccabhattaṃ anāthabhattañca sammadeva pavattesi, attano sahāyehi upanītaṃ revatiṃ ghāsacchādanaparamatāya ṭhapesi. So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane attano vimāneyeva nibbatti. Revatī pana sabbaṃ dānaṃ pacchinditvā ‘‘imesaṃ vasena mayhaṃ lābhasakkāro parihāyī’’ti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ akkosantī paribhāsantī vicarati. Atha vessavaṇo dve yakkhe āṇāpesi ‘‘gacchatha, bhaṇe, bārāṇasinagare ugghosatha ‘‘ito sattame divase revatī jīvantīyeva niraye pakkhipīyatī’ti’’. Taṃ sutvā mahājano saṃvegajāto bhītatasito ahosi.

Then Nandiya, having returned with successful business and whatever gains he had made, heard of that situation, took Revatī out of the house, and entered the house himself. On the second day, having provided a great donation to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus with the Buddha at its head, he properly maintained the regular meal and the meal for the helpless. He placed Revatī, who had been brought by his friends, in a position where she was concerned only with food and clothing. Later, he passed away and was reborn in his own vimāna in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. But Revatī, having cut off all donations, wandered about scolding and insulting the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, saying, "My gain and honor have declined because of these people." Then Vessavaṇa commanded two yakkhas, "Go, sirs, and proclaim in the city of Bārāṇasī, 'In seven days from now, Revatī will be cast alive into Niraya.'" Having heard that, the great crowd became agitated, frightened, and terrified.

Atha revatī pana pāsādaṃ abhiruhitvā dvāraṃ thaketvā nisīdi. Sattame divase tassā pāpakammasañcoditena vessavaṇena raññā āṇattā jalitakapilakesamassukā cipiṭavirūpanāsikā pariṇatadāṭhā lohitakkhā sajaladharasamānavaṇṇā ativiya bhayānakarūpā dve yakkhā upagantvā ‘‘uṭṭhehi, revate, supāpadhamme’’tiādīni vadantā nānābāhāsu gahetvā ‘‘mahājano passatū’’ti sakalanagare vīthito vīthiṃ paribbhamāpetvā ākāsaṃ abbhuggantvā tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ netvā nandiyassa vimānaṃ sampattiñcassā dassetvā taṃ vilapantiṃyeva ussadanirayasamīpaṃ pāpesuṃ. Taṃ yamapurisā ussadaniraye khipiṃsu. Tenāha –

Then Revatī climbed up to the palace and sat down, bolting the door. On the seventh day, impelled by her evil deeds, two yakkhas, ordered by King Vessavaṇa, with flaming reddish hair and beards, flat, disfigured noses, protruding fangs, bloodshot eyes, and complexions like rain clouds, of exceedingly frightening appearance, approached and, saying "Arise, Revatī, of exceedingly evil ways," seized her by various arms and, parading her through every street in the entire city so that the great crowd could see, ascended into the sky, led her to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, showed her Nandiya's vimāna and its splendor, and while she was lamenting, brought her near the Ussada Niraya. The Yamapurisās threw her into the Ussada Niraya. Therefore it was said:

863.

863.

‘‘Uṭṭhehi revate supāpadhamme, apārutadvāre adānasīle;

"Arise, Revatī, of exceedingly evil ways, with doors unbarred, uncharitable;
We will lead you where the wretched lament, beset by hellish suffering."

uṭṭhehīti uṭṭhaha, na dānesa pāsādo taṃ nirayabhayato rakkhituṃ sakkoti, tasmā sīghaṃ uṭṭhahitvā āgacchāhīti attho.Revateti taṃ nāmena ālapati.Supāpadhammetiādinā uṭṭhānassa kāraṇaṃ vadati. Yasmā tvaṃ ariyānaṃ akkosanaparibhāsanādinā suṭṭu lāmakapāpadhammā, yasmā ca apārutaṃ dvāraṃ nirayassa tava pavesanatthaṃ, tasmā uṭṭhehīti.Adānasīleti kassaci kiñci na dānasīle kadariye maccharinī, idampi uṭṭhānasseva kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā dānasīlānaṃ amaccharīnaṃ tava sāmikasadisānaṃ sugatiyaṃ nivāso, tādisānaṃ pana adānasīlānaṃ maccharīnaṃ niraye nivāso, tasmā uṭṭhehi, muhuttamattampi tava idha ṭhātuṃ na dassāmīti adhippāyo.Yattha thunanti duggatāti dukkhagatattā duggatā.Nerayikāti nirayadukkhena samappitā samaṅgībhūtā yasmiṃ niraye thunanti, yāva pāpakammaṃ na byanti hoti, tāva nikkhamituṃ alabhantā nitthunanti, tattha taṃ nessāma nayissāma khipissāmāti yojanā.

uṭṭhehī means arise, this palace of giving is not able to protect you from the fear of Niraya, therefore quickly arise and come. Revate is addressing her by name. Supāpadhamme etc. states the reason for arising. Because you are of exceedingly base evil ways through scolding and insulting the noble ones etc., and because the door of Niraya is unbarred for your entry, therefore arise. Adānasīle means uncharitable to anyone, stingy, miserly; this too is a statement of the reason for arising. Because the residence of those who are charitable and un-miserly, like your husband, is in a good destination, but the residence of those who are uncharitable and miserly is in Niraya, therefore arise, we will not allow you to stay here even for a moment, is the intention. Yattha thunanti duggatā means the wretched because of their suffering. Nerayikā means those beset with the suffering of Niraya, in which Niraya they lament, unable to escape until their evil deeds are exhausted, they wail; there we will lead you, we will take you, we will throw you, is the construction.

864.

864.

‘‘Icceva vatvāna yamassa dūtā, te dve yakkhā lohitakkhā brahantā;

"Thus having spoken, the messengers of Yama, those two yakkhas, bloodshot-eyed, huge;
Seizing Revatī by each arm, they departed to the presence of the deva host." –

Idaṃ saṅgītikāravacanaṃ.

This is the word of the compilers.

icceva vatvānāti iti eva ‘‘uṭṭhehī’’tiādinā vatvā, vacanasamanantaramevāti attho.Yamassa dūtāti appaṭisedhaniyatassa yamassa rañño dūtasadisā. Vessavaṇena hi te pesitā. Tathā hi te tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ nayiṃsu. Keci ‘‘na yamassa dūtā’’ti na-kāraṃ ‘‘yamassā’’ti padena sambandhitvā ‘‘vessavaṇassa dūtā’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Na hi na yamadūtatāya vessavaṇassa dūtāti sijjhati. Yajanti tattha baliṃ upaharantītiyakkhā. Lohitakkhāti rattanayanā. Yakkhānañhi nettāni atilohitāni honti.Brahantāti mahantā.Paccekabāhāsūti eko ekabāhāyaṃ, itaro itarabāhāyanti paccekaṃ bāhāsu.Revatanti revatiṃ. Revatātipi tassā nāmameva. Tathā hi ‘‘revate’’ti vuttaṃ.Pakkāmayunti pakkāmesuṃ, upanesunti attho.Devagaṇassāti tāvatiṃsabhavane devasaṅghassa.

icceva vatvānā means having spoken thus, just as "arise" etc., immediately after the words. Yamassa dūtā means like messengers of King Yama, whose commands cannot be refused. For they were sent by Vessavaṇa. Thus, they led her to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Some, connecting the na-kāra to the word "yamassā" as "na yamassa dūtā," say the meaning is "messengers of Vessavaṇa," but that is not correct. For it does not follow that if they are not messengers of Yama, they are messengers of Vessavaṇa. Yajanti tattha baliṃ upaharantīti yakkhā (they sacrifice and offer oblations there, therefore they are yakkhas). Lohitakkhā means red-eyed. For the eyes of yakkhas are very red. Brahantā means huge. Paccekabāhāsū means one in one arm, the other in the other arm, in each arm respectively. Revataṃ means Revatī. Revatā is also her name. Thus it was said "Revate." Pakkāmayuṃ means they departed, they took away. Devagaṇassā means to the Saṅgha of devas in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven.

Evaṃ tehi yakkhehi tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ netvā nandiyavimānassa avidūre ṭhapitā revatī taṃ sūriyamaṇḍalasadisaṃ ativiya pabhassaraṃ disvā –

Thus, having been taken by those yakkhas to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, Revatī, placed not far from Nandiya's vimāna, saw it, exceedingly radiant like the solar orb –

865.

865.

‘‘Ādiccavaṇṇaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ, byamhaṃ subhaṃ kañcanajālachannaṃ;

"Of the color of the sun, delightful and radiant, a mansion beautiful, covered with golden netting;
Whose is this vimāna, crowded with people, shining like the rays of the sun?

866.

866.

‘‘Nārīgaṇā candanasāralittā, ubhato vimānaṃ upasobhayanti;

"A host of women, their bodies anointed with sandalwood essence, adorn the vimāna on both sides;
It is seen with the color equal to the sun, who rejoices, having attained heaven in the vimāna?" –

Te yakkhe pucchi. Tepi tassā –

He asked those yakkhas. They too said to him –

867.

867.

‘‘Bārāṇasiyaṃ nandiyo nāmāsi, upāsako amaccharī dānapati vadaññū;

"In Bārāṇasī there was one named Nandiya, a devotee, un-miserly, a giver, generous;
This crowded vimāna is his, shining like the rays of the sun.

868.

868.

‘‘Nārīgaṇā candanasāralittā, ubhato vimānaṃ upasobhayanti;

"A host of women, their bodies anointed with sandalwood essence, adorn the vimāna on both sides;
It is seen with the color equal to the sun, he rejoices, having attained heaven in the vimāna?" –

Ācikkhiṃsu.

They declared.

868.Tatthacandanasāralittāti sārabhūtena candanagandhena anulittasarīrā.Ubhato vimānanti vimānaṃ ubhato anto ceva bahi ca saṅgītādīhi upecca sobhayanti.

868. There, candanasāralittā means bodies anointed with the essence of sandalwood fragrance. Ubhato vimānaṃ means they adorn the vimāna both inside and outside with music and so on.

Atha revatī –

Then Revatī said –

869.

869.

‘‘Nandiyassāhaṃ bhariyā, agārinī sabbakulassa issarā;

"I am Nandiya's wife, mistress of the whole family;
I will rejoice in my husband's vimāna, for I am generous, I do not desire to see hell." –

agārinīti gehasāminī. ‘‘Bhariyā sagāminī’’tipi paṭhanti, bhariyā sahagāminīti attho.Sabbakulassa issarā bhattūti mama bhattu nandiyassa sabbakuṭumbikassa issarā sāminī ahosiṃ, tasmā idānipi vimāne issarā bhavissāmīti āha.Vimāne ramissāmidānahanti evaṃ palobhetumeva hi taṃ te tattha nesuṃ.Na patthaye nirayaṃ dassanāyāti yaṃ pana nirayaṃ maṃ tumhe netukāmā, taṃ nirayaṃ dassanāyapi na patthaye, kuto pavisitunti vadati.

agārinī means mistress of the house. "Bhariyā sagāminī" is also read, meaning a wife who goes together. Sabbakulassa issarā bhattū means, "I was the mistress, the owner, of all of my husband Nandiya's family, therefore even now I will be the mistress in the vimāna," she said. Vimāne ramissāmi dānahanti means they brought her there just to entice her like that. Na patthaye nirayaṃ dassanāyā means, "But that hell which you want to take me to, I do not desire even to see that hell, let alone enter it," she says.

Evaṃ vadantimeva ‘‘tvaṃ taṃ patthehi vā mā vā, kiṃ tava patthanāyā’’ti nirayasamīpaṃ netvā –

While she was saying this, thinking, "Whether you desire it or not, what is the use of your desire?", they led her near to hell –

870.

870.

‘‘Eso te nirayo supāpadhamme, puññaṃ tayā akataṃ jīvaloke;

"This is your hell, of very evil deeds, you did not make merit in the world of the living;
Indeed, the miserly, the angry, of evil deeds, does not obtain fellowship with those gone to heaven." –

esotavanirayo,tayā dīgharattaṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavitabbaṭṭhānabhūto. Kasmā?Puññaṃ tayā akataṃ jīvaloke,yasmā manussaloke appamattakampi tayā puññaṃ nāma na kataṃ, evaṃ akatapuñño pana tādiso sattomaccharīattano sampattinigūhanalakkhaṇena maccharena samannāgato, paresaṃ rosuppādanenarosako,lobhādīhi pāpadhammehi samaṅgībhāvatopāpadhammo saggūpagānaṃdevānaṃsahabyataṃsahabhāvaṃna labhatīti yojanā.

eso tava nirayo, a place where you must experience great suffering for a long time. Why? Puññaṃ tayā akataṃ jīvaloke, because you have not done even a little merit in the world of humans; such a being who has not done merit, maccharī, endowed with miserliness characterized by concealing one's own wealth, rosako, causing anger in others, pāpadhammo, being united with evil qualities such as greed, saggūpagānaṃ of the devas, sahabyataṃ fellowship, na labhatīti is the connection.

Evaṃ pana vatvā te dve yakkhā tatthevantaradhāyiṃsu. Taṃsadise pana dve nirayapāle saṃsavake nāma gūthaniraye pakkhipituṃ ākaḍḍhante passitvā –

Having said this, those two yakkhas disappeared right there. Seeing two hell-wardens similar to them dragging her to throw her into the Saṃsavaka hell, also named the excrement hell –

871.

871.

‘‘Kiṃ nu gūthañca muttañca, asuci paṭidissati;

"What is this excrement and urine, appearing as impurity?
What is this foul-smelling filth, what is this that reeks?" –

Taṃ nirayaṃ pucchi.

She asked that hell.

872.

872.

‘‘Esa saṃsavako nāma, gambhīro sataporiso;

"This is called Saṃsavaka, deep as a hundred men;
Where for thousands of years, you will be cooked, Revatī." –

Tasmiṃ kathite tattha attano nibbattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ pucchantī –

When that was said, asking about the karma that was the cause of her rebirth there –

873.

873.

‘‘Kiṃ nu kāyena vācāya, manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ;

"What evil deed was done by body, speech, or mind?
By what has Saṃsavaka been obtained, deep as a hundred men?" – she said;

874.

874.

‘‘Samaṇe brāhmaṇe cāpi, aññe vāpi vanibbake;

"Monks and brahmins also, or other mendicants;
You deceived with false speech, that evil was done by you." –

Tassā taṃ kammaṃ kathetvā puna te –

Having told her that karma, again they said –

875.

875.

‘‘Tena saṃsavako laddho, gambhīro sataporiso;

"By that Saṃsavaka has been obtained, deep as a hundred men;
There for thousands of years, you will be cooked, Revatī." –

saṃsavako nāmāti niccakālaṃ gūthamuttādiasucissa saṃsavanato paggharaṇato saṃsavako nāma.

saṃsavako nāmāti, because of constantly flowing with excrement, urine, and other impurities, it is called Saṃsavaka.

Na kevalaṃ tuyhaṃ idha saṃsavakalābho eva, atha kho ettha anekāni vassasahassāni paccitvā uttiṇṇāya hatthacchedādilābhopīti dassetuṃ –

Not only is your attainment of Saṃsavaka here, but after being cooked here for many thousands of years, there will also be the attainment of having your hands cut off, to show this –

876.

876.

‘‘Hatthepi chindanti athopi pāde, kaṇṇepi chindanti athopi nāsaṃ;

"They cut off hands and also feet, they cut off ears and also the nose;
Then flocks of crows, having gathered together, come together and eat the writhing one." –

kākoḷagaṇāti kākasaṅghā. Te kirassā tigāvutappamāṇe sarīre anekasatāni anekasahassāni patitvā tālakkhandhaparimāṇehi sunisitaggehi ayomayehi mukhatuṇḍehi vijjhitvā vijjhitvā khādanti, maṃsaṃ gahitagahitaṭṭhāne kammabalena pūrateva. Tenāha ‘‘kākoḷagaṇā samecca, saṅgamma khādanti viphandamāna’’nti.

kākoḷagaṇāti means flocks of crows. It seems that on her body, which is three gavutas in size, many hundreds, many thousands of them, falling and piercing with sharp-pointed iron beaks the size of palm trunks, eat. The flesh grows back in the places where it has been taken due to the force of kamma. Therefore, it is said, "Flocks of crows, having gathered together, come together and eat the writhing one."

Puna sā manussalokaṃ paccānayanāya yācanādivasena taṃ taṃ vippalapi. Tena vuttaṃ –

Again, she babbled this and that with requests and so on to bring her back to the human world. Therefore, it was said –

877.

877.

‘‘Sādhu kho maṃ paṭinetha, kāhāmi kusalaṃ bahuṃ;

"It would be good if you would take me back, I will do much merit;
By giving, by even conduct, by restraint and by self-control;
Having done which they are happy, and do not regret it afterwards."

Puna nirayapālā –

Again, the hell-wardens said –

878.

878.

‘‘Pure tuvaṃ pamajjitvā, idāni paridevasi;

"Formerly you were heedless, now you lament;
You will experience the result of deeds done by yourself." –

Āhaṃsu. Puna sā āha –

They said. Again, she said –

879.

879.

‘‘Ko devalokato manussalokaṃ, gantvāna puṭṭho me evaṃ vadeyya;

"Who from the world of the devas, going to the world of humans, being asked, would say this to me:
Give alms to those who have laid down the stick, clothing, bedding, food, and drink;
Indeed, the miserly, the angry, of evil deeds, does not obtain fellowship with those gone to heaven.

880.

880.

‘‘Sāhaṃ nūna ito gantvā, yoniṃ laddhāna mānusiṃ;

"Surely, I, going from here, having obtained a human birth;
Generous, accomplished in virtue, I will do much merit;
By giving, by even conduct, by restraint and by self-control.

881.

881.

‘‘Ārāmāni ca ropissaṃ, dugge saṅkamāni ca;

"I will plant parks, and bridges in difficult places;
And ponds and wells, with a serene mind.

882.

882.

‘‘Cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ, yā ca pakkhassa aṭṭhamī;

"On the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the eighth day of the fortnight;
And the Pāṭihāriya-pakkha, complete with eight factors.

883.

883.

‘‘Uposathaṃ upavasissaṃ, sadā sīlesu saṃvutā;

"I will observe the Uposatha, always restrained in the precepts;
And I will not be heedless in giving, this has been seen by me myself."

884.

884.

‘‘Iccevaṃ vippalapantiṃ, phandamānaṃ tato tato;

"Thus, while she was babbling, writhing here and there;
They threw her into the terrible hell, head downwards, feet up." –

Idaṃ saṅgītikāravacanaṃ. Puna sā –

This is the word of the compilers. Again, she –

885.

885.

‘‘Ahaṃ pure maccharinī ahosiṃ, paribhāsikā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ;

"I was formerly miserly, a reviler of monks and brahmins;
Having deceived my husband with falsehood, I am cooked in hell, of terrible form." –

‘‘ahaṃ pure maccharinī’’ti gāthā niraye nibbattāya vuttā, itarā anibbattāya evāti veditabbā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyamevāti.

The gāthā "ahaṃ pure maccharinī" should be understood as spoken by one reborn in hell, and the others as spoken by one not yet reborn. The rest is easy to understand.

Bhikkhū revatiyā yakkhehi gahetvā nītabhāvaṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Taṃ sutvā bhagavā ādito paṭṭhāya imaṃ vatthuṃ kathetvā upari vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi, desanāpariyosāne bahū sotāpattiphalādīni pāpuṇiṃsu. Kāmañcetaṃ revatīpaṭibaddhāya kathāya yebhuyyabhāvato ‘‘revatīvimāna’’nti voharīyati, yasmā pana revatī vimānadevatā na hoti, nandiyassa pana devaputtassa vimānādisampattipaṭisaṃyuttañcetaṃ, tasmā purisavimānesveva saṅgahaṃ āropitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

The bhikkhus reported to the Blessed One that Revatī had been taken away by the yakkhas. Having heard that, the Blessed One, starting from the beginning, told this story and then extensively taught the Dhamma; at the end of the teaching, many attained the fruits of Stream-entry and so on. Although this is mostly called "Revatīvimāna" because of the story connected with Revatī, since Revatī is not a vimāna-deva and this is connected with the vimāna and other accomplishments of the deva-son Nandiya, it should be seen as included among the men's vimānas.

Revatīvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Revatīvimāna is finished.

3. Chattamāṇavakavimānavaṇṇanā
3. The Description of the Chattamāṇavakavimāna

Yo vadataṃ pavaro manujesūti chattamāṇavakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena setabyāyaṃ aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa kicchāladdho putto chatto nāma brāhmaṇamāṇavo ahosi. So vayappatto pitarā pesito ukkaṭṭhaṃ gantvā brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa santike medhāvitāya analasatāya ca na cireneva mante vijjāṭṭhānāni ca uggahetvā brāhmaṇasippe nipphattiṃ patto. So ācariyaṃ abhivādetvā ‘‘mayā tumhākaṃ santike sippaṃ sikkhitaṃ, kiṃ vo garudakkhiṇaṃ demī’’ti āha. Ācariyo ‘‘garudakkhiṇā nāma antevāsikassa vibhavānurūpā, kahāpaṇasahassamānehī’’ti āha. Chattamāṇavo ācariyaṃ abhivādetvā setabyaṃ gantvā mātāpitaro vanditvā tehi abhinandiyamāno katapaṭisanthāro tamatthaṃ pitu ārocetvā ‘‘detha me dātabbayuttakaṃ, ajjeva datvā āgamissāmī’’ti āha. Taṃ mātāpitaro ‘‘tāta, ajja vikālo, sve gamissasī’’ti vatvā kahāpaṇe nīharitvā bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhāpetvā ṭhapesuṃ. Corā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā chattamāṇavakassa gamanamagge aññatarasmiṃ vanagahane nilīnā acchiṃsu ‘‘māṇavaṃ māretvā kahāpaṇe gaṇhissāmā’’ti.

Yo vadataṃ pavaro manujesu is the Chattamāṇavakavimāna. What was its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthī, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, in Setabyā, there was a brahmin boy named Chatta, the son of a certain brahmin, obtained with difficulty. Having come of age, he was sent by his father to Ukkaṭṭha, and in a short time, due to his intelligence and lack of laziness, he mastered the mantras and the places of knowledge under the brahmin Pokkharasāti, and attained proficiency in the brahmin arts. He greeted his teacher and said, "I have learned the arts from you, what honorarium shall I give you?" The teacher said, "An honorarium is appropriate to the wealth of the student, bring a thousand kahāpaṇas." Chatta the brahmin boy greeted his teacher and went to Setabyā, saluted his parents, and being welcomed by them, having made courteous conversation, he told his father that matter and said, "Give me what is proper to give, I will give it today and come back." His parents, saying, "Dear one, it is late today, you will go tomorrow," took out the kahāpaṇas, had them tied in a bundle, and placed them aside. Knowing this, thieves hid in a certain forest thicket on the path of Chatta the brahmin boy, thinking, "We will kill the boy and take the kahāpaṇas."

Bhagavā paccūsasamaye mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya lokaṃ volokento chattamāṇavakassa saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhānaṃ, corehi māritassa devaloke nibbattiṃ, tato saha vimānena āgatassa tattha sannipatitaparisāya ca dhammābhisamayaṃ disvā paṭhamatarameva gantvā māṇavakassa gamanamagge aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi. Māṇavo ācariyadhanaṃ gahetvā setabyato ukkaṭṭhābhimukho gacchanto antarāmagge bhagavantaṃ nisinnaṃ disvā upasaṅkamitvā aṭṭhāsi. ‘‘Kuhiṃ gamissasī’’ti bhagavatā vutto ‘‘ukkaṭṭhaṃ, bho gotama, gamissāmi mayhaṃ ācariyassa pokkharasātissa garudakkhiṇaṃ dātu’’nti āha. Atha bhagavā ‘‘jānāsi pana tvaṃ, māṇava, tīṇi saraṇāni, pañca sīlānī’’ti vatvā tena ‘‘nāhaṃ jānāmi, kimatthiyāni panetāni kīdisāni cā’’ti vutte ‘‘idamīdisa’’nti saraṇagamanassa sīlasamādānassa ca phalānisaṃsaṃ vibhāvetvā ‘‘uggaṇhāhi tāva, māṇavaka, saraṇagamanavidhi’’nti vatvā ‘‘sādhu uggaṇhissāmi, kathetha bhante bhagavā’’ti tena yācito tassa ruciyā anurūpaṃ gāthābandhavasena saraṇagamanavidhiṃ dassento –

The Blessed One, rising at dawn from the Great Compassion Samāpatti, surveying the world, saw the establishment of Chatta the brahmin boy in the refuges and the precepts, his rebirth in the deva-world after being killed by the thieves, and the Dhamma-realization of the assembly gathered there after he arrived with his vimāna; seeing this, he went first and sat at the foot of a certain tree on the boy's path. The boy, taking the teacher's fee, going from Setabyā towards Ukkaṭṭha, saw the Blessed One sitting in the middle of the road, approached him, and stood there. Asked by the Blessed One, "Where are you going?", he said, "I am going to Ukkaṭṭha, Venerable Gotama, to give the honorarium to my teacher Pokkharasāti." Then the Blessed One, saying, "Do you know, brahmin boy, the three refuges, the five precepts?", and being told by him, "I do not know, what are they for, and what are they like?", having explained the benefits and advantages of going for refuge and taking the precepts, said, "Learn the method of going for refuge first, brahmin boy." Being asked by him, "It is good, I will learn, may the Blessed One speak," showing the method of going for refuge in the form of verses in accordance with his inclination –

886.

886.

‘‘Yo vadataṃ pavaro manujesu, sakyamunī bhagavā katakicco;

"He who is foremost among speakers in the world, the Sakyamuni, the Blessed One, who has done his duty;
Gone to the far shore, endowed with strength and energy, go for refuge to that Sugata.

887.

887.

‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ;

"Freedom from lust, stainless, unmoving, sorrowless, the unconditioned Dhamma, unopposed;
This sweet, excellent, well-divided Dhamma, go for refuge to this Dhamma.

888.

888.

‘‘Yattha ca dinna mahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu;

"Where giving is said to be of great fruit, in the four pairs of pure beings;
The eight persons are those who have seen the Dhamma, go for refuge to this Saṅgha." –

Tisso gāthāyo abhāsi.

He spoke three gāthās.

886.Tatthayoti aniyamitavacanaṃ, tassa ‘‘ta’’nti iminā niyamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Vadatanti vadantānaṃ.Pavaroti seṭṭho, kathikānaṃ uttamo vādīvaroti attho.Manujesūti ukkaṭṭhaniddeso yathā ‘‘satthā devamanussāna’’nti. Bhagavā pana devamanussānampi brahmānampi sabbesampi sattānaṃ pavaroyeva, bhagavato ca carimabhave manussesu uppannatāya vuttaṃ ‘‘manujesū’’ti. Tenevāha‘‘sakyamunī’’ti. Sakyakulappasutatāya sakyo, kāyamoneyyādīhi samannāgatato anavasesassa ca ñeyyassa munanato muni cātisakyamuni. Bhāgyavantatādīhi catūhi kāraṇehibhagavā. Catūhi maggehi kātabbassa pariññādipabhedassa soḷasavidhassa kiccassa katattā nipphāditattākatakicco. Pāraṃ sakkāyassa paratīraṃ nibbānaṃ gato sayambhuñāṇena adhigatotipāragato. Asadisena kāyabalena, anaññasādhāraṇena ñāṇabalena, catubbidhasammappadhānavīriyena ca samannāgatattābalavīriyasamaṅgī. Sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā ca gaditattāsugato. Taṃ sugataṃ sammāsambuddhaṃsaraṇatthaṃsaraṇāya parāyaṇāya apāyadukkhavaṭṭadukkhaparittāṇāyaupehiupagaccha, ajja paṭṭhāya ahitanivattanena hitasaṃvaḍḍhanena ‘‘ayaṃ me bhagavā saraṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ gati paṭisaraṇa’’nti bhaja seva, evaṃ jānāhi vā bujjhassūti attho.

886. Here, yo is an indefinite term; it should be understood as being defined by ta ("that"). Vadata means of those who speak. Pavaro means the best, the highest speaker, the most excellent among orators. Manujesu is a superlative designation, like "the Teacher of gods and humans." However, the Blessed One is the best of gods, humans, brahmās, and all beings, and because the Blessed One arose among humans in his final existence, it is said, "among humans." Therefore, he said, "Sakyamuni." He is a Sakya because he was born in the Sakya clan, and he is a Muni because he is endowed with kāyamoneyya (bodily restraint) and other virtues, and because he knows (munanā) all that should be known without exception; thus, Sakyamuni. He is Bhagavā (Blessed One) due to four reasons, such as being fortunate. He is katakicco (one who has done what needs to be done) because he has accomplished (katattā nipphāditattā) the sixteenfold task (soḷasavidhassa kiccassa) of understanding (pariññā), etc., which should be done through the four paths. He is pāragato (gone to the far shore) because he has gone to the far shore of self-identity (sakkāya), the further bank, which is Nibbāna, through self-acquired knowledge. He is balavīriyasamaṅgī (endowed with strength and vigor) because he is endowed with incomparable physical strength, unique knowledge-strength, and the vigor of the four right efforts. He is sugato (well-gone) because of his excellent going (sobhanagamanattā), because he has gone to a beautiful place (sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā), because he has gone rightly (sammā gatattā), and because he has spoken rightly (sammā ca gaditattā). Upehi (approach) that Sugata, the Perfectly Enlightened One, saraṇatthaṃ (for refuge), for refuge, for ultimate reliance, for deliverance from the suffering of the lower realms and the round of suffering; "ayam me bhagavā saraṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ gati paṭisaraṇa" (this Blessed One is my refuge, protection, shelter, ultimate resort, destination, and recourse), honor and serve (bhaja seva) him by averting harm and increasing benefit, or know and understand in this way.

887.Rāgavirāganti ariyamaggamāha. Tena hi ariyā anādikālabhāvitampi rāgaṃ virajjenti.Anejamasokanti ariyaphalaṃ. Tañhi ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya avasiṭṭhānañca sokanimittānaṃ kilesānaṃ sabbaso paṭippassambhanato ‘‘anejaṃ asoka’’nti ca vuccati.Dhammanti sabhāvadhammaṃ. Sabhāvato gahetabbadhammo hesa yadidaṃ maggaphalanibbānāni, na pariyattidhammo viya paññattidhammavasena.Dhammanti vā paramatthadhammaṃ, nibbānanti attho. Samecca sambhuyya paccayehi kataṃ saṅkhataṃ, na saṅkhatantiasaṅkhataṃ. Tadeva nibbānaṃ. Natthi ettha kiñcipi paṭikūlantiappaṭikūlaṃ. Savanavelāyaṃ upaparikkhaṇavelāyaṃ paṭipajjanavelāyanti sabbadāpi iṭṭhamevātimadhuraṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayāya paṭibhānasampadāya pavattitattā suppavattibhāvato nipuṇabhāvato capaguṇaṃ. Vibhajitabbassa atthassa khandhādivasena kusalādivasena uddesādivasena ca suṭṭhu vibhajanatosuvibhattaṃ. Tīhipi padehi pariyattidhammameva vadati. Teneva hissa āpāthakāle viya vimaddanakālepi kathentassa viya suṇantassāpi sammukhībhāvato ubhatopaccakkhatāya dassanatthaṃ‘‘ima’’nti vuttaṃ.Dhammanti yathāvapaṭipajjante apāyadukkhapātato dhāraṇatthena dhammaṃ, idaṃ catubbidhassāpi dhammassa sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Pariyattidhammopi hi saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhānamattāyapi yathāvapaṭipattiyā apāyadukkhapātato dhāreti eva. Imassa ca atthassa idameva vimānaṃ sādhakanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sādhāraṇabhāvena yathāvuttadhammassa paccakkhaṃ katvā dassento puna‘‘ima’’nti āha.

887. Rāgavirāga means the Noble Path, for by it, noble ones eradicate even long-ingrained lust. Anejamasoka means the fruit of the Noble Path, for it is called "aneja, asoka" because of the complete cessation (sabbaso paṭippassambhanato) of craving (taṇhāya), which is called eja, and the remaining sorrowful (soka) defilements (kilesānaṃ). Dhamma means the dhamma of nature (sabhāvadhammaṃ). This dhamma, which is to be taken in terms of its intrinsic nature (sabhāvato), namely path, fruit and Nibbāna, is not like the dhamma of learning (pariyattidhammo) in terms of conventional truth (paññattidhammavasena). Or, dhamma means the ultimate truth (paramatthadhammaṃ), meaning Nibbāna. Asaṅkhataṃ (unconditioned) means that which is made together (samecca sambhuyya) by conditions (paccayehi kataṃ), saṅkhataṃ (conditioned) is not. That is Nibbāna itself. Appaṭikūlaṃ (not repellent) means there is nothing at all disagreeable here. Madhuraṃ (sweet) means that it is always pleasing, whether at the time of hearing, at the time of investigation, or at the time of practice. Paguṇaṃ (skillful) because it has arisen from the basis of omniscience-knowledge (sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayāya) and the wealth of eloquence (paṭibhānasampadāya), and because of its very skillful and refined nature. Suvibhattaṃ (well-divided) because of the excellent division (suṭṭhu vibhajanato) of the meaning to be divided, in terms of aggregates (khandhādi), wholesome qualities (kusalādi), objectives (uddesādi), and so forth. These three terms refer to the Dhamma of learning. Therefore, "ima" (this) is said to show that it is directly visible, like at the time of facing a patient or examining something, as it is directly apparent to both the speaker and the listener. Dhamma means the dhamma that protects (dhāraṇatthena) from falling into the suffering of the lower realms (apāyadukkhapātato) for those who practice accordingly (yathāvapaṭipajjante); this is a general term for all four types of dhamma. Even the Dhamma of learning protects from falling into the suffering of the lower realms through proper practice, even if only by providing a foundation in the refuges and precepts. And this very explanation should be seen as proof of this meaning. Revealing the aforementioned dhamma as directly perceivable by way of its general nature, he says again, "ima".

888.Yatthāti yasmiṃ ariyasaṅghe.Dinnanti pariccattaṃ annādideyyadhammaṃ.Dinna mahapphalanti gāthāsukhatthaṃ anunāsikalopo kato. Accantameva kilesāsucito visujjhanenasucīsu‘‘sotāpanno sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’tiādinā (a. ni. 8.60) vuttesucatūsu purisayugesu. Aṭṭhāti maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhesu yugaḷe akatvā visuṃ visuṃ gahaṇena aṭṭha puggalā. Gāthāsukhatthameva cettha‘‘puggala dhammadasā’’ti rassaṃ katvā niddeso.Dhammadasāti catusaccadhammassa nibbānadhammassa ca paccakkhato dassanakā. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvenasaṅghaṃ.

888. Yattha means in which Noble Saṅgha. Dinna means alms (annādideyyadhammaṃ) given or relinquished. Dinna mahapphala (giving is of great fruit) is said, for ease of recitation, by eliding the nasal consonant. Sucīsu (in the pure ones) means in the four pairs of individuals (catūsu purisayugesu) who are exceedingly purified (accantameva kilesāsucito visujjhanena), as stated by "a stream-enterer, one who has entered upon the path for the realization of the fruit of stream-entry," etc. (a. ni. 8.60). Aṭṭha (eight) means eight individuals, taken separately as those established in the path (maggaṭṭha) and those established in the fruit (phalaṭṭha), without considering them as pairs (yugaḷe akatvā visuṃ visuṃ gahaṇena). Here, the designation is abbreviated for ease of recitation as "puggala dhammadasā". Dhammadasā means those who directly see (paccakkhato dassanakā) the four noble truths and the Nibbāna-dhamma. Saṅghaṃ means the Saṅgha, united by a commonality of view and ethics (diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvena).

Evaṃ bhagavatā tīhi gāthāhi saraṇaguṇasandassanena saddhiṃ saraṇagamanavidhimhi vutte māṇavo taṃtaṃsaraṇaguṇānussaraṇamukhena saraṇagamanavidhino attano hadaye ṭhapitabhāvaṃ vibhāvento tassā tassā gāthāya anantaraṃ ‘‘yo vadataṃ pavaro’’tiādinā taṃ taṃ gāthaṃ paccanubhāsi. Evaṃ paccanubhāsitvā ṭhitassa pañca sikkhāpadāni sarūpato phalānisaṃsato ca vibhāvetvā tesaṃ samādānavidhiṃ kathesi. So tampi suṭṭhu upadhāretvā pasannamānaso ‘‘handāhaṃ bhagavā gamissāmī’’ti vatvā ratanattayaguṇaṃ anussaranto taṃyeva maggaṃ paṭipajji. Bhagavāpi ‘‘alaṃ imassa ettakaṃ kusalaṃ devalokūpapattiyā’’ti jetavanameva agamāsi.

Thus, after the Blessed One had spoken the method of going for refuge along with showing the qualities of refuge in these three verses, the youth, revealing that he had established in his heart the method of going for refuge through recollection of those qualities of refuge, repeated each verse immediately after it, saying "yo vadataṃ pavaro," and so on. After he had repeated them and was standing there, [the Buddha] explained the five precepts in terms of their nature and the benefits of the fruits [of keeping them], and told him the method of undertaking them. Having carefully noted that too, with a pleased mind, he said, "Well then, Blessed One, I will go," and, recollecting the qualities of the Triple Gem, he set out on that very path. The Blessed One, [thinking,] "Enough of this much merit for his rebirth in the deva-world," went to Jeta's Grove.

Māṇavassa pana pasannacittassa ratanattayaguṇaṃ sallakkhaṇavasena ‘‘saraṇaṃ upemī’’ti pavattacittuppādatāya saraṇesu ca, bhagavatā vuttanayena pañcannaṃ sīlānaṃ adhiṭṭhānena sīlesu ca patiṭṭhitassa teneva nayena ratanattayaguṇe anussarantasseva gacchantassa corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsu. So te agaṇetvā ratanattayaguṇe anussarantoyeva gacchati. Tañceko coro gumbantaraṃ upanissāya ṭhito visapītena sarena sahasāva vijjhitvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpetvā kahāpaṇabhaṇḍikaṃ gahetvā attano sahāyehi saddhiṃ pakkāmi. Māṇavo pana kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane tiṃsayojanike kanakavimāne suttappabuddho viya accharāsahassaparivuto saṭṭhisakaṭabhārālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitattabhāvo nibbatti, tassa vimānassa ābhā sātirekāni vīsatiyojanāni pharitvā tiṭṭhati.

However, as the youth, with a clear mind, had established himself in the refuges, due to the arising of the thought "saraṇaṃ upemi" (I go for refuge) in the mode of discerning the qualities of the Triple Gem, and in the precepts, through the undertaking of the five precepts in the manner stated by the Blessed One, and was going along recollecting the qualities of the Triple Gem in that very manner, thieves surrounded him on the road. Disregarding them, he continued on, recollecting the qualities of the Triple Gem. Then, one thief, standing near a bush, suddenly shot him with a poison-soaked arrow, causing him to lose his life, and took the bag of coins and fled with his companions. However, having died, the youth was reborn in a golden mansion thirty yojanas in extent in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, surrounded by a thousand celestial nymphs, adorned with sixty cartloads of ornaments, as if awakened from sleep, and the radiance of his mansion spread out over twenty yojanas in every direction.

Atha māṇavaṃ kālakataṃ disvā setabyagāmavāsino manussā setabyaṃ gantvā tassa mātāpitūnaṃ ukkaṭṭhagāmavāsino ca ukkaṭṭhaṃ gantvā brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa kathesuṃ. Taṃ sutvā tassa mātāpitaro ñātimittā brāhmaṇo ca pokkharasāti saparivārā assumukhā rodamānā taṃ padesaṃ agamaṃsu, yebhuyyena setabyavāsino ca ukkaṭṭhavāsino ca icchānaṅgalavāsino ca sannipatiṃsu, mahāsamāgamo ahosi. Atha māṇavassa mātāpitaro maggassa avidūre citakaṃ sajjetvā sarīrakiccaṃ kātuṃ ārabhiṃsu.

Then, having seen that the youth had died, the people of Setabyagāma went to Setabya and told his parents, and the people of Ukkaṭṭhagāma went to Ukkaṭṭha and told the brahmin Pokkharasāti. Having heard that, his parents, relatives, friends, and the brahmin Pokkharasāti, along with their families, weeping with tearful faces, went to that place. For the most part, the residents of Setabya, the residents of Ukkaṭṭha, and the residents of Icchānaṅgala gathered, and there was a great assembly. Then the youth's parents prepared a pyre not far from the road and began to perform the funeral rites.

Atha bhagavā cintesi ‘‘mayi gate chattamāṇavo maṃ vandituṃ āgamissati, āgatañca taṃ katakammaṃ kathāpento kammaphalaṃ paccakkhaṃ kāretvā dhammaṃ desessāmi, evaṃ mahājanassa dhammābhisamayo bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ taṃ padesaṃ upagantvā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi chabbaṇṇabuddharaṃsiyo vissajjento. Atha chattamāṇavadevaputtopi attano sampattiṃ paccavekkhitvā, tassā kāraṇaṃ upadhārento saraṇagamanañca sīlasamādānañca disvā, vimhayajāto bhagavati sañjātapasādabahumāno ‘‘idānevāhaṃ gantvā bhagavantañca bhikkhusaṅghañca vandissāmi, ratanattayaguṇe ca mahājanassa pākaṭe karissāmī’’ti kataññutaṃ nissāya sakalaṃ taṃ araññapadesaṃ ekālokaṃ karonto, saha vimānena āgantvā vimānato oruyha mahatā parivārena saddhiṃ dissamānarūpo upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatanto abhivādetvā añjaliṃ paggayha ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā mahājano ‘‘ko nu kho ayaṃ devo vā brahmā vā’’ti acchariyabbhutajāto upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ parivāresi. Bhagavā tena katapuññakammaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ –

Then the Blessed One thought, "If I go, Chattamaṇava will come to pay homage to me, and having questioned him who has come, making the fruit of his deed visible by describing his deed, I will teach the Dhamma, and thus, a great multitude will have an awakening to the Dhamma." Thinking this, he approached that place with a large Saṅgha of monks and sat at the foot of a certain tree, emitting six-hued Buddha-rays. Then, Chattamaṇavadevaputta, having reviewed his own prosperity and considered its cause, saw his going for refuge and his undertaking of the precepts, and, filled with wonder, with great faith and respect arising in the Blessed One, [thinking,] "Now I will go and pay homage to the Blessed One and the Saṅgha of monks, and make the qualities of the Triple Gem known to the great multitude," out of gratitude, making that entire forest area one single light, came together with his mansion, descended from the mansion, approached the Blessed One in visible form together with his great retinue, and, falling with his head at the Blessed One's feet, having paid homage, stood to one side with his hands folded. Seeing him, the great multitude, filled with wonder and astonishment, approached and surrounded the Blessed One, [thinking,] "Who could this deva or brahmā be?" To make known the meritorious deed done by him, the Blessed One—

889.

889.

‘‘Na tathā tapati nabhe sūriyo, cando ca na bhāsati na phusso;

"Not so does the sun burn in the sky, nor does the moon shine, nor the star Phussa;
As this incomparable, great radiance does; who are you, having come to earth from heaven?"

890.

890.

‘‘Chindati raṃsī pabhaṅkarassa, sādhikavīsatiyojanāni ābhā;

"The rays cut through, the light of the sun, a radiance of more than twenty yojanas;
Even at night, it makes it like day; pure, stainless, beautiful is the mansion.

891.

891.

‘‘Bahupadumavicitrapuṇḍarīkaṃ, vokiṇṇaṃ kusumehi nekacittaṃ;

"Abounding with lotuses and varied white lotuses, strewn with flowers of many designs;
Covered with a golden net, dustless and stainless, it blazes in the sky like the sun.

892.

892.

‘‘Rattambarapītavāsasāhi, agarupiyaṅgucandanussadāhi;

"With those in red and yellow garments, with perfumes of aloe, priyaṅgu, and sandalwood;
With those having golden bodies and fine complexions, it is full like the sky with stars.

893.

893.

‘‘Naranāriyo bahuketthanekavaṇṇā, kusumavibhūsitābharaṇettha sumanā;

"Many men and women of various colors are here, adorned with flower-ornaments, happy;
Released by the wind, they waft fragrance, spread with gold plate, covered with gold.

894.

894.

‘‘Kissa saṃyamassa ayaṃ vipāko, kenāsi kammaphalenidhūpapanno;

"What restraint is this the result of? By what deed have you attained this fruit?
And how did you obtain this mansion? Tell us in detail when asked."

Taṃ devaputtaṃ paṭipucchi.

He questioned the deva-son.

886.Tatthatapatīti dippati.Nabheti ākāse.Phussoti phussatārakā.Atulanti anupamaṃ, appamāṇaṃ vā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā idaṃ tava vimānaṃ anupamaṃ appamāṇaṃ pabhassarabhāvena tato eva mahappabhāsaṃ ākāse dippati, na tathā tārakarūpāni dippanti, na cando, tāni tāva tiṭṭhantu, nāpi sūriyo dippati, evaṃbhūto ko nu tvaṃ devalokato imaṃ bhūmipadesaṃ upagato, taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā imassa mahājanassa kathehīti.

886. There, tapatī means shines. Nabhe means in the sky. Phusso means the star Phussa. Atulaṃ means incomparable, or immeasurable. The meaning is: "Just as this mansion of yours, incomparable and immeasurable, shines in the sky due to its radiant nature and thus is greatly illuminated, not so do the forms of the stars shine, nor the moon; let those be, not even the sun shines. Who are you, having come to this place on earth from the deva-world? Tell it, making it clear to this great multitude."

890.Chindatīti vicchindati, pavattituṃ adento paṭihanatīti attho.Raṃsīti rasmiyo.Pabhaṅkarassāti sūriyassa. Tassa ca vimānassa pabhā samantato pañcavīsati yojanāni pharitvā tiṭṭhati. Tenāha‘‘sādhikavīsatiyojanāni ābhā’’ti.Rattimapi yathā divaṃ karotīti attano pabhāya andhakāraṃ vidhamantaṃ rattibhāgampi divasabhāgaṃ viya karoti. Parisamantato anto ceva bahi ca suddhatāyaparisuddhaṃ. Sabbaso malābhāvenavimalaṃ. Sundaratāyasubhaṃ.

890. Chindatī means cuts through, prevents from flowing by obstructing. Raṃsī means rays. Pabhaṅkarassā means of the sun. The light of that mansion stands spreading in every direction for twenty-five yojanas. Therefore, he said, "sādhikavīsatiyojanāni ābhā" (a radiance of more than twenty yojanas). Rattimapi yathā divaṃ karotī (even at night, it makes it like day) means that, dispelling the darkness with its light, it makes even the nighttime like daytime. Parisuddhaṃ (pure) because it is pure on all sides, both inside and outside. Vimalaṃ (stainless) because it is entirely free from blemishes. Subhaṃ (beautiful) because of its loveliness.

891.Bahupadumavicitrapuṇḍarīkanti bahuvidharattakamalañceva vicittavaṇṇasetakamalañca. Setakamalaṃ padumaṃ, rattakamalaṃ puṇḍarīkanti vadanti.Vokiṇṇaṃ kusumehīti aññehi ca nānāvidhehi pupphehi samokiṇṇaṃ.Nekacittanti mālākammalatākammādinānāvidhavicittaṃ.Arajavirajahemajālachannanti sayaṃ apagatarajaṃ virajena niddosena kañcanajālena chāditaṃ.

891. Bahupadumavicitrapuṇḍarīka means many red lotuses and varied-colored white lotuses. They call the white lotus paduma and the red lotus puṇḍarīka. Vokiṇṇaṃ kusumehī (strewn with flowers) means strewn with other flowers of various kinds. Nekacittaṃ means variedly decorated with various kinds of garland-making and creeper-work, and so forth. Arajavirajahemajālachanna (covered with a golden net, dustless and stainless) means covered with a golden net that is itself free from dust and stainless.

892.Rattambarapītavāsasāhīti rattavatthāhi ceva pītavatthāhi ca. Ekā hi rattaṃ dibbavatthaṃ nivāsetvā pītaṃ uttariyaṃ karoti, aparā pītaṃ nivāsetvā rattaṃ uttariyaṃ karoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘rattambarapītavāsasāhī’’ti.Agarupiyaṅgucandanussadāhīti agarugandhena piyaṅgumālāhi candanagandhehi ca ussadāhi, ussannadibbāgarugandhādikāhīti attho.Kañcanatanusannibhattacāhīti kanakasadisasukhumacchavīhi.Paripūranti tahaṃ tahaṃ vicarantīhi saṅgītipasutāhi ca paripuṇṇaṃ.

892. Rattambarapītavāsasāhī means with those in red and yellow garments. For one puts on a red celestial garment and makes the upper garment yellow, and another puts on a yellow [lower] garment and makes the upper garment red. Referring to that, it is said, "rattambarapītavāsasāhī." Agarupiyaṅgucandanussadāhī means with fragrances of aloe, priyaṅgu garlands, and sandalwood, with abundant divine aloe fragrance, etc. Kañcanatanusannibhattacāhī means with those having golden-like, fine complexions. Paripūra (full) means full with those who wander here and there, and those devoted to singing.

893.Bahuketthāti bahukā ettha.Anekavaṇṇāti nānārūpā.Kusamavibhūsitābharaṇāti visesato surabhivāyanatthaṃ dibbakusumehi alaṅkatadibbābharaṇā.Etthāti etasmiṃ vimāne.Sumanāti sundaramanā pamuditacittā.Anilapamuñcitā pavanti surabhinti anilena pamuñcitagandhānaṃ pupphānaṃ vāyunā vimuttapattapuṭaṃ viya vibandhatāya vikasitatāya ca sugandhaṃ pavāyanti. ‘‘Anilapadhūpitā’’tipi paṭhanti, vātena mandaṃ āvuyhamānā hemamayapupphāti attho. Kanakacīrakādīhi veṇiādīsu otatatāyatapaniyavitatā. Yebhuyyena kañcanābharaṇehi acchāditasarīratāyasuvaṇṇachannā. Naranāriyoti devaputtā devadhītaro ca bahukā ettha tava vimāneti dasseti.

893. Bahuketthā means many are here. Anekavaṇṇā means of various forms. Kusamavibhūsitābharaṇā means adorned with divine ornaments decorated with divine flowers especially for the sake of wafting fragrance. Etthā means in this mansion. Sumanā means of beautiful minds, with joyful hearts. Anilapamuñcitā pavanti surabhi means that, as the fragrances of flowers released by the wind, like the wind freeing the folds of a cloth, spread fragrance because of their unbound and blossoming state. Some also recite "anilapadhūpitā," meaning golden flowers gently wafted by the wind. Tapaniyavitatā means extended with gold plate because of being woven into braids, etc., with golden braids, etc. Suvaṇṇachannā means covered with gold because for the most part their bodies are covered with golden ornaments. Naranāriyo shows that deva-sons and deva-daughters are many in your mansion.

894.Iṅghāti codanatthe nipātopuṭṭhoti pucchito imassa mahājanassa kammaphalapaccakkhabhāvāyāti adhippāyo.

894. Iṅghā is a particle in the sense of urging. Puṭṭho means being asked, with the intention of making the fruit of the deed evident to this great multitude.

Tato devaputto imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Then the deva-son answered with these verses—

895.

895.

‘‘Sayamidha pathe samecca māṇavena, satthānusāsi anukampamāno;

"Here on the path, meeting the youth, the Teacher compassionately instructed;
Having heard the Dhamma of your excellent Gem, Chatta said, 'I will do it.'"

896.

896.

‘‘Jinavarapavaraṃ upehi saraṇaṃ, dhammañcāpi tatheva bhikkhusaṅghaṃ;

"'Approach the Refuge, the excellent, supreme Conqueror, and the Dhamma, likewise the Saṅgha of monks';
'No,' I said at first, O Blessed One, later I did just as you said."

897.

897.

‘‘Mā ca pāṇavadhaṃ vividhaṃ carassu asuciṃ,

"And do not engage in various kinds of impure killing of living beings,
For the wise have not praised unrestrainedness towards living beings;
'No,' I first said, venerable sir, later I acted according to your word."

898.

898.

‘‘Mā ca parajanassa rakkhitampi, ādātabbamamaññitho adinnaṃ;

"And do not think of taking what is kept by another, what is not given;
'No,' I first said, venerable sir, later I acted according to your word."

899.

899.

‘‘Mā ca parajanassa rakkhitāyo, parabhariyā agamā anariyametaṃ;

"And do not go to the wives of others, who are protected by others, that is ignoble;
'No,' I first said, venerable sir, later I acted according to your word."

900.

900.

‘‘Mā ca vitathaṃ aññathā abhāṇi, na hi musāvādaṃ avaṇṇayiṃsu sappaññā;

"And do not speak falsehoods, differently from the truth, for the wise have not dispraised false speech;
'No,' I first said, venerable sir, later I acted according to your word."

901.

901.

‘‘Yena ca purisassa apeti saññā, taṃ majjaṃ parivajjayassu sabbaṃ;

"And that intoxicant by which a man loses consciousness, avoid all of it;
'No,' I first said, venerable sir, later I acted according to your word."

902.

902.

‘‘Svāhaṃ idha pañca sikkhā karitvā, paṭipajjitvā tathāgatassa dhamme;

"Having undertaken these five trainings here, and practicing in accordance with the Tathāgata's Dhamma,
I went to a crossroads in the midst of thieves, and they killed me there for the sake of possessions.

903.

903.

‘‘Ettakamidaṃ anussarāmi kusalaṃ, tato paraṃ na me vijjati aññaṃ;

"This much I recall as skillful, beyond that nothing else exists for me;
By that well-done deed, I have arisen in the thirty-three heavens, fulfilling desires.

904.

904.

‘‘Passa khaṇamuhuttasaññamassa, anudhammappaṭipattiyā vipākaṃ;

"Behold the result of a moment's adherence, of practicing in accordance with the Dhamma;
Shining like flames with glory, many of inferior deeds long for it.

905.

905.

‘‘Passa katipayāya desanāya, sugatiñcamhi gato sukhañca patto;

"Behold, by a brief instruction, I have gone to a good destination and attained happiness;
And those who constantly hear your Dhamma, I think they touch the deathless, the secure.

906.

906.

‘‘Appampi kataṃ mahāvipākaṃ, vipulaṃ hoti tathāgatassa dhamme;

"Even a little done has great result, it is abundant in the Tathāgata's Dhamma;
Behold, by doing merit, Chatta illuminates the earth, just like the sun.

907.

907.

‘‘Kimidaṃ kusalaṃ kimācarema, icceke hi samecca mantayanti;

"What is this merit? What should we do?" Thus some, having considered, deliberate;
May we, having again obtained humanity, live practicing virtue, full of morality.

908.

908.

‘‘Bahukāro anukampako ca satthā, iti me sati agamā divā divassa;

"The Teacher is very helpful and compassionate," thus mindfulness came to me day by day;
I have approached the one whose name is Truth; have compassion, may we hear the Dhamma again.

909.

909.

‘‘Ye cidha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ, bhavarāgānusayañca pahāya mohaṃ;

"Those who here abandon sensual lust, and having abandoned the underlying tendency to lust for existence, and delusion,
They do not come again to lie in a womb, they have gone to extinguishment, cooled down."

895.Tatthasayamidha pathe samecca māṇavenāti idha imasmiṃ pathe mahāmagge sayameva upagatena māṇavena brāhmaṇakumārena samecca samāgantvā. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi sattānaṃ yathārahamanusāsanatosatthābhagavā, tvaṃ yaṃ māṇavaṃ yathādhammaṃanusāsi anukampamānoanuggaṇhanto,tava ratanavarassaaggaratanassa sammāsambuddhassa, taṃdhammaṃ sutvā itievaṃkarissāmiyathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjissāmīti, sochattochattanāmako māṇavobravitthakathesīti padayojanā.

895. There, sayamidha pathe samecca māṇavena: here, on this path, on the highway, by the youth, the brahmin student, having come himself, having met. Because of instructing beings appropriately with regard to the visible-matter benefit, the benefit in the future life, and the ultimate benefit, the Teacher is the Blessed One; you instructed the youth in accordance with the Dhamma, being compassionate, favoring him; having heard that Dhamma of your excellent jewel, of the foremost jewel, of the Perfectly Self-Enlightened One, I will do thus, evaṃ karissāmi: I will practice as instructed, the youth named Chatta said, spoke—this is the word arrangement.

896.Evaṃ yathāpucchitaṃ kammaṃ kāraṇato dassetvā idāni taṃ sarūpato vibhāgato ca dassento satthārā samādapitabhāvaṃ attanā ca tattha pacchā patiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘jinavarapavara’’ntiādimāha. Tatthanoti paṭhamaṃ avocahaṃ bhanteti bhante bhagavā ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ jānāsī’’ti tayā vutto ‘‘no’’ti na ‘‘jānāmī’’ti paṭhamaṃ avocaṃ ahaṃ.Pacchā te vacanaṃ tathevakāsinti pacchā tayā vuttaṃ kathaṃ parivattento tava vacanaṃ tatheva akāsiṃ paṭipajjiṃ, tīṇipi saraṇāni upagacchinti attho.

896. Having shown the action as questioned in this way, from the cause, now, showing that in its own form, and in division, to show the state of being exhorted by the Teacher, and his own establishing himself there afterwards, he said, beginning with "jinavarapavara." There, noti paṭhamaṃ avocahaṃ bhante: venerable sir, Blessed One, having been told by you, "Do you know going for refuge?" he said "No," "I do not know," at first. Pacchā te vacanaṃ tathevakāsiṃ: afterwards, turning around the word spoken by you, I acted according to your word, I practiced, I went for the three refuges—this is the meaning.

897.Vividhanti uccāvacaṃ, appasāvajjaṃ mahāsāvajjañcāti attho.Mā carassūti mā akāsi.Asucinti kilesāsucimissatāya na suciṃ.Pāṇesu asaññatanti pāṇaghātato avirataṃ.Na hi avaṇṇayiṃsūti na hi vaṇṇayanti. Paccūppannakālatthe hi idaṃ atītakālavacanaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘avaṇṇayiṃsū’’ti ekadesena sakalassa kālassa upalakkhaṇaṃ, tasmā yathā na vaṇṇayiṃsu atītamaddhānaṃ, evaṃ etarahipi na vaṇṇayanti, anāgatepi na vaṇṇayissantīti vuttaṃ hoti.

897. Vividhaṃ: various, high and low, slightly blameworthy, and greatly blameworthy—this is the meaning. Mā carassū: do not do. Asuciṃ: not pure because of the mixture of the impurity of defilements. Pāṇesu asaññataṃ: unrestrained with regard to killing living beings. Na hi avaṇṇayiṃsū: they do not praise. Here, this is a statement in the past tense, in the sense of the present tense. Or else, "avaṇṇayiṃsū" is indicative, by a part, of all time; therefore, just as they did not praise in the past, so they do not praise now, and they will not praise in the future—this is what is said.

898-900.Parajanassa rakkhitanti parapariggahitavatthu. Tenāha ‘‘adinna’’nti.Mā agamāti mā ajjhācari.Vitathanti atathaṃ, musāti attho.Aññathāti aññathāva, vitathasaññī evaṃ vitathanti jānanto evaṃ mā bhaṇīti attho.

898-900. Parajanassa rakkhitaṃ: property possessed by another. Therefore, he said, "adinnaṃ." Mā agamā: do not approach. Vitathaṃ: untrue, meaning false. Aññathā: differently, just differently; the meaning is, knowing "I am speaking falsely," do not speak thus, knowing thus, "it is false."

901.Yenāti yena majjena, pītenāti adhippāyo.Apetīti vigacchati.Saññāti dhammasaññā, lokasaññā eva vā.Sabbanti anavasesaṃ, bījato paṭṭhāyāti attho.

901. Yena: by which intoxicant, when drunk, is the implied meaning. Apeti: departs, vanishes. Saññā: perception of Dhamma, or even worldly perception. Sabbaṃ: without remainder, starting from the seed—this is the meaning.

902.Svāhanti so tadā chattamāṇavabhūto ahaṃ.Idhaimasmiṃ maggapadese, imasmiṃ vā tava sāsane. Tenāha‘‘tathāgatassa dhamme’’ti.Pañca sikkhāti pañca sīlāni.Karitvāti ādiyitvā, adhiṭṭhāyāti attho.Dvepathanti dvinnaṃ gāmasīmānaṃ vemajjhabhūtaṃ pathaṃ, sīmantarikapathanti attho.Teti te corā.Tatthāti sīmantarikamagge.Bhogahetūti āmisakiñcikkhanimittaṃ.

902. Svāhaṃ: so, I, who was then the youth Chatta. Idha: in this path, or in this Dispensation of yours. Therefore, he said, "tathāgatassa dhamme." Pañca sikkhā: the five precepts. Karitvā: having undertaken, having resolved—this is the meaning. Dvepathaṃ: the path that is the middle ground of the boundaries of two villages, the path between boundaries—this is the meaning. Te: those thieves. Tattha: on that path between boundaries. Bhogahetū: for the sake of a little material gain.

903.Tatoti yathāvuttakusalatoparaṃupariaññaṃ kusalaṃ na vijjatina upalabbhati, yamahaṃ anussareyyanti attho.Kāmakāmīti yathicchitakāmaguṇasamaṅgī.

903. Tato: from the aforementioned skillful deed, paraṃ: beyond, aññaṃ kusalaṃ na vijjati: no other skillful deed exists, is not found, which I might recall—this is the meaning. Kāmakāmī: possessing desired sensual qualities according to his wish.

904.Khaṇamuhuttasaññamassāti khaṇamuhuttamattaṃ pavattasīlassa.Anudhammappaṭipattiyāti yathādhigatassa phalassa anurūpadhammaṃ paṭipajjamānassa bhagavā passa, tuyhaṃ ovādadhammassa vā anurūpāya dhammapaṭipattiyā vuttaniyāmeneva saraṇagamanassa sīlasamādānassa cāti attho.Jalamiva yasasāti iddhiyā parivārasampattiyā ca jalantaṃ viya.Samekkhamānāti passantā.Bahukāti bahavo.Pihayantīti ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho mayaṃ edisā bhaveyyāmā’’ti patthenti.Hīnakammāti mama sampattito nihīnabhogā.

904. Khaṇamuhuttasaññamassa: of one who is restrained for just a moment. Anudhammappaṭipattiyā: of one who is practicing the Dhamma in accordance with the fruit he has attained; or, Blessed One, behold, by practicing the Dhamma in accordance with your exhortation-Dhamma, namely, by going for refuge and undertaking the precepts, according to the stated rule. Jalamiva yasasā: as if blazing with glory, with power and retinue. Samekkhamānā: seeing. Bahukā: many. Pihayanti: they long, "How might we be like this?" Hīnakammā: those with inferior possessions compared to my attainment.

905.Katipayāyāti appikāya.Yeti ye bhikkhū ceva upāsakādayo ca. Ca-saddo byatireke.Teti tava.Satatanti divase divase.

905. Katipayāyā: by a small one. Ye: those monks and lay followers, etc. The ca-particle is exceptive. Te: of you. Satataṃ: day by day.

906.Vipulanti uḷāraphalaṃ vipulānubhāvaṃ.Tathāgatassa dhammeti tathāgatassa sāsane ovāde ṭhatvā katanti yojanā. Evaṃ anuddesikavasena vuttamevatthaṃ attuddesikavasena dassento‘‘passā’’tiādimāha. Tatthapassāti bhagavantaṃ vadati, attānameva vā aññaṃ viya ca katvā vadati.

906. Vipulaṃ: abundant fruit, abundant effect. Tathāgatassa dhamme: it should be construed as, having done, standing in the Tathāgata's Dispensation, in the exhortation. Thus, showing from the standpoint of a general statement the same meaning from the standpoint of a personal statement, he said, beginning with "passā." There, passā: he addresses the Blessed One, or he speaks of himself as if he were another.

907.Kimidaṃkusalaṃ kimācaremāti kusalaṃ nāmetaṃ kiṃsabhāvaṃ kīdisaṃ, kathaṃ vā taṃ ācareyyāma.Icceke hi samecca mantayantīti evameke samecca samāgantvā pathaviṃ parivattentā viya sineruṃ ukkhipantā viya ca sudukkaraṃ katvā mantayanti vicārenti, mayaṃ pana akiccheneva punapi kusalaṃ ācareyyāmāti adhippāyo. Tenevāha‘‘maya’’ntiādi.

907. Kimidaṃ kusalaṃ kimācaremā: what is this that is called skillful, of what nature is it, of what kind, or how should we practice it? Icceke hi samecca mantayantī: thus some, having considered, having come together, deliberate, considering by doing what is very difficult, like turning the earth over, or like lifting up Mount Sineru; but we might practice skillful action again without difficulty—this is the implied meaning. Therefore, he said, beginning with "mayaṃ."

908.Bahukāroti bahūpakāro, mahāupakāro vā.Anukampakoti kāruṇiko.Ma-kāro padasandhikaro.Itīti evaṃ, bhagavato attani paṭipannākāraṃ sandhāya vadati.Me satīti mayi sati vijjamāne, corehi avadhite evāti attho.Divā divassāti divasassapi divā, kālassevāti attho.Svāhanti so chattamāṇavabhūto ahaṃ.Saccanāmanti ‘‘bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādināmehi avitathanāmaṃ bhūtatthanāmaṃ.Anukampassūti anuggaṇhāhi.Punapīti bhiyyopisuṇemu,tava dhammaṃ suṇeyyāmayevāti attho.

908. Bahukāro: very helpful, or very beneficial. Anukampako: compassionate. The ma-particle is a euphonic increment. Itī: thus, speaking with reference to the manner in which the Blessed One has undertaken with regard to himself. Me satī: while mindfulness exists in me, even when I was killed by thieves—this is the meaning. Divā divassa: the day of the day, the time of the time—this is the meaning. Svāhaṃ: so, I, who was then the youth Chatta. Saccanāmaṃ: to the one whose name is true, whose name is factual, with names such as "the Blessed One, worthy, perfectly self-enlightened." Anukampassū: favor me. Punapī: even more, suṇemu: may we hear, may we surely hear your Dhamma—this is the meaning.

Evaṃ devaputto sabbametaṃ kataññutābhāve ṭhatvā satthu payirupāsane ca dhammassavane ca atittimeva dīpento vadati. Bhagavā devaputtassa ca tattha sannipatitaparisāya ca ajjhāsayaṃ oloketvā anupubbikathaṃ kathesi. Atha nesaṃ allacittataṃ ñatvā sāmukkaṃsikaṃ dhammadesanaṃ pakāsesi. Desanāpariyosāne devaputto ceva mātāpitaro cassa sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu, mahato ca janakāyassa dhammābhisamayo ahosi.

Thus, the deva's son, standing in the state of gratitude for all this, and showing that he is never satiated with attending on the Teacher and hearing the Dhamma, speaks. The Blessed One, having observed the inclination of the deva's son and of the assembly gathered there, gave a graduated discourse. Then, having known that their minds were receptive, he revealed a Dhamma talk that leads to the highest. At the end of the discourse, the deva's son and his parents were established in the fruit of stream-entry, and a great multitude experienced the Dhamma.

909.Paṭhamaphale patiṭṭhito devaputto uparimaggesu attano garucittīkāraṃ, tadadhigamassa ca mahānisaṃsataṃ vibhāvento‘‘ye cidha pajahanti kāmarāga’’nti pariyosānagāthamāha. Tassattho –ye idhaimasmiṃ sāsane ṭhitāpajahantianavasesato samucchindantikāmarāgaṃ, na ca te puna upentigabbhaseyyaṃorambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ samucchinnattā. Ye ca panapahāya mohaṃsabbaso samugghātetvābhavarāgānusayañcapajahanti, te puna upenti gabbhaseyyanti vattabbameva natthi. Kasmā?Parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā,te hi uttamapurisā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānaṃ gatā evaṃ idheva sabbavedayitānaṃ sabbapariḷāhānaṃ byantibhāvena sītibhūtā.

909. The deva's son, established in the first fruit, showing his respect for himself in the higher paths, and the great benefit of attaining them, spoke the concluding verse, "ye cidha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ." Its meaning: ye idha: those who, standing in this Dispensation, pajahanti: abandon, completely cut off without remainder, kāmarāgaṃ, sensual lust, and they do not come again to gabbhaseyyaṃ, lying in a womb, because the lower fetters have been completely cut off. And those who pahāya mohaṃ, having completely eradicated delusion, and bhavarāgānusayañca, abandon the underlying tendency to lust for existence, there is no need to even say that they come again to lying in a womb. Why? Parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā: for those excellent persons have gone to final extinguishment in the Nibbāna-element without remainder, thus they are cooled here itself by the cessation of all feelings, of all burning.

Iti devaputto attano ariyasotasamāpannabhāvaṃ pavedento anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā desanāya kūṭaṃ gahetvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghassa apacitiṃ dassetvā mātāpitaro āpucchitvā devalokameva gato, satthāpi uṭṭhāyāsanā gato saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena. Māṇavassa pana mātāpitaro brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti sabbo ca mahājano bhagavantaṃ anugantvā nivatti. Bhagavā jetavanaṃ gantvā sannipatitāya parisāya imaṃ vimānaṃ vitthārato kathesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, the deva's son, declaring his state of being an Noble stream-enterer, having taken the highest point with the discourse on the Nibbāna-element without remainder, having worshiped the Blessed One, having circumambulated him, having shown respect to the Saṅgha of monks, having taken leave of his parents, went to the deva-world itself; the Teacher also, having risen from his seat, left together with the Saṅgha of monks. But the youth's parents, the brahmin Pokkharasāti, and all the great multitude followed the Blessed One and turned back. The Blessed One, having gone to Jeta's Grove, related this celestial mansion in detail to the assembled company. That discourse was beneficial to the great multitude.

Chattamāṇavakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Chattamāṇavaka celestial mansion is finished.

4. Kakkaṭakarasadāyakavimānavaṇṇanā
4. The Description of the Kakkaṭakarasadāyaka Celestial Mansion

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇaṃ vimānanti kakkaṭakarasadāyakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena aññataro bhikkhu āraddhavipassako kaṇṇasūlena pīḷito akallasarīratāya vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetuṃ nāsakkhi, vejjehi vuttavidhinā bhesajje katepi rogo na vūpasami. So bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesi. Athassa bhagavā ‘‘kakkaṭakarasabhojanaṃ sappāya’’nti ñatvā āha ‘‘gaccha tvaṃ bhikkhu magadhakhette piṇḍāya carāhī’’ti.

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ: the Kakkaṭakarasadāyaka celestial mansion. What was its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in the Bamboo Grove in Rājagaha. At that time, a certain monk who had begun practicing insight, afflicted by a sore in his ear, was unable to expedite his insight due to the unsuitability of his body; even though medicine was prepared by physicians according to the prescribed method, the disease did not subside. He announced this matter to the Blessed One. Then the Blessed One, knowing that "a meal of crab-broth is suitable" for him, said, "Go, monk, wander for alms in the Magadha country."

So bhikkhu ‘‘dīghadassinā addhā kiñci diṭṭhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘sādhu bhante’’ti bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pattacīvaramādāya magadhakhettaṃ gantvā aññatarassa khettapālassa kuṭiyā dvāre piṇḍāya aṭṭhāsi. So ca khettapālo kakkaṭakarasaṃ sampādetvā bhattañca pacitvā ‘‘thokaṃ vissamitvā bhuñjissāmī’’ti nisinno theraṃ disvā pattaṃ gahetvā kuṭikāyaṃ nisīdāpetvā kakkaṭakarasabhattaṃ adāsi. Therassa taṃ bhattaṃ thokaṃ bhuttassayeva kaṇṇasūlaṃ paṭippassambhi, ghaṭasatena nhāto viya ahosi. So sappāyāhāravasena cittaphāsukaṃ labhitvā vipassanāvasena cittaṃ abhininnāmento apariyositeyeva bhojane anavasesato āsave khepetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāya khettapālaṃ āha ‘‘upāsaka, tava piṇḍapātabhojanena mayhaṃ rogo vūpasanto, kāyacittaṃ kallaṃ jātaṃ, tvampi imassa puññassa phalena vigatakāyacittadukkho bhavissasī’’ti vatvā anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi.

That monk, thinking, "The long-seeing one will surely have seen something," having assented to the Blessed One, "Very good, venerable sir," having worshiped the Blessed One, taking his bowl and robes, having gone to the Magadha country, stood for alms at the door of a certain field-keeper's hut. And that field-keeper, having prepared crab-broth and cooked rice, sat down thinking, "I will eat after resting a little," seeing the elder, took his bowl, had him sit down in the hut, and gave him crab-broth and rice. As soon as the elder had eaten a little of that meal, the earache subsided, and he was as if bathed with a hundred pots of water. Having obtained physical ease by means of suitable food, directing his mind towards insight, even before the meal was finished, having completely destroyed the āsavas, he was established in arahantship, and said to the field-keeper, "Lay follower, my disease has subsided by your alms-food, my body and mind have become well; may you also be free from physical and mental suffering by the fruit of this merit," having said this, having given thanks, he departed.

Khettapālo aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike maṇithambhe kanakavimāne sattasatakūṭāgārapaṭimaṇḍite veḷuriyamayagabbhe nibbatti, dvāre cassa yathūpacitakammasaṃsūcako muttāsikkāgato suvaṇṇakakkaṭako olambamāno aṭṭhāsi. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno pubbe vuttanayena tattha gato taṃ disvā imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

The field-keeper, after some time, having died, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, in a twelve- Yojana high jeweled pillar, in a golden celestial mansion adorned with seven hundred peaked dwellings, in a beryl chamber, and at his door a golden crab hung down with a string of pearls, indicative of his accumulated karma. Then venerable Mahāmoggallāna, having gone there in the manner described before, seeing that, asked with these verses—

910.

910.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasa yojanāni;

"This celestial mansion has high jeweled pillars, twelve yojanas all around;
There are seven hundred magnificent peaked dwellings, with beryl pillars, delightful, well-placed, beautiful.

911.

911.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"There you sit, drink, and eat, and divine lutes sound sweetly;
There are divine flavors, the five sensual qualities, and women dance, covered in gold.

912.

912.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such beauty yours? By what does it succeed here for you?
And those enjoyments arise for you, whatever are dear to the mind.

913.

913.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ deva mahānubhāva, manussabhūto kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, glorious deva, what merit did you do when you were a human being,
By what means are you so radiant, and your complexion shines in all directions?"

Sopissa byākāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ –

He then explained to him, to show that:

914.

914.

‘‘So devaputto attamano, moggallānena pucchito;

"That deva-son, delighted, was questioned by Moggallāna;
Being asked a question, he explained the fruit of which action this is." - was said;

915.

915.

‘‘Satisamuppādakaro, dvāre kakkaṭako ṭhito;

"The crab, the producer of mindfulness, stood at the door;
Well-made of gold, the ten-footed one is beautiful.

916.

916.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that, such is my complexion; by that, I prosper here;
And there arise for me enjoyments, whatever are dear to the mind.

917.

917.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūto yamakāsi puññaṃ;

"I will tell you, bhikkhu of great power, what merit I did when I was a human being;
By that I am so radiant, and my complexion shines in all directions."

910.Tatthauccanti accuggataṃ.Maṇithūṇanti padumarāgādimaṇimayathambhaṃ.Samantatoti catūsupi passesu.Rucakatthatāti tassaṃ tassaṃ bhūmiyaṃ suvaṇṇaphalakehi atthatā.

910. There, uccaṃ means very high. Maṇithūṇaṃ means a pillar made of jewels like padmarāga. Samantato means on all four sides. Rucakatthatā means being covered with gold plates on each and every level.

911.Pivasi khādasi cāti kālena kālaṃ upayujjamānaṃ gandhapānaṃ sudhābhojanañca sandhāya vadati.Pavadantīti pavajjanti.Dibbā rasā kāmaguṇettha pañcāti dibbā rasā anappakā pañca kāmaguṇā ettha etasmiṃ tava vimāne saṃvijjantīti attho.Suvaṇṇachannāti hemābharaṇavibhūsitā.

911. Pivasi khādasi ca he speaks referring to the scented drinks and divine foods which are consumed from time to time. Pavadantī means resound. Dibbā rasā kāmaguṇettha pañcā means divine tastes, countless five sense pleasures are available here in your mansion. Suvaṇṇachannā means adorned with golden ornaments.

915.Satisamuppādakaroti satuppādakaro, yena puññakammena ayaṃ dibbasampatti mayā laddhā, tattha satuppādassa kārako, ‘‘kakkaṭakarasadānena ayaṃ tayā sampatti laddhā’’ti evaṃ satuppādaṃ karontoti attho.Niṭṭhito jātarūpassāti jātarūpena siddho jātarūpamayo. Ekamekasmiṃ passe pañca pañca katvā dasa pādā etassātidasapādako dvāre kakkaṭako ṭhito sobhati.So eva mama puññakammaṃ tādisānaṃ mahesīnaṃ vibhāveti, na ettha mayā vattabbaṃ atthīti adhippāyo. Tenāha‘‘tena metādiso vaṇṇo’’tiādi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

915. Satisamuppādakaro means the producer of mindfulness, the cause of mindfulness in that meritorious deed by which I obtained this divine fortune, meaning "by giving crab-juice, this fortune was obtained by you," thus causing mindfulness. Niṭṭhito jātarūpassā means made of gold, completed with gold. With five feet on each side, thus ten feet, dasapādako dvāre kakkaṭako ṭhito sobhati, the ten-footed crab standing at the door is beautiful. That very thing reveals my meritorious deed to such great sages; there is no need for me to speak of it. Therefore, he said, "tena metādiso vaṇṇo" etc. The rest is as previously stated.

Kakkaṭakarasadāyakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Description of the Crab-Juice-Giving Mansion is Concluded.

5. Dvārapālakavimānavaṇṇanā
5. Description of the Doorkeeper's Mansion

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇanti dvārapālakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena ca samayena rājagahe aññataro upāsako cattāri niccabhattāni saṅghassa deti. Tassa pana gehaṃ pariyante ṭhitaṃ corabhayena yebhuyyena pihitadvārameva hoti. Bhikkhū gantvā kadāci dvārassa pihitattā bhattaṃ aladdhāva paṭigacchanti. Upāsako bhariyaṃ āha ‘‘kiṃ, bhadde, ayyānaṃ sakkaccaṃ bhikkhā dīyatī’’ti? Sā āha ‘‘ekesu divasesu ayyā nāgamiṃsū’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ kāraṇa’’nti? ‘‘Dvārassa pihitattā maññe’’ti. Taṃ sutvā upāsako saṃvegappatto hutvā ekaṃ purisaṃ dvārapālaṃ katvā ṭhapesi ‘‘tvaṃ ajjato paṭṭhāya dvāraṃ rakkhanto nisīda, yadā ca ayyā āgamissanti, tadā te pavesetvā paviṭṭhānaṃ nesaṃ pattapaṭiggahaṇaāsanapaññāpanādi sabbaṃ yuttapayuttaṃ jānāhī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti tathā karonto bhikkhūnaṃ santike dhammaṃ sutvā uppannasaddho kammaphalaṃ saddahitvā saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhahi, sakkaccaṃ bhikkhū upaṭṭhahi.

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ is the doorkeeper's mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Rājagaha, in the Veḷuvana. At that time, a certain lay follower in Rājagaha was regularly giving four meals to the Saṅgha. His house was located on the outskirts, and mostly the door would be closed due to fear of thieves. The bhikkhus, having gone there, sometimes would return without receiving food because the door was closed. The lay follower said to his wife, "My dear, is food being given respectfully to the venerable ones?" She said, "On some days, the venerable ones did not come." "What is the reason?" "I think it is because the door was closed." Having heard that, the lay follower, filled with urgency, appointed a man as a doorkeeper, saying, "From today onwards, you sit guarding the door, and when the venerable ones come, then you let them in, and know all the appropriate things to do for those who have entered, such as receiving their bowls, arranging seats, and so on." He, saying "Good," doing so, having heard the Dhamma in the presence of the bhikkhus, with faith arisen, believing in the fruit of kamma, and being established in the refuges and precepts, attended to the bhikkhus respectfully.

Aparabhāge niccabhattadāyako upāsako kālaṃ katvā yāmesu nibbatti. Dvārapālo pana sakkaccaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upaṭṭhahitvā parassa pariccāge veyyāvaccakaraṇena anumodanena ca tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Tassa dvādasayojanikaṃ kanakavimānantiādi sabbaṃ kakkaṭakavimāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Pucchāvissajjanagāthā evamāgatā –

Later on, the lay follower who regularly gave meals, having passed away, was reborn in the Yama realm. The doorkeeper, however, having attended to the bhikkhus respectfully, through service to others, doing good deeds, and rejoicing, was born in the Tāvatiṃsa realm. His golden mansion, twelve yojanas in extent, and everything else should be understood in the same way as described in the Crab Mansion. The verses of question and answer came as follows:

918.

918.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasa yojanāni;

"High is this jewel-pillared mansion, twelve yojanas all around;
Seven hundred lofty peaked houses, with pillars of beryl, beautifully covered with gold plates.

919.

919.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"There you dwell, you drink and eat, and divine lutes play sweetly;
Divine tastes, these five sense pleasures are here, and women dance adorned with gold.

920.‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

920. "By what means is your complexion so radiant…pe… and your complexion shines in all directions?"

922.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

922. "That deva-son, delighted…pe… the fruit of which action this is."

923.

923.

‘‘Dibbaṃ mamaṃ vassasahassamāyu, vācābhigītaṃ manasā pavattitaṃ;

"A divine thousand years is my life, praised by speech, produced by mind;
By this much will the meritorious deed endure, being endowed with divine pleasures.

924.

924.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions."

923.Tatthadibbaṃ mamaṃ vassasahassamāyūti yasmiṃ devanikāye sayaṃ uppanno, tesaṃ tāvatiṃsadevānaṃ āyuppamāṇameva vadati. Tesañhi manussānaṃ gaṇanāya vassasataṃ eko rattidivo, tāya rattiyā tiṃsarattiko māso, tena māsena dvādasamāsiko saṃvaccharo, tena saṃvaccharena sahassasaṃvaccharāni āyu, taṃ manussānaṃ gaṇanāya tisso vassakoṭiyo saṭṭhi ca vassasatasahassāni honti.Vācābhigītanti vācāya abhigītaṃ, ‘‘āgacchantu ayyā, idaṃ āsanaṃ paññattaṃ, idha nisīdathā’’tiādinā, ‘‘kiṃ ayyānaṃ sarīrassa ārogyaṃ, kiṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ phāsuka’’ntiādinā paṭisanthāravasena ca vācāya kathitamattaṃ.Manasā pavattitanti ‘‘ime ayyā pesalā brahmacārino dhammacārino’’tiādinā cittena pavattitaṃ pasādamattaṃ, na pana mama santakaṃ kiñci pariccattaṃ atthīti dasseti.Ettāvatāti ettakena evaṃ kathanamattena pasādamattenapi.Ṭhassati puññakammoti katapuñño nāma hutvā devaloke ṭhassati ciraṃ pavattissati, tiṭṭhanto ca dibbehi kāmehi samaṅgībhūto tasmiṃ devanikāye devānaṃ valañjaniyāmeneva dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samaṅgībhūto samannāgato hutvā indriyāni paricārento viharatīti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

923. There, dibbaṃ mamaṃ vassasahassamāyū means he speaks only of the lifespan of those Tāvatiṃsa devas, in whose host of devas he himself was born. For them, a hundred years by human reckoning is one day and night; with thirty such nights is a month, with twelve such months is a year, and with such years, a thousand years is their lifespan, which by human reckoning is three hundred million and sixty million years. Vācābhigītaṃ means praised by speech, such as "Venerable ones, please come, this seat is prepared, please be seated here," etc., and "Is the body of the venerable ones healthy? Is the dwelling place comfortable?" etc., only so much spoken by way of friendly conversation. Manasā pavattitaṃ means only so much of mental joy, produced by the mind, such as "These venerable ones are amiable, practice the holy life, practice the Dhamma," but it shows that there is nothing of mine that was given away. Ettāvatā means even by so little, merely by such speaking, merely by joy. Ṭhassati puññakammo means having become one who has done merit, he will stand in the deva-world, will continue for a long time, and while standing, being endowed with divine pleasures, in that host of devas, just as the devas are accustomed, being endowed with the five divine sense pleasures, enjoying the senses, he lives. The rest is as previously stated.

Dvārapālakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Description of the Doorkeeper's Mansion is Concluded.

6. Paṭhamakaraṇīyavimānavaṇṇanā
6. Description of the First Meritorious-Deed Mansion

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇanti karaṇīyavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sāvatthivāsī eko upāsako nhānopakaraṇāni gahetvā aciravatiṃ gantvā nhatvā āgacchanto bhagavantaṃ sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pavisantaṃ disvā upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā evamāha ‘‘bhante kena nimantitā’’ti. Bhagavā tuṇhī ahosi. So kenaci animantitabhāvaṃ ñatvā āha ‘‘adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā bhattaṃ anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena. So bhagavantaṃ attano gehaṃ netvā buddhārahaṃ āsanaṃ paññāpetvā tattha bhagavantaṃ nisīdāpetvā paṇītena annapānena santappesi. Bhagavā katabhattakicco tassa anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sesaṃ anantaravimānasadisaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ is the meritorious-deed mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, a certain lay follower living in Sāvatthi, having taken bathing equipment, having gone to the Aciravatī River, having bathed, and coming back, seeing the Blessed One entering Sāvatthi for alms, approached, and having bowed, said thus, "Venerable sir, by whom have you been invited?" The Blessed One remained silent. He, knowing that he had not been invited by anyone, said, "May the Blessed One accept my meal, out of compassion." The Blessed One accepted by remaining silent. He, having led the Blessed One to his own house, having prepared a seat worthy of the Buddha, having seated the Blessed One there, satisfied him with excellent food and drink. The Blessed One, having finished the meal, having given thanks to him, departed. The rest is similar to the immediately preceding mansion. Therefore, it was said –

926.‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ…pe… nāriyo ca naccanti suvaṇṇachannā.

926. "High is this jewel-pillared mansion…pe… and women dance adorned with gold.

928.‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

928. "By what means is your complexion so radiant…pe… and your complexion shines in all directions?"

930.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

930. "That deva-son, delighted…pe… the fruit of which action this is."

931.

931.

‘‘Karaṇīyāni puññāni, paṇḍitena vijānatā;

"Meritorious deeds should be done by the wise, knowing one;
To the rightly-gone Buddhas, where what is given is of great fruit.

931.

931.

‘‘Atthāya vata me buddho, araññā gāmamāgato;

"For my benefit, indeed, the Buddha came from the forest to the village;
Having pleased my mind, I have gone to Tāvatiṃsa.

933.‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

933. "By that, such is my complexion…pe… and my complexion shines in all directions."

931.Tatthapaṇḍitenāti sappaññena.Vijānatāti attano hitāhitaṃ jānantena.Sammaggatesūti sammāpaṭipannesu,buddhesūti sammāsambuddhesu.

931. There, paṇḍitena means by the wise. Vijānatā means by one knowing his own benefit and non-benefit. Sammaggatesu means in those who have rightly practiced, buddhesu means in the fully enlightened Buddhas.

932.Atthāyāti hitāya, vuḍḍhiyā vā.Araññāti vihārato, jetavanaṃ sandhāya vadati.Tāvatiṃsūpagoti tāvatiṃsadevakāyaṃ, tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ vā uppajjanavasena upagato. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

932. Atthāyā means for the benefit, or for the growth. Araññā means from the monastery, he speaks referring to Jeta's Grove. Tāvatiṃsūpago means having gone to the Tāvatiṃsa host of devas, or having approached the Tāvatiṃsa realm by way of rebirth. The rest is as previously stated.

Karaṇīyavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Description of the Meritorious-Deed Mansion is Concluded.

7. Dutiyakaraṇīyavimānavaṇṇanā
7. Description of the Second Meritorious-Deed Mansion

Sattamavimānaṃ chaṭṭhavimānasadisaṃ. Kevalaṃ tattha upāsakena bhagavato āhāro dinno, idha aññatarassa therassa. Esaṃ vuttanayameva. Tena vuttaṃ –

The seventh mansion is similar to the sixth mansion. Only there, food was given to the Blessed One by a lay follower; here, it was given to a certain Thera. It is all as previously stated. Therefore, it was said –

935.

935.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasa yojanāni;

"High is this jewel-pillared mansion, twelve yojanas all around;
Seven hundred lofty peaked houses, with pillars of beryl, beautifully covered with gold plates.

936.

936.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"There you dwell, you drink and eat, and divine lutes play sweetly;
Divine tastes, these five sense pleasures are here, and women dance adorned with gold.

937.‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatīti.

937. "By what means is your complexion so radiant…pe… and your complexion shines in all directions?"

938.

938.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… the fruit of which action this is."

940.

940.

‘‘Karaṇīyāni puññāni, paṇḍitena vijānatā;

"Meritorious deeds should be done by the wise, knowing one;
To the rightly-gone bhikkhus, where what is given is of great fruit.

941.

941.

‘‘Atthāya vata me bhikkhu, araññā gāmamāgato;

"For my benefit, indeed, the bhikkhu came from the forest to the village;
Having pleased my mind there, I have gone to Tāvatiṃsa.

942.‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

942. "By that, such is my complexion…pe… and my complexion shines in all directions."

Dutiyakaraṇīyavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Description of the Second Meritorious-Deed Mansion is Concluded.

8. Paṭhamasūcivimānavaṇṇanā
8. Description of the First Needle Mansion

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇaṃ vimānanti sūcivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena āyasmato sāriputtassa cīvarakammaṃ kātabbaṃ hoti, attho ca hoti sūciyā. So rājagahe piṇḍāya caranto kammārassa gehadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ disvā kammāro āha ‘‘kena, bhante, attho’’ti? ‘‘Cīvarakammaṃ kātabbaṃ atthi, sūciyā attho’’ti. Kammāro pasannamānaso katapariyositā dve sūciyo datvā ‘‘punapi, bhante, sūciyā atthe sati mama ācikkheyyāthā’’ti vatvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vandi. Thero tassa anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Atha āyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto taṃ devaputtaṃ imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ is the needle mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Rājagaha, in the Veḷuvana. At that time, robe-making had to be done for venerable Sāriputta, and there was a need for a needle. He, while wandering for alms in Rājagaha, stood at the door of a smith's house. Seeing him, the smith said, "What is needed, venerable sir?" "Robe-making has to be done, there is a need for a needle." The smith, with a pleased mind, having given two needles that were finished, saying, "Again, venerable sir, if there is a need for a needle, you should tell me," bowed with the five-point prostration. The Thera, having given thanks to him, departed. Later on, having passed away, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa realm. Then, venerable Mahā Moggallāna, wandering on a deva-excursion, questioned that deva-son with these verses –

944.

944.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ…pe…

"High is this jewel-pillared mansion…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions."

948.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

948. "That deva-son, delighted…pe… the fruit of which action this is."

949.

949.

‘‘Yaṃ dadāti na taṃ hoti, yañceva dajjā tañceva seyyo;

"What one gives, that it is not; indeed, whatever one should give, that indeed is better;
A needle was given, a needle indeed is better.

950.

950.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions."

949.Tatthayaṃ dadātīti yādisaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dadāti.Na taṃ hotīti tassa tādisameva phalaṃ na hoti. Atha kho khettasampattiyā ca cittasampattiyā ca tato vipulataraṃ uḷāratarameva phalaṃ hoti. Tasmāyañceva dajjā tañceva seyyoti yaṃkiñcideva vijjamānaṃ dajjā dadeyya, tañceva tadeva seyyo, yassa kassaci anavajjassa deyyadhammassa dānameva seyyo, kasmā? Mayā hisūci dinnā sūcimeva seyyo,sūcidānameva mayhaṃ seyyaṃ jātaṃ, yato ayamīdisī sampatti laddhāti adhippāyo.

949. There, yaṃ dadātīti means whatever kind of gift one gives. Na taṃ hotīti means the fruit of that is not just the same as that. But rather, by the accomplishment of the field and by the accomplishment of the mind, the fruit is much greater and more excellent than that. Therefore, yañceva dajjā tañceva seyyoti means whatever little is available, one should give; that indeed is better, the giving of whatever blameless gift is better. Why? Because, by me, sūci dinnā sūcimeva seyyo, a needle was given, the giving of a needle indeed was better for me, since this kind of accomplishment has been obtained, is the meaning.

Sūcivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Description of the Needle Mansion is Concluded.

9. Dutiyasūcivimānavaṇṇanā
9. Description of the Second Needle Mansion

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇanti dutiyasūcivimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rājagahavāsī eko tunnakārako vihārapekkhako hutvā veḷuvanaṃ gato. Tattha aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ veḷuvane katasūciyā cīvaraṃ sibbantaṃ disvā sūcigharena saddhiṃ sūciyo adāsi. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayameva.

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ means the second Sūci-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Rājagaha in the Veḷuvana. At that time, a tailor living in Rājagaha, wishing for a monastery, went to Veḷuvana. There, seeing a certain bhikkhu sewing a robe with a needle attached to a needle case in the Veḷuvana, he gave needles along with a needle case. The rest is all as previously stated.

952.

952.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ…pe…

“This vimāna, with its lofty jeweled pillar…pe…
And your radiance shines in every direction.” – he asked;

956.

956.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

“That devaputta, delighted…pe… by what deed is this the fruit?”

957.

957.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, purimajātiyā manussaloke.

“I, having been a human among humans, in a previous birth in the human world,

958.

958.

‘‘Addasaṃ virajaṃ bhikkhuṃ, vippasannamanāvilaṃ;

“Saw a bhikkhu, free from defilement, serene and unperturbed;
To him I gave a needle, pleased with my own hands.

959.

959.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

“By that, such is my radiance…pe… and my radiance shines in every direction.”

Taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

All that is as previously stated below.

Dutiyasūcivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Sūci-vimāna is Finished.

10. Paṭhamanāgavimānavaṇṇanā
10. The Explanation of the First Nāga-vimāna

Susukkakhandhaṃabhiruyha nāganti nāgavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ upagato. Tattha addasa aññataraṃ devaputtaṃ sabbasetaṃ mahantaṃ dibbanāgaṃ abhiruyha mahantena parivārena mahatā dibbānubhāvena ākāsena gacchantaṃ, sabbā disā cando viya sūriyo viya ca obhāsayamānaṃ. Disvā yena so devaputto tenupasaṅkami. Atha so devaputto tato oruyha āyasmantaṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ abhivādetvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Atha thero –

Susukkakhandhaṃ abhiruyha nāgaṃ means the Nāga-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jeta's Grove. At that time, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, wandering for devas as stated below, approached the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. There he saw a certain devaputta riding a completely white, large, divine nāga, going through the sky with a great retinue and great divine power, illuminating all directions like the moon and the sun. Having seen this, he approached the devaputta. Then that devaputta, having descended from there, greeted the venerable Mahāmoggallāna and stood with his hands in añjali. Then the Thera –

961.

961.

‘‘Susukkakhandhaṃ abhiruyha nāgaṃ, akācinaṃ dantiṃ baliṃ mahājavaṃ;

“Having mounted a nāga with a very white back, a flawless, noble, powerful, and swift tusker,
Having mounted that excellent elephant, well-trained, you come here through the sky, in the atmosphere.

962.

962.

‘‘Nāgassa dantesu duvesu nimmitā, acchodakā paduminiyo suphullā;

“On the tusks of the nāga, two lotus ponds are created, with clear water and full of lotuses;
On the lotuses, groups of instruments play, and these lovely maidens dance.

963.

963.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo, manussabhūto kimakāsi puññaṃ;

“You have attained divine power, great is your influence; what merit did you do when you were a human?
By what are you so radiant with power, and your radiance shines in every direction?” –

Tassa sampattikittanamukhena katakammaṃ pucchi.

He asked about the deed done, through praise of his attainment.

961.Tatthasusukkakhandhanti suṭṭhu setakhandhaṃ. Kiñcāpi tassa nāgassa cattāro pādā, vatthikosaṃ, mukhappadeso, ubho kaṇṇā, vāladhīti ettakaṃ muñcitvā sabbo kāyo setova, khandhappadesassa pana sātisayaṃ dhavalataratāya vuttaṃ ‘‘susukkakhandha’’nti.Nāganti dibbaṃ hatthināgaṃ.Akācinanti niddosaṃ, sabalalavaṅkatilakādichavidosavirahitanti attho. ‘‘Ājānīya’’ntipi pāḷi, ājānīyalakkhaṇūpetanti attho.Dantinti vipularuciradantavantaṃ.Balinti balavantaṃ mahābalaṃ.Mahājavanti atijavaṃ sīghagāmiṃ. Punaabhiruyhāti ettha anunāsikalopo daṭṭhabbo, abhiruyhaṃ ārohanīyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

961. There, susukkakhandhaṃ means a very white back. Although that nāga has four legs, a scrotum, a mouth area, both ears, and a tail tuft, the entire body is white, but because the back area is exceedingly whiter, it is said, “susukkakhandhaṃ.” Nāgaṃ means a divine elephant nāga. Akācinaṃ means flawless, free from defects such as spots of sesame seeds, etc. There is also a reading “ājānīyaṃ,” meaning endowed with the characteristics of a thoroughbred. Dantiṃ means having large, beautiful tusks. Baliṃ means powerful, having great strength. Mahājavaṃ means very swift, fast-moving. Again, regarding abhiruyha, the elision of the nasal should be noted; it is said to mean fit to be mounted, abhiruyhaṃ. The rest is as previously stated.

Evaṃ pana therena puṭṭho devaputto attanā katakammaṃ kathento –

Having been asked thus by the Thera, the devaputta, recounting the deed he had done, said –

965.

965.

‘‘Aṭṭheva muttapupphāni, kassapassa mahesino;

“Eight muttā flowers indeed, for Kassapa, the great sage;
I placed them on the thūpa, pleased with my own hands.

966.

966.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

“By that, such is my radiance…pe…
And my radiance shines in every direction.” – with these verses, he explained;

Tassattho – ahaṃ pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhassa yojanike kanakathūpe vaṇṭato muccitvā gacchamūle patitāni aṭṭha muttapupphāni labhitvā tāni gahetvā pūjanavasena pasannacitto hutvā abhiropesiṃ pūjesiṃ.

Its meaning is – formerly, after the complete extinction of Kassapa Sammāsambuddha, at the yojana-high golden thūpa, Kikī, the King of Kāsi, with his retinue, and the townspeople, merchants, and rural folk, would perform flower offerings every day. While they were doing so, flowers were very expensive and difficult to obtain. Then, a certain lay follower, wandering through the florists’ street, unable to obtain even a single flower for one kahāpaṇa each, took eight kahāpaṇas and went to the flower garden and said to the florist, “Give me eight flowers for these eight kahāpaṇas.” “There are no flowers, sir; they have all been carefully picked and given out.” “I will look and take them myself.” “If so, enter the garden and search.” He entered and, searching, found eight fallen flowers and said to the florist, “Take the kahāpaṇas, friend.” “You have obtained them through your merit; I will not take the kahāpaṇas,” he said. The other, “I will not take flowers for free and make an offering to the Blessed One,” placed the kahāpaṇas in front of him, took the flowers, went to the cetiya courtyard, and made the offering with a pleased mind.

Atīte kira kassapasammāsambuddhe parinibbute yojanike kanakathūpe ca kārite saparivāro kikī kāsirājā ca nāgarā ca negamā ca jānapadā ca divase divase pupphapūjaṃ karonti. Tesu tathā karontesu pupphāni mahagghāni dullabhāni ca ahesuṃ. Atheko upāsako mālākāravīthiyaṃ vicaritvā ekamekena kahāpaṇena ekamekampi pupphaṃ alabhanto aṭṭha kahāpaṇāni gahetvā pupphārāmaṃ gantvā mālākāraṃ āha ‘‘imehi aṭṭhahi kahāpaṇehi aṭṭha pupphāni dehī’’ti. ‘‘Natthayyo pupphāni, sammadeva upadhāretvā ocinitvā dinnānī’’ti. ‘‘Ahaṃ oloketvā gaṇhāmī’’ti. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ, ārāmaṃ pavisitvā gavesāhī’’ti. So pavisitvā gavesanto patitāni aṭṭha pupphāni labhitvā mālākāraṃ āha ‘‘gaṇha, tāta, kahāpaṇānī’’ti. ‘‘Tava puññena laddhāni, nāhaṃ kahāpaṇāni gaṇhāmī’’ti āha. Itaro ‘‘nāhaṃ mudhā pupphāni gahetvā bhagavato pūjaṃ karissāmī’’ti kahāpaṇāni tassa purato ṭhapetvā pupphāni gahetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā pasannacitto pūjaṃ akāsi. So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajjitvā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā punapi devaloke, punapi devaloketi evaṃ aparāparaṃ devesuyeva saṃsaranto tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena imasmimpi buddhuppāde tāvatiṃsesuyeva uppajji. Taṃ sandhāya heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha addasa aññataraṃ devaputta’’ntiādi.

In the latter part of his life, having passed away, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and having stayed there for as long as his lifespan lasted, again in the deva-world, again in the deva-world, thus transmigrating again and again only among the devas, by the remaining ripened result of that same deed, in this Buddha-era too, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. With reference to that, it is stated below, “There he saw a certain devaputta,” etc.

Taṃ panetaṃ pavattiṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

The venerable Mahāmoggallāna, having come to the human world, reported this event to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having established that matter and the origin of the eight flowers, extensively taught the Dhamma to the assembled company. That teaching was beneficial to the great multitude.

Nāgavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Nāga-vimāna is Finished.

11. Dutiyanāgavimānavaṇṇanā
11. The Explanation of the Second Nāga-vimāna

Mahantaṃ nāgaṃ abhiruyhāti dutiyanāgavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rājagahe aññataro upāsako saddho pasanno pañcasu sīlesu patiṭṭhito uposathadivasesu uposathasīlaṃ samādiyitvā purebhattaṃ attano vibhavānurūpaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dānāni datvā sayaṃ bhuñjitvā suddhavatthanivattho suddhuttarāsaṅgo pacchābhattaṃ yebhuyyena aṭṭha pānāni gāhāpetvā vihāraṃ gantvā bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyādetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ suṇāti. Evaṃ so sakkaccaṃ dānamayaṃ sīlamayañca bahuṃ sucaritaṃ upacinitvā ito cuto tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Tassa puññānubhāvena sabbaseto mahanto dibbo hatthināgo pāturahosi. So taṃ abhiruyha mahantena parivārena mahantena dibbānubhāvena kālena kālaṃ uyyānakīḷaṃ gacchati.

Mahantaṃ nāgaṃ abhiruyha means the second Nāga-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Rājagaha in the Veḷuvana. At that time, a certain lay follower in Rājagaha, faithful and devoted, established in the five precepts, on uposatha days, having undertaken the uposatha precepts, after giving alms to the bhikkhus according to his means before the meal, having eaten himself, dressed in clean clothes, with a clean upper robe, after the meal, generally arranging eight drinks, going to the monastery, offering them to the Sangha of bhikkhus, approaching the Blessed One, he would listen to the Dhamma. Thus, having carefully accumulated much wholesome conduct consisting of giving and morality, having passed away from here, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. By the power of his merit, a completely white, great, divine elephant nāga appeared. Having mounted it, with a great retinue and great divine power, he goes to the pleasure garden from time to time.

Athekadivasaṃ kataññutāya codiyamāno aḍḍharattisamaye taṃ dibbanāgaṃ abhiruyha mahatā parivārena ‘‘bhagavantaṃ vandissāmī’’ti devalokato āgantvā kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā hatthikkhandhato oruyha bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā abhivādetvā añjaliṃ paggayha ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ bhagavato samīpe ṭhito āyasmā vaṅgīso bhagavato anuññāya imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Then, one day, being impelled by gratitude, at midnight, having mounted that divine nāga, with a large retinue, “I will pay homage to the Blessed One,” having come from the deva-world, illuminating the entire Veḷuvana, having descended from the elephant's back, approached the Blessed One, greeted him, and stood to one side with his hands in añjali. The venerable Vaṅgīsa, standing near the Blessed One, with the Blessed One’s permission, asked with these verses –

968.

968.

‘‘Mahantaṃ nāgaṃ abhiruyha, sabbasetaṃ gajuttamaṃ;

“Having mounted a great nāga, an excellent elephant, completely white;
You wander from forest to forest, attended by a troop of women;
Illuminating all directions, like the stars, like a medicinal herb.

969.

969.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

“By what is such your radiance…pe…
And your radiance shines in every direction?”

Tatthā pucchito sopi tassa gāthāhi eva byākāsi.

There, being asked, he too explained with these verses.

971.

971.

‘‘So devaputto attamano, vaṅgīseneva pucchito;

“That devaputta, delighted, being asked by Vaṅgīsa;
Being questioned, he explained the fruit of which deed this is.”

972.

972.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, upāsako cakkhumato ahosiṃ;

“I, having been a human among humans, was a lay follower of the one with vision;
I abstained from killing living beings, I avoided taking what was not given in the world.

973.

973.

‘‘Amajjapo no ca musā abhāṇiṃ, sakena dārena ca tuṭṭho ahosiṃ;

“I was not a drinker and did not speak falsely, and I was content with my own spouse;
And with a pleased mind, I gave abundant alms of food and drink with respect.

974.

974.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

“By that, such is my radiance…pe…
And your radiance shines in every direction.”

Tattha apubbaṃ natthi, sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

There, there is nothing new; the rest is as previously stated below.

Dutiyanāgavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Second Nāga-vimāna is Finished.

12. Tatiyanāgavimānavaṇṇanā
12. The Explanation of the Third Nāga-vimāna

Konu dibbena yānenāti tatiyanāgavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena samayena tayo khīṇāsavattherā gāmakāvāse vassaṃ upagacchiṃsu. Te vutthavassā pavāretvā ‘‘bhagavantaṃ vandissāmā’’ti rājagahaṃ uddissa gacchantā antarāmagge sāyaṃ aññatarasmiṃ gāmake micchādiṭṭhikabrāhmaṇassa ucchukhettasamīpaṃ gantvā ucchupālaṃ pucchiṃsu ‘‘āvuso, sakkā ajja rājagahaṃ pāpuṇitu’’nti. ‘‘Na sakkā, bhante, ito aḍḍhayojane rājagahaṃ, idheva vasitvā sve gacchathā’’ti āha. ‘‘Atthettha koci vasanayoggo āvāso’’ti? ‘‘Natthi, bhante, ahaṃ pana vo vasanaṭṭhānaṃ jānissāmī’’ti. Therā adhivāsesuṃ.

Ko nu dibbena yānena means the third Nāga-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Rājagaha in the Veḷuvana, at the Kalandakanivāpa. At that time, three arahantas spent the rainy season in a village dwelling. Having completed the rains and performed pavāraṇā, "We will pay homage to the Blessed One," going towards Rājagaha, on the way, in the evening, having gone to a sugarcane field near a wrong-viewed brahmin's village, they asked the sugarcane guard, "Friend, is it possible to reach Rājagaha today?" "It is not possible, venerable sirs; Rājagaha is half a yojana from here; stay here and go tomorrow," he said. "Is there any suitable lodging here?" "There is not, venerable sirs, but I will find you a place to stay." The Theras consented.

So ucchūsuyeva yathāṭhitesu sākhāmaṇḍapākārena daṇḍakāni bandhitvā ucchupaṇṇehi chādetvā heṭṭhā palālaṃ attharitvā ekassa therassa adāsi, dutiyassa therassa tīhi ucchūhi daṇḍakasaṅkhepena bandhitvā tiṇena chādetvā heṭṭhā ca tiṇasantharaṃ katvā adāsi, itarassa attano kuṭiyaṃ dve tayo daṇḍake sākhāyo ca nīharitvā cīvarena paṭicchādento cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā adāsi. Te tattha vasiṃsu. Atha vibhātāya rattiyā kālasseva bhattaṃ pacitvā dantakaṭṭhañca mukhodakañca datvā saha ucchurasena bhattaṃ adāsi. Tesaṃ bhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā gacchantānaṃ ekekaṃ ucchuṃ adāsi ‘‘mayhaṃ bhāgo bhavissatī’’ti. So thokaṃ maggaṃ there anugantvā nivattanto attano veyyāvaccañca dānañca ārabbha uḷāraṃ pītisomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedento nivatti.

He bound the sugarcane stalks together in a branch-arbor fashion among the sugarcanes themselves as they stood, covered them with sugarcane leaves, spread straw underneath, and gave it to one Thera. For the second Thera, he bound sugarcane stalks into a hut-like structure with three sugarcanes, covered it with grass, also made a grass bed underneath, and gave it to him. For the other, having taken two or three sticks and branches from his own hut, covering them with a robe, he made a robe-hut and gave it to him. They stayed there. Then, at dawn, having cooked food early in the morning, having given a toothbrush and water for washing the face, he gave food with sugarcane juice. As they were leaving after having eaten and expressed appreciation, he gave each one a sugarcane, "It will be my share." The sugarcane guard, having followed the Theras a short distance on the way, turned back, experiencing great joy and happiness regarding his own service and giving.

Khettasāmiko pana gacchantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭipathena āgacchanto bhikkhū pucchi ‘‘kuto vo ucchu laddhā’’ti? ‘‘Ucchupālakena dinnā’’ti. Taṃ sutvā brāhmaṇo kupito anattamano taṭataṭāyamāno kodhābhibhūto tassa piṭṭhito upadhāvitvā muggarena taṃ paharanto ekappahāreneva jīvitā voropesi. So attanā katapuññakammameva anussaranto kālaṃ katvā sudhammādevasabhāyaṃ nibbatti. Tassa puññānubhāvena sabbaseto mahanto dibbavaravāraṇo nibbatti.

The owner of the field, coming along the path of the bhikkhus who were leaving, asked the bhikkhus, "From where did you get the sugarcane?" "It was given by the sugarcane guard." Having heard that, the brahmin, angry and displeased, bristling with rage, overcome by anger, running after him from behind, hitting him with a club, took away his life with one blow. He, remembering the meritorious deed he had done, having passed away, was reborn in the Sudhammā deva assembly. By the power of his merit, a completely white, great, excellent divine elephant appeared.

Ucchupālakassa maraṇaṃ sutvā tassa mātāpitaro ceva ñātimittā ca assumukhā rodamānā taṃ ṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu, sabbe ca gāmavāsino sannipatiṃsu. Tatrassa mātāpitaro sarīrakiccaṃ kātuṃ ārabhiṃsu. Tasmiṃ khaṇe so devaputto taṃ dibbahatthiṃ abhiruhitvā sabbatāḷāvacaraparivuto pañcaṅgikena tūriyena pavajjamānena mahantena parivārena mahatiyā deviddhiyā devalokato āgantvā tāya parisāya dissamānarūpo ākāse aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ tattha paṇḍitajātiko puriso imāhi gāthāhi tena katapuññakammaṃ pucchi –

Having heard of the sugarcane guard's death, his parents, relatives, and friends, weeping with tears, went to that place, and all the villagers gathered. There, his parents began to perform the bodily rites. At that moment, that devaputta, having mounted that divine elephant, surrounded by all the musicians, with a five-piece orchestra playing, with a great retinue, with great divine power, having come from the deva-world, appearing visible to that assembly, stood in the sky. Then, a man of wisdom there asked with these verses about the meritorious deed he had done –

976.

976.

‘‘Ko nu dibbena yānena, sabbasetena hatthinā;

“Who is this, with a divine vehicle, a completely white elephant?
The sound of instruments plays, resounding; he shines in the sky.

977.

977.

‘‘Devatā nusi gandhabbo, adu sakko purindado;

“Are you a deva, a gandhabba, or Sakka, the giver of cities?
Not knowing you, we ask; how should we know you?”

Sopissa imāhi gāthāhi etamatthaṃ byākāsi –

He explained this matter with these verses –

978.

978.

‘‘Nāmhi devo na gandhabbo, nāpi sakko purindado;

“I am not a deva, not a gandhabba, nor Sakka, the giver of cities;
Those who are called Sudhammā devas, I am one of them.”

979.

979.

‘‘Pucchāma devaṃ sudhammaṃ, puthuṃ katvāna añjaliṃ;

“We ask the Sudhammā deva, having made our hands in añjali separately;
Having done what deed as a human, does one attain Sudhammā?” – he asked again;

980.

980.

‘‘Ucchāgāraṃ tiṇāgāraṃ, vatthāgārañca yo dade;

"A dwelling of thatch, a store of cloth, a granary—giving one of these, one goes to Sudhamma." – He further explained;

976.Tatthatūriyatāḷitanigghosoti tāḷitapañcaṅgitadibbatūriyanigghoso attānaṃ uddissa pavajjamānadibbatūriyasaddo.Antalikkhe mahīyatīti ākāse ṭhatvā ākāsaṭṭheneva mahatā parivārena pūjīyati.

976. Here, tūriyatāḷitanigghoso means the sound of the divine instruments with five parts being played, the sound of divine instruments proceeding towards himself; antalikkhe mahīyatī means standing in the sky, he is honored by a large retinue, as if by those dwelling in the sky.

977.Devatānusīti devatā nu asi, kiṃ nu tvaṃ devosīti attho.Gandhabboti gandhabbakāyikadevo asīti attho.Adu sakko purindadoti udāhu pure dadātīti ‘‘purindado’’ti vissuto sakko nusi, atha sakko devarājā asīti attho. Ettha ca satipi sakkagandhabbānaṃ devabhāve tesaṃ visuṃ gahitattā gobalibaddhañāyena tadaññadevavācako devasaddo daṭṭhabbo.

977. Devatā nusi means, are you a deity? Are you a deva? Gandhabbo means, are you a Gandhabba-bodied deva? Adu sakko purindado means, or are you Sakka, renowned as "Purindada," giver of cities? Or are you Sakka, the king of devas? And here, even though Sakka and the Gandhabba are devas, because they are mentioned separately, the word deva should be understood to refer to other devas, according to the rule of gobalivadda (two oxen yoked together).

978.Atha devaputto ‘‘vissajjanaṃ nāma pucchāsabhāgena hotī’’ti tehi pucchitaṃ devagandhabbasakkabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipitvā attānaṃ ācikkhanto ‘‘namhi devo na gandhabbo’’tiādimāha. Tatthanamhi devoti tayā āsaṅkito yo koci devo na homi na gandhabbo na sakko, apica khosudhammā nāma ye devā, tesaṃ aññataro ahaṃ,sudhammā devatā nāma tāvatiṃsadevanikāyasseva aññataradevanikāyo. So kira ucchupālo tesaṃ devānaṃ sampattiṃ sutvā pageva tattha cittaṃ paṇidhāya ṭhitoti keci vadanti.

978. Then the devaputta, rejecting the state of being a deva, gandhabba, or Sakka, which had been asked of him, declaring himself, said, "Namhi devo na gandhabbo," etc., thinking that "a reply should be given according to the nature of the question." Here, namhi devo means, I am not any deva you suspect, not a gandhabba, not Sakka. But indeed, sudhammā nāma ye devā, tesaṃ aññataro ahaṃ, Sudhamma devas are one particular group of the Tāvatiṃsa deva community. Some say that Uccupāla, having heard of the prosperity of these devas, had his mind set on being reborn there.

979.Puthunti mahantaṃ, paripuṇṇaṃ katvāti attho. Sakkaccakiriyādīpanatthañhetaṃ vuttaṃ.

979. Puthunti means having made it large, complete. This was said to indicate the act of doing it respectfully.

980.Sudhammādevayānaṃ puṭṭho devaputto kakaṇṭakanimittaṃ vadanto viya diṭṭhamattameva gahetvā attanā katapuññaṃ ācikkhanto‘‘ucchāgāra’’nti gāthamāha. Tatthatiṇṇaṃ aññataraṃ datvāti yadipi mayā tīṇi agārāni dinnāni, tīsu pana aññatarenāti ayamatthopi sijjhatīti nayaggāhena devaputto evamāha. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.

980. The devaputta, questioned about the vehicle of the Sudhamma devas, as if pointing out a kakaṇṭaka mark, after perceiving it, speaking of the merit done by himself, spoke the verse ‘‘ucchāgāra’’. There, tiṇṇaṃ aññataraṃ datvā means, even though I gave three dwellings, the meaning that it was through one of the three is also accomplished. Thus, the devaputta spoke in this way, skillfully. The rest is easy to understand.

Evaṃ so tena pucchi tamatthaṃ vissajjetvā ratanattayaguṇaṃ pakāsento mātāpitūhi saddhiṃ sammodanaṃ katvā devalokameva gato. Manussā devaputtassa vacanaṃ sutvā bhagavati bhikkhusaṅghe ca sañjātapasādabahumānā bahuṃ dānūpakaraṇaṃ sajjetvā sakaṭānaṃ pūretvā veḷuvanaṃ gantvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā satthu taṃ pavattiṃ ārocayiṃsu. Satthā taṃ pucchāvissajjanaṃ tatheva vatvā tameva atthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā vitthārena dhammaṃ desetvā te saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpesi. Te ca patiṭṭhitasaddhā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā attano gāmaṃ upagantvā ucchupālassa mataṭṭhāne vihāraṃ kārayiṃsūti.

In this way, he, having explained that matter to him who asked, revealing the qualities of the Triple Gem, having rejoiced together with his parents, went to the deva world. The humans, having heard the words of the devaputta, with increased faith and respect arisen in the Blessed One and the Sangha of monks, prepared many alms-giving items, loaded them onto carts, went to Veḷuvana, gave a great donation to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha, and announced that occurrence to the Teacher. The Teacher, having spoken of that questioning and answering just as it was, having made that same matter the occasion for a discourse, extensively taught the Dhamma, and established them in the refuges and the precepts. And they, with faith established, having paid homage to the Blessed One, having approached their own village, constructed a monastery at the place where Uccupāla died.

Tatiyanāgavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Third Nāga-vimāna is finished.

13. Cūḷarathavimānavaṇṇanā
13. Cūḷarathavimānavaṇṇanā

Daḷhadhammānisārassāti cūḷarathavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati parinibbute dhātuvibhāgaṃ katvā tattha tattha satthu thūpesu patiṭṭhāpiyamānesu mahākassapattherappamukhesu dhammaṃ saṅgāyituṃ uccinitvā gahitesu sāvakesu yāva vassūpagamanā veneyyāpekkhāya attano attano parisāya saddhiṃ tattha tattha vasantesu āyasmā mahākaccāyano paccantadese aññatarasmiṃ araññāyatane viharati. Tena samayena assakaraṭṭhe potalinagare assakarājā rajjaṃ kāreti, tassa jeṭṭhāya deviyā putto sujāto nāma kumāro soḷasavassuddesiko kaniṭṭhāya deviyā nibandhanena pitarā raṭṭhato pabbājito araññaṃ pavisitvā vanacarake nissāya araññe vasati. So kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane pabbajitvā sīlamatte patiṭṭhito puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu nibbattitvā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā aparāparaṃ sugatiyaṃyeva paribbhamanto imasmiṃ buddhuppāde bhagavato abhisambodhito tiṃsavasse assakaraṭṭhe assakarañño aggamahesiyā kucchismiṃ nibbatti, ‘‘sujāto’’tissa nāmaṃ ahosi. So mahantena parivārena vaḍḍhati.

Daḷhadhammā nisārassāti is the Cūḷarathavimāna. What is its origin? After the Parinibbāna of the Blessed One, when the distribution of relics was done, and stūpas for the Teacher were being established in various places, and when the disciples headed by Mahākassapa Thera had picked out those to be taught the Dhamma and taken them, while dwelling here and there with their own groups awaiting the rains, Āyasmā Mahākaccāyana was dwelling in a certain forest abode in a border country. At that time, the Assaka king was ruling in Potalinagara in the Assaka country, and his eldest queen's son, named Sujāta Kumāra, about sixteen years old, was banished from the kingdom by his father due to the insistence of the younger queen, and having entered the forest, relying on forest dwellers, he lived in the forest. It is said that he, having gone forth in the dispensation of Kassapa Bhagavā, having established himself in mere morality, having done a commoner's death, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa, and having stayed there as long as life lasted, wandering only in good destinations one after another, in this Buddha-era, in the thirtieth year after the enlightenment of the Blessed One, he was born in the womb of the chief queen of the Assaka king in the Assaka country, and his name was "Sujāta." He grows up with a large retinue.

Tassa pana mātari kālakatāya rājā aññaṃ rājadhītaraṃ aggamahesiṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. Sāpi aparena samayena puttaṃ vijāyi. Tassā rājā puttaṃ disvā pasanno ‘‘bhadde, tayā icchitaṃ varaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti varaṃ adāsi. Sā gahitakaṃ katvā ṭhapetvā yadā sujātakumāro soḷasavassuddesiko jāto, tadā rājānaṃ āha ‘‘deva, tumhehi mama puttaṃ disvā tuṭṭhacittehi varo dinno, taṃ idāni dethā’’ti. ‘‘Gaṇha, devī’’ti. ‘‘Mayhaṃ puttassa rajjaṃ dethā’’ti. ‘‘Nassa, vasali, mama jeṭṭhaputte devakumārasadise sujātakumāre ṭhite kasmā evaṃ vadasī’’ti paṭikkhipi. Devī punappunaṃ nibandhanaṃ karontī manaṃ alabhitvā ekadivasaṃ āha ‘‘deva, yadi sacce tiṭṭhasi, dehi evā’’ti. Rājā ‘‘anupadhāretvā mayā imissā varo dinno, ayañca evaṃ vadatī’’ti vippaṭisārī hutvā sujātakumāraṃ pakkositvā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā assūni pavattesi. Kumāro pitaraṃ socamānaṃ disvā domanassappatto assūni pavattetvā ‘‘anujānāhi, deva, ahaṃ aññattha gamissāmī’’ti āha. Taṃ sutvā raññā ‘‘aññaṃ te nagaraṃ māpessāmi, tattha vaseyyāsī’’ti vutte kumāro na icchi. ‘‘Mama sahāyānaṃ rājūnaṃ santike pesessāmī’’ti ca vutte tampi nānujāni. Kevalaṃ ‘‘deva, araññaṃ gamissāmī’’ti āha. Rājā puttaṃ āliṅgitvā sīse cumbitvā ‘‘mamaccayena idhāgantvā rajje patiṭṭhahā’’ti vatvā vissajjesi.

However, with his mother having died, the king placed another king's daughter in the position of chief queen. She too, after some time, gave birth to a son. Seeing her son, the king, pleased, gave her a boon, saying, "My dear, take a boon you desire." She kept it held back, and when Sujāta Kumāra was about sixteen years old, she said to the king, "Lord, you gave me a boon when you were pleased to see my son, now give it." "Take it, queen." "Give my son the kingdom." "No, you wretch, with my eldest son Sujāta Kumāra, like a deva-child, still here, why do you say such a thing?" he refused. The queen, repeatedly insisting, not getting her way, one day said, "Lord, if you stand by the truth, then give it." The king, thinking, "Without considering, I gave this woman a boon, and she says this," regretting it, having summoned Sujāta Kumāra, announced the matter to him and shed tears. Seeing his father grieving, the Kumāra, afflicted with sadness, shedding tears, said, "Permit me, Lord, I will go elsewhere." Hearing that, when the king said, "I will have another city built for you, live there," the Kumāra did not want it. And when he said, "I will send you to my friend kings," he did not approve of that either. He only said, "Lord, I will go to the forest." The king, having embraced his son, having kissed him on the head, having said, "After my death, come here and be established in the kingdom," released him.

So araññaṃ pavisitvā vanacarake nissāya vasanto ekadivasaṃ migavaṃ gato. Tassa samaṇakāle sahāyavaro eko devaputto hitesitāya migarūpena taṃ palobhento dhāvitvā āyasmato mahākaccāyanassa vasanaṭṭhānasamīpaṃ patvā antaradhāyi. So ‘‘imaṃ migaṃ idāni gaṇhissāmī’’ti upadhāvanto therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ patvā taṃ apassanto bahi paṇṇasālāya theraṃ nisinnaṃ disvā tassa samīpe cāpakoṭiṃ olubbha aṭṭhāsi. Thero taṃ oloketvā ādito paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ tassa pavattiṃ ñatvā anuggaṇhanto ajānanto viya saṅgahaṃ karonto –

He, having entered the forest, while living relying on foresters, one day went hunting. A deva-child, a beloved friend from his time as a samaṇa, desiring his welfare, in the form of a deer, enticing him, running, reaching near the dwelling place of Āyasmā Mahākaccāyana, disappeared. He, thinking, "I will catch this deer now," running, reaching the dwelling place of the Thera, not seeing it, seeing the Thera sitting outside the leaf hut, stood near him, holding the tip of his bow. The Thera, looking at him, knowing all of his story from the beginning, approving, as if not knowing, making a friendly greeting –

981.

981.

‘‘Daḷhadhammā nisārassa, dhanuṃ olubbha tiṭṭhasi;

"With bow held firm, you stand,
Of what king are you a warrior, or a hunter of the woods?" –

daḷhadhammāti daḷhadhanu. Daḷhadhanu nāma dvisahassathāmaṃ vuccati. Dvisahassathāmanti ca yassa āropitassa jiyāya baddho lohasīsādīnaṃ bhāro daṇḍe gahetvā yāva kaṇḍappamāṇā ukkhittassa pathavito muccati.Nisārassāti niratisayasārassa visiṭṭhasārassa rukkhassa dhanuṃ, sāratararukkhamayaṃ dhanunti attho.Olubbhāti sannirumbhitvā.Rājaññoti rājakumāro.Vanecaroti vanacaro.

daḷhadhammāti means a strong bow. A strong bow is said to be two thousand in strength. Two thousand in strength means that when its string is pulled taut, the weight of iron, lead, etc., attached to the string, when lifted up to the measure of an arrow, is released from the ground. Nisārassāti means a bow of exceedingly strong wood, a bow made of the best wood. Olubbhāti means holding firmly. Rājaññoti means a prince. Vanecaroti means a forest dweller.

Atha so attānaṃ āvikaronto –

Then he, revealing himself –

982.

982.

‘‘Assakādhipatissāhaṃ, bhante putto vanecaro;

"I am the son, venerable sir, of the lord of Assaka, a dweller in the woods;
My name, bhikkhu, I tell you, they know me as Sujāta.

983.

983.

‘‘Mige gavesamānohaṃ, ogāhanto brahāvanaṃ;

"Seeking deer, I plunged into the great forest;
That deer I did not see, but seeing you, I stood still." –

assakādhipatissāti assakaraṭṭhādhipatino assakarājassa.Bhikkhūti theraṃ ālapati.Mige gavesamānoti migasūkarādike gavesanto, migavaṃ carantoti attho.

assakādhipatissāti means of the lord of the Assaka country, of the Assaka king. Bhikkhūti means he addresses the Thera. Mige gavesamānoti means seeking deer, boar, etc., meaning wandering as a hunter.

Taṃ sutvā thero tena saddhiṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karonto –

Hearing that, the Thera, making a friendly greeting with him –

984.

984.

‘‘Svāgataṃ te mahāpuñña, atho te adurāgataṃ;

"Welcome to you, great merit, and not unwelcome is your coming;
Taking water from here, wash your feet.

985.

985.

‘‘Idampi pānīyaṃ sītaṃ, ābhataṃ girigabbharā;

"This water too is cool, brought from a mountain cave;
Prince, having drunk it, sit down on the spread." – he said;

984.Tatthaadurāgatanti durāgamanavajjitaṃ, mahāpuñña, te idhāgamanaṃ svāgataṃ, na te appakampi durāgamanaṃ atthi tuyhañca mayhañca pītisomanassajananatoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Adhunāgata’’ntipi pāṭho, idāni āgamananti attho.

984. There, adurāgatanti means without unwelcome arrival; great merit, your coming here is welcome, there is not even a little unwelcome coming for you, and it is the cause of generating joy and happiness for both you and me, is the intention. "Adhunāgata" is also a reading, meaning arrival just now.

985.Santhatasmiṃ upāvisāti anantarahitāya bhūmiyā anisīditvā amukasmiṃ tiṇasanthārake nisīdāti.

985. Santhatasmiṃ upāvisāti means, do not sit on the bare ground, sit on such-and-such a grass spread.

Tato rājakumāro therassa paṭisanthāraṃ sampaṭicchanto āha –

Then the prince, accepting the friendly greeting of the Thera, said –

986.

986.

‘‘Kalyāṇī vata te vācā, savanīyā mahāmuni;

"Lovely indeed is your speech, worthy to be heard, great sage;
Pure, meaningful, sweet, pondering, you speak the meaning.

987.

987.

‘‘Kā te rati vane viharato, isinisabha vadehi puṭṭho;

"What is your delight, dwelling in the forest, best of seers, tell me when asked;
Having heard your word-path, we would practice the meaning-Dhamma-path."

986.Tatthakalyāṇīti sundarā sobhanā.Savanīyāti sotuṃ yuttā.Nelāti niddosā.Atthavatīti atthayuttā diṭṭhadhammikādinā hitena upetā.Vaggūti madhurā.Mantvāti jānitvā paññāya paricchinditvā.Atthanti atthato anapetaṃ ekantahitāvahaṃ.

986. There, kalyāṇīti means beautiful, lovely. Savanīyāti means fit to be heard. Nelāti means without fault. Atthavatīti means endowed with meaning, endowed with benefit by visible Dhamma, etc. Vaggūti means sweet. Mantvāti means having known, having ascertained with wisdom. Atthanti means not deviating from the meaning, causing only benefit.

987.Isinisabhāti isīsu nisabha ājānīyasadisa.Vacanapathanti vacanaṃ. Vacanameva hi atthādhigamassa upāyabhāvato ‘‘vacanapatha’’nti vuttaṃ.Atthadhammapadaṃsamācaremaseti idha ceva samparāye ca atthāvahaṃ sīlādidhammakoṭṭhāsaṃ paṭipajjāmase.

987. Isinisabhāti means a noble one among seers, like a thoroughbred. Vacanapathanti means a word. The word itself is the means of attaining meaning, therefore it is called "vacanapatha". Atthadhammapadaṃ samācaremaseti means here and in the future we would practice the section of Dhamma, such as morality, which brings benefit.

Idāni thero attano sammāpaṭipattiṃ tassa anucchavikaṃ vadanto –

Now the Thera, speaking of his own right practice befitting him –

988.

988.

‘‘Ahiṃsā sabbapāṇīnaṃ, kumāramhāka ruccati;

"Non-harming of all beings, is pleasing to us from our youth;
Abstaining from theft and misconduct, and from intoxicants.

989.

989.

‘‘Ārati samacariyā ca, bāhusaccaṃ kataññutā;

"Abstaining and even conduct, great learning, gratitude;
Praiseworthy in the visible Dhamma, these dhammas are praised." – he said;

989.Tatthaārati samacariyā cāti yathāvuttā ca pāpadhammato ārati, paṭivirati kāyasamatādisamacariyā ca.Bāhusaccanti pariyattibāhusaccaṃ.Kataññutāti parehi attano katassa upakārassa jānanā.Pāsaṃsāti atthakāmehi kulaputtehi pakārato āsaṃsitabbā.Dhammā eteti ete yathāvuttā ahiṃsādidhammā.Pasaṃsiyāti viññūhi pasaṃsitabbā.

989. There, ārati samacariyā cāti means abstaining, refraining from bad dhammas as stated, and even conduct such as physical equanimity. Bāhusaccanti means great learning of the scriptures. Kataññutāti means knowing the benefit done to oneself by others. Pāsaṃsāti means desirable to be hoped for by clan sons who desire benefit. Dhammā eteti means these dhammas as stated, non-harming, etc. Pasaṃsiyāti means to be praised by the wise.

Evaṃ thero tassa anucchavikaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ vatvā anāgataṃsañāṇena āyusaṅkhāre olokento ‘‘pañcamāsamattamevā’’ti disvā taṃ saṃvejetvā daḷhaṃ tattha sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetuṃ imaṃ gāthamāha –

Thus, the Thera, having spoken of his own right practice befitting him, looking at the life force with knowledge of the future, seeing that it was "only five months," in order to stir him up and firmly establish him in right practice, spoke this verse –

990.

990.

‘‘Santike maraṇaṃ tuyhaṃ, oraṃ māsehi pañcahi;

"Death is near for you, within five months;
Prince, know it well, free yourself."

attānaṃ parimocayāti attānaṃ apāyadukkhato mocehi.

attānaṃ parimocayāti means release yourself from the suffering of the lower realms.

Tato kumāro attano muttiyā upāyaṃ pucchanto āha –

Then the Kumāra, asking for the means of his own liberation, said –

991.

991.

‘‘Katamaṃ svāhaṃ janapadaṃ gantvā, kiṃ kammaṃ kiñca porisaṃ;

"To what country shall I go, what deed, what manly effort,
By what power or knowledge, might I become free from aging and death?"

katamaṃ svāhanti katamaṃ su ahaṃ, katamaṃ nūti attho.Kiṃ kammaṃ kiñca porisanti katvāti vacanaseso.Porisanti purisakiccaṃ.

katamaṃ svāhanti katamaṃ su ahaṃ, means which indeed I am, what indeed. Kiṃ kammaṃ kiñca porisanti means with "having done" remaining understood. Porisanti means a man's task.

Tato thero tassa dhammaṃ desetuṃ imā gāthāyo avoca –

Then the Thera, in order to teach him the Dhamma, spoke these verses –

992.

992.

‘‘Na vijjate so padeso, kammaṃ vijjā ca porisaṃ;

"There is no place to be found, nor deed, nor knowledge, nor manly effort,
Where having gone, a mortal, prince, might become free from aging and death.

993.

993.

‘‘Mahaddhanā mahābhogā, raṭṭhavantopi khattiyā;

"Even wealthy ones, of great possessions, khattiyas possessing a kingdom,
Abundant in wealth and grain, even they are not free from aging and death.

994.

994.

‘‘Yadi te sutā andhakaveṇḍuputtā, sūrā vīrā vikkantappahārino;

"If you have heard of the Andhakaveṇḍu sons, heroes, valiant, of powerful attack,
Even they reached the end of their life, broken up, like the eternal.

995.

995.

‘‘Khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā, suddā caṇḍālapukkusā;

"Khattiyas, brahmins, vessas, suddas, caṇḍālas, pukkusas,
These and others by birth, even they are not free from aging and death.

996.

996.

‘‘Ye mantaṃ parivattenti, chaḷaṅgaṃ brahmacintitaṃ;

"Those who recite the mantras, the six-limbed brahmacintita,
These and others by knowledge, even they are not free from aging and death.

997.

997.

‘‘Isayo cāpi ye santā, saññatattā tapassino;

"Even those isis who are peaceful, self-controlled, ascetics,
In time even those ascetics abandon their bodies.

998.

998.

‘‘Bhāvitattāpi arahanto, katakiccā anāsavā;

"Even Arahants, who have cultivated themselves, done their duty, and are without defilements,
Lay down this body, through the exhaustion of merit and demerit."

992.Tatthayattha gantvāti yaṃ padesaṃ gantvā kammaṃ vijjaṃ porisañca kāyapayogena itarapayogena ca upagantvā pāpuṇitvā bhaveyya ajarāmaroti attho.

992.Here, yattha gantvā means to which place having gone, and having approached and attained through bodily exertion, or other exertion, in terms of action, knowledge, and manly effort, one might become free from old age and death.

993.Heṭṭhimakoṭiyā koṭisatādiparimāṇaṃ saṃharitvā ṭhapitaṃ mahantaṃ dhanaṃ etesantimahaddhanā. Kumbhattayādikahāpaṇaparibbayo mahanto bhogo etesantimahābhogā. Raṭṭhavantoti raṭṭhasāmikā, anekayojanaparimāṇaṃ raṭṭhaṃ pasāsantāti adhippāyo.Khattiyāti khattiyajātikā.Pahūtadhanadhaññāseti mahādhanadhaññasannicayā, attano parisāya ca sattaṭṭhasaṃvaccharapahonakadhanadhaññasannicayā.Tepi no ajarāmarāti jarāmaraṇadhammā eva, mahaddhanatādīnipi tesaṃ upari nipatantaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ nivattetuṃ na sakkontīti attho.

993.Those who have a great amount of wealth, which is collected and stored, amounting to hundreds of millions at the lowest estimate, are mahaddhanā. Those who have great possessions, spending kahāpaṇas in groups of three or more, are mahābhogā. Raṭṭhavanto means lords of the realm, the intent being that they govern a realm of many yojanas. Khattiyā means those of the Khattiya (warrior) caste. Pahūtadhanadhaññāse means having a great accumulation of wealth and grain, an accumulation of wealth and grain sufficient for their retinue for seven or eight years. Tepi no ajarāmarā means they are still subject to old age and death; even having great wealth etc., cannot prevent old age and death from befalling them.

994.Andhakaveṇḍuputtāti andhakaveṇḍussa puttāti paññātā.Sūrāti sattimanto.Vīrāti vīriyavanto.Vikkantappahārinoti sūravīrabhāveneva paṭisattubalaṃ vikkamma pasayha paharaṇasīlā.Viddhastāti vinaṭṭhā.Sassatīsamāti kulaparamparāya sassatīhi candasūriyādīhi samānā, tepi acirakālapavattakulanvayāti attho.

994.Andhakaveṇḍuputtā means those known as the sons of Andhakaveṇḍu. Sūrā means powerful. Vīrā means courageous. Vikkantappahārino means those who, through their power and courage, aggressively strike and overcome the strength of their enemies. Viddhastā means destroyed. Sassatīsamā means equal to the perpetual entities such as the moon and sun, in terms of their lineage; the intent is those whose lineage has existed for only a short time.

995.Jātiyāti attano jātiyā, visiṭṭhatarā pana jātipi nesaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ nivattetuṃ na sakkotīti attho.

995.Jātiyā means by their own birth; however, even a more distinguished birth cannot prevent old age and death from befalling them.

996.Mantanti vedaṃ.Chaḷaṅganti kappabyākaraṇaniruttisikkhāchandovicitijotisatthasaṅkhātehi chahi aṅgehi chaḷaṅgaṃ.Brahmacintitanti brahmehi aṭṭhakādīhi cintitaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ.

996.Manta means the Vedas. Chaḷaṅga means complete with the six limbs, namely: Kappa (ritual), Vyākaraṇa (grammar), Nirutti (etymology), Sikkhā (phonetics), Chando-viciti (prosody), and Jyotisattha (astronomy). Brahmacintita means contemplated by Brahmās, seen with the eye of wisdom.

997.Santāti upasantakāyavacīkammantā.Saññatattāti saññatacittā.Tapassinoti tapanissitā.

997.Santā means those whose actions of body and speech are peaceful. Saññatattā means those whose minds are restrained. Tapassino means those devoted to austerity.

Idāni kumāro attanā kattabbaṃ vadanto –

Now, the prince, stating what should be done by himself, says:

999.

999.

‘‘Subhāsitā atthavatī, gāthāyo te mahāmuni;

"Well-spoken and meaningful are your verses, Great Sage;
I am convinced by your good speech, and you be my refuge."

nijjhattomhīti nijjhāpito dhammojasaññāya saññattigato amhi.Subhaṭṭhenāti suṭṭhu bhāsitena.

Nijjhattomhi means I am in a state of being convinced, having perceived the essence of the Dhamma. Subhaṭṭhenā means by what is well-spoken.

Tato thero taṃ anusāsanto imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –

Then, the Elder, instructing him, spoke this verse:

1000.

1000.

‘‘Mā maṃ tvaṃ saraṇaṃ gaccha, tameva saraṇaṃ vaja;

"Do not go to me for refuge, go to Him for refuge;
To the Sakyan's son, the Great Hero, to whom I have gone for refuge."

Tato rājakumāro āha –

Then the prince said:

1001.

1001.

‘‘Katarasmiṃ so janapade, satthā tumhāka mārisa;

"In which country is your Teacher, Venerable Sir?
I too will go to see the Jina, the Incomparable One."

Puna thero āha –

Again, the Elder said:

1002.

1002.

‘‘Puratthimasmiṃ janapade, okkākakulasambhavo;

"In the eastern country, born of the Okkāka lineage;
There was a noble being, and he has passed away."

‘‘puratthimasmiṃ janapade’’ti.

‘‘puratthimasmiṃ janapade’’.

Evaṃ so rājaputto therassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā pasannamānaso saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhahi. Tena vuttaṃ –

Thus, having heard the Elder's teaching of the Dhamma, the prince, with a serene mind, became established in the refuges and precepts. Therefore, it was said:

1003.

1003.

‘‘Sace hi buddho tiṭṭheyya, satthā tumhāka mārisa;

"If the Buddha were still living, your Teacher, Venerable Sir;
I would travel thousands of yojanas to attend upon him.

1004.

1004.

‘‘Yato ca kho parinibbuto, satthā tumhāka mārisa;

"Since your Teacher has passed away, Venerable Sir;
Even though passed away, I go to the Great Hero for refuge.

1005.

1005.

‘‘Upemi saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammañcāpi anuttaraṃ;

"I go to the Buddha for refuge, and also to the unsurpassed Dhamma;
And to the Sangha of the Lord of Men, I go for refuge.

1006.

1006.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramāmi khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayāmi;

"I abstain from taking life quickly, I avoid taking what is not given in the world;
I am not an alcoholic, nor do I speak falsely, and I am content with my own wife."

Evaṃ pana taṃ saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhitaṃ thero evamāha ‘‘rājakumāra, tuyhaṃ idha araññavāsena attho natthi, na ciraṃ tava jīvitaṃ, pañcamāsabbhantare eva kālaṃ karissasi, tasmā tava pitu santikameva gantvā dānādīni puññāni katvā saggaparāyaṇo bhaveyyāsī’’ti vatvā attano santike dhātuyo datvā vissajjesi. So gacchanto ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, tumhākaṃ vacanena ito gamissāmi, tumhehipi mayhaṃ anukampāya tattha āgantabba’’nti vatvā therassa adhivāsanaṃ viditvā vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pitu nagaraṃ gantvā uyyānaṃ pavisitvā attano āgatabhāvaṃ rañño nivedesi.

Thus, the Elder, seeing him established in the refuges and precepts, said, "Prince, there is no benefit for you in living here in the forest. Your life will not last long; within five months, you will pass away. Therefore, go to your father, perform meritorious deeds such as giving, and aspire to heaven." Having said this, he gave him relics and dismissed him. As he was leaving, he said, "Venerable Sir, at your word, I will depart from here, and out of compassion for me, you should come there too." Having understood the Elder's acceptance, he paid homage, circumambulated him, went to his father's city, entered the park, and informed the king of his arrival.

Taṃ sutvā rājā saparivāro uyyānaṃ gantvā kumāraṃ āliṅgitvā antepuraṃ netvā abhisiñcitukāmo ahosi. Kumāro ‘‘deva, mayhaṃ appakaṃ āyu, ito catunnaṃ māsānaṃ accayena maraṇaṃ bhavissati, kiṃ me rajjena, tumhe nissāya puññameva karissāmī’’ti vatvā therassa guṇaṃ ratanattayassa ca ānubhāvaṃ pavedesi. Taṃ sutvā rājā saṃvegappatto ratanattaye ca there ca pasannamānaso mahantaṃ vihāraṃ kāretvā mahākaccāyanattherassa santike dūtaṃ pāhesi. Theropi rājānaṃ mahājanañca anuggaṇhanto āgacchi. Rājā ca saparivāro dūratova paccuggamanaṃ katvā theraṃ vihāraṃ pavesetvā catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahanto saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhahi. Kumāro ca sīlāni samādiyitvā theraṃ bhikkhū ceva sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahanto dānāni dadanto dhammaṃ suṇanto catunnaṃ māsānaṃ accayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Tassa puññānubhāvena sattaratanapaṭimaṇḍito sattayojanappamāṇo ratho uppajji, anekāni cassa accharāsahassāni parivāro ahosi.

Hearing this, the king, with his retinue, went to the park, embraced the prince, brought him into the inner chambers, and wished to anoint him. The prince said, "Sire, my life is short; after four months, death will occur. What is the use of kingship to me? I will perform meritorious deeds relying on you." And he declared the virtues of the Elder and the power of the Triple Gem. Hearing this, the king, filled with religious emotion, with a serene mind towards the Triple Gem and the Elder, had a great monastery built and sent a messenger to Mahākaccāyana Thera. The Elder, showing favor to the king and the great assembly, arrived. The king, with his retinue, went to meet him from afar, brought the Elder into the monastery, attended to him respectfully with the four requisites, and became established in the refuges and precepts. The prince, undertaking the precepts, attending to the Elder and the monks respectfully, giving alms, and listening to the Dhamma, after four months, passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Due to the power of his merit, a chariot adorned with the seven jewels, measuring seven yojanas, appeared, and thousands of celestial nymphs became his retinue.

Rājā kumārassa sarīrasakkāraṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghassa ca mahādānaṃ pavattetvā cetiyassa pūjaṃ akāsi, tattha mahājano sannipati, theropi saparivāro taṃ padesaṃ upagañchi. Atha devaputto attanā katakusalakammaṃ oloketvā kataññutāya ‘‘gantvā theraṃ vandissāmi, sāsanaguṇe ca pākaṭe karissāmī’’ti cintetvā dibbarathaṃ āruyha mahatā parivārena dissamānarūpo āgantvā rathā oruyha therassa pāde vanditvā pitarā saddhiṃ paṭisanthāraṃ katvā theraṃ payirupāsamāno añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ thero imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

The king, having performed the funeral rites for the prince, offered a great alms-giving to the Sangha and made offerings to the stupa. A great crowd gathered there, and the Elder, with his retinue, approached that place. Then the deva-son, reflecting on the meritorious deeds he had done, thinking out of gratitude, "I will go and pay homage to the Elder and make known the virtues of the Teaching," mounted his divine chariot, and with a great retinue, appearing in visible form, he came, descended from the chariot, bowed at the Elder's feet, exchanged greetings with his father, stood respectfully with hands folded in reverence, attending to the Elder. The Elder asked him with these verses:

1007.

1007.

‘‘Sahassaraṃsīva yathāmahappabho, disaṃ yathā bhāti nabhe anukkamaṃ;

"Like the thousand-rayed sun, with great radiance, shines in the sky in due course;
So too, this great chariot of yours, is extended seven yojanas all around.

1008.

1008.

‘‘Suvaṇṇapaṭṭehi samantamotthaṭo, urassa muttāhi maṇīhi cittito;

"Covered all around with golden plates, its chest adorned with pearls and jewels;
Lines of gold and silver, beautifully crafted, adorn it with beryl.

1009.

1009.

‘‘Sīsañcidaṃ veḷuriyassa nimmitaṃ, yugañcidaṃ lohitakāya cittitaṃ;

"Its head is made of beryl, its yoke adorned with red gold;
Harnesses of gold and silver, and these swift horses, shine forth.

1010.

1010.

‘‘So tiṭṭhasi hemarathe adhiṭṭhito, devānamindova sahassavāhano;

"You stand upon the golden chariot, like the lord of devas with a thousand vehicles;
I ask you, O famous and skilled one, how did you obtain this splendor?"

1007.Tatthasahassaraṃsīti sūriyo. So hi anekasahassaraṃsimantatāya ‘‘sahassaraṃsī’’ti vuccati.Yathāmahappabhoti attano mahattassa anurūpappabho. Yathā hi mahattena sūriyamaṇḍalena sadisaṃ jotimaṇḍalaṃ natthi, evaṃ pabhāyapi. Tathā hi taṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe tīsu mahādīpesu ālokaṃ pharantaṃ tiṭṭhati.Disaṃ yathā bhāti nabhe anukkamanti nabhe ākāse yatheva disaṃ anukkamanto gacchanto yathā yena pakārena bhāti dibbati jotati.Tathāpakāroti tādisākāro.Tavāyanti tava ayaṃ.

1007.Here, sahassaraṃsī means the sun. It is called "thousand-rayed" because it possesses countless rays. Yathāmahappabho means having radiance befitting its greatness. Just as there is no radiant orb equal to the great solar orb, so too with its radiance. For it stands spreading light in three great continents in a single moment. Disaṃ yathā bhāti nabhe anukkama means how it shines and illuminates in the sky, gradually moving across the directions. Tathāpakāro means of such a form. Tavāya means this of yours.

1008.Suvaṇṇapaṭṭehīti suvaṇṇamayehi paṭṭehi.Samantamotthaṭosamantato chādito.Urassāti uro assa, rathassa uroti ca īsāmūlaṃ vadati.Lekhāti veḷuriyamayā mālākammalatākammādilekhā. Tāsaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭesu ca rajatapaṭṭesu ca dissamānattā vuttaṃ‘‘suvaṇṇassa ca rūpiyassa cā’’ti.Sobhentīti rathaṃ sobhayanti.

1008.Suvaṇṇapaṭṭehī means with golden plates. Samantamotthaṭo means covered all around. Urassā means the chest of it, the base of the pole is called the chest of the chariot. Lekhā means lines of beryl, such as garlands, creeper designs, and decorative lines. Because they are visible on the gold and silver plates, it is said ‘‘suvaṇṇassa ca rūpiyassa cā’’. Sobhentī means they adorn the chariot.

1009.Sīsanti rathakubbarasīsaṃ.Veḷuriyassa nimmitanti veḷuriyena nimmitaṃ, veḷuriyamaṇimayanti attho.Lohitakāyāti lohitakamaṇinā, yena kenaci rattamaṇinā vā.Yuttāti yojitā, atha vāyottā suvaṇṇassa ca rūpiyassa cāti suvaṇṇamayā ca rūpiyamayā ca yottā, saṅkhalikāti attho.

1009.Sīsa means the head of the chariot's axle. Veḷuriyassa nimmita means made of beryl, made of beryl gems. Lohitakāyā means with red gold, or with some kind of red gem. Yuttā means yoked; alternatively, yottā suvaṇṇassa ca rūpiyassa cā means yokes of gold and silver, meaning chains.

1010.Adhiṭṭhitoti attano deviddhiyā sakalamidaṃ ṭhānaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito.Sahassavāhanoti sahassayuttavāhano, sahassaājānīyayuttaratho devānamindo yathāti adhippāyo.Yasavantāti ālapanaṃ, yasassīti attho.Kovidanti kusalañāṇavantaṃ, rathārohane vā chekaṃ.Ayaṃ uḷāroti ayaṃ uḷāro mahanto yasoti adhippāyo.

1010.Adhiṭṭhito means standing having overcome this entire place with his divine power. Sahassavāhano means having a thousand yoked vehicles, like the lord of devas with a thousand thoroughbreds. Yasavantā is a vocative, meaning famous. Kovida means skilled in knowledge, or clever in mounting the chariot. Ayaṃ uḷāro means this splendid greatness.

Evaṃ therena puṭṭho devaputto imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

Thus, questioned by the Elder, the deva-son explained with these verses:

1011.

1011.

‘‘Sujāto nāmahaṃ bhante, rājaputto pure ahuṃ;

"Sujāta by name, Venerable Sir, I was formerly a prince;
And you, out of compassion for me, established me in restraint.

1012.

1012.

‘‘Khīṇāyukañca maṃ ñatvā, sarīraṃ pādāsi satthuno;

"Knowing me to be of dwindling lifespan, you gave a relic of the Teacher;
'Worship this, Sujāta, it will be for your benefit.'

1013.

1013.

‘‘Tāhaṃ gandhehi mālehi, pūjayitvā samuyyuto;

"Then I, having worshiped with scents and garlands, well composed;
Having abandoned the human body, have arisen in Nandana.

1014.

1014.

‘‘Nandane ca vane ramme, nānādijagaṇāyute;

"In Nandana, a delightful grove, filled with various flocks of birds;
I rejoice with dances and songs, attended by nymphs."

1012-3.Tatthasarīrantī sarīradhātuṃ.Hehitīti bhavissati.Samuyyutoti sammā uyyutto, yuttappayuttoti attho.

1012-3.Here, sarīra means a bodily relic. Hehitī means it will be. Samuyyuto means well-composed, yoked and ready.

Evaṃ devaputto therena pucchitamatthaṃ kathetvā theraṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pitaraṃ āpucchitvā rathaṃ āruyha devalokameva gato. Theropi tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya vitthārena dhammakathaṃ kathesi. Sā dhammakathā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosi. Atha thero taṃ sabbaṃ attanā ca tena ca kathitaniyāmeneva saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakānaṃ ārocesi, te ca taṃ tathā saṅgahaṃ āropesunti.

Thus, the deva-son, having narrated what was asked by the Elder, paid homage to the Elder, circumambulated him, took leave of his father, mounted the chariot, and went to the deva world. The Elder, having made that event into a beginning, extensively narrated the Dhamma to the assembled gathering. That Dhamma talk was fruitful for the great assembly. Then, the Elder reported all that to the compilers of the Dhamma at the time of the Council, exactly as it had been narrated by himself and by him, and they included it in the compilation accordingly.

Cūḷarathavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Cūḷarathavimāna is finished.

14. Mahārathavimānavaṇṇanā
14. Mahārathavimānavaṇṇanā

Sahassayuttaṃ hayavāhanaṃ subhanti mahārathavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayena devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavane gopālassa nāma devaputtassa attano vimānato nikkhamitvā sahassayuttaṃ mahantaṃ dibbarathaṃ abhiruyha mahantena parivārena mahatiyā deviddhiyā uyyānakīḷanatthaṃ gacchantassa avidūre pāturahosi. Taṃ disvā devaputto sañjātagāravabahumāno sahasā rathato oruyha upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā añjaliṃ sirasi paggayha aṭṭhāsi.

Sahassayuttaṃ hayavāhanaṃ subha is the Mahārathavimāna (Great Chariot Mansion). What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi in Jeta's Grove. At that time, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while wandering in the deva-world as described earlier, saw a deva-son named Gopāla in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, who, having emerged from his mansion, mounted a great divine chariot yoked with a thousand horses, and with a large retinue and great divine power, was going for pleasure to a park. He appeared not far away. Seeing him, the deva-son, filled with respect and reverence, quickly descended from the chariot, approached, bowed with the five-point prostration, raised his joined hands to his head, and stood there.

Tassidaṃ pubbakammaṃ – so kira vipassiṃ bhagavantaṃ suvaṇṇamālāya pūjetvā ‘‘imassa puññassa ānubhāvena mayhaṃ bhave bhave sovaṇṇamayā uracchadamālā nibbattatū’’ti katapaṇidhānāya anekakappesu sugatīsuyeva saṃsarantiyā kassapassa bhagavato kāle kikissa kāsirañño aggamahesiyā kucchimhi nibbattāya yathāpaṇidhānaṃ suvaṇṇamālālābhena ‘‘uracchadamālā’’ti laddhanāmāya devakaññāsadisāya rājadhītāya ācariyo gopālo nāma brāhmaṇo hutvā sasāvakasaṅghassa kassapassa bhagavato asadisadānādīni mahādānāni pavattetvā indriyānaṃ aparipakkabhāvena attānaṃ rājadhītarañca uddissa satthārā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sutvāpi visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ asakkonto puthujjanakālakiriyameva katvā yathūpacitapuññānubhāvena tāvatiṃsesu yojanasatike kanakavimāne nibbatti, anekakoṭiaccharāparivāro ahosi, sattaratanamayo cassa sahassayutto suvibhattabhittivicitto siniddhamadhuranigghoso attano pabhāsamudayena avahasanto viya divaṅkaramaṇḍalaṃ dibbo ājaññaratho nibbatti.

This is the result of his past action: It seems that, having worshipped the Blessed Vipassi with a golden garland and made the aspiration, "By the power of this merit, may golden breastplate garlands arise for me in every existence," wandering in happy realms for many aeons, in the time of the Blessed Kassapa, being born in the womb of the chief queen of King Kiki of Kasi, and obtaining a golden garland according to her aspiration, she was named "Breastplate Garland," a king's daughter like a goddess. Her teacher, a brahmin named Gopala, after establishing great charities, including unparalleled gifts to the Blessed Kassapa with his disciples and sangha, due to the immaturity of his faculties, being unable to attain distinction even after hearing the Dhamma taught by the Teacher, aiming at himself and the king’s daughter, merely passed away as a worldling. Through the power of accumulated merit, he was reborn in the Tavatimsa heaven in a golden mansion a hundred yojanas in extent, with a retinue of many kotis of attendants. A divine chariot of Ājañña breed, adorned with seven jewels, with a thousand steeds, well-divided walls, and a smooth, sweet, resounding voice, arose, seemingly mocking the orb of the sun with its own radiance.

So tattha yāvatāyukaṃ dibbasampattiṃ anubhavitvā aparāparaṃ devesuyeva saṃsaranto imasmiṃ buddhuppāde tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena yathāvuttasampattivibhavo gopālo eva nāma devaputto hutvā tāvatiṃsesuyeva nibbatti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tena ca samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno…pe… añjaliṃ sirasi paggayha aṭṭhāsī’’ti.

Having experienced divine prosperity there for as long as his life lasted, wandering from one heaven to another, in this Buddha's era, due to the remaining ripening of that same action, with the affluence and power as described, he was reborn as a deva-son named Gopala in the Tavatimsa heaven itself. With reference to that, it was said, "At that time, the venerable Mahamoggallana… having raised his joined hands to his head, stood still."

Evaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā ṭhitaṃ taṃ devaputtaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

Then, the venerable Mahamoggallana questioned that deva-son who had approached and stood there with these verses:

1015.

1015.

‘‘Sahassayuttaṃ hayavāhanaṃ subhaṃ, āruyhimaṃ sandanaṃ nekacittaṃ;

"Mounted on this fine chariot, drawn by a thousand steeds,
Adorned with various designs, you move about the pleasure-ground,
Like Purindada, the lord of beings, Vasava."

1016.

1016.

‘‘Sovaṇṇamayā te rathakubbarā ubho, phalehi aṃsehi atīva saṅgatā;

"Golden are the two chariot-axles,
Exceedingly well-fitted with flanges and yokes;
Well-formed pillars, completed by heroes,
It shines like the moon on the fifteenth day."

1017.

1017.

‘‘Suvaṇṇajālāvatato ratho ayaṃ, bahūhi nānāratanehi cittito;

"This chariot, covered with golden netting,
Is adorned with many various gems;
With pleasing sound and a fine voice,
It shines with deities waving yak-tail whisks."

1018.

1018.

‘‘Imā ca nābhyo manasābhinimmitā, rathassa pādantaramajjhabhūsitā;

"These naves are fashioned by the mind,
Adorning the space between the chariot's wheels;
These naves are painted with a hundred stripes,
Flashing like lightning with their own brilliance."

1019.

1019.

‘‘Anekacittāvatato ratho ayaṃ, puthū ca nemī ca sahassaraṃsiko;

"This chariot is covered with various designs,
With a broad rim and a thousand rays;
Their sound is heard like sweet music,
Like a five-piece orchestra well-played."

1020.

1020.

‘‘Sirasmiṃ cittaṃ maṇicandakappitaṃ, sadā visuddhaṃ ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ;

"On the top is a jewel-moon ornament,
Always pure, lovely, and radiant;
Exceedingly well-fitted with golden stripes,
It shines greatly like stripes of lapis lazuli."

1021.

1021.

‘‘Ime ca vāḷī maṇicandakappitā, ārohakambū sujavā brahūpamā;

"These reins are fashioned with jewel-moons,
The goad-sticks are well-made, like Brahma;
Great, mighty, strong, and very swift,
They hasten according to your thought."

1022.

1022.

‘‘Ime ca sabbe sahitā catukkamā, mano tavaññāya tatheva siṃsare;

"All these together, in groups of four,
Hasten according to your thought;
Moving evenly, gently, and without arrogance,
Delighting are the best of steeds."

1023.

1023.

‘‘Dhunanti vagganti patanti cambare, abbhuddhunantā sukate piḷandhane;

"They shake, they prance, they fall in the sky,
They leap about, adorned with well-made ornaments;
Their sound is heard like sweet music,
Like a five-piece orchestra well-played."

1024.

1024.

‘‘Rathassa ghoso apiḷandhanāna ca, khurassa nādo abhihiṃsanāya ca;

"The sound of the chariot and the ornaments,
The noise of the hooves and the absence of violence;
A sweet, harmonious sound is heard,
Like various musical instruments of the Gandharvas."

1025.

1025.

‘‘Rathe ṭhitātā migamandalocanā, āḷārapamhā hasitā piyaṃvadā;

"Standing in the chariot are women with gazelle-like eyes,
With charming smiles, speaking pleasantly;
Their slender forms are covered with lapis lazuli netting,
Worshipped by gods, Gandharvas, and Asuras."

1026.

1026.

‘‘Tā rattarattambarapītavāsasā, visālanettā abhirattalocanā;

"They are dressed in red, yellow, and crimson garments,
With wide eyes and reddish pupils;
Well-born in noble families, with slender bodies, purely smiling,
Standing in the chariot, they wait with joined hands."

1027.

1027.

‘‘Tā kambukeyūradharā suvāsasā, sumajjhimā ūruthanūpapannā;

"They wear bracelets and necklaces of conch shells, with fine garments,
With slender waists, endowed with thighs and breasts;
With round fingers, lovely faces, and beautiful forms,
Standing in the chariot, they wait with joined hands."

1028.

1028.

‘‘Aññā suveṇī susu missakesiyo, samaṃ vibhattāhi pabhassarāhi ca;

"Others with lovely braids and black tresses,
Evenly parted, with radiant locks;
Following you, delighting in your mind,
Standing in the chariot, they wait with joined hands."

1029.

1029.

‘‘Āveḷiniyo padumuppalacchadā, alaṅkatā candanasāravāsitā;

"Adorned with garlands of lotuses and lilies,
Decorated, scented with sandalwood essence;
Following you, delighting in your mind,
Standing in the chariot, they wait with joined hands."

1030.

1030.

‘‘Tā māliniyo padumuppalacchadā, alaṅkatā candanasāravāsitā;

"They wear garlands of lotuses and lilies,
Decorated, scented with sandalwood essence;
Following you, delighting in your mind,
Standing in the chariot, they wait with joined hands."

1031.

1031.

‘‘Kaṇṭhesu te yāni piḷandhanāni, hatthesu pādesu tatheva sīse;

"The ornaments on your neck,
On your hands, feet, and head as well;
Illuminating all ten directions,
Like the rising sun in the autumn season."

1032.

1032.

‘‘Vātassa vegena ca sampakampitā, bhujesu mālā apiḷandhanāni ca;

"Shaken by the force of the wind,
The garlands and ornaments on their arms;
Emit a beautiful, pure, and lovely sound,
Heard by all the wise."

1033.

1033.

‘‘Uyyānabhūmyā ca duvaddhato ṭhitā, rathā ca nāgā tūriyāni ca saro;

"Standing in the pleasure-ground, which is doubled,
The chariots, the elephants, the music, and the sounds;
Delight you, O Lord of Devas,
Like a lute with arms like lotus leaves."

1034.

1034.

‘‘Imāsu vīṇāsu bahūsu vaggūsu, manuññarūpāsu hadayeritaṃ pītiṃ;

"On these many sweet and lovely lutes,
A joy arises, stirred by the heart;
As they are played, the goddesses,
Skilled in dance, flutter among the lotuses."

1035.

1035.

‘‘Yadā ca gītāni ca vāditāni ca, naccāni cimāni samenti ekato;

"When the songs and music,
And these dances come together;
Then the goddesses dance there, then the celestial nymphs,
Illuminating both sides with beauty."

1036.

1036.

‘‘So modasi tūriyagaṇappabodhano, mahīyamāno vajirāvudhoriva;

"You rejoice, awakened by the sound of the orchestra,
Being honored like Vajiravudha;
On these many sweet and lovely lutes,
A joy arises, stirred by the heart."

1037.

1037.

‘‘Kiṃ tvaṃ pure kammamakāsi attanā, manussabhūto purimāya jātiyā;

"What meritorious deed did you do in the past,
When you were a human being in a former birth?
What uposatha did you observe,
What righteous conduct did you find pleasing?"

1038.

1038.

‘‘Nayīdamappassa katassa kammuno, pubbe suciṇṇassa uposathassa vā;

"Not even a little deed done,
Nor a well-practiced uposatha in the past;
Such is this great power of your majesty,
That you greatly outshine the assembly of gods."

1039.

1039.

‘‘Dānassa te idaṃ phalaṃ, atho sīlassa vā pana;

"Is this the fruit of giving, or perhaps of virtue?
Or of the act of reverence? Tell me, when asked."

1015.Tatthasahassayuttanti sahassena yuttaṃ, sahassaṃ vā yuttaṃ yojitaṃ etasminti sahassayuttaṃ. Kassa panetaṃ sahassanti? ‘‘Hayavāhana’’nti anantaraṃ vuccamānattā hayānanti ayamattho viññāyateva. Hayā vāhanaṃ etassāti hayavāhanaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘sahassayuttahayavāhana’’nti anunāsikalopaṃ ekameva samāsapadaṃ katvā vaṇṇenti, etasmiṃ pakkhe hayavāhanaṃ viya vāhananti attho yujjati. Hayavāhanasahassayuttaṃ yuttahayavāhanasahassanti hi attho. Apare pana ‘‘sahassayuttanti sahassadibbājaññayutta’’nti vadanti.Sandananti rathaṃ.Nekacittanti anekacittaṃ nānāvidhavicittavantaṃ.Uyyānabhūmiṃ abhitoti uyyānabhūmiyā samīpe. ‘‘Abhito’’ti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā sāmiatthe etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘uyyānabhūmyā’’tipi paṭhanti, te saddanayampi anupadhārentā paṭhanti.Anukkamanti gacchanto purindado bhūtapatīva vāsavo virocasīti sambandho.

1015. Therein, sahassayuttaṃ means yoked with a thousand, or a thousand yoked or joined to it, hence sahassayuttaṃ. Whose thousand is this? Since it will be said subsequently "hayavāhanaṃ," it is understood that it is of horses. Hayā vāhanaṃ etassa: one whose vehicle is horses is hayavāhanaṃ. Some, however, making anunāsikalopaṃ, explain it as a single compound word, "sahassayuttahayavāhanaṃ," in which case the meaning is like hayavāhanaṃ viya vāhanaṃ. For the meaning is a thousand of yoked horse-vehicles or a thousand horse-vehicles yoked. Others say, "sahassayuttaṃ means yoked with a thousand divine Ājañña steeds." Sandanaṃ means chariot. Nekacittaṃ means adorned with various designs, having different kinds of decorations. Uyyānabhūmiṃ abhito means near the pleasure-ground. For the word "abhito" is a word of use in relation to the meaning of proximity. Some, however, read "uyyānabhūmyā," but they read without considering the rules of grammar. Anukkamaṃ means going. The connection is: Purindada bhūtapatīva vāsavo virocasi, you shine like Purindada, Vasava, the lord of beings.

1016.Sovaṇṇamayāti suvaṇṇamayā.Teti tava.Rathakubbarā ubhoti rathassa ubhosu passesu vedikā. Yo hi rathassa sobhanatthañceva upari ṭhitānaṃ guttatthañca ubhosu passesu vedikākārena parikkhepo karīyati, tassa purimabhāge ubhosu passesu yāva rathīsā, tāva hatthehi gahaṇayoggo rathassa avayavaviseso, idha so eva kubbaroti adhippeto. Tenevāha ‘‘ubho’’ti. Aññattha pana rathīsā kubbaroti vuccati.Phalehīti rathūpatthambhassa dakkhiṇavāmabhedehi dvīhi phalehi, pariyantāvettha phalāti vuttā.Aṃsehīti kubbaraphale patiṭṭhitehi heṭṭhimaaṃsehi.Atīva saṅgatāti ativiya suṭṭhu saṅgatā suphassitā nibbivarā. Idañca sippiviracite kittimarathe labbhamānavisesaṃ tattha āropetvā vuttaṃ. So pana aporisatāya akittimo sayaṃjāto kenaci aghaṭitoyeva.Sujātagumbāti susaṇṭhitathambhakasamudāyā. Ye hi vedikāya nirantaraṃ ṭhitā susaṇṭhitaghaṭakādiavayavavisesavanto thambhakasamudāyā, tesaṃ vasenevaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sujātagumbā’’ti.Naravīraniṭṭhitāti sippācariyehi niṭṭhāpitasadisā. Sippācariyā hi attano sarīrakhedaṃ acintetvā vīriyabalena sippassa suṭṭhu vicāraṇato naresu vīriyavantoti idha ‘‘naravīrā’’ti vuttā.Naravīrāti vā devaputtassa ālapanaṃ.Niṭṭhitāti pariyositā paripuṇṇasobhātisayā. ‘‘Naravīranimmitā’’ti vā pāṭho, naresu dhitisampannehi nimmitasadisāti attho. Evaṃvidhakubbaratāya ayaṃ tava ratho virocati. Kiṃ viya?Pannaraseva cando,sukkapakkhe pannarasiyaṃ paripuṇṇakāle candimā viya.

1016. Sovaṇṇamayā means made of gold. Te means your. Rathakubbarā ubho means the two sides of the chariot. For the enclosing structure on both sides of the chariot, which is made in the manner of a railing for the sake of both the beauty of the chariot and the protection of those standing above, up to the chariot pole on both sides in the front part, a particular part of the chariot convenient to hold with the hands, that is what is intended here by kubbara. Therefore, he said, "ubho." Elsewhere, however, the chariot pole is called kubbara. Phalehī means with the two flanges of the chariot support, on the right and left sides; the boundaries here are called phalā. Aṃsehī means with the lower yokes established on the flange of the kubbara. Atīva saṅgatā means exceedingly well-fitted, well-joined, without gaps. And this is said attributing to it a distinction obtainable in an artificial chariot crafted by artisans. But that, being unartificial, is self-arisen, unmade by anyone. Sujātagumbā means a well-established group of pillar-like supports. For the group of pillar-like supports that stand continuously on the railing, having particular parts such as well-established components, with reference to them it is said thus, "sujātagumbā." Naravīraniṭṭhitā means completed by skilled artisans. For artisans, not considering the weariness of their bodies, through the power of their energy, due to thoroughly examining the craft, are here called "heroes among men." Or naravīrā is an address to the deva-son. Niṭṭhitā means completed, having surpassing fullness of beauty. Or the reading is "naravīranimmitā," meaning like something made by those accomplished in steadfastness among men. Because of being a kubbara of such a kind, this chariot of yours shines. Like what? Pannaraseva cando, like the moon on the fifteenth day of the waxing moon, at the time of its fullness.

1017.Suvaṇṇajālāvatatoti suvaṇṇajālakehi avatato chādito. ‘‘Suvaṇṇajālāvitato’’tipi pāṭho, gavacchitoti attho.Bahūhīti anekehi.Nānāratanehīti padumarāgaphussarāgādinānāvidharatanehi.Sunandighosoti suṭṭhu nanditabbaghoso, savanīyamadhuraninnādoti attho.Sunandighosoti vā suṭṭhu katanandighoso, naccanādīnaṃ dassanādīsu pavattitasādhukārasaddādivasena katapamodaninnādoti attho, ‘‘kālena kālaṃ āsīvādanavasena suṭṭhu payuttanandighoso’’ti ca vadanti.Subhassaroti suṭṭhu ativiya obhāsanasabhāvo, tattha vā pavattamānānaṃ devatānaṃ sobhanena gītavāditassarena subhassaro.Cāmarahatthabāhubhīti cāmarahatthayuttabāhūhi ito cito ca bījayamāna cāmarakalāpehi devatānaṃ bhujehi, tathābhūtāhi devatāhi vā virocati.

1017. Suvaṇṇajālāvatato means covered with golden netting. "Suvaṇṇajālāvitato" is also a reading, meaning with windows. Bahūhī means with many. Nānāratanehī means with various kinds of gems such as ruby, topaz, etc. Sunandighoso means a sound that is very pleasing, meaning a lovely, sweet resonance. Or sunandighoso means a sound that has produced very pleasing sounds, a sound that has caused delight by way of sounds of approval uttered upon seeing dances, etc.; and they say "a sound of well-expressed praise uttered from time to time as a blessing." Subhassaro means having a very radiant nature, or with a beautiful voice of song and instruments of the deities moving about there, subhassaro. Cāmarahatthabāhubhī means with the arms of the deities waving yak-tail whisks here and there with hands holding yak-tail whisks, or it shines with deities of such a nature.

1018.Nābhyoti rathacakkānaṃ nābhiyo.Manasābhinimmitāti ‘‘ime īdisā hontū’’ti cittena nimmitasadisā.Rathassapādantaramajjhabhūsitāti rathassa pādānaṃ rathacakkānaṃ antena neminā nānāratanasamujjalena arānaṃ vemajjhena ca maṇḍitā.Satarājicittitāti anekavaṇṇāhi anekasatāhi rājīhi lekhāhi cittitā vicittabhāvaṃ gatā.Sateratā vijjurivāti sateratasaṅkhātavijjulatā viya pabhāsare vijjotanti.

1018. Nābhyo means the naves of the chariot wheels. Manasābhinimmitā means like something made by the mind, thinking "let these be like this." Rathassa pādantaramajjhabhūsitā means adorned with the end of the feet of the chariot, the chariot wheels, with the rim, and with the middle of the spokes, which are radiant with various gems. Satarājicittitā means painted with lines of many hundreds of different colors, having attained a variegated state. Sateratā vijjurivā means they flash like lightning, which is called sateratā.

1019.Anekacittāvatatoti anekehi mālākammādicittehi avatato samokiṇṇo. ‘‘Anekacittāvitato’’tipi paṭhanti, soyeva attho, gāthāsukhatthaṃ pana dīghakaraṇaṃ.Puthū ca nemī cāti puthulanemi ca, eko ca-kāro nipātamattaṃ.Sahassaraṃsikoti anekasahassaraṃsiko. ‘‘Sahassaraṃsiyo’’tipi pāḷi. Apare pana ‘‘natā raṃsiyo’’ti ca paṭhanti, tatthanatāti ajiyadhanudaṇḍako viya oṇatā nemippadesā.Sahassaraṃsiyoti sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya vipphurantakiraṇajālā.Tesanti olambamānakiṅkiṇikajālānaṃ nemippadesānaṃ.

1019. Anekacittāvatato means covered with various designs such as garland-making, etc., crowded. "Anekacittāvitato" is also a reading; the meaning is the same, but the lengthening is for the ease of the verse. Puthū ca nemī cā means and the broad rim; the ca is merely an expletive. Sahassaraṃsiko means having many thousands of rays. "Sahassaraṃsiyo" is also a reading. Others, however, read "natā raṃsiyo," wherein natā means bent down like the bow of a bow. Sahassaraṃsiyo means a network of rays flashing like the orb of the sun. Tesaṃ means of those networks of dangling little bells, of the rims.

1020.Sirasminti sīse, rathassa sīseti attho. Siro vā asmiṃ rathe.Cittanti vicittaṃ.Maṇicandakappitanti maṇimayamaṇḍalānuviddhaṃ candamaṇḍalasadisena maṇinā anuviddhaṃ.Ruciraṃ pabhassaranti iminā tassa candamaṇḍalasadisataṃyeva vibhāveti,sadā visuddhanti iminā panassa candamaṇḍalatopi visesaṃ dasseti.Suvaṇṇarājīhīti antarantarā vaṭṭākārena saṇṭhitāhi suvaṇṇalekhāhi.Saṅgatanti sahitaṃ.Veḷuriyarājīvāti antarantarā suvaṇṇarājīhi khacitamaṇimaṇḍalattā veḷuriyarājīhi viya sobhati. ‘‘Veḷuriyarājīhī’’ti ca paṭhanti.

1020. Sirasmiṃ means on the head, meaning on the head of the chariot. Or, the head is in this chariot. Cittaṃ means variegated. Maṇicandakappitaṃ means inlaid with a jewel-moon ornament, inlaid with a jewel like a moon-disk made of jewels. Ruciraṃ pabhassaraṃ clarifies that it is just like a moon-disk, sadā visuddhaṃ shows its distinction from even a moon-disk. Suvaṇṇarājīhī means with golden lines arranged in a circular shape in between. Saṅgataṃ means joined. Veḷuriyarājīvā means because of the jewel-disk inlaid with golden lines in between, it shines like lines of lapis lazuli. "Veḷuriyarājīhī" is also a reading.

1021.Vāḷīti vāḷavanto sampannavāḷadhino, asse sandhāya vadati. ‘‘Vājī’’ti vā pāṭho.Maṇicandakappitāti cāmarolambanaṭṭhānesu maṇimayacandakānuviddhā.Ārohakambūti uccā ceva tadanurūpapariṇāhā ca, ārohapariṇāhasampannāti attho.Sujavāti sundarajavā javavantomahājavā,sobhanagatikāti attho.Brahūpamāti brahā viya paminitabbā, attano pamāṇato adhikā viya paññāyantāti attho.Brahāti vuḍḍhā pavaḍḍhasabbaṅgapaccaṅgā.Mahantāti mahānubhāvā mahiddhikā.Balinoti sarīrabalena ca ussāhabalena ca balavanto.Mahājavāti sīghavegā.Mano tavaññāyāti tava cittaṃ ñatvā.Tathevāti cittānurūpameva.Siṃsareti saṃsappare, pavattareti attho.

1021. Vāḷī: "Vāḷī" means having a tail, possessing a complete tail-sheath; referring to the horses, he speaks. Alternatively, "Vājī" is also a reading. Maṇicandakappitā: Adorned with jeweled moon-shaped ornaments in places where pendants hang. Ārohakambū: Tall and proportionately thick, meaning possessing sufficient girth for riding. Sujavā: Beautifully swift, swift-moving, meaning mahājavā, of excellent gait. Brahūpamā: To be estimated like a Brahma, appearing larger than their actual size. Brahā: Old, with fully developed limbs and features. Mahantā: Of great power, possessing great might. Balino: Strong both in physical strength and in energetic effort. Mahājavā: Of swift speed. Mano tavaññāyā: Knowing your mind. Tathevā: Exactly according to the mind. Siṃsare: They move, meaning they proceed.

1022.Imeti yathāvuttaasse sandhāyāha.Sabbeti sahassamattāpi.Sahitāti samānajavatāya samānagamanatāya ca gatiyaṃ sahitā, aññamaññaṃ anūnādhikagamanāti attho. Catūhi pādehi kamanti gacchantīticatukkamā. Samaṃ vahantīti ‘‘sahitā’’ti padena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti.Mudukāti mudusabhāvā, bhadrā ājānīyāti attho. Tenāha‘‘anuddhatā’’ti, uddhatarahitā khobhaṃ akarontāti attho.Āmodamānāti pamodamānā, akhaḷuṅkatāya aññamaññaṃ rathikādīnañca tuṭṭhiṃ pavedayantāti attho.

1022. Ime: He speaks referring to the aforementioned horses. Sabbe: Even a thousand of them. Sahitā: United in gait due to equal speed and equal movement, meaning their movement is neither deficient nor excessive in relation to each other. Catukkamā: They move, go, with four feet. Samaṃ vahantī: He makes the meaning stated by the word "sahitā" even clearer. Mudukā: Of gentle nature, noble thoroughbreds, is the meaning. Therefore he says ‘‘anuddhatā’’: Free from arrogance, not causing disturbance. Āmodamānā: Rejoicing, proclaiming their delight to each other and to the roads and so on, by not stumbling.

1023.Dhunantīti cāmarabhāraṃ kesarabhāraṃ vāladhiñca vidhunanti.Vaggantīti kadāci pade padaṃ nikkhipantā vagganena gamanena gacchanti.Patantīti kadāci pavattanti, laṅghantīti attho. ‘‘Plavantī’’ti ca keci paṭhanti, soyevattho.Abbhuddhunantāti kammasippinā sukate suṭṭhu nimmite khuddakaghaṇṭādiassālaṅkāre abhiuddhunantā adhikaṃ uddhunantā.Tesanti tesaṃ piḷandhanānaṃ.

1023. Dhunantī: They shake the burden of the chowries, the burden of the manes, and the tail-sheath. Vaggantī: Sometimes placing foot after foot, they go with a measured gait. Patantī: Sometimes they proceed, meaning they leap. Some read "Plavantī," the meaning is the same. Abbhuddhunantā: Highly agitated by the small bells and other horse ornaments well-made and beautifully crafted by a skilled artisan. Tesa: Of those ornaments.

1024.Rathassa ghosoti yathāvutto rathanigghoso.Apiḷandhanāna cāti a-kāro nipātamattaṃ. Piḷandhanānaṃ ābharaṇānaṃ. Apiḷandhananti ca ābharaṇapariyāyoti vā vadanti, rathassānaṃ ābharaṇānañcaghosoti attho.Khurassanādoti turaṅgānaṃ khuranipātasaddo. Kiñcāpi assā ākāsena gacchanti, madhurassa pana khuranipātasaddassa upaladdhihetubhūtena kammunā tesaṃ khuranikkhepe khuranikkhepe paṭighāto labbhatīti vadanti.Abhihiṃsanāya cāti assānaṃ adhikahiṃsanena ca, antarantarā assehi pavattitahesanena cāti attho. ‘‘Abhihesanāya cā’’ti keci paṭhanti.Samitassāti samuditassa dibbajanassa ghoso ca suvaggu sumadhuraṃ suyyati. Kiṃ viyāti āha‘‘gandhabbatūriyāni vicitrasaṃvane’’ti, citralatāvane gandhabbadevaputtānaṃ pañcaṅgikatūriyāni viya. Tūriyasannissito hi saddo ‘‘tūriyānī’’ti vutto nissayavohārena. ‘‘Gandhabbatūriyāna ca vicitrasaṃvane’’ti ca pāṭho, ‘‘tūriyānañca’’iti anunāsikaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Apare ‘‘gandhabbatūriyāni vicitrapavane’’ti paṭhanti.

1024. Rathassa ghoso: The aforementioned sound of the chariot. Apiḷandhanāna cā: The a- is merely an expletive. Of the piḷandhana, ornaments. Some say apiḷandhana is synonymous with ābharaṇa, meaning the sound of the chariot's ornaments. Khurassanādo: The sound of the horses' hooves striking. Although the horses move through the air, they say that due to the karma that is the cause for the perception of the sweet sound of hooves striking, resistance is obtained at each placement of their hooves. Abhihiṃsanāya cā: And by the great urging of the horses, and by the neighing emitted by the horses from time to time. Some read "Abhihesanāya cā". Samitassā: And the sound of the assembled divine host is heard as very pleasant, very sweet. What is it like? He says, ‘‘gandhabbatūriyāni vicitrasaṃvane’’: Like the five-fold musical instruments of the gandhabba demigods in a forest of colorful creepers. The sound that is dependent on the instruments is called "tūriyāni" by way of designation based on dependence. Another reading is "Gandhabbatūriyāna ca vicitrasaṃvane", "tūriyānañca" should be connected by adding an anusarana. Others read "gandhabbatūriyāni vicitrapavane".

1025.Rathe ṭhitātāti rathe ṭhitā etā.Migamandalocanāti migacchāpikānaṃ viya mudusiniddhadiṭṭhinipātā.Āḷārapamhāti bahalasaṅgatapakhumā, gopakhumāti attho.Hasitāti pahasitā, pahaṃsitamukhāti attho.Piyaṃvadāti piyavādiniyo.Veḷuriyajālāvatatāti veḷuriyamaṇimayena jālena chāditasarīrā.Tanucchavāti sukhumacchaviyo.Sadevāti sadā eva sabbakālameva.Gandhabbasūraggapūjitāti gandhabbadevatāhi ceva aparāhi ca aggadevatāhi laddhapūjā.

1025. Rathe ṭhitātā: These standing in the chariot. Migamandalocanā: With gentle, smooth gazes like those of young deer. Āḷārapamhā: With thick, closely set eyelashes, meaning having dense eyelashes. Hasitā: Smiling, with smiling faces. Piyaṃvadā: Speaking pleasantly. Veḷuriyajālāvatatā: Their bodies covered with nets of beryl jewels. Tanucchavā: With delicate complexions. Sadevā: Always, at all times. Gandhabbasūraggapūjitā: Receiving homage from gandhabba deities and other chief deities.

1026.Tā rattarattambarapītavāsasāti rajanīyarūpā ca rattapītavatthā ca.Abhirattalocanāti visesato rattarājīhi upasobhitanayanā.Kule sujātāti sindhavakule sujātā visiṭṭhadevanikāye sambhavā.Sutanūti sundarasarīrā.Sucimhitāti suddhasitakaraṇā.

1026. Tā rattarattambarapītavāsasā: Charming and wearing red and yellow garments. Abhirattalocanā: Their eyes especially adorned with red lines. Kule sujātā: Well-born in the Sindhava lineage, originating from a distinguished group of deities. Sutanū: With beautiful bodies. Sucimhitā: Of pure, white deeds.

1027.Tā kambukeyūradharāti suvaṇṇamayakeyūradharā.Sumajjhimāti vilaggamajjhā.Ūruthanūpapannāti sampannaūruthanā, kadalikkhandhasadisaūru ceva samuggasadisathanā ca.Vaṭṭaṅguliyoti anupubbato vaṭṭaṅguliyo.Sumukhāti sundaramukhā, pamuditamukhā vā.Sudassanāti dassanīyā.

1027. Tā kambukeyūradharā: Wearing golden armlets. Sumajjhimā: With slender waists. Ūruthanūpapannā: Endowed with perfect thighs and breasts, having thighs like banana trunks and breasts like treasure chests. Vaṭṭaṅguliyo: With well-rounded fingers in due order. Sumukhā: With beautiful faces, or cheerful faces. Sudassanā: Beautiful to see.

1028.Aññāti ekaccā.Suveṇīti sundarakesaveṇiyo.Susūti daharā.Missakesiyoti rattamālādīhi missitakesavaṭṭiyo. Kathaṃ?Samaṃ vibhattāhi pabhassarāhi cāti, samaṃ aññamaññasadisaṃ nānāvibhattivasena vibhattāhi suvaṇṇacīrādikhacitāhi indanīlamaṇiādayo viya pabhassarāhi kesavaṭṭīhi missitakesiyoti yojanā.Anubbatāti anukūlakiriyā.ti accharāyo.

1028. Aññā: Some. Suveṇī: With beautiful braids of hair. Susū: Young. Missakesiyo: With tufts of hair mixed with red garlands and so on. How? Samaṃ vibhattāhi pabhassarāhi cā: Evenly, similarly to each other, divided in various ways, mixed with shining tufts of hair adorned with gold threads and so on, like sapphires and other gems; this is how it should be connected. Anubbatā: Acting favorably. : Those celestial maidens.

1029.Candanasāravositāti sārabhūtena dibbacandanena ullittā vicchuritā.

1029. Candanasāravositā: Anointed, sprinkled with the essence of divine sandalwood.

1031.Kaṇṭhesūtiādinā gīvūpagahatthūpagapādūpagasīsūpagādiābharaṇāni dasseti.Obhāsayantīti kaṇṭhesu yāni piḷandhanāni, tehi obhāsayantīti yojanā. Evaṃ sesesupi.Abbhuddayanti abhiuggacchanto, ‘‘abbhuddasa’’ntipi pāṭho, soyevattho.Sāradikoti saradakāliko.Bhāṇumāti sūriyo. So hi abbhādidosavirahena dasapi disā suṭṭhu obhāseti.

1031. From Kaṇṭhesū etc., he shows the ornaments adorning the neck, arms, feet, head, etc. Obhāsayantī: Adorning, illuminating, with the ornaments that are on their necks; this is the connection. Similarly in the remaining cases as well. Abbhuddayanti: Rising up, "abbhuddasa" is also a reading, the meaning is the same. Sāradiko: Of the autumn season. Bhāṇumā: The sun. For it illuminates the ten directions well, without the blemishes of clouds and so on.

1032.Vātassa vegena cāti manuññagandhūpahāraṃ saddūpahārañca karontena upaharantena viya vāyantena vātassa vegena rathaturaṅgavegena ca.Muñcantīti vissajjenti.Ruciranti pañcaṅgikatūriyāni viya uparūpari rucidāyakaṃ.Sucinti suddhaṃ asaṃsaṭṭhaṃ.Subhanti manuññaṃ.Sabbehi viññūhi sutabbarūpanti sabbehipi viññujātikehi gandhabbasamayaññūhi sotabbaṃ savanīyaṃ uttamasabhāvaṃ ghosaṃ muñcantīti yojanā.

1032. Vātassa vegena cā: By the force of the wind, as if carrying and offering pleasant scents and sounds, and by the speed of the chariots and horses. Muñcantī: Emit. Ruciranti: Delightful again and again, like the five-fold musical instruments. Sucinti: Pure, unmixed. Subhanti: Pleasant. Sabbehi viññūhi sutabbarūpanti: Emitting a sound that should be heard, is worth listening to, and is of the highest quality, by all intelligent beings who know the customs of the gandhabbas; this is the connection.

1033.Uyyānabhūmyāti uyyānabhūmiyaṃ.Duvaddhatoti dvīhi addhapassehi. ‘‘Dubhato ca ṭhitā’’tipi paṭhanti, soyevattho.Rathāti rathe.Nāgāti nāge. Upayogatthe hi etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ.Saroti rathanāgatūriyāni paṭicca nibbatto saro.Devindāti devaputtaṃ ālapati.Vīṇā yathā pokkharapattabāhubhīti yathā vīṇā sammadeva yojitehi doṇipattabāhudaṇḍehi taṃtaṃmucchanānurūpaṃ avaṭṭhitehi vādiyamānā suṇantaṃ janaṃ pamodeti, evaṃ taṃ rathādayo attano sarena pamodayanti. Susikkhitabhāvena pokkharabhāvaṃ sundarabhāvaṃ pattehi vīṇāvādakassa hatthehi pavāditā vīṇā yathā mahājanaṃ pamodeti, evaṃ taṃ rathādayo attano sarena pamodayantīti.

1033. Uyyānabhūmyā: In the garden grounds. Duvaddhato: From two sides. Some read "Dubhato ca ṭhitā", the meaning is the same. Rathā: In chariots. Nāgā: On elephants. This is a singular form used in the sense of location. Saro: The sound that arises dependent on the chariots, elephants, and musical instruments. Devindā: He addresses the divine youth. Vīṇā yathā pokkharapattabāhubhī: Just as a lute, when played with well-applied plectrums and skillful hands that move in accordance with the various modes, delights the listener, so too, those chariots and so on delight with their sound. Just as a lute played with the hands of a lute player who has attained skillfulness and beautiful form delights the great crowd, so too, those chariots and so on delight with their sound.

1034.Imāsu vīṇāsūti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho –imāsuujukoṭivaṅkabrahatīnandinītisaraādibhedāsubahūsu vīṇāsusiniddhamadhurassaratāyavaggūsutato evamanuññarūpāsu hadayeritaṃhadayaṅgamaṃ hadayahāriniṃpītiṃpītinimittaṃpavajjamānāsupavādiyamānāsuaccharādevakaññāpītivegukkhittatāya attano susikkhitatāya ca dibbapadumesu bhamantinaccaṃ dassentiyo sañcaranti.

1034. Imāsu vīṇāsū: The condensed meaning of this verse is: imāsu—among these bahūsu vīṇāsu, many lutes—of various types such as ujukoṭi, vaṅka, brahatī, nandinī, tisara, etc.—vaggūsu, having melodious and sweet sounds—and therefore manuññarūpāsu, of pleasing form—hadayeritaṃ—heart-felt, heart-ravishing—pītiṃ—causing joy—pavajjamānāsu—being played—the accharā—celestial maidens—due to the force of joy and their own excellent skill, bhamanti—dance, showing their dance—padumesu—on the divine lotus flowers, move about.

1035.Imānīti idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘imāni gītāni, imāni vāditāni, imāni naccāni cā’’ti.Samenti ekatoti ekajjhaṃ samarasāni honti. Atha vāsamenti ekatoti ekato ekajjhaṃ samāni samarasāni karonti, tantissaraṃ gītassarena, gītassarañca tantissarena saṃsandantiyo naccanena yathādhigate hassādirase aparihāpentiyo samenti samānentīti attho.Atthettha naccanti athettha accharā obhāsayantīti evaṃ gītādīni samarase karontiyo atha aññā ekaccā accharā ettha etasmiṃ tava rathe naccanti, atha aññā varitthiyo uttamitthiyo naccaṃ passantiyo attano sarīrobhāsena ceva vatthābharaṇaobhāsena ca ettha etasmiṃ padese ubhato dvīsu passesu dasapi disā kevalaṃ obhāsayanti vijjotayantīti attho.

1035. Imānī: This should be connected individually: "imāni gītāni, imāni vāditāni, imāni naccāni cā"ti. Samenti ekato: They become harmonious in one place. Or, samenti ekato: Unifying, making equal and harmonious in one place, blending the sound of the stringed instruments with the sound of the song, and not diminishing the well-understood sentiments such as laughter through dancing, they unite, harmonize; this is the meaning. Atthettha naccanti athettha accharā obhāsayantī: Thus, while harmonizing the songs and so on, then some other celestial maidens dance here in your chariot, and then other excellent women, watching the dance, illuminate this place on both sides and in all ten directions solely with the radiance of their bodies and the light of their garments and ornaments; this is the meaning.

1036.Soti so tvaṃ evaṃbhūto.Tūriyagaṇappabodhanoti dibbatūriyasamūhena katapītipabodhano.Mahīyamānoti pūjīyamāno.Vajirāvudhorivāti indo viya.

1036. So: So, you, being such. Tūriyagaṇappabodhano: One awakened to joy by the group of divine musical instruments. Mahīyamāno: Being honored. Vajirāvudhorivā: Like Indra with his thunderbolt.

1037.Uposathaṃ kaṃ vā tuvaṃ upāvasīti aññehipi uposatho upavasīyati, tvaṃ kaṃ vā kīdisaṃ nāma uposathaṃ upavasīti pucchati.Dhammacariyanti dānādipuññapaṭipattiṃ.Vatanti vatasamādānaṃ.Abhirocayīti abhirocesi, ruccitvā pūresīti attho. ‘‘Abhirādhayī’’tipi pāṭho, sādhesi nipphādesīti attho.

1037. Uposathaṃ kaṃ vā tuvaṃ upāvasī: Others also observe the Uposatha, but what kind of Uposatha do you observe? he asks. Dhammacariyanti: Practice of meritorious deeds such as giving. Vatanti: Taking vows. Abhirocayī: You favored, meaning you approved and fulfilled it. "Abhirādhayī" is also a reading, meaning you accomplished, completed it.

1038.Idanti nipātamattaṃ, idaṃ vā phalanti adhippāyo.Abhirocaseti abhibhavitvā vijjotasi.

1038. Idanti: Merely an expletive, or the meaning is "does this bear fruit?". Abhirocase: You outshine, illuminate.

Evaṃ mahātherena puṭṭho devaputto tamatthaṃ ācikkhi. Tena vuttaṃ –

Thus, the divine youth, questioned by the great Thera, explained that matter. Therefore, it was said:

1040.

1040.

‘‘So devaputto attamano, moggallānena pucchito;

‘‘So devaputto attamano, moggallānena pucchito;
Pañhaṃ puṭṭho viyākāsi, yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti.

1041.

1041.

‘‘Jitindriyaṃ buddhamanomanikkamaṃ, naruttamaṃ kassapamaggapuggalaṃ;

‘‘Jitindriyaṃ buddhamanomanikkamaṃ, naruttamaṃ kassapamaggapuggalaṃ;
Avāpurantaṃ amatassa dvāraṃ, devātidevaṃ satapuññalakkhaṇaṃ.

1042.

1042.

‘‘Tamaddasaṃ kuñjaramoghatiṇṇaṃ, suvaṇṇasiṅgīnadabimbasādisaṃ;

‘‘Tamaddasaṃ kuñjaramoghatiṇṇaṃ, suvaṇṇasiṅgīnadabimbasādisaṃ;
Disvāna taṃ khippamahuṃ sucīmano, tameva disvāna subhāsitaddhajaṃ.

1043.

1043.

‘‘Tamannapānaṃ athavāpi cīvaraṃ, suciṃ paṇītaṃ rasasā upetaṃ;

‘‘Tamannapānaṃ athavāpi cīvaraṃ, suciṃ paṇītaṃ rasasā upetaṃ;
Pupphābhikiṇṇamhi sake nivesane, patiṭṭhapesiṃ sa asaṅgamānaso.

1044.

1044.

‘‘Tamannapānena ca cīvarena ca, khajjena bhojjena ca sāyanena ca;

‘‘Tamannapānena ca cīvarena ca, khajjena bhojjena ca sāyanena ca;
Santappayitvā dvipadānamuttamaṃ, so saggaso devapure ramāmahaṃ.

1045.

1045.

‘‘Etenupāyena imaṃ niraggaḷaṃ, yaññaṃ yajitvā tividhaṃ visuddhaṃ;

‘‘Etenupāyena imaṃ niraggaḷaṃ, yaññaṃ yajitvā tividhaṃ visuddhaṃ;
Pahāyahaṃ mānusakaṃ samussayaṃ, indūpamo devapure ramāmahaṃ.

1046.

1046.

‘‘Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhaṃ balañca, paṇītarūpaṃ atikaṅkhatā muni;

‘‘Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhaṃ balañca, paṇītarūpaṃ atikaṅkhatā muni;
Annañca pānañca bahuṃ susaṅkhataṃ, patiṭṭhapetabbamasaṅgamānase.

1047.

1047.

‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, buddhena seṭṭho va samo va vijjati;

‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, buddhena seṭṭho va samo va vijjati;
Āhuneyyānaṃ paramāhutiṃ gato, puññatthikānaṃ vipulapphalesina’’nti.

1041.Tatthajitindriyanti manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ bodhimūleyeva aggamaggena jitattā nibbisevanabhāvassa katattā jitindriyaṃ. Abhiññeyyādīnaṃ abhiññeyyādibhāvato anavasesato abhisambuddhattābuddhaṃ. Puripuṇṇavīriyatāyaanomanikkamaṃcaturaṅgasamannāgatassa vīriyassa catubbidhasammappadhānassa ca pāripūriyāti attho.Naruttamanti narānaṃ uttamaṃ dvipaduttamaṃ.Kassapanti bhagavantaṃ gottena vadati.Avāpurantaṃ amatassa dvāranti koṇāgamanassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti pihitaṃ nibbānamahānagarassa dvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ vivarantaṃ.Devātidevanti sabbesampi devānaṃ atidevaṃ.Satapuññalakkhaṇanti anekasatapuññavasena nibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ.

1041. There, jitindriyanti: Because he conquered the six indriya, with mind as the sixth, at the foot of the Bodhi tree itself with the path of the highest fruition, because he had made them non-dependent. Buddhaṃ: Because he completely awakened to all that should be known, etc., without remainder, due to the state of knowable things etc. Anomanikkamaṃ: Because of his outstanding, complete virility, meaning the fulfillment of the four-fold virility and the four kinds of right effort. Naruttamanti: The best of men, the supreme being. Kassapanti: He speaks of the Blessed One by his gotta (clan name). Avāpurantaṃ amatassa dvāranti: Opening the door to the deathless, the Ariya Path, which had been closed since the disappearance of the Teaching of the Buddha Konagamana, the great city of Nibbana. Devātidevanti: The supreme deity even of all the deities. Satapuññalakkhaṇanti: Possessing the marks of a great man, produced by hundreds of meritorious deeds.

1042.Kuñjaranti kilesapaṭisattunimmaddanena kuñjarasadisaṃ, mahānāganti attho. Catunnaṃ oghānaṃ saṃsāramahoghassa taritattāoghatiṇṇaṃ.Suvaṇṇasiṅgīnadabimbasādisanti siṅgīsuvaṇṇajambunadasuvaṇṇarūpasadisaṃ, kañcanasannibhattacanti attho.Disvāna taṃ khippamahuṃ sucīmanoti taṃ kassapasammāsambuddhaṃ disvā khippaṃ tāvadeva ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’ti pasādavasena kilesamalāpagamanena sucimano visuddhamano ahosiṃ, tañca khotameva disvānataṃ disvā eva.Subhāsitaddhajanti dhammaddhajaṃ.

1042. Kuñjaranti: Like an elephant because of crushing the enemies that are the defilements, meaning a great nāga. Oghatiṇṇaṃ: Because he had crossed the four floods, the great flood of saṃsāra. Suvaṇṇasiṅgīnadabimbasādisanti: Like a Singi gold, Jambulanda gold form, meaning having a golden complexion. Disvāna taṃ khippamahuṃ sucīmano: Having seen that Kassapa Sammāsambuddha, quickly, immediately, "Sammāsambuddho bhagavā," I became sucimano, pure in mind, due to the pacification of the defilements through the power of faith, and that too, tameva disvāna: Having seen him alone. Subhāsitaddhajanti: The flag of the Dhamma.

1043.Tamannapānanti tamhi bhagavati annañca pānañca.Athavāpi cīvaranti atha cīvarampi.Rasasā upetanti rasena upetaṃ sādurasaṃ, uḷāranti attho.Pupphābhikiṇṇamhīti ganthitehi ca aganthikehi ca pupphehi olambanavasena santharaṇavasena ca abhikiṇṇe.Patiṭṭhapesinti paṭipādesiṃ adāsiṃ.Asaṅgamānasoti katthaci alaggacitto so ahanti yojanā.

1043. Tamannapānanti: Food and drink to that Blessed One. Athavāpi cīvaranti: And also robes. Rasasā upetanti: Endowed with flavor, delicious, meaning excellent. Pupphābhikiṇṇamhī: Strewn with flowers, both strung and unstrung, by way of hanging and spreading. Patiṭṭhapesinti: I offered, I gave. Asaṅgamānaso: With a mind unattached to anything, I was; this is the connection.

1044.Saggasoti aparāparūpapattivasena sagge sagge, tatthāpi ca devapure sudassanamahānagare.Ramāmīti kīḷāmi modāmi.

1044. Saggaso means in each heaven (sagga) in terms of successive rebirths, and even there, in the city of gods, in the great city of Sudassana. Ramāmī means I play and rejoice.

1045.Etenupāyenāti gopālabrāhmaṇakāle sasāvakasaṅghassa kassapabhagavato yathā asadisadānaṃ adāsiṃ, etena upāyena.Imaṃ niraggaḷaṃ yaññaṃ yajitvā tividhaṃ visuddhanti anāvaṭadvāratāya muttacāgatāya ca niraggaḷaṃ, tīsupi kālesu tīhi dvārehi karaṇakārāpanānussaraṇavidhīhi sampannatāya tividhaṃ, tattha saṃkilesābhāvena visuddhaṃ aparimitadhanapariccāgabhāvena mahācāgatāya yaññaṃ yajitvā, mahādānaṃ datvāti attho. Taṃ pana dānaṃ cirakatampi khettavatthucittānaṃ uḷāratāya antarantarā anussaraṇena attano pākaṭaṃ āsannaṃ paccakkhaṃ viya upaṭṭhitaṃ gahetvā āha ‘‘ima’’nti.

1045. Etenupāyenā means in the time of Gopāla the herdsman, in the manner that I gave unsurpassed alms to Kassapa, the Blessed One, together with the Saṅgha of disciples, by this means. Imaṃ niraggaḷaṃ yaññaṃ yajitvā tividhaṃ visuddhaṃ means ‘niraggaḷaṃ’ because it is without closed doors, and because of free generosity, and ‘tividhaṃ’ because it is complete in all three times, in the three doors, and in the methods of doing, causing to be done, and remembering; ‘visuddhaṃ’ because of the absence of defilements there, having performed the sacrifice due to great generosity through the abandonment of immeasurable wealth, that is, having given a great gift. However, taking that gift, even though done long ago, as if it were manifest, near, and directly present to oneself through the constant recollection of the excellence of the field and the object, he said, "imaṃ".

1046.Evaṃ devaputto attanā katakammaṃ therassa kathetvā idāni tādisāya sampattiyā parepi patiṭṭhāpetukāmataṃ tathāgate ca uttamaṃ attano pasādabahumānaṃ pavedento‘‘āyuñca vaṇṇañcā’’tiādinā gāthādvayamāha. Tatthaabhikaṅkhatāti icchantena.Munīti theraṃ ālapati.

1046. Thus, the deva-son, having related the deed he had done, now, desiring to establish others in such attainment, and declaring his great faith and respect for the Tathāgata, spoke the two verses beginning with ‘‘āyuñca vaṇṇañcā’’. Therein, abhikaṅkhatā means by one desiring. Munī addresses the Thera.

1047.Nayimasmiṃ loketi devaputto attano paccakkhabhūtaṃ lokaṃ vadati.Parasminti tato aññasmiṃ. Etena sabbepi sadevake loke dasseti.Samo ca vijjatīti seṭṭho tāva tiṭṭhatu, samo eva na vijjatīti attho.Āhuneyyānaṃ paramāhutiṃ gatoti imasmiṃ loke yattakā āhuneyyā nāma, tesu sabbesu paramāhutiṃ paramaṃ āhuneyyabhāvaṃ gato. ‘‘Dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ paramaggataṃ gato’’ti vā pāṭho, tatthaparamaggatanti paramaṃ aggabhāvaṃ, aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvanti attho. Kesanti āha‘‘puññatthikānaṃ vipulapphalesina’’nti, puññena atthikānaṃ vipulaṃ mahantaṃ puññaphalaṃ icchantānaṃ, tathāgato eva lokassa puññakkhettanti dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘āhuneyyānaṃ paramaggataṃ gato’’ti paṭhanti, soyevattho.

1047. Nayimasmiṃ loke means the deva-son speaks of the world that is directly known to himself. Parasmiṃ means in another world than that. By this, he shows all the worlds together with the devas. Samo ca vijjatī means let alone a superior, even an equal does not exist. Āhuneyyānaṃ paramāhutiṃ gato means among all those in this world who are called worthy of offerings (āhuneyya), he has gone to the supreme offering, the supreme state of being worthy of offerings. Alternatively, the reading is ‘‘Dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ paramaggataṃ gato’’, where paramaggataṃ means the supreme state of excellence, the supreme state of being worthy of offerings (dakkhiṇeyya). Whose is it? He says, ‘‘puññatthikānaṃ vipulapphalesina’’, for those who desire merit, who desire abundant, great merit-fruit, the Tathāgata alone is the field of merit for the world, thus he shows. But some read ‘‘āhuneyyānaṃ paramaggataṃ gato’’, the meaning is the same.

Evaṃ kathentameva taṃ thero kallacittaṃ muducittaṃ vinīvaraṇacittaṃ udaggacittaṃ pasannacittañca ñatvā saccāni pakāsesi. So saccapariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Atha thero manussalokaṃ āgantvā bhagavato tamatthaṃ attanā ca devaputtena ca kathitaniyāmeneva ārocesi. Satthā tamatthaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattapariyāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

While he was speaking thus, the Thera, knowing that his mind was pliable, soft, free from hindrances, uplifted, and serene, revealed the Truths. At the end of the Truths, he was established in the fruit of Stream-entry (sotāpatti). Then the Thera, having come to the human world, reported that matter to the Blessed One in the very manner it had been spoken by himself and the deva-son. The Teacher, making that matter the occasion and the cause, taught the Dhamma concerning attainment. That teaching was fruitful for the great multitude.

Mahārathavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Mahāratha-vimāna is finished.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddakaṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Paramatthadīpanī, the commentary on the Khuddaka Nikāya, in the Vimānavatthu,

Cuddasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa pañcamassa mahārathavaggassa

the meaning commentary of the fifth chapter, the Mahāratha-vagga, adorned with fourteen stories,

Atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

is finished.

6. Pāyāsivaggo

6. Pāyāsi-vagga

1. Paṭhamaagāriyavimānavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the First Agāriya-vimāna

Yathāvanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsatīti agāriyavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rājagahe ekaṃ kulaṃ ubhatopasannaṃ hoti sīlācārasampannaṃ opānabhūtaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ. Te dve jayampatikā ratanattayaṃ uddissa yāvajīvaṃ puññāni katvā tato cutā tāvatiṃsesu nibbattiṃsu, tesaṃ dvādasayojanikaṃ kanakavimānaṃ nibbatti. Te tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavanti. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallānotiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Yathā vanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsatī refers to the Agāriya-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Rājagaha in the Veḷuvana. At that time, there was a family in Rājagaha that was devoted to both sides (father and mother), endowed with virtuous conduct, and a support for monks and nuns. That couple, intending the Triple Gem, performed meritorious deeds as long as they lived, and having passed away from there, were reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, where a golden mansion of twelve yojanas arose for them. There, they experienced divine bliss. Then, what should be understood further is in the same manner as stated below, beginning with Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna.

1048.

1048.

‘‘Yathā vanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsati, uyyānaseṭṭhaṃ tidasānamuttamaṃ;

"Just as a forest, Cittalata, shines forth, the best of parks, the foremost of the gods,So too, your mansion is comparable, illuminating, it stands in the sky.

1049.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo, manussabhūto kimakāsi puññaṃ;

1049.

Thero pucchi.

"Possessed of divine power, of great majesty, what merit did you do when you were a human?
By what do you have such radiant power, and your complexion shines in all directions?" –

1050.

The Thera asked.

‘‘So devaputto attamano, moggallānena pucchito;

1050.

1051.

"That deva-son, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna,
Explained the question asked, the fruit of which action this is."

‘‘Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, opānabhūtā gharamāvasimha;

1051.

1052.

"I and my wife, in the human world,
Were householders, a source of support;

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

With serene minds, food and drink,
We respectfully gave abundant alms.

Attano sampattiṃ byākāsi. Gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi.

1052.

Paṭhamaagāriyavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

"By that, I have such complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions" –

2. Dutiyaagāriyavimānavaṇṇanā

He declared his attainment. There is nothing novel in the verses either.

Yathāvanaṃ cittalatanti dutiyaagāriyavimānaṃ. Etthāpi aṭṭhuppatti anantarasadisāva.

The description of the First Agāriya-vimāna is finished.

1054.

2. Description of the Second Agāriya-vimāna

‘‘Yathā vanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsati, uyyānaseṭṭhaṃ tidasānamuttamaṃ;

Yathā vanaṃ cittalataṃ is the Second Agāriya-vimāna. Here too, the origin is similar to the immediately preceding one.

1055.

1054.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo,

"Just as a forest, Cittalata, shines forth, the best of parks, the foremost of the gods,
So too, your mansion is comparable, illuminating, it stands in the sky.

1056.

1055.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"Possessed of divine power, of great majesty,
What merit did you do when you were a human?
By what do you have such radiant power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?" – he asked;

1057.

1056.

‘‘Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, opānabhūtā gharamāvasimha;

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… the fruit of which action this is."

1058.

1057.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"I and my wife, in the human world,
Were householders, a source of support;
With serene minds, food and drink,
We respectfully gave abundant alms.

Attano sampattiṃ byākāsi. Gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi.

1058.

Dutiyaagāriyavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

"By that, I have such complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions" –

3. Phaladāyakavimānavaṇṇanā

He declared his attainment. There is nothing novel in the verses either.

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇanti phaladāyakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rañño bimbisārassa akāle ambaphalāni paribhuñjituṃ icchā uppajji. So ārāmapālaṃ āha – ‘‘mayhaṃ kho, bhaṇe, ambaphalesu icchā uppannā, tasmā ambāni me ānetvā dehī’’ti. ‘‘Deva, natthi ambesu ambaphalaṃ, apicāhaṃ tathā karomi, sace devo kiñci kālaṃ āgameti, yathā ambā na cirasseva phalaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, bhaṇe, tathā karohī’’ti. Ārāmapālo ārāmaṃ gantvā ambarukkhamūlesu paṃsuṃ apanetvā tādisaṃ paṃsuṃ ākiri, tādisañca udakaṃ āsiñci, yathā na cirasseva ambarukkhā sacchinnapattā ahesuṃ. Atha naṃ paṃsuṃ apanetvā phārusakakasaṭamissakaṃ pākatikaṃ paṃsuṃ ākiritvā sādhukaṃ udakaṃ adāsi. Tadā ambarukkhā na cireneva korakitā pallavitā kuṭamalakajātā hutvā pupphiṃsu, atha salāṭukajātā hutvā phalāni gaṇhiṃsu. Tatthekasmiṃ ambarukkhe paṭhamataraṃ cattāri phalāni manosilācuṇṇapiñjaravaṇṇāni sampannagandharasāni pariṇatāni ahesuṃ.

The description of the Second Agāriya-vimāna is finished.

So tāni gahetvā ‘‘rañño dassāmī’’ti gacchanto antarāmagge āyasmantaṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ piṇḍāya caramānaṃ disvā cintesi ‘‘imāni ambāni aggaphalabhūtāni imassa ayyassa dassāmi, kāmaṃ maṃ rājā hanatu vā pabbājetu vā, rañño hi dinne diṭṭhadhamme pūjāmattaṃ appamattakaṃ phalaṃ, ayyassa dinne pana diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi aparimāṇaṃ phalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Evaṃ pana cintetvā tāni phalāni therassa datvā rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā rañño tamatthaṃ ārocesi. Taṃ sutvā rājā rājapurise āṇāpesi ‘‘vīmaṃsatha tāva, bhaṇe, yathāyaṃ āhā’’ti. Thero pana tāni phalāni bhagavato upanāmesi. Bhagavā tesu ekaṃ sāriputtattherassa, ekaṃ mahāmoggallānattherassa, ekaṃ mahākassapattherassa datvā ekaṃ attanā paribhuñji. Purisā taṃ pavattiṃ rañño ārocesuṃ.

3. Description of the Phaladāyaka-vimāna

Rājā taṃ sutvā ‘‘dhīro vatāyaṃ puriso, yo attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā puññapasuto ahosi, attano parissamañca ṭhānagatameva akāsī’’ti tuṭṭhacitto tassa ekaṃ gāmavaraṃ vatthālaṅkārādīni ca datvā ‘‘yaṃ tayā bhaṇe ambaphaladānena puññaṃ pasutaṃ, tato me pattiṃ dehī’’ti āha. So ‘‘demi, deva, yathāsukhaṃ pattiṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti avoca. Ārāmapālo aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajji, tassa soḷasayojanikaṃ kanakavimānaṃ nibbatti sattasatakūṭāgārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ. Taṃ disvā āyasmā mahāmoggallāno pucchi –

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ is the Phaladāyaka-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Rājagaha in the Veḷuvana. At that time, King Bimbisāra had a desire to consume mango fruits out of season. He said to the park-keeper, "My friend, a desire has arisen in me for mango fruits, therefore bring me mangoes." "Your Majesty, there are no mango fruits on the trees, but I will do so; if Your Majesty waits a little while, the mangoes will soon bear fruit." "Good, friend, do so." The park-keeper went to the park, removed the soil from the base of the mango trees, and scattered such soil, and poured such water, that the mango trees soon became as if their leaves had been cut off. Then, having removed that soil, he scattered natural soil mixed with rough gravel and gave water thoroughly. Then the mango trees soon budded, sprouted, became covered with shoots, and flowered; then they became covered with young fruit and bore fruit. On one mango tree, four fruits ripened first, the color of orpiment powder, with perfect fragrance and taste.

1060.

He took them, and as he was going, thinking, "I will give them to the king," he saw Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna walking for alms in the middle of the road, and he thought, "I will give these mangoes, being the first fruits, to this venerable one; let the king kill me or banish me, for if given to the king, there will be only a little fruit, a mere act of reverence in this very life, but if given to the venerable one, there will be immeasurable fruit in this very life and in the life to come." Thinking thus, he gave those fruits to the Thera and approached the king and reported the matter to the king. Hearing that, the king commanded the royal officials, "Examine this, friend, as he says." The Thera then presented those fruits to the Blessed One. The Blessed One gave one to Sāriputta Thera, one to Mahāmoggallāna Thera, one to Mahākassapa Thera, and consumed one himself. The men reported that occurrence to the king.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato soḷasa yojanāni;

Hearing that, the king, thinking, "This man is indeed wise, who, having given up even his own life, was devoted to merit, and has put his effort in the right place," pleased, gave him a village and clothes, ornaments, etc., and said, "Friend, give me a share of the merit you have acquired by giving the mango fruits." He said, "I give it, Your Majesty, take the share as you please." The park-keeper, in the latter part of his life, passed away and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, where a golden mansion of sixteen yojanas arose for him, adorned with seven hundred peaked houses. Seeing that, Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna asked –

1061.

1060.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"This mansion with jeweled pillars is high, sixteen yojanas all around;
Seven hundred peaked houses, magnificent, with beryl pillars, delightful, beautiful terraces.

1062.

1061.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"There you sit, drink, and eat, and divine lutes play sweetly;
Sixty-four well-trained, lovely women, and divine maidens, celestial beings, magnificent,
Dance, sing, and delight.

1063.

1062.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"Possessed of divine power, of great majesty…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions."

1064.

1063.

‘‘Phaladāyī phalaṃ vipulaṃ labhati, dadamujugatesu pasannamānaso;

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… the fruit of which action this is."

1065.

1064.

‘‘Tavevāhaṃ mahāmuni, adāsiṃ caturo phale.

"The giver of fruit obtains abundant fruit, giving with a serene mind to those who are upright;
He rejoices, gone to heaven, in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, and experiences abundant merit-fruit.

1066.

1065.

‘‘Tasmā hi phalaṃ alameva dātuṃ, niccaṃ manussena sukhatthikena;

"To you, great sage, I gave four fruits.

1067.

1066.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"Therefore, it is indeed proper to give fruit, always by a person desiring happiness;
Or desiring divine pleasures, or wishing for human good fortune.

1061.Tatthaaṭṭhaṭṭhakāti ekekasmiṃ kūṭāgāre aṭṭhaṭṭhakā catusaṭṭhiparimāṇā.Sādhurūpāti rūpasampattiyā ca sīlācārasampattiyā ca sikkhāsampattiyā ca sundarasabhāvā.Dibbā ca kaññāti devaccharāyo.Tidasacarāti tidasesu sukhācārā sukhavihāriniyo.Uḷārāti uḷāravibhavā.

1067.

1064.Phaladāyīti attanā ambaphalassa dinnattā attānaṃ sandhāya vadati.Phalanti puññaphalaṃ.Vipulanti mahantaṃ labhati manussaloke patiṭṭhitoti adhippāyo.Dadanti dadanto dānahetu.Ujugatesūti ujupaṭipannesu.Saggagatoti uppajjanavasena saggaṃ gato, tatthāpitidivetāvatiṃsabhavaneanubhoti ca puññaphalaṃ vipulaṃyathāhaṃ, evaṃ aññopīti attho.

"By that, I have such complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions" – so he declared;

1066.Tasmāti yasmā catunnaṃ phalānaṃ dānamattena īdisī sampatti adhigatā, tasmā.Alamevayuttameva.Niccanti sabbakālaṃ.Dibbānīti devalokapariyāpannāni.Manussasobhaggatanti manussesu subhagabhāvaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1061. Therein, aṭṭhaṭṭhakā means in each peaked house there are sixty-four, eight times eight. Sādhurūpā means beautiful in terms of beauty of form, virtue of conduct, and virtue of training. Dibbā ca kaññā means celestial nymphs. Tidasacarā means those who live happily in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, who have a happy life. Uḷārā means of magnificent splendor.

Phaladāyakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

1064. Phaladāyī means he speaks referring to himself, because of the fruit that was given by himself. Phalaṃ means merit-fruit. Vipulaṃ means he obtains great fruit, the idea is that it is established in the human world. Dadaṃ means giving, because of the act of giving. Ujugatesū means to those who are upright in conduct. Saggagato means gone to heaven in terms of rebirth, and even there, in the tidive, in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, anubhoti ca puññaphalaṃ vipulaṃ means just as I do, so too others, is the meaning.

4. Paṭhamaupassayadāyakavimānavaṇṇanā

1066. Tasmā means because such attainment was gained merely by giving four fruits, therefore. Alameva means it is indeed fitting. Niccaṃ means always. Dibbānī means those pertaining to the heavenly world. Manussasobhaggataṃ means a state of good fortune among humans. The rest is as has been said.

Cando yathā vigatavalāhake nabheti upassayadāyakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena aññataro bhikkhu gāmakāvāse vassaṃ vasitvā vutthavasso pavāretvā bhagavantaṃ vandituṃ rājagahaṃ gacchanto antarāmagge sāyaṃ aññataraṃ gāmaṃ pavisitvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesanto aññataraṃ upāsakaṃ disvā pucchi – ‘‘upāsaka, imasmiṃ gāme atthi kiñci pabbajitānaṃ vasanayoggaṭṭhāna’’nti. Upāsako pasannacitto gehaṃ gantvā bhariyāya saddhiṃ mantetvā therassa vasanayoggaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā tattha āsanaṃ paññāpetvā pādodakaṃ pādapīṭhaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā theraṃ pavesetvā tasmiṃ pāde dhovante padīpaṃ ujjāletvā mañce paccattharaṇāni paññāpetvā adāsi. Svātanāya ca nimantetvā therassa dutiyadivase bhojetvā pānakatthāya guḷapiṇḍañca datvā theraṃ gacchantaṃ anugantvā nivatti. So aparena samayena saha bhariyāya kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno dvīhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Cando yathā vigatavalāhake nabhe refers to the upassayadāyakavimāna. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying at the Veḷuvana in Rājagaha. At that time, a certain bhikkhu, having spent the rains in a village residence, having completed the rains and made pavāraṇā, was going to Rājagaha to pay homage to the Buddha. On the way, in the evening, he entered a certain village, and looking for a place to stay, he saw a certain upāsaka and asked, "Upāsaka, is there any suitable dwelling place for renunciants in this village?" The upāsaka, with a pleased mind, went home and consulted with his wife, and having decided on a suitable place for the thera to stay, he arranged a seat there, provided water for the feet and a footstool, invited the thera inside, and while he was washing his feet, he lit a lamp and provided bed coverings on a cot. The next day, having invited the thera for a meal, he fed him on the second day and gave him a lump of molasses for refreshment, and accompanied the thera as he departed, then returned. Later, he and his wife died and were reborn in a twelve-yojana golden mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna questioned him with two verses:

1069.

1069.

‘‘Cando yathā vigatavalāhake nabhe, obhāsayaṃ gacchati antalikkhe;

"As the moon, free from clouds in the sky, goes shining through the sky,
So too, your mansion, resembling it, stands shining in the sky.

1070.

1070.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo, manussabhūto kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"You have attained divine power, great is your might, what merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what are you so radiant with glory, and your complexion shines in all directions?"

So devaputto imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

That devaputta answered with these verses:

1071.

1071.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That devaputta, with a glad heart…pe…the fruit of what action is this?"

1072.

1072.

‘‘Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, upassayaṃ arahato adamha;

"I and my wife, in the world of humans, gave lodging to an arahant;
Food and drink, with pleased minds, respectfully we gave a large gift.

1073.

1073.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…and my complexion shines in all directions."
What needs to be said about the verses there has already been said in the manner described below;

Paṭhamaupassayadāyakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the First Upassayadāyaka Vimāna is finished.

5. Dutiyaupassayadāyakavimānavaṇṇanā
5. Description of the Second Upassayadāyaka Vimāna

Sūriyoyathā vigatavalāhake nabheti dutiyaupassayadāyakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena sambahulā bhikkhū gāmakāvāse vassaṃ vasitvā bhagavantaṃ dassanāya rājagahaṃ uddissa gacchantā sāyaṃ aññataraṃ gāmaṃ sampāpuṇiṃsu. Sesaṃ anantaravimānasadisameva.

Sūriyo yathā vigatavalāhake nabhe refers to the Second Upassayadāyakavimāna. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying at the Veḷuvana in Rājagaha. At that time, many bhikkhus, having spent the rains in a village residence, were going to Rājagaha intending to see the Buddha, and in the evening they arrived at a certain village. The rest is just like the previous vimāna.

1075.

1075.

‘‘Sūriyo yathā vigatavalāhake nabhe…pe….

"Sūriyo yathā vigatavalāhake nabhe…pe….
(It should be expanded as in the previous vimāna;)

1079.

1079.

‘‘Vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"And my complexion shines in all directions."
There is nothing new in the verses there either;

Dutiyaupassayadāyakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Second Upassayadāyaka Vimāna is finished.

6. Bhikkhādāyakavimānavaṇṇanā
6. Description of the Bhikkhādāyaka Vimāna

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānanti bhikkhādāyakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena aññataro bhikkhu addhānamaggapaṭipanno aññataraṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ekassa gharaddhāre aṭṭhāsi. Tattha aññataro puriso dhotahatthapādo ‘‘bhuñjissāmī’’ti nisinno bhojanaṃ upanetvā pātiyā pakkhitte taṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā pātiyā bhattaṃ tassa bhikkhuno patte ākiranto tena ‘‘ekadesameva dehī’’ti vuttopi sabbameva ākiri. So bhikkhu anumodanaṃ vatvā pakkāmi. So puriso ‘‘chātajjhattassa bhikkhuno mayā abhuñjitvā bhattaṃ dinna’’nti anussaranto uḷāraṃ pītisomanassaṃ paṭilabhi. So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallānatthero devacārikaṃ caranto mahatiyā deviddhiyā virocamānaṃ disvā imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ refers to the bhikkhādāyakavimāna. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying at the Veḷuvana in Rājagaha. At that time, a certain bhikkhu, travelling on a long road, entered a certain village for alms and stood at the door of a house. There, a certain man, having washed his hands and feet, sat down thinking, "I will eat," and when the food was brought and placed in the bowl, seeing that bhikkhu, even when told by him, "Give only a portion," he poured all the food in the bowl into the bhikkhu's bowl. That bhikkhu, after saying anumodana, departed. That man, recalling that he had given food to the hungry bhikkhu without eating himself, obtained great joy and happiness. Later, he died and was reborn in a twelve-yojana golden mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Āyasmā Mahāmoggallānatthera, wandering on a divine tour, seeing him shining with great divine power, questioned him with these verses:

1081.

1081.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasa yojanāni;

"High is this mansion with jeweled pillars, twelve yojanas all around;
Seven hundred lofty gabled houses, with veḷuriya pillars, delightful and beautiful platforms.

1082.

1082.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"You have attained divine power, great is your might…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions."

Sopi tassa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

He also answered him with these verses:

1083.

1083.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That devaputta, with a glad heart…pe…the fruit of what action is this?"

1084.

1084.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, disvāna bhikkhuṃ tasitaṃ kilantaṃ;

"I, a human being among humans, seeing a bhikkhu thirsty and tired;
I offered a single alms-portion, at that time, I did it completely with the food.

1085.

1085.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe… vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…and my complexion shines in all directions."

1084.Tatthaekāhaṃ bhikkhanti ekaṃ ahaṃ bhikkhāmattaṃ, ekaṃ bhattavaḍḍhitakanti attho.Paṭipādayissanti paṭipādesiṃ adāsiṃ.Samaṅgi bhattenāti bhattena samaṅgībhūtaṃ, laddhabhikkhanti attho. Evaṃ mahāthero tena devaputtena attano sucaritakamme pakāsite saparivārassa tassa dhammaṃ desetvā manussalokamāgato, taṃ pavattiṃ sammāsambuddhassa kathesi. Satthā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattamahājanassa dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

1084. There, ekāhaṃ bhikkha means a single alms-portion for me, a single serving of food. Paṭipādayissaṃ means paṭipādesiṃ, I gave. Samaṅgi bhattenā means complete with food, having received alms. In this way, the great thera, having heard the devaputta declare his own good conduct, taught the Dhamma to him and his retinue, came to the human world, and told that account to the Sammāsambuddha. The Teacher, after making that the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled crowd. That teaching was beneficial to the great crowd.

Bhikkhādāyakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Bhikkhādāyaka Vimāna is finished.

7. Yavapālakavimānavaṇṇanā
7. Description of the Yavapālaka Vimāna

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇaṃ vimānanti yavapālakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rājagahe aññataro duggatadārako yavakhettaṃ rakkhati. So ekadivasaṃ pātarāsatthāya kummāsaṃ labhitvā ‘‘khettaṃ gantvā bhuñjissāmī’’ti taṃ kummāsaṃ gahetvā yavakhettaṃ gantvā rukkhamūle nisīdi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe aññataro khīṇāsavatthero maggappaṭipanno upakaṭṭhe kāle taṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā yavapālakena nisinnaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ upasaṅkami. Yavapālako velaṃ oloketvā ‘‘kacci, bhante, āhāro laddho’’ti āha. Thero tuṇhī ahosi. So aladdhabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘bhante, upakaṭṭhā velā, piṇḍāya caritvā bhuñjituṃ na sakkā, mayhaṃ anukampāya imaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti vatvā therassa taṃ kummāsaṃ adāsi. Thero taṃ anukampanto tassa passantasseva taṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ vatvā pakkāmi. Sopi dārako ‘‘sudinnaṃ vata mayā īdisassa kummāsadānaṃ dadantenā’’ti cittaṃ pasādetvā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane vuttanayeneva vimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallānatthero imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ refers to the yavapālakavimāna. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying at the Veḷuvana in Rājagaha. At that time, a certain poor boy in Rājagaha was guarding a barley field. One day, having obtained kummāsa for breakfast, thinking, "I will go to the field and eat," he took that kummāsa and went to the barley field and sat at the foot of a tree. At that moment, a certain khīṇāsava thera, travelling on the road, arrived near that place at mealtime and approached the foot of the tree where the barley field guard was sitting. The barley field guard, looking at the time, said, "Bhante, have you received food?" The thera was silent. Knowing that he had not received any, he said, "Bhante, it is near mealtime, it is not possible to go for alms and eat, please consume this kummāsa out of compassion for me," and gave that kummāsa to the thera. The thera, being compassionate towards him, consumed it while he was watching and, after saying anumodana, departed. That boy, thinking, "It is well-given by me, having given such a kummāsa offering," having pleased his mind, later died and was reborn in a mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, in the manner described. Āyasmā Mahāmoggallānatthera questioned him with these verses:

1087.

1087.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ…pe…

"High is this mansion with jeweled pillars…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions."

Sopi tassa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

He also answered him with these verses:

1089.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

1089."That devaputta, with a glad heart…pe…the fruit of what action is this?"

1090.

1090.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, ahosiṃ yavapālako;

"I, a human being among humans, was a barley field guard;
I saw a bhikkhu without defilements, of exceedingly serene and unclouded mind.

1091.

1091.

‘‘Tassa adāsahaṃ bhāgaṃ, pasanno sehi pāṇibhi;

"To him, I gave a portion, pleased with my own hands;
Having given a lump of kummāsa, I rejoice in the Nandana grove.

1092.

1092.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions."

Tattha gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi.

There is nothing new in the verses there either.

Yavapālakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Yavapālaka Vimāna is finished.

8. Paṭhamakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā
8. Description of the First Kuṇḍalī Vimāna

Alaṅkatomalyadharo suvatthoti kuṇḍalīvimānaṃ. Tassa kā upatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena dve aggasāvakā saparivārā kāsīsu cārikaṃ carantā sūriyatthaṅgamanavelāyaṃ aññataraṃ vihāraṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā tassa vihārassa gocaragāme aññataro upāsako there upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā pādadhovanaṃ pādabbhañjanatelaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ padīpiyañca upanetvā svātanāya ca nimantetvā dutiyadivase mahādānaṃ pavattesi, therā tassa anumodanaṃ vatvā pakkamiṃsu. So aparena samayena kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallānatthero imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Alaṅkato malyadharo suvattho refers to the kuṇḍalīvimāna. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying at the Jetavana in Sāvatthi. At that time, two chief disciples, along with their retinue, were wandering in the Kāsī region, and at sunset they arrived at a certain monastery. Hearing that account, a certain upāsaka in the village near that monastery approached the theras, paid homage, brought water for washing the feet, oil for massaging the feet, a cot, a seat, coverings, and a lamp, and having invited them for the next day, he gave a great gift on the second day, and the theras, after saying anumodana to him, departed. Later, he died and was reborn in a twelve-yojana golden mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Āyasmā Mahāmoggallānatthera questioned him with these verses:

1094.

1094.

‘‘Alaṅkato malyadharo suvattho, sukuṇḍalī kappitakesamassu;

"Adorned, garlanded, well-clothed, with beautiful earrings, hair and beard well-groomed;
With bracelets on his arms, glorious, like the moon in a divine mansion.

1095.

1095.

‘‘Dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ, aṭṭhaṭṭhakā sikkhitā sādhurūpā;

"And divine lutes play sweetly, eight times eight skilled and beautiful ones;
And divine maidens, dwellers of the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, lofty, dance, sing, and delight.

1096.

1096.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"You have attained divine power, great is your might…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions."

Sopi tassa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

He also answered him with these verses:

1097.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

1097."That devaputta, with a glad heart…pe…the fruit of what action is this?"

1098.

1098.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, disvāna samaṇe sīlavante;

"I, a human being among humans, having seen samaṇas endowed with virtue;
Accomplished in knowledge and conduct, glorious, learned, possessed of the cessation of craving;
Food and drink, with pleased mind, respectfully I gave a large gift.

1099.

1099.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions."

1094.Tatthasukuṇḍalīti sundarehi kuṇḍalehi alaṅkatakaṇṇo. ‘‘Sakuṇḍalī’’tipi pāṭho, sadisaṃ kuṇḍalaṃ sakuṇḍalaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti sakuṇḍalī, yuttakuṇḍalī aññamaññañca tuyhañca anucchavikakuṇḍalīti attho.Kappitakesamassūti sammākappitakesamassu.Āmuttahatthābharaṇoti paṭimukkaaṅguliyādihatthābharaṇo.

1094. There, sukuṇḍalī means with ears adorned with beautiful earrings. "Sakuṇḍalī" is also a reading, sadisaṃ kuṇḍalaṃ sakuṇḍalaṃ, he has that, therefore he is sakuṇḍalī, wearing matching earrings, fitting earrings appropriate for each other and for you. Kappitakesamassū means with hair and beard well-groomed. Āmuttahatthābharaṇo means wearing bracelets and rings.

1098.Taṇhakkhayūpapanneti taṇhakkhayaṃ arahattaṃ, nibbānameva vā upagate, adhigatavanteti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1098. Taṇhakkhayūpapanne means approaching the destruction of craving, arahantship, or indeed, nibbāna, having attained it. The rest is as has been said.

Paṭhamakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the First Kuṇḍalī Vimāna is finished.

9. Dutiyakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā
9. Description of the Second Kuṇḍalī Vimāna

Alaṅkato malyadharo suvatthoti dutiyakuṇḍalīvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena dve aggasāvakā kāsīsu janapadacārikaṃ carantātiādi sabbaṃ anantarasadisameva.

Alaṅkato malyadharo suvattho refers to the Second Kuṇḍalīvimāna. What is its origin? The Buddha was staying at the Jetavana in Sāvatthi. At that time, two chief disciples were wandering in the Kāsī region, and so on, everything is just like the previous one.

1101.

1101.

‘‘Alaṅkato malyadharo suvattho, sukuṇḍalī kappitakesamassu;

"Adorned, garlanded, well-clothed, with beautiful earrings, hair and beard well-groomed;
With bracelets on his arms, glorious, like the moon in a divine mansion.

1102.

1102.

‘‘Dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"And divine lutes play sweetly;
Eight times eight skilled and beautiful ones;
And divine maidens, dwellers of the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, lofty, dance, sing, and delight.

1103.

1103.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"You have attained divine power, great is your might…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions,"—he asked;

1104.

1104.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That devaputto, with a glad heart…pe…the fruit of what action is this?"

1105.

1105.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, disvāna samaṇe sādhurūpe;

"I, a human being among humans, having seen samaṇas of beautiful form;
Accomplished in knowledge and conduct, glorious, learned, virtuous, serene;
Food and drink, with pleased mind, respectfully I gave a large gift.

1106.

1106.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my complexion…pe…
And my complexion shines in all directions."

Gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi.

There is nothing new in the verses there either.

Dutiyakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Second Kuṇḍalī Vimāna is finished.

10. (Uttara) pāyāsivimānavaṇṇanā
10. (Uttara) Explanation of the Pāyāsi-vimāna

Yā devarājassa sabhā sudhammāti uttaravimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati parinibbute dhātuvibhāge ca kate tattha tattha thūpesu patiṭṭhāpiyamānesu dhammavinayaṃ saṅgāyituṃ uccinitvā gahitesu mahākassapappamukhesu mahātheresu yāva vassūpagamanā aññesu ca theresu attano attano parisāya saddhiṃ tattha tattha vasantesu āyasmā kumārakassapo pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ setabyanagaraṃ gantvā siṃsapāvane vasi. Atha pāyāsi rājañño therassa tattha vasanabhāvaṃ sutvā mahatā janakāyena parivuto taṃ upasaṅkamitvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā nisinno attano diṭṭhigataṃ pavedesi. Atha naṃ thero candimasūriyūdāharaṇādīhi paralokassa atthibhāvaṃ pakāsento anekavihitahetūpamālaṅkataṃ diṭṭhigaṇṭhiviniveṭhanaṃ nānānayavicittaṃ pāyāsisuttaṃ (dī. ni. 2.406 ādayo) desetvā taṃ diṭṭhisampadāyaṃ patiṭṭhāpesi.

Yā devarājassa sabhā sudhammā refers to the Uttara-vimāna. What is its origin? After the Blessed One passed into Nibbāna and the distribution of relics was done, with stūpas being established in various places, the great elders, led by Mahākassapa, were chosen to recite the Dhamma and Vinaya. While they and other elders were residing in various places with their respective assemblies until the retreat of the rainy season, Āyasmā Kumārakassapa, along with five hundred monks, went to Setabya-nagara and stayed in the Simsapa forest. Then, King Pāyāsi, hearing of the Elder's presence there, approached him surrounded by a large crowd, exchanged greetings, and sat down, revealing his doctrinal views. The Elder, using examples like the moon and sun, proclaimed the existence of the afterlife, refuting his views with various well-reasoned arguments and analogies in the Pāyāsi Sutta (Dī. Ni. 2.406 ff), thus establishing him in right view.

So visuddhadiṭṭhiko hutvā samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikādīnaṃ dānaṃ dento anuḷārajjhāsayatāya lūkhaṃ adāsi ghāsacchādanamattaṃ kaṇājakaṃ bilaṅgadutiyaṃ sāṇāni ca vatthāni. Evaṃ pana asakkaccadānaṃ datvā kāyassa bhedā hīnakāyaṃ upapajji cātumahārājikānaṃ sahabyataṃ. Tassa pana kiccākiccesu yuttappayutto uttaro nāma māṇavo ahosi dāne byāvaṭo. So sakkaccadānaṃ datvā tāvatiṃsakāyaṃ upapanno, tassa dvādasayojanikaṃ vimānaṃ nibbatti. So kataññutaṃ vibhāvento saha vimānena kumārakassapattheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vimānato oruyha pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ thero –

Having attained right view, he gave alms to ascetics, brahmins, beggars, and the like, but being of a coarse disposition, he gave meagerly, just enough food and clothing—coarse grains with herbs and hemp garments. Giving alms thus without respect, upon the dissolution of his body, he was reborn in an inferior realm, among the retinue of the Four Great Kings. His attendant, named Uttara, diligently attended to his duties and was engaged in giving alms. Having given alms respectfully, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa realm, where a twelve-yojana wide celestial mansion arose for him. Showing his gratitude, he approached the Elder Kumārakassapa with his mansion, descended from it, prostrated with the five-point prostration, and stood with his hands in añjali. The Elder asked him:

1108.

1108.

‘‘Yā devarājassa sabhā sudhammā, yatthacchati devasaṅgho samaggo;

"Like Sudhammā Hall, the assembly of the King of Gods,
Where the assembly of devas gathers in harmony;
So too, this mansion of yours, resembling it,
Stands illuminating the sky.

1109.

1109.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"You have attained divine power, great is your glory...pe...
And your radiance illuminates all directions."

1110.

1110.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… by what deed is this the fruit?"

1111.

1111.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, rañño pāyāsissa ahosiṃ māṇavo;

"Among humans, I was a human,
A servant of King Pāyāsi;
Having obtained wealth, I shared it,
And those dear to me were virtuous.

1112.

1112.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By that, such is my radiance...pe...
And my hue illuminates all directions."

So devaputto tassa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi.

That deva-son explained with these verses.

1108.Tatthadevarājassāti sakkassa.Sabhā sudhammāti evaṃnāmakaṃ santhāgāraṃ.Yatthāti yassaṃ sabhāyaṃ.Acchatīti nisīdati.Devasaṅghoti tāvatiṃsadevakāyo.Samaggoti sahito sannipatito.

1108. There, devarājassa means of Sakka. Sabhā sudhammā means a meeting hall of that name. Yattha means in which assembly. Acchatī means sits. Devasaṅgho means the assembly of Tāvatiṃsa devas. Samaggo means together, assembled.

1111.Pāyāsissaahosiṃ māṇavoti pāyāsirājaññassa kiccākiccakaro daharatāya māṇavo, nāmena pana uttaro nāma ahosiṃ.Saṃvibhāgaṃ akāsinti ahameva abhuñjitvā yathāladdhaṃ dhanaṃ dānamukhe pariccajanavasena saṃvibhajanaṃ akāsiṃ. Annañca pānañca pariccajantoti vacanaseso. Atha vā dānaṃ vipulaṃ adāsiṃ. Kathaṃ?Sakkaccaṃ. Kīdisaṃ?Annañca pānañcāti yojetabbaṃ.

1111. Pāyāsissa ahosiṃ māṇavo means I was a young attendant, by name Uttara, who performed various duties for King Pāyāsi. Saṃvibhāgaṃ akāsi means, without consuming it myself, I shared the wealth I had obtained by giving it away in various acts of charity. The phrase "Annañca pānañca pariccajanto" (giving up food and drink) remains. Alternatively, dānaṃ vipulaṃ adāsiṃ (I gave abundant alms). How? Sakkaccaṃ (Respectfully). What kind? Annañca pānañcā (Food and drink) should be connected.

(Uttara) pāyāsivimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

(Uttara) Explanation of the Pāyāsi-vimāna is complete.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus ends the commentary on the Vimanavatthu in the Khuddaka-aṭṭhakathā called Paramatthadīpanī,

Dasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa chaṭṭhassa pāyāsivaggassa

The meaning commentary of the sixth Pāyāsi chapter,

Atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Decorated with ten subjects.

7. Sunikkhittavimānavaggo

7. Sunikkhittavimāna Chapter

1. Cittalatāvimānavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Cittalatā-vimāna

Yathāvanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsatīti cittalatāvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ aññataro upāsako daliddo appabhogo paresaṃ kammaṃ katvā jīvati. So saddho pasanno jiṇṇe vuḍḍhe mātāpitaro posento ‘‘itthiyo nāma patikule ṭhitā issariyaṃ karonti, sassusasurānaṃ manāpacāriniyo dullabhā’’ti mātāpitūnaṃ cittadukkhaṃ pariharanto dārapariggahaṃ akatvā sayameva ne upaṭṭhahati, sīlāni rakkhati, uposathaṃ upavasati, yathāvibhavaṃ dānāni deti. So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu dvādasayojanike vimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayena gantvā katakammaṃ imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Yathā vanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsatī refers to the Cittalatā-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jeta's Grove. At that time in Sāvatthī, there was a certain lay follower who was poor, with little possessions, and living by working for others. Being faithful and devoted, he supported his aged parents, thinking, "Women, when staying in their husband's family, hold authority, and those who please their mothers-in-law and fathers-in-law are rare." Avoiding the mental distress of his parents, he did not take a wife but attended to them himself, kept the precepts, observed the Uposatha, and gave alms according to his means. Later, upon death, he was reborn among the Tāvatiṃsa devas in a twelve-yojana wide celestial mansion. Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna, going there as described earlier, questioned him about his deeds with these verses—

1114.

1114.

‘‘Yathā vanaṃ cittalataṃ pabhāsati, uyyānaseṭṭhaṃ tidasānamuttamaṃ;

"As the Cittalatā grove shines forth,
The finest garden, the best of the Tidasas,
So too, this mansion of yours, resembling it,
Stands illuminating the sky.

1115.

1115.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"You have attained divine power, great is your glory...pe...
And your radiance illuminates all directions."

1116.

1116.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… by what deed is this the fruit?"

1117.

1117.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, daliddo atāṇo kapaṇo kammakaro ahosiṃ;

"Among humans, I was a human,
Poor, without refuge, wretched, a laborer I was;
And I supported my aged parents,
And those dear to me were virtuous.

1118.

1118.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"By that, such is my radiance...pe...
And my hue illuminates all directions."

Sopi tassa byākāsi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

He too explained to him. The rest is as previously stated.

Cittalatāvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Cittalatā-vimāna is complete.

2. Nandanavimānavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Nandanā-vimāna

Yathāvanaṃ nandanaṃ pabhāsatīti nandanavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ aññataro upāsakotiādi sabbaṃ anantaravimānasadisaṃ. Ayaṃ pana dārapariggahaṃ katvā mātāpitaro posesīti ayameva viseso.

Yathā vanaṃ nandanaṃ pabhāsatī refers to the Nandanā-vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jeta's Grove. At that time in Sāvatthī, a certain lay follower… everything is similar to the previous vimāna. However, this one difference is that he had taken a wife and supported his parents.

1120.

1120.

Yathā vanaṃ nandanaṃ pabhāsati, uyyānaseṭṭhaṃ tidasānamuttamaṃ;

As the Nandana grove shines forth,
The finest garden, the best of the Tidasas,
So too, this mansion of yours, resembling it,
Stands illuminating the sky.

1121.

1121.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatīti.

"You have attained divine power, great is your glory...pe...
And your radiance illuminates all directions."

1122.

1122.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… by what deed is this the fruit?"

1123.

1123.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, daliddo atāṇo kapaṇo kammakaro ahosiṃ;

"Among humans, I was a human,
Poor, without refuge, wretched, a laborer I was;
And I supported my aged parents,
And those dear to me were virtuous.

1124.

1124.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti. –

"By that, such is my radiance...pe...
And my hue illuminates all directions."

Gāthāhi byākāsi. Tattha gāthāsupi apubbaṃ natthi.

He explained with these verses. There is nothing new in these verses.

Nandanavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Nandanā-vimāna is complete.

3. Maṇithūṇavimānavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Maṇithūṇa-vimāna

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇaṃ vimānanti maṇithūṇavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sambahulā therā bhikkhū araññāyatane viharanti. Tesaṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya gamanamagge eko upāsako visamaṃ samaṃ karoti, kaṇṭake nīharati, gacchagumbe apaneti, udakakāle mātikāsu setuṃ bandhati, vivanaṭṭhānesu chāyārukkhe ropeti, jalāsayesu mattikaṃ uddharitvā te puthulagambhīre karoti, titthe sampādeti, yathāvibhavaṃ dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ rakkhati. So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallānatthero upasaṅkamitvā imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimāna refers to the Maṇithūṇa-vimāna (Jewel-Pillar Mansion). What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jeta's Grove. At that time, many elder monks were living in a forest dwelling. On the path they took for alms-round in the village, a certain lay follower leveled uneven ground, removed thorns, cleared bushes and thickets, built bridges over muddy areas during the rainy season, planted shade trees in open spaces, dredged the ponds, making them wide and deep, developed the landing places, gave alms according to his means, and kept the precepts. Later, upon death, he was reborn among the Tāvatiṃsa devas in a twelve-yojana wide golden mansion. Āyasmā Mahāmoggallāna, approaching him, questioned him with these verses—

1126.

1126.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasa yojanāni;

"High is this jewel-pillared mansion,
Twelve yojanas all around;
Seven hundred lofty peaked houses,
With pillars of beryl, beautiful roofs.

1127.

1127.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"There you dwell, drink, and eat,
And divine lutes play sweetly;
Divine flavors, these five sense pleasures,
And golden-hued women dance.

1128.

1128.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca te sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"By what is such radiance yours…pe…and your hue illuminates all directions?"

Sopi tassa gāthāhi byākāsi –

He too explained to him with verses—

1130.

1130.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

"That deva-son, delighted…pe… by what deed is this the fruit?"

1131.

1131.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, vivane pathe saṅkamanaṃ akāsiṃ;

"Among humans, I was a human,
In the wilderness, I made causeways on paths;
And I planted park trees,
And those dear to me were virtuous.

1132.

1132.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo…pe…vaṇṇo ca me sabbadisā pabhāsatī’’ti.

"By that, such is my radiance...pe...and your hue illuminates all directions."

1131.Tatthavivaneti araññe.Ārāmarukkhāni cāārāmabhūte rukkhe, ārāmaṃ katvā tattha rukkhe ropesinti attho. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayameva.

1131. There, vivane means in the wilderness. Ārāmarukkhāni ca means trees in a park; the meaning is that he made a park and planted trees there. The rest is all as previously stated.

Maṇithūṇavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Maṇithūṇa-vimāna is complete.

4. Suvaṇṇavimānavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Suvaṇṇavimāna

Sovaṇṇamayepabbatasminti suvaṇṇavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā andhakavinde viharati. Tena samayena aññataro upāsako saddho pasanno vibhavasampanno tassa gāmassa avidūre aññatarasmiṃ muṇḍakapabbate sabbākārasampannaṃ bhagavato vasanānucchavikaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ kāretvā tattha bhagavantaṃ vasāpento sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahi, sayañca niccasīle patiṭṭhito suvisuddhasīlasaṃvaro hutvā kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Tassa kammānubhāvasaṃsūcakaṃ nānāratanaraṃsijālasamujjalaṃ vicittavedikāparikkhittaṃ vividhavipulālaṅkāropasobhitaṃ suvibhattabhittitthambhasopānaṃ ārāmaramaṇīyakaṃ kañcanapabbatamuddhani vimānaṃ uppajji. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno devacārikaṃ caranto disvā imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Sovaṇṇamaye pabbatasmiṃ refers to the Suvaṇṇavimāna (Golden Mansion). What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Andhakavinda. At that time, a certain lay follower, faithful and devoted, wealthy, had a monastery built with all desirable features suitable for the Blessed One to reside in, on a certain Muṇḍaka mountain not far from his village. He respectfully attended to the Blessed One, and himself, established in the constant practice of morality, maintaining perfectly pure moral restraint, upon death, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Indicating the effect of his meritorious action, a mansion arose on the peak of a golden mountain, radiant with a network of various gem rays, surrounded by beautiful platforms, adorned with diverse and extensive decorations, with well-arranged walls, pillars, and stairs, and a beautiful park.

1134.

1134.

‘‘Sovaṇṇamaye pabbatasmiṃ, vimānaṃ sabbatopabhaṃ;

"On a golden mountain,
A mansion shining everywhere;
Covered with a golden net,
Adorned with a lattice of small bells.

1135.

1135.

‘‘Aṭṭhaṃsā sukatā thambhā, sabbe veḷuriyāmayā;

"Eight sections are well-made pillars,
All made of beryl;
For each section,
Seven jewels are crafted.

1136.

1136.

‘‘Veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassa, phalikā rūpiyassa ca;

"Of beryl and gold,
Of crystal and silver;
Of ruby, coral, and pearls,
And red garnet stones.

1137.

1137.

‘‘Citrā manoramā bhūmi, na tatthuddhaṃsatī rajo;

"The ground is beautiful and delightful,
No dust rises there;
Peacocks and flocks of geese,
Ornament the gables well-made.

1138.

1138.

‘‘Sopānāni ca cattāri, nimmitā caturo disā;

"And four stairways,
Are made in the four directions;
Filled with various jewel chambers,
It shines like the sun.

1139.

1139.

‘‘Vediyā catasso tattha, vibhattā bhāgaso mitā;

"Four platforms are there,
Divided into measured portions;
They gleam and shine,
On all four sides.

1140.

1140.

‘‘Tasmiṃ vimāne pavare, devaputto mahappabho;

"In that excellent mansion,
The deva-son is of great splendor;
You outshine with your radiance,
Like the rising sun.

1141.

1141.

‘‘Dānassa te idaṃ phalaṃ, atho sīlassa vā pana;

"Is this the fruit of giving, or perhaps of morality,
Or of the act of añjali? Tell me when asked."

Sopissa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi –

He too explained with these verses—

1142.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe… yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

1142. "That deva-son, delighted…pe… by what deed is this the fruit?"

1143.

1143.

‘‘Ahaṃ andhakavindasmiṃ, buddhassādiccabandhuno;

"At Andhakavinda,
For the Buddha, kinsman of the sun,
I had a monastery built for the Teacher,
Gladly with my own hands.

1144.

1144.

‘‘Tattha gandhañca mālañca, paccayañca vilepanaṃ;

"There, I gave perfume, garlands, requisites, and ointment,
To the Teacher's monastery, with a clear mind;
By that, this has been attained by me, I exercise power in Nandana.

1145.

1145.

‘‘Nandane ca vane ramme, nānādijagaṇāyute;

"And in Nandana, in a delightful forest, filled with flocks of various birds,
I rejoice with dancing and song, attended by nymphs."

1134.Tatthasabbatopabhanti sabbabhāgehi pabhāsantaṃ pabhāmuñcanakaṃ.Kiṅkiṇijālakappitanti kappitakiṅkiṇikajālaṃ.

1134. There, sabbatopabha means shining, emitting light in every part. Kiṅkiṇijālakappita means a net of bells arranged.

1135.Sabbe veḷuriyāmayāti sabbe thambhā veḷuriyamaṇimayā. Tattha panaekamekāya aṃsiyāti aṭṭhaṃsesu thambhesu ekamekasmiṃ aṃsabhāge.Ratanā satta nimmitāti sattaratanakammanimmitā, ekeko aṃso sattaratanamayoti attho.

1135. Sabbe veḷuriyāmayā means all the pillars are made of veḷuriya gem. Here, ekamekāya aṃsiyā means in each section of the eight pillars. Ratanā satta nimmitā means made with the work of the seven jewels; each section is made of the seven jewels, is the meaning.

1136.‘‘Veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassā’’tiādinā nānāratanāni dasseti. Tatthaveḷūriyasuvaṇṇassāti veḷuriyena ca suvaṇṇena ca nimmitā, citrāti vā yojanā. Karaṇatthe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.Phalikā rūpiyassa cāti etthāpi eseva nayo.Masāragallamuttāhīti kabaramaṇīhi.Lohitaṅgamaṇīhi cāti rattamaṇīhi.

1136. "Veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassā" etc., shows the various jewels. There, veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassā means made of veḷuriya and gold, or it could be construed as variegated. Here, this possessive word is in the sense of instrumentality. Phalikā rūpiyassa cā also has the same method. Masāragallamuttāhī means with variegated jewels. Lohitaṅgamaṇīhi cā means with red jewels.

1137.Na tatthuddhaṃsatī rajoti maṇimayabhūmikattā na tasmiṃ vimāne rajo uggacchati.Gopānasīgaṇāti gopānasīsamūhā.Pītāti pītavaṇṇā, suvaṇṇamayā ceva phussarāgādimaṇimayā cāti attho.Kūṭaṃ dhārentīti sattaratanamayaṃ kaṇṇikaṃ dhārenti.

1137. Na tatthuddhaṃsatī rajo means because the ground is made of gems, dust does not rise in that mansion. Gopānasīgaṇā means groups of gopānasī. Pītā means yellow in color, made of gold and phussarāga gems, is the meaning. Kūṭaṃ dhārentī means bearing a pinnacle made of the seven jewels.

1138-9.Nānāratanagabbhehīti nānāratanamayehi ovarakehi.Vediyāti vedikā.Catassoti catūsu disāsu catasso. Tenāha‘‘samantā caturo disā’’ti.

1138-9. Nānāratanagabbhehī means with various gem-made chambers. Vediyā means a railing. Catasso means four in the four directions. Therefore, he said, "samantā caturo disā".

1140.Mahappabhoti mahājutiko.Udayantoti uggacchanto.Bhāṇumāti ādicco.

1140. Mahappabho means of great radiance. Udayanto means rising. Bhāṇumā means the sun.

1143.Sehi pāṇibhīti kāyasāraṃ puññaṃ pasavanto attano pāṇīhi taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ karonto vihāraṃ satthu kāresinti yojanā. Atha vāsehi pāṇibhīti tattha andhakavindasmiṃ gandhañca mālañca paccayañca vilepanañca pūjāvasena. Yathā kathaṃ? Vihārañca vippasannena cetasā satthuno adāsiṃ pūjesiṃ niyyādesiṃ cāti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.

1143. Sehi pāṇibhī means generating merit, performing this and that task with his own hands, he had the monastery built for the Teacher, is the construction. Or, sehi pāṇibhī means in that Andhakavinda, with perfume, garlands, requisites and ointment, as an offering. How so? He gave, worshiped, and dedicated the monastery to the Teacher with a clear mind; thus, the construction should be understood here.

1144.Tenāti tena yathāvuttena puññakammena kāraṇabhūtena.Mayhanti mayā.Idanti idaṃ puññaphalaṃ, idaṃ vā dibbaṃ ādhipateyyaṃ. Tenāha‘‘vasaṃ vattemī’’ti.

1144. Tenā means by that previously mentioned meritorious action as the cause. Mayhaṃ means by me. Idaṃ means this fruit of merit, or this divine sovereignty. Therefore, he said, "vasaṃ vattemī."

1145.Nandaneti nandiyā dibbasamiddhiyā uppajjanaṭṭhāne imasmiṃ devaloke, tatthāpi visesato nandane vane ramme, evaṃ ramaṇīye imasmiṃ nandane vane ramāmīti yojanā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1145. Nandane means in this heavenly world, the place of arising of delight and divine success, and even there, especially in the delightful Nandana forest, thus, in this delightful Nandana forest, I rejoice, is the construction. The rest is as previously stated.

Evaṃ devatāya attano puññakamme āvikate thero saparivārassa tassa devaputtassa dhammaṃ desetvā bhagavato tamatthaṃ nivedesi. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Sā desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

Thus, when the deity revealed his own meritorious deed, the Elder, after teaching the Dhamma to that devaputta and his retinue, reported that matter to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, after making that the cause of a discourse, taught the Dhamma to the assembled crowd. That teaching was fruitful for the great assembly.

Suvaṇṇavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Suvaṇṇa-vimāna is finished.

5. Ambavimānavaṇṇanā
5. Description of the Ambavimāna

Uccamidaṃmaṇithūṇanti ambavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rājagahe aññataro duggatapuriso paresaṃ bhattavetanabhato hutvā ambavanaṃ rakkhati. So ekadivasaṃ āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ gimhasamaye sūriyātapasantatte uṇhavālikānippīḷite vipphandamānamarīcijālavitthate bhūmippadese tassa ambārāmassa avidūrena maggena sedāgatena gattena gacchantaṃ disvā sañjātagāravabahumāno upasaṅkamitvā evamāha ‘‘mahā ayaṃ, bhante, ghammapariḷāho, ativiya parissantarūpo viya dissati, sādhu, bhante, ayyo imaṃ ambārāmaṃ pavisitvā muhuttaṃ vissamitvā addhānaparissamaṃ paṭivinodetvā gacchatha anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Thero visesato tassa cittappasādaṃ paribrūhetukāmo taṃ ārāmaṃ pavisitvā aññatarassa ambarukkhassa mūle nisīdi.

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ means the Ambavimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in the Veḷuvana in Rājagaha. At that time, a certain poor man in Rājagaha, working for the meal wages of others, was guarding a mango grove. One day, seeing the venerable Sāriputta during the hot season, scorched by the heat of the sun, oppressed by the hot sands, going along the path not far from that mango grove in a land spread with shimmering mirages with a body wet with sweat, filled with respect and esteem, he approached and said, "Venerable sir, this heat is very intense, appearing very exhausting indeed; it would be good, venerable sir, if the revered one, entering this mango grove, would rest for a moment, relieving the fatigue of the journey, having regard for compassion." The Elder, especially wishing to increase his mental serenity, entered that grove and sat at the foot of a certain mango tree.

Puna so puriso āha ‘‘sace, bhante, nhāyitukāmattha, ahaṃ ito kūpato udakaṃ uddharitvā tumhe nhāpessāmi, pānīyañca dassāmī’’ti. Theropi adhivāsesi tuṇhībhāvena. So kūpato udakaṃ uddharitvā parissāvetvā theraṃ nhāpesi, nhāpetvā ca hatthapāde dhovitvā nisinnassa pānīyaṃ upanesi. Thero pānīyaṃ pivitvā paṭippassaddhadaratho tassa purisassa udakadāne ceva nhāpane ca anumodanaṃ vatvā pakkāmi. Atha so puriso ‘‘ghammābhitattassa vata therassa ghammapariḷāhaṃ paṭippassambhesiṃ, bahuṃ vata mayā puññaṃ pasuta’’nti uḷārapītisomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedesi. So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajji. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno upasaṅkamitvā imāhi gāthāhi katapuññaṃ pucchi.

Then the man said, "If, venerable sir, you wish to bathe, I will draw water from this well and bathe you, and I will give you drinking water." The Elder consented by remaining silent. He drew water from the well, strained it, and bathed the Elder; after bathing him, he washed his hands and feet and offered drinking water to him as he sat. The Elder, having drunk the water, after relaxing his weariness, uttered words of appreciation for the gift of water and the bathing. Then the man reflected, "Indeed, I have allayed the heat exhaustion of the Elder afflicted by the heat; indeed, I have generated much merit," experiencing great joy and gladness. Later, he died and was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna approached him and asked about his meritorious deed with these verses.

1146.

1146.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasa yojanāni;

"This lofty mansion with jeweled pillars, twelve yojanas around,
Has seven hundred lofty storied dwellings, with veḷuriya pillars, delightful, well-placed and beautiful.

1147.

1147.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"There you eat, drink, and consume, and divine lutes sound sweetly;
There are five divine sensual pleasures, and golden-clad women dance.

1148.

1148.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo…pe…

"By what has such complexion…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions?"

1150.

1150.

‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe…

"Then that delighted devaputta…pe…
Whose deed is this fruit of?"

1151.

1151.

‘‘Gimhānaṃ pacchime māse, patapante divaṅkare;

"In the last month of summer, when the sun is scorching,
I was a man working for the meal wages of others, watering a mango grove.

1152.

1152.

‘‘Atha tenāgamā bhikkhu, sāriputtoti vissuto;

"Then a bhikkhu came, renowned as Sāriputta;
Weary in body, though unwearied in mind.

1153.

1153.

‘‘Tañca disvāna āyantaṃ, avocaṃ ambasiñcako;

"Seeing him coming, I, the mango waterer, said:
'It would be good to bathe you, venerable sir, which would bring me happiness.'

1154.

1154.

‘‘Tassa me anukampāya, nikkhipi pattacīvaraṃ;

"Out of compassion for me, he laid aside his bowl and robe;
He sat at the foot of a tree, alone with one robe in the shade.

1155.

1155.

‘‘Tañca acchena vārinā, pasannamānaso naro;

"Then with clear water, with a serene mind, I,
Bathed him at the foot of the tree, alone with one robe in the shade.

1156.

1156.

‘‘Ambo ca sitto samaṇo ca nhāpito,

"The mango was watered and the samaṇa was bathed,
And no small amount of merit was generated by me;
Thus, with joy, he pervades his whole body.

1157.

1157.

‘‘Tadeva ettakaṃ kammaṃ, akāsiṃ tāya jātiyā;

"That is all the deed I did in that life;
Having abandoned the human body, I have arisen in Nandana.

1158.

1158.

‘‘Nandane ca vane ramme, nānādijagaṇāyute;

"And in Nandana, in a delightful forest, filled with flocks of various birds,
I rejoice with dancing and song, attended by nymphs.'" –

Sopi tassa imāhi gāthāhi byākāsi.

He also explained it with these verses.

1151.Tatthagimhānaṃ pacchime māseti āsāḷhimāse.Patapanteti ativiya dippante, sabbaso uṇhaṃ vissajjenteti attho.Divaṅkareti divākare, ayameva vā pāṭho.Asiñcatīti siñcati, -kāro nipātamattaṃ, siñcati ambarukkhamūlesu dhuvaṃ jalasekaṃ karotīti attho. ‘‘Asiñcathā’’ti ca pāṭho, siñcitthāti attho. ‘‘Asiñcaha’’nti ca paṭhanti, paresaṃ bhatako poso hutvā tadā ambārāmaṃ asiñciṃ ahanti attho.

1151. There, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse means in the month of Āsāḷhi. Patapante means shining exceedingly, emitting heat completely, is the meaning. Divaṅkare means in the day-maker, or this is the reading. Asiñcatī means he waters; -kāro is merely an expletive, he waters, he constantly pours water at the roots of the mango trees, is the meaning. "Asiñcathā" is also a reading, meaning he watered. "Asiñcaha" is also read, meaning, having become a servant working for the meal wages of others, then I watered the mango grove.

1152.Tenāti yena disābhāgena so ambārāmo, tena agamā agañchi.Akilantova cetasāti cetodukkhassa maggeneva pahīnattā cetasā akilantopi samāno kilanturūpo kāyena tena maggena agamāti yojanā.

1152. Tenā means by whatever direction that mango grove was, by that he came, he went. Akilantova cetasā means because mental suffering was abandoned by the path itself, although unwearied in mind, being weary in body, he went by that path, is the construction.

1153-4.Avocaṃahaṃ tadāambasiñcakohutvāti yojanā.Ekacīvaroti nhāyitukāmoti adhippāyo.

1153-4. Avocaṃ means then I, ambasiñcako, said, is the construction. Ekacīvaro means the intention was to bathe.

1156.Itīti evaṃ ‘‘ambo ca sitto, samaṇo ca nhāpito, mayā ca puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ, ekeneva payogena tividhopi attho sādhito’’ti iminākārena pavattāyapītiyā sopurisoattano sabbaṃ kāyaṃ pharati,nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ karotīti yojanā. Atītatthe cetaṃ vattamānavacanaṃ, pharīti attho.

1156. Itī means thus, "the mango was watered, and the samaṇa was bathed, and no small amount of merit was generated by me; with just one effort, the threefold aim was accomplished," in this way, by the arising of pītiyā, so that man pharati attano sabbaṃ kāyaṃ, he pervades, continuously touches his whole body, is the construction. This is a present tense used in the past sense, meaning he pervaded.

1157.Tadeva ettakaṃ kammanti taṃ ettakaṃ evaṃ pānīyadānamattakaṃ kammaṃ akāsiṃ, tāya tassaṃ jātiyaṃ aññaṃ nānussarāmīti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1157. Tadeva ettakaṃ kammaṃ means I did only that much, that mere giving of water; I do not recall anything else in that birth, is the meaning. The rest is as previously stated.

Ambavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Ambavimāna is finished.

6. Gopālavimānavaṇṇanā
6. Description of the Gopālavimāna

Disvānadevaṃ paṭipucchi bhikkhūti gopālavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane. Tena samayena rājagahavāsī aññataro gopālako pātarāsatthāya pilotikāya puṭabaddhaṃ kummāsaṃ gahetvā nagarato nikkhamitvā gāvīnaṃ caraṇaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ gocarabhūmiṃ sampāpuṇi. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno ‘‘ayaṃ idāneva kālaṃ karissati, mayhañca kummāsaṃ datvā tāvatiṃsesu uppajjissatī’’ti ca ñatvā tassa samīpaṃ agamāsi. So velaṃ oloketvā therassa kummāsaṃ dātukāmo ahosi. Tena ca samayena gāviyo māsakkhettaṃ pavisanti. Atha so gopālo cintesi ‘‘kiṃ nu kho therassa kummāsaṃ dadeyyaṃ, udāhu gāviyo māsakkhettato nīhareyya’’nti. Athassa etadahosi ‘‘māsasāmikā maṃ yaṃ icchanti, taṃ karontu, there pana gate kummāsadānantarāyo me siyā, handāhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ayyassa kummāsaṃ dassāmī’’ti taṃ therassa upanesi. Paṭiggahesi thero anukampaṃ upādāya.

Disvāna devaṃ paṭipucchi bhikkhū means the Gopālavimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in the Veḷuvana in Rājagaha. At that time, a certain cowherd living in Rājagaha, taking some sour gruel wrapped in a packet made of rags for his breakfast, went out from the city and reached a grazing ground that was a place for cows to roam. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna, knowing that "he will die just now, and having given sour gruel to me, he will be reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven," went to his vicinity. He, looking at the time, wanted to give sour gruel to the Elder. And at that time, the cows were entering a bean field. Then that cowherd thought, "Should I give sour gruel to the Elder, or should I drive the cows out of the bean field?" Then this occurred to him, "Let the owners of the beans do whatever they wish to me; but if the Elder leaves, there might be an obstacle to giving the sour gruel to him; come, let me first give the sour gruel to the revered one," and he offered it to the Elder. The Elder accepted it, having regard for compassion.

Atha naṃ gāviyo nivattetuṃ parissayaṃ anoloketvā vegena upadhāvantaṃ pādena phuṭṭho āsīviso ḍaṃsi. Theropi taṃ anukampamāno taṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjituṃ ārabhi. Gopālakopi gāviyo nivattetvā āgato theraṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjantaṃ disvā pasannacitto uḷāraṃ pītisomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedento nisīdi. Tāvadevassa sakalasarīraṃ visaṃ ajjhotthari. Muhuttameva vege muddhapatte kālamakāsi, kālakato ca tāvatiṃsesu dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Taṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno disvā imāhi gāthāhi paṭipucchi –

Then, without considering the danger of turning back the cows, as he was running quickly, he was struck on the foot and bitten by a venomous snake. The Elder, feeling compassion for him, began to consume that sour gruel. The cowherd, having turned back the cows, came and saw the Elder consuming the sour gruel, with a serene mind, experiencing great joy and gladness, he sat down. Just then, the poison overwhelmed his entire body. In a moment, he died at the top of his head due to the speed of the venom, and having died, he was reborn in a golden mansion twelve yojanas in extent in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The venerable Mahāmoggallāna, seeing him, asked him with these verses:

1159.

1159.

‘‘Disvāna devaṃ paṭipucchi bhikkhu, ucce vimānamhi ciraṭṭhitike;

"Having seen the deity, a bhikkhu questioned him, abiding long in a lofty mansion;
With adorned arm ornaments, glorious, in a divine mansion, like the moon.

1160.

1160.

‘‘Alaṅkato malyadharo suvattho, sukuṇḍalī kappitakesamassu;

"Adorned, garlanded, well-clothed, with earrings, with hair and beard neatly trimmed;
With adorned arm ornaments, glorious, in a divine mansion, like the moon.

1161.

1161.

‘‘Dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ; Aṭṭhaṭṭhakā sikkhitā sādhurūpā;

"Divine lutes sound sweetly; eight times eight, skilled, of beautiful form;
Divine maidens, celestial wanderers, lofty, dance and sing and delight.

1162.

1162.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo…pe…

"You have attained divine power, great in influence…pe…
And your complexion shines in all directions."

Sopi tassa byākāsi –

He also explained it to him:

1163.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe…yassa kammassidaṃ phalaṃ’’.

1163."Then that delighted devaputta…pe…whose deed is this fruit of?"

1164.

1164.

‘‘Ahaṃ manussesu manussabhūto, saṅgamma rakkhissaṃ paresaṃ dhenuyo;

"I, among humans, being human,
Would guard the cows of others, having gathered them together;
Then a samaṇa came to me, and the cows went into the bean field to graze.

1165.

1165.

‘‘Dvayajja kiccaṃ ubhayañca kāriyaṃ, iccevahaṃ bhante tadā vicintayiṃ;

"Two tasks were to be done today, both things were urgent,
Thus, I thought then, venerable sir;
Then, having rightly regained my awareness, I quickly gave, saying, 'I give, venerable sir,' immeasurably.

1166.

1166.

‘‘So māsakhettaṃ turito avāsariṃ, purā ayaṃ bhañjati yassidaṃ dhanaṃ;

"Then quickly I turned away from the bean field, before it is ruined, whose wealth this is;
Then a black snake, greatly venomous, bit my foot as I hurried, mindful.

1167.

1167.

‘‘Svāhaṃ aṭṭomhi dukkhena pīḷito, bhikkhu ca taṃ sāmaṃ muñcitvānantakaṃ;

"Then I was afflicted, tormented by pain, and the bhikkhu himself, releasing that immeasurable (gift),
Ate the sour gruel out of compassion for me; thence departed, having died, I am a deity.

1168.

1168.

‘‘Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā, sukhañca kammaṃ anubhomi attanā;

"That deed, skillful, was done by me,
And I experience happiness by myself;
Indeed, venerable sir, greatly pitied by you, out of gratitude, I pay homage to you.

1169.

1169.

‘‘Sadevake loke samārake ca, añño muni natthi tayānukampako;

"In the world with gods, including Māra, there is no other sage as compassionate as you; Because I have been greatly favored by you, venerable sir, I salute you with gratitude."

1170.

1170.

‘‘Imasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, añño munī natthi tayānukampako;

"Neither in this world nor in the next, is there another sage as compassionate as you; Because I have been greatly favored by you, venerable sir, I salute you with gratitude."

‘‘disvāna devaṃ paṭipucchi bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.

The passage beginning with "disvāna devaṃ paṭipucchi bhikkhū" was spoken.

1159.Tatthadevanti gopāladevaputtaṃ.Bhikkhūti āyasmantaṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ sandhāya satthā vadati. So hi sabbaso bhinnakilesatāya bhikkhu. Vimānassa bahukālāvaṭṭhāyitāya kappaṭṭhitikatāya eva vā‘‘ciraṭṭhitike’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘ciraṭṭhitika’’ntipi keci paṭhanti. Tañhi ‘‘deva’’nti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Sopi hi saṭṭhisatasahassādhikā tisso vassakoṭiyo tattha avaṭṭhānato ‘‘ciraṭṭhitike’’ti vattabbataṃ labhati.Yathāpi candimāti yathā candimā devaputto kantasītalamanoharakiraṇajālasamujjale attano dibbe vimānamhi virocati, evaṃ virocamānanti vacanasesā.

1159. There, deva means the Gopāladeva son of a god. Bhikkhū refers to the Blessed One speaking in reference to the venerable Mahāmoggallāna. He is a bhikkhu because he has completely destroyed his defilements. Because the celestial mansion had existed for a very long time, or simply because it has existed for a kappa, it is said to be "ciraṭṭhitike" (long-lasting); some read it as "ciraṭṭhitika". This should be connected with "deva." Since he has been dwelling there for three hundred and sixty thousand years, he is worthy of being called "ciraṭṭhitike." Yathāpi candimā (Just as the moon): just as the moon god shines in his divine celestial mansion, resplendent with a beautiful, cool, and delightful array of rays, so he was shining; this is the remaining part of the sentence.

1160.Alaṅkatotiādi tassa devaputtassa therena pucchitākāradassanaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.

1160. Alaṅkato etc., shows the manner in which the deva's son was questioned by the Thera; its meaning has already been explained below.

1164.Saṅgammāti saṅgametvā,saṅgammāti vā saṅgahetvā. Hetvatthopi hi idha antonīto, bahū ekato hutvāti attho.Āgāti āgañchi.Māseti māsasassāni.

1164. Saṅgammā means having caused to join together, or saṅgammā means having gathered together. Here, the sense of cause is implied; the meaning is that many having come together in one place. Āgā means he came. Māse means beans.

1165.Dvayajjāti dvayaṃ ajja etarahikiccaṃkātabbaṃ.Ubhayañca kāriyanti vuttassevatthassa pariyāyavacanaṃ.Saññanti dhammasaññaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yoniso’’tipaṭiladdhāti paṭilabhitvā.Khipinti paniggāhāpanavasena hatthe khipiṃ.Anantakanti nantakaṃ kummāsaṃ pakkhipitvā bandhitvā ṭhapitaṃ pilotikaṃ. A-kāro cettha nipātamattaṃ.

1165. Dvayajjā means two things now, at this moment, kiccaṃ (needful) must be done. Ubhayañca kāriyaṃ is a synonym for what was already said. Saññaṃ means the Dhamma-sign. Therefore, he said "yoniso" (appropriately). Paṭiladdhā means having obtained. Khipi means he threw it in his hand, in the manner of raising it and releasing it. Anantakaṃ means a pilotika wrapped and secured after placing nantaka kummāsa inside. Here, the a- is merely an expletive.

1166.Soti so ahaṃ.Turitoti turito sambhamanto.Avāsarinti upagacchi, pāvisiṃ vā.Purā ayaṃ bhañjati yassidaṃ dhananti yassa khettasāmikassa idaṃ māsasassaṃ dhanaṃ, taṃ ayaṃ gogaṇo bhañjati purā tassa bhañjanato, āmaddanato puretaramevāti attho.Tatoti tattha.Turitassa me satoti sambhamantassa me samānassa, sahasā gamanena magge kaṇhasappaṃ anoloketvā gatassāti adhippāyo.

1166. So means so I. Turito means hurrying, agitated. Avāsariṃ means I approached or entered. Purā ayaṃ bhañjati yassidaṃ dhanaṃ means before this herd of cows ruins the bean crop, which is the wealth of the field owner, even before that destruction or trampling. Tato means there. Turitassa me sato means while I was hurrying, for me who was like that, the meaning is that I went without looking at the black snake on the path due to the haste of my going.

1167.Aṭṭomhi dukkhena pīḷitoti tena āsīvisaḍaṃsanena aṭṭo aṭṭito upadduto maraṇadukkhena bādhito bhavāmi.Ahāsīti ajjhohari, paribhuñjīti attho.Tato cuto kālakatomhi devatāti tato manussattabhāvato cuto maraṇakālappattiyā, tattha vā āyusaṅkhārassa khepanasaṅkhātassa kālassa katattā kālakato, tadanantarameva ca amhi devatā devattabhāvappattiyā devatā homīti attho.

1167. Aṭṭomhi dukkhena pīḷito means afflicted, harassed, and oppressed by the pain of death from that bite of the poisonous snake. Ahāsī means he consumed, he partook of. Tato cuto kālakatomhi devatā means having passed away from that human existence, due to the arrival of the time of death, or because of the completion of the lifespan there, I am kālakato (deceased), and immediately after that, I am a devatā (god), I become a god by attaining the state of being a god.

1169.Tayāti tayā sadisoañño munimoneyyaguṇayutto isi natthi.Tayāti vā nissakke idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1169. Tayā means another sage with the qualities of a muni (sage) like you does not exist. Or, tayā is an instrumental case used without hesitation. The rest is as said before.

Gopālavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Gopāla celestial mansion is complete.

7. Kaṇḍakavimānavaṇṇanā
7. Kaṇḍaka Celestial Mansion Description

Puṇṇamāseyathā candoti kaṇḍakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena ca samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gato. Tasmiṃ khaṇe kaṇḍako devaputto sakabhavanato nikkhamitvā dibbayānaṃ abhiruhitvā mahantena parivārena mahatiyā deviddhiyā uyyānaṃ gacchanto āyasmantaṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ disvā sañjātagāravabahumāno sahasā yānato oruyha theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā sirasmiṃ añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ thero –

Puṇṇamāse yathā cando (Like the moon at full moon) refers to the Kaṇḍaka celestial mansion. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while wandering on a tour of the gods in the manner described earlier, went to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. At that moment, the Kaṇḍaka deva's son, having come out of his celestial abode and ascended a divine vehicle, going to the garden with a great retinue and great divine power, saw the venerable Mahāmoggallāna. Filled with respect and esteem, he suddenly descended from the vehicle, approached the Thera, paid homage with the five-point prostration, and stood with his hands raised in Añjali on his head. Then the Thera said to him:

1171.

1171.

‘‘Puṇṇamāse yathā cando, nakkhattaparivārito;

"Like the moon at full moon, surrounded by stars; The lord of stars, the moon, goes all around."

1172.

1172.

‘‘Tathūpamaṃ idaṃ byamhaṃ, dibbaṃ devapuramhi ca;

"Similarly, this excellent celestial mansion, divine in the city of gods; It shines forth with beauty, like the rising sun with rays."

1173.

1173.

‘‘Veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassa, phalikā rūpiyassa ca;

"Of beryl and gold, crystal and silver; With masāragalla gems and pearls, and red corals."

1174.

1174.

‘‘Citrā manoramā bhūmi, veḷūriyassa santhatā;

"The ground is beautiful and delightful, covered with beryl; The peaked houses are beautiful and lovely, your palace is well-measured."

1175.

1175.

‘‘Rammā ca te pokkharaṇī, puthulomanisevitā;

"And your ponds are lovely, frequented by herons; With clear water, limpid, covered with golden sand."

1176.

1176.

‘‘Nānāpadumasañchannā, puṇḍarīkasamotatā;

"Covered with various lotuses, adorned with white lotuses; They waft fragrance, delightful, stirred by the winds."

1177.

1177.

‘‘Tassā te ubhato passe, vanagumbā sumāpitā;

"On both sides of it, the groves are well-arranged; Endowed with flowering trees, and both fruit-bearing trees."

1178.

1178.

‘‘Sovaṇṇapāde pallaṅke, muduke gonakatthate;

"On a golden-legged couch, soft, covered with a woolen blanket; Like a deva king sitting, Apsarās attend upon you."

1179.

1179.

‘‘Sabbābharaṇasañchannā, nānāmālāvibhūsitā;

"Adorned with all ornaments, decorated with various garlands; They delight you, the mighty one, you rejoice like Vasavattī."

1180.

1180.

‘‘Bherisaṅkhamudiṅgāhi, vīṇāhi paṇavehi ca;

"With kettledrums, conches, and drums, with lutes and tambourines; You rejoice, endowed with delight, in dance, song, and sweet music."

1181.

1181.

‘‘Dibbā te vividhā rūpā, dibbā saddā atho rasā;

"Divine are your various forms, divine sounds and tastes; And the scents are pleasing to you, and the tactile sensations delightful."

1182.

1182.

‘‘Tasmiṃ vimāne pavare, devaputta mahappabho;

"In that excellent celestial mansion, son of a god, greatly radiant; You shine forth with beauty, like the rising sun."

1183.

1183.

‘‘Dānassa te idaṃ phalaṃ, atho sīlassa vā pana;

"Is this the fruit of your generosity, or perhaps of your virtue; Or of the act of reverential salutation, please tell me when asked."

Adhigatasampattikittanamukhena katakammaṃ pucchi.

He asked about the deed done, through praise of the acquired fortune.

1184.

1184.

‘‘So devaputto attamano, moggallānena pucchito;

"That deva's son, pleased, questioned by Moggallāna; Replied to the question, whose deed this is the fruit of."

1185.

1185.

‘‘Ahaṃ kapilavatthusmiṃ, sākiyānaṃ puruttame;

"In Kapilavatthu, the best of the Sakyans; I was Kaṇḍaka, born together with the son of Suddhodana."

1186.

1186.

‘‘Yadā so aḍḍharattāyaṃ, bodhāya mabhinikkhami;

"When he went forth for enlightenment at midnight; He touched me with soft hands, with webbed and copper-colored nails."

1187.

1187.

‘‘Satthiṃ ākoṭayitvāna, vaha sammāti cabravi;

"Having struck my thigh, he said, ‘Go well’; ‘I will deliver the world, having attained supreme enlightenment.’"

1188.

1188.

‘‘Taṃ me giraṃ suṇantassa, hāso me vipulo ahu;

"Hearing that speech of his, great joy arose in me; With an uplifted mind, delighted, I blessed him then."

1189.

1189.

‘‘Abhirūḷhañca maṃ ñatvā, sakyaputtaṃ mahāyasaṃ;

"Knowing that I was ready to carry the Sakyan son, the greatly famous one; With an uplifted mind, delighted, I will carry the best of men."

1190.

1190.

‘‘Paresaṃ vijitaṃ gantvā, uggatasmiṃ divākare;

"Having gone beyond the conquered territory, when the sun had risen; Abandoning me and the canopy, without regard, he departed."

1191.

1191.

‘‘Tassa tambanakhe pāde, jivhāya parilehisaṃ;

"I licked his copper-colored toenails with my tongue; And weeping, I gazed at the great hero as he went."

1192.

1192.

‘‘Adassanenahaṃ tassa, sakyaputtassa sirīmato;

"Because of not seeing him, the glorious Sakyan son; I contracted a severe illness, and death came quickly to me."

1193.

1193.

‘‘Tasseva ānubhāvena, vimānaṃ āvasāmidaṃ;

"By the power of that very act, I inhabit this celestial mansion; Endowed with all sensual pleasures, like a god in the city of gods."

1194.

1194.

‘‘Yañca me ahuvā hāso, saddaṃ sutvāna bodhiyā;

"And whatever joy I had, having heard the word of enlightenment; By that wholesome root, I will touch the destruction of the āsavas."

1195.

1195.

‘‘Sace hi bhante gaccheyyāsi, satthu buddhassa santike;

"If, venerable sir, you should go to the Teacher, to the Buddha; With my words, you should pay homage to him with my head."

1196.

1196.

‘‘Ahampi daṭṭhuṃ gacchissaṃ, jinaṃ appaṭipuggalaṃ;

"I too will go to see the Jina, the incomparable one; Such a sight is rare for the world-protectors."

‘‘puṇṇamāse yathā cando…pe… ahaṃ kapilavatthusmi’’ntiādi.

"puṇṇamāse yathā cando…pe… ahaṃ kapilavatthusmi" etc.

1171.Tatthapuṇṇamāseti puṇṇamāsiyaṃ sukkapakkhe pannarasiyaṃ.Tārakādhipatīti tārakānaṃ adhipati.Sasīti sasalañchanavā. ‘‘Tārakādhipa dissatī’’ti keci paṭhanti, tesaṃ tārakādhipāti avibhattikaniddeso, tārakānaṃ adhipo hutvā dissati anupariyāti cāti yojanā kātabbā.

1171. There, puṇṇamāse means on the full moon day, on the fifteenth day of the waxing fortnight. Tārakādhipatī means the lord of the stars. Sasī means with the hare symbol (on the moon). Some read "tārakādhipa dissatī"; for them, tārakādhipāti is a designation without case ending, the explanation should be made that he is seen as the lord of the stars and goes around.

1172.Dibbaṃ devapuramhi cāti devapurasmimpi dibbaṃ. Yathā manussānaṃ ṭhānato devapuraṃ uttamaṃ, evaṃ devapurato cāpi idaṃ tava vimānaṃ uttamanti dasseti. Tenāha‘‘atirocati vaṇṇena, udayantova raṃsimā’’ti, uggacchanto sūriyo viyāti attho.

1172. Dibbaṃ devapuramhi cā means divine even in the city of gods. As the city of gods is superior to the place of humans, so too, this celestial mansion of yours is superior even to the city of gods. Therefore, he said "atirocati vaṇṇena, udayantova raṃsimā", meaning like the rising sun.

1173.Veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassāti veḷuriyena suvaṇṇena ca idaṃ byamhaṃ nimmitanti vacanasesena yojanā.Phalikāti phalikamaṇinā.

1173. Veḷūriyasuvaṇṇassā means this celestial mansion is constructed of beryl and gold; this should be added to complete the sentence. Phalikā means with crystal gems.

1175.Pokkharaṇīti pokkharaṇiyo.

1175. Pokkharaṇī means ponds.

1177-8.Tassāti tassā pokkharaṇiyā.Vanagumbāti uyyāne supupphagacche sandhāya vadati.Devarājaṃvāti sakkaṃ viya.Upatiṭṭhantīti upaṭṭhānaṃ karonti.

1177-8. Tassā means of that pond. Vanagumbā refers to the cluster of flowering bushes in the garden. Devarājaṃvā means like Sakka (Indra). Upatiṭṭhantī means they are attending upon.

1179.Sabbābharaṇasañchannāti sabbehi itthālaṅkārehi paṭicchāditā, sabbaso vibhūsitasarīrāti attho.Vasavattīvāti vasavattidevarājā viya.

1179. Sabbābharaṇasañchannā means covered with all the ornaments of a woman, completely adorned in body. Vasavattīvā means like Vasavattī, the king of the gods.

1180.Bherisaṅkhamudiṅgāhīti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, bherīhi ca saṅkhehi ca mudiṅgehi cāti yojanā.Ratisampannoti dibbāya ratiyā samaṅgībhūto.Naccagīte suvāditeti nacce ca gīte ca sundare vādite ca, naccane ca gāyane ca sundare vādite ca hetubhūte. Nimittatthe hi etaṃ bhummaṃ, pavattiteti vā vacanaseso.

1180. Bherisaṅkhamudiṅgāhī is said with a gender inversion; the explanation is "with kettledrums, conches, and drums." Ratisampanno means endowed with divine delight. Naccagīte suvādite means in dance, in song, and in sweetly played music, with dance and singing and sweetly played music as the cause. This locative is in the sense of an instrumental cause, or "it causes" is the remaining part of the sentence.

1181.Dibbā te vividhā rūpāti devalokapariyāpannā nānappakārā cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā tuyhaṃ adhippetā yathādhippetā manoramā vijjantīti kiriyāpadaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.Dibbā saddātiādīsupi eseva nayo.

1181. Dibbā te vividhā rūpā means various kinds of forms cognizable by the eye, belonging to the heavenly world, are pleasing to you, existing as you desire; the verb must be brought in to complete the sentence. The same method applies to dibbā saddā etc.

1185.Kaṇḍako sahajo ahanti etthaahanti nipātamattaṃ. ‘‘Ahū’’ti keci paṭṭhanti, kaṇḍako nāma assarājā mahāsattena saha ekasmiṃyeva divase jātattā sahajo ahosinti attho.

1185. Kaṇḍako sahajo ahaṃ here, ahaṃ is merely an expletive. Some read "ahū"; the meaning is that he was Kaṇḍaka, the king of horses, born on the same day as the Mahāsatta (Great Being), and thus was a "sahaja" (co-born).

1186.Aḍḍharattāyanti aḍḍharattiyaṃ, majjhimayāmasamayeti attho.Bodhāya mabhinikkhamīti ma-kāro padasandhikaro, abhisambodhiatthaṃ mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamīti attho.Mudūhi pāṇīhīti muduhatthataṃ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ vadati.Jālitambanakhehīti jālavantehi abhilohitanakhehi. Tena jālahatthataṃ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ tambanakhataṃ anubyañjanañca dasseti.

1186. Aḍḍharattāyaṃ means at midnight, at the time of the middle watch. Bodhāya mabhinikkhamī the ma-kāro is a euphonic addition, it means he went forth on the Great Going Forth for the sake of complete enlightenment. Mudūhi pāṇīhī speaks of the softness of his hands, a characteristic of a great man. Jālitambanakhehī means with webbed and reddish nails. This shows the webbed hands, a characteristic of a great man, and the reddishness of the nails, a minor characteristic.

1187.Satthināma jaṅghā, idha pana satthino āsannaṭṭhānabhūto ūruppadeso ‘‘satthī’’ti vutto.Ākoṭayitvānāti appoṭhetvā.‘‘Vaha sammā’’ti cabravīti ‘‘samma kaṇḍaka, ajjekarattiṃ maṃ vaha, mayhaṃ opavuyhaṃ hohī’’ti ca kathesi. Vahane pana payojanaṃ tadā mahāsattena dassitaṃ vadanto‘‘ahaṃ lokaṃ tārayissaṃ, patto sambodhimuttama’’nti āha. Tena ‘‘ahaṃ uttamaṃ anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ patto adhigato hutvā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ saṃsāramahoghato tārayissāmi, tasmā nayidaṃ gamanaṃ yaṃkiñcīti cinteyyāsī’’ti gamane payojanassa anuttarabhāvaṃ dasseti.

1187. Satthi usually means the shin, but here, the region of the thigh close to the shin is called satthī. Ākoṭayitvānā means having tapped. "Vaha sammā"ti cabravī means "Go well, Kaṇḍaka, carry me for one night, be my mount." Showing the purpose in carrying him, the Mahāsatta then said "ahaṃ lokaṃ tārayissaṃ, patto sambodhimuttamaṃ". He shows the unsurpassed nature of the purpose in going, saying "Having attained supreme and unsurpassed perfect enlightenment, I will deliver the world with its gods from the great flood of saṃsāra, therefore you should not think this journey is insignificant."

1188-9.Hāsoti tuṭṭhi.Vipuloti mahāuḷāro.Abhisīsinti āsisiṃ icchiṃ sampaṭicchiṃ.Abhirūḷhañca maṃ ñatvā, sakyaputtaṃ mahāyasanti patthaṭavipulayasaṃ sakyarājaputtaṃ mahāsattaṃ maṃ abhiruyha nisinnaṃ jānitvā.Vahissanti nesiṃ.

1188-9. Hāso means joy. Vipulo means great and abundant. Abhisīsiṃ means I blessed, I desired, I accepted. Abhirūḷhañca maṃ ñatvā, sakyaputtaṃ mahāyasaṃ means knowing that I was mounted and seated, the Sakyan prince of great fame, the Mahāsatta. Vahissaṃ means I will lead.

1190-91.Paresanti pararājūnaṃ.Vijitanti desaṃ pararajjaṃ.Ohāyāti vissajjitvā.Apakkamīti apakkamituṃ ārabhi. ‘‘Paribbajī’’ti ca paṭhanti.Parilehisanti parito lehiṃ.Udikkhisanti olokesiṃ.

1190-91. Paresanti of other kings. Vijitanti country, foreign kingdom. Ohāyāti having relinquished. Apakkamīti began to depart. Some read it as "Paribbajī".Parilehisanti he licked around. Udikkhisanti I looked at.

1192-3.Garukābādhanti garukaṃ bāḷhaṃ ābādhaṃ, maraṇantikaṃ dukkhanti attho. Tenāha‘‘khippaṃ me maraṇaṃ ahū’’ti. So hi anekāsu jātīsu mahāsattena daḷhabhattiko hutvā āgato, tasmā viyogadukkhaṃ sahituṃ nāsakkhi, ‘‘sammāsambodhiṃ adhigantuṃ nikkhanto’’ti pana sutvā nirāmisaṃ uḷāraṃ pītisomanassañca uppajji, tena maraṇānantaraṃ tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti, uḷārā cassa dibbasampattiyo pāturahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘tasseva ānubhāvenā’’ti, ṭhānagatassa pasādamayapuññassa balena.Devo devapuramhivāti tāvatiṃsabhavane sakko devarājā viya.

1192-3. Garukābādhanti a serious, severe illness, meaning suffering leading to death. Therefore, he said, ‘‘khippaṃ me maraṇaṃ ahū’’ti. He, having been a firm devotee of the Great Being in many lifetimes, could not bear the pain of separation. However, upon hearing that he had "gone forth to attain Sammāsambodhi," immense joy and happiness without material pleasure arose in him, due to which he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven immediately after death, and great divine riches appeared to him. Therefore, it was said, ‘‘tasseva ānubhāvenā’’ti, by the power of the merit based on faith, which was the basis of his position. Devo devapuramhivāti like Sakka, the king of gods, in the Tāvatiṃsa abode.

1194.Yañcame ahuvā hāso, saddaṃ sutvāna bodhiyāti ‘‘patto sambodhimuttama’’nti paṭhamataraṃ bodhisaddaṃ sutvā tadā mayhaṃ hāso ahu, yaṃ hāsassa bhavanaṃ sussanaṃ,teneva kusalamūlenateneva kusalabījenaphusissanti phusissāmi pāpuṇissāmi.

1194. Yañca me ahuvā hāso, saddaṃ sutvāna bodhiyāti "Having attained the supreme enlightenment," upon hearing the word bodhi for the first time, the joy that arose in me, the cause of that joy, the elation, teneva kusalamūlena by that very root of merit, by that very seed of merit, phusissanti I will attain, I will reach.

1195.Evaṃ devaputto yathādhigatāya anāgatāya bhavasampattiyā kāraṇabhūtaṃ attano kusalakammaṃ kathento idāni attanā bhagavato santikaṃ gantukāmopi puretaraṃ therena satthu vandanaṃ pesento‘‘sace’’ti gāthamāha. Tatthasace gaccheyyāsīti yadi gamissasi. ‘‘Sace gacchasī’’ti keci paṭhanti, so evattho.Mamāpi naṃ vacanenāti na kevalaṃ tava sabhāveneva, atha kho mamāpi vacanena bhagavantaṃ.Vajjāsīti vadeyyāsi, mamāpisirasā vandananti yojanā.

1195. Thus, while the devaputta was speaking of his own meritorious deed, which was the cause of the future heavenly fortune he had attained, now, even as he wished to go to the Blessed One, he sent a prior greeting to the Teacher through the Elder, saying the verse ‘‘sace’’. Therein, sace gaccheyyāsīti if you go. Some read it as "Sace gacchasi," but the meaning is the same. Mamāpi naṃ vacanenāti not only by your own nature, but also by my words to the Blessed One. Vajjāsīti you should say; my sirasā vandananti is the connection, (my reverence with head bowed).

1196.Yadipi dāni vandanañca pesemi, pesetvā eva pana na tiṭṭhāmīti dassento āha‘‘ahampi daṭṭhuṃ gacchissaṃ, jinaṃ appaṭipuggala’’nti. Gamane pana daḷhataraṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘dullabhaṃ dassanaṃ hoti, lokanāthāna tādina’’nti āha.

1196. Although I am now sending reverence, showing that I will not just stay after sending it, he says, ‘‘ahampi daṭṭhuṃ gacchissaṃ, jinaṃ appaṭipuggala’’nti. To show a stronger reason for going, he said, ‘‘dullabhaṃ dassanaṃ hoti, lokanāthāna tādina’’nti.

1197.

1197.

‘‘So kataññū katavedī, satthāraṃ upasaṅkami;

"He, grateful and thankful, approached the Teacher;
Having heard the speech of the one with vision, he purified the Dhamma-eye.

1198.

1198.

‘‘Visodhetvā diṭṭhigataṃ, vicikicchaṃ vatāni ca;

"Having purified his view, doubt, and vows;
Having bowed at the Teacher's feet, he vanished right there." –

Imā dve gāthā saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā.

These two verses were established by the compilers.

1197.Tatthasutvā giraṃ cakkhumatoti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumato sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ sutvā.Dhammacakkhunti sotāpattimaggaṃ.Visodhayīti adhigacchi. Adhigamoyeva hi tassa visodhanaṃ.

1197. Therein, sutvā giraṃ cakkhumatoti having heard the words of the Sammāsambuddha, the one with five eyes. Dhammacakkhunti the Sotāpatti-magga. Visodhayīti attained. For his attainment is indeed its purification.

1198.Visodhetvā diṭṭhigatanti diṭṭhigataṃ samugghātetvā.Vicikicchaṃ vatāni cāti soḷasavatthukaṃ aṭṭhavatthukañca vicikicchañca ‘‘sīlabbatehi suddhī’’ti pavattanakasīlabbataparāmāse ca visodhayīti yojanā. Tattha hi saha pariyāyehi tathā pavattā parāmāsā ‘‘vatānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1198. Visodhetvā diṭṭhigatanti having eliminated the fixed views. Vicikicchaṃ vatāni cāti and the doubt with sixteen aspects and eight aspects, and the adherence to practices and vows, which promote "purification by virtue of precepts and vows," is the connection. There, the adherence to practices and vows that occur in that way, along with their explanations, are called "vatānī". The rest is as previously stated.

Kaṇḍakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Kaṇḍaka Vimāna is finished.

8. Anekavaṇṇavimānavaṇṇanā
8. Anekavaṇṇa Vimāna Description

Anekavaṇṇaṃ darasokanāsananti anekavaṇṇavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayena devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ agamāsi. Atha naṃ anekavaṇṇo devaputto disvā sañjātagāravabahumāno upasaṅkamitvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi. Thero –

Anekavaṇṇaṃ darasokanāsananti Anekavaṇṇa Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while wandering through the heavens as described earlier, went to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Then, Anekavaṇṇa devaputta, seeing him, with respect and great esteem, approached, raised his hands in Añjali, and stood. The Elder –

1199.

1199.

‘‘Anekavaṇṇaṃ darasokanāsanaṃ, vimānamāruyha anekacittaṃ;

"Anekavaṇṇaṃ darasokanāsanaṃ, having ascended a vimāna of varied splendor;
Surrounded by a host of nymphs, you rejoice like Bhūtapati, well-fashioned.

1200.

1200.

‘‘Samassamo natthi kuto panuttaro, yasena puññena ca iddhiyā ca;

"There is no equal, let alone superior, to you, in fame, merit, and power;
And all the gods, the Tāvatiṃsa host, having assembled, they revere you, like gods the moon;
And these nymphs of yours, all around, dance, sing, and delight.

1201.

1201.

‘‘Deviddhipattosi mahānubhāvo,

"You have attained divine power, great is your influence,
What merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what means are you so radiant with power,
And your complexion shines in all directions?" –

Adhigatasampattikittanamukhena katakammaṃ pucchi. Taṃ dassetuṃ –

He asked about the deed done through the praise of the attained fortune. To show that –

1202.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe…yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti. –

1202.‘‘So devaputto attamano…pe…yassa kammassidaṃ phala’’nti. –

Vuttaṃ. Sopi –

Was said. He also –

1203.

1203.

‘‘Ahaṃ bhadante ahuvāsi pubbe, sumedhanāmassa jinassa sāvako;

"I, venerable sir, was formerly a disciple of the Jina named Sumedha;
A common person, without understanding, I wandered for seven years.

1204.

1204.

‘‘Sohaṃ sumedhassa jinassa satthuno, parinibbutassoghatiṇṇassa tādino;

"I, for Sumedha, the Teacher, the Jina, who had crossed the flood, the such one,
Having worshiped the ratanacetiya covered with a golden net, I gladdened my mind at the stupa.

1205.

1205.

‘‘Na māsi dānaṃ na ca matthi dātuṃ, pare ca kho tattha samādapesiṃ;

"I did not give alms myself, nor did I have anything to give,
But I encouraged others there, saying,
'Worship the relic that is worthy of worship; in this way, you will go to heaven from here.'

1206.

1206.

‘‘Tadeva kammaṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ mayā,

"That deed, that meritorious act, was done by me,
And I experience divine happiness myself;
I rejoice in the midst of the Tāvatiṃsa host,
And there is no end to that merit." – he recounted;

Ito kira tiṃsakappasahasse sumedho nāma sammāsambuddho loke uppajjitvā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ekobhāsaṃ katvā katabuddhakicco parinibbuto, manussehi ca bhagavato dhātuṃ gahetvā ratanacetiye kate aññataro puriso satthu sāsane pabbajitvā satta vassāni brahmacariyaṃ caritvā anavaṭṭhitacittatāya kukkuccako hutvā uppabbaji. Uppabbajito ca saṃvegabahulatāya dhammacchandavantatāya ca cetiyaṅgaṇe sammajjanaparibhaṇḍādīni karonto niccasīlauposathasīlāni rakkhanto dhammaṃ suṇanto aññe ca puññakiriyāya samādapento vicari. So āyupariyosāne kālakato tāvatiṃsesu nibbatti. So puññakammassa uḷārabhāvena mahesakkho mahānubhāvo sakkādīhi devatāhi sakkatapūjito hutvā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā tato cuto aparāparaṃ devamanussesu saṃsaranto imasmiṃ buddhuppāde tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesena tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti, ‘‘anekavaṇṇo’’ti naṃ devatā sañjāniṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha naṃ anekavaṇṇo devaputto…pe… na tassa puññassa khayampi ajjhaganti kathesī’’ti.

It seems that thirty thousand aeons ago, a Sammāsambuddha named Sumedha arose in the world, having illuminated the world, including the world of gods, and having completed the Buddha's work, passed away. People took the relics of the Blessed One and made a ratanacetiya. A certain man, having gone forth in the Teacher's dispensation, wandered for seven years, practicing the holy life, but due to an unsettled mind, he became remorseful and disrobed. Having disrobed, due to an abundance of saṃvega and having a desire for Dhamma, while doing sweeping, cleaning, etc., in the cetiya courtyard, keeping the daily precepts and Uposatha precepts, listening to the Dhamma, and encouraging others in meritorious activities, he lived. At the end of his life, having passed away, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Due to the abundance of meritorious deeds, being highly powerful and greatly influential, honored and worshiped by gods such as Sakka, having stayed there for the duration of his life, and having passed away from there, wandering among gods and humans again and again, in this Buddha's era, due to the remaining result of that very deed, he was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven; the gods recognized him as "Anekavaṇṇa." Regarding that, it was said, "Then Anekavaṇṇa devaputta...there is no end to that merit, he recounted."

1199.Tatthaanekavaṇṇanti nīlapītādivasena vividhavaṇṇatāya anantaravimānādīnaṃ vividhasaṇṭhānatāya ca nānāvidhavaṇṇaṃ.Darasokanāsananti sītalabhāvena darathapariḷāhānaṃ vinodanato manuññatāya dassanīyatāya ca sokassa anokāsato darasokanāsanaṃ.Anekacittanti nānāvidhacittarūpaṃ.Sunimmito bhūtapatīvāti tāvatiṃsakāyikopi uḷāradibbabhogatāya sunimmitadevarājā viya modasi tussasi abhiramasi.

1199. Therein, anekavaṇṇanti various colors due to different colors such as blue and yellow, and the various shapes of the surrounding vimānas, etc. Darasokanāsananti because of its coolness, it removes the burning of anxieties, and because it is pleasing and beautiful to see, it is a destroyer of sorrow because there is no opportunity for sorrow. Anekacittanti various kinds of beautiful forms. Sunimmito bhūtapatīvāti even as a Tāvatiṃsa-heavenly being, you rejoice, are pleased, and delight like Sunimmita Devarājā because of your excellent divine enjoyment.

1200.Samassamoti samo eva hutvā samo, nibbariyāyena sadiso te tuyhaṃ natthi, kuto pana kena kāraṇena uttari adhiko ko nāma siyā. Kena pana samatā uttaritaratā cāti āha‘‘yasena puññena ca iddhiyā cā’’ti. Tatthayasenāti parivārena.Iddhiyāti ānubhāvena.Yasenāti vā issariyena,iddhiyāti deviddhiyā.Yasenāti vā vibhavasampattiyā,iddhiyāti yathicchi tassa kāmaguṇassa ijjhanena.Yasenāti vā kittighosena,iddhiyāti samiddhiyā.Puññenāti tattha tattha vuttāvasiṭṭhapuññaphalena, puññakammeneva vā.

1200. Samassamoti being equal, just being equal, in terms of absence of distinction, there is no one like you; how could there be anyone superior for what reason? He said, ‘‘yasena puññena ca iddhiyā cā’’ti, by what means is there equality or superiority. Therein, yasenāti by retinue. Iddhiyāti by power. Or, yasenāti by dominion, iddhiyāti by divine power. Or, yasenāti by wealth and prosperity, iddhiyāti by the success of the desired sense pleasures. Or, yasenāti by fame and renown, iddhiyāti by success. Puññenāti by the remaining fruit of merit spoken of in various places, or by meritorious deeds alone.

‘‘Sabbe ca devā’’ti sāmaññato gahitamatthaṃ‘‘tidasagaṇā’’ti iminā visesetvā vuttaṃ. Ekaccassa paccekaṃ nipaccakāraṃ karontāpi pamuditā na karonti, na evametassa. Etassa pana pamuditāpi karontiyevāti dassetuṃ‘‘sameccā’’ti vuttaṃ.Taṃ tanti taṃ tvaṃ.Sasiṃva devāti yathā nāma sukkapakkhapāṭipadiyaṃ dissamānaṃ sasiṃ candaṃ manussā devā ca ādarajātā namassanti, evaṃ taṃ sabbepi tidasagaṇā namassantīti attho.

‘‘Sabbe ca devā’’ti the meaning that was taken generally is specified by this: ‘‘tidasagaṇā’’. Even when one is doing a service individually, delighted ones do not do it always, but it is not like that for him. To show that even delighted ones do indeed do it for him, ‘‘sameccā’’ti was said. Taṃ tanti that you. Sasiṃva devāti just as humans and gods revere the moon, which appears on the first day of the waxing moon, with affection, so too, all the Tāvatiṃsa host revere you, is the meaning.

1203.Bhadanteti theraṃ gāravabahumānena samudācarati.Ahuvāsinti ahosiṃ.Pubbeti purimajātiyaṃ.Sumedhanāmassa jinassa sāvakoti sumedhoti evaṃ pākaṭanāmassa sammāsambuddassa sāsane pabbajitabhāvena sāvako.Puthūjjanoti anariyo. Tatthāpi saccānaṃ anubodhamattassāpi abhāvenaananubodho. So satta vassāni paribbajissahanti so ahaṃ satta saṃvaccharāni pabbajjāguṇamattena vicariṃ, uttarimanussadhammaṃ nādhigacchinti adhippāyo.

1203. Bhadanteti he addresses the Elder with respect and great esteem. Ahuvāsinti I was. Pubbeti in a previous birth. Sumedhanāmassa jinassa sāvakoti a disciple in the dispensation of the Sammāsambuddha named Sumedha, who was known as Sumedha, due to having gone forth. Puthūjjanoti an unawakened being. Even then, because of the absence of even an understanding of the truths, ananubodho. So satta vassāni paribbajissahanti that I wandered for seven years merely with the qualities of going forth, without attaining any further human qualities, is the idea.

1204.Ratanuccayanti maṇikanakādiratanehi uccitaṃ ussitaratanacetiyaṃ.Hemajālena channanti samantato upari ca kañcanajālena paṭicchāditaṃ.Vanditvāti pañcapatiṭṭhitena tattha tattha paṇāmaṃ katvā.Thūpasmiṃ manaṃ pasādayinti ‘‘sabbaññuguṇādhiṭṭhānāya vata dhātuyā ayaṃ thūpo’’ti thūpasmiṃ cittaṃ pasādesiṃ.

1204. Ratanuccayanti a ratanacetiya piled high with jewels of mani, gold, etc., a raised ratanacetiya. Hemajālena channanti covered all around and above with a golden net. Vanditvāti having worshiped by prostrating in five ways in various places. Thūpasmiṃ manaṃ pasādayinti "This stupa is indeed for the sake of the element of the qualities of the Omniscient One," I gladdened my mind towards the stupa.

1205.Na māsi dānanti me mayā kataṃ dānaṃ nāsi nāhosi. Kasmā pana?Na ca metthi dātunti me mama pariggahabhūtaṃ dānaṃ dātuṃ na atthi, na kiñci deyyavatthu vijjati,pare ca khosattetatthadānesamādapesiṃ. ‘‘Paresañca tattha samādapesi’’nti ca paṭhanti, tatthaparesanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.Pūjetha nantiādi samādapanākāradassanaṃ, taṃ dhātunti yojanā.Evaṃ kirātikira-saddo anussavattho.

1205. Na māsi dānanti dāna done by me was not, did not happen. Why? Na ca metthi dātunti there was not alms of mine which were held as my possession to be given. There was no object to be given. Pare ca khosattetatthadānesamādapesiṃ. And some read ‘‘Paresañca tattha samādapesi’’nti, there, paresanti should be seen as a possessive word in the sense of usage. Pūjetha nantiādi is showing the manner of encouraging, connect that to "dhātu". Evaṃ kirātikira-saddo is in the sense of hearsay.

1206.Na tassa puññassa khayampi ajjhaganti tassa tadā sumedhaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissa katassa puññakammassa parikkhayaṃ nādhigacchiṃ, tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesaṃ paccanubhomīti dasseti. Yaṃ panettha na vuttaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.

1206. Na tassa puññassa khayampi ajjhaganti I did not reach the exhaustion of that meritorious deed done towards Sumedha Bhagavat at that time; it shows that I continue to experience the remaining result of that very deed. Whatever is not said here should be understood as easily understood because of the method previously stated.

Anekavaṇṇavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the Anekavaṇṇa Vimāna is finished.

9. Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā
9. Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī Vimāna Description

Alaṅkatomaṭṭhakuṇḍalīti maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena sāvatthivāsī eko brāhmaṇo addho mahaddhano mahābhogo assaddho appasanno micchādiṭṭhiko kassaci kiñci na deti, adānato eva ‘‘adinnapubbako’’ti paññāyittha. So micchādiṭṭhibhāvena ca luddhabhāvena ca tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā daṭṭhumpi na icchati. Maṭṭhakuṇḍalaṃ nāma attano puttañca sikkhāpesi ‘‘tāta, tayā samaṇo gotamo tassa sāvakā ca na upasaṅkamitabbā na daṭṭhabbā’’ti. Sopi tathā akāsi. Athassa putto gilāno ahosi, brāhmaṇo dhanakkhayabhayena bhesajjaṃ na kāresi, roge pana vaḍḍhiteva vejje pakkositvā dassesi. Vejjā tassa sarīraṃ oloketvā ‘‘atekiccho’’ti taṃ ñatvā apakkamiṃsu. Brāhmaṇo ‘‘putte abbhantare mate nīharaṇaṃ dukkha’’nti puttaṃ bahidvārakoṭṭhake nipajjāpesi.

Alaṅkato maṭṭhakuṇḍalīti Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī Vimāna. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove. At that time, a certain brahmin living in Sāvatthi, who was rich, wealthy, and had great possessions, was faithless, unpleased, and of wrong view, and he did not give anything to anyone; therefore, he was known as "Adinnapubbaka" (never given before). Due to his wrong view and miserly nature, he did not even want to see the Tathāgata or a disciple of the Tathāgata. He also instructed his son, named Maṭṭhakuṇḍala, "Dear son, you must not approach or see the samaṇa Gotama and his disciples." He also did so. Then his son became ill, and the brahmin, fearing the loss of wealth, did not have medicine made; when the disease worsened, he summoned physicians and showed them. The physicians, having examined his body, knew that it was incurable and departed. The brahmin, thinking, "It is painful to take him out after my son dies inside," had his son lie down in the outer doorway.

Bhagavā rattiyā paccūsasamaye mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya lokaṃ volokento addasa maṭṭhakuṇḍalīmāṇavaṃ khīṇāyukaṃ tadaheva cavanadhammaṃ, nirayasaṃvattanikañcassa kammaṃ katokāsaṃ. ‘‘Sace panāhaṃ tattha gamissāmi, so mayi cittaṃ pasādetvā devaloke nibbattitvā pitaraṃ āḷāhane rodamānaṃ upagantvā saṃvejessati, evaṃ so ca tassa pitā ca mama santikaṃ āgamissati, mahājanakāyo sannipatissati tattha mayā dhamme desite mahādhammābhisamayo bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ pana ñatvā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho maṭṭhakuṇḍalīmāṇavassa pitu gehasamīpe ṭhatvā chabbaṇṇabuddharaṃsiyo vissajjesi. Tā disvā māṇavo ‘‘kimeta’’nti ito cito ca vilokento addasa bhagavantaṃ dantaṃ guttaṃ santindriyaṃ dvattiṃsāya mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi asītiyā anubyañjanehi byāmappabhāya ketumālāya ca vijjotamānaṃ anupamāya buddhasiriyā acinteyyena buddhānubhāvena virocamānaṃ. Disvā tassa etadahosi ‘‘buddho nu kho bhagavā idhānuppatto, yassāyaṃ rūpasampadā attano tejasā sūriyampi abhibhavati, kantabhāvena candimaṃ, upasantabhāvena sabbepi samaṇabrāhmaṇe, upasamena nāma ettheva bhavitabbaṃ, ayameva ca maññe imasmiṃ loke aggapuggalo, mameva ca anukampāya idhānuppatto’’ti buddhārammaṇāya pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭasarīro anappakaṃ pītisomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedento pasannacitto añjaliṃ paggayha nipajji. Taṃ disvā bhagavā ‘‘alaṃ imassa ettakena saggūpapattiyā’’ti pakkāmi.

At the end of the night, at dawn, the Blessed One, arising from the attainment of great compassion, surveyed the world and saw Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī, a young man of dwindling life, subject to death that very day, with a deed leading to hell ready to bear fruit for him. "If I go there, he will be gladdened at heart towards me, and after being reborn in the heavenly world, he will approach his father, who is weeping at the charnel ground, and will stir his emotions. Thus, both he and his father will come to me, a great crowd will gather, and when I preach the Dhamma there, a great realization of the Dhamma will occur." Knowing this, in the early morning, having dressed, and taking his bowl and robe, he entered Sāvatthī for alms with a large Saṅgha of monks, stood near the house of Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī's father, and emitted six-colored Buddha rays. Seeing those, the young man, looking here and there, saw the Blessed One, restrained, guarded, with senses calmed, resplendent with the thirty-two marks of a great man, the eighty subsidiary characteristics, a fathom-long aura, and a halo, shining with incomparable Buddha-splendor and inconceivable Buddha-power. Seeing him, he thought, "Is this the Buddha who has appeared here, whose beauty surpasses even the sun with his own radiance, the moon with his loveliness, and all ascetics and Brahmins with his tranquility? There must be peace here. I think he is the foremost individual in this world, and he has appeared here out of compassion for me." His whole body was filled with uninterrupted joy based on the Buddha, experiencing no small amount of joy and gladness, and with a serene mind, he raised his joined palms in reverence and lay down. Seeing that, the Blessed One thought, "This much is enough for him to be reborn in heaven," and departed.

Sopi taṃ pītisomanassaṃ avijahantova kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsesu dvādasayojanike vimāne nibbatti. Pitā panassa sarīrasakkāraṃ karitvā dutiyadivase paccūsavelāyaṃ āḷāhanaṃ gantvā ‘‘hā hā maṭṭhakuṇḍali, hā hā maṭṭhakuṇḍalī’’ti paridevamāno āḷāhanaṃ anuparikkamanto rodati. Devaputto attano vibhavasampattiṃ oloketvā ‘‘kuto nu kho ahaṃ idhāgato kiñca kammaṃ katvā’’ti upadhārento attano purimattabhāvaṃ ñatvā tattha ca maraṇakāle bhagavati pavattitaṃ cittappasādaṃ manoharaṃ añjalikaraṇamattaṃ disvā ‘‘aho mahānubhāvā buddhā bhagavanto’’ti sātisayaṃ tathāgate sañjātappasādabahumāno ‘‘adinnapubbakabrāhmaṇo nu kho kiṃ karotī’’ti upadhārento āḷāhane rodamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ pubbe bhesajjamattampi akatvā idāni niratthakaṃ āḷāhane rodati, handa naṃ saṃvejetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpessāmī’’ti devalokato āgantvā maṭṭhakuṇḍalīrūpena rodamāno ‘‘hā hā canda, hā hā sūriyā’’ti bāhā paggayha kandanto pitu samīpe aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ brāhmaṇo ‘‘ayaṃ maṭṭhakuṇḍalī āgato’’ti cintetvā gāthāya ajjhabhāsi –

Without abandoning that joy and gladness, he passed away and was reborn in a twelve- Yojana-wide celestial mansion in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. His father, having performed the funeral rites, on the second day, at dawn, went to the charnel ground, lamenting and weeping, "Alas, Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī, alas, Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī," wandering around the charnel ground. The young god, surveying his own wealth and splendor, wondering, "From where have I come here, and what deed did I do?" recognizing his former existence and seeing the serene mind directed towards the Blessed One at the time of death, and just the beautiful act of joining his palms, thought, "The Buddhas, the Blessed Ones, are of great power." With exceeding faith and respect arisen in the Tathāgata, considering, "What is the Brahmin, who has never given before, doing?" seeing him weeping at the charnel ground, thought, "This one, who did not even give me a bit of medicine before, now weeps uselessly at the charnel ground. I will stir his emotions and establish him in virtue." Coming from the heavenly world in the form of Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī, weeping, "Alas, moon! Alas, sun!" he stood near his father, raising his arms and crying. Then the Brahmin, thinking, "Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī has come," addressed him in a verse:

1207.

1207.

‘‘Alaṅkato maṭṭhakuṇḍalī, māladhārī haricandanussado;

"Adorned, Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī, garlanded, smeared with red sandalwood;
Raising your arms, you weep, in the middle of the forest, why are you afflicted?"

alaṅkatoti vibhūsito.Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīti sarīrappadesassa aghaṃsanatthaṃ mālālatādayo adassetvā maṭṭhākāreneva katakuṇḍalo. Atha vāmaṭṭhakuṇḍalīti visuddhakuṇḍalo, tāpetvā jātihiṅgulikāya majjitvā dhovitvā sūkaralomena majjitakuṇḍaloti attho.Māladhārīti mālaṃ dhārento, piḷandhitamāloti attho.Haricandanussadoti rattacandanena sabbaso anulittagatto.Kinti pucchāvacanaṃ.Dukkhitoti dukkhappatto.Kiṃdukkhitoti vā ekameva padaṃ, kena dukkhena dukkhitoti attho.

Alaṅkato: adorned, decorated. Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī: One with smooth earrings, not showing garlands, creepers, etc., for the sake of touching the body, but earrings made in a smooth manner. Or, Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī: one with pure earrings, heated, immersed in jātihiṅgulika, washed, earrings polished with boar bristles is the meaning. Māladhārī: wearing a garland, the meaning is having a garland adorned. Haricandanussado: one whose body is completely smeared with red sandalwood. Kiṃ: is a word of questioning. Dukkhito: afflicted, attained to suffering. Kiṃdukkhito: or it is just one word, by what suffering is he afflicted is the meaning.

Atha naṃ devaputto āha –

Then the young god said:

1208.

1208.

‘‘Sovaṇṇamayo pabhassaro, uppanno rathapañjaro mama;

"Made of gold, radiant, a chariot frame has arisen for me;
I do not find a pair of wheels for it, by that suffering I abandon life."

Atha naṃ brāhmaṇo āha –

Then the Brahmin said to him:

1209.

1209.

‘‘Sovaṇṇamayaṃ maṇimayaṃ, lohitakamayaṃ atha rūpiyamayaṃ;

"Made of gold, made of jewels, made of ruby, or made of silver;
Tell me, good young man, I will provide you with a pair of wheels."

Taṃ sutvā māṇavo ‘‘ayaṃ puttassa bhesajjaṃ akatvā puttapatirūpakaṃ maṃ disvā rodanto ‘suvaṇṇādimayaṃ rathacakkaṃ karomī’ti vadati, hotu niggaṇhissāmi na’’nti cintetvā ‘‘kīva mahantaṃ me cakkayugaṃ karissasī’’ti vatvā ‘‘yāva mahantaṃ ākaṅkhasī’’ti vutte ‘‘candimasūriyehi me attho, te me dehī’’ti yācanto –

Hearing that, the young man thought, "This one, not having given medicine for his son, seeing me in the likeness of his son, weeping, says, 'I will make a chariot wheel made of gold, etc.' Let it be, I will rebuke him." And saying, "How big a pair of wheels will you make for me?" and when he said, "As big as you desire," asking for, "I need the moon and the sun, give them to me"—

1210.

1210.

‘‘So māṇavo tassa pāvadi, candasūriyā ubhayettha dissare;

"That young man said to him, the moon and the sun are both seen here;
My chariot is made of gold, it shines with that pair of wheels."

Atha naṃ brāhmaṇo āha –

Then the Brahmin said to him:

1211.

1211.

‘‘Bālo kho tvaṃ asi māṇava, yo tvaṃ patthayase apatthiyaṃ;

"You are indeed a fool, young man, who desires the undesirable;
I think you will die, you will not obtain the moon and the sun."

Atha naṃ māṇavo ‘‘kiṃ pana paññāyamānassatthāya rodanto bālo hoti, udāhu apaññāyamānassā’’ti vatvā –

Then the young man, saying, "Is one who weeps for something understandable a fool, or one who weeps for something incomprehensible?"—

1212.

1212.

‘‘Gamanāgamanampi dissati, vaṇṇadhātu ubhayattha vīthiyā;

"Coming and going are seen, the element of color is in both ways on the path;
A dead person, one who has passed away, is not seen, who here is more foolish than one who weeps?"

Taṃ sutvā brāhmaṇo ‘‘yuttaṃ esa vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā –

Hearing that, the Brahmin, realizing, "He speaks rightly"—

1213.

1213.

‘‘Saccaṃ kho vadesi māṇava, ahameva kandataṃ bālyataro;

"Truly, young man, you speak the truth, I myself am more foolish than one who weeps;
Like a child weeping for the moon, I desire a dead person, one who has passed away."

Vatvā tassa kathāya nissoko hutvā māṇavassa thutiṃ karonto imā gāthā abhāsi –

Saying this, having become free from sorrow by his words, praising the young man, he spoke these verses:

1214.

1214.

‘‘Ādittaṃ vata maṃ santaṃ, ghatasittaṃva pāvakaṃ;

"You have indeed cooled me, who was burning, like a fire sprinkled with ghee;
As with water, you have sprinkled me, extinguish all fear.

1215.

1215.

‘‘Abbahī vata me sallaṃ, sokaṃ hadayanissitaṃ;

"You have pulled out my dart, sorrow lodged in my heart;
You have removed the sorrow for a son from me, who was overcome with sorrow.

1216.

1216.

‘‘Svāhaṃ abbūḷhasallosmi, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto;

"I am one who has drawn out the dart, I have become cool, I am extinguished;
I do not grieve, I do not weep, having heard you, young man."

1208-10.Tattharathapañjaroti rathūpatthaṃ.Na vindāmīti na labhāmi.Bhaddamāṇavāti ālapanaṃ.Paṭipādayāmīti sampādetvā dadāmi, mā cakkayugābhāvena jīvitaṃ jahīti adhippāyo.Ubhayettha dissareti ubhopi ettha candasūriyā ākāse dissanti.Ya-kāro padasandhikaro, ubhaye etthāti vā padavibhāgo.

1208-10.Therein, rathapañjaro: chariot frame. Na vindāmī: I do not find, I do not obtain. Bhaddamāṇavā: is an address. Paṭipādayāmī: having accomplished, I give, the intention is do not abandon life for lack of a pair of wheels. Ubhayettha dissare: both the moon and the sun are seen here in the sky. The ya- is a word connector, or the word division is ubhaye ettha.

1212.Gamanāgamananti divase divase ogamanuggamanavasena candasūriyānaṃ gamanaṃ āgamanañca dissati. ‘‘Gamanogamana’’ntipi pāḷi, uggamanaṃ ogamanañcāti attho.Vaṇṇadhātūti sītibhāvavisiṭṭhā kantabhāvabhāsurā, uṇhabhāvavisiṭṭhā tikkhabhāvabhāsurā ca vaṇṇanibhā.Ubhayatthāti cande sūriye cāti dvīsupi vaṇṇadhātu dissatīti yojetabbaṃ.Vīthiyāti pavattanavīthiyaṃ ākāse, nāgavīthiyādivīthiyaṃ vā. ‘‘Ubhayetthā’’tipi pāṭho, ubhaye etthāti padavisandhi.Bālyataroti bālataro atisayena bālo.

1212.Gamanāgamana: The going and coming of the moon and sun is seen day by day, by way of setting and rising. "Gamanogamana" is also a reading, the meaning is rising and setting. Vaṇṇadhātū: the appearance of color, distinguished by coolness, bright with loveliness, and distinguished by heat, bright with sharpness. Ubhayatthā: to be connected as the element of color is seen in both, in the moon and the sun. Vīthiyā: on the path of movement, in the sky, or on the path of the nāga, etc. "Ubhayetthā" is also a reading, word separation is ubhaye ettha. Bālyataro: more foolish, exceedingly foolish.

1213.Imaṃ pana kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘alabbhanīyavatthuṃ vatāhaṃ patthetvā kevalaṃ sokagginā ḍayhāmi, kiṃ me niratthakena anayabyasanenā’’ti paṭisaṅkhāne aṭṭhāsi. Atha devaputto maṭṭhakuṇḍalīrūpaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā attano dibbarūpeneva aṭṭhāsi. Brāhmaṇo pana taṃ anoloketvā māṇavavohāreneva voharanto‘‘saccaṃ kho vadesi māṇavā’’tiādimāha. Tatthacandaṃ viya dārako rudanti candaṃ abhipatthayaṃ rudanto dārako viyāti attho.Kālakatābhipatthayinti kālakataṃ abhipatthayiṃ. ‘‘Abhipatthaya’’ntipi pāṭho.

1213.Hearing this speech, he considered, "By desiring an unattainable thing, I am only being burned by the fire of sorrow. What is the use of this pointless misfortune?" Then the young god, having retracted the form of Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī, stood in his own divine form. But the Brahmin, not looking at him, addressing him with the same language as when he was a young man, said, "Saccaṃ kho vadesi māṇavā" etc. Therein, candaṃ viya dārako rudaṃ: like a child weeping desiring the moon is the meaning. Kālakatābhipatthayi: I desire one who has passed away. "Abhipatthaya" is also a reading.

1214-5.Ādittanti sokagginā ādittaṃ.Nibbāpaye daranti nibbāpayi darathaṃ sokapariḷāhaṃ.Abbahīti uddhari.

1214-5.Ādittaṃ: ablaze with the fire of sorrow. Nibbāpaye daraṃ: extinguish fear, the burning of sorrow. Abbahī: you extracted.

Atha brāhmaṇo sokaṃ vinodetvā attano upadesadāyakaṃ dibbarūpena ṭhitaṃ disvā ‘‘ko nāma tva’’nti pucchanto –

Then the Brahmin, having dispelled his sorrow, seeing him standing in divine form, asking, "Who are you?"—

1217.

1217.

‘‘Devatā nusi gandhabbo, adu sakko purindado;

"Are you a deity, a gandhabba, or are you Sakka, Purindada?
Who are you, or whose son, how should we know you?"—

Āha. Sopi tassa –

He said. He to him—

1218.

1218.

‘‘Yañca kandasi yañca rodasi, puttaṃ āḷāhane sayaṃ dahitvā;

"That for whom you weep and lament, having burned your son yourself at the charnel ground;
I, having done a skillful deed, have gone to companionship with the thirty-three."

yañca kandasi yañca rodasīti yaṃ tava puttaṃ maṭṭhakuṇḍaliṃ uddissa rodasi, assūni muñcasi.

yañca kandasi yañca rodasī: you weep, shedding tears, for your son Maṭṭhakuṇḍalī.

Atha naṃ brāhmaṇo āha –

Then the Brahmin said to him:

1219.

1219.

‘‘Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā nāddasāma, dānaṃ dadantassa sake agāre;

"Little or much, we did not see you giving alms in your own house;
Or a similar uposatha deed, by what deed have you gone to the heavenly world?"

Tattha ‘‘uposathakammaṃ vā tādisaṃ nāddasāmā’’ti yojanā.

Therein, "uposathakammaṃ vā tādisaṃ nāddasāmā" is the connection.

Atha naṃ māṇavo āha –

Then the young man said to him:

1220.

1220.

‘‘Ābādhikohaṃ dukkhito gilāno, āturarūpomhi sake nivesane;

"I was sick, suffering, ill, in a state of sickness in my own house;
I saw the Buddha, free from dust, rid of doubt, the Sugata, of incomparable wisdom.

1221.

1221.

‘‘Svāhaṃ muditamano pasannacitto, añjaliṃ akariṃ tathāgatassa;

"I, with a joyful mind, a serene heart, made reverence to the Tathāgata;
Having done that skillful deed, I have gone to companionship with the thirty-three."

1220-21.Tatthaābādhikoti ābādhasamaṅgī.Dukkhitoti teneva ābādhikabhāvena jātadukkho.Gilānoti gilāyamānoti attho.Āturarūpoti dukkhavedanābhitunnakāyo.Vigatarajanti vigatarāgādirajaṃ.Vitiṇṇakaṅkhanti sabbaso saṃsayānaṃ samucchinnattā tiṇṇavicikicchaṃ.Anomapaññanti paripuṇṇapaññaṃ, sabbaññunti attho.Akarinti akāsiṃ.Tāhanti taṃ ahaṃ.

1220-21.Therein, ābādhiko: one possessed of sickness. Dukkhito: suffering arisen from that very state of being sick. Gilāno: being ill is the meaning. Āturarūpo: one whose body is overcome with painful feelings. Vigatarajaṃ: free from the dust of lust, etc. Vitiṇṇakaṅkhaṃ: having crossed over doubt, because all doubts have been completely cut off. Anomapaññaṃ: of complete wisdom, omniscient is the meaning. Akariṃ: I did. Tāhaṃ: that I.

Evaṃ tasmiṃ kathenteyeva brāhmaṇassa sakalasarīraṃ pītiyā paripūri. So taṃ pītiṃ pavedento –

As he spoke thus, the entire body of the Brahmin was filled with joy. Expressing that joy, he said—

1222.

1222.

‘‘Acchariyaṃ vata abbhutaṃ vata,

"Wonderful indeed, marvelous indeed,
Such is the result of the deed of reverence;
I too, with a joyful mind, a serene heart,
Today itself I go to the Buddha for refuge."

acchariyaṃ,abhūtapubbatāyaabbhutaṃ. Ubhayenapi vimhayāvahataṃyeva dassetvā‘‘ahampi muditamano pasannacitto, ajjeva buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ vajāmī’’ti āha.

acchariyaṃ, because it never happened before, abbhutaṃ. Showing it is a cause for wonder by both, "ahampi muditamano pasannacitto, ajjeva buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ vajāmī" he said.

Atha naṃ devaputto saraṇagamane sīlasamādāne ca niyojento –

Then the young god, instructing him in taking refuge and undertaking the precepts—

1223.

1223.

‘‘Ajjeva buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ vajāhi, dhammañca saṅghañca pasannacitto;

"Today itself go to the Buddha for refuge, and to the Dhamma and the Saṅgha with a serene mind;
Likewise, the five precepts of training, unbroken and complete, undertake them.

1224.

1224.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramassu khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayassu;

"Quickly abstain from killing living beings, avoid taking what is not given in the world;
Be not a drinker of intoxicants, nor speak falsely, and be content with your own wife."

Gāthādvayamāha.

He spoke two verses.

1223.Tatthatathevāti yathā pasannacitto ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’ti buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ vajesi, tatheva ‘‘svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti pasannacitto dhammañca saṅghañca saraṇaṃ vajāhi. Yathā vā pasannacitto ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ vajesi, tatheva ‘‘ayaṃ ekaṃsato diṭṭheva dhamme abhisamparāyañca hitasukhāvaho’’ti pasannacittosikkhāyaadhisīlasikkhāyapadānikoṭṭhāsabhūtāni adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya vā upāyabhūtāni pañcasīlāni avikopanato ca asaṃkilissanato caakhaṇḍaphullāni samādiyassu,samādāya vattassūti attho.

1223.Therein, tatheva: just as with a serene mind, you went to the Buddha for refuge thinking, "The Sammāsambuddha is the Blessed One," just so with a serene mind go to the Dhamma and the Saṅgha for refuge thinking, "The Dhamma is well-proclaimed, the Saṅgha is practicing well." Or, just as with a serene mind you went to the Triple Gem for refuge, just so with a serene mind, thinking "This is certainly conducive to benefit and happiness both in this very life and in the next," sikkhāya: to the training, to the training in higher morality, padāni: the parts, being portions, or the five precepts which are the means for the training in higher mind and higher wisdom, akhaṇḍaphullāni samādiyassu: from not violating and not defiling, undertake them unbroken and complete, the meaning is may you behave having undertaken them.

Evaṃ devaputtena saraṇagamane sīlasamādāne ca niyojito brāhmaṇo tassa vacanaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchanto –

Thus, the Brahmin, instructed by the young god in taking refuge and undertaking the precepts, accepting his words with his head bowed—

1225.

1225.

‘‘Atthakāmosi me yakkha, hitakāmosi devate;

"O Yaksha, you wish me well; O deity, you desire my benefit.
I will do as you say; you are my teacher." –

Gāthaṃ vatvā tattha patiṭṭhahanto –

Having spoken the verse, as he stood there –

1226.

1226.

‘‘Upemi saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammañcāpi anuttaraṃ;

"I go to the Buddha for refuge, and also to the unsurpassed Dhamma;
And to the Sangha of the Leader of men, I go for refuge."

1227.

1227.

‘‘Pāṇātipātā viramāmi khippaṃ, loke adinnaṃ parivajjayāmi;

"I abstain quickly from killing living beings, in the world I avoid taking what is not given;
I am not a drinker of intoxicants, nor do I speak falsely, and I am content with my own wife." –

Gāthādvayamāha. Tampi suviññeyyameva.

He spoke these two verses. That too is easily understood.

Tato devaputto ‘‘kataṃ mayā brāhmaṇassa kattabbayuttakaṃ, idāni sayameva bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamissatī’’ti tattheva antaradhāyi. Brāhmaṇopi kho bhagavati sañjātapasādabahumāno devatāya ca codiyamāno ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamissāmī’’ti vihārābhimukho gacchati. Taṃ disvā mahājano ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo ettakaṃ kālaṃ tathāgataṃ anupasaṅkamitvā ajja puttasokena upasaṅkamati, kīdisī nu kho dhammadesanā bhavissatī’’ti taṃ anubandhi.

Then the deva-son, thinking, "I have done what was to be done for the brahmin; now he himself will approach the Blessed One," vanished right there. The brahmin too, filled with faith and respect for the Blessed One and urged on by the deity, thinking, "I will approach the samaṇa Gotama," went towards the monastery. Seeing him, the great crowd followed him, thinking, "This brahmin, without approaching the Tathāgata for so long, now approaches him because of grief for his son; what kind of Dhamma teaching will there be?"

Brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā evamāha ‘‘sakkā nu kho bho gotama kiñci dānaṃ adatvā sīlaṃ vā arakkhitvā kevalaṃ tumhesu pasādamattena sagge nibbattitu’’nti. ‘‘Nanu, brāhmaṇa, ajja paccūsavelāyaṃ maṭṭhakuṇḍalinā devaputtena attano devalokūpapattikāraṇaṃ tuyhaṃ kathika’’nti bhagavā avoca. Tasmiṃ khaṇe maṭṭhakuṇḍalīdevaputto saha vimānena āgantvā dissamānarūpo vimānato oruyha bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā añjaliṃ paggayha ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Atha bhagavā tassaṃ parisati tena devaputtena katasucaritaṃ kathetvā parisāya cittakallataṃ ñatvā sāmukkaṃsikaṃ dhammadesanaṃ akāsi. Desanāpariyosāne devaputto ca brāhmaṇo ca sannipatitaparisā cāti caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.

The brahmin, having approached the Blessed One, exchanged greetings and said, "Is it indeed possible, Master Gotama, to be reborn in heaven without giving any alms or keeping the precepts, merely by having faith in you?" The Blessed One said, "Didn't the deva-son Mattha-kundali tell you at dawn today the cause of his arising in the deva-world?" At that moment, the deva-son Mattha-kundali came with his celestial mansion, appearing in visible form. Descending from the mansion, he paid homage to the Blessed One, raised his joined hands, and stood to one side. Then the Blessed One, knowing the suitability of mind of that assembly, described the good deed done by that deva-son, and gave a progressive Dhamma talk. At the end of the teaching, both the deva-son and the brahmin, as well as the assembled crowd, attained the Dhamma in the amount of eighty-four thousand beings.

Maṭṭhakuṇḍalīvimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The description of the celestial mansion of Mattha-kundali is finished.

10. Serīsakavimānavaṇṇanā
10. Serīsaka-vimāna

Suṇothayakkhassa ca vāṇijāna cāti serīsakavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavati parinibbute āyasmā kumārakassapo pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ setabyanagaraṃ sampatto. Tattha pāyāsirājaññaṃ attano santikaṃ upagataṃ viparītaggāhato vivecetvā sammādassane patiṭṭhāpesi. So tato paṭṭhāya puññapasuto hutvā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ dānaṃ dento tattha akataparicayatāya asakkaccaṃ dānaṃ datvā aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā cātumahārājikabhavane suññe serīsake vimāne nibbatti.

"Listen to the conversation of the Yaksha and the merchants" is the Serīsaka-vimāna. What is its origin? After the Blessed One passed away, the venerable Kumārakassapa arrived at Setabya-nagara with five hundred bhikkhus. There, he disentangled Payasi the ruler, who had come to his presence, from his wrong views and established him in right view. From then on, being devoted to merit, he gave alms to samaṇas and brahmins, but because he had no previous acquaintance there, he gave alms without due care. Later, upon passing away, he was reborn in the empty Serīsaka celestial mansion in the Cātumahārājika heaven.

Atīte kira kassapassa bhagavato kāle eko khīṇāsavatthero aññatarasmiṃ gāme piṇḍāya caritvā bahigāme devasikaṃ ekasmiṃ padese bhattakiccaṃ akāsi. Taṃ disvā eko gopālako ‘‘ayyo sūriyātapena kilamatī’’ti pasannacitto catūhi sirīsathambhehi sākhāmaṇḍapaṃ katvā adāsi, maṇḍapassa samīpe sirīsarukkhaṃ ropesīti ca vadanti. So kālaṃ katvā teneva puññakammena cātumahārājikesu nibbatti, tassa purimakammassa sūcakaṃ vimānadvāre sirīsavanaṃ nibbatti vaṇṇagandhasampannehi pupphehi sabbakālaṃ upasobhamānaṃ, tena taṃ vimānaṃ ‘‘serīsaka’’nti paññāyittha. So ca devaputto ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devesu ceva manussesu ca saṃsaranto imasmiṃ buddhuppāde yasattherassa catūsu vimalādīsu gihisahāyesu gavampati nāma hutvā bhagavato dhammadesanāya arahatte patiṭṭhito pubbāciṇṇavasena taṃ suññavimānaṃ disvā abhiṇhaṃ divāvihāraṃ gacchati.

It is said that in the past, during the time of the Buddha Kassapa, a thera who was a liberated being went for alms in a certain village and performed his meal duty in an open space outside the village at devasika time. Seeing him, a cowherd, with a pure heart, made a pavilion of branches with four sirisa posts and gave it to him; they say that he also planted a sirisa tree near the pavilion. Upon passing away, he was reborn in the Cātumahārājika heaven due to that meritorious action. As an indication of his former karma, a sirisa grove arose at the entrance of the celestial mansion, always adorned with flowers rich in color and fragrance; therefore, that celestial mansion was known as "Serīsaka". That deva-son, wandering among devas and humans for one Buddha-interval, in this Buddha-era, having been Gavampati among the lay companions of the venerable Yasa, including the four Vimalas, and being established in arahantship by the Blessed One's Dhamma teaching, often went to that empty celestial mansion for the day's dwelling due to his past habit.

So aparabhāge pāyāsidevaputtaṃ tattha disvā ‘‘kosi tvaṃ, āvuso’’ti pucchitvā tena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, pāyāsirājañño idhūpapanno’’ti vutte ‘‘nanu tvaṃ micchādiṭṭhiko viparītadassano kathamidhūpapanno’’ti āha. Atha naṃ pāyāsidevaputto ‘‘ayyenamhi kumārakassapattherena micchādassanato vivecito, puññakiriyānaṃ asakkaccakāritāya pana suññe vimāne nibbatto. Sādhu, bhante, manussalokaṃ gatakāle mama parijanassa ārocetha ‘pāyāsirājañño asakkaccaṃ dānaṃ datvā suññaṃ serīsakavimānaṃ upapanno, tumhe pana sakkaccaṃ puññāni katvā tatrūpapattiyā cittaṃ paṇidahathā’’ti. Thero tassānukampāya tathā akāsi. Tepi therassa vacanaṃ sutvā tathā cittaṃ paṇidhāya puññāni katvā serīsake vimāne nibbattiṃsu. Serīsakadevaputtaṃ pana vessavaṇamahārājā marubhūmiyaṃ chāyūdakarahite magge maggapaṭipannānaṃ manussānaṃ amanussaparipantha mocanatthaṃ maggarakkhakaṃ ṭhapesi.

Later, seeing Payasi the deva-son there, he asked, "Who are you, friend?" When he replied, "Venerable sir, I am Payasi the ruler, who has arisen here," he said, "But you were a holder of wrong views, a perverted seer; how have you arisen here?" Then Payasi the deva-son said to him, "I was disentangled from wrong views by the venerable Kumārakassapa thera, but due to doing meritorious deeds without due care, I was reborn in an empty celestial mansion. Venerable sir, when you go to the human world, please announce to my relatives, 'Payasi the ruler, having given alms without due care, has arisen in an empty Serīsaka celestial mansion; but you, having done meritorious deeds with due care, should direct your minds towards arising there.'" Out of compassion for him, the thera did so. Hearing the thera's words, they too directed their minds in that way, performed meritorious deeds, and were reborn in the Serīsaka celestial mansion. King Vessavaṇa established the Serīsaka deva-son as a guardian of the road in the desert, to free humans traveling on the road from dangers caused by non-humans, in a path devoid of shade and water.

Atha aparena samayena aṅgamagadhavāsino vāṇijā sakaṭasahassaṃ bhaṇḍassa pūretvā sindhusovīradesaṃ gacchantā marukantāre divā uṇhabhayena maggaṃ appaṭipajjitvā rattiṃ nakkhattasaññāya maggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu. Te maggamūḷhā hutvā aññaṃ disaṃ agamaṃsu. Tesaṃ antare eko upāsako ahosi saddho pasanno sīlasampanno arahattappattiyā upanissayasampanno mātāpitūnaṃ upaṭṭhānatthaṃ vaṇijjāya gato. Taṃ anuggaṇhanto serīsakadevaputto saha vimānena attānaṃ dassesi. Dassetvā ca pana ‘‘kasmā tumhe imaṃ chāyūdakarahitaṃ vālukākantāraṃ paṭipannā’’ti pucchi. Te cassa tattha attano āgatappakāraṃ kathesuṃ, tadatthadīpanā devaputtassa vāṇijānañca vacanapaṭivacanagāthā honti. Ādito pana dve gāthā tāsaṃ sambandhadassanatthaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehi ṭhapitā –

Then, at another time, merchants living in Anga and Magadha, filling a thousand carts with goods, were going to the land of Sindhu-Sovira. During the desert crossing, they did not travel during the day due to fear of the heat, but traveled at night by observing the stars. They lost their way and went in a different direction. Among them was a lay follower, faithful, devoted, accomplished in virtue, endowed with the underlying conditions for the attainment of arahantship, who had gone for trade to support his parents. Showing favor to him, the Serīsaka deva-son revealed himself with his celestial mansion. Having revealed himself, he asked, "Why have you come to this sandy desert devoid of shade and water?" They told him about their arrival there. The verses of questions and answers expressing the purpose are between the deva-son and the merchants. However, the first two verses are placed by the compilers of the Dhamma to show the connection to them –

1228.

1228.

‘‘Suṇotha yakkhassa ca vāṇijāna ca, samāgamo yattha tadā ahosi;

"Listen to the conversation of the Yaksha and the merchants,
Where the meeting then took place;
And how they spoke to each other,
Listen all to that which was well-spoken."

1229.

1229.

‘‘Yo so ahu rājā pāyāsi nāma, bhummānaṃ sahabyagato yasassī;

"He who was the king named Payasi,
Gone to the fellowship of earth-dwellers, glorious;
As he rejoiced in his own celestial mansion,
The non-human spoke to the human."

1228-9.Tatthasuṇothāti savanāṇattikavacanaṃ. Yaṃ mayaṃ idāni bhaṇāma, taṃ suṇothāti.Yakkhassāti devassa. Devo hi manussānaṃ ekaccānaṃ devānañca pūjanīyabhāvato ‘‘yakkho’’ti vuccati. Apica sakkopi cattāro mahārājānopi vessavaṇapārisajjāpi purisopi ‘‘yakkho’’ti vuccati. Tathā hi ‘‘atibāḷhaṃ kho ayaṃ yakkho pamatto viharati, yaṃnūnāhaṃ imaṃ yakkhaṃ saṃvejeyya’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.393) sakko ‘‘yakkho’’ti vutto. ‘‘Cattāro yakkhā khaggahatthā’’tiādīsu mahārājāno. ‘‘Santi hi, bhante, uḷārā yakkhā bhagavato appasannā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.276) vessavaṇapārisajjā. ‘‘Ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 482) puriso. Idha pana vessavaṇapārisajjo adhippeto.Vāṇijāna cāti gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ anunāsikalopaṃ katvā vuttaṃ.Samāgamoti samodhānaṃ.Yatthāti yasmiṃ vaṇṇupathe.Tadāti tasmiṃ maggamūḷhā hutvā gamanakāle.Itaritarena cāpīti itarītarañcāpi, idaṃ yathāti iminā yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – serīsakadevaputtassa vāṇijānañca tadā yattha samāgamo ahosi, taṃ suṇotha, yathā vāpi tehi aññamaññaṃ subhāsitaṃ sulapitaṃ kathaṃ pavattitaṃ, tañca sabbe ohitacittā suṇāthāti.Bhummānanti bhummadevānaṃ.

1228-9. Among them, suṇotha means a word commanding to listen. "That which we now say, listen to that." Yakkhassa means of the deva. For a few humans and devas, a deva is referred to as "Yakkha" because of their worthiness of worship. Also, Sakka, the four great kings, Vessavaṇa's attendants, and a person are referred to as "Yakkha." For example, in instances such as "This Yakkha is living very negligently, what if I were to shake this Yakkha," Sakka is called "Yakkha." In instances such as "Four Yakkhās with swords in hand," the great kings are referred to. In instances such as "Indeed, venerable sir, there are magnificent Yakkhās who are not pleased with the Blessed One," Vessavaṇa's attendants are referred to. In instances such as "This is the purification of a Yakkha," a person is referred to. Here, however, Vessavaṇa's attendant is intended. Vāṇijāna ca means it is said with the omission of the nasal consonant for the ease of the verse's structure. Samāgamo means meeting. Yattha means in which path. Tadā means at that time of losing their way and traveling. Itaritarena cāpī means itaritarañcāpi; this should be connected with "yathā". The meaning here is – listen to that meeting which then took place between the Serīsaka deva-son and the merchants, and all of you listen with attentive minds to how well-spoken and well-uttered speech was exchanged among them. Bhummāna means of the earth-dwelling devas.

Idāni yakkhassa pucchāgāthāyo honti –

Now, there are verses of the Yakkha's questions –

1230.

1230.

‘‘Vaṅke araññe amanussaṭṭhāne, kantāre appodake appabhakkhe;

"In a crooked forest, in a place haunted by non-humans,
In a desert with little water and little food;
In the middle of a very difficult path,
Humans, frightened by the dangers, have lost their minds.

1231.

1231.

‘‘Nayidha phalā mūlamayā ca santi, upādānaṃ natthi kutodha bhakkho;

"Here there are no fruits or roots,
There is no sustenance; where is food from here?
Except for dust and sand,
Hot, burning, and cruel.

1232.

1232.

‘‘Ujjaṅgalaṃ tattamivaṃ kapālaṃ, anāyasaṃ paralokena tulyaṃ;

"A barren land, like a heated potsherd,
Without comfort, similar to the next world;
This ancient abode of the cruel,
Is a land accursed.

1233.

1233.

‘‘Atha tumhe kena vaṇṇena, kimāsamānā imaṃ padesañhi;

"For what reason have you come to this place,
With what expectations?
Having suddenly entered in agreement,
Out of greed, fear, or delusion?"

1230.Tatthavaṅketi saṃsayaṭṭhāne. Yattha paviṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘jīvissāma nu kho, marissāma nu kho’’ti jīvite saṃsayo hoti, tādisearaññe. Amanussaṭṭhāneti amanussānaṃ pisācādīnaṃ sañcaraṇaṭṭhāne, manussānaṃ vā agocaraṭṭhāne.Kantāreti nirudake iriṇe, kaṃ tārenti nayanti etthāti hi kantāro, udakaṃ gahetvā taritabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha‘‘appodake’’ti. Appa-saddo hettha abhāvattho ‘‘appiccho appanigghoso’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.23; cūḷava. 456) viya.Vaṇṇupathassa majjheti vālukākantāramajjheti attho.Vaṅkaṃbhayāti vaṅkehi bhītā. Vaṅkehi bhayaṃ etesanti ‘‘vaṅkabhayā’’ti vattabbe gāthāsukhatthaṃ sānunāsikaṃ katvā ‘‘vaṅkaṃbhayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idañca vālukākantārapavesanato pubbe tesaṃ uppannabhayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.Naṭṭhamanāti maggasativippavāsena naṭṭhamānasā, maggamūḷhāti attho.Manussāti tesaṃ ālapanaṃ.

1230. Among them, vaṅke means in a place of doubt. In which, for those who have entered, there is doubt about life, thinking, "Will we live, or will we die?" In such araññe (forest). Amanussaṭṭhāne means in a place frequented by non-humans, such as pisācas, or in a place inaccessible to humans. Kantāre means in a waterless, barren land; for kaṃ tārenti, they carry or lead, hence kantāro, a place where one must carry water to cross. Therefore, he said "appodake". Here, the prefix "appa" has the meaning of absence, like in "appiccho appanigghoso" (A.N. 8.23; Cūḷava. 456). Vaṇṇupathassa majjhe means in the middle of the sandy desert. Vaṅkaṃbhayā means frightened by dangers. Instead of saying "vaṅkabhayā" (fearful of dangers), it is said as "vaṅkaṃbhayā" with a nasal consonant for the ease of the verse's structure. This is said referring to the fear that arose in them before entering the sandy desert. Naṭṭhamanā means with minds lost due to the absence of mindfulness on the path, having lost their way. Manussā is addressing them.

1231.Idhāti imasmiṃ marukantāre.Phalāti ambajambutālanāḷikerādiphalāni na santīti yojanā.Mūlamayā cāti mūlāniyeva mūlamayā, vallikandādīni sandhāya vadati.Upādānaṃnatthīti kiñcāpi kiñci bhakkhaṃ natthi, upādānaṃ vā indhanaṃ, aggissa indhanamattampi natthi, kuto kena kāraṇena idha marukantāre bhakkho siyāti attho. Yaṃ pana atthi tattha, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘aññatra paṃsūhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

1231. Idha means in this sandy desert. Phalā means fruits such as mangoes, jambus, palmyra palms, and coconuts are not available. Mūlamayā cā means only roots are mūlamayā, referring to vines, tubers, etc. Upādānaṃ natthī means although there is no food, there is no upādāna, fuel, not even a bit of fuel for fire; how, for what reason, could there be food in this sandy desert? To show what is there, "aññatra paṃsūhī" etc., is said.

1232.Ujjaṅgalanti jaṅgalaṃ vuccati lūkhadhūsaro anudako bhūmippadeso, taṃ pana ṭhānaṃ jaṅgalatopi ukkaṃsena jaṅgalanti āha ‘‘ujjaṅgala’’nti. Tenāha‘‘tattamivaṃ kapāla’’nti, tattaṃ ayokapālasadisanti attho. Gāthāsukhatthañcettha sānunāsikaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, tattamivaicceva daṭṭhabbaṃ.Anāyasanti natthi ettha āyo sukhanti anāyaṃ, tato eva jīvitaṃ sīyati vināsetīti anāyasaṃ. Atha vā na āyasanti anāyasaṃ.Paralokenāti narakena tulyaṃ. Narakañhi sattānaṃ ekantānatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto lokoti visesato ‘‘paraloko’’ti vuccati, samantato ayomayattā āyasañca, idaṃ pana tadabhāvato anāyasaṃ, mahato dukkhassa uppattiṭṭhānatāya paralokasadisanti dasseti, ‘‘anassaya’’nti ca keci paṭhanti, sukhassa appatiṭṭhānabhūtanti attho.Luddānamāvāsamidaṃ purāṇanti idaṃ ṭhānaṃ cirakālato paṭṭhāya luddānaṃ dāruṇānaṃ pisācādīnaṃ āvāsabhūtaṃ.Abhisattarūpoti ‘‘evaṃ lūkho ghorākāro hotū’’ti porāṇehi isīhi sapitasadiso, dinnasapo viyāti attho.

1232. Ujjaṅgalaṃ means jaṅgalaṃ is said of a dry, barren, waterless land; however, he said, "ujjaṅgalaṃ," meaning exceedingly more barren than jaṅgala. Therefore, he said "tattamivaṃ kapāla", meaning like a heated iron potsherd. Here, it is said with a nasal consonant for the ease of the verse's structure; it should be understood as "tattamiva" itself. Anāyasaṃ means there is no āyo (comfort) here, hence anāyaṃ, therefore it destroys or ruins life, hence anāyasaṃ. Or, na āyasanti, it does not conduce, hence anāyasaṃ. Paralokenā means similar to hell. For hell, as it is entirely without benefit for beings and is an entirely opposing, hostile world, is called "paraloko" in particular. Because it is entirely made of iron, it is āyasañca (made of iron); however, this is anāyasaṃ (not made of iron) due to the absence of that, showing that it is similar to the next world due to being the place of the arising of great suffering. Some recite it as "anassaya," meaning not a place of refuge for happiness. Luddānamāvāsamidaṃ purāṇaṃ means this place, from a long time ago, has been the abode of cruel pisācas. Abhisattarūpo means like a curse given by ancient seers, "May it be so rough and horrible," like a curse uttered.

1233.Kena vaṇṇenāti kena kāraṇena.Kimāsamānāti kiṃ paccāsīsantā.ti nipātamattaṃ. ‘‘Padesampī’’ti ca paṭhanti, imampi nāma padesanti attho.Sahasā sameccāti sahasā ādīnavānisaṃse avicāretvā samavāyenaanupaviṭṭhāsappaviṭṭhā.Lobhā bhayā atha vākenaci anatthakāmena palobhitā lobhato kenaci amanussādinā paripātitā bhayā vā. Atha vāsampamūḷhāti maggavippanaṭṭhā imaṃ padesaṃ anupaviṭṭhāti yojanā.

1233. Kena vaṇṇenā means for what reason. Kimāsamānā means expecting what. is merely an expletive. Some also recite "padesampī," meaning even this place. Sahasā samecca means suddenly, without considering the disadvantages and advantages, by coincidence anupaviṭṭhā means having entered. Or lobhā bhayā atha vā means enticed by someone wishing harm, out of greed, or driven away by some non-human, out of fear. Or sampamūḷhā means having lost their way, they have entered this place.

Idāni vāṇijā āhaṃsu –

Now, the merchants said –

1234.

1234.

‘‘Magadhesu aṅgesu ca satthavāhā, āropayitvā paṇiyaṃ puthuttaṃ;

"We are merchants from Magadha and Anga,
Having loaded various merchandise;
We are going to the land of Sindhu-Sovira,
Desiring wealth, seeking prosperity."

1235.

1235.

‘‘Divā pipāsaṃnadhivāsayantā, yoggānukampañca samekkhamānā;

"Suppressing our thirst during the day,
And considering the welfare of the yoked animals;
With this speed, we all came,
Having set out on the road at night, at an improper time."

1236.

1236.

‘‘Te duppayātā aparaddhamaggā, andhākulā vippanaṭṭhā araññe;

"They are badly set out, have lost their way, are confused like the blind, lost in the forest;
In the middle of a difficult path, we do not know the direction, our minds are bewildered.

1237.

1237.

‘‘Idañca disvāna adiṭṭhapubbaṃ, vimānaseṭṭhañca tavañca yakkha;

"Having seen this unprecedented thing, the excellent mansion and you, O Yaksha,
Hoping for life beyond that, having seen (you), delighted, happy, and elated."

1234.Tatthamagadhesu aṅgesu ca satthavāhāti magadharaṭṭhe ca aṅgaraṭṭhe ca jātā saṃvaḍḍhā taṃnivāsino satthe satthassa ca vāhanakā satthakā ceva satthasāmikā ca.Paṇiyanti bhaṇḍaṃ.Teti te mayaṃ.Yāmaseti gacchāma.Sindhusovīrabhūminti sindhudesaṃ sovīradesañca.Uddayanti ānisaṃsaṃ atirekalābhaṃ.

1234. Tattha magadhesu aṅgesu ca satthavāhā means, born and raised in the Magadha and Anga countries, residing there, those with a caravan, carriers of a caravan, both caravan merchants and caravan owners. Paṇiya means goods. Te means those, we. Yāmase means we go. Sindhusovīrabhūmi means the Sindh country and the Sovīra country. Uddaya means advantage, additional profit.

1235.Anadhivāsayantāti adhivāsetuṃ asakkontā.Yoggānukampanti goṇādīnaṃ sattānaṃ anuggahaṃ.Etena vegenāti iminā javena, yena tava dassanato pubbe āyāma āgatamha.Rattiṃ maggaṃ paṭipannāti rattiyaṃ maggaṃ paṭipannā.Vikāleti akāle avelāyaṃ.

1235. Anadhivāsayantā means unable to endure. Yoggānukampa means compassion for beings such as cattle. Etena vegenā means with this speed, with which we came before to see you. Rattiṃ maggaṃ paṭipannā means having set out on the road at night. Vikāle means at an improper time, at an inopportune hour.

1236.Duppayātāti duṭṭhu payātā apathe gatā, tato evaaparaddhamaggā. Andhākulāti andhā viya ākulā, maggajānanasamatthassa paññācakkhuno abhāvena andhā, tato eva ākulā,vippanaṭṭhāca maggasammūḷhatāya.Disanti gantabbadisaṃ, yassaṃ disāyaṃ sindhusovīradeso, taṃ disaṃ.Pamūḷhacittāti disāsaṃsayasumūḷhacittā.

1236. Duppayātā means badly gone, gone astray, and therefore aparaddhamaggā, having lost the way. Andhākulā means confused like the blind, blind due to the absence of the eye of wisdom capable of knowing the path, and therefore confused, and vippanaṭṭhā due to delusion about the path. Disaṃ means the direction to be gone, the direction in which the Sindh and Sovīra country is; that direction. Pamūḷhacittā means minds utterly confused about the direction.

1237.Tavañcāti tuvañca.Yakkhāti ālapanaṃ.Tatuttariṃ jīvitamāsamānāti yo ‘‘ito paraṃ amhākaṃ jīvitaṃ natthī’’ti jīvitasaṃsayo uppanno, idāni tato uttarimpi jīvitaṃ āsīsantā.Disvāti dassanahetu.Patītāti pahaṭṭhā.Sumanāti somanassappattā.Udaggāti udaggāya pītiyā udaggacittā.

1237. Tavañcā means and you. Yakkha is a vocative. Tatuttariṃ jīvitamāsamānā means, the doubt about life that arose, thinking "there is no life for us beyond this," now, hoping for life even beyond that. Disvā means because of seeing. Patītā means delighted. Sumanā means having attained joy. Udaggā means with elated joy, with elated minds.

Evaṃ vāṇijehi attano pavattiyā pakāsitāya puna devaputto dvīhi gāthāhi pucchi –

When the merchants had thus revealed their story, the young deva then asked with two verses:

1238.

1238.

‘‘Pāraṃ samuddassa imañca vaṇṇuṃ, vettācaraṃ saṅkupathañca maggaṃ;

"Across the ocean and this path, the Vettācara road, the Saṅkupatha road,
And the rivers and the difficult mountain passes, you go in various directions for the sake of possessions.

1239.

1239.

‘‘Pakkhandiyāna vijitaṃ paresaṃ, verajjake mānuse pekkhamānā;

"Having entered and conquered the land of others, looking at foreigners in outlying territories,
Whatever you have heard or seen, tell us something wonderful, fathers."

pāraṃ samuddassāti samuddassa paratīraṃ,imañcaīdisaṃ,vaṇṇuṃvaṇṇupathaṃ vettalatā bandhitvā ācaritabbatovettācaraṃ maggaṃ,saṅkuke khāṇuke koṭṭetvā gantabbatosaṅkupathaṃmaggaṃ,nadiyo panacandabhāgādikā,pabbatānañcavisamappadesāti evaṃduggā puthuddisābhoganimittaṃgacchatha,evaṃ gacchantā capakkhandiyānapakkhanditvā anupavisitvā,paresaṃrājūnaṃvijitaṃtatthaverajjakevidesavāsikemanusse pekkhamānāgacchatha, evaṃbhūtehivotumhehiyaṃ sutaṃ vā atha vā diṭṭhaṃaccherakaṃacchariyaṃ,taṃ vosantiketātāvāṇijāsuṇomāti attano vimānassa acchariyabhāvaṃ tehi kathāpetukāmo pucchati.

pāraṃ samuddassāti means the far shore of the ocean, imañca means such, vaṇṇuṃ means the path, vettācaraṃ maggaṃ means the path which must be traversed binding the cane creepers, saṅkupathaṃ means the path to be gone making stakes in the stake forests, nadiyo pana means the Candabhāga and others, pabbatānañca means uneven places; thus, duggā puthuddisā means you go in various difficult directions for the sake of possessions, and while going thus, pakkhandiyāna means having entered and conquered, paresaṃ means of other kings, vijitaṃ means in that, verajjake means in foreign lands, manusse pekkhamānā means you go looking at people, vo means by you, yaṃ sutaṃ vā atha vā diṭṭhaṃ means whatever is heard or seen, accherakaṃ means wonderful, taṃ vo means from you, near you, tātā means O merchants, suṇomā means we will hear; desiring to make them speak of the wondrous nature of his mansion, he asks.

Evaṃ devaputtena puṭṭhā vāṇijā āhaṃsu –

Having been asked thus by the young deva, the merchants said:

1240.

1240.

‘‘Itopi accherataraṃ kumāra, na no sutaṃ vā atha vāpi diṭṭhaṃ;

"More wonderful than this, O youth, we have neither heard nor seen;
Everything is beyond human ability; having seen the unique beauty, we are not satiated.

1241.

1241.

‘‘Vehāyasaṃ pokkharañño savanti, pahūtamalyā bahupuṇḍarīkā;

"From the sky flow lotus ponds, full of lotuses and many white lotuses;
And these trees are always laden with fruit, emitting an exceedingly fragrant scent.

1242.

1242.

‘‘Veḷūriyathambhā satamussitāse, silāpavāḷassa ca āyataṃsā;

"Pillars of beryl are a hundred ussa high, and spans of rock and coral;
Pillars of sapphire, of red gold, these pillars are made of radiant essence.

1243.

1243.

‘‘Sahassathambhaṃ atulānubhāvaṃ, tesūpari sādhumidaṃ vimānaṃ;

"Upon those thousand pillars of incomparable power is this beautiful mansion;
Interspersed with jewels, mixed with golden terraces, well-covered with plates of gold.

1244.

1244.

‘‘Jambonaduttattamidaṃ sumaṭṭho, pāsādasopānaphalūpapanno;

"This is made of refined Jāmbunada gold, well-polished, endowed with palace stairways and platforms;
Strong and beautiful and well-constructed, exceedingly pleasing and delightful to behold.

1245.

1245.

‘‘Ratanantarasmiṃ bahuannapānaṃ, parivārito accharāsaṅgaṇena;

"Within the jewels is much food and drink, surrounded by a host of celestial nymphs;
Resounding with the sound of drums, cymbals, and musical instruments, you are honored with hymns of praise and adoration.

1246.

1246.

‘‘So modasi nārigaṇappabodhano, vimānapāsādavare manorame;

"You rejoice, awakened by a host of women, in a delightful, excellent palace mansion;
Inconceivable, endowed with all virtues, like King Vessavaṇa in Naḷinī.

1247.

1247.

‘‘Devo nu āsi udavāsi yakkho,

"Are you a deva, or are you a yaksha,
Or are you Devinda, a human being?
The merchants, the caravan leaders, ask you,
Declare, what is your name, O Yaksha?"

1240-2.Tatthakumārāti paṭhamavaye ṭhitattā devaputtaṃ ālapati.Sabbanti devaputtaṃ tassa vimānapaṭibaddhañca sandhāya vadati.Pokkharaññoti pokkharaṇiyo.Satamussitāseti sataratanubbedhā.Silāpavāḷassāti silāya pavāḷassa ca, silāmayā pavāḷamayāti attho.Āyataṃsāti dīghaṃsā. Atha vā āyatā hutvā aṭṭhasoḷasadvattiṃsādiaṃsavanto.

1240-2. Kumārā means addressing the young deva, because he is in his first youth. Sabbaṃ means speaking with reference to the young deva and his mansion. Pokkharañño means lotus ponds. Satamussitāse means a hundred ratana high. Silāpavāḷassā means of rock and of coral, meaning made of rock and made of coral. Āyataṃsā means long spans. Or else, having become long, having spans of eight, sixteen, thirty-two, etc.

1242.Tesūparīti tesaṃ thambhānaṃ upari.Sādhumidanti sundaraṃ idaṃ tava vimānaṃ.Ratanantaranti ratanantaravantaṃ, bhittithambhasopānādīsu nānāvidhehi aññehi ratanehi yuttaṃ.Kañcanavedimissanti suvaṇṇamayāya vedikāya sahitaṃ parikkhittaṃ.Tapanīyapaṭṭehi ca sādhuchannanti tapanīyamayehi anekaratanamayehi ca chadanehi tattha tattha suṭṭhu chāditaṃ.

1242. Tesūparī means above those pillars. Sādhumidaṃ means this your mansion is beautiful. Ratanantaraṃ means having various jewels, endowed with various kinds of jewels on the walls, pillars, stairways, etc. Kañcanavedimissaṃ means surrounded by a golden terrace. Tapanīyapaṭṭehi ca sādhuchannaṃ means well-covered in various places with coverings made of gold and various jewels.

1244.Jambonaduttattamidanti idaṃ tava vimānaṃ yebhuyyena uttattajambunadabhāsuraṃ.Sumaṭṭho pāsādasopānaphalūpapannoti tassa ca so so padeso sumaṭṭho suṭṭhu majjito, tehi tehi anantarapāsādehi sopānavisesehi ramaṇīyehi phalakehi ca yutto.Daḷhoti thiro.Vaggūti abhirūpo samuggato.Susaṅgatoti suṭṭhu saṅgatāvayavo aññamaññānurūpapāsādāvayavo.Atīva nijjhānakhamoti pabhassarabhāvepi ativiya olokanakkhamo.Manuññoti manoramo.

1244. Jambonaduttattamidaṃ means this your mansion is mostly radiant with the glow of refined Jāmbunada gold. Sumaṭṭho pāsādasopānaphalūpapanno means that particular place is well-polished, endowed with beautiful palaces, special stairways, and delightful platforms. Daḷho means strong. Vaggū means beautiful, well-formed. Susaṅgato means well-arranged parts, the parts of the palace corresponding with each other. Atīva nijjhānakhamo means even in its brilliance, it is very fit to be gazed upon. Manuñño means delightful.

1245.Ratanantarasminti ratanamaye, ratanabhūte vā sārabhūte vimānassa abbhantare.Bahuannapānanti pesalaṃ pahūtaṃ annañca pānañca vijjati, upalabbhatīti adhippāyo.Murajaālambaratūriyaghuṭṭhoti mudiṅgānaṃ ālambarānaṃ avasiṭṭhatūriyānañca saddehi niccaghosito.Abhivanditosīti namassito, thomito vā asi. Tenāha‘‘thūtivandanāyā’’ti.

1245. Ratanantarasmiṃ means in the jewel-made, jewel-like, or essential interior of the mansion. Bahuannapānaṃ means choice, abundant food and drink exist, are available, is the meaning. Murajaālambaratūriyaghuṭṭho means constantly resounding with the sounds of mudiṅga drums, cymbals, and other musical instruments. Abhivanditosī means you are honored, praised. Therefore he says, ‘‘thūtivandanāyā’’.

1246.Acintiyoti acinteyyānubhāvo.Naḷinyāti evaṃnāmake kīḷanaṭṭhāne yathā vessavaṇo mahārājā, evaṃ tvaṃ modasīti yojanā.

1246. Acintiyo means having inconceivable power. Naḷinyā means just as Mahārāja Vessavaṇa (rejoices) in a pleasure garden named Nalinī, so you rejoice; such is the connection.

1247.Āsīti asi bhavasi.Devindoti sakko devarājā.Manussabhūtoti manussesu bhūto manussajātiko.Yakkhoti devādibhāvaṃ pucchitvāpi yakkhabhāvaṃ āsaṅkantā vadanti.

1247. Āsī means you are, you become. Devindo means Sakka, king of the devas. Manussabhūto means born among humans, of human origin. Yakkho means having questioned about being a deva, etc., they speak suspecting the state of a yaksha.

Idāni so devaputto attānaṃ jānāpento –

Now, that young deva, making himself known:

1248.

1248.

‘‘Serīsako nāma ahamhi yakkho, kantāriyo vaṇṇupathamhi gutto;

"I am a Yaksha named Serīsaka, a Kantāriya, protected in the wilderness;
I guard this region, a word-bearer of King Vessavaṇa."

ahamhī yakkhoti ahaṃ yakkho amhi.Kantāriyoti ārakkhaṇatthaṃ kantāre niyutto.Guttoti gopako. Tenāha‘‘abhipālayāmī’’ti.

ahamhī yakkho means I am a Yaksha. Kantāriyo means appointed in the wilderness for protection. Gutto means a protector. Therefore he says, ‘‘abhipālayāmī’’ meaning I guard.

Idāni vāṇijā tassa kammādīni pucchantā āhaṃsu –

Now, the merchants, asking about his deeds, etc., said:

1249.

1249.

‘‘Adhiccaladdhaṃ pariṇāmajaṃ te, sayaṃkataṃ udāhu devehi dinnaṃ;

"Was this obtained by chance, transformed, self-made, or given by the devas?
The merchants, the caravan leaders, ask you, how was this delightful thing obtained by you?"

adhiccaladdhanti adhiccasamuppattikaṃ, yadicchakaṃ laddhanti attho.Pariṇāmajaṃ teti niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇataṃ, kālapariṇataṃ vā.Sayaṃkatanti tayā sayameva kataṃ, deviddhiyā tayā sayameva nibbattitanti attho.Udāhu devehi dinnanti tayā ārādhitehi devehi pasādavasena nissaṭṭhaṃ.

adhiccaladdhaṃ means arising by chance, obtained accidentally, is the meaning. Pariṇāmajaṃ te means transformed by destiny, or transformed by time. Sayaṃkataṃ means made by yourself, produced by yourself through divine power, is the meaning. Udāhu devehi dinnaṃ means given by the devas who were pleased by your worship.

Idāni devaputto caturopi pakāre paṭikkhipitvā puññameva apadisanto –

Now, the young deva, rejecting even the four possibilities, declaring only merit:

1250.

1250.

‘‘Nādhiccaladdhaṃ na pariṇāmajaṃ me, na sayaṃkataṃ na hi devehi dinnaṃ;

"It was not obtained by chance, nor transformed, not self-made, nor given by the devas;
By my own deeds, without evil, by merit was this delightful thing obtained by me."

Gāthamāha.

He spoke the verse.

Taṃ sutvā vāṇijā puna ‘‘nādhiccaladdha’’nti gāthāyaṃ puññādhikameva te caturo pakāre āropetvā puññassa ca sarūpaṃ pucchiṃsu –

Having heard that, the merchants, as in the verse "nādhiccaladdhaṃ," attributing the four possibilities entirely to merit, then asked about the nature of merit:

1251.

1251.

‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko;

"What is your vow, what is your holy life? What is the result of whose good conduct?
The merchants, the caravan leaders, ask you, how was this mansion obtained by you?"

vatanti vatasamādānaṃ.Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhacariyaṃ.

Vataṃ means undertaking a vow. Brahmacariyaṃ means the best conduct.

Puna devaputto te paṭikkhipitvā attānaṃ yathūpacitaṃ puññañca dassento –

Again, the young deva, rejecting them, showing himself and the merit he had accumulated:

1252.

1252.

‘‘Mamaṃ pāyāsīti ahu samaññā, rajjaṃ yadā kārayiṃ kosalānaṃ;

"My name was Mamaṃpāyāsī when I ruled the kingdom of the Kosalans;
I was then a nihilistic, miserly, evil-minded person, and an annihilationist.

1253.

1253.

‘‘Samaṇo ca kho āsi kumārakassapo, bahussuto cittakathī uḷāro;

"But there was a Samana named Kumārakassapa, learned, eloquent, and noble;
He then spoke Dhamma to me, dispelling my thorny views.

1254.

1254.

‘‘Tāhaṃ tassa dhammakathaṃ suṇitvā, upāsakattaṃ paṭivedayissaṃ;

"Having heard his Dhamma, I declared myself a lay follower;
I abstained from killing, I avoided taking what was not given in the world;
I did not drink alcohol, nor did I speak falsely, and I was content with my own wife.

1255.

1255.

‘‘Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko;

"That is my vow, that is my holy life; this is the result of that good conduct;
By those deeds, without evil, by merit was this mansion obtained by me."

Āha. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.

He spoke. That is very easy to understand.

Atha vāṇijā devaputtaṃ vimānañcassa paccakkhato disvā kammaphalaṃ saddahitvā attano kammaphale saddhaṃ pavedentā –

Then the merchants, having seen the young deva and his mansion directly, having faith in the result of deeds, declaring faith in their own results of deeds:

1256.

1256.

‘‘Saccaṃ kirāhaṃsu narā sapaññā, anaññathā vacanaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ;

"Truly, wise men have said, the words of the learned are not otherwise;
Wherever a meritorious person goes, there he rejoices, fulfilling his desires.

1257.

1257.

‘‘Yahiṃ yahiṃ sokapariddavo ca, vadho ca bandho ca parikkileso;

"Wherever there is sorrow and lamentation, killing and bondage and torment,
There a sinful person goes, and he is never released from a bad state."

sokapariddavoti soko ca paridevo ca.Parikkilesoti vuttā anatthuppatti.

sokapariddavo means sorrow and lamentation. Parikkileso means the arising of stated misfortune.

Evaṃ tesu kathentesuyeva vimānadvāre sirīsarukkhato paripākena muttabandhanā paripakkā sipāṭikā pati, tena devaputto saparijano domanassappatto ahosi. Taṃ disvā vāṇijā –

While they were speaking thus, a ripe sipāṭikā fruit, loosened from its stem by ripening, fell from a sirīsa tree at the mansion door; because of that, the young deva and his retinue became dejected. Seeing that, the merchants:

1258.

1258.

‘‘Sammūḷharūpova jano ahosi, asmiṃ muhutte kalalīkatova;

"The people became as if confused, as if liquefied in that moment;
What is the cause of this unhappiness for these people of yours and for you, O youth?"

sammūḷharūpovāti sokavasena sabbaso mūḷhasabhāvo viya.Janoti devajano.Asmiṃ muhutteti imasmiṃ muhuttamatte.Kalalīkatoti kalalaṃ viya kato, kalalanissitaudakībhūto viya āviloti adhippāyo.Janassimassa tuyhañcāti imassa tava parijanassa tuyhañca.Appaccayoti domanassaṃ.

sammūḷharūpovā means as if their nature was completely confused due to sorrow. Jano means the deva folk. Asmiṃ muhutte means in this very moment. Kalalīkato means made like kalala, as if turned into liquid like the water exuded from kalala, turbid, is the meaning. Janassimassa tuyhañcā means for this retinue of yours and for you. Appaccayo means dejection.

Taṃ sutvā devaputto –

Having heard that, the young deva:

1259.

1259.

‘‘Ime ca sirīsavanā tātā, dibbā gandhā surabhī sampavanti;

"These sirīsa groves, fathers, emit divine and fragrant scents;
They waft this fragrance to this mansion, dispelling darkness day and night.

1260.

1260.

‘‘Imesañca kho vassasataccayena, sipāṭikā phalati ekamekā;

"Of these (trees), one sipāṭikā fruit ripens every three hundred years;
A hundred human years have passed since I came to this body here.

1261.

1261.

‘‘Disvānahaṃ vassasatāni pañca,

“Having seen five hundred years, dear ones, I have lived in this mansion; at the end of my lifespan, at the exhaustion of my merit, I will pass away, and by that very sorrow am I overcome,” he said.

1256.Tatthasirīsavanāti sirīsavipinato.Tātāti vāṇije ālapati. Ime tumhākaṃ mayhañca paccakkhabhūtādibbā gandhā surabhīativiya sugandhāyeva samantatopavantipavāyanti. Te dibbā gandhā evaṃ vāyantāimaṃ vimānaṃ sampavāyantisammadeva gandhaṃ gāhāpenti, na kevalaṃ sampavāyanameva, atha kho attano pabhāya tamampi nihanti. Tenāha‘‘divā ca ratto ca tamaṃ nihantvā’’ti.

1256.Here, sirīsavanā means sirīsa forest. Tātā is an address to the merchants. These divine fragrances, directly perceived by you and me, are fragrant, exceedingly fragrant, and waft all around. These divine fragrances, thus wafting, permeate this mansion, thoroughly imbuing it with fragrance, and not only do they permeate, but they also dispel the darkness by their own radiance. Therefore he said, "day and night, having dispelled the darkness."

1260-61.Imesanti sirīsānaṃ.Sipāṭikāti phalakuṭṭhilikā.Phalatīti paccitvā vaṇṭato muccati, puṭabhedaṃ vā patvā sissati.Mānussakaṃ vassasataṃ atītanti yasmā vassasatassa accayena imassa sirīsassa sipāṭikā phalati, ayañca phalitā, tasmā mayhaṃ mānussakaṃ vassasataṃ atītaṃ.Yadaggeyato paṭṭhāya,kāyamhi idhaimasmiṃ devanikāyeupapannonibbatto. Mayhañca devagaṇanāya pañca vassasatāni āyu, tasmā khīyati me āyūti sokavasena sampamūḷhoti dasseti. Tenāha‘‘disvānahaṃ vassasatāni pañca…pe… teneva sokena pamucchitosmī’’ti.

1260-61.Imesaṃ: of these sirīsa trees. Sipāṭikā: small fruit on the branch. Phalatī: having ripened, it falls from the stem, or bursts open and splits. Mānussakaṃ vassasataṃ atītaṃ: since the sipāṭikā of this sirīsa tree ripens after the passing of a human century, and this has ripened, therefore a human century has passed for me. Yadagge: from when; kāyamhi idha: in this realm of gods; upapanno: reborn. And my lifespan, according to divine reckoning, is five centuries; therefore, he shows that he is overcome with sorrow, thinking, "my life is waning." Therefore he said, "Having seen five hundred years…pe…by that very sorrow am I overcome."

Atha naṃ vāṇijā samassāsento –

Then the merchants, reassuring him:

1262.

1262.

‘‘Kathaṃ nu soceyya tathāvidho so, laddhā vimānaṃ atulaṃ cirāya;

“How should one like you grieve, having obtained an incomparable mansion for so long? Those who have arisen in inferior states, those of little merit, they surely should grieve.”

Āhaṃsu. Tattha yādisehi appāyukehi maraṇaṃ paṭicca socitabbaṃ siyā, tādiso pana evaṃ dibbānubhāvasampanno navutivassasatasahassāyuko kathaṃ nu soceyya, na socitabbamevāti adhippāyo.

They said. There, how should one like you, so endowed with divine power and having a lifespan of ninety hundred thousand years, grieve like those who should be mourned upon death due to their short lives? The intention is that he should not grieve.

Devaputto tattakeneva samassāsetvā tesaṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchanto tesañca upadesaṃ dento –

The young deva, having been reassured by just that much, accepting their words and giving them advice:

1263.

1263.

‘‘Anucchaviṃ ovadiyañca metaṃ, yaṃ maṃ tumhe peyyavācaṃ vadetha;

“It is fitting and instructional for you to speak affectionate words to me; you, dear ones, are protected by me; go safely wherever you wish.”

anucchavinti anucchavikaṃ, tumhākameva taṃ yuttarūpaṃ.Ovadiyañca metanti me mayhaṃ tumhehi ovadiyaṃ ovādavasena vattabbametaṃ.Yaṃyasmā,maṃmayhaṃ,tumhe‘‘kathaṃ nu soceyya’’ntiādināpeyyavācaṃpiyavacanaṃvadetha.Yaṃ vā peyyavācāya vadanaṃ kathanaṃ, taṃ tumhākameva anucchavikanti yojanā. Atha vā yaṃ yasmā tumhe peyyavācaṃ vadetha, tasmā anucchavikaṃ ovadiyañca ovaditabbaṃ ovādānurūpaṃ kātabbañca me mayā kataṃ, kiṃ pana tanti āha‘‘tumhe ca kho tātā’’tiādi. Tatthamayānuguttāti imasmiṃ amanussapariggahe marukantāre yāva kantārātikkamā mayā anuguttā rakkhitā,yenicchakaṃyathārucitena,sotthiṃkhemena,palethagacchathāti attho.

Anucchaviṃ: appropriate; that is fitting for you alone. Ovadiyañca metaṃ: this instruction, this statement by way of advice, is for me by you. Yaṃ: because; maṃ: to me; tumhe: you, with "how should one grieve," etc.; peyyavācaṃ: affectionate speech; vadetha: you speak. Or, the speaking, the uttering of affectionate words, is appropriate for you alone, is the connection. Alternatively, because you speak affectionate words, therefore it is appropriate and should be done by me, in accordance with the advice; but what is that? He says, "Tumhe ca kho tātā" etc. There, mayānuguttā: in this waterless wilderness, protected by me as far as the edge of the wilderness; yenicchakaṃ: as you please; sotthiṃ: safely; paletha: go, is the meaning.

Atha vāṇijā kataññubhāvaṃ pakāsentā –

Then the merchants, expressing their gratitude:

1264.

1264.

‘‘Gantvā mayaṃ sindhusovīrabhūmiṃ, dhanatthikā uddayaṃ patthayānā;

“Having gone to the land of Sindhu-Sovīra, desiring wealth, seeking prosperity; according to our ability, with complete generosity, we shall perform a grand Serīsaka festival.”

yathāpayogāti idāni katapaṭiññānurūpapayogā.Paripuṇṇacāgāti samattacāgā, uḷārassa mahassa pariyattapariccāgā.Mahanti ussavapūjaṃ.

Yathāpayogā: now, according to the effort befitting the promise made. Paripuṇṇacāgā: with complete generosity; great sacrifice for the grand festival. Mahaṃ: festival and worship.

Puna devaputto mahakaraṇaṃ paṭikkhipanto kattabbesu ca te niyojento –

Again, the young deva, rejecting the great undertaking, enjoining them in what should be done:

1265.

1265.

‘‘Mā ceva serīsamahaṃ akattha, sabbañca vo bhavissati yaṃ vadetha;

“Do not perform the Serīsaka festival; everything you say will come to pass for you; avoid evil deeds, and be steadfast in the pursuit of Dhamma.”

yaṃ vadethāti yaṃ tumhe khemena sindhusovīradesapattiṃ tattha ca vipulaṃ uddayaṃ lābhaṃ paccāsīsantā ‘‘gantvā maya’’ntiādīni vadatha.Sabbaṃtaṃvotumhākaṃ tatheva bhavissati, tattha nikkaṅkhā hotha, tumhe pana ito paṭṭhāyapāpāni kammānipāṇātipātādīnivivajjayāthaparivajjetha.Dhammānuyoganti dānādikusaladhammassa anuyuñjanaṃ.Adhiṭṭhahāthāti anusikkhatha idaṃ serīsakamahanti dasseti.

Yaṃ vadetha: what you say, expecting safe passage to the land of Sindhu-Sovīra and abundant prosperity there, with "having gone, we..." etc. Sabbaṃ: all that; vo: to you; will come to pass just as you say; be without doubt about that; but from now on, pāpāni kammāni: evil deeds; killing living beings, etc.; vivajjayātha: avoid. Dhammānuyogaṃ: engaging in meritorious Dhamma such as giving. Adhiṭṭhahātha: train yourselves. He shows this is the Serīsaka festival.

Yaṃ pana upāsakaṃ anuggaṇhanto tesaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaṃ kātukāmo ahosi, tassa guṇaṃ kittetvā taṃ tesaṃ uddisanto imā gāthāyo āha –

Now, praising the virtues of the lay follower, being compassionate towards him, wishing to provide protection for them, he spoke these verses, directing them towards him:

1266.

1266.

‘‘Upāsako atthi imamhi saṅghe, bahussuto sīlavatūpapanno;

“There is a lay follower in this assembly, learned, endowed with virtue, faithful, generous, very kind, discerning, content, wise.

1267.

1267.

‘‘Sañjānamāno na musā bhaṇeyya, parūpaghātāya na cetayeyya;

“Knowing, he would not speak falsely, nor would he intend to harm others; he would not engage in divisive speech that causes dissension; he would speak gentle and friendly words.

1268.

1268.

‘‘Sagāravo sappatisso vinīto, apāpako adhisīle visuddho;

“Respectful, conscientious, disciplined, blameless, purified in higher morality; he supports his mother and father righteously, living a noble life.

1269.

1269.

‘‘Maññe so mātāpitūnaṃ kāraṇā, bhogāni pariyesati na attahetu;

“I think that for the sake of his parents, he seeks wealth, not for his own sake; and upon the passing away of his parents, he will be inclined to renunciation, living the holy life.

1270.

1270.

‘‘Ujū avaṅko asaṭho amāyo, na lesakappena ca vohareyya;

“Upright, not crooked, not deceitful, not hypocritical, nor would he deal with deceptive measures; such a one, doing good deeds, established in the Dhamma, how could he experience suffering?

1271.

1271.

‘‘Taṃkāraṇā pātukatomhi attanā, tasmā dhammaṃ passatha vāṇijāse;

“For that reason, I have manifested myself; therefore, see the Dhamma, O merchants; otherwise, here you would become ashes, blind, confused, lost in the wilderness; association with a good person is easy and exceedingly pleasant.”

1266.Tatthasaṅgheti sattasamūhe.Vicakkhaṇoti tattha tattha kattabbatāya kusalo.Santusitoti santuṭṭho.Mutīmāti kammassakatañāṇādinā idhalokaparalokahitānaṃ munanato mutimā.

1266.There, saṅghe: in the group of beings. Vicakkhaṇo: skilled in what should be done in each case. Santusito: content. Mutīmā: wise, because of knowing the benefits of this world and the next through knowledge of deeds and their results, etc.

1267.Sañjānamāno na musā bhaṇeyyāti sampajānamusā na bhāseyya.Vebhūtikanti sahitānaṃ vinābhāvakaraṇato ‘‘vebhūtika’’nti laddhanāmaṃ pisuṇaṃ,no kareyyana vadeyya.

1267.Sañjānamāno na musā bhaṇeyyā: knowing, he would not speak a conscious lie. Vebhūtikaṃ: divisive speech, having acquired the name "vebhūtika" because it causes separation among those who are united; no kareyya: he would not utter.

1268.Sappatissoti patissayo garuṭṭhāniyesu nivātavuttikattā soraccaṃ, saha patissenāti sappatisso.Adhisīleti upāsakena rakkhitabbaadhisīlasikkhāya.Ariyavuttīti parisuddhavutti.

1268.Sappatisso: conscientious; because of humble conduct towards those deserving of respect, being gentle; one with respect is sappatisso. Adhisīle: in the higher morality to be observed by a lay follower. Ariyavuttī: with a pure way of life.

1269.Nekkhammapoṇoti nibbānaninno.Carissati brahmacariyanti pabbajjaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ carissati.

1269.Nekkhammapoṇo: inclined towards Nibbāna. Carissati brahmacariyaṃ: he will lead the life of a renunciate, the monastic holy life.

1270.Lesakappenāti kappiyalesena.Na ca vohareyyāti māyāsāṭheyyavasena vacanaṃ na nicchāreyya.Dhamme ṭhito kinti labhetha dukkhanti evaṃ vuttanayena dhamme ṭhito dhammacārī samacārī kinti kena pakārena dukkhaṃ labhetha pāpuṇeyya.

1270.Lesakappenā: by deceptive measures. Na ca vohareyyā: he would not utter words with deceit and fraud. Dhamme ṭhito kinti labhetha dukkhaṃ: standing in the Dhamma, in the manner stated, a practitioner of the Dhamma, living righteously, how, in what way, could he obtain suffering?

1271.Taṃkāraṇāti tannimittaṃ tassa upāsakassa hetu.Pātukatomhi attanāti sayameva tumhākaṃ ahaṃ pāturahosiṃ. ‘‘Attāna’’ntipi pāṭho, mama attānaṃ tumhākaṃ pātvākāsinti attho.Tasmāti yasmā ahaṃ dhammaṃ apacāyamāno taṃ rakkhanto tumhepi rakkhāmi, tasmādhammaṃ passathadhammameva caritabbaṃ katvā oloketha.Aññatra teniha bhasmī bhavethāti tena upāsakena vinā ce āgatā, imasmiṃ marukantāre anāthā appaṭisaraṇā bhasmabhāvaṃ gaccheyyātha.Khippamānenāti evaṃ khippantena vambhantena pīḷantena.Lahunti sukaraṃ.Parenāti adhikaṃ, aññena vā. Tasmāsukho have sappurisena saṅgamoti. So hi khantisoracce niviṭṭho kenaci kiñci vuttopi na paṭippharatīti adhippāyo.

1271.Taṃkāraṇā: for that reason; because of that lay follower. Pātukatomhi attanā: I myself have appeared to you. "Attānaṃ" is also a reading, meaning, "I have revealed myself to you." Tasmā: because I, cherishing the Dhamma, protecting him, also protect you; therefore, dhammaṃ passatha: regard the Dhamma as something to be practiced. Aññatra teniha bhasmī bhavethā: if you had come here without that lay follower, in this waterless wilderness, without refuge or protection, you would go to a state of ashes. Khippamānenā: by this quickly oppressing, tormenting. Lahuṃ: easy. Parena: exceedingly, or by another. Therefore, sukho have sappurisena saṅgamo: indeed, association with a good person is pleasant. For he, being established in patience and gentleness, does not retaliate even if something is said to him, is the meaning.

Evaṃ sāmaññato kittitaṃ sarūpato ñātukāmā vāṇijā –

Thus, the merchants, wishing to know him in detail, having been praised in general terms:

1272.

1272.

‘‘Kiṃ nāma so kiñca karoti kammaṃ,

“What is his name? What work does he do? What is his given name? What is his clan? We too wish to see him, O Yakka, by whose compassion you have come here; truly, he is fortunate to whom you are gracious.”

kiṃ nāma soti nāmato so jantu satto ko nāma.Kiñca karoti kammanti kasivaṇijjādīsu kīdisaṃ kammaṃ karoti.Kiṃnāmadheyyanti mātāpitūhi kataṃ pana ‘‘tisso phusso’’tiādīsu tassa kiṃ nāmadheyyaṃ, ‘‘bhaggavo bhāradvājo’’tiādīsu kiṃ vā tassa gottaṃ.Yassa tuvaṃ pihesīti yaṃ tuvaṃ piyāyasi.

Kiṃ nāma so: what is the name of that being, that person by name? Kiñca karoti kammaṃ: what kind of work does he do, among farming, trade, etc.? Kiṃ nāmadheyyaṃ: among "Tissa," "Phussa," etc., what is his name given by his parents, or among "Bhaggava," "Bhāradvāja," etc., what is his clan? Yassa tuvaṃ pihesī: whom you cherish.

Idāni devaputto taṃ nāmagottādivasena dassento –

Now the young deva, showing him by name, clan, etc.:

1273.

1273.

‘‘Yo kappako sambhavanāmadheyyo,

“He is a barber, named Sambhava, a lay follower, living by means of scrapings and gleanings; know him, he is your messenger; do not despise him, he is very kind.”

kappakoti nhāpito.Sambhavanāmadheyyoti sambhavoti evaṃnāmo.Kocchaphalūpajīvīti kocchañca phalañca upanissāya jīvanako. Tattha kocchaṃ nāma āḷakādisaṇṭhāpanatthaṃ kesādīnaṃ ullikhanasādhanaṃ.Pesiyopesanakārako veyyāvaccakaro.

Kappako: a barber. Sambhava nāmadheyyo: named Sambhava. Kocchaphalūpajīvī: one who lives depending on scrapings and gleanings. There, kocchaṃ means a means for scraping hairs, etc., for arranging things like dirt. Pesiyo: one who sends, a helper.

Idāni vāṇijā taṃ sañjānitvā āhaṃsu –

Now the merchants, recognizing him, said:

1274.

1274.

‘‘Jānāmase yaṃ tvaṃ pavadesi yakkha, na kho naṃ jānāma sa edisoti;

“We know him whom you describe, O Yakka, but we did not know that he was like this; we too will honor him, O Yakka, having heard your noble words.”

jānāmaseti yaṃ tvaṃ vadesi, taṃ mayaṃ sarūpato jānāma.Edisoti guṇato pana yathā tayā kittitaṃ, evaṃ edisoti taṃ na kho jānāma, yathā taṃ aviddasunoti adhippāyo.

Jānāmase: we know in detail him whom you describe. Ediso: but we did not know that he was like this in virtue, as described by you; the meaning is that we did not know him to be so virtuous.

Idāni devaputto te attano vimānaṃ āropetvā anusāsanatthaṃ –

Now the young deva, having lifted them into his mansion, for the purpose of instruction:

1275.

‘‘Ye keci imasmiṃ satthe manussā, daharā mahantā athavāpi majjhimā;

“Whatever humans there are in this caravan, young, old, or middle-aged; let them all ascend the mansion, let the miserly see the fruit of merit.”

mahantāti vuḍḍhā.Ālambantūti ārohantu.Kadariyāti maccharino adānasīlā.

Mahantā: old. Ālambantu: let them ascend. Kadariyā: the stingy, the uncharitable.

Idāni pariyosāne cha gāthā dhammasaṅgāhakehi vuttā –

Now, at the conclusion, six verses were spoken by the compilers of the Dhamma:

1276.

1276.

‘‘Te tattha sabbeva ahaṃ pureti, taṃ kappakaṃ tattha purakkhatvā;

“There, all of them, one by one, honoring that barber there, all of them ascended the mansion, like the Masakkasāra of Vāsava.

1277.

1277.

‘‘Te tattha sabbeva ahaṃ pureti, upāsakattaṃ paṭivedayiṃsu;

“There, all of them, one by one, declared themselves lay followers; they abstained from killing living beings, they avoided taking what was not given in the world; they did not drink alcohol, nor did they lie, and they were content with their own spouses.

1278.

1278.

‘‘Te tattha sabbeva ahaṃ pureti, upāsakattaṃ paṭivedayitvā;

“There, all of them, one by one, having declared themselves lay followers; the caravan departed, rejoicing, repeatedly approved by the power of the Yakka.

1279.

1279.

‘‘Gantvāna te sindhusovīrabhūmiṃ, dhanatthikā uddayaṃ patthayānā;

“Having gone to the land of Sindhu-Sovīra, desiring wealth, seeking prosperity; according to their ability, with complete gain, they returned unharmed to Pāṭaliputta.

1280.

1280.

‘‘Gantvāna te saṅgharaṃ sotthivanto, puttehi dārehi samaṅgibhūtā;

“Having gone to the Saṅghārāma safely, united with their children and wives; delighted, rich, happy, pleased, they performed a grand Serīsaka festival; they had a Serīsaka monastery built.

1281.

1281.

‘‘Etādisā sappurisāna sevanā, mahatthikā dhammaguṇāna sevanā;

“Such is the association with good people, of great benefit is the association with virtues of the Dhamma; for the sake of one lay follower, all beings were happy.”

1276.Tatthaahaṃ pureti ahaṃ purimaṃ ahaṃ purimanti ahamahaṃkarāti attho.‘‘Te tattha sabbevā’’ti vatvā puna‘‘sabbeva te’’ti vacanaṃ ‘‘sabbeva te yathā vimānassa āruhane ussukkajātā ahesuṃ, tathā sabbeva taṃ āruhiṃsu, na kassaci āruhane antarāyo ahosī’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Masakkasāraṃ viya vāsavassāti ‘‘masakkasāra’’nti ca tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ vuccati, sabbaṃ vā devabhavanaṃ, idha pana sakkabhavanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘masakkasāraṃ viya vāsavassā’’ti.

1276.There, ahaṃ pure: "I first, I first," is the meaning of "I, one by one." Having said "Te tattha sabbeva", again the saying "sabbeva te" was said to show that "just as all of them were eager to ascend the mansion, so all of them ascended it; there was no obstacle to anyone's ascent." Masakkasāraṃ viya vāsavassa: "Masakkasāra" is said to be the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, or all the deva realms; but here, the palace of Sakka should be understood. Therefore he said, "like the Masakkasāra of Vāsava."

1277-8.Atha te vāṇijā vimānaṃ passitvā pasannacittā tassa devaputtassa ovāde ṭhatvā saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāya tassa ānubhāvena sotthinā icchitaṃ desaṃ agamaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘te tattha sabbevā’’tiādi. Tattha anumato pakkāmi sattho yakkhiddhiyā punappunaṃ anumodamānoti yojanā. Kena pana anumatoti? Yakkhenāti pākaṭoyamattho.

1277-8. Then, those merchants, seeing the palace and with minds full of faith, abiding by the advice of that young deva and being established in the refuges and precepts, by his power, safely reached their desired destination. Therefore, it was said, "They all there..." etc. Here, the meaning is: having been permitted, the caravan departed, repeatedly rejoicing in the yaksha's power. But by whom was permission granted? By the yaksha; this meaning is clear.

1279.Yathāpayogāti yathāajjhāsayaṃ katapayogā.Paripuṇṇalābhāti samiddhalābhā.Akkhatanti anupaddutaṃ pāṭaliputtaṃ.Akkhatanti vā anābādhaṃ anuppīḷaṃ, anantarāyenāti attho.

1279.Yathāpayogā means having made effort according to their inclination. Paripuṇṇalābhā means having complete success. Akkhataṃ means Pāṭaliputta unharmed. Akkhataṃ can also mean without disease, without oppression, without any obstacle.

1280.Saṅgharanti sakaṃ gehaṃ.Sotthivantoti sotthibhāvena yuttā khemino.Ānandītiādīhi catūhi padehi somanassitabhāvameva vadati.Serīsakaṃ te pariveṇaṃ māpayiṃsūti kataññutāya ṭhatvā paṭissavamocanatthañca devaputtassa nāmena serīsakaṃ nāma paricchedavasena veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaṃ pāsādakūṭāgārarattiṭṭhānādisampannaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ dvārakoṭṭhakayuttaṃ āvāsaṃ akaṃsu.

1280.Saṅgharaṃ means one's own house. Sotthivanto means endowed with safety, secure. By the four terms beginning with Ānandī, he speaks only of the state of joyfulness. Serīsakaṃ te pariveṇaṃ māpayiṃsū means, remaining in gratitude and for the purpose of fulfilling their promise, in the name of the young deva, they built a serīsaka dwelling, named so by way of distinction, to be looked at like a veṇī, consisting of a palace, peaked houses, night lodgings, etc., surrounded by a wall and complete with gate towers.

1281.Etādisāti edisī, evaṃ anatthapaṭibāhinī atthasādhikā ca.Mahatthikāti mahāpayojanā mahānisaṃsā.Dhammaguṇānanti aviparītaguṇānaṃ.Ekassasattassa hitatthaṃsabbeva sattāsabbe eva te satthapariyāpannā sattā,sukhitāsukhappattā khemappattāahesuṃ.

1281.Etādisā means of such a kind, thus averting misfortune and accomplishing benefit. Mahatthikā means of great purpose, of great benefit. Dhammaguṇānaṃ means of unfailing virtues. Ekassa sattassa hitatthaṃ sabbeva sattā means all those beings included in that caravan, sukhitā ahesuṃ means were happy, attained happiness, attained security.

Sambhavo pana upāsako pāyāsissa devaputtassa tesañca vāṇijānaṃ vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavattaṃ gāthābandhaṃ sutaniyāmeneva uggahetvā therānaṃ ārocesi. Pāyāsidevaputto āyasmato sambhavattherassa kathesīti apare. Taṃ yasattherappamukhā mahātherā dutiyasaṅgītiyaṃ saṅgahaṃ āropesuṃ. Sambhavo pana upāsako mātāpitūnaṃ accayena pabbajitvā arahatte patiṭṭhāsi.

Sambhava, the lay follower, having learned by heart the verses that arose as replies to questions between the young deva Pāyāsi and those merchants, just as he heard them, announced them to the Theras. Others say that Pāyāsi the deva spoke to the venerable Sambhava Thera. The great Theras, headed by the venerable Yasa, included it in the collection at the Second Council. Sambhava, the lay follower, after the passing away of his parents, went forth and was established in arahantship.

Serīsakavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Serīsaka Palace is finished.

11. Sunikkhittavimānavaṇṇanā
11. The Description of the Sunikkhitta Palace

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānanti sunikkhittavimānaṃ. Tassa kā uppatti? Bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane. Tena samayena āyasmā mahāmoggallāno heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva devacārikaṃ caranto tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ upagato. Tasmiñca khaṇe aññataro devaputto attano vimānadvāre ṭhito āyasmantaṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ disvā sañjātagāravabahumāno upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi.

Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ means the Sunikkhitta Palace. What is its origin? The Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthī in Jeta's Grove. At that time, the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, while wandering on a deva-errand in the manner described earlier, went to the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. At that moment, a certain young deva, standing at the door of his palace, seeing the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, with reverence and great respect arisen, approached him, saluted him with the five-point prostration, raised his joined palms, and stood there.

So kira atīte kassapasammāsambuddhe parinibbute tassa sarīradhātuyo pakkhipitvā yojanike kanakathūpe ca kate catasso parisā kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā gandhapupphadhūpādīhi cetiye pūjaṃ karonti, tattha aññataro upāsako aññesu pupphapūjaṃ katvā gatesu tehi pūjitaṭṭhāne dunnikkhittāni pupphāni disvā tattheva tāni sammadeva ṭhapento sannivesavasena dassanīyaṃ pāsādikaṃ vibhattivisesayuttaṃ pupphapūjaṃ akāsi. Katvā ca pana etaṃ ārammaṇaṃ gaṇhanto satthu guṇe anussaritvā pasannacitto taṃ puññaṃ hadaye ṭhapesi.

It seems that in the past, when Kassapa, the Perfectly Enlightened One, had passed away, after his bodily relics had been placed in a golden stupa of one yojana, the four assemblies, from time to time, approached the cetiya and made offerings with perfumes, flowers, incense, and so on. There, a certain lay follower, after others had offered flowers and left, seeing flowers poorly arranged in the place where they had offered, arranging those right there properly, in an orderly arrangement, made a flower offering that was pleasing to the eye, lovely, and with special distinctions. And having done that, taking that as his object of meditation, recollecting the virtues of the Teacher, with a serene mind, he kept that merit in his heart.

So aparabhāge kālaṃ katvā tasseva kammassa ānubhāvena tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti, mahānubhāvo mahā cassa parivāro ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiñca khaṇe aññataro devaputto…pe… aṭṭhāsī’’ti. Atha naṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno yathāladdhasampattikittanamukhena katasucaritakammaṃ imāhi gāthāhi pucchi –

He, in a later existence, after passing away, by the power of that same action, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven in a golden palace of twelve yojanas. He was of great power, and his retinue was also great. Referring to that, it was said, "At that moment, a certain young deva...pe...stood there." Then the venerable Mahāmoggallāna, in the manner of praising the wealth he had obtained, asked about the meritorious deed he had done with these verses:

1282.

1282.

‘‘Uccamidaṃ maṇithūṇaṃ vimānaṃ, samantato dvādasayojanāni;

"High is this palace with jeweled pillars, twelve yojanas all around;
Seven hundred lofty peaked houses, with veḷuriya pillars and beautiful, delightful roofs.

1283.

1283.

‘‘Tatthacchasi pivasi khādasi ca, dibbā ca vīṇā pavadanti vagguṃ;

"There you eat, drink, and consume, and divine lutes sound sweetly;
Divine flavors, the five strands of sense pleasure are here, and women dance, covered in gold.

1284.

1284.

‘‘Kena tetādiso vaṇṇo, kena te idha mijjhati;

"By what is such radiance yours? By what do you prosper here?
And those riches arise for you, whatever is pleasing to the mind.

1285.

1285.

‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ deva mahānubhāva, manussabhūto kimakāsi puññaṃ;

"I ask you, deva of great power, what merit did you do when you were a human being?
By what are you thus radiant with power, and your complexion shines in all directions?"

Sopi tassa attano katakammaṃ imāhi gāthāhi kathesi. Taṃ dassentā saṅgītikārā āhaṃsu –

He too, with these verses, told him of his own deed. Showing that, the compilers of the Saṅgīti said:

1286.

1286.

‘‘So devaputto attamano, moggallānena pucchito;

"That young deva, delighted, questioned by Moggallāna,
Replied to the question asked, (explaining) whose action this is the fruit."

1287.

1287.

‘‘Dunnikkhittaṃ mālaṃ sunikkhipitvā, patiṭṭhapetvā sugatassa thūpe;

"Having properly arranged a poorly arranged garland, having established (it) on the stupa of the Well-gone,
I am mighty, of great power, endowed with divine pleasures.

1288.

1288.

‘‘Tena metādiso vaṇṇo, tena me idha mijjhati;

"By that such radiance is mine, by that I prosper here;
And those riches arise for me, whatever is pleasing to the mind.

1289.

1289.

‘‘Akkhāmi te bhikkhu mahānubhāva, manussabhūto yamahaṃ akāsiṃ;

"I tell you, bhikkhu of great power, what I did when I was a human being;
By that I am thus radiant with power, and my complexion shines in all directions."

1287.Tatthadunnikkhittaṃ mālanti cetiye pūjākaraṇaṭṭhāne nirantaraṭṭhapanādinā racanāvisesena aṭṭhapetvā yathānikkhittatāya na suṭṭhu nikkhittaṃ, vātena vā paharitvā dunnikkhittaṃ pupphaṃ.Sunikkhipitvāti suṭṭhu nikkhipitvā racanāvisesena dassanīyaṃ pāsādikaṃ katvā nikkhipiya.Patiṭṭhapetvāti vibhattivisesādivasena pupphaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā. Taṃ vā pupphaṃ nikkhipanto satthu cetiyaṃ uddissa mama santāne kusaladhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvāti evaṃ ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

1287. There, dunnikkhittaṃ mālaṃ means a flower that was not well-arranged because it was placed continuously without special arrangement in the place of offering at the cetiya, or a flower that was poorly arranged because the wind had struck it. Sunikkhipitvā means having well-arranged, having arranged in a special manner, having made it pleasing and lovely, having arranged (it). Patiṭṭhapetvā means having established the flower in terms of special distinctions, etc. Or, while arranging that flower, intending for the establishment of skillful qualities in my mind by dedicating (it) to the Teacher's cetiya, thus the meaning should be understood here. The rest is as previously stated.

Evaṃ devaputtena attano sucaritakamme pakāsite thero tassa dhammaṃ desetvā āgantvā bhagavato tamatthaṃ nivedesi. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā sampattamahājanassa dhammaṃ desesi. Desanā mahājanassa sātthikā ahosīti.

In this way, when the young deva had declared his own meritorious deed, the Thera, having taught him the Dhamma, came and reported that matter to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having made that the basis for the occasion, taught the Dhamma to the assembled great crowd. The teaching was fruitful for the great crowd.

Sunikkhittavimānavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Sunikkhitta Palace is finished.

Iti paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya vimānavatthusmiṃ

Thus, in the Paramatthadīpanī, commentary on the Khuddaka Nikāya,

Ekādasavatthupaṭimaṇḍitassa sattamassa

In the Vimanavatthu,

Sunikkhittavaggassa atthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The meaning commentary on the seventh Sunikkhitta Vagga, adorned with eleven stories, is finished.

Niṭṭhitā ca purisavimānavaṇṇanā.

And the description of the Purisa Vimāna is finished.

Nigamanakathā
Concluding Remarks

Ettāvatā ca –

Herewith –

Devatānaṃ vimānādi-sampattiṃ tassa kāraṇaṃ;

Revealing the deva's palace and other wealth, and the cause for that,
Beneficial to beings, bringing good to the whole world.

Appakānampi kārānaṃ, yā vibhāveti desanā;

That teaching which illuminates even small deeds,
To great fruitfulness, due to the combination of mind and the prosperity of the field (of action).

Yaṃ kathāvatthukusalā, supariññātavatthukā;

Those great sages, skilled in the subject of stories, with well-understood subject matter,
Recited precisely this Vimānavatthu.

Tassa atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ, porāṇaṭṭhakathānayaṃ;

To reveal its meaning, relying on the ancient commentary,
The meaning commentary has been begun by me.

Yā tattha paramatthānaṃ, tattha tattha yathārahaṃ;

That which there, of the ultimate meanings, appropriately in each instance,
Is named by name Paramattha-dīpanī.

Sampattā pariniṭṭhānaṃ, anākulavinicchayā;

Having reached completion, with unobstructed discernment,
That, by seventeen measures, (is) of recitational length in the Pali.

Iti taṃ saṅkharontena, yaṃ taṃ adhigataṃ mayā;

Thus, by me, while compiling that, whatever has been attained,
By the power of that merit, may the Teaching of the world's protector,

Ogāhetvā visuddhāya, sīlādipaṭipattiyā;

Having plunged into, by pure practice of virtue and so on,
May all embodied beings be sharers in the flavor of liberation.

Ciraṃ tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, sammāsambuddhasāsanaṃ;

May the Teaching of the Perfectly Enlightened One long endure in the world;
In that, may all living beings always be respectful.

Sammā vassatu kālena, devopi jagatīpati;

May the deva, the lord of the world, rain properly in due season;
Devoted to the true Dhamma, may he govern the world with Dhamma itself.

ācariyadhammapālena

By Ācariya Dhammapāla

Katāya

Made,

Paramatthadīpaniyā khuddaka-aṭṭhakathāya

The Vimanavatthu meaning commentary in the Paramatthadīpanī, commentary on the Khuddaka Nikāya, is finished.

Vimānavatthuatthavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Vimanavatthu commentary is complete.

Vimānavatthu-aṭṭhakathā samattā.